Consulting Aplication Guide

16th Edition
Electrical Sector December 2015
Consulting Application Guide

15 th Edition
Consulting
Application
Guide
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
2011 Eaton Corporation

All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08104001E
September 2011
2015 Consulting Application Guide
October 2015 Contents
Sheet 00 001
i Introduction 22 Panelboards
Technical Lighting Control Systems

Discussion 1 Power Distribution Systems Low 23 Pow-R-Command
Voltage
Power Management Distribution BuswayPow-R-Way III
2 Connectivity & Monitoring Equipment 24 Low Voltage
Power
Management 3 Advanced & Electronic Metering 25 Transfer Switches
Products
Power Circuit Breakers &
Medium Voltage 4 Protective and Predictive Relays 26 Insulated-Case Circuit Breakers
Switchgear Circuit
Selector Guide Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W Breakers Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
5 Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers & Safety 27 & Enclosures
Switches
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Switching Devices
6 Medium Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers 28 Low Voltage
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB Motor Control Centers
7 Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers 29 Low Voltage
Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Motor Starters &
Medium 8 Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch 30 ContactorsLow Voltage
Control
Voltage
Products Adjustable Frequency Drives
Equipment 9 FusesMedium Voltage 31 Low Voltage
Motor Starters (AMPGARD) Control/GF/Current & Voltage Relays
10 Medium Voltage 32 & Pilot Devices
11 BuswayMedium Voltage 33 Uninterruptible Power Supplies
Power Surge Protection (SPD) &

Medium Voltage 12 Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage
Quality 34 Power Conditioning Products
Transformer
Selector Guide Primary Unit Substations Power Factor Capacitors
13 Secondary 1000V & Above 35 & Harmonic Filters
Secondary Unit Substations
14 Secondary Below 1000V 36 Resistance Grounding Systems
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment

15 Unitized Power Centers 37 (No Longer Available)
Unit
Substations & 16 Substation Transformers 38 Coordinated Electrical Houses
Transformers
Solar (PV)
17 Pad-Mounted Transformers 39 Systems Interconnect
Cat Generator Paralleling
18 Spot Network Equipment 40 Switchgear
Distribution Dry-Type Power System Studies
19 TransformersLow Voltage
41 & Field Services
Metal-Enclosed Drawout
Low 20 SwitchgearLow Voltage
Voltage
Distribution
Equipment 21 SwitchboardsLow Voltage
CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

2015 Consulting Application Guide
Copyright October 2015
Sheet 00 002
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
ANSI Voltage Classifications

Please note that in the text of the Consulting Application Guide, the term low voltage
generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and lower. The term medium voltage
generally refers to system voltages of 1000 volts and up to 38 kV.
Terms and Conditions

Individual product list prices are published in Eatons Price and Availability Digest (PAD).
All orders accepted by Eaton are subject to the general terms and conditions as set
forth in Selling Policy SP03000001E.
Technical and Descriptive Publications

This publication contains technical data for the proper selection of many products
and systems. It may not cover all product details and/or application considerations.
Additional information is available in the form of technical information publications
and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your
local Eaton field salesperson or distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website
at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application
in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
CAT, Caterpillar, its respective logos and Caterpillar Yellow, as well as corporate and
product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without
permission.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide
for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton products
distributor or sales office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any
prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eatons Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Copyright 2015 Eaton, All Rights Reserved
For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Introduction i-1
October 2015
Sheet i 001
Welcome New Features of the Consulting i

Welcome to the 16th Edition of the Consulting Application Application Guide16th Edition
Guide. This document is designed to assist an electrical
The 16th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide ii
consultant or a power system design engineer in the layout
contains many new products, services and application-
and specification of equipment. In this expanded edition,
specific information. The Power Distribution Systems tab
you will find complete details on our extensive line of
distribution, control and power quality products and
has been updated, and the entire book has been organized to 1
make it easy to locate items. It is a reference guide that
services. Please be sure to browse the various sections
should be on your bookshelf so that as questions arise, you
to gain a sense of Eatons overall capabilities.
can quickly locate the data and pass it on to your customers 2
The 16th Edition of the Consulting Application Guide is or clients. We have included two brand new sections in this
currently available in electronic format onlyaccessed via edition, one for solar (PV) systems and another dedicated
www.eaton.com/consultants or from our PowerEdge app to electrical vehicle supply equipment. Detailing Eatons 3
available in the Apple app store. We created this guide offering in these areas, these new sections show how Eaton
to make it easy for you to do business with us to and meet is innovating new products to meet the new power and
your various needs. infrastructure demands of the world. 4
Contents Page
Eaton is a Global Leader in Power 5
Similar to the 15th Edition, we have grouped the contents
Distribution, Power Quality, Control page to allow you to easily find products that share similar
and Automation, and Monitoring Products electrical characteristics and/or applications. These
6
groupings include:
At Eaton, we believe that a reliable, efficient and safe power
Power management products
system is the foundation of every successful enterprise.
Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and Medium voltage equipment 7
our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses Unit substations and transformers
around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. Low voltage distribution equipment
8
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining Circuit breakers and safety switches
powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of Control products
excellence. From the products we manufacture to our Power quality products 9
dedicated customer service and support, we know whats
important to you.
10
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems
management with a holistic and strategic approach,
11
leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions
and services. We focus on the following three areas in
all that we do:
12
Reliabilitymaintain the appropriate level of power
continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime 13
Efficiencyminimize energy usage, operating costs,
equipment footprint and environmental impact 14
Safetyidentify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect
what you value most
15
Our new guide shows the breadth of our combined power
distribution, control, quality and management product
offerings. Also included are tabs dedicated to our engineer- 16
ing services operation. You may select with confidence
from the products for residential, commercial and industrial
power distribution and control. While Eaton celebrates its 17
100th year, our heritage is rich with more than 200 years of
innovation and leadership from acquisitions and legendary
brands. This experience has resulted in many innovations 18
in distribution and industrial control productseach
incorporating leading-edge technology to provide the
highest value to our customers. Our engineers and scientists 19
are recognized throughout the industry and around the
world as experts in a wide range of disciplines including:
photoelectric optical technology, arc interruption, vacuum 20
technology, digital and analog electronics, communications
technology and the application of power semiconductors.
21

i-2 Introduction
October 2015
Sheet i 002
i Updated Information Eaton

Currently, the printed 15th edition of the Consulting Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient
Application Guide is currently out of date. Please refer and safe power is available when its needed most. With
ii our website at www.eaton.com/consultants for the most unparalleled knowledge of electrical power management
up-to-date version. You can also access up-to-date informa- across industries, experts at Eaton deliver customized,
tion via our PowerEdge application available on the Apple app integrated solutions to solve our customers most critical
1 store. Also on this page, users will find product spotlights, challenges.
hot topic coverage, technical papers, listings of Launch and
Learn presentations, newsletters and training materials. Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the
2 Please visit this Consultant Resource Page and bookmark application. But, decision makers demand more than
it in your browser. Refer back to this page to stay current on just innovative products. They turn to Eaton for an
Eatons electrical business. unwavering commitment to personal support that makes
3 customer success a top priority. For more information,
visit www.eaton.com/electrical.
Delivering the Promise of Power
4 Through the Power of Information
Theres no doubt about it: Accurate product and application
5 information makes for better decisions, better systems and
satisfied customers. Thats why weve completely revised
and updated the 16th Edition of the Consulting Application
6 Guide. This volume is your point-of-entry, your touchstone
and your guide to the most innovative products and support
services in the business.
7
Comments?
E-mail: marketingsupportEG@eaton.com
8 Or write: Eaton Corporation
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108-4312
9 Attn: Catalog Department
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Power Distribution Systems 1.0-1
April 2016
Sheet 01 001
Power Distribution
Systems
Contents i
Power Distribution Systems Suggested Ground
System Design Fault Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-6 ii
Basic Principles. . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 Grounding/Ground Fault Protection
Modern Electric Power GroundingEquipment,
Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1 System, MV System, 1
Goals of System Design . . . 1.1-2 LV System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-9
Voltage Classifications; BILs Ground Fault Protection . . . . 1.4-11
Basic Impulse Levels . . . . . 1.1-3 Lightning and Surge 2
Three-Phase Transformer Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14
Winding Connections . . . . 1.1-5 Grounding Electrodes . . . . . 1.4-14
Types of SystemsRadial, MV Equipment Surge 3
Loop, Selective, Two-Source, Protection Considerations . 1.4-14
Sparing Transformer, Spot Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-14
Network, Distribution . . . . 1.1-6
4
Types of Surge
Health Care Facility Protection Devices . . . . . . . 1.4-15
Design Considerations . . . 1.1-15 Power Quality 5
Generator Systems . . . . . . 1.1-18 Terms, Technical Overview . . 1.4-18
Generator System Design SPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-19
Types of Generators. . . . . . . 1.2-1 Harmonics and 6
Generator Systems . . . . . . . 1.2-2 Nonlinear Loads . . . . . . . . . 1.4-21
Generator Grounding. . . . . . 1.2-3 UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-25
Generator Controls. . . . . . . . 1.2-4 Other Application Considerations
7
Generator Short-Circuit Secondary Voltage . . . . . . . . 1.4-31
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-4
Generator Protection . . . . . . 1.2-5
Energy Conservation . . . . . . 1.4-32 8
Building Control Systems . . 1.4-33
System Analysis Distributed Energy
Systems Analysis . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33 9
Short-Circuit Currents . . . . . 1.3-2 Cogeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-33
Fault Current Waveform PV System Design
Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-34 10
Fault Current Calculations Emergency Power. . . . . . . . . 1.4-35
and Methods Index . . . . . . 1.3-4 Peak Shaving. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36
Determine X and R from 11
Sound Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-36
Transformer Loss Data . . . 1.3-19
Reference Data
Voltage Drop
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-20
IEEE Protective Relay 12
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-1
System Application Considerations
Codes and Standards . . . . . . 1.5-6
Capacitors and
Motor Protective 13
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
Device Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-7
Overcurrent Protection Chart of Short-Circuit
and Coordination . . . . . . . . 1.4-3 Currents for Transformers . . 1.5-9 14
Protection of Conductors. . . 1.4-5 Transformer Full Load
Circuit Breaker Cable Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-10
Temperature Ratings . . . . . 1.4-5 Impedances Data . . . . . . . . . 1.5-11
15
Zone Selective Interlocking . 1.4-5 Transformer Losses . . . . . . . 1.5-12
Ground Fault Protection . . . 1.4-6 Power Equipment Losses . . . 1.5-13 16
NEMA Enclosure Definitions. . 1.5-13
Cable R, X, Z Data . . . . . . . . . 1.5-15
Conductor Ampacities . . . . . 1.5-17 17
Conductor Temperature
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5-17
Formulas and Terms. . . . . . . 1.5-20
18
Seismic Requirements . . . . . 1.5-21
19
20
Designing a Distribution System
21

1.0-2 Power Distribution Systems
April 2016
Sheet 01 002
This page intentionally left blank.

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 System Design
Sheet 01 003
Basic Principles The basic principles or factors requiring Modern Electric Power i
consideration during design of the
The best distribution system is one power distribution system include: Technologies
that will, cost-effectively and safely,
Functions of structure, present Several new factors to consider in ii
supply adequate electric service to
and future modern power distribution systems
both present and future probable
Life and flexibility of structure result from two relatively recent
loadsthis section is included to aid
in selecting, designing and installing Locations of service entrance and
changes. The first recent change is 1
utility deregulation. The traditional
such a system. distribution equipment, locations
dependence on the utility for problem
and characteristics of loads,
The function of the electric power locations of unit substations
analysis, energy conservation mea- 2
distribution system in a building or surements and techniques, and a
Demand and diversity factors simplified cost structure for electricity
an installation site is to receive power
of loads
at one or more supply points and
Sources of power; including
has changed. The second change is less 3
to deliver it to the individual lamps, obvious to the designer yet will have
motors and all other electrically normal, standby and emergency an impact on the types of equipment
operated devices. The importance (see Tab 40) and systems being designed. It is the 4
of the distribution system to the Continuity and quality of diminishing quantity of qualified build-
function of a building makes it almost power available and required ing electrical operators, maintenance
imperative that the best system be (see Tab 33) departments and facility engineers. 5
designed and installed. Energy efficiency and management Modern electric power technologies
In order to design the best distribution Distribution and utilization voltages may be of use to the designer and
system, the system design engineer Bus and/or cable feeders building owner in addressing these
6
must have information concerning the Distribution equipment and new challenges. The advent of micro-
loads and a knowledge of the various processor devices (smart devices)
types of distribution systems that are
motor control
into power distribution equipment has
7
Power and lighting panelboards
applicable. The various categories of expanded facility owners options and
and motor control centers
capabilities, allowing for automated
buildings have many specific design
challenges, but certain basic principles Types of lighting systems communication of vital power system
8
are common to all. Such principles, Installation methods information (both energy data and
system operation information) and
if followed, will provide a soundly Power monitoring systems
electrical equipment control.
9
executed design. Electric utility requirements
These technologies may be grouped as:
10
Power monitoring and control
Building management systems
interfaces 11
Lighting control
Automated energy management
12
Predictive diagnostics
Various sections of this guide cover
the application and selection of such 13
systems and components that may be
incorporated into the power equipment
being designed. See Tabs 2, 3, 4, 23 14
and 41.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

System Design April 2016
Sheet 01 004
i Goals of System Design 2. Minimum Initial Investment: 4. Maximum Flexibility and

The owners overall budget for Expendability: In many industrial
When considering the design of an first cost purchase and installation manufacturing plants, electrical
electrical distribution system for of the electrical distribution sys- utilization loads are periodically
ii a given customer and facility, the tem and electrical utilization relocated or changed requiring
electrical engineer must consider equipment will be a key factor changes in the electrical distribu-
alternate design approaches that in determining which of various tion system. Consideration of
1 best fit the following overall goals. alternate system designs are to be the layout and design of the
selected. When trying to minimize electrical distribution system to
1. Safety: The No. 1 goal is to design initial investment for electrical accommodate these changes must
2 a power system that will not equipment, consideration should be considered. For example, pro-
present any electrical hazard to be given to the cost of installation, viding many smaller transformers
the people who use the facility, floor space requirements and or loadcenters associated with a
3 and/or the utilization equipment possible extra cooling require- given area or specific groups of
fed from the electrical system. ments as well as the initial machinery may lend more flexibility
It is also important to design a purchase price. for future changes than one large
4 system that is inherently safe for transformer; the use of plug-in
the people who are responsible for 3. Maximum Service Continuity: busways to feed selected equip-
electrical equipment maintenance The degree of service continuity ment in lieu of conduit and wire
5 and upkeep. and reliability needed will vary may facilitate future revised
depending on the type and use equipment layouts.
The National Electrical Code of the facility as well as the loads
6 (NEC), NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E, or processes being supplied by the In addition, consideration must be
as well as local electrical codes, electrical distribution system. For given to future building expansion,
provide minimum standards and example, for a smaller commercial and/or increased load require-
7 requirements in the area of wiring office building, a power outage ments due to added utilization
design and protection, wiring of considerable time, say several equipment when designing the
methods and materials, as well hours, may be acceptable, whereas electrical distribution system.
8 as equipment for general use with in a larger commercial building or In many cases considering trans-
the overall goal of providing safe industrial plant only a few minutes formers with increased capacity
electrical distribution systems may be acceptable. In other facilities or fan cooling to serve unexpected
9 and equipment. such as hospitals, many critical loads as well as including spare
The NEC also covers minimum loads permit a maximum of additional protective devices and/
requirements for special 10 seconds outage and certain or provision for future addition of
10 occupancies including hazardous loads, such as real-time computers, these devices may be desirable.
locations and special use type cannot tolerate a loss of power for Also to be considered is increasing
facilities such as health care even a few cycles. appropriate circuit capacities or
11 facilities, places of assembly, Typically, service continuity and
quantities for future growth.
theaters and the like, and the reliability can be increased by: Power monitoring communication
equipment and systems located in systems connected to electronic
12 these facilities. Special equipment A. Supplying multiple utility power metering can provide the trending
and special conditions such as sources or services. and historical data necessary for
emergency systems, standby
13 systems and communication
B. Supplying multiple connection future capacity growth.
paths to the loads served.
systems are also covered in
the code. C. Using short-time rated power
14 circuit breakers.
It is the responsibility of the design
engineer to be familiar with the D. Providing alternate customer-
15 NFPA and NEC code requirements owned power sources such as
as well as the customers facility, generators or batteries supplying
process and operating procedures; uninterruptable power supplies.
16 to design a system that protects
personnel from live electrical E. Selecting the highest quality elec-
conductors and uses adequate trical equipment and conductors.
17 circuit protective devices that will F. Using the best installation methods.
selectively isolate overloaded or
faulted circuits or equipment as G. Designing appropriate system
18 quickly as possible. alarms, monitoring and diagnostics.
H. Selecting preventative mainte-
19 nance systems or equipment to
alarm before an outage occurs.
20
21

Sheet 01 005
5. Maximum Electrical Efficiency 7. Maximum Power Quality: Coupled with this information, a
(Minimum Operating Costs): The power input requirements knowledge of the major types of electric i
Electrical efficiency can generally of all utilization equipment has power distribution systems equips the
be maximized by designing to be considered including the engineers to arrive at the best system
systems that minimize the losses acceptable operating range of design for the particular building. ii
in conductors, transformers and the equipment and the electrical
utilization equipment. Proper distribution system has to be It is beyond the scope of this guide to
voltage level selection plays a designed to meet these needs. present a detailed discussion of loads 1
key factor in this area and will For example, what is the required that might be found in each of several
be discussed later. Selecting input voltage, current, power types of buildings. Assuming that the
equipment, such as transformers, factor requirement? Consider- design engineer has assembled the 2
with lower operating losses, ation to whether the loads are necessary load data, the following
generally means higher first cost affected by harmonics (multiples pages discuss some of the various
and increased floor space require- of the basic 60 Hz sine wave) or types of electrical distribution systems 3
ments; thus, there is a balance generate harmonics must be taken that can be used. The description of
to be considered between the into account as well as transient types of systems, and the diagrams
owners utility energy change voltage phenomena. used to explain the types of systems 4
for the losses in the transformer on the following pages omits the
or other equipment versus the The above goals are interrelated location of utility revenue metering
owners first cost budget and and in some ways contradictory. equipment for clarity. A discussion of 5
cost of money. As more redundancy is added to short-circuit calculations, coordination,
the electrical system design along voltage selection, voltage drop, ground
6. Minimum Maintenance Cost: with the best quality equipment fault protection, motor protection and 6
Usually the simpler the electrical to maximize service continuity, other specific equipment protection
system design and the simpler flexibility and expandability, and is also presented.
the electrical equipment, the less power quality, the more initial 7
the associated maintenance costs investment and maintenance
and operator errors. As electrical are increased. Thus, the designer
Voltage Classifications
systems and equipment become must weigh each factor based ANSI and IEEE standards define 8
more complicated to provide on the type of facility, the loads various voltage classifications for
greater service continuity or to be served, the owners past single-phase and three-phase systems.
flexibility, the maintenance costs experience and criteria. The terminology used divides voltage 9
and chance for operator error classes into:
increases. The systems should be Summary
designed with an alternate power It is to be expected that the engineer Low voltage 10
circuit to take electrical equipment will never have complete load infor- Medium voltage
(requiring periodic maintenance) mation available when the system is High voltage
out of service without dropping designed. The engineer will have to Extra-high voltage
11
essential loads. Use of drawout expand the information made avail-
type protective devices such as Ultra-high voltage
able to him on the basis of experience
breakers and combination starters with similar problems. Of course, it Table 1.1-1 presents the nominal system
12
can also minimize maintenance is desirable that the engineer has as voltages for these classifications.
cost and out-of-service time. much definite information as possible
Utilizing sealed equipment in concerning the function, requirements,
13
lieu of ventilated equipment may and characteristics of the utilization
minimize maintenance costs and devices. The engineer should know
out-of-service time as well. whether certain loads function
14
separately or together as a unit, the
magnitude of the demand of the loads
viewed separately and as units, the rated
15
voltage and frequency of the devices,
their physical location with respect
to each other and with respect to the
16
source and the probability and possi-
bility of the relocation of load devices 17
and addition of loads in the future.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 006
Table 1.1-1. Standard Nominal System Table 1.1-4. Pad Mounted and Overhead Table 1.1-6. Dry-Type Transformers Voltage
i Voltages and Voltage Ranges Distribution Switchgear, Voltage and and Basic Lightning Impulse Insulation
(From IEEE Standard 141-1993) Insulation Levels Levels (BIL)From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01-1998)
Voltage Nominal System Voltage Rated Maximum Impulse Nominal BIL (kV Crest) 2
ii Class Three-Wire Four-Wire Voltage Level (kV rms) Withstand (kV) System
Pad Mount Switchgear (per IEEE C37.74-2014) Voltage
Low 240/120 208Y/120 (kV rms)
15.5 95
1 voltage 240
480
240/120
480Y/277
27 125 1.2 10 20 30
38 150 2.5 20 30 45
600
Overhead Switchgear (per IEEE C37.60-2012) 5.0 30 45 60
2 Medium
voltage
2400
4160
4160Y/2400
8320Y/4800 15 95
8.7 45 60 95
4800 12000Y/6930 15.5 110 15.0 60 95 110

6900 12470Y/7200 27 125 25.0 95 3 110 125 150
3 13,200 13200Y/7620 38 150
34.5 125 3 150 200
13,800 13800Y/7970 2 BIL values in bold typeface are listed as
38 170
23,000 20780Y/12000 standard. Others listed are in common use.
4 34,500
46,000
22860Y/13200
24940Y/14400 Table 1.1-5. Liquid-Immersed
Optional higher levels used where exposure
to overvoltage occurs and higher protection
69,000 34500Y/19920 Transformers Voltage and Basic margins are required.
High 115,000
Lightning Impulse Insulation Levels (BIL) 3 Lower levels where surge arrester
5 voltage 138,000 (From ANSI/IEEE C57.12.00) protective devices can be applied with
161,000 Applica- Nominal BIL lower spark-over levels.
230,000 tion System (kV Crest) 1
6 Extra-high 345,000 Voltage Voltage Recommendations by
voltage 500,000 (kV rms)
765,000
Motor Horsepower
Distribu- 1.2 30
7 Ultra-high 1,100,000 tion 2.5 45
Some factors affecting the selection
voltage 5.0 60
of motor operating voltage include:
8.7 75 Motor, motor starter and cable
8 BILBasic Impulse Levels 15.0 95 first cost
25.0 150 125
ANSI standards define recommended Motor, motor starter and cable
and required BIL levels for: 34.5 200 150 125
9 46.0 250 200
installation cost
Metal-clad switchgear 69.0 350 250 Motor and cable losses
(typically vacuum breakers) Power 1.2 45 30 Motor availability
10 Metal-enclosed switchgear (typically 2.5 60 45
Voltage drop
5.0 75 60
load interrupters, switches) Qualifications of the building
8.7 95 75
Pad-mounted and overhead operating staff; and many more
11 distribution switchgear
15.0 110 95
25.0 150
The following table is based in part
Liquid immersed transformers 34.5 200
on the above factors and experience.
12 Dry-type transformers 46.0
69.0
250
350
200
250

Because all the factors affecting the
Table 1.1-2 through Table 1.1-6 contain 115.0 550 450 350
selection are rarely known, it is only
an approximate guideline.
13 those values. 138.0
161.0
650
750
550
650
450
550
Table 1.1-2. Metal-Clad Switchgear Table 1.1-7. Selection of Motor Horsepower
230.0 900 825 750 650 Ratings as a Function of System Voltage
Voltage and Insulation Levels 345.0 1175 1050 900
14 (From IEEE Std. C37.20.2-2015) 500.0 1675 1550 1425 1300 Motor Voltage Motor System
765.0 2050 1925 1800 (Volts) hp Range Voltage
Rated Maximum Impulse
Voltage (kV rms) Withstand (kV) 1 BIL values in bold typeface are listed as
15 standard. Others listed are in common use.
460
2300
up to 500
250 to 2000
480
2400
4.76 60 4000 250 to 3000 4160
8.25 95
4600 250 to 3000 4800
16 15.0 95
13,200 above 2000 13,800
27.0 125
38.0 150
17 Table 1.1-3. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Voltage and Insulation Levels
18 (From IEEE Std. C37.20.3-2013)
Rated Maximum Impulse
Voltage (kV rms) Withstand (kV)
19 4.76 60
8.25 95
15.0 95
20 27.0 125
38.0 150
21

Sheet 01 007
Table 1.1-7. Three-Phase Transformer Winding Connections

Phasor Notes i
Diagram
DELTA-DELTA Connection 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. ii
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
Phasor H2 X2
Diagram:
1
H1 H3 X1 X3 2
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 0
DELTA-WYE Connection 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources. 3
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire grounded service with
Phasor H2 X2 XO grounded.
Diagram:
3. With XO grounded, the transformer acts as a ground source for the 4
secondary system.
X1 X0
4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary
H1 H3
lines supplied by the transformer do not flow in the primary lines. Instead the 5
X3 zero sequence currents circulate in the closed delta primary windings.
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 30 5. When supplied from an effectively grounded primary system does not see load
unbalances and ground faults in the secondary system. 6
WYE-DELTA Connection 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire delta service with a mid-tap ground.
Phasor
Diagram:
H2 X2 3. Grounding the primary neutral of this connection would create a ground source 7
for the primary system. This could subject the transformer to severe overloading
during a primary system disturbance or load unbalance.
X1
4. Frequently installed with mid-tap ground on one leg when supplying 8
combination three-phase and single-phase load where the three-phase
H1 H3 load is much larger than single-phase load.
X3
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 30 5. When used in 25 kV and 35 kV three-phase four-wire primary systems,
ferroresonance can occur when energizing or de-energizing the transformer
9
using single-pole switches located at the primary terminals. With smaller kVA
transformers the probability of ferroresonance is higher.
WYE-WYE Connection 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources.
10
2. Suitable for a three-wire service only, even if XO is grounded.
Phasor H2 X2 3. This connection is incapable of furnishing a stabilized neutral and its use may
Diagram:
result in phase-to-neutral overvoltage (neutral shift) as a result of unbalanced 11
phase-to-neutral load.
X0
4. If a three-phase unit is built on a three-legged core, the neutral point of the
H1 H3 X1 X3
primary windings is practically locked at ground potential. 12
13
GROUNDED WYE-WYE Connection 1. Suitable for four-wire effectively grounded source only.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or for four-wire grounded service with
Phasor
Diagram:
H2 X2 XO grounded. 14
3. Three-phase transformers with this connection may experience stray flux tank
heating during certain external system unbalances unless the core configuration
H0 X0 (four or five legged) used provides a return path for the flux.
4. Fundamental and harmonic frequency zero-sequence currents in the secondary
15
H1 H3 X1 X3
lines supplied by the transformer also flow in the primary lines (and primary
neutral conductor).
5. Ground relay for the primary system may see load unbalances and ground
16
faults in the secondary system. This must be considered when coordinating
overcurrent protective devices.
6. Three-phase transformers with the neutral points of the high voltage and low 17
voltage windings connected together internally and brought out through an
HOXO bushing should not be operated with the HOXO bushing ungrounded
(floating). To do so can result in very high voltages in the secondary systems. 18
DELTA-DELTA Connection with Tap 1. Suitable for both ungrounded and effectively grounded sources.
2. Suitable for a three-wire service or a four-wire service with a mid-tap ground.
Phasor
Diagram:
H2 X2 3. When using the tap for single-phase circuits, the single-phase load kVA should 19
X4 not exceed 5% of the three-phase kVA rating of the transformer. The three-phase
rating of the transformer is also substantially reduced.
20
H1 H3 X1 X3
Angular Displacement (Degrees): 0 21

Sheet 01 008
i Types of Systems Low voltage feeder circuits run from A fault on the secondary low voltage
the switchgear or switchboard assem- bus or in the source transformer will
In many cases, power is supplied by blies to panelboards that are located interrupt service to all loads. Service
the utility to a building at the utilization closer to their respective loads as cannot be restored until the necessary
ii voltage. In these cases, the distribution shown in Figure 1.1-1. repairs have been made. A low voltage
of power within the building is achieved feeder circuit fault will interrupt service
Each feeder is connected to the switch- to all loads supplied over that feeder.
through the use of a simple radial
1 distribution system.
gear or switchboard bus through a
circuit breaker or other overcurrent A modern and improved form of the
In cases where the utility service voltage protective device. A relatively small conventional simple radial system
2 is at some voltage higher than the number of circuits are used to distribute distributes power at a primary voltage.
utilization voltage within the building, power to the loads from the switch- The voltage is stepped down to
the system design engineer has a choice gear or switchboard assemblies and utilization level in the several load
3 of a number of types of systems that panelboards. areas within the building typically
may be used. This discussion covers through secondary unit substation
Because the entire load is served from transformers. The transformers are
several major types of distribution
a single source, full advantage can be
4 systems and practical modifications
taken of the diversity among the loads.
usually connected to their associated
of them. load bus through a circuit breaker, as
This makes it possible to minimize the shown in Figure 1.1-2. Each secondary
1. Simple radial installed transformer capacity. However,
5 the voltage regulation and efficiency
unit substation is an assembled unit
2. Loop-primary system consisting of a three-phase, liquid-
of this system may be poor because filled or air-cooled transformer, an inte-
radial secondary system of the low voltage feeders and single
6 3. Primary selective system source. The cost of the low voltage-
grally connected primary fused switch,
and low voltage switchgear or switch-
secondary radial system feeder circuits and their associated circuit board with circuit breakers or fused
breakers are high when the feeders are
7 4. Two-source primary long and the peak demand is above
switches. Circuits are run to
secondary selective system the loads from these low voltage
1000 kVA. protective devices.
8 5. Sparing transformer system
6. Simple spot network
Primary Fused Switch
9 7. Medium voltage distribution
system design Transformer
10 1. Simple Radial System 600V Class

The conventional simple radial system Switchboard
receives power at the utility supply
11 voltage at a single substation and steps
the voltage down to the utilization level. Distribution
In those cases where the customer Dry-Type
12 receives his supply from the primary Transformer
system and owns the primary switch Distribution MCC Distribution Lighting
and transformer along with the second- Panel Panel Panelboard
13 ary low voltage switchboard or switch-
gear, the equipment may take the form
of a separate primary switch, separate
14 transformer, and separate low voltage
Figure 1.1-1. Simple Radial System
switchgear or switchboard. This equip-
ment may be combined in the form of
15 an outdoor pad-mounted transformer 52 Primary Main Breaker
with internal primary fused switch
and secondary main breaker feeding
16 an indoor switchboard. 52 52 52 52 52 52 Primary Feeder Breakers
Another alternative would be a
17 secondary unit substation where
the primary fused switch, transformer
and secondary switchgear or switch-
18 board are designed and installed as
a close-coupled single assembly.
19 In those cases where the utility owns

the primary equipment and transformer,
Secondary Unit
the supply to the customer is at the Substation
Primary
20 utilization voltage, and the service
Cables
equipment then becomes low voltage
main distribution switchgear or
21 a switchboard.
Figure 1.1-2. Primary and Secondary Simple Radial System

Sheet 01 009
Because each transformer is located In addition, if only one primary fuse on sectionalizing switches and primary
within a specific load area, it must a circuit opens, the secondary loads are load break fused switch as shown i
have sufficient capacity to carry the then single phased, causing damage to in Figure 1.1-4 or utilizing three
peak load of that area. Consequently, low voltage motors. on-off switches or a four-position
if any diversity exists among the load sectionalizing switch and vacuum ii
area, this modified primary radial Another approach to reducing costs fault interrupter (VFI) internal to the
system requires more transformer is to eliminate the primary feeder transformer saving cost and reducing
capacity than the basic form of the breakers completely, and use a single footprint. 1
simple radial system. However, primary main breaker or fused switch
because power is distributed to the for protection of a single primary When pad-mounted compartmental-
load areas at a primary voltage, losses feeder circuit with all secondary unit ized transformers are used, they are 2
are reduced, voltage regulation is substations supplied from this circuit. furnished with loop-feed oil-immersed
improved, feeder circuit costs are Although this system results in less ini- gang-operated load break sectionaliz-
reduced substantially, and large tial equipment cost, system reliability is ing switches and Bay-O-Net expulsion 3
low voltage feeder circuit breakers reduced drastically because a single fuses in series with partial range back-
are eliminated. In many cases the fault in any part of the primary conductor up current-limiting fuses. By operating
interrupting duty imposed on the would cause an outage to all loads the appropriate sectionalizing switches, 4
load circuit breakers is reduced. within the facility. it is possible to disconnect any section
of the loop conductors from the rest
This modern form of the simple radial 2. Loop Primary System of the system. In addition, it is possible 5
system will usually be lower in initial Radial Secondary System to disconnect any transformer from
investment than most other types of the loop.
primary distribution systems for build- This system consists of one or more 6
ings in which the peak load is above PRIMARY LOOPS with two or more A key interlocking scheme is normally
1000 kVA. A fault on a primary feeder transformers connected on the loop. recommended to prevent closing all
sectionalizing devices in the loop. Each
circuit or in one transformer will cause This system is typically most effective
when two services are available from primary loop sectionalizing switch and
7
an outage to only those secondary
loads served by that feeder or trans- the utility as shown in Figure 1.1-3. Each the feeder breakers to the loop are
former. In the case of a primary main primary loop is operated such that one interlocked such that to be closed they 8
bus fault or a utility service outage, of the loop sectionalizing switches is require a key (which is held captive
service is interrupted to all loads until kept open to prevent parallel operation until the switch or breaker is opened)
the trouble is eliminated. of the sources. When secondary unit and one less key than the number of 9
substations are used, each transformer key interlock cylinders is furnished.
Reducing the number of transformers may have its own duplex (2-load break An extra key is provided to defeat the
per primary feeder by adding more switches with load side bus connection) interlock under qualified supervision. 10
primary feeder circuits will improve
the flexibility and service continuity
of this system; the ultimate being one 11
secondary unit substation per primary Primary Main Breaker 1 52 52 Primary Main Breaker 2
feeder circuit. This of course increases
the investment in the system but
minimizes the extent of an outage Tie
52
12
52 52 Breaker 52 52 Loop Feeder Breaker
resulting from a transformer or
primary feeder fault.
Loop A 13
Primary connections from one secondary Loop B
unit substation to the next secondary
unit substation can be made with NC NO NC NC 14
Fault Sensors
double lugs on the unit substation
primary switch as shown, or with
separable connectors made in 15
manholes or other locations.
Depending on the load kVA connected 16
to each primary circuit and if no ground
fault protection is desired for either the
primary feeder conductors and trans- 17
NC NC NO NC NC NC
formers connected to that feeder or
the main bus, the primary main and/or
feeder breakers may be changed to 18
primary fused switches. This will sig-
nificantly reduce the first cost, but also
decrease the level of conductor and 19
equipment protection. Thus, should
a fault or overload condition occur,
downtime increases significantly and 20
Secondary Unit Substations Consisting of:
higher costs associated with increased Duplex Primary Switches/Fused Primary Switches/
damage levels and the need for fuse Transformer and Secondary Main Feeder Breakers
replacement is typically encountered. 21
Figure 1.1-3. Loop PrimaryRadial Secondary System

Sheet 01 010
In addition, the two primary main cable has been faulted, the loop sec-
i Loop
Feeder
Loop
Feeder
breakers, which are normally closed, tionalizing switches on each side of the
and primary tie breaker, which is faulted conductor can be opened, the
Load Break normally open, are either mechanically loop sectionalizing switch that had
ii Loop Switches or electrically interlocked to prevent been previously left open then closed
paralleling the incoming source lines. and service restored to all secondary
For slightly added cost, an automatic unit substations while the faulted
1 throw-over scheme can be added conductor is replaced. If the fault
between the two main breakers and should occur in a conductor directly
Fused tie breaker. During the more common on the load side of one of the loop
2 Disconnect
Switch event of a utility outage, the automatic feeder breakers, the loop feeder
transfer scheme provides significantly breaker is kept open after tripping and
reduced power outage time. the next load side loop sectionalizing
3 switch manually opened so that the
The system in Figure 1.1-3 has higher faulted conductor can be sectionalized
costs than in Figure 1.1-2, but offers and replaced.
4 increased reliability and quick restora-
tion of service when 1) a utility outage Note: Under this condition, all secondary
occurs, 2) a primary feeder conductor unit substations are supplied through the
other loop feeder circuit breaker, and thus
5 Figure 1.1-4. Secondary Unit Substation fault occurs, or 3) a transformer fault
all conductors around the loop should be
Loop Switching or overload occurs.
sized to carry the entire load connected to
Should a utility outage occur on one of the loop. Increasing the number of primary
6 the incoming lines, the associated pri- loops (two loops shown in Figure 1.1-8)
Main Source Alternate Source will reduce the extent of the outage from a
mary main breaker is opened and the
3-Position conductor fault, but will also increase the
tie breaker closed either manually or
7 Selector Switch
through an automatic transfer scheme.
system investment.
Vacuum Fault
When a primary feeder conductor fault When a transformer fault or overload
8 Interrupter (VFI)
occurs, the associated loop feeder occurs, the transformer primary fuses
breaker opens and interrupts service open, and the transformer primary
to all loads up to the normally open switch manually opened, disconnecting
9 primary loop load break switch the transformer from the loop, and
(typically half of the loads). Once it is leaving all other secondary unit
determined which section of primary substation loads unaffected.
10
11 Primary Metal-Clad
Figure 1.1-5. VFI /Selector Switch Switchgear Lineup
Combination 52 52 Primary Main Breaker
12 Bus A 52 Bus B
Loop Feeder Loop Feeder 52 52 52 52 Primary Feeder Breaker

13
Feeder A1 Feeder B1 Feeder B2
4-Position To Other
14 Partial Range T-Blade Feeder A2 Substations
Current-Limiting Fuse Sectionalizing
Load-Break NO
Bay-O-Net
15 Expulsion Fuse
Switch
NC
16 NO Typical Secondary Unit

Substation Duplex Primary
Switch/Fuses
Transformer/600V Class
17 NC
Secondary Switchgear
NO
18 Figure 1.1-6. Pad-Mounted Transformer
Loop Switching NC
19
Figure 1.1-7. Basic Primary SelectiveRadial Secondary System
20
21

Sheet 01 011
This means limited cable space espe-

Primary cially if double lugs are furnished for i
Feeders each line as shown in Figure 1.1-7 and
52 should a faulted primary conductor
Load Break have to be changed, both lines would ii
Loop A Loop A Switches have to be de-energized for safe
changing of the faulted conductors.
A second alternative is utilizing a 1
In cases where only one primary line three-position selector switch internal
is available, the use of a single primary Fuses to the transformer, allowing only one
breaker provides the loop connections
to the loads as shown here. primary feeder to be connected to 2
the transformer at a time without the
Figure 1.1-8. Single Primary Feeder need for any interlocking. The selector
Loop System switch is rated for load-breaking. 3
If overcurrent protection is also
A basic primary loop system that required, a vacuum fault interrupter
uses a single primary feeder breaker (VFI), also internal to the transformer, 4
connected directly to two loop feeder may be utilized, reducing floor space.
switches which in turn then feed the
Figure 1.1-9. Duplex Fused Switch in
loop is shown in Figure 1.1-8. In this Two Structures In Figure 1.1-7 when a primary feeder 5
basic system, the loop may be normally fault occurs, the associated feeder
operated with one of the loop section- One alternate to the duplex switch breaker opens and the transformers
alizing switches open as described arrangement, a non-load break selector normally supplied from the faulted 6
above or with all loop sectionalizing switch mechanically interlocked with feeder are out of service. Then manu-
switches closed. If a fault occurs in the a load break fused switch can be used ally, each primary switch connected to
basic primary loop system, the single as shown in Figure 1.1-10. The non- the faulted line must be opened and 7
loop feeder breaker trips, and secondary load break selector switch is physically then the alternate line primary switch
loads are lost until the faulted conductor located in the rear of the load break can be closed connecting the trans-
is found and eliminated from the loop fused switch, thus only requiring one former to the live feeder, thus restoring 8
by opening the appropriate loop structure and a lower cost and floor service to all loads. Note that each of the
sectionalizing switches and then space savings over the duplex primary circuit conductors for Feeder
reclosing the breaker. arrangement. The non-load break A1 and B1 must be sized to handle the 9
switch is mechanically interlocked to sum of the loads normally connected
3. Primary Selective System prevent its operation unless the load to both A1 and B1. Similar sizing of
Secondary Radial System break switch is opened. The main Feeders A2 and B2, etc., is required. 10
disadvantage of the selector switch is
The primary selectivesecondary that conductors from both circuits are If a fault occurs in one transformer,
radial system, as shown in Figure 1.1-7, terminated in the same structure. the associated primary fuses blow 11
differs from those previously described and interrupt the service to just
in that it employs at least two primary the load served by that transformer.
feeder circuits in each load area. It is
Primary
Service cannot be restored to the loads
normally served by the faulted
12
designed so that when one primary Feeders
circuit is out of service, the remaining transformer until the transformer
feeder or feeders have sufficient
Non-Load Break
is repaired or replaced. 13
capacity to carry the total load. Half Selector Switches Cost of the primary selective
of the transformers are normally Inter- secondary radial system is greater
connected to each of the two feeders. lock Load Break than that of the simple primary radial 14
When a fault occurs on one of the Disconnect
system of Figure 1.1-1 because of the
primary feeders, only half of the
Fuses additional primary main breakers, tie
load in the building is dropped.
breaker, two-sources, increased number 15
Duplex fused switches as shown in of feeder breakers, the use of primary-
Figure 1.1-7 and detailed in Figure 1.1-9 duplex or selector switches, and the
may be utilized for this type of system. greater amount of primary feeder 16
Each duplex fused switch consists of cable required. The benefits from the
two (2) load break three-pole switches reduction in the amount of load lost
each in their own separate structure, when a primary feeder is faulted, plus 17
connected together by busbars on the the quick restoration of service to all
load side. Typically, the load break or most of the loads, may more than
switch closest to the transformer
Figure 1.1-10. Fused Selector Switch in
offset the greater cost. Having two 18
One Structure
includes a fuse assembly with fuses. sources allows for either manual or
Mechanical and/or key interlocking automatic transfer of the two primary
is furnished such that both switches main breakers and tie breaker should
19
cannot be closed at the same time one of the sources become unavailable.
(to prevent parallel operation) and
interlocking such that access to
20
either switch or fuse assembly
cannot be obtained unless both 21
switches are opened.

Sheet 01 012
The primary selective-secondary radial Each transformer secondary is If the loss of voltage was due to a
i system, however, may be less costly or arranged in a typical double-ended failure of one of the transformers in
more costly than a primary loop unit substation arrangement as shown the double-ended unit substation, then
secondary radial system of Figure 1.1-3 in Figure 1.1-11. The two secondary the associated primary fuses would
ii depending on the physical location main breakers and secondary tie open taking only the failed transformer
of the transformers while offering breaker of each unit substation are out of service, and then only the sec-
comparable downtime and reliability. again either mechanically or electrically ondary loads normally served by the
1 The cost of conductors for the two interlocked to prevent parallel operation. faulted transformer would have to be
types of systems may vary greatly Upon loss of secondary source voltage transferred to the opposite transformer.
depending on the location of the on one side, manual or automatic In either of the above emergency
2 transformers and loads within the transfer may be used to transfer the conditions, the in-service transformer
facility and greatly override primary loads to the other side, thus restoring of a double-ended unit substation
switching equipment cost differences power to all secondary loads. would have to have the capability of
3 between the two systems. serving the loads on both sides of the
This arrangement permits quick tie breaker. For this reason, transform-
4. Two-Source Primary restoration of service to all loads when ers used in this application have equal
4 Secondary Selective System
a primary feeder or transformer fault kVA rating on each side of the double-
occurs by opening the associated ended unit substation and the normal
This system uses the same principle secondary main and closing the operating maximum load on each
5 of duplicate sources from the power secondary tie breaker. If the loss transformer is typically about 2/3 base
supply point using two primary main of secondary voltage has occurred nameplate kVA rating. Typically these
breakers and a primary tie breaker. because of a primary feeder fault with transformers are furnished with
6 The two primary main breakers and the associated primary feeder breaker fan-cooling and/or lower than normal
primary tie breaker being either opening, then all secondary loads temperature rise such that under
manually or electrically interlocked normally served by the faulted feeder emergency conditions they can carry
7 to prevent closing all three at the same would have to be transferred to the on a continuous basis the maximum
time and paralleling the sources. Upon opposite primary feeder. This means load on both sides of the secondary tie
loss of voltage on one source, a manual each primary feeder conductor must be breaker. Because of this spare trans-
8 or automatic transfer to the alternate sized to carry the load on both sides of former capacity, the voltage regulation
source line may be used to restore all the secondary buses it is serving provided by the double-ended unit
power to all primary loads. under secondary emergency transfer substation system under normal
9 . conditions is better than that of the
systems previously discussed.
10 The double-ended unit substation
arrangement can be used in conjunction
52 52 Primary Main Breakers
with any of the previous systems
11 52 discussed, which involve two primary
sources. Although not recommended,
52 52 52 52 Primary Feeder Breakers if allowed by the utility, momentary
12 re-transfer of loads to the restored
source may be made closed transition
To Other Substations To Other Substations (anti-parallel interlock schemes would
13 Typical
have to be defeated) for either the
Double-Ended
primary or secondary systems. Under
Unit this condition, all equipment interrupt-
14 Substation ing and momentary ratings should be
suitable for the fault current available
from both sources.
15
For double-ended unit substations
equipped with ground fault systems
16 special consideration to transformer
neutral grounding and equipment
operation should be madesee
17 Primary Fused Switch Transformer Tie Breaker Secondary Main Breaker
Grounding and Ground Fault
Protection in Section 1.4. Where
two single-ended unit substations are
Figure 1.1-11. Two-Source PrimarySecondary Selective System
18 connected together by external tie
conductors, it is recommended that
a tie breaker be furnished at each end
19 of the tie conductors.
20
21

Sheet 01 013
5. Sparing Transformer System Referring to Figure 1.1-12, it is apparent The sparing transformer system
The sparing transformer system concept
that the sparing concept backs up operates as follows: i
primary switch and primary cable
came into use as an alternative to the failure as well. Restoration of lost or All main breakers, including
capital cost intensive double-ended failed utility power is accomplished the sparing main breaker, are ii
secondary unit substation distribution similarly to primary selective scheme normally closed; the tie breakers
system (see Two-Source Primary previously discussed. It is therefore are normally open
Secondary Selective System). It essen- important to use an automatic thro- Once a transformer (or primary 1
tially replaces double-ended substations wover system in a two source lineup cable or primary switch/fuse) fails,
with single-ended substations and one of primary switchgear to restore utility the associated secondary main
or more sparing transformer substa- power as discussed in the Two-Source breaker is opened. The associated 2
tions all interconnected on a common Primary schemesee Figure 1.1-11. tie breaker is then closed, which
secondary bus (see Figure 1.1-12). restores power to the single-ended
A major advantage of the sparing substation bus 3
Generally no more than three to five transformer system is the typically
single-ended substations are on a Schemes that require the main to
lower total base kVA of transformation. be opened before the tie is closed
sparing loop. In a double-ended substation design,
each transformer must be rated to
(open transition), and that allow 4
The essence of this design philosophy any tie to be closed before the
is that conservatively designed and carry the sum of the loads of two busses substation main is opened,
loaded transformers are highly reliable and usually requires the addition of (closed transition) are possible 5
electrical devices and rarely fail. There- cooling fans to accomplish this rating.
fore, this design provides a single com- In the sparing concept, each trans- With a closed transition scheme, it is
mon backup transformer for a group of former carries only its own load, which common to add a timer function that 6
transformers in lieu of a backup trans- is typically not a fan-cooled rating. Major opens the tie breaker unless either
space savings is also a benefit of this main breaker is opened within a
former for each and every transformer.
system in addition to first cost savings. time interval. 7
This system design still maintains a
high degree of continuity of service. This closed transition allows power
to be transferred to the sparing
transformer without interruption, such 8
as for routine maintenance, and then
back to the substation. This closed
transition transfer has an advantage in 9
some facilities; however, appropriate
K K K interrupting capacities and bus bracing
must be specified suitable for the 10
momentary parallel operation.
In facilities without qualified electrical 11
power operators, an open transition
Sparing Transformer
with key interlocking is often a
prudent design. 12
K K
Note: Each pair of main breaker/tie breaker
key cylinders should be uniquely keyed to
prevent any paralleled source operations. 13
Careful sizing of these transformers
Typical Secondary Busway Loop as well as careful specification of the 14
transformers is required for reliability.
Low temperature rise specified with
continuous overload capacity or 15
K K
upgraded types of transformers
should be considered.
Typical Single-Ended Substation 16
One disadvantage to this system is
the external secondary tie system,
Figure 1.1-12. Sparing Transformer System
see Figure 1.1-12. As shown, all single- 17
ended substations are tied together
on the secondary with a tie busway or
cable system. Location of substations 18
is therefore limited because of voltage
drop and cost considerations.
19
20
21

Sheet 01 014
Routing of busway, if used, must be The network relay is usually a solid- The optimum size and number of
i carefully layed out. It should also be state microprocessor-based compo- primary feeders can be used in the
noted, that a tie busway or cable fault nent integrated into the protector spot network system because the
will essentially prevent the use of the enclosure that functions to automati- loss of any primary feeder and its
ii sparing transformer until it is repaired. cally close the protector only when the associated transformers does not
Commonly, the single-ended substa- voltage conditions are such that its result in the loss of any load even
tions and the sparing transformer associated transformer will supply for an instant. In spite of the spare
1 must be clustered. This can also be power to the secondary network loads, capacity usually supplied in network
an advantage, as more kVA can be and to automatically open the protec- systems, savings in primary switch-
supported from a more compact tor when power flows from the sec- gear and secondary switchgear costs
2 space layout. ondary to the network transformer. often result when compared to a radial
The purpose of the network protector system design with similar spare
6. Simple Spot Network Systems is to protect the integrity of the net- capacity. This occurs in many radial
3 The AC secondary network system work bus voltage and the loads served systems because more and smaller
is the system that has been used for from it against transformer and pri- feeders are often used in order to
many years to distribute electric power mary feeder faults by quickly discon- minimize the extent of any outage
4 in the high-density, downtown areas necting the defective feeder- when a primary fault event occurs.
of cities, usually in the form of utility transformer pair from the
network when backfeed occurs. In spot networks, when a fault occurs
5 grids. Modifications of this type of on a primary feeder or in a transformer,
system make it applicable to serve The simple spot network system the fault is isolated from the system
loads within buildings. resembles the secondary-selective through the automatic tripping of the
6 The major advantage of the secondary radial system in that each load area primary feeder circuit breaker and all
network system is continuity of is supplied over two or more primary of the network protectors associated
service. No single fault anywhere feeders through two or more trans- with that feeder circuit. This operation
7 on the primary system will interrupt formers. In network systems, the does not interrupt service to any loads.
service to any of the systems loads. transformers are connected through After the necessary repairs have been
Most faults will be cleared without network protectors to a common made, the system can be restored to
8 interrupting service to any load. bus, as shown in Figure 1.1-13, from normal operating conditions by closing
Another outstanding advantage that which loads are served. Because the the primary feeder breaker. All network
the network system offers is its flexibil- transformers are connected in parallel, protectors associated with that feeder
9 ity to meet changing and growing load a primary feeder or transformer fault will close automatically.
conditions at minimum cost and does not cause any service interrup-
tion to the loads. The paralleled The chief purpose of the network bus
minimum interruption in service to normally closed ties is to provide for
10 other loads on the network. In addition transformers supplying each load
the sharing of loads and a balancing
to flexibility and service reliability, the bus will normally carry equal load
currents, whereas equal loading of of load currents for each primary
secondary network system provides service and transformer regardless of
11 exceptionally uniform and good the two separate transformers supply-
the condition of the primary services.
voltage regulation, and its high ing a substation in the secondary-
efficiency materially reduces the selective radial system is difficult to Also, the ties provide a means for
12 costs of system losses. obtain. The interrupting duty imposed isolating and sectionalizing ground
on the outgoing feeder breakers in the fault events within the switchgear
Three major differences between the network will be greater with the spot network bus, thereby saving a portion
13 network system and the simple radial network system. of the loads from service interruptions,
system account for the outstanding yet isolating the faulted portion for
advantages of the network. First, corrective action.
14 a network protector is connected in
the secondary leads of each network
transformer in place of, or in addition
15 to, the secondary main breaker, as Typical Feeder
shown in Figure 1.1-13. Also, the Primary Circuit
secondaries of each transformer in To Other
16 a given location (spot) are connected Network Transformer
Networks
together by a switchgear or ring bus

from which the loads are served over Network Protector
17 short radial feeder circuits. Finally, the Fuses
primary supply has sufficient capacity Optional Main, 50/51
to carry the entire building load with- Relaying and/or
18 out overloading when any one primary Network Disconnect Tie Tie
Drawout
feeder is out of service. Low Voltage
LV Feeder NC NC Switchgear
19 A network protector is a specially
designed heavy-duty air power breaker,
spring close with electrical motor-charged Customer Customer Customer
20 mechanism, with a network relay to Loads Loads Loads
control the status of the protector

(tripped or closed). Figure 1.1-13. Three-Source Spot Network
21

Sheet 01 015
The use of spot network systems 7. Medium Voltage Distribution

provides users with several important
System Design
i
advantages. First, they save trans- Utility #1 Utility #2
former capacity. Spot networks permit A. Single Bus, Figure 1.1-14
equal loading of transformers under ii
all conditions. Also, networks yield The sources (utility and/or generator(s)) Normal Standby
lower system losses and greatly are connected to a single bus. All feeders
improve voltage conditions. The are connected to the same bus. 1
voltage regulation on a network
system is such that both lights and Utility
power can be fed from the same 2
load bus. Much larger motors can G
52 NC 52 NO
be started across-the-line than on a
simple radial system. This can result in 3
simplified motor control and permits
the use of relatively large low voltage Loads
motors with their less expensive 4
control. Finally, network systems Figure 1.1-15. Single Bus with Two-Sources
52 52
provide a greater degree of flexibility
in adding future loads; they can be Retransfer to the Normal can be 5
connected to the closest spot Main Bus closed transition subject to the approval
network bus. of the utility. Closed transition momen-
tarily (510 cycles) parallels both 6
Spot network systems are economical utility sources. Caution: when both
for buildings that have heavy concen- 52 sources are paralleled, the fault current
trations of loads covering small areas, available on the load side of the main 7
with considerable distance between device is the sum of the available fault
areas, and light loads within the One of Several Feeders current from each source plus the motor
distances separating the concentrated fault contribution. It is recommended 8
loads. They are commonly used in Figure 1.1-14. Single Bus that the short-circuit ratings of the
hospitals, high rise office buildings, bus, feeder breakers and all load side
and institutional buildings where a This configuration is the simplest equipment are rated for the increased 9
high degree of service reliability is system; however, outage of the utility available fault current. If the utility
required from the utility sources. results in total outage. requires open transfer, the disconnec-
Spot network systems are especially
Normally the generator does not have
tion of motors from the bus must be 10
economical where three or more ensured by means of suitable time delay
adequate capacity for the entire load.
primary feeders are available. on reclosing as well as supervision
A properly relayed system equipped
Principally, this is due to supplying with load shedding, automatic voltage/
of the bus voltage and its phase with 11
respect to the incoming source voltage
each load bus through three or frequency control may be able to
maintain partial system operation. This busing scheme does not preclude
more transformers and the reduction
in spare cable and transformer the use of cogeneration, but requires
12
Any future addition of breaker sections
capacity required. the use of sophisticated automatic syn-
to the bus will require a shutdown of
They are also economical when the bus, because there is no tie breaker.
chronizing and synchronism checking
controls, in addition to the previously
13
compared to two transformer double- mentioned load shedding, automatic
B. Single Bus with Two Sources from the
ended substations with normally
opened tie breakers. Utility, Figure 1.1-15 frequency and voltage controls. 14
Same as the single bus, except that This configuration is more expensive
Emergency power should be connected two utility sources are available. than the scheme shown in Figure 1.1-14,
to network loads downstream from This system is operated normally with but service restoration is quicker. Again, 15
the network, or upstream at primary the main breaker to one source open. a utility outage results in total outage to
voltage, not at the network bus itself. Upon loss of the normal service, the the load until transfer occurs. Extension
transfer to the standby normally of the bus or adding breakers requires 16
open (NO) breaker can be automatic a shutdown of the bus.
or manual. Automatic transfer is
preferred for rapid service restoration If paralleling sources, reverse current, 17
especially in unattended stations. reverse power and other appropriate
relaying protection should be added
as requested by the utility. 18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 016
C. Multiple Sources with Tie Breaker, In Figure 1.1-17, closing of the tie Summary
i Figure 1.1-16 and Figure 1.1-17 breaker following the opening of a The medium voltage system configura-
This configuration is similar to configu- main breaker can be manual or auto- tions shown are based on using metal-
ration B. It differs significantly in that matic. However, because a bus can clad drawout switchgear. The service
ii both utility sources normally carry the be fed through two tie breakers, the continuity required from electrical
loads and also by the incorporation control scheme should be designed systems makes the use of single-source
of a normally open tie breaker. The to make the selection. systems impractical.
1 outage to the system load for a utility The third tie breaker allows any bus In the design of a modern medium
outage is limited to half of the system. to be fed from any utility source.
Again, the closing of the tie breaker can voltage system, the engineer should:
2 be manual or automatic. The statements 1. Design a system as simple as
Caution for Figures 1.1-15, 1.1-16 and
made for the retransfer of scheme B 1.1-17: If continuous paralleling of possible.
apply to this scheme also.
3 sources is planned, reverse current,
2. Limit an outage to as small a
reverse power and other appropriate
portion of the system as possible.
Utility #1 Utility #2 relaying protection should be added.
4 When both sources are paralleled for 3. Provide means for expanding the
any amount of time, the fault current system without major shutdowns.
available on the load side of the main
5 device is the sum of the available 4. Relay the system so that only the
fault current from each source plus faulted part is removed from
the motor fault contribution. It is service, and damage to it is mini-
6 52 NC 52 NC required that bus bracing, feeder mized consistent with selectivity.
breakers and all load side equipment 5. Specify and apply all equipment
NO is rated for the increased available within its published ratings and
7 Bus #1
52
Bus #2
fault current. national standards pertaining to
the equipment and its installation.
8 52 52
9 Utility #1 Utility #2 Utility #3

Load Load
10 Figure 1.1-16. Two-Source Utility with

Tie Breaker
If looped or primary selective distribu-
11 tion system for the loads is used, the 52 NC 52 NC 52 NC
buses can be extended without a shut-
down by closing the tie breaker and
12 transferring the loads to the other bus. Bus #1
NO
Bus #2
NO
Bus #3
52 52
This configuration is more expensive
13 than B. The system is not limited to two
buses only. Another advantage is that 52 NO 52 Typical Feeder 52 52 52 NO
the design may incorporate momentary
14 paralleling of buses on retransfer after Tie Busway
the failed line has been restored to pre-
vent another outage. See the Caution for Figure 1.1-17. Triple-Ended Arrangement
15 Figures 1.1-15, 1.1-16 and 1.1-17.
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 017
Health Care Facilities NFPA 101-2009Life Safety Code The electrical system requirements for
NFPA 110-2010Standard for Emer- the essential electrical system (EES) i
Health care facilities are defined by gency and Standby Power Systems vary according to the type of health
NFPA (National Fire Protection Agency) NFPA 111-2010Standard on Stored
care facility. Health care facilities are
as Buildings or portions of buildings Electrical Energy Emergency and categorized by NFPA 99 as Type 1, ii
in which medical, dental, psychiatric, Standby Power Systems Type 2 or Type 3 facilities. Some
nursing, obstetrical, or surgical care example health care facilities, classified
are provided. Due to the critical nature These NFPA guidelines represent the by type, are summarized in the 1
of the care being provided at these most industry recognized standard following Table 1.1-8.
facilities and their increasing depen- requirements for health care electrical
dence on electrical equipment for pres- design. However, the electrical design Table 1.1-8. Health Care Facilities 2
ervation of life, health care facilities engineer should consult with the Description Definition EES Type
have special requirements for the authorities having jurisdiction over
design of their electrical distribution the local region for specific electrical
Hospitals NFPA 99 Chap. 13 Type 1
Nursing homes NFPA 99 Chap. 17 Type 2
3
systems. These requirements are distribution requirements. Limited care
typically much more stringent than facilities NFPA 99 Chap. 18 Type 2
commercial or industrial facilities. Health Care Electrical System Ambulatory 4
The following section summarizes Requirements surgical
some of the unique requirements facilities NFPA 99 Chap. 14 Type 3 1
of health care facility design. Health care electrical systems usually Other health 5
consist of two parts: care facilities NFPA 99 Chap. 14 Type 3 1
There are several agencies and organi- 1 If electrical life support or critical care areas
zations that develop requirements 1. Non-essential or normal are present, then facility is classified as Type 1. 6
for health care electrical distribution electrical system.
system design. The following is a 2. Essential electrical system.
Type 1 Essential Electrical
listing of some of the specific NFPA Systems (EES) 7
(National Fire Protection Agency) All electrical power in a health care
standards that affect health care facility is important, though some Type 1 essential electrical systems
facility design and implementation: loads are not critical to the safe opera- (EES) have the most stringent require- 8
tion of the facility. These non-essential ments for providing continuity of
NFPA 37-2010Standard for electrical service and will, therefore,
or normal loads include things such
Stationary Combustion Engines as general lighting, general lab equip- be the focus of this section. Type 1 9
and Gas Turbines ment, non-critical service equipment, EES requirements meet or exceed
NFPA 70-2011National patient care areas, etc. These loads are the requirements for Type 2 and
Electrical Code not required to be fed from an alternate Type 3 facilities. 10
NFPA 99-2005Health Care Facilities source of power.
11
Normal Source Normal Source Normal Source Emergency Power Supply
G
12
13
14
15
16
Non-Essential Loads Non-Essential Loads
17
Manual Transfer Switch 18
Equipment Life Safety Critical
Delayed Automatic Transfer Switch System Branch Branch
Emergency System
19
Automatic (Non-Delaying)
Transfer Switch Essential Electrical System
20
Figure 1.1-18. Typical Large Hospital Electrical SystemType 1 Facility
21

Sheet 01 018
Sources: Type 1 systems are required Table 1.1-9. Type 1 EES Applicable Codes B. Critical branchsupplies power
i to have a minimum of two independent Description Standard Section for task illumination, fixed equip-
sources of electrical powera normal ment, selected receptacles and
source that generally supplies the Design NFPA 99 4.4.1.1.1 selected power circuits for areas
ii entire facility and one or more alter- Sources NFPA 99 4.4.1.1.4 thru
4.4.4.1.1.7.2
related to patient care. The
nate sources that supply power when Uses NFPA 99 4.4.1.1.8 (1-3) purpose of the critical branch
the normal source is interrupted. The Emergency is to provide power to a limited
1 alternate source(s) must be an on-site Power Supply number of receptacles and loca-
generator driven by a prime mover Classification NFPA 110 4 tions to reduce load and minimize
unless a generator(s) exists as the Distribution NFPA 99 4.4.2 the chances of fault conditions.
2 normal power source. In the case NEC 517.30 The transfer switch(es) feeding the
where a generator(s) is used as the critical branch must be automatic
normal source, it is permissible for the Systems and Branches of Service: The type. They are permitted to have
3 alternate source to be a utility feed. Type 1 EES consists of two separate appropriate time delays that will
Alternate source generators must be power systems capable of supplying follow the restoration of the life
classified as Type 10, Class X, Level 1 power considered essential for life safety branch, but should have
4 gensets per NFPA 110 Tables 4.1(a) and safety and effective facility operation power restored within 10 seconds
4.2(b) that are capable of providing during an interruption of the normal of normal source power loss.
power to the load in a maximum of power source. They are the emergency The critical branch provides power
5 10 seconds. Typically, the alternate system and the equipment system. to circuits serving the following
sources of power are supplied to the areas and functions:
1. Emergency systemconsists of
loads through a series of automatic
6 and/or manual transfer switches (see
circuits essential to life safety and 1. Critical care areas.
critical patient care.
Tab 25). The transfer switches can 2. Isolated power systems in
be non-delayed automatic, delayed The emergency system is an electrical special environments.
7 automatic or manual transfer depending sub-system that must be fed from an 3. Task illumination and selected
on the requirements of the specific automatic transfer switch or series of receptacles in the following
branch of the EES that they are feeding. automatic transfer switches. This patient care areas: infant
8 It is permissible to feed multiple emergency system consists of two nurseries, medication prep
branches or systems of the EES from mandatory branches that provide power areas, pharmacy, selected
a single automatic transfer switch to systems and functions essential to acute nursing areas, psychiatric
9 provided that the maximum demand life safety and critical patient care. bed areas, ward treatment
on the EES does not exceed 150 kVA. rooms, nurses stations.
This configuration is typically seen A. Life safety branchsupplies
10 in smaller health care facilities that power for lighting, receptacles 4. Specialized patient care task
must meet Type 1 EES requirements and equipment to perform the illumination, where needed.
(see Figure 1.1-19). following functions: 5. Nurse call systems.
11 6. Blood, bone and tissue banks.
1. Illumination of means of egress.
Normal Source 2. Exit signs and exit direction signs. 7. Telephone equipment rooms
12 3. Alarms and alerting systems.
and closets.
Alternate 8. Task illumination, selected
4. Emergency communications
Source receptacles and selected power
13 systems.
circuits for the following: general
G 5. Task illumination, battery care beds (at least one duplex
chargers for battery powered receptacle), angiographic labs,
14 lighting, and select receptacles cardiac catheterization labs,
at the generator. coronary care units, hemodialysis
6. Elevator lighting control, com- rooms, selected emergency
15 munication and signal systems. room treatment areas, human
7. Automatic doors used for egress. physiology labs, intensive care
units, selected postoperative
16 Non-Essential
Loads These are the only functions recovery rooms.
permitted to be on the life safety 9. Additional circuits and single-
Entire Essential branch. Life safety branch equip-
17 Electric System ment and wiring must be entirely
phase fraction motors as needed
for effective facility operation.
(150 kVA or Less) independent of all other loads
and branches of service. This
18 Figure 1.1-19. Small Hospital Electrical includes separation of raceways,
SystemSingle EES Transfer Switch boxes or cabinets. Power must be
supplied to the life safety branch
19 from a non-delayed automatic
transfer switch.
20
21

Sheet 01 019
Table 1.1-10. Type 1Emergency System The following equipment must be and must be shed in the event the
Applicable Codes arranged for delayed automatic or generator enters an overload condition. i
Description Standard Section manual transfer to the emergency
power supply: Ground fault protectionper NFPA 70
General NFPA 99 4.4.2.2.2 NEC Article 230.95, ground fault ii
NEC 517.31 1. Select heating equipment. protection is required on any feeder or
Life safety NFPA 99 4.4.2.2.2.2 2. Select elevators. service disconnect 1000 A or larger on
branch NEC 517.32
3. Supply, return and exhaust
systems with line to ground voltages 1
Critical branch NFPA 99 4.4.2.2.2.3 of 150 V or greater and phase-to-phase
NEC 517.33 ventilating systems for surgical, voltages of 600 V or less. For health care
obstetrical, intensive care,
Wiring NFPA 99 4.4.2.2.4
coronary care, nurseries and
facilities (of any type), a second level of 2
NEC 517.30(C) ground fault protection is required to
emergency treatment areas. be on the next level of feeder down-
2. Equipment systemconsists of 4. Supply, return and exhaust stream. This second level of ground 3
major electrical equipment necessary ventilating systems for airborne fault is only required for feeders that
for patient care and Type 1 operation. infectious/isolation rooms, labs and serve patient care areas and equipment
The equipment system is a subsystem
medical areas where hazardous intended to support life. 100% selective 4
materials are used. coordination of the two levels of ground
of the EES that consists of large electrical fault protection must be achieved with a
equipment loads needed for patient 5. Hyperbaric facilities.
care and basic hospital operation. 6. Hypobaric facilities.
minimum six-cycle separation between 5
the upstream and downstream device.
Loads on the equipment system that 7. Autoclaving equipment.
are essential to generator operation are New in the 2011 NEC, ground fault
required to be fed by a non-delayed 8. Controls for equipment listed above. protection is now allowed between
6
automatic transfer switch. 9. Other selected equipment in the generator(s) and the EES transfer
kitchens, laundries, radiology switch(es). However, NEC 517.17(B) pro-
The following equipment must be rooms and central refrigeration hibits the installation of ground fault
7
arranged for delayed automatic transfer as selected. protection on the load side of a transfer
to the emergency power supply: switch feeding EES circuits (see Figure
Table 1.1-11. Type 1Equipment System
1.1-20additional level of ground fault).
8
1. Central suction systems for medical Applicable Codes
and surgical functions. Careful consideration should be used in
Description Standard Section applying ground fault protection on the
2. Sump pumps and other equipment
essential electrical system to prevent
9
required for the safe operation of General NFPA 99 4.4.2.2.3
NEC 517.34 a ground fault that causes a trip of the
a major apparatus.
Equipment NFPA 99 4.4.2.2.3 (3-5) normal source to also cause a trip on 10
3. Compressed air systems for NEC 517.34(A)-(B) the emergency source. Such an event
medical and surgical functions. could result in complete power loss of
4. Smoke control and stair Any loads served by the generator that both normal and emergency power 11
pressurization systems. are not approved as outlined above as sources and could not be recovered
part of the essential electrical system until the source of the ground fault
5. Kitchen hood supply and exhaust
systems, if required to operate must be connected through a separate was located and isolated from the
system. To prevent this condition,
12
during a fire. transfer switch. These transfer switches
must be configured such that the loads NEC 700.26 removes the ground fault
will not cause the generator to overload protection requirement for the 13
Normal Source Normal Source(s)
G
14
Generator Breakers are
Typically Supplied with
480/277V 480/277V 1 480/277 V 1 Ground Fault Alarm 15
1000 A Service 1000 A Service 1000 A Service Only. (NEC 700.26)
GF GF GF
or Larger Entrance or Larger Entrance or Larger Entrance
Ground Fault 16
is Permitted
Additional Level Between Generator
GF GF GF GF GF of Ground Fault
Protection
GF GF GF GF GF GF and EES Transfer
Switches.
17
(NEC 517.17(B))
Non-Essential Loads Non-Essential Loads 18
19
GF = Ground Fault Protection Required Additional Level of Ground Fault is
not Permitted on Load Side of EES
Essential Electrical System Transfer Switches. (NEC 517.17a(2)) 20
Figure 1.1-20. Additional Level of Ground Fault Protection
1 Ground fault protection is required for service disconnects 1000 A and larger or systems with less than 600 V phase-to-phase and greater than 150 V to 21
ground per NEC 230.95.

Sheet 01 020
emergency system source. Typically, Maintenance and Testing trained in development and execution
i the emergency system generator(s) Regular maintenance and testing of of annual preventative maintenance
are equipped with ground fault alarms the electrical distribution system in procedures of health care facility
that do not automatically disconnect a health care facility is necessary to electrical distribution systems.
ii power during a ground fault. ensure proper operation in an emer-
gency and, in some cases, to maintain Paralleling Emergency Generators
Table 1.1-12. Ground Fault Protection
government accreditation. Any health
1 Applicable Codes
care facility receiving Medicare or Without Utility Paralleling
Description Standard Section In many health care facilities (and
Medicaid reimbursement from the
government must be accredited by other large facilities with critical
2 Services
Feeders
NEC
NEC
230.95
215.10 the Joint Commission on Accreditation loads), the demand for standby
Additional level NEC 517.17 of Health Care Organizations (JCAHO). emergency power is large enough
NFPA 99 4.3.2.5 JCAHO has established a group of to require multiple generator sets to
3 Alternate source NEC 700.26 standards called the Environment of power all of the required essential
NEC 701.26 Care, which must be met for health electrical system (EES) loads. In many
care facility accreditation. Included in cases, it becomes more flexible and
4 Wet procedure locationsA wet these standards is the regular testing easier to operate the required multiple
procedure location in a health care of the emergency (alternate) power generators from a single location using
facility is any patient care area that system(s). Diesel-powered EPS instal- generator paralleling switchgear.
5 is normally subject to wet conditions lations must be tested monthly in Figure 1.1-21 on Page 1.1-19 shows
while patients are present. Typical wet accordance with NFPA 110 Standard an example of a typical one-line for a
procedure locations can include oper- for Emergency and Standby Power paralleling switchgear lineup feeding
6 ating rooms, anesthetizing locations, Systems. Generators must be tested the EES.
dialysis locations, etc. (Patient beds, for a minimum of 30 minutes under
A typical abbreviated sequence of
toilets and sinks are not considered the criteria defined in NFPA 110.
7 wet locations.) These wet procedure
operation for a multiple emergency
One method to automate the task of generator and ATS system follows.
locations require special protection
monthly generator tests is through the Note that other modes of operation
to guard against electric shock. The
8 ground fault current in these areas use of Power Xpert communications. such as generator demand priority and
With the Power Xpert integrated meter- automated testing modes are available
must be limited to not exceed 6 mA.
ing, monitoring and control system, a but are not included below. (Reference
9 In areas where the interruption of power facility maintenance director can initiate Tab 41 for complete detailed
is permissible, ground fault circuit a generator test, control/monitor sequences of operation.)
interrupters (GFCI) can be employed. loads, meter/monitor generator test
10 GFCIs will interrupt a circuit when points and create a JCAHO compliant
1. Entering emergency mode
ground fault current exceeds 5 mA report automatically from a central PC. a. Upon loss of normal source,
(1 mA). The report contains all metered values, automatic transfer switches
11 test results, date/time information, etc. send generator control system
In areas where the interruption of necessary to satisfy JCAHO require- a run request.
power cannot be tolerated, protection ments. This automated generator testing
12 from ground fault currents is accom- procedure reduces the labor, training
b. All available generators are
plished through the use of an isolated started. The first generator up
and inaccuracies that occur during to voltage and frequency is
power system. Isolated power systems manual emergency power system tests.
13 provide power to an area that is iso- (See Power Monitoring Tab 2.)
closed to the bus.
lated from ground (or ungrounded). c. Unsheddable loads and load
This type of system limits the amount Table 1.1-14. Maintenance and Testing shed Priority 1 loads are pow-
14 of current that flows to ground in Applicable Codes ered in less than 10 seconds.
the event of a single line-to-ground Description Standard Section d. The remaining generators are
fault and maintains circuit continuity.
synchronized and paralleled
15 Electronic line isolation monitors (LIM) Grounding NFPA 99 4.3.3.1
to the bus as they come up to
are used to monitor and display leakage Emergency power NFPA 99 4.4.4.1.1
system JCAHO EC.2.14(d) voltage and frequency.
currents to ground. When leakage
16 current thresholds are exceeded, visible Generator NFPA 110 8.4 e. As additional generators are
and/or audible alarms are initiated to Transfer switches NFPA 110 8.3.5, 8.4.6 paralleled to the emergency
alert occupants of a possible hazardous bus, load shed priority levels
Breakers NFPA 99 4.4.4.1.2
17 condition. This alarm occurs without NFPA 110 8.4.7 are added, powering their
interrupting power to allow for the associated loads.
safe conclusion of critical procedures. Routine maintenance should be f. The system is now in
18 Table 1.1-13. Wet Procedure Location
performed on circuit breakers, transfer emergency mode.
switches, switchgear, generator equip- 2. Exit from emergency mode
Applicable Codes
ment, etc. by trained professionals
19 Description Standard Section to ensure the most reliable electrical a. Automatic transfer switches
General NFPA 99 4.3.2.2.9 system possible. See Tab 41 for Eatons sense the utility source is
NEC 517.20 Electrical Services & Systems (EESS), within acceptable operational
20 Isolated power NFPA 99 4.3.2.6 which provides engineers, tolerances for a time duration
systems NEC 517.160 set at the automatic transfer
switch.
21

Sheet 01 021
b. As each automatic transfer With Utility Paralleling Many health care facilities are taking
switch transfers back to utility Today, many utilities are offering their advantage of these utility incentives i
power, it removes its run customers excellent financial incen- by adding generator capacity over
request from the generator tives to use their on-site generation and above the NFPA requirements.
plant. capacity to remove load from the utility Figure 1.1-22 on Page 1.1-20 shows ii
c. When the last automatic trans- grid. These incentives are sometimes an example one-line of a health care
fer switch has retransferred to referred to as limited interruptible facility with complete generator
the utility and all run requests rates (LIP). Under these incentives, backup and utility interconnect. 1
have been removed from the utilities will greatly reduce or eliminate NFPA 110 requirements state that the
generator plant, all generator kWhr or kW demand charges to their
circuit breakers are opened. customers with on-site generation
normal and emergency sources must 2
be separated by a fire-rated wall.
d. The generators are allowed capabilities. In exchange, during times
of peak loading of the utility grid, the The intent of this requirement is so that
to run for their programmed
utility can ask their LIP rate customers a fire in one location cannot take out 3
cool-down period.
to drop load from the grid by using both sources of power. To meet this
e. The system is now back in their on-site generation capabilities. requirement, the paralleling switchgear
automatic/standby mode. must be split into separate sections
4
Health care facilities are ideally suited with a tie bus through a fire-rated wall.
to take advantage of these programs For more information on generator
because they already have significant paralleling switchgear, see Tab 40.
5
on-site generation capabilities due to
the code requirements described.
6
Utility
7
Transformer Generators X = Number of Units
8
Utility G1 G2 Gx
Metering
9
Typical
Generator
Breaker
Service Main 10
Normal Bus Emergency Bus 11

Optional Optional Electrically
Electrically Operated Stored
Energy Breakers
12
Operated
Stored EF1 EF2 EFx
F1 F2 Fx
Energy
Breakers 13
14
Equipment Life Safety Critical Load Shed/Load
ATS # 1 ATS # 2 ATS # X Add ATS Units
Non-Essential
Loads
15
Optional Closed
EP1 EP2 Typical
Panelboards
EPX Transition 16
Paralleling of
Generators and
Utility
17
Figure 1.1-21. Typical One-Line for a Paralleling Switchgear Lineup Feeding the Essential Electrical System (EES)
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 022
i Utility Fire-Rated Wall

or Separation Barrier
ii Transformer
Generators X = Number of Units
Utility G1 G2 Gx
1 Metering
Utility
Closed
Protective Typical
2 Relay
Transition
Paralleling of Generator
Generators and Breaker
Service Main Utility, Plus
3 Soft Loading/
Unloading
Normal Bus Emergency Bus
4 TIE Optional TIE
Optional Electrically Operated
Electrically Stored Energy
5 Operated
Field Installed
Cable or Busway
Breakers
Stored F1 F2 Fx EF1 EF2 EFx
Energy
6 Breakers
7 Equipment Life Safety Critical Load Shed/

ATS # 1 ATS # 2 ATS # X Load Add
Non-Essential ATS Units
8 Loads
EP1 EP2 EPX Typical

9 Panelboards
Figure 1.1-22. Typical One-Line Health Care Facility with Complete Generator Backup and Utility Interconnect
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Generator System Design
Sheet 01 023
Generators and a supply-side bonding jumper to Types of Generators

i
be installed from the source of a
Generator Systems separately derived system to the first Generators can be either synchronous
disconnecting means in accordance or asynchronous. Asynchronous
with 250.30(A)(2). Another new generators are also referred to as ii
requirement, 250.30(C)Outdoor induction generators. The construction
Sourcehas been added, and requires is essentially the same as an induction
a grounding electrode connection at motor. It has a squirrel-cage rotor and 1
the source location when the separately wound stator. An induction generator
derived system is located outside is a motor driven above its designed
of the building or the structure synchronous speed thus generating 2
being supplied. power. It will operate as a motor if it
is running below synchronous speed.
Typical Diesel GensetCaterpillar Article 445.19Generators Supplying The induction generator does not have 3
Multiple Loadshas been revised an exciter and must operate in parallel
Introduction to require that the generator have with the utility or another source. The
The selection and application overcurrent protection per 240.15(A) induction generator requires VARs from 4
when using individual enclosures an external source for it to generate
of generators into the electrical
tapped from a single feeder. power. The induction generator
distribution system will depend on
the particular application. There are Article 517.17(B)Feeder GFP (Health
operates at a slip frequency so its 5
output frequency is automatically
many factors to consider, including Care Facilities)now allows, but does locked in with the utility's frequency.
code requirements, environmental not require, multiple levels of GFPE
constraints, fuel sources, control upstream of the transfer switch when An induction generator is a popular
6
complexity, utility requirements and the choice is made to provide GFPE choice for use when designing
load requirements. The health care on the alternate power source cogeneration systems, where it will
requirements for legally required (i.e., generator). operate in parallel with the utility.
7
emergency standby generation This type of generator offers certain
systems are described starting on Article 701.6(D)Signals (Legally advantages over a synchronous
Page 1.1-15. Systems described in Required Standby Systems)now generator. For example, voltage and
8
this section are applicable to health requires ground fault indication for frequency are controlled by the utility;
care requirements, as well as other legally required standby systems of thus voltage and frequency regulators
facilities that may require a high more than 150 V to ground and OCPDs are not required. In addition, the
9
degree of reliability. The electrical rated 1000 A or more. generator construction offers high
supply for data centers, financial reliability and little maintenance.
institutions, telecommunications, Types of Engines Also, a minimum of protective relays
10
government and public utilities Many generator sets are relatively and controls are required. Its major
also require high reliability. Threats disadvantages are that it requires
of disaster or terror attacks have
small in size, typically ranging from
VARs from the system and it normally
11
several kilowatts to several megawatts.
prompted many facilities to require These units are often required to come cannot operate as a standby/
complete self-sufficiency for emergency generator.
continuous operation.
online and operate quickly. They need 12
to have the capacity to run for an
Synchronous generators, however,
extended period of time. The internal
2011 NEC Changes Related to are the most common. Their output is
combustion engine is an excellent
determined by their field and governor 13
Generator Systems choice as the prime mover for the
controls. Varying the current in the
majority of these applications. Turbines
Article 250.30Grounding Separately DC field windings controls the voltage
Derived AC Systemshas been
may also be used. Diesel-fueled
output. The frequency is controlled 14
engines are the most common, but
completely rewritten for clarity and by the speed of rotation. The torque
other fuels used include natural gas,
for usability. Most notably, the term applied to the generator shaft by
equipment bonding jumper was
digester gas, landfill gas, propane,
the driving engine controls the power 15
biodiesel, crude oil, steam and others.
changed to supply-side bonding output. In this manner, the synchro-
jumper (see 250.30(A)(2)). This was Some campuses and industrial nous generator offers precise control
necessary to ensure proper identifica- facilities use and produce steam over the power it can generate. In 16
tion and installation of bonding for heating and other processes. cogeneration applications, it can be
conductors within or on the supply These facilities may find it economically used to improve the power factor of
side of service equipment and feasible to produce electricity as a the system. 17
between the source of a separately byproduct of the steam production.
derived system and the first discon- These installations would typically
necting means. The other require- be classified as a cogeneration facility
18
ments for grounded systems were producing a fairly constant power
renumbered to accommodate the output and operating in parallel with
250.30(A)(2) change. 250.30(B)(3) the electric utility system.
19
Ungrounded Systemshas been
added, and this language requires
20
21

Generator System Design April 2016
Sheet 01 024
Generator Systems Multiple Isolated Standby Generators Multiple generator systems have a
i The second type of generator system more complex control and protection
Emergency Standby Generator System is a multiple isolated set of standby requirement as the units have to be
There are primarily three types of generators. Figure 1.2-2 shows synchronized and paralleled together.
ii generator systems. The first and multiple generators connected to The generators are required to share
simplest type is a single generator a paralleling bus feeding multiple the load proportionally without swings
that operates independently from transfer switches. The utility is the or prolonged hunting in voltage or
1 the electric utility power grid. normal source for the transfer switches. frequency for load sharing. They may
This is typically referred to as an The generators and the utility are never also require multiple levels of load
emergency standby generator continuously connected together in this shedding and/or load restoration
2 system. Figure 1.2-1 shows a single scheme. Multiple generators may be schemes to match generation capacity.
standby generator, utility source required to meet the load requirements Multiple Generators Operating in
and a transfer switch. In this case, the (N system). Generators may be applied
3 load is either supplied from the utility in an N+1 or a 2N system for improved
Parallel with Utility System
or the generator. The generator and system reliability. The third type of system is either one
the utility are never continuously with a single or multiple generators
4 connected together. This simple radial that operate in parallel with the utility
system has few requirements for Utility system. Figure 1.2-3 shows two
protection and control. It also has the
G1 G2 generators and a utility source feeding
5 least impact on the complete electric a switchgear lineup feeding multiple
power distribution system. It should Switchgear
loads. This system typically requires
be noted that this type of generator generator capacity sufficient to carry
6 system improves overall electrical the entire load or sophisticated load
reliability but does not provide the ATS-1 ATS-2
shedding schemes. This system will
redundancy that some facilities require require a complete and complex
7 if the generator fails to start or is out protection and control scheme. The
for maintenance. electric utility may have very stringent
Load 1 Load 2 and costly protection requirements
8 for the system. IEEE standard 1547
Utility describes the interconnection require-
Figure 1.2-2. Multiple Isolated Set of ments for paralleling to the utility.
9 G1 Standby Generators
In an N system, where N is the number Utility
of generators required to carry the
10 load; if a generator fails or is out for
G1 G2
maintenance, then the load may be

dropped. This is unacceptable for most Switchgear
11 critical 24/7 operations. In an N + 1
ATS
system, N is the number of generators
12 needed to carry the load and 1 is
an extra generator for redundancy.
If one generator fails to start or is out
13 Load for maintenance, it will not affect the Load 1 Load 2 Load 3
load. In a 2N system, there is complete
100% redundancy in the standby
14 Figure 1.2-1. Emergency Standby generation system such that the failure Figure 1.2-3. Multiple Generators Operating
Generator System of one complete set of generators in Parallel with Utility System
will not affect the load.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 025
Generator Fundamentals The application of generators requires derived system and a four-pole transfer
A generator consists of two primary
special protection requirements. switch is required or ground fault relays i
The size, voltage class, importance could misoperate and unbalanced neu-
components, a prime mover and an and dollar investment will influence tral current may be carried on ground
alternator. The prime mover is the the protection scheme associated with conductors. ii
energy source used to turn the rotor the generator(s). Mode of operation
of the alternator. It is typically a An IEEE working group has studied the
will influence the utility companys practice of low resistance grounding
diesel combustion engine for most interface protection requirements. 1
emergency or standby systems. of medium voltage generators within
Paralleling with the electric utility is the general industry. This working
In cogeneration applications, the the most complicated of the utility
prime mover may come from a steam group found that, for internal generator
driven turbine or other source. On
inter-tie requirements. IEEE ANSI 1547 ground faults, the vast majority of the 2
provides recommended practices. damage is done after the generator
diesel units, a governor and voltage
regulator are used to control the speed breaker is tripped offline, and the field
and power output.
Generator Grounding and Bonding and turbine are tripped. This is due to 3
(Ref. NEC 2011, Article 250.30(A)(1) the stored energy in the generator flux
The alternator is typically a synchro- that takes several seconds to dissipate
nous machine driven by the prime and (2)) 4
after the generator is tripped offline.
mover. A voltage regulator controls its Generator grounding methods need It is during this time that the low
voltage output by adjusting the field. to be considered and may affect the resistance ground allows significant
The output of a single generator or distribution equipment and ratings. amounts of fault current to flow into 5
multiple paralleled generator sets is Generators may be connected in delta the ground fault. Because the large fault
controlled by these two inputs. The or wye, but wye is the most typical currents can damage the generators
alternator is designed to operate at a connection. A wye-connected generator winding, application of an alternate 6
specified speed for the required output can be solidly grounded, low impedance protection method is desirable during
frequency, typically 60 or 50 Hz. The grounded, high impedance grounded this time period. One of the solutions
voltage regulator and engine governor or ungrounded. Section 1.4 discusses set forth by this working group is 7
along with other systems define the general grounding schemes, benefits a hybrid high resistance grounding
generators response to dynamic of each and protection considerations. (HHRG) scheme as shown in
load changes and motor starting A solidly grounded generator may have Figure 1.2-4. In the HHRG scheme, 8
characteristics. a lower zero sequence impedance than the low resistance ground (LRG)
its positive sequence impedance. In this is quickly tripped offline when the
Generators are rated in power and
case, the equipment will need to be rated generator protection senses the 9
voltage output. Most generators are
for the larger available ground fault ground fault. The LRG is cleared
designed to operate at a 0.8 power
current. The generators neutral may at the same time that the generator
factor. For example, a 2000 kW
generator at 277/480 V would have a be connected to the system-neutral; if breaker clears, leaving the high 10
it is, the generator is not a separately resistance ground portion connected
kVA rating of 2500 kVA (2000 kW/
derived system and a three-pole transfer to control the transient overvoltages
08 pf) and a continuous
current rating
of 3007A 2500 kVA 480V 3 . switch is used. If the generators neutral during the coast-down phase of the 11
is bonded to ground separate from the generator, thereby all but eliminating
Typical synchronous generators system-neutral, it is a separately generator damage.
for industrial and commercial 12
power systems range in size from
1003000 kVA and from 208 V13,800 V.
Other ratings are available and these HRG 13
discussions are applicable to those 51G
ratings as well. Gen
86
R 59G
14
Generators must be considered in the R LRG
Phase 87GN
short-circuit and coordination study Relays
as they may greatly impact the rating 15
of the electrical distribution system.
This is especially common on large
installations with multiple generators 16
and systems that parallel with the
utility source. Short-circuit current
contribution from a generator 17
typically ranges from 8 to 12 times
full load amperes. Figure 1.2-4. Hybrid High Resistance Grounding Scheme
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 026
Generator Controls A synch-scope is typically supplied The subtransient reactance Xd will

i The engine generator set has controls
on paralleling gear. The synch-scope range from a minimum of approxi-
displays the relative relationship mately 9% for a two-pole, wound-rotor
to maintain the output frequency between voltage phasors on the machine to approximately 32% for a
ii (speed) and voltage. These controls
consist of a governor and voltage
generator to be paralleled and the low-speed, salient-pole, hydro-generator.
bus. If the generator is running slower The initial symmetrical fault current
regulator. As loads change on the than the bus (less than 60 Hz) then the can be as much as 12 times full
1 system, the frequency and voltage needle on the scope will spin in the load current.
will change. The speed control will counterclockwise direction. If it is
then adjust the governor to correct running faster, then it will rotate in Depending on the generator type,
2 for the load (kW) change. The the clockwise direction. The greater the zero sequence impedance may be
voltage regulator will change the the frequency difference, the faster less than the subtransient reactance
field current to adjust the voltage is the rotation. It is important that the and the ground fault current substan-
3 to the desired voltage value. These generators are in phase before they tially higher than the three-phase
are the basic controls found on all are paralleled. Severe damage will short-circuit current. For example, a
synchronous generators. occur if generators are paralleled 2500 kVA, 480/277 V, four-pole, 2/3
4 Multiple generator systems require out-of-phase. pitch standby generator has a 0.1411
per unit subtransient reactance Xd
more sophisticated controls. Generators and a 0.033 per unit zero sequence Xo
are paralleled in a multi-generator Generator Short-Circuit
5 system and they must share the load.
reactance. The ground current is
Characteristics approximately a third larger than the
These systems often have a load shed three-phase fault current. The ground
scheme, which adds to the complexity.
6 If a short circuit is applied directly to fault current can be reduced to the
Multiple generator schemes need a the output terminals of a synchronous three-phase level by simply adding a
master controller to prevent units from generator, it will produce an extremely small reactance between the generator
7 being connected out-of-phase. The high current initially, gradually decaying neutral and ground while still being
sequence of operation is to send a to a steady-state value. This change considered solidly grounded.
start signal to all generators simulta- is represented by a varying reactive The electric power system analysis
8 neously. The first unit up to frequency impedance. Three specific reactances must be performed based on the worst-
and voltage will be permitted to close are used for short-circuit fault currents. case operating conditions. Typically
its respective breaker and energize the They are: this is when all sources are paralleled.
9 paralleling bus. Breakers for the other If the system can operate with both
Subtransient reactance Xd, which is
generators are held open, not permit- the utility supply and generators in
ted to close, until certain conditions used to determine the fault
10 current during the first 1 to 5 cycles parallel, then the equipment must be
are met. Once the paralleling bus is rated for the combined fault current
energized, the remaining generators Transient reactance Xd, which is
used to determine the fault current plus motor contribution. If the generator
must be synchronized to it before and utility will not be paralleled, then
11 the generators can be paralleled. during the next 5 to 200 cycles
both cases will need to be looked at
Synchronization compares the voltage Synchronous reactance Xd, which is
independently and the worst case used
phasors angle and magnitude. Both used to determine the steady- state
12 generators must be operating at the fault current
for selecting the equipment ratings.
same frequency and phase-matched
within typically 5 to 10 degrees with
13 each other. The voltage magnitude
typically must be within 20 to 24%.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 027
Generator Protection
Generator protection will vary and
Generator Protection ANSI/IEEE i
Std 242-1986
depend on the size of the generator,
type of system and importance of the ii
generator. Generator sizes are defined 1 1 1
1
as: small1000 kVA maximum up
51 Alternate 32 40
to 600 V (500 kVA maximum when Location
51V
1
above 600 V); medium over 1000 kVA
to 12,500 kVA maximum regardless
of voltage; largefrom 12,500 2
50,000 kVA. The simplest is a single
generator system used to feed emer- 1 3
gency and/or standby loads. In this
Gen 51G 87 3
case, the generator is the only source
available when it is operating and 1
it must keep operating until the
51 Preferred 4
normal source returns. Location Gen
Figure 1.2-5 Part (A) shows minimum 1

recommended protection for a single 51G
5
generator used as an emergency or
standby system. Phase and ground
time overcurrent protection (Device (A) (A) Single Isolated Generator on Low Voltage System (B) 6
(B) Multiple Isolated Generator on Medium Voltage System
51 and 51G) will provide protection for
external faults. For medium voltage
generators, a voltage controlled time Figure 1.2-5. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Small Generators 7
overcurrent relay (Device 51V) is
recommended for the phase protec-
tion as it can be set more sensitive
8
R
than standard overcurrent relays and
is less likely to false operate on normal
overloads. This scheme may not
9
provide adequate protection for
50/5A 87-1
internal generator faults when no 10
other power source exists. Local
generator controllers may offer 50/5A 87-2
additional protection for voltage 11
and frequency conditions outside
the generators capabilities.
50/5A 87-3
Figure 1.2-5 Part (B) shows the 12
recommended protection for multiple,
isolated, medium voltage, small
generators. Additional protection 13
may be desired and could include
generator differential, reverse power,
and loss of field protection. Differential Gen 14
protection (Device 87) can be accom-
plished with either a self-balancing
set of CTs as in Figure 1.2-6 or with 15
a percentage differential scheme as
in Figure 1.2-7 on Page 1.2-6. The
percentage differential scheme 16
offers the advantage of reducing the
Figure 1.2-6. Self-Balancing Generator
possibility for false tripping due to
CT saturation. The self-balancing
Differential Relay Scheme 17
scheme offers the advantages of
increased sensitivity, needing three
current transformers in lieu of six, 18
and the elimination of current
transformer external wiring from
the generator location to the generator 19
switchgear location.
20
21

Sheet 01 028
Reverse power protection (Device 32)

i is used to prevent the generator
from being motored. Motoring could Grounding
Resistor
damage (with other hazards) the prime
ii mover. A steam turbine could overheat 51G
and fail. A diesel or gas engine could

either catch fire or explode. A steam
1 turbine can typically withstand approx-
imately 3% reverse power where a
diesel engine can withstand up to 25%
2 reverse power.
Loss of field protection (Device 40) is 87
3 needed when generators are operating

01
in parallel with one another or the R1
PC
power grid. When a synchronous R1
4 generator loses its field, it will continue 02 R2

to generate power as an induction Gen
generator obtaining its excitation from OC
R2
5 the other machines on the system. 03 R3

During this condition, the rotor will 87G R3
quickly overheat due to the slip
6 frequency currents induced in it. Loss
of excitation in one machine could
jeopardize the operation of the other
7 machines beyond their capability and 52
the entire system.
9
To Main Bus
OC = Operating coil
PC = Permissive coil
10
Figure 1.2-7. Generator Percentage Differential Relay (Phase Scheme)
and Ground Differential Scheme Using a Directional Relay
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 029
Typical protection for larger generators

is shown in Figure 1.2-8. It adds i
phase unbalance and field ground
fault protection. Phase unbalance 3
(Device 46) or negative sequence
87B
ii
overcurrent protection prevents the 81U/O
generators rotor from overheating
damage. Unbalanced loads, fault 1
conditions or open phasing will
27/59
produce a negative sequence current
to flow. The unbalanced currents 2
induce double system frequency
currents in the rotor, which quickly
causes rotor overheating. Serious 3 1 1 1 3
damage will occur to the generator if 51V 40 32 46
the unbalance is allowed to persist.
3 1 4
Other protection functions such as 87G
87
under/overvoltage (Device 27/59) could 60
be applied to any size generator. The Voltage Regulator and 5
voltage regulator typically maintains Metering Circuits
the output voltage within its desired 1
output range. This protection can 1 64 6
provide backup protection in case the 49
voltage regulator fails. Under/over
frequency protection (Device 81U/81O) 7
could be used for backup protection Gen
for the speed control. Sync check E
relays (Device 25) are typically applied 8

as a breaker permissive close function
where generators are paralleled.
Many modern protective relays are 51G
9
microprocessor-based and provide a
full complement of generator protection 10
functions in a single package. The cost
per protection function has been
drastically reduced such that it is 11
feasible to provide more complete Figure 1.2-8. Typical Protective Relaying Scheme for Large Generator
protection even to smaller generators.
IEEE ANSI 1547 provides recommended 12
practices for utility inter-tie protection.
If the system has closed- transition or
paralleling capability, additional pro- 13
tection may be required by the utility.
Typically, no additional protection is
required if the generator is paralleled 14
to the utility for a maximum of 100
msec or less. Systems that offer soft
transfer, peak shaving or co-generation 15
will require additional utility inter-tie
protection. The protection could
include directional overcurrent and 16
power relays and even transfer trip
schemes. Please consult your local
utility for specific requirements. 17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 030
i Generator Set Sizing Typical rating definitions for diesel Electrical rating definitions for natural
gensets are: standby, prime plus 10, gas powered gensets are typically
and Ratings continuous and load management defined as standby or continuous with
(paralleled with or isolated from definitions similar to those mentioned
ii Many factors must be considered utility). Any diesel genset can have above for diesels. Natural gas gensets
when determining the proper size or several electrical ratings depending recover more slowly than diesel gensets
electrical rating of an electrical power on the number of hours of operation when subjected to block loads. Diesel
1 generator set. The engine or prime per year and the ratio of electrical engines have a much more direct path
mover is sized to provide the actual load/genset rating when in operation. from the engine governor and fuel
or real power in kW, as well as speed The same diesel genset can have a delivery system to the combustion
2 (frequency) control through the use
of an engine governor. The generator
standby rating of 2000 kW at 0.8 power chamber and this results in a very
factor (pf) and a continuous rating of responsive engine-generator. A natural
is sized to supply the kVA needed at 1825 kW at 0.8 pf. The lower continuous gas engine is challenged with air-fuel
3 startup and during normal running rating is due to the additional hours flow dynamics and a much more indi-
operation and it also provides voltage of operation and higher load that the rect path from the engine governor
control using a brushless exciter and continuous genset must carry. These (throttle actuator) and fuel delivery
4 voltage regulator. Together the engine additional requirements put more system (natural gas pressure regulator,
and generator provide the energy stress on the engine and generator fuel valve and actuator, carburetor
necessary to supply electrical loads and therefore the rating is decreased mixer, aftercooler, intake manifold) to
5 in many different applications to maintain longevity of the equipment. the combustion chamber and this results
encountered in todays society. in a less responsive engine-generator.
Different generator set manufacturers Diesel gensets recover about twice as
The generator set must be able to
6 supply the starting and running
use basically the same diesel genset fast as natural gas gensets.
electrical rating definitions and these
electrical load. It must be able to are based on international diesel For the actual calculations involved
pick up and start all motor loads and
7 low power factor loads, and recover
fuel stop power standards from for sizing a genset, there are readily
organizations like ISO, DIN and others. accessible computer software programs
without excessive voltage dip or A standby diesel genset rating is that are available on the genset manu-
extended recovery time. Nonlinear
8 loads like variable frequency drives,
typically defined as supplying varying facturers Internet sites or from the
electrical loads for the duration of a manufacturers dealers or distributors.
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) power outage with the load normally These programs are used to quickly
systems and switching power supplies
9 also require attention because the SCR
connected to utility, genset operating and accurately size generator sets for
<100 hours per year and no overload their application. The programs take
switching causes voltage and current capability. A prime plus 10 rating is into consideration the many different
waveform distortion and harmonics.
10 The harmonics generate additional
typically defined as supplying varying parameters discussed above, including
electrical loads for the duration of a the size and type of the electrical loads
heat in the generator windings, and power outage with the load normally (resistive, inductive, SCR, etc.), reduced
11 the generator may need to be upsized connected to utility, genset operating voltage soft starting devices (RVSS),
to accommodate this. The type of 500 hours per year and overload motor types, voltage, fuel type, site
fuel (diesel, natural gas, propane, etc.) capability of 10% above its rating for conditions, ambient conditions and
12 used is important as it is a factor in 1 hour out of 12. A continuous rating other variables. The software will
determining generator set transient is typically defined as supplying optimize the starting sequences of the
response. It is also necessary to unvarying electrical loads (i.e., base motors for the least amount of voltage
13 determine the load factor or average loaded) for an unlimited time. The load dip and determine the starting kVA
power consumption of the generator management ratings apply to gensets needed from the genset. It also provides
set. This is typically defined as the load in parallel operation with the utility transient response data, including
14 (kW) x time (hrs. while under that or isolated/islanded from utility and voltage dip magnitude and recovery
particular load) / total running time. these ratings vary in usability from duration. If the transient response is
When this load factor or average <200 hours per year to unlimited unacceptable, then design changes can
15 power is taken into consideration
with peak demand requirements
usage. Refer to generator set manufac- be considered, including oversizing
turers for further definitions on load the generator to handle the additional
and the other operating parameters management ratings, load factor or kvar load, adding RVSS devices to
16 mentioned above, the overall electrical average power consumption, peak reduce the inrush current, improving
rating of the genset can be determined. demand and how these ratings are system power factor and other methods.
Other items to consider include the typically applied. Even though there is The computer software programs are
17 unique installation, ambient, and site some standardization of these ratings quite flexible in that they allow changes
requirements of the project. These across the manufacturers, there also to the many different variables and
will help to determine the physical exists some uniqueness with regard to parameters to achieve an optimum
18 configuration of the overall system. how each manufacturer applies their design. The software allows, for
generator sets. example, minimizing voltage dips
or using paralleled gensets vs. a
19 single genset.
20
21

Sheet 01 031
Genset Sizing Guidelines Generator Set Installation Hazardous waste considerations

for fuel, antifreeze, engine oil i
Some conservative rules of thumb and Site Considerations Meeting local building and
for genset sizing include:
There are many different installation electrical codes
1. Oversize genset 2025% parameters and site conditions Genset exposure (coastal
ii
for reserve capacity and for that must be considered to have a conditions, dust, chemicals, etc.)
motor starting. successful generator set installation. Properly sized starting systems 1
2. Oversize gensets for unbalanced The following is a partial list of areas (compressed air, batteries
loading or low power factor to consider when conducting this and charger)
running loads. design. Some of these installation Allowing adequate space for 2
parameters include: installation of the genset and for
3. Use 1/2 hp per kW for motor loads. maintenance (i.e., air filter removal,
Foundation type (crushed rock,
4. For variable frequency drives, concrete, dirt, wood, separate oil changing, general genset 3
oversize the genset by at concrete inertia pad, etc.) inspection, etc)
least 40%. Flex connections on all systems that
Foundation to genset vibration
dampening (spring type, cork are attached to the genset and a 4
5. For UPS systems, oversize the rigid structure (fuel piping, founda-
genset by 40% for 6 pulse and and rubber, etc.)
tion vibration isolators, exhaust, air
15% for 6 pulse with input filters or Noise attenuation (radiator fan intake, control wiring, power cables, 5
12 pulse. mechanical noise, exhaust noise, radiator flanges/duct work, etc.)
air intake noise)
6. Always start the largest motor Diesel fuel day tank systems
first when stepping loads.
Combustion and cooling air (pumps, return piping)
6
requirements
Fuel storage tank (double walled,
For basic sizing of a generator system, Exhaust backpressure requirements
the following example could be used: Emissions permitting
fire codes) and other parameters 7
Delivery and rigging requirements Please see the generator set manufac-
Step 1: Calculate Running Amperes turers application and installation
Motor loads: Genset derating due to high guidelines for proper application 8
200 hp motor. . . . . . . . . . . . .156 A
altitudes or excessive ambient and operation of their equipment.
temperatures
100 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 A 9
60 hp motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 A
Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 A
Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . .95 A
10
Running amperes . . . . . . . . . . .445 A
Step 2: Calculating Starting Amperes

11
Using 1.25 Multiplier
Motor loads: 12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 A
13
Lighting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 A
Miscellaneous loads . . . . . . . . . .95 A 14
Starting amperes . . . . . . . . . . .516 A
Step 3: Selecting kVA of Generator 15

Running kVA =
(445 A x 480 V x 1.732)/
1000 = 370 kVA 16
Starting kVA =
(516 A x 480 V x 1.732)/ 17
1000 = 428 kVA
Solution
Generator must have a minimum
18
starting capability of 428 kVA and Figure 1.2-9. Typical Genset Installation
minimum running capability of 370 kVA. 19
Note: Courtesy of Caterpillar, Inc.
Also, please see section Factors
Governing Voltage Drop on
Page 1.3-21 for further discussion 20
on generator loading and reduced volt-
age starting techniques for motors.
21

April 2016
Sheet 01 032

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 System Analysis
Sheet 01 033
Systems Analysis The principal types of computer Short-circuit calculations define

i
programs used to provide system momentary and steady-state fault
A major consideration in the studies include: currents for LV and MV breaker and
design of a distribution system is to fuse duty and bus bracings at any
Short circuitidentify three-phase ii
ensure that it provides the required selected location in the system, and also
and line-to-ground fault currents determine the effect on the system
quality of service to the various
and system impedances after removal of utility power due to
loads. This includes serving each
load under normal conditions and, Arc flashcalculates arc flash breaker operation or scheduled power 1
under abnormal conditions, providing energy levels, which leads to the outages. Computer software programs
the desired protection to service selection of personal protective can identify the fault current at any
and system apparatus so that equipment (PPE) bus, in every line or source connected 2
interruptions of service are minimized Circuit breaker dutyidentify to the faulted bus, or to it and every
consistent with good economic and asymmetrical fault current based adjacent bus, or to it and every bus
mechanical design. on X/R ratio that is one and two buses away, or 3
Protective device coordination currents in every line or source in the
Under normal conditions, the impor- system. The results of these calculations
determine characteristics and set-
tant technical factors include voltage
tings of medium voltage protective permit optimizing service to the loads 4
profile, losses, load flow, effects of while properly applying distribution
relays and fuses, and entire low
motor starting, service continuity and apparatus within their intended limits.
voltage circuit breaker and fuse
reliability. The prime considerations
coordination
5
under faulted conditions are apparatus The following additional studies
protection, fault isolation and service Load flowsimulate normal should be considered depending
continuity. During the system prelimi- load conditions of system upon the type and complexity of the 6
nary planning stage, before selection voltages, power factor, line distribution system, the type of facility
of the distribution apparatus, several and transformer loadings and the type of loads to be connected
distribution systems should be ana- Motor startingidentify system to the system: 7
lyzed and evaluated, including both eco- voltages, motor terminal voltage,
Harmonic analysis
nomic and technical factors. During this motor accelerating torque, and
stage, if system size or complexity war- motor accelerating time when Transient stability 8
rant, it may be appropriate to provide a starting large motors Insulation coordination
thorough review of each system under Grounding study
both normal and abnormal conditions. Switching transient 9
Eatons Electrical Services & Systems
division can provide the studies 10
enumerated above.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

System Analysis April 2016
Sheet 01 034
i Short-Circuit Currents The AC component is not constant secondary current. Limiting the power
if rotating machines are connected source fault capacity will thereby
General to the system because the impedance reduce the maximum fault current from
of this apparatus is not constant. The the transformer.
ii The amount of current available in a
short-circuit fault is determined by the
rapid variation of motor and generator
impedance is due to these factors: The electric network that determines
capacity of the system voltage sources the short-circuit current consists of an
1 and the impedances of the system, Subtransient reactance (x d" ), deter- AC driving voltage equal to the pre-fault
including the fault. Voltage sources mines fault current during the first system voltage and an impedance
include the power supply (utility or cycle, and after about 6 cycles this corresponding to that observed when
2 on-site generation) plus all rotating value increases to the transient reac- looking back into the system from the
machines connected to the system at tance. It is used for the calculation fault location. In medium and high
the time of the fault. A fault may be of the momentary interrupting and/or voltage work, it is generally satisfactory
3 either an arcing or bolted fault. In an momentary withstand duties of to regard reactance as the entire
arcing fault, part of the circuit voltage is equipment and/or system. impedance; resistance may be
consumed across the fault and the total neglected. However, this is normally
Transient reactance (x d' ), which deter-
4 fault current is somewhat smaller than
mines fault current after about 6 cycles
permissible only if the X/R ratio of the
for a bolted fault, so the latter is the medium voltage system is equal to or
worst condition, and therefore is the and this value in 1/2 to 2 seconds more than 25. In low voltage (1000 V
increases to the value of the synchro-
5 value sought in the fault calculations.
nous reactance. It is used in the setting
and below) calculations, it is usually
worthwhile to attempt greater accuracy
Basically, the short-circuit current is of the phase OC relays of generators by including resistance with reactance
determined by applying Ohms Law and medium voltage circuit breakers.
6 to an equivalent circuit consisting of
in dealing with impedance. It is for this
Synchronous reactance (xd ), which reason, plus ease of manipulating the
a constant voltage source and a time- various impedances of cables and
varying impedance. A time-varying determines fault current after steady-
7 impedance is used in order to account state condition is reached. It has no buses and transformers of the low
effect as far as short-circuit calculations voltage circuits, that computer studies
for the changes in the effective voltages are recommended before final selection
of the rotating machines during the are concerned, but is useful in the
8 fault. In an AC system, the resulting determination of relay settings. of apparatus and system arrangements.
short-circuit current starts out higher in Transformer impedance, in percent, is When evaluating the adequacy
magnitude than the final steady-state of short-circuit ratings of medium
9 value and asymmetrical (due
defined as that percent of rated primary
voltage circuit breakers and fuses,
voltage that must be applied to the
to the DC offset) about the X-axis. transformer to produce rated current both the rms symmetrical value and
10 The current then decays toward a flowing in the secondary, with second- asymmetrical value of the short-circuit
lower symmetrical steady-state value. ary shorted through zero resistance. current should be determined.
The time-varying characteristic of the Therefore, assuming the primary
impedance accounts for the symmetri- For low voltage circuit breakers and
11 cal decay in current. The ratio of the
voltage can be sustained (generally fuses, the rms symmetrical value
referred to as an infinite or unlimited should be determined along with
reactive and resistive components (X/R supply), the maximum current a trans-
ratio) accounts for the DC decay, see either: the X/R ratio of the fault
12 Figure 1.3-1. The fault current consists
former can deliver to a fault condition is at the device or the asymmetrical
the quantity of (100 divided by percent short- circuit current.
of an exponentially decreasing direct- impedance) times the transformer rated
13 current component superimposed
upon a decaying alternating-current.
The rate of decay of both the DC and Total CurrentA Wholly Offset
Asymmetrical Alternating Wave
14 AC components depends upon the
ratio of reactance to resistance (X/R) 3.0
rms Value of Total Current
of the circuit. The greater this ratio, Alternating Component -
2.5
15 the longer the current remains higher Symmetrical Wave
than the steady-state value that it rms Value of
2.0
would eventually reach. Alternating Component
16 The total fault current is not symmetrical 1.5
Scale of Curent Values
with respect to the time-axis because

of the direct-current component, hence 1.0
17 it is called asymmetrical current. The
DC component depends on the point 0.5
on the voltage wave at which 1 2 3 4
18 the fault is initiated.
0
See Table 1.3-2 for multiplying factors 0.5

19 that relate the rms asymmetrical value
of total current to the rms symmetrical 1.0
value, and the peak asymmetrical Direct ComponentThe Axis
20 value of total current to the rms 1.5 of Symmetrical Wave Time in Cycles of
a 60 Hz Wave
symmetrical value.
2.0
21
Figure 1.3-1. Structure of an Asymmetrical Current Wave

Sheet 01 035
Fault Current Waveform Relationships i

The following Figure 1.3-2 describes Based on a 60 Hz system and t = 1/2 cycle
the relationship between fault (ANSI/IEEE C37.13.1990/10.1.4)
current peak values, rms symmetrical 260
-----------------
ii
values and rms asymmetrical values 120 -
Ip ---------------- -----------
depending on the calculated X/R ratio. Peak multiplication factor = ----- = 2 1 + e X R = 2 1 + e X R
I 1
The table is based on the following
general formulas:
2 260

t
-------------
---------------------------------
120 2
2
1. Ip = I 2 1 + e X R I rms asym
---------------------------------
XR
-------------
XR
rms multiplication factor = ------------------------------ = 1 + 2e = 1 + 2e
I 3
2t
---------------
Example for X/R =15
XR
2. I rms asym = I 1 + 2e 4
-------
Peak mf = 2 1 + e 15 = 2.5612
Where:
5
I = Symmetrical rms current
2
Ip = Peak current -----------
rms mf = 1 + 2e
15
= 1.5217 6
e = 2.718
=2f 7
f = Frequency in Hz
t = Time in seconds 8
9
2.8
2.7 10
PEAK MAXIMUM ASYMMETRICAL
RMS MAXIMUM ASYMMETRICAL

Based Upon: rms Asym = DC 2 + rms Sym2
2.6 with DC Value
RMS SYMMETRICAL
Taken at Current Peak 11
RMS SYMMETRICAL
2.5
2.4 12
2.3
13
2.2 1.8
R
TO
14
C
FA
2.1 1.7
N
PEAK MULTIPLICATION FACTOR =
O
TI
RMS MULTIPLICATION FACTOR =

CA
2.0 1.6
15
LI
IP
LT
1.9 1.5
U
M
OR 16
AK
CT
PE
1.8 FA 1.4
TION
ICA
1.7
TIP
L 1.3
17
UL
1.6 SM 1.2
RM
18
1.5 1.1
1.4
1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
19
CIRCUIT X/R RATIO (TAN PHASE)
20
Figure 1.3-2. Relation of X/R Ratio to Multiplication Factor
21

Sheet 01 036
i Fault Current Calculations Synchronous motorsuse 5.0 times Medium Voltage Motors
motor full load current (impedance
value of 20%). If known, use actual values otherwise
The calculation of asymmetrical
use the values indicated for the same
currents is a laborious procedure since
ii the degree of asymmetry is not the
When the motor load is not known, type of motor.
the following assumptions generally
same on all three phases. It is common
practice for medium voltage systems,
are made: Calculation Methods
1 to calculate the rms symmetrical fault 208Y/120 V Systems The following pages describe various
current, with the assumption being methods of calculating short-circuit
Assume 50% lighting and 50%
made that the DC component has currents for both medium and low
2 decayed to zero, and then apply
motor load
voltage systems. A summary of
a multiplying factor to obtain the first or the types of methods and types of
half-cycle rms asymmetrical current, calculations is as follows:
3 which is called the momentary Assume motor feedback contribu-
tion of twice full load current of Medium voltage
current. For medium voltage systems
transformer switchgearexact
(defined by IEEE as greater than
4 1000 V up to 69,000 V) the multiplying or
method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-5
factor is established by NEMA and Medium voltage
ANSI standards depending upon the 240/480/600 V Three-Phase, Three-Wire or switchgearquick
5 operating speed of the breaker. For Four-Wire Systems check table . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-7
low voltage systems, short-circuit Assume 100% motor load Medium voltage
study software usually calculates the switchgear
6 symmetrical fault current and the or Example 1verify
faulted system X/R ratio using ANSI ratings of breakers . . . . Page 1.3-8
Assume motors 25% synchronous
guidelines. If the X/R ratio is within the Medium voltage
7 standard, and the breaker interrupting
and 75% induction
switchgear
current is under the symmetrical fault or Example 2verify
value, the breaker is properly rated. ratings of breakers
8 If the X/R ratio is higher than ANSI Assume motor feedback contribu- with rotating
standards, the study applies a multi- tion of four times full load current loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-9
plying factor to the symmetrical of transformer
9 calculated value (based on the
Medium voltage
480Y/277 V Systems in Commercial Buildings switchgear Example 3
X/R value of the system fault) and verify ratings of
compares that value to the breaker Assume 50% induction motor load
10 symmetrical value to assess if it is
breakers with
or generators . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-10
properly rated. In the past, especially
Medium voltage
using manual calculations, a multiply- Assume motor feedback contribu-
11 ing factor of 1.17 (based on the use tion of two times full load current fusesexact method . . Page 1.3-11
of an X/R ratio of 6.6 representing of transformer or source Power breakers
a source short-circuit power factor asymmetry
12 of 15%) was used to calculate the derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-11
asymmetrical current. These values Molded-case
take into account that medium voltage breakersasymmetry
13 breakers are rated on maximum derating factors . . . . . . . Page 1.3-12
asymmetry and low voltage breakers Short-circuit
are rated average asymmetry.
14 calculations
To determine the motor contribution short cut method
during the first half-cycle fault current, for a system . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-13
15 when individual motor horsepower Short-circuit
load is known, the subtransient calculationsshort
reactances found in the IEEE Red Book cut method for
16 should be used in the calculations. end of cable . . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-15
When the system motor load is Short-circuit
unknown, the following assumptions calculations
17 generally are made: short cut method
for end of cable
Induction motorsuse 4.0 times chart method . . . . . . . . . Page 1.3-16
18 motor full load current (impedance
Short-circuit currents
value of 25%).
chart of transformers
Note: For motors fed through adjustable 3003750 kVA. . . . . . . . . Page 1.5-9
19 frequency drives or solid-state soft starters,
there is no contribution to fault current, unless
1) they have an internal run contactor or
20 2) they have a bypass contactor.
21

Sheet 01 037
Fault Current Calculations a voltage = maximum rated voltage

divided by K (for example, 4.76/1.24 =
greater than the available system fault
current of 20,000 A, the breaker is i
for Specific Equipment 3.85). If this breaker is applied in a acceptable (assumes the breakers
Exact Method system rated at 2.4 kV, the calculated momentary and fault close rating is
fault current must be less than 36 kA. also acceptable). ii
The purpose of the fault current calcu- For example, consider the following case: Note: If the system available fault current
lations is to determine the fault current were 22,000 A symmetrical, this breaker
at the location of a circuit breaker, fuse Assume a 12.47 kV system with could not be used even though the 1
or other fault interrupting device in 20,000 A symmetrical available. In Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting
order to select a device adequate for the order to determine if an Eaton Type Capability is greater than 22,000 because
calculated fault current or to check the 150 VCP-W 500 vacuum breaker is Test 1 calculation is not satisfied. 2
thermal and momentary ratings of non- suitable for this application, check
interrupting devices. When the devices the following: For approximate calculations, Table 1.3-1
to be used are ANSI-rated devices, the provides typical values of % reactance 3
fault current must be calculated and the From Table 5.4-1B in Tab 5, Section 5.4 (X) and X/R values for various rotating
device selected as per ANSI standards. under column Rated Maximum equipment and transformers. For sim-
The calculation of available fault current
Voltage V = 15 kV, under column plification purposes, the transformer 4
Rated short-circuit Current I = 18 kA, impedance (Z) has been assumed to be
and system X/R rating is also used to Rated Voltage Range Factor K = 1.3. primarily reactance (X). In addition, the
verify adequate busbar bracing and
momentary withstand ratings of Test 1 for V/Vo x I or 15 kV/12.47 kV x 18 resistance (R) for these simplified cal- 5
kA = 21.65; also check K x I (which culations has been ignored. For detailed
devices such as contactors. calculations, the values from the IEEE
is shown in the column headed
Medium Voltage VCP-W Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Red Book Standard 141, for rotating 6
Capability) or 1.3 x 18 kA = 23.4 kA. machines, and ANSI C57 and/or C37
Metal-Clad Switchgear Because both of these numbers are for transformers should be used.
The applicable ANSI Standards, C37 7
is the latest applicable edition. The Table 1.3-1. Reactance X
following is a review of the meaning System Reactance X Used for Typical Values and Range
of the ratings. (See Tab 5, Section 5.4.) Component Short-Circuit Close and Latch on Component Base 8
Duty (Momentary) % Reactance X/R Ratio
The Rated Maximum Voltage
This designates the upper limit of Two-pole turbo generator
Four-pole turbo generator
X
X
X
X
9 (714)
15 (1217)
80 (40120)
80 (40120)
9
design and operation of a circuit
breaker. For example, a circuit breaker Hydro generator with damper wedges X X 20 (1332) 30 (1060)
with a 4.76 kV rated maximum voltage and synchronous condensers
10
cannot be used in a 4.8 kV system. Hydro generator without damper windings 0.75X 0.75X 16 (1650) 30 (1060)
All synchronous motors 1.5X 1.0X 20 (1335) 30 (1060)
K-Rated Voltage Factor Induction motors above 1000 hp, 1800 rpm 1.5X 1.0X 17 (1525) 30 (1540) 11
The rated voltage divided by this factor and above 250 hp, 3600 rpm
determines the system kV a breaker can All other induction motors 50 hp and above 3.0X 1.2X 17 (1525) 15 (240)
be applied up to the short-circuit kVA Induction motors below 50 hp and Neglect Neglect 12
rating calculated by the formula all single-phase motors
Distribution system from remote X X As specified 15 (515)
3 Rated SC Current Rated Max. Voltage transformers or calculated 13
Note: Interrupting capabilities of some of Current limiting reactors X X As specified 80 (40120)
todays vacuum breakers may have K = 1, or calculated
whereby the interrupting current is constant Transformers 14
across its entire operating range. OA to 10 MVA, 69 kV X X 8.0 18 (724)
Rated Short-Circuit Current

OA to 10 MVA, above 69 kV X X 8.0 to 10.5
Depends on
18 (724)
15
FOA 1230 MVA X X 20 (730)
This is the symmetrical rms value of primary
FOA 40100 MVA X X windings BIL 38 (3244)
current that the breaker can interrupt
at rated maximum voltage. It should
rating 16
be noted that the product 3 x 4.76 x Table 1.3-2. Typical System X/R Ratio Range (for Estimating Purposes)
29,000 = 239,092 kVA is less than the
nominal 250,000 kVA listed. This rating Type of Circuit X/R Range 17
(29,000 A) is also the base quantity Remote generation through other types of circuits such as transformers rated 10 MVA 15 or less
that all the related capabilities are or smaller for each three-phase bank, transmission lines, distribution feeders, etc.
referred to. Remote generation connected through transformer rated 10 MVA to 100 MVA 1540
18
for each three-phase bank, where the transformers provide 90% or more
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point
Capability Remote generation connected through transformers rated 100 MVA or larger 3050 19
This is expressed in rms symmetrical for each three-phase bank where the transformers provide 90% or more
amperes or kiloamperes and is K x I of the total equivalent impedance to the fault point
rated; 29,000 x 1.24 = 35,960 rounded Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 25100 MVA 3050 20
to 36 kA. for each three-phase bank
Synchronous machines connected through transformers rated 100 MVA and larger 4060
This is the rms symmetrical current
that the breaker can interrupt down to
Synchronous machines connected directly to the bus or through reactors 40120 21

Sheet 01 038
The Close and Latch Capability The ANSI Standard C37.010 allows the Step 3: Reduce the reactance network
i This is also a related quantity use of the X values only in determin- to an equivalent reactance. Call this
expressed in rms asymmetrical ing the E/X value of a fault current. The reactance XI.
amperes by 1.6 x maximum R values are used to determine the X/R
ii symmetrical interrupting capability. ratio, in order to apply the proper Step 4: Set up the same network for
multiplying factor, to account for the resistance values.
For example, 1.6 x 36 = 57.6 or 58 kA, or
1.6 K x rated short-circuit current. total fault clearing time, asymmetry, Step 5: Reduce the resistance network
1 and decrement of the fault current. to an equivalent resistance. Call this
Another way of expressing the close resistance RI. The above calculations
and latch rating is in terms of the peak The steps in the calculation of fault
of XI and RI may be calculated by
2 current, which is the instantaneous currents and breaker selection are
several computer programs.
value of the current at the crest. ANSI described hereinafter:
Standard C37.09 indicates that the ratio Step 1: Collect the X and R data of the Step 6: Calculate the E/XI value, where
3 of the peak to rms asymmetrical value circuit elements. Convert to a common E is the prefault value of the voltage at
for any asymmetry of 100% to 20% kVA and voltage base. If the reactances the point of fault nominally assumed
(percent asymmetry is defined as the and resistances are given either in 1.0 pu.
4 ratio of DC component of the fault in ohms or per unit on a different voltage X
per unit to 2 ) varies not more than Step 7: Determine X/R = ------I as
or kVA base, all should be changed previously calculated. RI
2% from a ratio of 1.69. Therefore, the to the same kVA and voltage base. This
5 close and latch current expressed in caution does not apply where Step 8: Go to the proper curve for
terms of the peak amperes is = 1.6 x the base voltages are the same as the type of fault under consideration
1.69 x K x rated short-circuit current. the transformation ratio. (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-
6 to-ground), type of breaker at the loca-
In the calculation of faults for the pur- Step 2: Construct the sequence
poses of breaker selection, the rotating tion (2, 3, 5 or 8 cycles), and contact
networks and connect properly for parting time to determine the multi-
7 machine impedances specified in ANSI the type of fault under consideration. plier to the calculated E/XI.
Standard C37.010 Article 5.4.1 should Use the X values required by ANSI
be used. The value of the impedances Standard C37.010 for the interrupting See Figures 1.3-3, 1.3-4 and 1.3-5 for
8 and their X/R ratios should be obtained duty value of the short-circuit current. 5-cycle breaker multiplying factors.
from the equipment manufacturer. At Use Figure 1.3-5 if the short circuit is
initial short-circuit studies, data from fed predominantly from generators
9 manufacturers is not available. Typical removed from the fault by two or more
values of impedances and their X/R
ratios are given in Table 1.3-1.
10
130 130 130
11 120 120 120

8
7
5
110 110
12 110
4
6
12
10
5
8
100 100 100 6
4
13 4
3
90 90 90
3
14 80 80 80
TIME
Ratio X/R
Ratio X/R
Ratio X/R
TIME
70 70 70
ING
15
RT
ING
60 60 60
PA
ART
16
T
AC
50 50 50
T P
NT
AC
CO
40
NT
40 40
17
CO
30 30 30
5-CYCLE 5-CYCLE 5-CYCLE
BREAKER
18 20
BREAKER
20 20
BREAKER
10 10
19 10
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
20 Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes Multiplying Factors for E / X Amperes
Figure 1.3-3. Three-phase Fault Multiplying Figure 1.3-4. Line-to-Ground Fault Multiplying Figure 1.3-5. Three-phase and Line-to-Ground
21 Factors that Include Effects of AC and Factors that Include Effects of AC and Fault Multiplying Factors that Include Effects
DC Decrement DC Decrement of DC Decrement Only

Sheet 01 039
transformations or the per unit reac- The ANSI standards do not require the Application Quick Check Table i
tance external to the generation is 1.5 inclusion of resistances in the calcula-
times or more than the subtransient tion of the required interrupting and For application of circuit breakers in a
reactance of the generation on a com- close and latch capabilities. Thus the radial system supplied from a single
mon base. Also use Figure 1.3-5 where calculated values are conservative. source transformer. Short-circuit duty ii
the fault is supplied by a utility only. However, when the capabilities of was determined using E/X amperes
existing switchgears are investigated, and 1.0 multiplying factor for X/R ratio
Step 9: Interrupting duty short-circuit the resistances should be included. of 15 or less and 1.25 multiplying 1
current = E/XI x MFx = E/X2.
factor for X/R ratios in the range of
For single line-to-ground faults, the
Step 10: Construct the sequence 15 to 40.
(positive, negative and zero) networks
symmetrical interrupting capability 2
is 1.15 x the symmetrical interrupting Application Above 3,300 ft (1,000 m)
properly connected for the type of fault capability at any operating voltage,
under consideration. Use the The rated one-minute power frequency
X values required by ANSI Standard
but not to exceed the maximum withstand voltage, the impulse with- 3
symmetrical capability of the breaker. stand voltage, the continuous current
C37.010 for the Close and Latch
duty value of the short-circuit current. Section 5 of ANSI C37 provides rating, and the maximum voltage rating
further guidance for medium voltage must be multiplied by the appropriate 4
Step 11: Reduce the network to an breaker application. correction factors below to obtain
equivalent reactance. Call the reac- modified ratings that must equal or
tance X. Calculate E/X x 1.6 if the Reclosing Duty exceed the application requirements. 5
breaker close and latch capability is ANSI Standard C37.010 indicates the
given in rms amperes or E/X x 2.7 if Note: Intermediate values may be obtained
reduction factors to use when circuit
the breaker close and latch capability breakers are used as reclosers. Eaton
by interpolation. 6
is given in peak or crest amperes. VCP-W breakers are listed at 100% Table 1.3-3. Altitude Derating
rating factor for reclosing.
Step 12: Select a breaker whose: Altitude in Correction Factor 7
Feet (Meters) Current Voltage
a. Maximum voltage rating exceeds
the operating voltage of the system: 3300 (1006) (and below)
5000 (1524)
1.00
0.99
1.00
0.95
8
E V max 10,000 (3048) 0.96 0.80
b. -------- I ----------------- KI
X2 Vo
Table 1.3-4. Application Quick Check Table 9
See Table 6.0-1, Tab 6. Source Operating Voltage
Transformer kV
Where: MVA Rating 10
I = Rated short-circuit current Motor Load 2.4 4.16 6.6 12 13.8
Vmax = Rated maximum voltage

100% 0%
11
of the breaker 1 1.5
1.5 2 50 VCP-W 250
VD = Actual system voltage 2 2.5 12 kA 50 VCP-W 250 150 VCP-W 500 150 VCP-W 500 150 VCP-W 500 12
2.5 3 10.1 kA 23 kA 22.5 kA 19.6 kA
KI = Maximum symmetrical 3 3.75
interrupting capacity
3.75 5 50 VCP-W 250 13
c. E/X x 1.6 m rms closing and 5 7.5 36 kA 50 VCP-W 250
33.2 kA
latching capability of the breaker 7.5 10 50 VCP-W 350
10 1 10 49 kA 14
and/or 10 12 1
E/X x 2.7 m Crest closing and 12 15 50 VCP-W 350 75 VCP-W 500
latching capability of the breaker. 46.9 kA 41.3 kA 15
15 20
20 1 20 Breaker Type and 150 VCP-W 750 150 VCP-W 750
25 symmetrical interrupting capacity 35 kA 30.4 kA 16
30 at the operating voltage
50 1 150 VCP-W 1000

46.3 kA
150 VCP-W 1000
40.2 kA
17
1 Transformer impedance 6.5% or more, all other transformer impedances are 5.5% or more.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 040
Application on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis For Three-Phase Fault

i E
I 3-Phase -----
Example 1Fault Calculations X
Given a circuit breaker interrupting and momentary rating in the table below,
ii verify the adequacy of the ratings for a system without motor loads, as shown.
where X is ohms per phase and E is
the highest typical line-to-neutral
Table 1.3-5. Short-Circuit Duty operating voltage or
1 Type V Max. Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Close and Latch or IB
Breaker at V Max. Max. KI at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage Momentary I 3-Phase ------
X
2 50VCPW250 4.76 kV 29 kA 36 kA 4.76
----------- (29) = 33.2 kA I1
58 kA I3
where X is per unit reactance
4.16
LG symmetrical interrupting capability IB is base current
3 36 kA 1.15 (33.2) = 38.2 kA I2
Base current I B = 3.75 MVA
= 0.52kA
Note: Interrupting capabilities I1 and I2 at operating voltage must not exceed maximum 3 4.16 kV
4 symmetrical interrupting capability Kl.
I1 0.52
Check capabilities I1, I2 and I3 on the following utility system where there is no I 3-Phase ----- ---------------------- 8.6 kA Sym.
X 0.0604
5 motor contribution to short circuit.
On 13.8 kV System, 3.75 MVA Base 9 (is less than 15)

System X
R
6 13.8 kV
would use 1.0 multiplying factor for
3.75 MVA- = 0.01 pu or 1%
Z = --------------------------------
375 MVA short-circuit duty, therefore, short-
X circuit duty is 8.6 kA sym. for three-
7 R
= 15
phase fault I1 and momentary duty is
2X
2
2 2 2
Z = X + R = R -------- + 1 8.6 x 1.6 = 13.7 kA I3.
375 MVA R 2
8 Available For Line-to-Ground Fault
Z 1 1
R ----------------------- ------------------ 0.066%
----------------
3E 3I B
9 2 266 15.03 I LG ---------------------------- ----------------------------
X
-------- + 1 2X 1 + X 0 2X 1 + X 0
2
13.8 kV
R
For this system, X0 is the zero sequence
10 reactance of the transformer, which
3750 kVA X = X
----- R = 15 (0.066) = .99% is equal to the transformer positive
R sequence reactance and X1 is the posi-
11 tive sequence reactance of the system.
Transformer Standard 5.5% Impedance
has a 7.5% Manufacturing Tolerance Therefore,
12 4.16 kV
5.50 Standard Impedance 3(0.52)
0.41 (7.5% Tolerance) I LG 9.1 kA Sym.
Transformer Z = 2(0.0604) + 0.0505
13 50VPC-W250 5.09%
Using 1.0 multiplying factor (see
Table 1.3-6), short-circuit duty = 9.1 kA
14 Sym. LG (I2)
Answer
15 Figure 1.3-6. Example 1One-Line Diagram The 50VCP-W250 breaker capabilities
exceed the duty requirements and
From transformer losses per unit or may be applied.
16 percent R is calculated
With this application, shortcuts could
31,000 Watts Full Load 24.2 kW have been taken for a quicker check of
6,800 Watts No Load R -------------------------------- 0.0065 pu or 0.65%
17 3750 kVA the application. If we assume unlimited
24,200 Watts Load Losses short circuit available at 13.8 kV and
that Trans. Z = X
18 Transformer X = Z R
2 2 2
(5.09) (0.65) =
2
25.91 0.42 = 25.48 I B 0.52
Then I 3-Phase ------ ------------------ 9.5 kA Sym.
X = 5.05% X 0.055
19
X/R ratio 15 or less multiplying factor
X R X/R is 1.0 for short-circuit duty.
20 13.8 kV System 0.99% 0.066% 15
Transformer 5.05% 0.65% 8 The short-circuit duty is then 9.5 kA
System Total 6.04% 0.716% 9 Sym. (I1, I2) and momentary duty is
9.5 x 1.6 kA = 15.2 kA (I3).
21 or 0.0604 pu 0.00716 pu

Sheet 01 041
Example 2Fault Calculations

Given the system shown with motor 13.8 kV System i
loads, calculate the fault currents X = 15
and determine proper circuit breaker 21 kA Sym. Available
selection.
13.8 kV R ii
X = 5.5% X
All calculations on per unit basis. 7500 kVA Z = 5.53% = 10
R = 0.55% R
7.5 MVA base 1
7.5 MVA- = 0.628 kA
Base Current IB = ------------------------------ 6.9 kV
3 6.9 kV 1 2
X R X/R
13.8 kV System 3
X = 0.628 (6.9) = 0.015 0.015 0.001 15 X X
21 (13.8) = 25 = 35
Transformer 0.055 0.0055 10 2 R 3
R 4
197A FL 173A FL
Total Source Transformer 0.070 pu 0.0065 pu 11 X''d = 20% X''d = 25%
3000 hp Synchronous Motor

5
X = 0.20 (0.628) = 0.638 pu at 7.5 MVA Base 3000 hp
0.197 1.0 PF 2500 hp
Ind.
6
Syn.
2500 hp Ind. Motor
7
X = 0.25 (0.628) = 0.908 pu at 7.5 MVA Base Figure 1.3-7. Example 2One-Line Diagram
0.173
E I B- Source of Interrupting Momentary X X (1) 1 8

I 3-Ph ----- ----- where X on per unit base Short-Circuit Current E/X Amperes E/X Amperes R R (X) R
X X
I3 Source Transformer 0.628 0.628 11 11 = 157
= 8.971 = 8.971
Table 1.3-6. Multiplying Factor for E/X 0.070 0.070 0.070 9
Amperes (ANSI C37.010, 1979, Figures 1.1-8, I1 3000 hp Syn. Motor 0.628 0.628 25 = 39
= 0.656 = 0.984 25
1.1-9 and 1.1-10) (1.5) 0.638 0.638 0.638
System Type VCP-W Vacuum I1 2500 hp Syn. Motor 0.628

= 0.461
0.628
= 0.691 35 35 = 39
10
X/R Circuit Breaker (1.5) 0.908 0.908 0.908
Rated Interrupting Time, 5-Cycle I3F = 10.088 10.647 Total 1/R = 235
Type of Fault or 10.1 kA x 1.6 11
17.0 kA Momentary Duty
Ratio Three- LG Three-Phase
Phase and LG
Source of Short Circuit
I B = 0.628 = 0.062
Total X = -------- ------------------
12
Local Remote
I 3F 10.1
1 1.00 1.00 1.00 X

System ----- = 0.062 (235) = 14.5 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.0 from Table 1.3-6
13
15 1 1.00 1.00 1.00 R
20 1.00 1.02 1.05
25
30
1.00
1.04
1.06
1.10
1.10
1.13
Table 1.3-7. Short-Circuit Duty = 10.1 kA 14
36 1.06 1.14 1.17 Breaker V Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Close and Latch
Type Max. or Momentary
40
45
1.08
1.12
1.16
1.19
1.22
1.25
at V Max. Max. KI at 6.9 kV Oper. Voltage
15
50 1.13 1.22 1.27 75VCP-W500 8.25 kV 33 kA 41 kA 8.25 (33) = 39.5 kA 66 kA
55 1.14 1.25 1.30 6.9
60 1.16 1.26 1.32 150VCP-W500 15 kV 18 kA 23 kA 15 (18) (39.1) = 23 kA 37 kA 16
65 1.17 1.28 1.33 6.9
70 1.19 1.29 1.35 (But not to exceed KI)
75 1.20 1.30 1.36 17
80 1.21 1.31 1.37 Answer
85 1.38
Either breaker could be properly
90
95
1.22

1.32

1.39
1.40 applied, but price will make the type 18
100 1.23 1.33 1.41 150VCP-W500 the more economical
selection.
100
120
1.24
1.24
1.34
1.35
1.42
1.43
19
130 1.24 1.35 1.43
1 Where system X/R ratio is 15 or less, the
multiplying factor is 1.0.
20
21

Sheet 01 042
Example 3Fault Calculations Answer

i Check breaker application or generator bus for the system of generators shown. The 50VCP-W250 breaker could be
Each generator is 7.5 MVA, 4.16 kV 1040 A full load, IB = 1.04 kA applied.
ii Sub transient reactance Xd = 11% or, X = 0.11 pu
1 Gen X
----- ratio is 30
R
2 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 3
and
XS X X X X RS R R R R
3 XS X-
G1 G2 G3
or XS X
----- and R S ---- Therefore, System --------- ----
R Gen X
----- 30
3 3 RS R R
4
Since generator neutral grounding reactors are used to limit the ILG to I3-phase or
below, we need only check the I3 short-circuit duty.
5
I B I B I B 31B 3(1.04) 4.16 kV
IB Phase -----
- + ------ + ------ + ------------ ----------------------- 28.4 kA Symmetrical E/X amperes
X X X X 0.11
6
X
System ----- of 30 is a Multiplying Factor of 1.04 from Table 1.3-6.
7 R
Short-circuit duty is 28.4 (1.04) = 29.5 kA Symmetrical
8 Three-Phase Symmetrical Interrupting Capability Figure 1.3-8. Example 3One-Line Diagram
Breaker Type V Max. at V Max. Max. KI at 4.16 kV Oper. Voltage
50VCP-W250 4.76 kV 29 kA 36 kA 4.76
9 4.16
(29) = 33.2 kA
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 043
Medium Voltage Fuses Step 3Construct the sequence Low Voltage Power Circuit i
networks using reactances and connect
Fault Calculations properly for the type of fault under BreakersFault Calculations
consideration and reduce to a single
There are two basic types of medium equivalent reactance. The steps for calculating the fault cur- ii
voltage fuses. The following definitions rent for the selection of a low voltage
are taken from ANSI Standard C37.40. Step 4Construct the sequence power circuit breaker are the same as
networks using resistances and those used for medium voltage circuit 1
Expulsion Fuse (Unit) connect properly for the type of breakers except that where the con-
A vented fuse (unit) in which the fault under consideration and reduce nected loads to the low voltage bus
expulsion effect of the gases produced to a single equivalent resistance. 2
by internal arcing, either alone or aided includes induction and synchronous
by other mechanisms, results in current Step 5Calculate the E/XI value, motor loads. The assumption is made
interruption. where E is the prefault value of the that in 208Y/120 V systems the contri-
voltage at the point of fault normally bution from motors is two times the full 3
Current-Limiting Fuse (Unit) assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase load current of step-down transformer.
A fuse unit that, when its current- faults E/XI is the fault current to be This corresponds to an assumed 50%
responsive element is melted by a used in determining the required motor aggregate impedance on a kVA 4
current within the fuses specified interrupting capability of the fuse. base equal to the transformer kVA
current-limiting range, abruptly rating or 50% motor load. For 480 V,
introduces a high resistance to
Note: It is not necessary to calculate a 480Y/277 V and 600 V systems, the 5
single phase-to-phase fault current. This assumption is made that the contribution
reduce current magnitude and current is very nearly 3 /2 x three-phase
duration, resulting in subsequent from the motors is four times the full
current interruption.
fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed
the three-phase fault for fuses located in load current of the step-down trans- 6
generating stations with solidly grounded former, which corresponds to an assumed
There are two classes of fuses; neutral generators, or in delta-wye trans- 25% aggregate motor impedance on a
power and distribution. They are formers with the wye solidly grounded, kVA base equal to the transformer kVA 7
distinguished from each other by where the sum of the positive and negative rating or 100% motor load.
the current ratings and minimum sequence impedances on the high voltage
melting type characteristics. side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of In low voltage systems that contain 8
the transformer. generators, the subtransient reactance
The current-limiting ability of a should be used.
current-limiting fuse is specified by For single line-to-ground fault: 9
If the X/R to the point of fault is greater
its threshold ratio, peak let-through X I X I (+) + X I () + X I (0) than 6.6, a derating multiplying factor
current and I2t characteristics.
(MF) must be applied. The X/R ratio is
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses calculated in the same manner as that
10
E
If ------- 3 for medium voltage circuit breakers.
Modern fuses are rated in amperes XI
rms symmetrical. They also have a Calculated symmetrical amperes x 11
listed asymmetrical rms rating that Step 6Select a fuse whose MF breaker interrupting rating.
is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating. published interrupting rating
The multiplying factor MF can be 12
exceeds the calculated fault current.
Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse calculated by the formula:
interrupting duty guidelines. Figure 1.3-2 should be used where
X/R
older fuses asymmetrically rated are 2 1 2.718 13
Calculation of the Fuse Required
involved. MF
Interrupting Rating: 2.29
Step 1Convert the fault from The voltage rating of power fuses used If the X/R of system feeding the
the utility to percent or per unit on on three-phase systems should equal breaker is not known, use X/R = 15.
14
a convenient voltage and kVA base. or exceed the maximum line-to-line
voltage rating of the system. Current For fused breakers by the formula:
Step 2Collect the X and R data of all limiting fuses for three-phase systems 15
2 X/R
the other circuit elements and convert should be so applied that the fuse 1 2 2.718
to a percent or per unit on a conve- MF
voltage rating is equal to or less than 1.25
nient kVA and voltage base same as 1.41 x nominal system voltage.
16
that used in Step 1. Use the substran- If the X/R of the system feeding the
sient X and R for all generators and breaker is not known, use X/R = 20.
motors. 17
Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard
ranges of X/R and power factors used in
testing and rating low voltage breakers. 18
Refer to Table 1.3-9 for the circuit
breaker interrupting rating multiplying
factors to be used when the calculated 19
X/R ratio or power factor at the point
the breaker is to be applied in the
power distribution system falls outside 20
of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power factors
used in testing and rating the circuit
breakers. MF is always greater than 1.0. 21

Sheet 01 044
i Molded-Case Breakers and Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

Insulated Case Circuit Interrupting Derating Factors
ii BreakersFault Calculations Refer to Table 1.3-8 for the standard Established standard values include
ranges of X/R and power factors the following:
The method of fault calculation is the
used in testing and rating low voltage
same as that for low voltage power Table 1.3-8. Standard Test Power Factors
1 circuit breakers. Again, the calculated
breakers. Refer to Table 1.3-9 for
the circuit breaker interrupting rating Interrupting Power Factor X/R Test
fault current x MF breaker interrupting Rating in kA Test Range Range
de-rating factors to be used when the
capacity. Because molded case breakers
2 are tested at lower X/R ratios, the MFs
calculated X/R ratio or power factor Molded Case Circuit Breaker
at the point the breaker is to be applied 10 or Less 0.450.50 1.981.73
are different than those for low voltage
in the power distribution system falls Over 10 to 20 0.250.030 3.873.18
power circuit breakers. Over 20 0.150.20 6.64.9
3 outside of the Table 1.3-8 X/R or power
X factors used in testing and rating the Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
2
1 + 2.718 R 2 circuit breakers. All 0.15 Maximum 6.6 Minimum
4 MF -----------------------------------------------------
X Normally the short-circuit power factor
1 For distribution systems where the
1 + 2.718 R 1 or X/R ratio of a distribution system
calculated short-circuit current X/R
need not be considered in applying
5 X1 R1 = test X/R value low voltage circuit breakers. This is
ratio differs from the standard values
given in the above table, circuit breaker
because the ratings established in
interrupting rating derating factors from
X2 R2 = X/R at point where breaker the applicable standard are based
6 is applied on power factor values that amply
Table 1.3-9 table should be applied.
cover most applications.
7
Table 1.3-9. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating Derating Factors
% P.F. X/R Interrupting Rating
8 Molded Case or Insulated Case Power Circuit Breaker
>10 kA
m/ = 10 kA m/ = 20 kA L20 kA Unfused Fused
9
50 1.73 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
30 3.18 0.847 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
10 25 3.87 0.805 0.950 1.000 1.000 1.000
20 4.90 0.762 0.899 1.000 1.000 1.000
15 6.59 0.718 0.847 0.942 1.000 0.939
12 8.27 0.691 0.815 0.907 0.962 0.898
11 10 9.95 0.673 0.794 0.883 0.937 0.870
8.5 11.72 0.659 0.778 0.865 0.918 0.849
7 14.25 0.645 0.761 0.847 0.899 0.827
12 5 19.97 0.627 0.740 0.823 0.874 0.797
Note: These are derating factors applied to the breaker and are the inverse of MF.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 045
Short-Circuit CalculationsShortcut Method i

Determination of Short-Circuit Current
Note 1: Transformer impedance generally relates to self-ventilated rating (e.g., with OA/FA/FOA transformer use OA base). ii
Note 2: kV refers to line-to-line voltage in kilovolts.
Note 3: Z refers to line-to-neutral impedance of system to fault where R + jX = Z.
Note 4: When totaling the components of system Z, arithmetic combining of impedances as ohms Z. per unit Z. etc., is considered a 1
shortcut or approximate method; proper combining of impedances (e.g., source, cables transformers, conductors, etc.). should use
individual R and X components. This Total Z = Total R + j Total X (see IEEE Red Book Standard No. 141).
1. Select convenient kVA base for system to

2
be studied.
kVA base 2
(a) Per unit = pu impedance kVA base 2 = (pu impedance on kVA base 1)
2. Change per unit, or percent, impedance from
one kVA base to another:
kVA base 1 3
kVA base 2
(b) Percent = % impedance kVA base 2 = (% impedance on kVA base 1)
kVA base 1
percent impedance = (ohms impedance) (kVA base)

4
3. Change ohms, or percent or per unit, etc.: (a) Per unit impedance = pu Z = kV
2
1000
100
(ohms impedance) (kVA base)
(b) % impedance = % Z =
kV 2

10
5
(% impedance) (10) kV 2
(c) Ohms impedance =
kVA base 6
4. Change power-source impedance to per unit (a) if utility fault capacity given in kVA
or percent impedance on kVA base as selected
for this study: kVA base in study
7
Per-unit impedance = pu Z = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
power-source kVA fault capacity
(b) if utility fault capacity given in rms symmetrical short circuit amperes 8
kVA base in study
Per-unit impedance = pu Z = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
(short-circuit current) 3 (kV of source) 9
5. Change motor rating to kVA: (a) motor kVA 3 (kV) (I) where I = motor nameplate full-load amperes
(b) if 1.0 power factor synchronous motorkVA = (0.8) (hp)
(c) if 0.8 power factor synchronous motorkVA = (1.0) (hp)
10
(d) if induction motor kVA = (1.0) (hp)
Three-phase kVA Single-phase kVA

11
6. Determine symmetrical short-circuit current: (a) Base current = I Base = or
3 kV kV line-to-neutral
(b) Per unit I SC = 1.0

12
pu Z
(c) rms Symmetrical current = ISC = (pu ISC) (IBase Amperes)

13
Three-phase KVA base Single-phase kVA base
(d) rms Symmetrical current = Amperes = ---------------------------------------------------------------- or -----------------------------------------------------------------
pu Z 3 kV pu Z kV
(Three-phase kVA base) (100) Single-phase kVA base (100)
14
(e) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- or --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(%Z) 3 kV (%Z) kV
(g)
(kV) (1000)
= ----------------------------------- 15
3 (ohms Z)
(a) Symmetrical short-circuit kVA = kVA (kVA base) (100)- = kV 2 1000

base- = ---------------------------------------------
7. Determine symmetrical short-circuit kVA: -------------------------
pu Z %Z
----------------------------------
ohms Z 16
2
3(line-to-neutral kV) 1000
(b) = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ohms Z)
17
8. Determine line-to-line short-circuit current: (a) from three-phase transformerapprox. 86% of three-phase current
(b) three single-phase transformers (e.g., 75 kVA, Z = 2%) calculate same as one three-phase
unit (i.e., 3 x 75 kVA = 225 kVA, Z = 2%). 18
(c) from single-phase transformersee Page 1.3-15.
(a) synchronous motor5 times motor full load current (impedance 20%) 19
9. Determine motor contribution (or feedback) as
source of fault current: (b) induction motor4 times motor full-load current (impedance 25%) j
See IEEE
Standard No. 141
(c) motor loads not individually identified, use contribution from group of motors as follows:
on 208Y/120 V systems2.0 times transformer full-load current 20
on 240-480-600 V three-phase, three-wire systems4.0 times transformer full-load current
on 480Y/277 V three-phase, four-wire systems
In commercial buildings, 2.0 times transformers full-load current (50% motor load)
In industrial plants, 4.0 times transformer full-load current (100% motor load) 21

Sheet 01 046
Example Number 1
i
How to Calculate Short-Circuit Currents at Ends of Conductors
ii A. System Diagram B. Impedance Diagram (Using Short Cut Method for Combining Impedances
and Sources).
1 A B C
Utility Source 500 MVA
Major Contribution
Utility
2
Cables
Transformer
3 1000 kV A
Switchboard Fault
5.75%
480V Cables
4 Cable Fault
Switchboard Fault
5 0.002 pu 1.00 pu 1.00 pu 1.00 pu

100 ft (30m)
3350 kcmil Cable
6 A B C
in Steel Conduit
0.0575 pu 0.027 pu 0.027 pu 0.027 pu
Switchboard Fault
Mixed LoadMotors and Lighting
7 Each Feeder100 ft (30m) of 3350 kcmil
0.027 pu
Cable in Steel Conduit Feeding Lighting and
250 kVA of Motors
Cable Fault
8 Cable Fault
Combining Series Impedances: ZTOTAL = Z1 + Z2 + ... +Zn
9 C. Conductor impedance from Table 1.5-17, Combining Parallel Impedances:

1 =
ZTOTAL
1 + 1 + ... 1
Z1 Z2 Zn
Page 1.5-15. Conductors: 3350 kcmil copper,
single conductors Circuit length: 100 ft
10 (30 m), in steel (magnetic) conduit Impedance
0.0595 pu 0.342 pu 0.0507 pu
Z = 0.00619 ohms/100 ft (30 m).
ZTOT = 0.00619 ohms (100 circuit feet) E 0.0777 pu
11 0.027 pu 0.027 pu
D. Fault current calculations (combining imped-
ances arithmetically, using approximate
12 Short Cut methodsee Note 4,
Page 1.3-13)
13 Equation
Step (See) Calculation
1 Select 1000 kVA as most convenient base, since all data except utility source is on
secondary of 1000 kVA transformer.
14
2 4(a) kVA base - = --------------------
Utility per unit impedance = Z = ------------------------------------------ 1000 - = 0.002 pu
pu
utility fault kVA 500.000
15 %Z- = 5.75
3 3(a) Transformer per unit impedance = Z = --------- ----------- = 0.0575 pu
pu
100 100
16 4 4(a) and kVA base - = -------------------

Motor contribution per unit impedance = Z = ---------------------------------------
pu
1000 - = 1.00 pu
9(c) 4 x motor kVA 4 x 250
17 5 3(a) Cable impedance in ohms (see above) = 0.00619 ohms
Cable impedance per unit = Z = (ohms)(kVA base) (0.00619)(1000)- = 0.027 pu

-------------------------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------
pu 2 2
18 (kV) (1000) (0.480) (1000)
6 6(d) Total impedance to switchboard fault = 0.0507 pu (see diagram above)
19 Symmetrical short circuit current at switchboard fault = 3-phase kVA base 1000
= = 23,720 amperes rms
Z 3 kV 0.0507 3 0.480
pu
7 6(d) Total impedance to cable fault = 0.0777 pu (see diagram above)
20
Symmetrical short circuit current at cable fault = 3-phase kVA base 1000
= = 15, 480 amperes rms
Z 3 kV 0.0777 3 0.480
pu
21
Figure 1.3-9. Example Number 1

Sheet 01 047
Example Number 2
i
Fault CalculationSecondary Side of Single-Phase Transformer
A. System Diagram Deriving Transformer R and X:

ii
480V Three-Phase Switchboard Bus at 50,000A Symmetrical, X/R = 6.6 { RX == 0.1498 Z
0.9887 Z
X
6.6 X = 6.6 R
R 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Z= X +R = 6.6R + R = 43.56R + R = 44.56R = 6.6753R
100 Ft. Two #2/0 Copper Conductors, Magnetic Conduit R = 0.0104 Ohms
{
X = 0.0051 Ohms
Z
2
R= R = 0.1498Z
6.6753
75 kVA Single-Phase 480-120/240V; Z = 2.8%, R = 1.64%, X = 2.27%
X = 6.6R X = 0.9887Z 3
120V
F2
Half-winding of Transformer
{ Multiply % R by 1.5
Multiply % X by 1.2 } Reference: IEEE Standard No. 141 4
240V
F1 Full-winding of Transformer
B. Impedance DiagramFault F1 C. Impedance DiagramFault F2 5
RSyst = 0.00054 RSyst = 0.00356 RSyst = 0.00054 XSyst = 0.00356 6

RCond = 0.00677 RCond = 0.00332 RCond = 0.00677 XCond = 0.00332
RTfmr = 0.0164 RTfmr = 0.0227 RTfmr = 0.0246 XTfmr = 0.0272 7

RTotal = 0.02371 RTotal = 0.02958 RTotal = 0.03191 XTotal = 0.03408
F1 F1 F2 F2
8
D. Impedance and Fault Current Calculations75 kVA Base
Note: To account for the outgoing and return paths of single-phase circuits (conductors,
systems, etc.) use twice the three-phase values of R and X. 9
75
ZSyst 0.0018 pu (From Page 1.3-13 RSyst = 2 (0.1498 x Z) = 0.00054 pu
3 0.480 50,000 Formula 4(b) )
XSyst = 2 (0.9887 x Z) = 0.00356 pu 10
kVA Base 0.0104 75
RCond = 2
ohms
ZCond = (From Page 1.3-13 = 0.00677 pu
2
kV 1000
0.48 2 1000
Formula 3(a) )
0.0051 75
11
XCond = 2 = 0.00332 pu
0.48 2 1000
Full-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base)
1.64
RTfmr = = 0.0164 pu 12
100
2.27
XTfmr = = 0.0277 pu
100 13
1.64
Half-winding of Transformer (75 kVA Base) RTfmr = 1.5 = 0.0246 pu
100
2.27
14
XTfmr = 1.2 = 0.0272 pu
100
Impedance to Fault F1Full Winding Z= 2

0.02371 + 0.02958
2 = 0.03791 pu 15
Impedance to Fault F2Half Winding
Z= 2 2 = 0.04669 pu
Short circuit current F1 = 75 (0.03791 x 0.240 kV) = 8,243 A Symmetrical 0.03191 + 0.03408
Short circuit current F2 = 75 (0.04669 x 0.120 kV) = 13,386 A Symmetrical 16
Figure 1.3-10. Example Number 2
17
Method 1: Shortcut Methods at the load side end of the conductors Add source and conductor impedance or
can be calculated as follows. 0.00923 + 0.00273 = 0.01196 total ohms
End of Cable
This method uses the approximation 277 V/30,000 A = 0.00923 ohms Next, 277 V/0.01196 ohms = 23,160 A 18
of adding Zs instead of the accurate (source impedance) rms at load side of conductors
method of Rs and Xs. Conductor ohms for 500 kcmil conduc- 19
tor from reference data in this section X 30,000 A available
For Example: For a 480/277 V system
with 30,000 A symmetrical available in magnetic conduit is 0.00551 ohms 100 ft (30 m)
at the line side of a conductor run of per 100 ft (30 m). For 100 ft (30 m) and 2500 kcmil per phase 20
100 ft (30 m) of 2500 kcmil per phase two conductors per phase we have:
X If = 23,160 A
and neutral, the approximate fault current 0.00551/2 = 0.00273 ohms (conductor
impedance)
21
Figure 1.3-11. Short-Circuit Diagram

Sheet 01 048
Method 2: Chart Approximate Method Step Five

i The chart method is based on the following: Enter the chart along the bottom horizontal scale with the
distance (in feet) from the transformer to the fault point.
Motor Contribution Draw a vertical line up the chart to the point where it inter-
ii For system voltages of 120/208 V, it is reasonable to assume sects the selected curve. Then draw a horizontal line to the
that the connected load consists of 50% motor load, and that left from this point to the scale along the left side of the chart.
the motors will contribute four times their full load current
1 into a fault. For system voltages of 240 and 480 V, it is rea- Step Six
sonable to assume that the connected load consists of 100% The value obtained from the left-hand vertical scale is the fault
motor load, and that the motors will contribute four times current (in thousands of amperes) available at the fault point.
2 their full load current into a fault. These motor contributions
have been factored into each curve as if all motors were For a more exact determination, see the formula method.
connected to the transformer terminals. It should be noted that even the most exact methods for
3 calculating fault energy use some approximations and some
Feeder Conductors assumptions. Therefore, it is appropriate to select a method
The conductor sizes most commonly used for feeders which is sufficiently accurate for the purpose, but not more
4 from molded case circuit breakers are shown. For conductor burdensome than is justified. The charts that follow make
sizes not shown, the following table has been included for use of simplifications that are reasonable under most cir-
conversion to equivalent arrangements. In some cases it cumstances and will almost certainly yield answers that are
5 may be necessary to interpolate for unusual feeder ratings. on the safe side. This may, in some cases, lead to application
Table 1.3-10 is based on using copper conductor. of circuit breakers having interrupting ratings higher than
necessary, but should eliminate the possibility of applying
Table 1.3-10. Conductor Conversion (Based on Using Copper Conductor)
6 units which will not be safe for the possible fault duty.
If Your Conductor is: Use Equivalent Arrangement
3No. 4/0 cables 2500 kcmil

7 4No. 2/0 cables 2500 kcmil 4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil UTILITY KVA
32000 kcmil cables 4750 kcmil 15.0 B 250 kcmil
Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.)
5400 kcmil cables 4750 kcmil #1/0 AWG A INFINITE

8 6300 kcmil cables 4750 kcmil F #4 AWG B 500,000
C 250,000
D 150,000
800 A busway 2500 kcmil 12.5 E 100,000
F 50,000
1000 A busway 2500 kcmil
9 1600 A busway 4750 kcmil
10.0
4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
Short-Circuit Current Readout 250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG
10 The readout obtained from the charts is the rms symmetrical
7.5 #4 AWG
amperes available at the given distance from the trans-

5.0
former. The circuit breaker should have an interrupting
11 capacity at least as large as this value.
2.5
How to Use the Short-Circuit Charts
12
Step One 0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
Obtain the following data: Distance in Feet from T ransformer to Breaker Location
13
1. System voltage Figure 1.3-12. 225 kVA Transformer/4.5% Impedance/208 V
2. Transformer kVA rating (from transformer nameplate)
14 3. Transformer impedance (from transformer nameplate)
4. Primary source fault energy available in kVA
(from electric utility or distribution system engineers) UTILITY KV
15 30
A INFINITE
Step Two 4 750 kcmil B 500,000
C 250,000
2 500 kcmil
Select the applicable chart from the following pages. The 250 kcmil D 150,000
16 charts are grouped by secondary system voltage, which is
25
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
E 100,000
F 50,000
listed with each transformer. Within each group, the chart

20 B
for the lowest kVA transformer is shown first, followed in
17 ascending order to the highest rated transformer.
F
15
Step Three
18 Select the family of curves that is closest to the available
10 4 750 kcmil
source kVA. The black line family of curves is for a source of 2 500 kcmil
250 kcmil
500,000 kVA. The lower value line (in red) family of curves is #1/0 AWG
19 for a source of 50,000 kVA. You may interpolate between 5
#4 AWG
curves if necessary, but for values above 100,000 kVA it is

appropriate to use the 500,000 kVA curves. 0
20 Step Four
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000
Distance in Feet from T ransformer to Breaker Location
5000
Select the specific curve for the conductor size being used. If
21 your conductor size is something other than the sizes shown Figure 1.3-13. 300 kVA Transformer/4.5% Impedance/208 V
on the chart, refer to the conductor conversion Table 1.3-10.

Sheet 01 049
B 4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
i
250 kcmil UTILITY KV UTILITY KVA
30 #1/0 AWG 120

#4 AWG A INFINITE A INFINITE
F B
C
500,000
250,0 0 0
B 500,000
C 250,000
ii
D 150,0 0 0 4 750 kcmil D 150,000
25 E 10 0,0 0 0 100 2 500 kcmil E 100,000
F 50,000 250 kcmil F 50,000
#1/0 AWG
20 80 B
#4 AWG 1
15 60 F 2
4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
10 250 kcmil 40
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil 3
250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG
5 20 #4 AWG
4
0 0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
Distance in Feet from T ransformer to Breaker Location Distance in Feet from T ransformer to Breaker Location
5
Figure 1.3-14. 500 kVA Transformer/4.5% Impedance/208 V Figure 1.3-17. 1500 kVA Transformer/5.5% Impedance/208 V
6
60
UTILITY KVA
120 4 750 kcmil
UTILITY KVA
7
A INFINITE Fault Current in Thousands of Amperes (Sym.) A INFINITE

B 500,000 2 500 kcmil B 500,000
4 750 kcmil C 250,000 250 kcmil C 250,000
B #1/0 AWG
2 500 kcmil D 150,000 D 150,000
50 250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG
E 100,000
F 50,000
100 #4 AWG E 100,000
F 50,000
8
#4 AWG
40 B 80
F
F 9
30 60
10
20 40 4 750 kcmil
4 750 kcmil 2 500 kcmil
2 500 kcmil 250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG
10
250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG 20 #4 AWG 11
#4 AWG
0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 12
Figure 1.3-15. 750 kVA Transformer/5.5% Impedance/208 V Figure 1.3-18. 2000 kVA Transformer/5.5% Impedance/208 V 13
14
4 750 kcmil UTILITY KVA UTILITY KVA
60 2 500 kcmil 12
250 kcmil A INFINITE A INFINITE

B
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
B 500,000
C 250,000
B 500,000
C 250,000
15
D 150,000 D 150,000
50 E 100,000 10 E 100,000
F 50,000 B F 50,000
40
F
8
F 16
30
4 750 kcmil
6 4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
17
250 kcmil #1/0 AWG
#1/0 AWG #4 AWG
20 4
#4 AWG
18
4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
10 2 250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG 19
0 0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
20
21

Sheet 01 050
i
UTILITY KVA UTILITY KVA
30 60

A INFINITE A INFINITE
ii B 500,000
C 250,000
B 500,000
C 250,000
D 150,000 4 750 kcmil D 150,000
25 E 100,000 50 E 100,000
2 500 kcmil
F 50,000 250 kcmil F 50,000
1 20 40
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
4 750 kcmil B
2 500 kcmil
250 kcmil
2 15 B #1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
30
F
F
10 20
3 4 750 kcmil
4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
5 250 kcmil 10 #1/0 AWG
#1/0 AWG #4 AWG
4 #4 AWG
0 0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
5
6
7 30
UTILITY KVA
60 4 750 kcmil
UTILITY KVA
A INFINITE 2 500 kcmil A INFINITE

B 500,000 250 kcmil B 500,000
C 250,000 #1/0 AWG C 250,000
4 750 kcmil D 150,000 D 150,000
8 25 2 500 kcmil
250 kcmil
E 100,000
F 50,000
50 B #4 AWG
E 100,000
F 50,000
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
20 B 40
9 F
F
15 30
10 4 750 kcmil
10 2 500 kcmil 20 4 750 kcmil
250 kcmil 2 500 kcmil
#1/0 AWG 250 kcmil
11 5
#4 AWG
10
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
12 0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
13 Figure 1.3-21. 750 kVA Transformer/5.5% Impedance/480 V Figure 1.3-24. 2000 kVA Transformer/5.5% Impedance/480 V
14
4 750 kcmil UTILITY KVA
30 2 500 kcmil
250 kcmil A INFINITE

15 B
#1/0 AWG
#4 AWG
B 500,000
C 250,000
D 150,000
25 E 100,000
F 50,000
16 20
F
17 15
4 750 kcmil
2 500 kcmil
250 kcmil
10 #1/0 AWG
18 #4 AWG
19
0
0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000
Distance in Feet from T ransformer to Breaker Location
20
Figure 1.3-22. 1000 kVA Transformer/5.5% Impedance/480 V
21

Sheet 01 051
Determining X and R Values How to Estimate Short-Circuit Method 2:

i
Currents at Transformer Refer to Page 1.5-9 in the Reference
from Transformer Loss Data section, and use appropriate row of
Secondaries: data based on transformer kVA and
Method 1: ii
primary short-circuit current available.
Given a 500 kVA, 5.5% Z transformer Method 1:
This will yield more accurate results
with 9000W total loss; 1700W no-load To obtain three-phase rms symmetrical and allow for including motor short-
loss; 7300W load loss and primary short-circuit current available at circuit contribution. 1
voltage of 480 V. transformer secondary terminals,
use the formula:
2
100
I SC = I FLC ------------
%Z
2 3
where %Z is the transformer impedance
3 R = 7300 W
500
3 0.480 in percent, from Tables 1.5-6 through
1.5-11, Page 1.5-11. 4
This is the maximum three-phase sym-
metrical bolted-fault current, assuming
sustained primary voltage during fault, 5
%R = 0.0067 ohms i.e., an infinite or unlimited primary
power source (zero source impedance).
0.0067 500
%R = = 1.46% Because the power source must 6
2
10 0.48 always have some impedance, this
is a conservative value; actual fault
%X =
2 2
5.5 1.46 = 5.30% current will be somewhat less. 7
Method 2: Note: This will not include motor short-
Using same values above.
circuit contribution. 8
2
I R Losses
%R = 9
10 kVA
7300
= 1.46
10 500
10
2 2
%X = 5.5 1.46 = 5.30%
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 052
Voltage Drop Considerations Computer Equipment: With the Motor Starting

i The first consideration for voltage
proliferation of data-processing and
Motor inrush on starting must be limited
computer- or microprocessor-controlled
drop is that under the steady-state manufacturing, the sensitivity of to minimize voltage dips. Table 1.3-11
ii conditions of normal load, the voltage
at the utilization equipment must be
computers to voltage has become an on the next page will help select the
proper type of motor starter for various
important consideration. Severe dips of
adequate. Fine-print notes in the NEC short duration can cause a computer motors, and to select generators of
1 recommend sizing feeders and branch to crashshut down completely, adequate size to limit voltage dip.
circuits so that the maximum voltage and other voltage transients caused See Tab 29 for additional data on
drop in either does not exceed 3%, by starting and stopping motors can reduced voltage motor starting.
2 with the total voltage drop for feeders cause data-processing errors. While Utility Systems
and branch circuits not to exceed 5%, voltage drops must be held to a mini-
for efficiency of operation. (Fine print Where the power is supplied by a
mum, in many cases computers will
3 notes in the NEC are not mandatory.) utility network, the motor inrush can
require special power-conditioning
be assumed to be small compared
In addition to steady-state conditions, equipment to operate properly.
to the system capacity, and voltage
voltage drop under transient condi- at the source can be assumed to
4 tions, with sudden high-current, short-
Industrial Plants: Where large motors
be constant during motor starting.
exist, and unit substation transformers
time loads, must be considered. The are relatively limited in size, voltage Voltage dip resulting from motor
most common loads of this type are
5 motor inrush currents during starting.
dips of as much as 20% may be per- starting can be calculated on the basis
missible in some cases, if they do not of the voltage drop in the conductors
These loads cause a voltage dip on occur too frequently. Lighting is often between the power source and
the system as a result of the voltage
6 drop in conductors, transformers and
supplied from separate transformers, the motor resulting from the inrush
and is minimally affected by voltage current. Where the utility system is
generators under the high current. dips in the power systems. However, it limited, the utility will often specify the
This voltage dip can have numerous
7 adverse effects on equipment in the
is usually best to limit dips to between maximum permissible inrush current
5 and 10% at most. One critical consid- or the maximum hp motor they will
system, and equipment and conduc- eration is that a large voltage dip can permit to be started across-the-line.
tors must be designed and sized to
8 minimize these problems. In many
cause a dropout (opening) of magnetic
Transformer Considerations
motor contactors and control relays.
cases, reduced-voltage starting of The actual dropout voltage varies con- If the power source is a transformer,
motors to reduce inrush current
9 will be necessary.
siderably among starters of different and the inrush kVA or current of the
motor being started is small compared
manufacturers. The only standard that
exists is that of NEMA, which states to the full-rated kVA or current of the
10 Recommended Limits of that a starter must not drop out at 85% transformer, the transformer voltage
Voltage Variation of its nominal coil voltage, allowing dip will be small and may be ignored.
only a 15% dip. While most starters As the motor inrush becomes a signifi-
General Illumination: Flicker in
11 incandescent lighting from voltage will tolerate considerably more voltage cant percentage of the transformer
dip before dropping out, limiting dip to full-load rating, an estimate of the
dip can be severe; lumen output drops transformer voltage drop must be
about three times as much as the 15% is the only way to ensure continu-
12 voltage dips. That is, a 10% drop in ity of operation in all cases. added to the conductor voltage drop
to obtain the total voltage drop to the
voltage will result in a 30% drop in X-Ray Equipment: Medical x-ray and motor. Accurate voltage drop calcula-
light output. While the lumen output
13 drop in fluorescent lamps is roughly
similar diagnostic equipment, such as tion would be complex and depend
CAT-scanners, are extremely sensitive upon transformer and conductor
proportional to voltage drop, if the to low voltage. They present a small, resistance, reactance and impedance,
voltage dips about 25%, the lamp will
14 go out momentarily and then restrike.
steady load to the system until the as well as motor inrush current and
instant the x-ray tube is fired. This power factor. However, an approxima-
For high-intensity discharge (HID) presents a brief but extremely high tion can be made on the basis of the
lamps such as mercury vapor, high-
15 pressure sodium or metal halide, if the
instantaneous momentary load. In low power-factor motor inrush current
some modern x-ray equipment, the (3040%) and impedance of the
lamp goes out because of an excessive firing is repeated rapidly to create transformer.
voltage dip, it will not restrike until it
16 has cooled. This will require several
multiple images. The voltage regula-
tion must be maintained within the
minutes. These lighting flicker effects For example, if a 480 V transformer
manufacturers limits, usually 2 to 3%,
can be annoying, and in the case of has an impedance of 5%, and the
17 HID lamps, sometimes serious. In
under these momentary loads, to
motor inrush current is 25% of the
ensure proper x-ray exposure.
areas where close work is being done, transformer full-load current (FLC),
such as drafting rooms, precision then the worst case voltage drop will
18 assembly plants, and the like, even be 0.25 x 5%, or 1.25%.
a slight variation, if repeated, can be
19 very annoying, and reduce efficiency. The allowable motor inrush current is
Voltage variation in such areas should determined by the total permissible
be held to 2 or 3% under motor-starting voltage drop in transformer and
20 or other transient conditions. conductors.
21

Sheet 01 053
Table 1.3-11. Factors Governing Voltage Drop

Type of Starting Starting How Starting Starting Torque per Unit of Full-Load Amperes i
Motor 1 Torque Current 2 Started Current Full Load Torque per kVA Generator
% Full-Load 3 Motor Rpm Capacity for Each
1750 1150 3 850

1% Voltage Drop ii
Design A Normal Normal Across-the-line 600700 1.5 1.35 1.25 0.0109.00936
resistance 480560 0.96 0.87 0.80 0.0136.0117 1
autotransformer 375450 0.96 0.87 0.80 0.0170.0146
Design B Normal Low Across-the-line 500600 1.5 1.35 1.25 0.0131.0109
resistance
autotransformer
400480
320400
0.96
0.96
0.87
0.87
0.80
0.80
0.0164.01365
0.0205.0170
2
Design C High Low Across-the-line 500600 0.2 to 2.5 0.0131.0109
resistance 400480 1.28 to 1.6 0.0164.01365 3
autotransformer 320400 1.28 to 1.6 0.0205.0170
Wound Rotor High Low Secondary controller 100% current
for 100%
torque

0.0655
4
Synchronous (for compressors) Low Across-the-line 300 40% Starting, 40% Pull-In 0.0218
Synchronous (for centrifugal pumps) Low Across-the-line 450550 60% Starting, 110% Pull-In 0.0145.0118
Autotransformer 288350 4 38% Starting, 110% Pull-In 0.0228.0197 5
1 Consult NEMA MG-1 sections 1 and 12 for the exact definition of the design letter.
2 In each case, a solid-state reduced voltage starter can be adjusted and controlled to provide the required inrush current and torque characteristics.
3 Where accuracy is important, request the code letter of the the motor and starting and breakdown torques from the motor vendor. 6
4 Using 80% taps.
Engine Generator Systems From the nameplate data on the motor, Example: 7
With an engine generator as the the full-load amperes of a 7-1/2 hp. Assuming a project having a
source of power, the type of starter 220 V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrel- 1000 kVA generator, where the
that will limit the inrush depends on cage motor is 19.0 A. Therefore: voltage variation must not exceed
8
the characteristics of the generator. Starting current (%F.L.) = 10%. Can a 75 hp, 1750 rpm, 220 V,
Although automatic voltage regulators three-phase, squirrel-cage motor be
are usually used with all AC engine- 10 100 1000 started without objectionable lamp
9
3.45 or 345%.
generators, the initial dip in voltage is 19.0 220 3 0.40 flicker (or 10% voltage drop)?
caused by the inherent regulation of
the generator and occurs too rapidly From Table 1.3-11, a NEMA design C or
From tables in the circuit protective 10
for the voltage regulator to respond. devices reference section, the full-load
NEMA design D motor with an autotrans-
It will occur whether or not a regulator amperes of this size and type of motor
is installed. Consequently, the percent
former starter gives approximately this
is 158 A. To convert to same basis as 11
starting ratio. It could also be obtained
of initial voltage drop depends on the column 7, 158 A must be divided by
from a properly set solid-state adjust-
ratio of the starting kVA taken by the the generator capacity and % voltage
motor to the generator capacity, the
able reduced voltage starter.
drop, or: 12
inherent regulation of the generator, The choice will depend upon the
the power-factor of the load thrown torque requirements of the load since
158 = 0.0158 A per kVA
on the generator, and the percentage the use of an autotransformer starter
1000 x 10 per 1% voltage drop 13
load carried by the generator. reduces the starting torque in direct Checking against the table, 0.0158 falls
proportion to the reduction in starting within the 0.01700.0146 range. This
A standard 80% power-factor engine- current. In other words, a NEMA indicates that a general-purpose motor
14
type generator (which would be design C motor with an autotrans- with autotransformer starting can
used where power is to be supplied former would have a starting torque be used.
to motor loads) has an inherent of approximately full-load (see Table 15
regulation of approximately 40% 1.3-11) whereas the NEMA design D Note: Designers may obtain calculated
from no-load to full-load. This means information from engine generator
motor under the same conditions
that a 50% variation in load would would have a starting torque of
manufacturers. 16
cause approximately 20% variation approximately 1-1/2 times full-load. The calculation results in conservative
in voltage (50% x 40% = 20%).
Note: If a resistance starter were used for results. The engineer should provide 17
Assume that a 100 kVA, 80% PF the same motor terminal voltage, the start- to the engine-generator vendor the
engine-type generator is supplying ing torque would be the same as that starting kVA of all motors connected to
the power and that the voltage drop obtained with autotransformer type, but the
starting current would be higher, as shown.
the generator and their starting sequence. 18
should not exceed 10%. Can a 7-1/2 hp, The engineer should also specify the
220 V, 1750 rpm, three-phase, squirrel- maximum allowable drop. The engi-
cage motor be started without Shortcut Method neer should request that the engine-gen- 19
exceeding this voltage drop? Column 7 in Table 1.3-11 has been erator vendor consider the proper
worked out to simplify checking. generator size when closed-transition
Starting ratio =
The figures were obtained by using the autotransformer reduced voltage start- 20
Percent voltage drop gen. kVA 1000 formula above and assuming ers, and soft-start solid-state starter
1 kVA generator capacity and 1% are used; so the most economical
F.L. amperes volts 3 reg. of gen. method of installation is obtained. 21
voltage drop.

Sheet 01 054
Voltage Drop Formulas If the receiving end voltage, load current and power factor
i (PF) are known.
Approximate Method
2 2
Voltage Drop E VD = E R cos + I R + E R sin + IX E R
ii
E VD = IR cos + IX sin
ER is the receiving end voltage.
1 where abbreviations are same as below Exact Method. Exact Method 2If receiving or sending mVA and its power
factor are known at a known sending or receiving voltage.
Exact Methods
2 Voltage drop
2 2 ZMVA R
2
- + 2ZMVA R cos R
E S = E R + ---------------------------------
Exact Method 1If sending end voltage and load PF 2
ER
3 are known.
or
2 2
E VD = E S + IR cos + IX sin E S IX cos IR sin
4 2 2 ZMVA R
2
- 2ZMVA S cos S
E R = E S + ---------------------------------
where: 2
ES
5 EVD = Voltage drop, line-to-neutral, volts
where:
ES = Source voltage, line-to-neutral, volts
ER = Receiving line-line voltage in kV
6 I = Line (Load) current, amperes
ES = Sending line-line voltage in kV
R = Circuit (branch, feeder) resistance, ohms
7 X = Circuit (branch, feeder) reactance, ohms
MVAR = Receiving three-phase mVA
MVAS = Sending three-phase mVA
cos = Power factor of load, decimal
8 Z = Impedance between and receiving ends
sin = Reactive factor of load, decimal
= The angle of impedance Z
9 R = Receiving end PF
S = Sending end PF, positive when lagging
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 055
Voltage Drop Table 1.3-12. Temperature Correction Factors

for Voltage Drop
To select minimum conductor size:
i
1. Determine maximum desired
Voltage Drop Tables Conductor Percent Correction voltage drop, in volts.
Size Power Factors %
Note: Busway voltage drop tables are
100 90 80 70 60
2. Divide voltage drop by ii
shown in Tab 24 of this catalog. (amperes x circuit feet).
No. 14 to No. 4 5.0 4.7 4.7 4.6 4.6
Tables for calculating voltage drop for No. 2 to 3/0 5.0 4.2 3.7 3.5 3.2
3. Multiply by 100. 1
copper and aluminum conductors, in 4/0 to 500 kcmil 5.0 3.1 2.6 2.3 1.9 4. Find nearest lower voltage drop
either magnetic (steel) or nonmagnetic 600 to 1000 kcmil 5.0 2.6 2.1 1.5 1.3
value in tables, in correct column
(aluminum or non-metallic) conduit,
for type of conductor, conduit and 2
appear on Page 1.3-24. These tables Calculations power factor. Read conductor size
give voltage drop per ampere per
for that value.
100 ft (30 m) of circuit length. The To calculate voltage drop: 3
circuit length is from the beginning 1. Multiply current in amperes by 5. Where this results in an oversized
point to the end point of the circuit the length of the circuit in feet to cable, verify cable lug sizes for
regardless of the number of conductors. get ampere-feet. Circuit length is molded case breakers and fusible 4
the distance from the point of switches. Where lug size available
Tables are based on the following
origin to the load end of the circuit. is exceeded, go to next higher
conditions: rating. 5
1. Three or four single conductors in 2. Divide by 100.
a conduit, random lay. For three- Example:
3. Multiply by proper voltage drop
conductor cable, actual voltage
value in tables. Result is voltage A three-phase, four-wire lighting 6
drop will be approximately the feeder on a 208 V circuit is 250 ft
drop.
same for small conductor sizes (76.2 m) long. The load is 175 A at
and high power factors. Actual Example: 90% PF. It is desired to use aluminum 7
voltage drop will be from 10 to A 460 V, 100 hp motor, running at 80% conductors in aluminum conduit. What
15% lower for larger conductor PF, draws 124 A full-load current. It is size conductor is required to limit the
sizes and lower power factors. fed by three 2/0 copper conductors in voltage drop to 2% phase-to-phase? 8
2
2.Voltage drops are phase-to-phase, steel conduit. The feeder length is 1. VD = 208 = 4.16 V
for three-phase, three-wire or 150 ft (46 m). What is the voltage drop 100
three-phase, four-wire 60 Hz in the feeder? What is the percentage 9
circuits. For other circuits, multiply voltage drop? 2. 4.16
= 0.0000951
175 250
voltage drop given in the tables by
the following correction factors:
1. 124 A x 150 ft (46 m) = 18,600 A-ft 10
3. 0.0000951 100 = 0.00951
2. Divided by 100 = 186
Three-phase, four-wire, 4. In table, under aluminum conduc-
phase-to-neutral x 0.577 3. Table: 2/0 copper, magnetic conduit, tors, nonmagnetic conduit, 90%
11
Single-phase, two-wire x 1.155 80% PF = 0.0187 PF, the nearest lower value is
Single-phase, three-wire, 186 x 0.0187 = 3.48 V drop 0.0091. Conductor required is
phase-to-phase x 1.155 3.48 x 100 = 0.76% drop 500 kcmil. (Size 4/0 THW would
12
Single-phase, three-wire, 460 have adequate ampacity, but the
phase-to-neutral x 0.577 voltage drop would be excessive.)
4. Conclusion: 0.76% voltage drop 13
3. Voltage drops are for a conductor is very acceptable. (See NEC 2005
temperature of 75 C. They may be Article 215, which suggests that a
used for conductor temperatures voltage drop of 3% or less on a 14
between 60 C and 90 C with feeder is acceptable.)
reasonable accuracy (within 5%).
However, correction factors in 15
Table 1.3-12 can be applied if
desired. The values in the table are
in percent of total voltage drop. 16
For conductor temperature of 60 C
SUBTRACT the percentage from 17
Table 1.3-12.
For conductor temperature of 90 C
ADD the percentage from Table 1.3-12. 18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 056
Table 1.3-13. Voltage DropVolts per Ampere per 100 Feet (30 m); Three-Phase, Phase-to-Phase
i Conductor Size Magnetic Conduit (Steel) Nonmagnetic Conduit (Aluminum or Nonmetallic)
AWG Load Power Factor, % Load Power Factor, %
or kcmil
ii 60 70 80 90 100 60 70 80 90 100
Copper Conductors
14 0.3390 0.3910 0.4430 0.4940 0.5410 0.3370 0.3900 0.4410 0.4930 0.5410
1 12 0.2170 0.2490 0.2810 0.3130 0.3410 0.2150 0.2480 0.2800 0.3120 0.3410
10 0.1390 0.1590 0.1790 0.1980 0.2150 0.1370 0.1580 0.1780 0.1970 0.2150
8 0.0905 0.1030 0.1150 0.1260 0.1350 0.0888 0.1010 0.1140 0.1250 0.1350
2 6
4
0.0595
0.0399
0.0670
0.0443
0.0742
0.0485
0.0809
0.0522
0.0850
0.0534
0.0579
0.0384
0.0656
0.0430
0.0730
0.0473
0.0800
0.0513
0.0849
0.0533
2 0.0275 0.0300 0.0323 0.0342 0.0336 0.0260 0.0287 0.0312 0.0333 0.0335
1 0.0233 0.0251 0.0267 0.0279 0.0267 0.0218 0.0238 0.0256 0.0270 0.0266
3 1/0 0.0198 0.0211 0.0222 0.0229 0.0213 0.0183 0.0198 0.0211 0.0220 0.0211
2/0 0.0171 0.0180 0.0187 0.0190 0.0170 0.0156 0.0167 0.0176 0.0181 0.0169
3/0 0.0148 0.0154 0.0158 0.0158 0.0136 0.0134 0.0141 0.0147 0.0149 0.0134
4 4/0 0.0130 0.0134 0.0136 0.0133 0.0109 0.0116 0.0121 0.0124 0.0124 0.0107
250 0.0122 0.0124 0.0124 0.0120 0.0094 0.0107 0.0111 0.0112 0.0110 0.0091
300 0.0111 0.0112 0.0111 0.0106 0.0080 0.0097 0.0099 0.0099 0.0096 0.0077
5 350 0.0104 0.0104 0.0102 0.0096 0.0069 0.0090 0.0091 0.0091 0.0087 0.0066
500 0.0100 0.0091 0.0087 0.0080 0.0053 0.0078 0.0077 0.0075 0.0070 0.0049
600 0.0088 0.0086 0.0082 0.0074 0.0046 0.0074 0.0072 0.0070 0.0064 0.0042
6 750
1000
0.0084
0.0080
0.0081
0.0077
0.0077
0.0072
0.0069
0.0063
0.0040
0.0035
0.0069
0.0064
0.0067
0.0062
0.0064
0.0058
0.0058
0.0052
0.0035
0.0029
Aluminum Conductors
7 12 0.3296 0.3811 0.4349 0.4848 0.5330 0.3312 0.3802 0.4328 0.4848 0.5331
10 0.2133 0.2429 0.2741 0.3180 0.3363 0.2090 0.2410 0.2740 0.3052 0.3363
8 0.1305 0.1552 0.1758 0.1951 0.2106 0.1286 0.1534 0.1745 0.1933 0.2115
8 6 0.0898 0.1018 0.1142 0.1254 0.1349 0.0887 0.1011 0.1127 0.1249 0.1361
4 0.0595 0.0660 0.0747 0.0809 0.0862 0.0583 0.0654 0.0719 0.0800 0.0849
2 0.0403 0.0443 0.0483 0.0523 0.0535 0.0389 0.0435 0.0473 0.0514 0.0544
1 0.0332 0.0357 0.0396 0.0423 0.0428 0.0318 0.0349 0.0391 0.0411 0.0428
9 1/0 0.0286 0.0305 0.0334 0.0350 0.0341 0.0263 0.0287 0.0322 0.0337 0.0339
2/0 0.0234 0.0246 0.0275 0.0284 0.0274 0.0227 0.0244 0.0264 0.0274 0.0273
3/0 0.0209 0.0220 0.0231 0.0241 0.0217 0.0160 0.0171 0.0218 0.0233 0.0222
10 4/0 0.0172 0.0174 0.0179 0.0177 0.0170 0.0152 0.0159 0.0171 0.0179 0.0172
250 0.0158 0.0163 0.0162 0.0159 0.0145 0.0138 0.0144 0.0147 0.0155 0.0138
300 0.0137 0.0139 0.0143 0.0144 0.0122 0.0126 0.0128 0.0133 0.0132 0.0125
11 350 0.0130 0.0133 0.0128 0.0131 0.0100 0.0122 0.0123 0.0119 0.0120 0.0101
500 0.0112 0.0111 0.0114 0.0099 0.0076 0.0093 0.0094 0.0094 0.0091 0.0072
600 0.0101 0.0106 0.0097 0.0090 0.0063 0.0084 0.0085 0.0085 0.0081 0.0060
12 750 0.0095 0.0094 0.0090 0.0084 0.0056 0.0081 0.0080 0.0078 0.0072 0.0051
1000 0.0085 0.0082 0.0078 0.0071 0.0043 0.0069 0.0068 0.0065 0.0058 0.0038
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 System Application Considerations
Sheet 01 057
Capacitors
Capacitors and Power Factor ANSI Standard C37.06 (indoor oilless Low Voltage Capacitor Switching
i
circuit breakers) indicates the preferred
ratings of Eatons Type VCP-W vacuum Circuit breakers and switches for use
Capacitor General Application breaker. For capacitor switching, with a capacitor must have a current
Considerations careful attention should be paid to rating in excess of rated capacitor ii
the notes accompanying the table. current to provide for overcurrent from
Additional application information overvoltages at fundamental frequency
is available in Tab 35 regarding The definition of the terms are in ANSI
capacitors and harmonic filters Standard C37.04 Article 5.13 (for the and harmonic currents. The following 1
latest edition). The application guide percent of the capacitor-rated current
as follows: should be used as a general guideline:
ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.012 covers the
Capacitor selection method of calculation of the Fused and unfused switches. . . . 165% 2
Where to install capacitors in a plant quantities covered by C37.06 Standard.
distribution system Molded case breaker or
Locating capacitors on reduced
Note that the definitions in C37.04 equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% 3
make the switching of two capacitors
voltage and multi-speed starters banks in close proximity to the switch- DSII power circuit breakers . . . . 135%
Harmonic considerations gear bus a back-to-back mode of 4
Magnum DS power
Eliminating harmonic problems switching. This classification requires
circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
National Electrical Code a definite purpose circuit breaker
requirements (breakers specifically designed for Contactors: 5
capacitance switching). Open type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135%
Medium Voltage We recommend that such application
Capacitor Switching be referred to Eaton.
Enclosed type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150% 6
Capacitance switching constitutes The NEC, Section 460.8(C), requires
A breaker specified for capacitor the disconnecting means to be rated not
severe operating duty for a circuit switching should include as applicable: less than 135% of the rated capacitor
7
breaker. At the time the breaker opens
at near current zero, the capacitor is 1. Rated maximum voltage. current (for 600 V and below).
fully charged. After interruption, when 2. Rated frequency. See Tab 35 for switching device 8
the alternating voltage on the source ampere ratings. They are based on
side of the breaker reaches its opposite 3. Rated open wire line charging percentage of capacitor-rated current
maximum, the voltage that appears switching current. as indicated (above). The interrupting 9
across the contacts of the open breaker rating of the switch must be selected
is at least twice the normal peak line- 4. Rated isolated cable charging and
to match the system fault current
to-neutral voltage of the circuit. If a shunt capacitor switching current.
available at the point of capacitor 10
breakdown occurs across the open 5. Rated back-to-back cable application. Whenever a capacitor
contact, the arc is re-established. Due charging and back-to-back bank is purchased with less than the
to the circuit constants on the supply capacitor switching current. ultimate kvar capacity of the rack or 11
side of the breaker, the voltage across enclosure, the switch rating should
the open contact can reach three times 6. Rated transient overvoltage factor. be selected based on the ultimate
the normal line-to-neutral voltage. kvar capacitynot the initial installed 12
After it is interrupted and with 7. Rated transient inrush current and
its frequency. capacity.
subsequent alternation of the supply
side voltage, the voltage across the 8. Rated interrupting time. Refer to Tab 35 for recommended 13
open contact is even higher. selection of capacitor switching
9. Rated capacitive current devices; recommended maximum
switching life. capacitor ratings for various motor 14
types and voltages; and for required
10. Grounding of system and multipliers to determine capacitor kvar
capacitor bank. required for power factor correction. 15
Load break interrupter switches
are permitted by ANSI/IEEE Standard
C37.30 to switch capacitance, but they 16
must have tested ratings for the purpose.
Refer to Eaton Type MVS ratings.
17
18
19
20
21

System Application Considerations April 2016
Sheet 01 058
Capacitors
i Motor Power Factor % ARpercent reduction in line To derate a capacitor used on a system
current due to the capacitor. A voltage lower than the capacitor
Correction capacitor located on the motor side voltage rating, such as a 240 V
of the overload relay reduces line capacitor used on a 208 V system,
ii See Tab 35 containing suggested
maximum capacitor ratings for
current through the relay. Therefore, a use the following formula:
different overload relay and/or setting Actual kvar =
induction motors switched with the may be necessary. The reduction in
1 capacitor. The data is general in nature line current may be determined by Applied Voltage
2
Nameplate kvar ----------------------------------------------------------------------
and representative of general purpose measuring line current with and 2
induction motors of standard design. Nameplate Voltage
without the capacitor or by calculation
2 The preferable means to select capacitor as follows:
ratings is based on the maximum For the kVAC required to correct the
recommended kvar information (Original PF) power factor from a given value of
% AR 100 100 COS 1 to COS 2, the formula is:
3 available from the motor manufacturer. (Improved PF)
If this is not possible or feasible, the
tables can be used. kVAC = kW (tan phase1tan phase2)
If a capacitor is used with a lower kvar
4 An important point to remember
rating than listed in tables, the % AR Capacitors cause a voltage rise.
can be calculated as follows: At light load periods the capacitive
is that if the capacitor used with the
motor is too large, self-excitation Actual kvar voltage rise can raise the voltage at
5 may cause a motor-damaging over-
% AR Listed % AR
kvar in Table
the location of the capacitors to an
voltage when the motor and capacitor unacceptable level. This voltage rise
combination is disconnected from the The tables can also be used for other can be calculated approximately by the
6 line. In addition, high transient torques motor ratings as follows: formula:
capable of damaging the motor shaft A. For standard 60 Hz motors MVA r
or coupling can occur if the motor is % VR
7 reconnected to the line while rotating
operating at 50 Hz: MVA SC
kvar = 1.71.4 of kvar listed
and still generating a voltage of % AR = 1.81.35 of % AR listed
self-excitation. MVAR is the capacitor rating and
8 B. For standard 50 Hz motors MVASC is the system short-circuit
Definitions operating at 50 Hz: capacity.
kvarrating of the capacitor in kvar = 1.41.1 of kvar listed
9 reactive kilovolt-amperes. This value % AR = 1.41.05 of % AR listed
With the introduction of variable speed
drives and other harmonic current
is approximately equal to the motor
C. For standard 60 Hz wound-rotor generating loads, the capacitor
no-load magnetizing kilovars.
10 motors: impedance value determined must
kvar = 1.1 of kvar listed not be resonant with the inductive
% AR= 1.05 of % AR listed reactances of the system.
11
Note: For A, B, C, the larger multipliers
apply for motors of higher speeds; i.e.,
12 3600 rpm = 1.7 mult., 1800 rpm = 1.65
mult., etc.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 059
Protection and Coordination
Overcurrent Protection damage or withstand characteristics, substation transformer can be coordi-

i
(e) calculation of maximum short- nated with the low voltage breakers.
and Coordination circuit currents (and ground fault Transformer damage points, based on
currents if ground fault protection is ANSI standards, and low voltage cable
Overcurrents in a power distribution ii
included) available at each protective heating limits can be plotted on this
system can occur as a result of both
device location, (f) understanding of set of curves to ensure that apparatus
normal (motor starting, transformer operating characteristics and available limitations are not exceeded.
inrush, etc.) and abnormal (overloads,
adjustments of each protective device, 1
ground fault, line-to-line fault, etc.) Ground-fault curves may also be
(g) any special overcurrent protection
conditions. In either case, the funda- requirements including utility limita- included in the coordination study
mental purposes of current-sensing
tions. Refer to Figure 1.4-1. if ground-fault protection is provided, 2
protective devices are to detect the but care must be used in interpreting
abnormal overcurrent and with proper To ensure complete coordination, the their meaning.
coordination, to operate selectively time-trip characteristics of all devices
Standard definitions have been
3
to protect equipment, property in series should be plotted on a single
and personnel while minimizing the sheet of standard log-log paper. established for overcurrent protective
devices covering ratings, operation
outage of the remainder of the system. Devices of different-voltage systems
and application systems.
4
With the increase in electric power can be plotted on the same sheet by
consumption over the past few converting their current scales, using MMotor (100 hp). Dashed line shows
decades, dependence on the contin- the voltage ratios, to the same voltage- initial inrush current, starting current 5
ued supply of this power has also basis. Such a coordination plot is during 9-sec. acceleration, and drop to
increased so that the direct costs shown in Figure 1.4-1. In this manner, 124 A normal running current, all well
of power outages have risen signifi- primary fuses and circuit breaker below CBA trip curve. 6
cantly. Power outages can create relays on the primary side of a
dangerous and unsafe conditions as
a result of failure of lighting, elevators,
SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V
7
ventilation, fire pumps, security
10,000
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
systems, communications systems,
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
70
80
90
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60
1000 1000
and the like. In addition, economic loss 900

800
700
4.16 kV 250 MVA
900
800
700
8
from outages can be extremely high 600
500
600
500
as a result of computer downtime, 400 400
or, especially in industrial process 300 B

D
300
9
plants, interruption of production. 200
A 200
C
Protective equipment must be adjusted D
10
250A
and maintained in order to function 100
90
80
100
90
1000 80
properly when an overcurrent occurs, 70
60
kVA 4,160V
70
60
5.75%
but coordination begins during power 50 480/277V 50
11
40 19,600A 40
system design with the knowledgeable ANSI Three-Phase
30 Thru Fault 30
analysis and selection and application Protection Curve
20 (More Than 10 in C 1,600A 20
of each overcurrent protective device Lifetime)
12
in the series circuit from the power 24,400A
B
source(s) to each load apparatus. The 10
9
8 600A
10
9
8
objective of coordination is to localize 7
M 7
13
TIME IN SECONDS
TIME IN SECONDS
6 6
the overcurrent disturbance so that the 5

20,000A
5
4 4
protective device closest to the fault 3 3
on the power-source side has the first
chance to operate; but each preceding 2 B C
A 175A
2
14
protective device upstream toward the
power source should be capable, within 1
.9
.8 100 hp
1
.9
.8 15
its designed settings of current and .7
.6
M 124A FLC .7
.6
time, to provide backup and de-energize .5 .5
X = Available fault current
16
.4 .4
the circuit if the fault persists. Sensitivity including motor
.3 contribution. .3
of coordination is the degree to which Ground
the protective devices can minimize .2 Fault Trip .2
C
the damage to the faulted equipment.
.1 .1
17
.09 .09
To study and accomplish coordination .08
.07
.08
.07
Transformer
requires (a) a one-line diagram, the .06 .06
.05
B Inrush .05
18
Max. Three-Phase
roadmap of the power distribution .04 .04
system, showing all protective devices

4.16 kV Fault
.03 .03
A
480V Fault
and the major or important distribution

and utilization apparatus, (b) identifica-
.02 .02
19
Max.
tion of desired degrees of power .01 .01

70
80
90
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10,000
continuity or criticality of loads .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60
throughout system, (c) definition SCALE X 100 = CURRENT IN AMPERES AT 480V

20
of operating-current characteristics
(normal, peak, starting) of each Figure 1.4-1. Time-Current Characteristic Curves for Typical Power Distribution System
utilization circuit, (d) equipment Protective Devices Coordination Analysis 21

Sheet 01 060
ACB (175 A) coordinates selectively Maximum 480 V three-phase fault available fault current at their point of
i with motor M on starting and running indicated on the horizontal current axis. application. All breakers are equipped
and with all upstream devices, except with long-time-delay (and possibly
that CB B will trip first on low level Maximum 4160 V three-phase fault short delay) and instantaneous over-
ii ground faults. indicated, converted to 480 V basis. current trip devices. A main breaker
4160 may have short time-delay tripping to
BCB (600 A) coordinates selectively I 480V I 4160V allow a feeder breaker to isolate the
480
1 with all upstream and downstream fault while power is maintained to all
devices, except will trip before A on the remaining feeders.
The ANSI protection curves are
limited ground faults, since A has no
specified in ANSI C57.109 for liquid-
2 ground fault trips.
filled transformers and C57.12.59 for
A selective or fully coordinated system
permits maximum service continuity.
CMain CB (1600 A) coordinates dry-type transformers.
The tripping characteristics of each
selectively with all downstream
3 devices and with primary fuse D,
Illustrative examples such as shown overcurrent device in the system must
here start the coordination study from be selected and set so that the breaker
for all faults on load side of CB. nearest the fault opens to isolate the
the lowest rated device proceeding
4 DPrimary fuse (250 A, 4160 V) coor- upstream. In practice, the setting or faulted circuit, while all other breakers
dinates selectively with all secondary rating of the utilitys protective device remain closed, continuing power to
protective devices. Curve converted to sets the upper limit. Even in cases the entire unfaulted part of the system.
5 480 V basis. Clears transformer inrush where the customer owns the medium
The National Electrical Code 1
point (12 x FLC for 0.1 sec.), indicating voltage or higher distribution system,
contains specific requirements for
that fuse will not blow on inrush. the setting or rating of the lowest set
designing certain circuits with selective
6 Fuse is underneath right-half of ANSI protective device at the source deter-
coordination. Article 100 defines
three-phase withstand curve, indicating mines the settings of the downstream
selective coordination: Coordination
fuse will protect transformer for high- devices and the coordination.
(Selective), the following definition:
7 magnitude faults up to ANSI rating.
Therefore the coordination study Localization of an overcurrent condi-
Delta-wye secondary side short should start at the present setting tion to restrict outages to the circuit or
equipment affected, accomplished by
8 circuit is not reflected to the primary or rating of the upstream device and
work toward the lowest rated device. If the choice of overcurrent protective
by the relation
this procedure results in unacceptable devices and their ratings or settings.
VS
9 I P I S
settings, the setting or rating of the 1 NEC 2011 NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
VP upstream device should be reviewed. International Electrical Code Series.
Where the utility is the sole source,
Article 620.62 (elevators, dumbwaiters,
10 for L-L and L-G faults. For line-to-line they should be consulted. Where the
escalators, moving walks, wheelchair
fault, the secondary (low voltage) side owner has its own medium or higher
voltage distribution, the settings or lifts, and stairway chair lifts) requires
fault current is 0.866 x I three-phase
11 ratings of all upstream devices should Where more than one driving machine
fault current.
be checked. disconnecting means is supplied by a
However, the primary (high voltage) single feeder, the overcurrent protective
If perfect coordination is not feasible, devices in each disconnecting means
12 side fault is the same as if the secondary
then lack of coordination should be shall be selectively coordinated with
fault was a three-phase fault. Therefore
in coordination studies, the knee of the limited to the smallest part of the system. any other supply side overcurrent
13 short-time pickup setting on the sec- Application data is available for all protective device. A similar require-
ondary breaker should be multiplied by protective equipment to permit ment under Article 700.27 is as follows;
systems to be designed for adequate Emergency system(s) overcurrent
14 1 or 1.1547 overcurrent protection and coordina- devices shall be selectively coordinated
0.866 with all supply side overcurrent
tion. For circuit breakers of all types,
time-current curves permit selection of protective devices. Article 701.27
before it is compared to the minimum
15 melting time of the upstream primary instantaneous and inverse-time trips. states that Legally required standby
system(s) overcurrent devices shall be
fuse curve. In the example shown, the For more complex circuit breakers,
with solid-state trip units, trip curves selectively coordinated with all supply
knee is at 4000 A 30 sec., and the 30-
16 sec. trip time should be compared to include long- and short-time delays, side overcurrent devices.
the MMT (minimum melt time) of the as well as ground-fault tripping, with a Exception: Selective coordination
fuse curve at 4000 x 1.1547 = 4619 A. In wide range of settings and features to shall not be required between two
17 this case, there is adequate clearance provide selectivity and coordination. overcurrent devices located in series
to the fuse curve. For current-limiting circuit breakers, if no loads are connected in parallel
fuses, and circuit breakers with with the downstream device.
18 In the example shown, the ANSI integral fuses, not only are time-
three-phase through fault protection current characteristic curves available, In addition, for health care facilities,
curve must be multiplied by 0.577 but also data on current-limiting Article 517.26, Application of Other
19 and replotted in order to determine performance and protection for Articles requires that The essential
the protection given by the primary downstream devices. electrical system shall meet the
for a single line to ground fault in requirements of Article 700, except
20 the secondary. In a fully rated system, all circuit as amended by Article 517.
breakers must have an interrupting
capacity adequate for the maximum
21

Sheet 01 061
All breakers must have an interrupting Protection of Conductors (Excerpts E. Tap Conductors. Tap conductors
capacity not less than the maximum
from NFPA 70-2011, Article 240.4) shall be permitted to be protected i
available short-circuit current at their against overcurrent in accordance
point of application. A selective Conductors, other than flexible cords with the following:
system is a fully rated system with and fixture wires, shall be protected ii
tripping devices chosen and adjusted against overcurrent in accordance with 1. 210.19(A)(3) and (A)(4) Household
to provide the desired selectivity. their ampacities as specified in Section Ranges and Cooking Appliances
The tripping characteristics of each 310.15, unless otherwise permitted or and Other Loads. 1
overcurrent device should not over- required in (A) through (G). 2. 240.5(B)(2) Fixture Wire.
lap, but should maintain a minimum
time interval for devices in series (to A. Power Loss Hazard. Conductor 3. 240.21 Location in Circuit. 2
allow for normal operating tolerances) overload protection shall not be
required where the interruption of 4. 368.17(B) Reduction in Ampacity
at all current values. Generally, a
maximum of four low voltage circuit the circuit would create a hazard, Size of Busway. 3
breakers can be operated selectively such as in a material handling
magnet circuit or fire pump circuit. 5. 368.17(C) Feeder or Branch Circuits
in series, with the feeder or branch (busway taps).
breaker downstream furthest from Short-circuit protection shall be 4
the source. provided. 6. 430.53(D) Single Motor Taps.
Note: FPN See NFPA 20-2003, standard
Specify true rms sensing devices in for the Installation of Stationary Pumps Circuit Breaker Cable 5
order to avoid false trips due to rapid
currents or spikes. Specify tripping
for Fire Protection. Temperature Ratings
elements with I2t or I4t feature for B. Devices Rated 800 A or Less. The UL listed circuit breakers rated 125 A or 6
improved coordination with other next higher standard overcurrent less shall be marked as being suitable
devices having I2t or I4t (such as device rating (above the ampacity for 60 C (140F), 75 C (167 F) only or
OPTIM trip units) characteristics of the conductors being protected) 60/75 C (140/167F) wire. All Eaton 7
and fuses. shall be permitted to be used, breakers rated 125 A or less are marked
provided all of the following 60/75 C (140/167 F). All UL listed circuit
In general for systems such as shown
in the example: conditions are met. breakers rated over 125 A are suitable 8
for 75 C conductors. Conductors rated
1. The settings or ratings of the 1. The conductors being protected for higher temperatures may be used,
primary side fuse and main breaker are not part of a branch circuit but must not be loaded to carry more 9
must not exceed the settings supplying more than one receptacle current than the 75 C ampacity of that
allowed by NEC Article 450. for cord-and-plug-connected size conductor for equipment marked
portable loads. or rated 75 C or the 60 C ampacity of 10
2. At 12 x IFL the minimum melting that size conductor for equipment
time characteristic of the fuse 2. The ampacity of the conductors
marked or rated 60 C. However, when
does not correspond with the
should be higher than 0.1 second.
standard ampere rating of a fuse or
applying derated factors, so long as the 11
actual load does not exceed the lower
3. The primary fuse should be to the a circuit breaker without overload
of the derated ampacity or the 75 C or
left of the transformer damage trip adjustments above its rating
curve as much as possible. The (but that shall be permitted to have
60 C ampacity that applies. 12
correction factor for a single line- other trip or rating adjustments).
to-ground factor must be applied
Zone Selective Interlocking
to the damage curve. 3. The next higher standard rating Trip elements equipped with zone 13
selected does not exceed 800 A. selective interlocking, trip without
4. The setting of the short-time delay intentional time delay unless a
element must be checked against C. Overcurrent Devices Rated Over
restraint signal is received from 14
the fuse MMT after it is corrected 800 A. Where the overcurrent
device is rated over 800 A, the a protective device downstream.
for line-to-line faults. Breakers equipped with this feature
ampacity of the conductors it
reduce the damage at the point of
15
5. The maximum fault current must protects shall be equal to or
be indicated at the load side of greater than the rating of the fault if the fault occurs at a location
between the zone of protection.
each protective device. overcurrent device as defined in 16
Section 240.6. The upstream breaker upon receipt
6. The setting of a feeder protective
device must comply with Article D. Small Conductors. Unless of the restraint signal will not trip until
240 and Article 430 of the NEC. specifically permitted in 240.4(E) its time-delay setting times out. If the 17
It also must allow the starting or 240.4(G), the overcurrent breaker immediately downstream of the
and acceleration of the largest protection shall not exceed 15 A fault does not open, then after timing
motor on the feeder while carrying for 14 AWG, 20 A for 12 AWG, and out, the upstream breaker will trip. 18
all the other loads on the feeder. 30 A for 10 AWG copper; or 15 A Breakers equipped with ground fault
for 12 AWG and 25 A for 10 AWG trip elements should also be specified 19
aluminum and copper-clad to include zone interlocking for the
aluminum after any correction ground fault trip element.
factors for ambient temperature 20
and number of conductors have
been applied.
21

Sheet 01 062
Ground Fault Protection Suggested Ground Fault Settings The Series G high performance,
i Article 230.95 of NEC requires ground-
current-limiting circuit breaker series
For the main devices: offers interrupting ratings to 200 kA.
fault protection of equipment shall be A ground fault pickup setting equal Frames are EGC, EGU, EGX, JGC, JGU,
ii provided for solidly grounded wye
electrical services of more than 150 V
to 2030% of the main breaker rating JGX, LGC, LGU and LGX.
but not to exceed 1200 A, and a time
to ground, but not exceeding 600 V delay equal to the delay of the short- Any of these current-limiting devices
1 phase-to-phase for each service time element, but not to exceed fuses, fused breakers or current-limit-
disconnect rated 1000 A or more. 1 second. ing breakerscannot only clear these
large faults safely, but also will limit
The rating of the service disconnect the Ip and I2t let-through significantly
2 shall be considered to be the rating
For the feeder ground fault setting:
A setting equal to 2030% of the feeder to prevent damage to apparatus
of the largest fuse that can be installed ampacity and a time delay to coordinate downstream, extending their zone
or the highest continuous current trip
3 setting for which the actual overcurrent
with the setting of the main (at least of protection. Without the current
6 cycles below the main). limitation of the upstream device,
device installed in a circuit breaker is the fault current could exceed the with-
rated or can be adjusted. If the desire to selectively coordinate
4 ground fault devices results in settings
stand capability of the downstream
The maximum allowable settings are: equipment. Underwriters
that do not offer adequate damage
1200 A pickup, 1 second or less trip Laboratories tests and lists these
protection against arcing single line-
5 delay at currents of 3000 A or greater. ground faults, the design engineer
series combinations. Application
information is available for
The characteristics of the ground-fault should decide between coordination
combinations that have been tested
and damage limitation.
6 trip elements create coordination and UL-listed for safe operation
problems with downstream devices For low voltage systems with high- downstream from MDSL, TRI-PAC,
not equipped with ground fault magnitude available short-circuit and Current Limit-R, or Series C
7 protection. The National Electrical currents, common in urban areas and breakers of various ratings, under
Code exempts fire pumps and large industrial installations, several high available fault currents.
continuous industrial processes solutions are available. High interrupt-
Protective devices in electrical
8 from this requirement. ing Series C molded case breakers,
distribution systems may be properly
It is recommended that in solidly current-limiting circuit breakers, or
coordinated when the systems are
grounded 480/277 V systems where current-limiting fuses, limiters integral
9 designed and built, but that is no
main breakers are specified to be with molded-case circuit breakers
guarantee that they will remain
equipped with ground fault trip elements (TRI-PAC) or mounted on power
coordinated. System changes and
that the feeder breakers be specified circuit breakers (MDSL) can be used to
10 additions, plus power source changes,
to be equipped with ground fault trip handle these large fault currents. To
frequently modify the protection
elements as well. provide current limiting, these devices
requirements, sometimes causing loss
must clear the fault completely within
11 of coordination and even increasing
the first half-cycle, limiting the peak
fault currents beyond the ratings of
current (Ip) and heat energy (I2t)
some devices. Consequently, periodic
let-through to considerably less than
12 what would have occurred without
study of protective-device settings
and ratings is as important for safety
the device. For a fully fusible system,
and preventing power outages
rule-of-thumb fuse ratios or more
13 accurate I2t curves can be used to
as is periodic maintenance of the
distribution system.
provide selectivity and coordination.
For fuse-breaker combinations, the
14 fuse should be selected (coordinated)
so as to permit the breaker to handle
those overloads and faults within its
15 capacity; the fuse should operate
before or with the breaker only on
large faults, approaching the interrupt-
16 ing capacity of the breaker, to minimize
fuse blowing. Recently, unfused, truly
current-limiting circuit breakers with
17 interrupting ratings adequate for the
largest systems (Type Series C, FDC,
JDC, KDC, LDC and NDC frames
18 or Type Current Limit-R) have
become available.
19
20
21

Sheet 01 063
Grounding/Ground Fault Protection
Grounding above ground potential. Any person The equipment grounding system
i
coming in contact with such an object must be bonded to the grounding
Grounding encompasses several while grounded could be seriously electrode at the source or service;
different but interrelated aspects of injured or killed. In addition, current however, it may be also connected
electrical distribution system design flow from the accidental grounding of to ground at many other points. ii
and construction, all of which are an energized part of the system could This will not cause problems with
essential to the safety and proper generate sufficient heat (often with the safe operation of the electrical
operation of the system and equip- arcing) to start a fire. To prevent the distribution system. Where computers, 1
ment supplied by it. Among these establishment of such unsafe poten- data processing, or microprocessor-
are equipment grounding, system tial difference requires that (1) the based industrial process control
grounding, static and lightning equipment grounding conductor pro- systems are installed, the equipment 2
protection, and connection to earth vide a return path for ground fault cur- grounding system must be designed
as a reference (zero) potential. rents of sufficiently low impedance to to minimize interference with their
prevent unsafe voltage drop, and (2) proper operation. Often, isolated 3
1. Equipment Grounding the equipment grounding conductor grounding of this equipment, or
be large enough to carry the maximum isolated electrical supply systems are
Equipment grounding is essential
ground fault current, without burning required to protect microprocessors 4
to safety of personnel. Its function is
off, for sufficient time to permit protec- from power system noise that does
to ensure that all exposed noncurrent-
tive devices (ground fault relays, circuit not in any way affect motors or other
carrying metallic parts of all structures
breakers, fuses) to clear the fault. The electrical equipment. Such systems 5
and equipment in or near the electrical
grounded conductor of the system must use single-point ground concept
distribution system are at the same
(usually the neutral conductor), although to minimize noise and still meet
potential, and that this is the zero
grounded at the source, must not be the NEC requirements. Any separate 6
reference potential of the earth.
used for equipment grounding. isolated ground mat must be tied to the
Equipment grounding is required
rest of the facility ground mat system
by both the National Electrical Code The equipment grounding conductor for NEC compliance. 7
(Article 250) and the National Electrical may be the metallic conduit or raceway
Safety Code regardless of how the of the wiring system, or a separate 2. System Grounding
power system is grounded. Equipment equipment grounding conductor, 8
grounding also provides a return path run with the circuit conductors, as System grounding connects the
for ground fault currents, permitting permitted by NEC. If a separate electrical supply, from the utility, from
protective devices to operate. Acciden- equipment grounding conductor is transformer secondary windings, or 9
tal contact of an energized conductor of used, it may be bare or insulated; if from a generator, to ground. A system
the system with an improperly insulated, the insulation must be green, can be solidly grounded (no intentional
grounded noncurrent-carry metallic green with yellow stripe or green tape. impedance to ground), impedance 10
part of the system (such as a motor Conductors with green insulation may grounded (through a resistance or
frame or panelboard enclosure) would not be used for any purpose other than reactance), or ungrounded (with no
raise the potential of the metal object for equipment grounding. intentional connection to ground. 11
3. Medium Voltage System: Grounding
Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (from ANSI C62.92) 12
Description A B C D E
Ungrounded Solidly Grounded Reactance Grounded Resistance Grounded Resonant Grounded
13
(1) Apparatus Fully insulated Lowest Partially graded Partially graded Partially graded
insulation
(2) Fault to Usually low Maximum value rarely Cannot satisfactorily be Low Negligible except when 14
ground current higher than three-phase reduced below one-half Petersen coil is short
short circuit current or one-third of values for circuited for relay
solid grounding purposes when it may
compare with solidly 15
grounded systems
(3) Stability Usually unimportant Lower than with other Improved over solid Improved over solid Is eliminated from
methods but can be grounding particularly grounding particularly consideration during 16
made satisfactory by use if used at receiving end if used at receiving end single line-to-ground
of high-speed breakers of system of system faults unless neutralizer
is short circuited to
isolate fault by relays
17
(4) Relaying Difficult Satisfactory Satisfactory Satisfactory Requires special
provisions but can be
made satisfactory 18
(5) Arcing Likely Unlikely Possible if reactance is Unlikely Unlikely
grounds excessive
(6) Localizing Effect of fault transmitted Effect of faults localized Effect of faults localized to Effect of faults Effect of faults 19
faults as excess voltage on to system or part of system or part of system transmitted as excess transmitted as excess
sound phases to all system where they occur where they occur unless voltage on sound phases voltage on sound phases
parts of conductively
connected network
reactance is quite high to all parts of conductively
connected network
to all parts of conductively
connected network
20
(7) Double Likely Likely Unlikely unless Unlikely unless Seem to be more likely
faults reactance is quite high resistance is quite high but conclusive information
and insulation weak and insulation weak not available 21

Sheet 01 064
Table 1.4-1. Features of Ungrounded and Grounded Systems (Continued)

i Description A B C D E
Ungrounded Solidly Grounded Reactance Grounded Resistance Grounded Resonant Grounded
ii (8) Lightning
protection
Ungrounded neutral Highest efficiency and
service arresters must be lowest cost
If reactance is very high
arresters for ungrounded
Arresters for ungrounded,
neutral service usually
Ungrounded neutral
service arresters must
applied at sacrifice in cost neutral service must be must be applied at be applied at sacrifice
and efficiency applied at sacrifice in cost sacrifice in cost and in cost and efficiency
1 and efficiency efficiency
(9) Telephone Will usually be low Will be greatest in Will be reduced from Will be reduced from Will be low in magnitude
interference except in cases of double magnitude due to higher solidly grounded values solidly grounded values except in cases of double
2 faults or electrostatic fault currents but can faults or series resonance
induction with neutral be quickly cleared at harmonic frequencies,
displaced but duration particularly with high but duration may be great
3 may be great speed breakers
(10) Radio May be quite high during Minimum Greater than for Greater than for May be high during faults
interference faults or when neutral solidly grounded, solidly grounded,
is displayed when faults occur when faults occur
4 (11) Line Will inherently clear Must be isolated for Must be isolated for Must be isolated for Need not be isolated but
availability themselves if total length each fault each fault each fault will inherently clear itself
of interconnected line is in about 60 to 80 percent
5 low and require isolation of faults
from system in increas-
ing percentages as length
6 becomes greater
(12) Adaptability Cannot be interconnected Satisfactory indefinitely Satisfactory indefinitely Satisfactory with solidly- Cannot be interconnected
to interconnection unless interconnecting with reactance-grounded with solidly-grounded or reactance-grounded unless interconnected
7 system is ungrounded
or isolating transformers
systems systems systems with proper
attention to relaying
system is resonant
grounded or isolating
are used transformers are used.
Requires coordination
8 between interconnected
systems in neutralizer
settings
9 (13) Circuit Interrupting capacity Same interrupting Interrupting capacity
determined by three-
Interrupting capacity
Interrupting capacity
breakers determined by three- capacity as required for
phase conditions three-phase short circuit phase fault conditions phase fault conditions phase fault conditions
will practically always be
10 satisfactory
(14) Operating Ordinarily simple but Simple Simple Simple Taps on neutralizers must
procedure possibility of double be changed when major
11 faults introduces system switching is per-
complication in times formed and difficulty may
of trouble arise in interconnected
12 systems. Difficult to tell
where faults are located
(15) Total cost High, unless conditions Lowest Intermediate Intermediate Highest unless the arc
are such that arc tends suppressing characteris-
13 to extinguish itself, when tic is relied on to eliminate
transmission circuits may transmission circuits
be eliminated, reducing when it may be lowest
14 total cost for the particular types
of service
15 Because the method of grounding

affects the voltage rise of the unfaulted
The aforementioned definition is
of significance in medium voltage
of the three-phase current at the point
of fault. Damage to cable shields must
phases above ground, ANSI C62.92 distribution systems with long lines be checked. Although this fact is not
16 classifies systems from the point of and with grounded sources removed a problem except in small cables, it is a
view of grounding in terms of a during light load periods so that in good idea to supplement the cable
coefficient of grounding some locations in the system the shields returns of ground fault current
17 Highest Power Frequency
X0 /X1, R0 /X1 may exceed the defining to prevent damage, by installing an
limits. Other standards (cable and equipment grounding conductor.
rms Line Ground Voltage lightning arrester) allow the use of
COG = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The burdens on the current transformers
18 rms Line Line Voltage at Fault
Location with the Fault Removed
100% rated cables and arresters
must be checked also (for saturation
selected on the basis of an effectively
grounded system only where the considerations), where residually
This same standard also defines connected ground relays are used
19 systems as effectively grounded when
criteria in the above are met. In
and the current transformers supply
effectively grounded system the line-
COG .8 such a system would have current to phase relays and meters.
to-ground fault current is high and
X0 /X1 3.0 and R0 /X1 1.0. Any other
20 grounding means that does not satisfy
there is no significant voltage rise in If ground sensor current transformers
the unfaulted phases. (zero sequence type) are used they
these conditions at any point in a
system is not effectively grounded. With selective ground fault isolation must be of high burden capacity.
21 the fault current should be at least 60%

Sheet 01 065
Table 1.4-2 taken from ANSI-C62.92 should not be limited to less than the Grounding Point
indicates the characteristics of the current transformers rating of the The most commonly used grounding i
various methods of grounding. source. This rule will provide sensitive point is the neutral of the system or the
differential protection for wye-connected neutral point created by means of a
Reactance Grounding generators and transformers against zigzag or a wye-broken delta grounding ii
It is generally used in the grounding line-to-ground faults near the neutral. transformer in a system that was oper-
of the neutrals of generators directly Of course, if the installation of ground ating as an ungrounded delta system.
connected to the distribution system fault differential protection is feasible, 1
bus, in order to limit the line-to-ground or ground sensor current transformers In general, it is a good practice that all
fault to somewhat less than the three- are used, sensitive differential relaying source neutrals be grounded with the
phase fault at the generator terminals. in resistance grounded system with same grounding impedance magnitude. 2
If the reactor is so sized, in all probability greater fault limitation is feasible. However, neutrals should not be tied
the system will remain effectively In general, ground sensor current together to a single resistor. Where
grounded. transformers (zero sequence) do not one of the medium voltage sources is 3
have high burden capacity. Resistance the utility, their consent for impedance
Resistance Grounded grounded systems limit the circulating grounding must be obtained.
Medium voltage systems in general currents of triple harmonics and limit 4
should be low resistance grounded. The neutral impedance must have a
the damage at the point of fault. This
The ground fault is typically limited to voltage rating at least equal to the rated
method of grounding is not suitable
about 200400 A but less than 1000 A for line-to-neutral connection of loads.
line-to-neutral voltage class of the sys- 5
(a cable shield consideration). With a tem. It must have at least a 10-second
properly sized resistor and relaying On medium voltage systems, 100% rating equal to the maximum future
application, selective fault isolation cable insulation is rated for phase-to- line-to-ground fault current and a 6
is feasible. The fault limit provided neutral voltage. If continued operation continuous rating to accommodate the
has a bearing on whether residually with one phase faulted to ground is triple harmonics that may be present.
connected relays are used or ground desired, increased insulation thickness 7
sensor current transformers are used is required. For 100% insulation, fault 4. Low Voltage System: Grounding
for ground fault relaying. clearance is recommended within Solidly grounded three-phase systems
one minute; for 133% insulation, one (Figure 1.4-2) are usually wye- 8
In general, where residually connected hour is acceptable; for indefinite connected, with the neutral point
ground relays are used (51N), the fault operation, as long as necessary, grounded. Less common is the red-
current at each grounded source 173% insulation is required. leg or high-leg delta, a 240 V system 9
supplied by some utilities with one
Table 1.4-2. Characteristics of Grounding winding center-tapped to provide 120 V
Grounding Classes Ratios of Symmetrical Percent Fault Per Unit Transient to ground for lighting. This 240 V, three- 10
and Means Component Parameters 1 Current LG Voltage phase, four-wire system is used where
120 V lighting load is small compared
A. Effectively
X0/X1 R0/X1 R0/X0 2 3
to 240 V power load, because the 11
1. Effective 0-3 0-1 >60 2 installation is low in cost to the utility.
2. Very effective 0-1 0-0.1 >95 <1.5 A corner-grounded three-phase delta
B. Noneffectively system is sometimes found, with 12
1. Inductance one phase grounded to stabilize all
a. Low inductance 3-10 0-1 >25 <2.3 voltages to ground. Better solutions
b. High inductance >10 <2 <25 2.73 8
are available for new installations. 13
2. Resistance
a. Low resistance 0-10 2 <25 <2.5
b. High resistance >100 (-1) <1 2.73
3. Inductance and resistance >10 >2 <10 2.73 Phase A 14
4. Resonant 5 <1 2.73 Phase B
5. Ungrounded/capacitance N
a. Range A - to -40 6 <8 3 9 Phase C
15
b. Range B -40 to 0 >8 >3 79 Neutral
1 Values of the coefficient of grounding (expressed as a percentage of maximum phase-to-phase
voltage) corresponding to various combinations of these ratios are shown in the ANSI C62.92
Appendix figures. Coefficient of grounding affects the selection of arrester ratings.
Grounded Wye
16
2 Ground-fault current in percentage of the three-phase short-circuit value. Phase B
3 Transient line-to-ground voltage, following the sudden initiation of a fault in per unit of the crest
of the prefault line-to-ground operating voltage for a simple, linear circuit. Phase C 17
4 Phase A
In linear circuits, Class A1 limits the fundamental line-to-ground voltage on an unfaulted phase to
138% of the prefault voltage; Class A2 to less than 110%. Neutral
5 See ANSI 62.92 para. 7.3 and precautions given in application sections. 18
6 Usual isolated neutral (ungrounded) system for which the zero-sequence reactance is capacitive Center-Tapped (High-Leg) Delta
(negative).
7
8
Same as NOTE (6) and refer to ANSI 62.92 para. 7.4. Each case should be treated on its own merit. Phase A 19
Under restriking arcing ground fault conditions (e.g., vacuum breaker interrupter operation),
this value can approach 500%. Phase B
9 Under arcing ground fault conditions, this value can easily reach 700%, but is essentially unlimited. Phase C
20
Corner-Grounded Delta
Figure 1.4-2. Solidly Grounded Systems

21

Sheet 01 066
Ungrounded systems (Figure 1.4-3) Selecting the Low Voltage System used as substitutes for ungrounded
i can be either wye or delta, although Grounding Method systems where high system
the ungrounded delta system is far There is no one best distribution availability is required.
more common. system for all applications. In choosing
ii among solidly grounded, resistance
With one phase grounded, the voltage
to ground of the other two phases
grounded, or ungrounded power rises 73%, to full phase-to-phase
Phase A
distribution, the characteristics of the
1 system must be weighed against the
voltage. In low voltage systems this
Phase B
Phase C requirements of power loads, lighting
is not important, since conductors
are insulated for 600 V.
loads, continuity of service, safety
2 Ungrounded Delta
and cost. A low voltage resistance grounded
Phase A system is normally grounded so that
Under ground fault conditions, each
3 Phase B
system behaves very differently. A
the single line-to-ground fault current
N exceeds the capacitive charging
Phase C solidly grounded system produces current of the system. If data for the
Ungrounded Wye high fault currents, usually with arcing, charging current is not available, use
4 and the faulted circuit must be cleared 4050 ohm resistor in the neutral
Figure 1.4-3. Ungrounded Systems on the first fault within a fraction of a of the transformer.
second to minimize damage. An
5 Resistance-grounded systems ungrounded system will pass limited In commercial and institutional
(Figure 1.4-4) are simplest with a current into the first ground faultonly installations, such as office buildings,
wye connection, grounding the neutral the charging current of the system, shopping centers, schools and hospitals,
6 point directly through the resistor. caused by the distributed capacitance lighting loads are often 50% or more
Delta systems can be grounded by to ground of the system wiring and of the total load. In addition, a feeder
means of a zig-zag or other grounding equipment. In low voltage systems, outage on first ground fault is seldom
7 transformer. Wye broken delta this is rarely more than 1 or 2 A. crucialeven in hospitals, that have
transformer banks may also be used. Therefore, on first ground fault, an emergency power in critical areas. For
ungrounded system can continue in these reasons, a solidly grounded wye
8 service, making it desirable where distribution, with the neutral used for
Phase A power outages cannot be tolerated. lighting circuits, is usually the most
Phase B
However, if the ground fault is economical, effective and convenient
9 R
N
Phase C intermittent, sputtering or arcing, a design. In some instances, it is an
high voltageas much as 6 to 8 times NEC requirement.
phase voltagecan be built up across
10 the system capacitance, from the In industrial installations, the effect
Resistance-Grounded Wye of a shutdown caused by a single
phase conductors to ground. Similar
high voltages can occur as a result ground fault could be disastrous.
11 Phase A
of resonance between system An interrupted process could cause the
capacitance and the inductances loss of all the materials involved, often
Phase B
ruin the process equipment itself, and
12 Phase C of transformers and motors in the
system. The phase-to-phase voltage sometimes create extremely danger-
N is not affected. This high transient ous situations for operating personnel.
R phase-to-ground voltage can puncture On the other hand, lighting is usually
13 insulation at weak points, such as only a small fraction of the total
motor windings, and is a frequent industrial electrical load. A solidly
Delta With Derived Neutral Resistance- cause of multiple motor failures on grounded neutral circuit conductor
14 Grounded Using Zig-Zag Transformer ungrounded systems. Locating a first is not imperative and, when required,
fault on an ungrounded system can can be obtained from inexpensive
Figure 1.4-4. Resistance-Grounded Systems be difficult. If, before the first fault is lighting transformers.
15 cleared, a second ground fault occurs Because of the ability to continue in
This derives a neutral point, which
can be either solidly or impedance- on a different phase, even on a operation with one ground fault on
different, remote feeder, it is a high-
16 grounded. If the grounding transformer
current phase-to-ground-to-phase
the system, many existing industrial
plants use ungrounded delta distribu-
has sufficient capacity, the neutral
created can be solidly grounded and fault, usually arcing, that can cause tion. Today, new installations can have
severe damage if at least one of the
17 used as part of a three-phase, four-wire
grounds is not cleared immediately.
all the advantages of service continuity
system. Most transformer-supplied of the ungrounded delta, yet minimize
systems are either solidly grounded If the second circuit is remote, enough the problems of the system, such
current may not flow to cause
18 or resistance grounded. Generator
protection to operate. This can leave
as the difficulty of locating the first
neutrals are often grounded through ground fault, risk of damage from a
a reactor, to limit ground fault (zero high voltages and stray currents on second ground fault, and damage
structures and jeopardize personnel.
19 sequence) currents to values the transient overvoltages. A high-
generator can withstand. In general, where loads will be resistance grounded wye distribution
connected line-to-neutral, solidly can continue in operation with a
20 grounded systems are used. High ground fault on the system and will
resistance grounded systems are not develop transient overvoltages.
21

Sheet 01 067
And, because the ground point is disconnecting means rated 1000 A or

established, locating a ground fault is more on solidly grounded wye services Main
i
less difficult than on an ungrounded of more than 150 V to ground, but
system especially when a pulsing not exceeding 600 V phase-to-phase. Neutral
contactor design is applied. When Practically, this makes ground fault

Service
Transformer ii
GFR
combined with sensitive ground-fault protection mandatory on 480Y/277 V Sensor
Typical
protection, damage from a second services, but not on 208Y/120 V ser- Ground Bus Feeder
ground fault can be nearly eliminated. vices. On a 208 V system, the voltage 1
Main Bonding
Ungrounded delta systems can be to ground is 120 V. If a ground fault Jumper
converted to high-resistance grounded occurs, the arc goes out at current Typical
systems, using a zig-zag or other zero, and the voltage to ground is

Grounding
Electrode
Equipment
Grounding
4W Load
2
Conductor Conductor
grounding transformer to derive a often too low to cause it to restrike.
neutral, with similar benefits, see Therefore, arcing ground faults on 208
Tab 36. While the majority of V systems tend to be self-extinguish- Figure 1.4-5. Ground Return Sensing Method 3
manufacturing plants use solidly ing. On a 480 V system, with When an energized conductor faults
grounded systems, in many instances, 277 V to ground, restrike usually takes to grounded metal, the fault current
the high-resistance grounded distribu- place after current zero, and the arc returns along the ground return path to
4
tion will be the most advantageous. tends to be self-sustaining, causing the neutral of the source transformer.
severe and increasing damage, until This path includes the main bonding
Ground Fault Protection the fault is cleared by a protective jumper as shown in Figure 1.4-5.
5
A ground fault normally occurs in one device. A current sensor on this conductor
of two ways: by accidental contact of The NEC requires ground fault (which can be a conventional bar-type 6
an energized conductor with normally protection on the service disconnecting or window type CT) will respond to
grounded metal, or as a result of means. This protection works so fast ground fault currents only. Normal
an insulation failure of an energized that for ground faults on feeders, or neutral currents resulting from 7
conductor. When an insulation failure even branch circuits, it will often open unbalanced loads will return along
occurs, the energized conductor the service disconnect before the the neutral conductor and will not be
contacts normally noncurrent-carrying feeder or branch circuit overcurrent detected by the ground return sensor. 8
grounded metal, which is bonded to device can operate. This is highly
or part of the equipment grounding This is an inexpensive method of sensing
undesirable, and in the NEC (230.95) ground faults where protection per
conductor. In a solidly grounded a Fine Print Note (FPN) states that NEC (230.95) is desired. For it to 9
system, the fault current returns to the additional ground fault protective
source primarily along the equipment operate properly, the neutral must be
equipment will be needed on feeders grounded in only one place as indicated
grounding conductors, with a small and branch circuits where maximum in Figure 1.4-5. In many installations, 10
part using parallel paths such as build- continuity of electric service is neces-
ing steel or piping. If the ground return the servicing utility grounds the neutral
sary. Unless it is acceptable to discon- at the transformer and additional
impedance was as low as that of the nect the entire service on a ground grounding is required in the service 11
circuit conductors, ground fault currents fault almost anywhere in the system,
would be high, and the normal phase equipment per NEC (250.24(A)(2)).
such additional stages of ground In such cases, and others including
overcurrent protection would clear fault protection must be provided. multiple source with multiple, inter- 12
them with little damage. Unfortunately, At least two stages of protection are
the impedance of the ground return connected neutral ground points,
mandatory in health care facilities residual or zero sequence ground
path is usually higher, the fault itself (NEC Sec. 517.17). sensing methods should be employed. 13
is usually arcing and the impedance
of the arc further reduces the fault Overcurrent protection is designed A second method of detecting ground
current. In a 480Y/277 V system, the to protect conductors and equipment faults involves the use of a zero 14
voltage drop across the arc can be against currents that exceed their sequence sensing method, as illus-
from 70 to 140 V. The resulting ground ampacity or rating under prescribed trated in Figure 1.4-6. This sensing
fault current is rarely enough to cause time values. An overcurrent can result method requires a single, specially 15
the phase overcurrent protection from an overload, short circuit or (high designed sensor either of a toroidal
device to open instantaneously and level) ground fault condition. When or rectangular shaped configuration.
prevent damage. Sometimes, the currents flow outside the normal This core balance current transformer 16
ground fault is below the trip setting of current path to ground, supplementary surrounds all the phase and neutral
the protective device and it does not ground fault protection equipment will conductors in a typical three-phase,
trip at all until the fault escalates and be required to sense low-level ground four-wire distribution system. The 17
extensive damage is done. For these fault currents and initiate the protection sensing method is based on the fact
reasons, low level ground protection required. Normal phase overcurrent that the vectorial sum of the phase and
devices with minimum time delay protection devices provide no protection neutral currents in any distribution 18
settings are required to rapidly clear against low-level ground faults. circuit will equal zero unless a ground
ground faults. This is emphasized by fault condition exists downstream from
There are three basic means of sensing
the NEC requirement that a ground
ground faults. The most simple and the sensor. All currents that flow only 19
fault relay on a service shall have a in the circuit conductors, including
direct method is the ground return
maximum delay of one second for balanced or unbalanced phase-to-phase
method as illustrated in Figure 1.4-5.
faults of 3000 A or more.
This sensing method is based on the fact and phase-to-neutral normal or fault 20
The NEC (Sec. 230.95) requires that that all currents supplied by a trans- currents, and harmonic currents, will
former must return to that transformer. result in zero sensor output.
ground fault protection, set at no more
than 1200 A, be provided for each service
21

Sheet 01 068
However, should any conductor become neutral. In a residual sensing scheme, levels of ground fault protection are
i grounded, the fault current will return the relationship of the polarity markings desired for added service continuity.
along the ground pathnot the normal as noted by the X on each sensor Additional grounding points may be
circuit conductorsand the sensor will is critical. Because the vectorial sum of employed upstream of the residual
ii have an unbalanced magnetic flux the currents in all the conductors will sensors, but not on the load side.
condition, and a sensor output will total zero under normal, non-ground
be generated to actuate the ground faulted conditions, it is imperative Both the zero sequence and
1 fault relay. that proper polarity connections are residual sensing methods have
employed to reflect this condition. been commonly referred to as
vectorial summation methods.
2 Zero
Sequence
Sensor
Alternate
Sensor
Location Sensor Most distribution systems can use
Residual
Main Polarity
Marks
Sensors either of the three sensing methods
exclusively or a combination of the
3 Main
sensing methods depending upon
Neutral the complexity of the system and
the degree of service continuity and
4 GFR Typical
Neutral
selective coordination desired.
Feeder
Typical Different methods will be required
GFR Feeder
depending upon the number of supply
5 Typical sources, and the number and location
4W Load Typical
4W Load
of system grounding points.
6 Figure 1.4-6. Zero Sequence Sensing Method As an example, one of the more
Figure 1.4-7. Residual Sensing Method frequently used systems where
Zero sequence sensors are available continuity of service to critical loads
As with the zero sequence sensing
7 with various window openings for
method, the resultant residual sensor is a factor is the dual source system
circuits with small or large conductors, illustrated in Figure 1.4-8. This system
and even with large rectangular win- output to the ground fault relay or
integral ground fault tripping circuit uses tie-point grounding as permitted
8 dows to fit over busbars or multiple
large size conductors in parallel. Some will be zero if all currents flow only under NEC Sec. 250.24(A)(3). The use
sensors have split cores for installation in the circuit conductors. Should a of this grounding method is limited
over existing conductors without ground fault occur, the current from to services that are dual fed (double-
9 disturbing the connections. the faulted conductor will return along ended) in a common enclosure or
the ground path, rather than on the grouped together in separate enclo-
This method of sensing ground faults other circuit conductors, and the resid- sures, employing a secondary tie.
10 can be employed on the main discon- ual sum of the sensor outputs will not
nect where protection per NEC (230.95) This scheme uses individual sensors
be zero. When the level of ground fault connected in ground return fashion.
is desired. It can also be easily employed
current exceeds the pre-set current
11 in multi-tier systems where additional
and time delay settings, a ground
Under tie breaker closed operating
levels of ground fault protection are conditions, either the M1 sensor or
desired for added service continuity. fault tripping action will be initiated. M2 sensor could see neutral unbalance
12 Additional grounding points may be This method of sensing ground faults currents and possibly initiate an
employed upstream of the sensor, but can be economically applied on main improper tripping operation. However,
not on the load side. with the polarity arrangements of
service disconnects where circuit break-
13 Ground fault protection employing ers with integral ground fault protection these two sensors along with the tie
ground return or zero sequence sensing are provided. It can be used in protec- breaker auxiliary switch (T/a) and
methods can be accomplished by the tion schemes per NEC (230.95) or in interconnections as shown, this
14 use of separate ground fault relays multi-tier schemes where additional possibility is eliminated.
(GFRs) and disconnects equipped with
standard shunt trip devices or by circuit
15 breakers with integral ground fault Power Power
protection with external connections Transformer Transformer
arranged for these modes of sensing. In
16 some cases, a reliable source of control
Neutral Sensor Neutral Sensor
power is needed. Main Main
Bkr. Main Bkr. 52-1 Tie Bkr. Main Bkr. 52-2 Bkr.
The third basic method of detecting 52-1 52-T 52-2
17 ground faults involves the use of A, B, C A, B, C
multiple current sensors connected in Neutral Neutral
Neutral Sensor
a residual sensing method as illustrated
18 in Figure 1.4-7. This is a very common Typical
4-Wire
( )B5
Tie Bkr. 52-T
Typical
( )B5
( )B4
sensing method used with circuit break- ( )B4 52-T 52-T 4-Wire
M2N
M1G
M2G
M1N
Feeder
TN
TG
a a Feeder
ers equipped with electronic trip units,
19 current sensors and integral ground 33-
52-T
fault protection. The three-phase sensors 4-Wire 4-Wire
B5 B4 B4 B5 B4 B5 Load
are required for normal phase overcur- Load
Digitrip Digitrip Digitrip
20 rent protection. Ground fault sensing B4
Digitrip
B5 Main Bkr.
52-1
Main Bkr.
52-T
Main Bkr.
52-2
B4
Digitrip
B5
is obtained with the addition of an
identically rated sensor mounted on the
21 Figure 1.4-8. Dual Source SystemSingle Point Grounding
Note: This GF scheme requires trip units to be set to source ground sensing.

Sheet 01 069
Selective ground fault tripping coordi- or a combination of all types may be GFR is an indication that any occurring
nation between the tie breaker and the employed to accomplish the desired ground fault is within the zone of the i
two main circuit breakers is achieved end results. GFR next upstream from the fault and
by pre-set current pickup and time that device will operate instantaneously
delay settings between devices GFR/1, Because the NEC (230.95) limits the to clear the fault with minimum dam- ii
GFR/2 and GFR/T. maximum setting of the ground fault age and maximum service continuity.
protection used on service equipment This operating mode permits all GFRs
The advantages of increased service to 1200 A (and timed tripping at 3000 A to operate instantaneously for a fault 1
continuity offered by this system can for one second), to prevent tripping within their zone and still provide
only be effectively used if additional of the main service disconnect on a complete selectivity between zones.
levels of ground fault protection are feeder ground fault, ground fault The National Electrical Manufacturers 2
added on each downstream feeder. protection must be provided on all the Association (NEMA) states, in their
Some users prefer individual grounding feeders. To maintain maximum service application guide for ground fault
of the transformer neutrals. In such continuity, more than two levels (zones) protection, that zone interlocking is 3
cases, a partial differential ground fault of ground fault protection will be necessary to minimize damage from
scheme should be used for the mains required, so that ground fault outages ground faults. A two-wire connection
and tie breaker. can be localized and service interrup- is required to carry the restraining 4
tion minimized. To obtain selectivity signal from the GFRs in one zone to
An example of a residual partial differ- between different levels of ground
ential scheme is shown in Figure 1.4-9. the GFRs in the next zone.
The scheme typically relies upon the
fault relays, time delay settings should 5
be employed with the GFR furthest Circuit breakers with integral ground
vector sum of at least two neutral downstream having the minimum fault protection and standard circuit
sensors in combination with each
breakers three-phase sensors. To
time delay. This will allow the GFR breakers with shunt trips activated 6
nearest the fault to operate first. by the ground fault relay are ideal for
reduce the complexity of the drawing, With several levels of protection, this ground fault protection. Many fused
each of the breakers three-phase
sensors have not been shown. It is
will reduce the level of protection for switches over 1200 A, and Eaton Type 7
faults within the upstream GFR zones. FDP fusible switches with ratings
absolutely critical that the sensors Zone interlocking was developed for from 400 to 1200 A, are listed by UL
polarities are supplied as shown, the GFRs to overcome this problem. as suitable for ground fault protection. 8
neutral sensor ratings of the mains and Fusible switches so listed must be
tie are the same, and that there are GFRs (or circuit breakers with integral equipped with a shunt trip, and be able
no other grounds on the neutral bus ground fault protection) with zone to open safely on faults up to 12 times 9
made downstream of points shown. interlocking are coordinated in a their rating.
system to operate in a time delayed
An infinite number of ground fault mode for ground faults occurring most Power distribution systems differ
protection schemes can be developed remote from the source. However, this widely from each other, depending
10
depending upon the number of alternate time delayed mode is only actuated upon the requirements of each user,
sources, the number of grounding points when the GFR next upstream from the and total system overcurrent protec-
and system interconnections involved. fault sends a restraining signal to the tion, including ground fault currents,
11
Depending upon the individual system upstream GFRs. The absence of a must be individually designed to meet
configuration, either mode of sensing these needs. Experienced and knowl-
restraining signal from a downstream
edgeable engineers must consider the
12
power sources (utility or on-site), the
Power Power effects of outages and costs of down- 13
Transformer Transformer time, safety for people and equipment,
initial and lifecycle costs, and many
other factors. They must apply protec- 14
X X
tive devices, analyzing the time-current
X X
Neutral Neutral characteristics, fault interrupting
Sensor Main Sensor Main
Main Breaker 52-1 Breaker 52-2 Main
capacity, and selectivity and coordina- 15
Breaker Breaker tion methods to provide the most safe
52-1 52-2 and cost-effective distribution system.
Phase A, Tie Breaker Phase A, Further Information 16
Phase B, 52-T Phase B, PRSC-4ESystem Neutral Ground-
Phase C Phase C
Neutral X
Neutral
ing and Ground Fault Protection
(ABB Publication)
17
Neutral Sensor X
Tie Breaker 52-T PB 2.2NEMA Application Guide
Trip Unit
Trip Unit
Typical X
X
Typical X
X
for Ground Fault Protective Devices 18
Four-Wire Four-Wire for Equipment
Feeder 52-1 52-T 52-2 Feeder
a a a IEEE Standard 142Grounding of
Industrial and Commercial Power 19
Four-Wire Load Four-Wire Load
Systems (Green Book)
Trip Unit Trip Unit Trip Unit IEEE Emerald Book (Standard 1100)
Main Breaker Tie Breaker Main Breaker
UL 96A, Installation Requirements
20
52-1 52-T 52-2
for Lightning Protection Systems
Figure 1.4-9. Dual Source SystemMultiple Point Grounding 21

Sheet 01 070
Lightning and Surge Protection The electrical distribution system and Surge Protection
i Physical protection of buildings
equipment ground must be connected
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switch-
to this grounding electrode system by
from direct damage from lightning a grounding electrode conductor. All gear is applied over a broad range of
ii is beyond the scope of this section.
Requirements will vary with geographic
other grounding electrodes, such as circuits, and is one of the many types
of equipment in the total system. The
those for the lightning protection sys-
location, building type and environ- tem, the telephone system, television distribution system can be subject to
1 ment, and many other factors (see antenna and cable TV system grounds, voltage transients caused by lighting
IEEE/ANSI Standard 142, Grounding and computer systems, must be bonded or switching surges.
of Industrial and Commercial Power to this grounding electrode system. Recognizing that distribution system
2 Systems). Any lightning protection
can be subject to voltage transients
system must be grounded, and the Medium Voltage Equipment Surge
lightning protection ground must be caused by lighting or switching, the
3 bonded to the electrical equipment Protection Considerations industry has developed standards to
grounding system. provide guidelines for surge protection
Transformers of electrical equipment. Those guide-
Grounding Electrodes If the voltage withstand/BIL rating of lines should be used in design and
4 the transformer is less than that of the protection of electrical distribution
At some point, the equipment and systems independent of the circuit
switchgear feeding the transformer,
system grounds must be connected breaker interrupting medium. The
5 to the earth by means of a grounding
surge protection is recommended at
industry standards are:
the transformer terminals, in line with
electrode system.
established practices. In addition, ANSI C62
6 Outdoor substations usually use a consideration should be given to using Guides and Standards for Surge
ground grid, consisting of a number of surge arresters and/or surge capacitors Protection
ground rods driven into the earth and for transformers having equal or
7 bonded together by buried copper greater withstand/BIL ratings than that IEEE 242Buff Book
conductors. The required grounding of the switchgear feeding the trans- IEEE Recommended Practice for
electrode system for a building is former for distribution systems where Protection and Coordination of
8 spelled out in the NEC Article 250. reflected voltage waves and/or reso- Industrial and Commercial Power
nant conditions may occur. Typically Systems
The preferred grounding electrode incoming voltage surges are reflected
is a metal underground water pipe in IEEE 141Red Book
9 direct contact with the earth for at least
at the transformer primary terminals
Recommended Practice for
(because of the change in impedance)
10 ft (3 m). However, because under- resulting in voltages at the ends of the Electric Power Distribution for
ground water piping is often plastic Industrial Plants
10 outside the building, or may later be
transformer primary terminals/wind-
ings of up to two times the incoming IEEE C37.20.2
replaced by plastic piping, the NEC voltage wave. System capacitance and Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear
11 requires this electrode to be supple- inductance values combined with the
mented by and bonded to at least one transformer impedance values can Eatons medium voltage metal-clad
other grounding electrode, such as cause resonant conditions resulting and metal-enclosed switchgear that
12 the effectively grounded metal frame
of the building, a concrete-encased
in amplified reflected waves. Surge uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied
arresters/capacitors when required, over a broad range of circuits. It is one
electrode, a copper conductor ground should be located as close to the trans- of the many types of equipment in the
13 ring encircling the building, or a made former primary terminals as practical. total distribution system. Whenever a
electrode such as one or more driven switching device is opened or closed,
ground rods or a buried plate. Where Motors certain interactions of the power
14 any of these electrodes are present, Surge capacitors and, where appropri- system elements with the switching
they must be bonded together into one ate, surge arresters should be applied device can cause high frequency voltage
grounding electrode system. at the motor terminals. transients in the system. Due to the
15 One of the most effective grounding Generators
wide range of applications and variety
of ratings used for different elements
electrodes is the concrete-encased Surge capacitors and station in the power systems, a given circuit
electrode, sometimes called the Ufer
16 ground, named after the man who
class surge arresters at the machine may or may not require surge protec-
terminals. tion. Therefore, Eaton does not include
developed it. It consists of at least
surge protection as standard with its
20 ft (6 m) of steel reinforcing bars or
17 rods not less than 1/2 inches (12.7 mm)
metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium
voltage switchgear. The user exercises
in diameter, or at least 20 ft (6 m) of
the options as to the type and extent
bare copper conductor, size No. 4 AWG
18 or larger, encased in at least 2 inches
of the surge protection necessary
depending on the individual circuit
(50.8 mm) of concrete. It must be
characteristics and cost considerations.
located within and near the bottom of
19 a concrete foundation or footing that The following are Eatons recommen-
is in direct contact with the earth. Tests dations for surge protection of medium
have shown this electrode to provide voltage equipment. Please note these
20 a low-resistance earth ground even in recommendations are valid when
poor soil conditions. using Eatons vacuum breakers only.
21

Sheet 01 071
Surge Protection Recommendations RC Snubber and/or ZORC damp 6. Capacitor SwitchingNo surge
Note: The abbreviation ZORC used in the internal transformer resonance: protection is required. Make sure i
text below refers to Surge Protection Device that the capacitors lightning
manufactured by Strike Technology (Pty) The natural frequency of transformer impulse withstand rating is equal
Ltd. An equivalent device offered by other windings can under some circumstances to that of the switchgear. ii
manufacturers, such as Type EHZ by ABB, be excited to resonate. Transformer
and Protec Z by Northern Technologies SA windings in resonance can produce 7. Shunt Reactor Switching
can also be used. elevated internal voltages that produce Provide Surge Arrester in parallel 1
insulation damage or failure. An RC with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the
1. For circuits exposed to lightning, Snubber or a ZORC applied at the reactor terminals.
surge arresters should be applied transformer terminals as indicated 2
in line with Industry standard above can damp internal winding 8. Motor Starting Reactors or Reduced
practices. resonance and prevent the production Voltage Auto-Transformers
Provide Surge Arrester in parallel
2. Transformers
of damaging elevated internal voltages.
with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the 3
This is typically required where rectifiers,
UPS or similar electronic equipment is reactor or RVAT terminals.
a. Close-Coupled to medium
voltage primary breaker: on the transformer secondary. 9. Switching Underground Cables 4
Provide transients surge pro- Surge protection not needed.
3. Arc-Furnace Transformers
tection, such as Surge Arrester
Provide Surge Arrester in parallel
in parallel with RC Snubber, or
with RC Snubber, or ZORC at the Types of Surge Protection Devices 5
ZORC. The surge protection
transformer terminals. Generally surge protective devices
device selected should be
should be located as closely as possible
located and connected at the 4. MotorsProvide Surge Arrester in to the circuit component(s) that require
6
transformer primary terminals parallel with RC Snubber, or ZORC
or it can be located inside the protection from the transients, and
at the motor terminals. For those connected directly to the terminals of
switchgear and connected on motors using VFDs, surge protec- the component with conductors that
7
the transformer side of the tion should be applied and precede
primary breaker. are as short and flat as possible to
the VFD devices as well. minimize the inductance. It is also
b. Cable-Connected to medium important that surge protection devices
8
5. GeneratorsProvide station class
voltage primary breaker: should be properly grounded for
Surge Arrester in parallel with RC
Provide transient surge protec- effectively shunting high frequency
tion, such as Surge Arrester in
Snubber, or ZORC at the generator
transients to ground.
9
terminals.
parallel with RC Snubber, or
ZORC for transformers con-
nected by cables with lengths 10
up to 75 feet. The surge protec-
tion device should be located
and connected at the transformer 11
terminals. No surge protection
is needed for transformers with
lightning impulse withstand 12
ratings equal to that of the
switchgear and connected to
the switchgear by cables at
13
least 75 feet or longer. For
transformers with lower BIL,
provide surge arrester in parallel Figure 1.4-10. Surge Protection Devices 14
with RC Snubber or ZORC.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 072
Surge Arresters Surge Capacitors ZORC

i The modern metal-oxide surge Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the A ZORC device consists of parallel
arresters are recommended because magnitude of prospective surge over- combination of Resistor (R) and Zinc
this latest advance in arrester design voltage, but are ineffective in control- Oxide Voltage Suppressor (ZnO), con-
ii ensures better performance and high ling its rate of rise. Specially designed nected in series with a Surge Capacitor.
reliability of surge protection schemes. surge capacitors with low internal The resistor R is sized to match surge
Manufacturers technical data must inductance are used to limit the rate of impedance of the load cables, typically
1 be consulted for correct application rise of this surge overvoltage to protect 20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless
of a given type of surge arrester. turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended metal-oxide nonlinear arrester, set
Notice that published arrester MCOV values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where
2 (Maximum Continuous Operating on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and 1 PU = 1.412*(VL-L/1.732). The Surge
Voltage) ratings are based on 40 or 0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV Capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to
45 C ambient temperature. In general, and higher. 0.25 microfarad. As with RC Snubber,
3 the following guidelines are recom- under normal operating conditions,
mended for arrester selections, when RC Snubber impedance of the capacitor is very
installed inside Eatons medium A RC Snubber device consists of a high, effectively isolating the resistor
4 voltage switchgear: non-inductive resistor R sized to match R and ZnO from the system at normal
surge impedance of the load cables, power frequencies, and minimizing
A. Solidly Grounded Systems: typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected heat dissipation during normal opera-
5 Arrester MCOV rating should be in series with a Surge Capacitor C. The tion. Under high frequency transient
equal to 1.05 x VLL/(1.732 x T), Surge Capacitor is typically sized to be conditions, the capacitor offers very
where VLL is nominal line-to-line 0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal low impedance, thus effectively
6 service voltage, 1.05 factor allows operating conditions, impedance of inserting the resistor R and ZnO in
for +5% voltage variation above the capacitor is very high, effectively the power system as cable terminating
the nominal voltage according isolating the resistor R from the network, thus minimizing reflection of
7 to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating system at normal power frequencies, the steep wave-fronts of the voltage
factor to allow for operation at and minimizing heat dissipation during transients and prevents voltage dou-
55 C switchgear ambient, which normal operation. Under high frequency bling of the traveling wave. The ZnO
8 should be obtained from the transient conditions, the capacitor element limits the peak voltage magni-
arrester manufacturer for the type offers very low impedance, thus effec- tudes. The combined effects of R, ZnO,
of arrester under consideration. tively inserting the resistor R in the and Capacitor of the ZORC device
9 Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0. power system as cable terminating provides optimum protection against
B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems resistor, thus minimizing reflection of high frequency transients by absorbing,
the steep wave-fronts of the voltage damping, and by limiting the peak
10 (systems grounded through
transients and prevents voltage dou- amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts.
resistor rated for 10 seconds):
Arrester 10-second MCOV capability bling of the traveling wave. The RC Please note that the ZORC is not a
Snubber provides protection against lightning protection device. If lightning
11 at 60 C, which is obtained from
high frequency transients by absorb- can occur or be induced in the electrical
manufacturers data, should be
equal to 1.05 x VLL, where VLL is ing and damping and the transients. system, a properly rated and applied
Please note RC Snubber is most effec-
12 nominal line-to-line service voltage,
tive in mitigating fast-rising transient
surge arrester must precede the ZORC.
and 1.05 factor allows for +5%
voltage variation above the voltages, and in attenuating reflections
13 nominal voltage. and resonances before they have a
chance to build up, but does not limit
C. Ungrounded or Systems the peak magnitude of the transient.
14 Grounded through impedance Therefore, the RC Snubber alone may
other than 10-second resistor: not provide adequate protection. To
Arrester MCOV rating should be limit peak magnitude of the transient,
15 equal to 1.05 x VLL/T, where VLL application of surge arrester should
and T are as defined above. also be considered.
Refer to Table 1.4-3 for recommended
16 ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters
that are sized in accordance with the
above guidelines, when located in
17 Eatons switchgear.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 073
Surge Protection Summary Good protection: Surge Arrester Best protection: ZORC, plus proper
Minimum protection: Surge Arrester
in parallel with Surge Capacitor for surge arrester preceding ZORC where i
protection from high overvoltage needed for protection against lightning.
for protection from high overvoltage peaks and fast rising transient. This ZORC provides protection from high
peaks, or Surge Capacitor for protec- option may not provide adequate frequency voltage transients and limits ii
tion from fast-rising transient. Please surge protection from escalating peak magnitude of the transient to
note that the surge arresters or surge voltages caused by circuit resonance. 1 to 2 PU (see ZORC description on
capacitor alone may not provide When applying surge capacitors on Page 1.4-16 for more detail). Surge 1
adequate surge protection from both sides of a circuit breaker, surge arrester provides protection from
escalating voltages caused by circuit capacitor on one side of the breaker higher voltage peaks resulting from
resonance. Note that when applying must be RC Snubber or ZORC, lightning surges. 2
surge capacitors on both sides of a to mitigate possible virtual
circuit breaker, surge capacitor on current chopping. Further Information
one side of the breaker must be IEEE/ANSI Standard 142Grounding 3
RC Snubber or ZORC, to mitigate Better protection: RC Snubber in Industrial and Commercial Power
possible virtual current chopping. parallel with Surge Arrester for Systems (Green Book)
protection from high frequency
IEEE Standard 241Electric Power 4
transients and voltage peaks.
Systems in Commercial Buildings
(Gray Book)
IEEE Standard 141Electric Power
5
Distribution for Industrial Plants
(Red Book)
6
Table 1.4-3. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings
Service Distribution Class Arresters Station Class Arresters
Voltage Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or
7
Line-to-Line Grounded System Grounded System Ungrounded System Grounded System Grounded System Ungrounded System
kV
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV
Arrester Ratings kV
Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV
8
2.30 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55
2.40 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10 9
3.30 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10
4.00 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10
4.16
4.76
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
9
5.10
7.65
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
9
5.10
7.65
10
4.80 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.60 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.90 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 9 7.65 9 7.65 11
7.20 6 5.10 6 5.10 10 8.40 6 5.10 9 7.65 10 8.40
8.32 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20
8.40 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 12
11.00 9 7.65 9 7.65 15 12.70 9 7.65 10 8.40 15 12.70
11.50 9 7.65 10 8.40 18 15.30 9 7.65 12 10.20 18 15.30
12.00 10 8.40 10 8.40 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30 13
12.47 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.20 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.80 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 15 12.70 18 15.30
14.40 12 10.20 12 10.20 21 17.00 12 10.20 15 12.70 21 17.00
14
18.00 15 12.70 15 12.70 27 22.00 15 12.70 18 15.30 27 22.00
20.78 18 15.30 18 15.30 30 24.40 18 15.30 21 17.00 30 24.40
22.00 18 15.30 18 15.30 30 24.40 18 15.30 21 17.00 30 24.40 15
22.86 18 15.30 21 17.00 18 15.30 24 19.50 36 29.00
23.00 18 15.30 21 17.00 18 15.30 24 19.50 36 29.00
24.94
25.80
21
21
17.00
17.00
24
24
19.50
19.50

21
21
17.00
17.00
24
24
19.50
19.50
36
36
29.00
29.00
16
26.40 21 17.00 24 19.50 21 17.00 27 22.00 39 31.50
33.00
34.50
27
30
22.00
24.40
30
30
24.40
24.40

27
30
22.00
24.40
36
36
29.00
29.00
45
48
36.50
39.00
17
38.00 30 24.40 30 24.40 36 29.00
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 074
Power Quality
i Power Quality Terms Defining the Problem Another option is to buy power condi-
Power quality problems can be resolved tioning equipment to correct any and
Technical Overview in three ways: by reducing the variations all perceived power quality problems
in the power supply (power distur- without any on-site investigation.
ii Introduction bances), by improving the load equip- Power Quality Terms
Sensitive electronic loads deployed ments tolerance to those variations, or
by inserting some interface equipment Power disturbance: Any deviation
today by users require strict require-
1 ments for the quality of power delivered (known as power conditioning equip- from the nominal value (or from some
ment) between the electrical supply selected thresholds based on load
to loads.
and the sensitive load(s) to improve the tolerance) of the input AC power
2 For electronic equipment, power compatibility of the two. Practicality characteristics.
disturbances are defined in terms of and cost usually determine the extent Total harmonic distortion or distortion
amplitude and duration by the elec- to which each option is used.
3 factor: The ratio of the root-mean-
tronic equipment operating envelope.
Many methods are used to define square of the harmonic content to the
Electronic loads may be damaged
power quality problems. For example, root-mean-square of the fundamental
and disrupted, with shortened life
4 expectancy, by disturbances. one option is a thorough on-site quantity, expressed as a percentage
of the fundamental.
investigation, which includes inspecting
The proliferation of computers, variable wiring and grounding for errors, Crest factor: Ratio between the
5 frequency motor drives, UPS systems monitoring the power supply for peak value (crest) and rms value of
and other electronically controlled power disturbances, investigating a periodic waveform.
equipment is placing a greater demand equipment sensitivity to power distur-
6 on power producers for a disturbance- bances, and determining the load Apparent (total) power factor: The
free source of power. Not only do these disruption and consequential effects ratio of the total power input in watts
types of equipment require quality (costs), if any. In this way, the power to the total volt-ampere input.
7 power for proper operation; many quality problem can be defined,
Sag: An rms reduction in the AC
times, these types of equipment are alternative solutions developed,
also the sources of power disturbances voltage, at the power frequency, for
and optimal solution chosen.
8 that corrupt the quality of power in a the duration from a half-cycle to a few
seconds. An undervoltage would have
given facility. Before applying power-conditioning
equipment to solve power quality a duration greater than several seconds.
Power quality is defined according
9 to IEEE Standard 1100 as the concept
problems, the site should be checked
Interruption: The complete loss of volt-
for wiring and grounding problems.
of powering and grounding electronic age for a time period.
Sometimes, correcting a relatively
10 equipment in a manner that is suitable inexpensive wiring error, such as a Transient: A sub-cycle disturbance
to the operation of that equipment. loose connection or a reversed neutral in the AC waveform that is evidenced
IEEE Standard 1159 notes that within and ground wire, can avoid a more by a sharp brief discontinuity of the
11 the industry, alternate definitions or expensive power conditioning solution. waveform. May be of either polarity
interpretations of power quality have and may be additive to or subtractive
been used, reflecting different points Sometimes this approach is not practical
from the nominal waveform.
of view. because of limitations in time; expense
12 is not justified for smaller installations; Surge or impulse: See transient.
In addressing power quality problems monitoring for power disturbances
at an existing site, or in the design may be needed over an extended Noise: Unwanted electrical signals
13 stages of a new building, engineers period of time to capture infrequent that produce undesirable effects
need to specify different services or disturbances; the exact sensitivities of in the circuits of control systems
mitigating technologies. The lowest the load equipment may be unknown in which they occur.
14 cost and highest value solution is and difficult to determine; and finally,
to selectively apply a combination Common-mode noise: The noise
the investigative approach tends to voltage that appears equally and in
of different products and services solve only observed problems. Thus
15 as follows: unobserved or potential problems may
phase from each current-carrying
conductor to ground.
Key services/technologies in the not be considered in the solution. For
16 power quality industry: instance, when planning a new facility, Normal-mode noise: Noise signals
there is no site to investigate. There- measurable between or among active
Power quality surveys, analysis fore, power quality solutions are often circuit conductors feeding the subject
17 and studies implemented to solve potential or per- load, but not between the equipment
Power monitoring ceived problems on a preventive basis grounding conductor or associated
Grounding products and services instead of a thorough on-site investi- signal reference structure and the active
18 Surge protection
gation. circuit conductors.
Voltage regulation
19 Harmonic solutions
Lightning protection (ground rods,
hardware, etc.)
20 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
or motor-generator (M-G) set
21

Sheet 01 075
Power Quality
Methodology for Ensuring Effective The proliferation of communication The benefit of implementing cascaded
Power Quality to Electronic Loads and computer network systems network protection is shown in i
The power quality pyramid is an has increased the need for proper Figure 1.4-12. Combined, the two
effective guide for addressing power grounding and wiring of AC and data/ stages of protection at the service
quality problems at an existing facility. communication lines. In addition to entrance and branch panel locations ii
The framework is also effective for reviewing AC grounding and bonding reduce the IEEE 62.41 recommended
specifying engineers who are design- practices, it is necessary to prevent test wave (C320 kV, 10 kA) to less than
ing a new facility. Power quality starts ground loops from affecting the signal 200 V voltage, a harmless disturbance 1
with grounding (the base of the reference point. level for 120 V rated sensitive loads.
pyramid) and then moves upward
to address the potential issues. This 2. Surge Protection If only building entrance feeder 2
protection were provided, the let-
simple, yet proven methodology, Surge protection devices (SPDs) through voltage will be approximately
will provide the most cost-effective are recommended as the next stage
approach. As we move higher up the power quality solutions. NFPA,
950 V in a 277/480 V system exposed 3
to induced lightning surges. This
pyramid, the cost per kVA of mitigating UL 96A, IEEE Emerald Book and level of let-through voltage can cause
potential problems increase and the equipment manufacturers recom-
quality of the power increases (refer mend the use of surge protectors.
degradation or physical damage of 4
most electronic loads.
to Figure 1.4-11). The SPD shunt short duration voltage
disturbances to ground, thereby Wherever possible, consultants,
preventing the surge from affecting specifiers and application engineers
5
electronic loads. When installed as should ensure similar loads are fed
part of the facility-wide design, SPDs from the same source. In this way,
disturbance-generating loads are
6
Cost Per kVA
are cost-effective compared to all

other solutions (on a $/kVA basis). separated from electronic circuits
affected by power disturbances. For
The IEEE Emerald Book recommends example, motor loads, HVAC systems
7
the use of a two-stage protection and other linear loads should be
concept. For large surge currents, separated from the sensitive process
diversion is best accomplished in control and computer systems.
8
two stages: the first diversion should
be performed at the service entrance The most effective and economic
5. Uninterruptible Power Supply to the building. Then, any residual solution for protecting a large number 9
(UPS, Gen. Sets, etc.) of loads is to install parallel SPDs at
voltage resulting from the action
4. Harmonic Distortion can be dealt with by a second the building service entrance feeder
3. Voltage Regulation protective device at the power and panelboard locations. This reduces 10
2. Surge Protection panel of the computer room the cost of protection for multiple
(or other critical loads). sensitive loads.
1. Grounding 11
Figure 1.4-11. Power Quality Pyramid
Inputhigh energy
12
1. Grounding SPD
transient disturbance; IEEE Category
CP
SPD C3 Impulse 20,000V; 10,000A
Grounding represents the foundation 480V 120/208V
20,000V
13
PEAK VOLTAGE
of a reliable power distribution

system. Grounding and wiring Computer or
Sensitive
Best achievable
performance with single SPD
problems can be the cause of up to Stage 1 Protection Loads
at main panel (950V, at Stage 1) 14
80% of all power quality problems. (Service Entrance) Stage 2 Protection
All other forms of power quality (Branch Location)
800V
System Test Parameters:
solutions are dependent upon good
IEEE C62.41[10] and C62.45 [10] 400V 15
grounding procedures.
test procedures using category; 0
480V main entrance panels; 25 uS 50 uS
100 ft (30m) of three-phase wire;

TIME (MICROSECONDS)
16
480/208V distribution transformer; Two stage (cascade
and 208V branch panel. approach) achieves best
= SPD
possible protection (less
than 200V at Stage 2) 17
Figure 1.4-12. Cascaded Network Protection 18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 076
Power Quality
The recommended system approach Building entrance SPDs protect By twisting the installation wires, the
i for installing SPDs is summarized in the facility against large external area between wires is reduced and the
Figure 1.4-13. transients, including lightning mutual inductance affect minimized.
SPDs are bi-directional and prevent
ii transient and noise disturbances
Increasing the diameter of the installation
1. wires is of negligible benefit. Induc-
Identify Critical Loads from feeding back within a system tance is a skin effect phenomenon and
when installed at distribution or
1 branch panels
a function of wire circumference. Since
2. only a marginal reduction in inductance
Identify Non-Critical Loads Two levels of protection safeguard is achieved when the diameter of the
sensitive loads from physical
2 damage or operational upset
installation conductors is increased,
3.
the use of large diameter wire results
Identify Noise and in only minimal improvement (see
Side-Mounted SPD vs. Integral SPD
3 Disturbance Generating Loads
Directly connecting the surge sup-
Figure 1.4-15).
presser to the busbar of electrical Further benefits provided by integrated
4. distribution equipment results in surge suppression designs are the
4 Review Internal Power Distribution Layout
the best possible level of protection. elimination of field installation costs and
Compared to side-mounted devices, the amount of expensive outboard
5. connecting the SPD unit to the busbar wall space taken up by side-mounted
5 Identify Facility Exposure to eliminates the need for lead wires SPD devices.
Expected Levels of Disturbance
and reduces the let-through voltage
up to 50% (see Figure 1.4-14). Building Entrance Feeder Installation
6 6. Considerations
Apply Mitigating Equipment to: Given that surges are high frequency Installing an SPD device immediately
a) Service Entrance Main Panels disturbances, the inductance of the after the switchgear or switchboard
7 b) Key Sub-Panels installation wiring increases the main breaker is the optimal location
c) Critical Loads
let-through voltage of the protective for protecting against external distur-
d) Data and Communication Lines
device. Figure 1.4-15 shows that bances such as lightning. When placed
8 for every inch of lead length, the in this location, the disturbance is
Figure 1.4-13. System Approach for Installing SPDs let-through voltage is increased by intercepted by the SPD and reduced
There may be specific critical loads an additional 1525 V above the to a minimum before reaching the
9 within a facility that require a higher manufacturers stated suppression distribution and/or branch panel(s).
level of protection. A series SPD is best performance.
suited for protecting such loads. The use of a disconnect breaker
10 Lead length has the greatest effect on eliminates the need to de-energize
Advantages of the system approach are: the actual level of protection realized. the building entrance feeder equip-
Twisting of the installation wires is ment should the SPD fail or require
The lowest possible investment
11 in mitigating equipment to protect
the second most important installation isolation for Megger testing.
consideration.
a facility
12
208Y/120 Panelboard
13 (integrated versus side mounted SPD)
1000 Side-Mounted SPD Device

Side-Mounted SPD SPD Integrated
14
Let-Through Voltage at Bus Bar
(assuming 14-inch (355.6 mm) lead length to bus)

used for Retrofit into Panelboards,
Applications Switchboards, MCCs 800
15 600
N 400
16 SPD
Integrated SPD
SPD (direct bus bar connection)
200
17
GRO UND G RO UND
0
Surge
18 G 200
Event
G 2.00 0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00
N
\
Microseconds
19
Figure 1.4-14. Performance Comparison of Side-Mounted vs. Integrated SPD
20
21

Sheet 01 077
Power Quality
Reference Tab 34 for detailed

Additional Let-Through Voltage Using IEEE C1(6000V, 3000A)[3] information on SPDs. i
Additional Let-Through Voltage
Waveform (UL 1449 Test Wave)[12]

900 14 AWG
800 209V (23%) 3. Voltage Regulation
700
10 AWG
Voltage regulation (i.e., sags or over-
ii
600 4 AWG
673V (75%) voltage) disturbances are generally
500
site- or load-dependent. A variety of
400
300 mitigating solutions are available
1
200
depending upon the load sensitivity,
100
fault duration/magnitude and the
0
3 ft (914.4 mm) 1 ft (304.8 mm) specific problems encountered. It is
2
Lead Length Lead Length, recommended to install monitoring
Loose Wiring Twisted Wires Twisted Wires equipment on the AC power lines to
assess the degree and frequency of
3
Figure 1.4-15. The Effect of Installation Lead Length on Let-Through Voltage occurrences of voltage regulation
1 Additional to UL 1449 ratings. problems. The captured data will allow 4
The size or capacity of a suppressor is This increase in disturbance voltage for the proper solution selection.
measured in surge current per phase. can result in process disruption
Larger suppressers rated at approxi- and downtime. 4. Harmonics Distortion 5
mately 250 kA per phase should be
Installing Dataline Surge Protection Harmonics and Nonlinear Loads
installed at the service entrance to
survive high-energy surges associated Most facilities also have communica- Until recently, most electrical loads were 6
with lightning. tion lines that are potential sources linear. Linear loads draw the full sine
for external surges. As identified by wave of electric current at its 60 cycle
A 250 kA per phase surge rating allows
for over a 25-year life expectancy
the power quality pyramid, proper (Hz) fundamental frequencyFigure 7
grounding of communication lines is 1.4-16 shows balance single-phase,
assuming an IEEE defined high essential for dependable operation. linear loads. As the figure shows,
exposure environment. Lower surge NEC Article 800 states that all data, little or no current flows in the neutral 8
rating devices may be used; however, power and cable lines be grounded conductor when the loads are non-
device reliability and long-term and bonded. linear and balanced.
performance may be compromised.
Power disturbances such as lightning With the arrival of nonlinear electronic
9
For aerial structures, the 99.8 percentile can elevate the ground potential loads, where the AC voltage is con-
recorded lightning stroke current is between two communicating pieces verted to a DC voltage, harmonics are
less than 220 kA. The magnitude of of electronic equipment with different created because of the use of only part
10
surges conducted or induced into a ground references. The result is current of the AC sine wave. In this conversion
facility electrical distribution system is from AC to DC, the electronics are turned
considerably lower given the presence
flowing through the data cable, causing
component failure, terminal lock-up, on in the 60 cycle wave at a given point
11
of multiple paths for the surge to travel data corruption and interference. in time to obtain the required DC level.
along. It is for this reason that IEEE The use of only part of the sign wave
C62.41 recommends the C3 (20 kV, NFPA 780 D4.8 warns that surge causes harmonics.
12
10 kA) test wave for testing SPDs suppression devices should be installed
installed at building entrance feeders. on all wiring entering or leaving elec- It is important to note that the current
tronic equipment, usually power, data distortion caused by loads such as 13
SPDs with surge ratings greater than or communication wiring. rectifiers or switch mode power
250 kA are not required, however, supplies causes the voltage distortion.
higher ratings are available and may Surge suppressers should be installed That voltage distortion is caused by 14
provide longer life. at both ends of a data or communica- distorted currents flowing through an
tion cable. In those situations where impedance. The amount of voltage
Installing Panelboard Surge one end of the cable is not connected distortion depends on: 15
Protection Devices into an electronic circuit (e.g., contactor
Smaller surge capacity SPDs (120 kA coil), protection on the electronic end System impedance
per phase) are installed at branch pan- only is required. Amount of distorted current 16
elboards where power disturbances
are of lower energy, but occur much To prevent the coupling or inducing of Devices that can cause harmonic
more frequently. This level of surge power disturbances into communication disturbances include rectifiers, 17
current rating should result in a lines, the following should be avoided: thrusters and switching power sup-
greater than 25-year life expectancy. plies, all of which are nonlinear.
Data cables should not be run over
fluorescent lighting fixtures
Further, the proliferation of electronic 18
When isolated ground systems are equipment such as computers, UPS
used, the SPD should be installed such Data cables should not be in the systems, variable speed drives,
that any common mode surges are vicinity of electric motors programmable logic controllers, and 19
shunted to the safety ground. The right category cable should the like: non-linear loads have become
be used to ensure transmission a significant part of many installations.
The use of a disconnect breaker is
optional. The additional let-through
performance Other types of harmonic-producing 20
Data cables must be grounded at loads include arcing devices (arc
voltage resulting from the increased furnaces, fluorescent lights) and iron
inductance caused by the disconnect both ends when communicating
switch is about 5060 V. between buildings core storable devices (transformers, 21
especially during energization).

Sheet 01 078
Power Quality
Nonlinear load currents vary widely present on the three phases add Harmonic Issues
i from a sinusoidal wave shape; often together in the neutral, as shown in
Harmonic currents perform no work
they are discontinuous pulses. This Figure 1.4-17, rather than cancel each
means that nonlinear loads are and result in wasted electrical energy
other out, as shown in Figure 1.4-16.
ii that may over burden the distribution
extremely high in harmonic content. Odd non-triplen harmonics are
system. This electrical overloading
classified as positive sequence
Triplen harmonics are the 3rd, 9th, may contribute to preventing an
or negative sequence and are the
existing electrical distribution system
1 15th,...harmonics. Further, triplen 1st, 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc. from serving additional future loads.
harmonics are the most damaging
to an electrical system because these In general, as the order of a harmonic In general, harmonics present on
2 harmonics on the A-phase, B-phase gets higher, its amplitude becomes a distribution system can have the
and C-phase are in sequence with each smaller as a percentage of the funda- following detrimental effects:
other. Meaning, the triplen harmonics mental frequency.
3 1. Overheating of transformers and
rotating equipment.
60 Hz Fundamental
2. Increased hysteresis losses.
4
3. Decreased kVA capacity.
A Phase
4. Overloading of neutral.
5
5. Unacceptable neutral-to-ground
voltages.
6 120 6. Distorted voltage and current
Lagging waveforms.
B Phase
7 7. Failed capacitor banks.
8. Breakers and fuses tripping.
8 9. Double or ever triple sized neutrals
120
Lagging
to defy the negative effects of
C Phase triplen harmonics.
9
In transformers, generators and
uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
10 Balance
systems, harmonics cause overheating
Neutral and failure at loads below their ratings
Current because the harmonic currents cause
11 greater heating than standard 60 Hz
current. This results from increased
Figure 1.4-16. Balanced Neutral Current Equals Zero eddy current losses, hysteresis losses
12 in the iron cores, and conductor skin
effects of the windings. In addition,
60 Hz Fundamental the harmonic currents acting on the
13 3rd Harmonic impedance of the source cause
harmonics in the source voltage, which
A Phase is then applied to other loads such as
14 motors, causing them to overheat.
The harmonics also complicate the
15 application of capacitors for power
120 factor correction. If, at a given harmonic
B Phase
Lagging
frequency, the capacitive impedance
16 equals the system reactive impedance,
the harmonic voltage and current can
reach dangerous magnitudes. At the
17 120 C Phase
same time, the harmonics create
Lagging problems in the application of power
factor correction capacitors, they
18 lower the actual power factor. The
rotating meters used by the utilities for
watthour and various measurements
19 Neutral
Triplen
do not detect the distortion component
caused by the harmonics. Rectifiers
Current with diode front ends and large DC side

20 Phase Triplen Harmonics

capacitor banks have displacement
Added in the Neutral
power factor of 90% to 95%. More
recent electronic meters are capable
21 Figure 1.4-17. Unbalanced Single-Phase Loads with Triplen Harmonics
of metering the true kVA hours taken
by the circuit.

Sheet 01 079
Power Quality
Single-phase power supplies for Total Harmonic Distortion Table 1.4-7. Current Distortion Limits for
computer and fixture ballasts are
Revised standard IEEE 519-1992
General Distribution Systems (120 69,000 V) i
rich in third harmonics and their Maximum Harmonic Current Distortion in
odd multiples. indicates the limits of current distor-
Percent of IL
tion allowed at the PCC (Point of ii
Individual Harmonic Order (Odd Harmonics)
Even with the phase currents perfectly Common Coupling) point on the
balanced, the harmonic currents in system where the current distortion ISC /IL <11 11 17 23 35 TDD
<h <h <h <h
the neutral can total 173% of the is calculated, usually the point of
connection to the utility or the main
<17 <23 <35 1
phase current. This has resulted in
overheated neutrals. The Information supply bus of the system. <20 3 4.0 2.0 1.5 0.6 0.3 5.0
Technology Industry Council (ITIC)
The standard also covers the harmonic
20<50
50<100
7.0
10.0
3.5
4.5
2.5
4.0
1.0
1.5
0.5
0.7
8.0
12.0
2
formerly known as CBEMA, recom-
mends that neutrals in the supply to limits of the supply voltage from the 100<1000 12.0 5.5 5.0 2.0 1.0 15.0
utility or cogenerators. >1000 15.0 7.0 6.0 2.5 1.4 20.0
electronic equipment be oversized 3 All power generation equipment is limited 3
to at least 173% of the ampacity of Table 1.4-5. Low Voltage System Classification to these values of current distortion,
the phase conductors to prevent and Distortion Limits for 480 V Systems regardless of actual ISC/IL where:
problems. ITIC also recommends Class C AN DF ISC = Maximum short-circuit current at PCC. 4
derating transformers, loading them IL = Maximum demand load current
to no more than 50% to 70% of their Special application 2 10 16,400 3% (fundamental frequency component) at PCC.
nameplate kVA, based on a rule-of- General system
Dedicated system
5
2
22,800
36,500
5%
10%
TDD = Total Demand Distortion. Even
harmonics are limited to 25% of the odd
5
thumb calculation, to compensate harmonic limits above. Current distortions
for harmonic heating effects. 2 Special systems are those where the rate that result in a DC offset, e.g., half-wave
In spite of all the concerns they
of change of voltage of the notch might
mistrigger an event. AN is a measurement
converters, are not allowed. 6
cause, nonlinear loads will continue of notch characteristics measured in
volt-microseconds, C is the impedance
Harmonic Solutions
to increase. Therefore, the design of
nonlinear loads and the systems that ratio of total impedance to impedance In spite of all the concerns nonlinear 7
at common point in system. DF is loads cause, these loads will continue
supply them will have to be designed distortion factor.
so that their adverse effects are greatly to increase. Therefore, the design
reduced. Table 1.4-4 shows the typical of nonlinear loads and the systems 8
Table 1.4-6. Utility or Cogenerator Supply that supply them will need design so
harmonic orders from a variety of Voltage Harmonic Limits
harmonic generating sources. adverse harmonic effects are greatly
Voltage 2.369 kV 69138 kV >138 kV reduced. Table 1.4-8 and depicts many 9
Range harmonic solutions along with their
Table 1.4-4. Source and Typical Harmonics
Source Typical Maximum 3.0% 1.5% 1.0% advantages and disadvantages.
Harmonics 1 individual 10
harmonic Eatons Engineering Services &
6-pulse rectifier 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19 Total 5.0% 2.5% 1.5%
Systems Group (EESS) can perform
12-pulse rectifier
18-pulse rectifier
11, 13, 23, 25
17, 19, 35, 37
harmonic harmonic studies and recommend 11
distortion solutions for harmonic problems.
Switch-mode power
supply
Fluorescent lights
3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13
3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 Vh 12
Arcing devices 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
Percentages are x 100 for each
harmonic V1
Transformer energization 2, 3, 4
1 Generally, magnitude decreases as harmonic and
13
order increases.
h = hmax 1/2 14
Vthd = 2
Vh
h=2 15
It is important for the system designer
to know the harmonic content of the
utilitys supply voltage because it will 16
affect the harmonic distortion of
the system.
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 080
Power Quality
Table 1.4-8. Harmonic Solutions for Given Loads

i Load Solutions Advantages Disadvantages
Type
ii Drives and rectifiers Line reactors Inexpensive May require additional compensation
includes three-phase For 6-pulse standard drive/rectifier, can
UPS loads reduce harmonic current distortion from
80% down to about 3540%
1 K-rated/drive isolation Offers series reactance (similar to line No advantage over reactors for
transformer reactors) and provides isolation for reducing harmonics unless in pairs
some transients for shifting phases
2 DC choke Slightly better than AC line reactors Not always an option for drives
for 5th and 7th harmonics Less protection for input semiconductors
85% reduction versus standard Cost difference approaches 18-pulse drive
3 12-pulse convertor
6-pulse drives and blocking filters, which guarantee
IEEE 519 compliance
Harmonic mitigating Substantial (5080%) reduction in harmonics Harmonic cancellation highly dependent
4 transformers/phase shifting when used in tandem on load balance
Must have even multiples of matched loads
Tuned filters Bus connectedaccommodates Requires allocation analysis
5 load diversity Sized only to the requirements of that system;
Provides PF correction must be resized if system changes
Broadband filters Makes 6-pulse into the equivalent Higher cost
6 of 18-pulse Requires one filter per drive
18-pulse converter Excellent harmonic control for drives High cost
above 100 hp
7 IEEE 519 compliant
Active filters Handles load/harmonic diversity High cost
Complete solution up to 50th harmonic
8 Computers/ Neutral blocking filter Eliminates the 3rd harmonic from load High cost
switch-mode Relieves system capacity May increase voltage distortion
power supplies Possible energy savings
9 Harmonic mitigating 3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load Requires fully rated circuits and
transformers When used as phase-shifted transformers, oversized neutrals to the loads
reduces other harmonics
10 Reduces voltage flat-topping
Oversized neutral/derated Tolerate harmonics rather than correct Upstream and downstream equipment
transformer Typically least expensive fully rated for harmonics
11
K-rated transformer Tolerate harmonics rather than correct Does not reduce system harmonics
Fluorescent Harmonic mitigating 3rd harmonic recalculated back to the load Requires fully rated circuits and
12 lighting transformers When used as phase-shifted transformers, oversized neutrals to the loads
reduces other harmonics
Reduces voltage flat-topping
13 K-rated transformer Tolerate harmonics rather than correct them Does not reduce system harmonics
Low distortion ballasts Reduce harmonics at the source Additional cost and typically more
expensive than system solutions
14 Welding/arcing Active filters Fast response and broadband High cost
loads harmonic correction
Reduces voltage flicker
15 Tuned filters SCR controlled tuned filters simulates SCR controlled units are high cost
an active filter response but fixed filters are reasonable
System Tuned filters Provides PF correction System analysis required to verify application.
16 solutions Lower cost compared to other systems Must be resized if system changes
Harmonic mitigating Excellent choice for new design or upgrade No PF correction benefit
transformers
17 Active filters Ideal solution and handles system diversity Highest cost
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)
Sheet 01 081
5. Uninterruptible Power The normal power source supplied by Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Systems (UPS) the local utility or provider is not stable systems have evolved to serve the i
enough over time to continuously needs of sensitive equipment and
The advent of solid-state semiconduc- serve these loads without interruption. can supply a stable source of electrical
tors over 40 years ago, and their It is possible that a facility outside a power, or switch to backup to allow ii
subsequent evolution to transistors, major metropolitan area served by the for an orderly shutdown of the loads
and the miniaturization of electronics utility grid will experience outages of without appreciable loss of data or
into microprocessor over 25 years ago, some nature 1520 times in one year. process. In the early days of main- 1
has created numerous computation Certain outages are caused by the frame computers, motor-generator
machines that assist us in every weather, and others by the failure sets provide isolation and clean power
conceivable manner. These machines, of the utility supply system due to to the computers. They did not have 2
and their clever configurations, equipment failures or construction deep reserves, but provided extensive
whether they take the form of interruptions. Some outages are ride-through capability while other
computers, appliance controls, fax only several cycles in duration, while sources of power (usually standby 3
machines, phone systems, computers others may be for hours at a time. emergency engine generator sets) were
of all sizes, server systems and server brought to serve the motor-generator
farms, emergency call centers, data In a broader sense, other problems sets while the normal source of power 4
processing at banks, credit companies, exist in the area of power quality, and was unstable or unavailable.
private company communication many of those issues also contribute
networks, government institutions and to the failure of the supply to provide UPS systems have evolved along the 5
defense agencies, all rely on a narrow that narrow range of power to the lines of rotary types and static types
range of nominal AC power in order sensitive loads mentioned above. of systems, and they come in many
for these devices to work properly. Power quality problems take the configurations, and even hybrid 6
Indeed, many other types of equip- form of any of the following: power designs having characteristics of
ment also require that the AC electrical failure, power sag, power surge, both types. The discussion that
power source be at or close to nominal undervoltage, overvoltage, line noise, follows attempts to compare and 7
voltage and frequency. Disturbances of frequency variations, switching contrast the two types of UPS
the power translate into failed transients and harmonic distortion. systems, and give basic guidance
processes, lost data, decreased Regardless of the reason for outages on selection criteria. This discussion 8
efficiency and lost revenue. and power quality problems, the will focus on the medium, large and
sensitive loads can not function very large UPS systems required by
normally without a backup power users who need more than 10 kVA of 9
source, and in many cases, the loads clean reliable power.
must be isolated from the instabilities of
the utility supply and power quality 10
problems and given clean reliable
power on a continuous basis, or be
able to switch over to reliable clean 11
electrical power quickly.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) April 2016
Sheet 01 082
Power Ratings of UPS Systems types of hybrid UPS systems are not system checks are performed then
i Small UPS: Typically 300 VA to 10 kVA,
the focus of this discussion, because the input contactor is closed. The static
only one or two vendors offer these disconnect switch is turned on and the
and sometimes as high as 18 kVA hybrid types of rotary UPS systems, conduction angle is rapidly increased
ii Medium UPS: 1060 kVA although admittedly they continue to from zero to an angle that causes the
Large UPS: 100200 kVA units, and be used in very large-scale data center DC bus voltage between the utility
higher when units are paralleled applications. See Figure 1.4-18 for the converter and the flywheel converter
1 Very Large UPS: 200750 kVA modern high speed Rotary UPS to reach approximately 650 V through
units, and higher when units systems discussed in this section the rectifying action of the freewheel-
are paralleled of the guide. These types of modern ing diodes in the utility converter.
2 rotary UPS systems are advanced, As soon as this level of DC voltage is
Each of these categories is arbitrary integrated designs using scalable reached, the static disconnect turns
because manufacturers have many configurations of high-speed flywheel, on fully. The next steps involved the
3 different UPS offerings for the same motor and generator in one compact utility converter IGBTs to start firing,
application. The choice of UPS type UPS package. The new rotary which allows the converter to act as
and the configuration of UPS modules technologies have the potential to a rectifier, a regulating voltage source
4 for a given application depends upon replace battery backup systems, or and an active harmonic filter. As the
many factors, including how many at least reduce the battery content IGBTs begin to operate, the DC bus
power quality problems the UPS is for certain applications. The appeal is increased to a normal operating
5 expected to solve; how much future of rotary systems is the avoidance of voltage of approximately 800 V, and
capacity is to be purchased now for the purchase, maintenance and facility the output bus is transferred from
future loads; the nature of the sensi- space required by DC battery based bypass to the output of the power
6 tive loads and load wiring; which backup systems. electronics module. The transfer from
type of UPS system is favored, rotary bypass is completed when the output
or static; choices of battery or DC High-Speed Rotary contactor is closed and the bypass
7 storage technology considered; and
Concept of Operation contactor opened in a make-before-
a host of other application issues. break manner.
The modern rotary type of UPS
8 Rotary UPS Systems operation is understood by reviewing The firing of the SCRs in the static
the four topics below: startup mode, disconnect switch is now changed so
Typical Ratings normal operation mode, discharge that each SCR in each phase is only
9 300900 kVA/720 kW maximum. mode and recharge mode. turned on during the half-cycle, which
permits real power to flow from the
Typical Rotary Configurations Startup Mode utility supply to the UPS. This firing
10 Rotary UPS systems are among the The UPS output is energized on pattern at the static disconnect switch
oldest working systems developed bypass as soon as power is applied prevents power from the flywheel
to protect sensitive loads. Many of from the source to the system input. from feeding backward into the
11 these systems are complicated engine- The UPS continues the startup utility supply and ensures that all of
generator sets coupled with high procedure automatically when the the flywheel energy is available to
inertial flywheels operated at relatively front panel controls are placed into support the load.
12 low rotational speeds. These legacy the Online position. Internal UPS
13 Static Bypass Option

It = Input Current
Ir = Real Load Current
14 Ic = Charging Current
Ig = Voltage Regulation Current
Bypass Contactor
15
It = Ir + Ic + Ig Id = Ih + Ix + Ir
Input Static Disconnect
Output
16 Contactor Switch Line Inductor
Contactor
Source Load
17 Flywheel Converter Utility Converter Ic Inverter

Fuse Output Transformer
Ix
18 Field Coil ac dc Filter Inductor Ig Id = Output Current
Ih = Harmonic Current
Driver dc ac Ix = Reactive Load Current
Ir = Real Load Current
19
Ih
Integrated Motor/Flywheel/
and Generator
20
Figure 1.4-18. Typical-High Speed Modern Rotary UPS
21

Sheet 01 083
Immediately after the output is trans- causes a voltage boost across the line as the load power is completely
ferred from bypass to the power elec- inductor, and a lagging current causes transferred to the input source, the util- i
tronic module, the flywheel field is a bucking voltage. By controlling the ity converter and flywheel converter
excited, which also provides magnetic utility converter to maintain nominal start to recharge the flywheel and
lift to unload the flywheel bearings. output voltage, just enough reactive return to normal operation mode. The ii
The flywheel inverter is turned on current flows through the line inductor flywheel recharge power is program-
and gradually increases frequency to make up the difference between the mable between a slow and fast rate,
at a constant rate to accelerate the input voltage and the output voltage. and using the fast rate results in an 1
flywheel to approximately 60 rpm. increase of UPS input current over
Once the flywheel reaches 60 rpm, The load current consists of three nominal levels. Recharging the flywheel
the flywheel inverter controls the components: the harmonic current is accomplished by controlling the 2
acceleration to keep currents below the required by the load, the reactive load utility and flywheel converter in a
maximum charging and the maximum current, and the real current, which similar manner as is used to maintain
input settings. Once the flywheel does the work. The utility converter full charge in the normal operation 3
reaches 4000 rpm, the UPS is fully supplies both the harmonic and mode, however the IGBT gating points
functional and capable of supporting reactive currents. Because these are changed to increase current into
the load during a power quality event. currents supply no net power to the the flywheel. 4
flywheel acceleration continues until load, the flywheel supplies no energy
the Flywheel reaches full charge at for these currents. They circulate High-Speed Rotary Advantages
7700 rpm. The total time to complete between the utility converter and the Addresses all power quality 5
startup is less than 5 minutes. load. The power stage controls analyze problems
the harmonic current requirements of
Battery systems are not required
Normal Operation Mode the load and set the firing angle of
or used 6
Once the UPS is started and the the inverter IGBTs to make the utility
converter a very low impedance source No battery maintenance required
flywheel is operating at greater than
4000 rpm, the UPS is in the normal to any harmonic currents. Thus, Unlimited discharge cycles 7
operating mode where it is regulating nonlinear load currents are supplied 150-second recharge time available
output voltage and supplying reactive almost entirely from the utility Wide range of operating tempera-
and harmonic currents required by the converter with little effect on the tures can be accommodated 8
load. At the same time it cancels the quality of the UPS output voltage (20 to 40 C)
effect of load current harmonics on the waveform and with almost no
Small compact size and less floor
UPS output voltage. transmission of load harmonics
space required (500 kW systems
9
currents to the input of the UPS.
Input current consists of three compo- takes 20 sq ft)
nents: real load current, charging Discharge Mode N+1 reliability available up to 10
current, and voltage regulation current. The UPS senses the deviation of 900 kVA maximum
Real current is current that is in phase the voltage or frequency beyond No disposal issues
with the supply voltage and supplies programmed tolerances and quickly
High-Speed Rotary Disadvantages
11
real power to the load. Real current disconnects the supply source by
flowing through the line inductor causes turning off the static disconnect switch Flywheel does not have deep
a slight phase shift of the current and opening the input contactor. The reserve capacityrides through 12
lagging the voltage by 10 degrees disconnect occurs in less than one-half for up to 13 seconds at 100% load
and ensures that the UPS can quickly cycle. Then the utility converter starts Some enhanced flywheel systems
transfer to bypass without causing delivering power from the DC bus to may extend the ride through to 13
unacceptable switching transients. The the load, and the flywheel converter 30 seconds at 100% load
second component is charging current changes the firing point of its IGBTs Mechanical flywheel maintenance
required by the flywheel to keep the to deliver power to the DC bus. The required every 23 years, and oil 14
rotating mass fully charged at rated UPS maintains a clean output voltage changes required every year
rpm, or to recharge the rotating mass within 3% or nominal voltage to the
Recharge fast rates require the
after a discharge. The power to main- load when input power is lost.
input to be sized for 125% of
15
tain full charge is low at 2 kW and
is accomplished by the IGBTs of the Recharge Mode nominal current
flywheel converter gating to provide When input power is restored to Flywheels failures in field not 16
small pulses of motoring current to the acceptable limits, the UPS synchronizes understood
flywheel. This current can be much the output and input voltages, closes Requires vacuum pumps for
higher if fast recharge times are the input contactor and turns on the high-speed flywheels 17
selected. The final component of input static disconnect switch. The utility Limited number of vendors and
current is the voltage regulation current, converter then transfers power from experience
which is usually a reactive current that the flywheel to the input source by 18
circulates between the input and the linearly increasing the real input
utility converter to regulate the output current. The transfer time is program-
voltage. Leading reactive current mable from 1 to 15 seconds. As soon 19
20
21

Sheet 01 084
Static UPS Systems 2. The Rectifier/Charger function mode in 150120 milliseconds.

i converts the normal AC power to When the UPS recognizes a
Typical Ratings DC power to charge the battery requirement to transfer to the
40750 kVA/600 kW, and higher when and power the inverter. The load bypass mode, it simultaneously
ii multiple units are paralleled. is isolated from the normal turns the static switch ON, the
input source. output breaker to OPEN, and the
Typical Static UPS Configurations bypass breaker to CLOSE. The
1 Static UPS systems modules are
3. The battery stores DC energy output breaker opens and the
for use when input power to the bypass breaker closes in about
available in three basic types of
UPS fails. The amount of power 50 milliseconds. The restoration
configurations known as standby, line
2 interactive and double conversion.
available from the DC battery of normal conditions at the UPS
system and time to discharge results in the automatic restoration
See Tab 33 in this guide for details on
voltage is a function of the type of of the UPS module powering the
all the UPS configurations available
3 from Eaton. The lighter power ratings
battery selected and the ampere- load through the rectifier/charger
hour sized used. Battery systems and inverter with load isolation
are likely to be one of the first two
should be sized for no less than from power quality problems, and
types of configurations, e.g., standby
4 or line interactive. Most medium or
5 minutes of clean power usage the opening of the bypass circuit.
from a fully charged state, and, in
large static UPS installations use the
many cases, are sized to provide Static Double Conversion Advantages
double conversion technology in one
5 or multiple module configurations,
more time on battery power. Addresses all power quality
i.e., or multiple UPS units in parallel. 4. The DC link connects the output problems
Figure 1.4-19 illustrates the one-line of the rectifier/charger to the input Suitable for applications from
6 diagram of a simple single Double of the inverter and to the battery. 5 kVA to over 2500 kVA
Conversion UPS module. Brief Typically the rectifier/charger is Simple battery systems are
explanations appear for the standby sized slightly higher than 100% of sized for application
7 and line interactive UPS systems UPS output because it must power Long battery backup times and
after the text explaining the Double the inverter and supply charger long life batteries are available
Conversion static UPS type of system. power to the battery.
8 Higher reliability is available
A. Double conversion concept of 5. The bypass circuit provides a using redundant UPS modules
operationthe basic operation of path for unregulated normal
9 the Double Conversion UPS is: power to be routed around the
major electronic sub-assemblies
1. Normal power is connected to
of the UPS to the load so that the
10 the UPS input through the facility
load can continue to operate during
electrical distribution system.
maintenance, or when the UPS
This usually involves two input
electronics fails. The bypass static
11 circuits that must come from the
switch can switch to conducting
same source.
12
Bypass Breaker (Optional) UPS Module
13
Bypass Static Switch
14 Source Load
Normal Rectifier/Charger Output
Inverter
Breaker Breaker
15 AC DC
DC AC
16 Battery Breaker
17 Battery
18 Figure 1.4-19. Typical Static UPS, Double Conversion Type with Battery Backup
19
20
21

Sheet 01 085
Static Double Conversion Disadvantages 3. The battery stores DC energy for C. Static line interactive UPS
Battery systems, battery maintenance use by the inverter when input concept of operationthe basic i
and battery replacement are required power to the UPS fails. The operation of the Line Interactive
amount of power available from UPS is:
Large space requirement for
battery systems (higher life takes
the DC battery system and time to ii
discharge voltage is a function of 1. The Line Interactive type of UPS
more space, e.g., 500 kW takes has a different topology than the
the type of battery selected and
80200 sq ft depending upon the static double conversion and 1
the ampere-hour sized used.
type of battery used, VRLA 10 year, standby systems. The normal
Battery systems should be sized
VRLA 20 year or flooded) input power is connected to the
for the anticipated outage.
Limited discharge cycles of load in parallel with a battery 2
battery system 4. The DC link connects the output of and bi-directional inverter/charger
Narrow temperature range the rectifier/charger to the input of assembly. The input source usu-
for application the inverter and to the battery. ally terminates at a line inductor 3
Typically the rectifier/charger and the output of the inductor is
Efficiencies are in the 9094%
is sized only to supply charger connected to the load in parallel
range, which is lower than some line
interactive configurations
power to the battery, and is with the battery and inverter/ 4
rated far lower than in the charger circuit. See Figure 1.4-21
Bypass mode places load at risk double conversion UPS. for more details.
unless bypass has UPS backup
5. The bypass circuit provides a 2. The traditional rectifier circuit
5
Redundancy of UPS modules
results in higher costs direct connection of input source is eliminated and this results
to the load. The load operates in a smaller footprint and
Output faults are cleared by the
from unregulated power. The weight reduction. However, line
6
bypass circuit
bypass static switch can switch conditioning is compromised.
Output rating of the UPS is 150% to non-conducting mode in 150
for 30 seconds 120 milliseconds. When the UPS 3. When the input power fails, the 7
Battery disposal and safety recognizes the loss of normal battery/inverter charger circuit
issues exist input power, it transfers to battery/ reverses power and supplies the
inverter mode by simultaneously load with regulated power. 8
B. Standby UPS concept of
turning the Inverter ON and the Static Line Interactive UPS Advantages
operationThe basic operation of
static switch OFF. 9
the Standby UPS is: Slight improvement of power
Static Standby UPS Advantages conditioning over standby
1. The Standby UPS topology is UPS systems
Lower costs than double conversion
similar to the double conversion
Small footprints and weights 10
type, but the operation of the UPS Rectifier and charger are
is different in significant ways. economically sized Efficient design
Normal power is connected to Efficient design Batteries are sized for the 11
the UPS input through the facility Batteries are sized for the
application
electrical distribution system. application Static Line Interactive UPS Disadvantages
This usually involves two input 12
circuits that must come from the Static Standby UPS Disadvantages Impractical over 5 kVA
same source. See Figure 1.4-20 Impractical over 2 kVA Not as good conditioning as
for details.
Little to no isolation of load from double conversion 13
2. The rectifier/charger function power quality disturbances Standby power is from battery alone
converts the normal AC power to Standby power is from battery alone Battery systems, battery mainte-
DC power to charge the battery nance and battery replacement 14
Battery systems, battery mainte-
only, and does not simultaneously nance and battery replacement are required
power the inverter. The load is Limited discharge cycles for the
connected to the input source
are required
battery system
15
Limited discharge cycles of
through the bypass static switch. Narrow temperature range for
battery system
The inverter is in the standby
mode ready to serve the load Narrow temperature range for application 16
application Battery disposal and safety
from battery power if the input
Output faults are cleared by the issues exist
power source fails. 17
bypass circuit
Battery disposal and safety
issues exist 18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 086
i UPS Module
ii Bypass Static Switch
2 Source Load
Rectifier/
Normal Output
3 Breaker
Charger Inverter
Breaker
AC DC
4 DC AC
Battery
Breaker
5
Battery
6
7 Figure 1.4-20. Typical Static UPS, Standby Type with Battery Backup
8 UPS Module
9
Source Load
10
Inductor
11
Bidirectional
12 Inverter/Charger
DC
13 AC
14
15 Battery
16
Figure 1.4-21. Typical Static UPS, Line Interactive Type with Battery Backup
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 087
Other Application Considerations
Secondary Voltage Selection Technical Factors supplied from a 480 V system through
The choice between 208Y/120 V and The principal advantage of the use of step-down transformers, voltage drop i
higher secondary voltages in buildings in the 480 V supply conductors can be
480Y/277 V secondary distribution for compensated for by the tap adjust-
commercial and institutional buildings is that for a given load, less current
depends on several factors. The most means smaller conductors and lower ments on the transformer, resulting ii
voltage drop. Also, a given conductor in full 120 V output. Because these
important of these are size and types transformers are usually located close
size can supply a large load at the
of loads (motors, fluorescent lighting,
same voltage drop in volts, but a lower to the 120 V loads, secondary voltage 1
incandescent lighting, receptacles) drop should not be a problem. If it is,
and length of feeders. In general, large percentage voltage drop because of
the higher supply voltage. Fewer or taps may be used to compensate by
motor and fluorescent lighting loads,
smaller circuits can be used to transmit raising the voltage at the transformer. 2
and long feeders, will tend to make the
higher voltages, such as 480Y/277 V, the power from the service entrance The interrupting ratings of circuit
point to the final distribution points.
more economical. Very large loads
Smaller conductors can be used in many
breakers and fuses at 480 V have 3
and long runs would indicate the use increased considerably in recent years,
of medium voltage distribution and branch circuits supplying power loads, and protective devices are now available
and a reduction in the number of light-
loadcenter unit substations close to
ing branch circuits is usually possible.
for any required fault duty at 480 V. 4
the loads. Conversely, small loads, In addition, many of these protective
short runs and a high percentage of It is easier to keep voltage drops within devices are current limiting, and can
incandescent lighting would favor acceptable limits on 480 V circuits than be used to protect downstream equip- 5
lower utilization voltages such as on 208 V circuits. When 120 V loads are ment against these high fault currents.
208Y/120 V.
Industrial installations, with large
6
motor loads, are almost always 480 V,
often ungrounded delta or resistance
grounded delta or wye systems (see Elevator
7
section on ground fault protection). Panel
Practical Factors
Typical
8
Because most low voltage distribution
Emergency
equipment available is rated for up to Typical
600 V, and conductors are insulated for
HVAC
Panel
Lighting Panel 9
(Typical Every
600 V, the installation of 480 V systems Third Floor)
uses the same techniques and is
essentially no more difficult, costly, or Typical
10
480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V
hazardous than for 208 V systems. The Panel Panel
major difference is that an arc of 120 V Dry Type Transformer
to ground tends to be se lf-extinguish-

480-208Y/120 V
(Typical Every Floor)
11
ing, while an arc of 277 V to ground HVAC Busway Emergency Elevator
tends to be self-sustaining and likely to Feeder Riser Lighting
cause severe damage. For this reason, Riser
Riser
12
the National Electrical Code requires
ground fault protection of equipment
on grounded wye services of more
Building and
Miscellaneous
Typical Typical
13
Loads
than 150 V to ground, but not exceeding Typical
600 V phase-to-phase (for practical
purpose, 480Y/277 V services), for any
14
Typical Typical
service disconnecting means rated Spare
1000 A or more. The National Electrical 15
Code permits voltage up to 300 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
to ground on circuits supplying

permanently installed electric discharge Automatic 16
lamp fixtures, provided the luminaires 1 4000 A Transfer Switch
Main CB
do not have an integral manual switch Gen. CB
Emergency
and are mounted at least 8 ft (2.4 m) CTs
Utility
or Standby 17
Metering
above the floor. This permits a three- PTs Generator
phase, four-wire, solidly grounded Utility 4000A at 480Y/277V
480Y/277 V system to supply directly all Service 100,000A Available Fault Current
of the fluorescent and high-intensity

18
discharge (HID) lighting in a building at Figure 1.4-22. Typical Power Distribution and Riser Diagram for a Commercial Office Building
277 V, as well as motors at 480 V. 1 Include ground fault trip. 19
20
21

Sheet 01 088
Economic Factors Motors and controls are another cause NEMA standard TP-1 is being adopted
i Utilization equipment suitable for of wasted energy that can be reduced. by many states and is another method
principal loads in most buildings New, energy-efficient motor designs of energy-efficient design. NEMA TP-1
is available for either 480 V or 208 V are available using more and better establishes minimum operating
ii systems. Three-phase motors and core steel, and larger windings. efficiencies for each distribution
their controls can be obtained for either transformer size at a loading equal to
For any motor operating 10 or more 35% of the transformer full load kVA.
voltage, and for a given horsepower
1 are less costly at 480 V. Fluorescent and
hours per day, it is recommended to The 35% loading value in the NEMA
use the energy-efficient types. These standard reflects field studies con-
HID lamps can be used with either 277 V motors have a premium cost of about
or 120 V ballasts. However, in almost all ducted by the U.S. Department of
2 cases, the installed equipment will have
20% more than standard motors. Energy, which showed that dry-type
Depending on loading, hours of use transformers installed in commercial
a lower total cost at the higher voltage. and the cost of energy, the additional facilities are typically loaded at an
3 Energy Conservation
initial cost could be repaid in energy average of 35% of their full load
saved within a few months, and it capacity over a 24-hour time period.
Because of the greatly increased cost rarely takes more than two years. Table 1.4-9 compares losses for
4 of electrical power, designers must Because, over the life of a motor, the both low temperature rise and TP-1
consider the efficiency of electrical cost of energy to operate it is many transformers using a 75 kVA design.
distribution systems, and design for times the cost of the motor itself, any
5 energy conservation. In the past, motor with many hours of use should Table 1.4-9. Load Losses
especially in commercial buildings, be of the energy-efficient type. Temp. Load Losses in Watts
design was for lowest first cost, Rise C No 25% 35% 50% 75% Full
Where a motor drives a load with
6 because energy was inexpensive.
variable output requirements such Loss Load Load Load Load Load
Today, even in the speculative office
building, operating costs are so high as a centrifugal pump or a large fan, 150 360 490 620 885 1535 2450
customary practice has been to run the
7 that energy-conserving designs can
motor at constant speed, and to throttle
115 420 480 610 805 1170 1950
justify their higher initial cost with a 80 500 535 615 730 945 1410
rapid payback and continuing savings. the pump output or use inlet vanes or TP-1 150 230 310 480 745 1235 2280
8 Buildings that must meet LEED certifi- outlet dampers on the fan. This is highly
cations may require energy-saving inefficient and wasteful of energy. In Efficiencies above TP-1. Candidates
designs. There are four major sources recent years, solid-state variable- Standard Level (CSL) is a DOE
9 of energy conservation in a commercial frequency, variable-speed drives for efficiency evaluation for transformers.
buildingthe lighting system, the ordinary induction motors have been CSL-1 is equivalent to TP-1. Levels
motors and controls, the transformers available, reliable and relatively are from CSL-1 to CSL-5. CSL-3 is being
10 and the HVAC system. inexpensive. Using a variable-speed promoted for higher efficiency applica-
drive, the throttling valves, inlet vanes tions. A NEMA white paper Clarifica-
The lighting system must take or output dampers can be eliminated, tions on the Use of DOE DesignLines
11 advantage of the newest equipment saving their initial cost and energy 6, 7 and 8 is available from NEMA that
and techniques. New light sources, over the life of the system. An elaborates on
familiar light sources with higher additional benefit of both energy- the matter.
12 efficiencies, solid-state ballasts with efficient motors and variable-speed
drives (when operated at less than HVAC systems have traditionally been
dimming controls, use of daylight,
environmental design, efficient full speed) is that the motors operate very wasteful of energy, often being
designed for lowest first cost. This,
13 luminaires, computerized or at reduced temperatures, resulting in
too, is changing. For example, reheat
programmed control, and the like, increased motor life.
are some of the methods that can systems are being replaced by variable
Transformers have inherent losses. air volume systems, resulting in equal
14 increase the efficiency of lighting
Transformers, like motors, are designed comfort with substantial increases in
systems. They add up to providing
the necessary amount of light, with the for lower losses by using more and efficiency. While the electrical engineer
better core materials, larger conductors, has little influence on the design of the
15 desired color rendition, from the most
etc., and this results in increased initial HVAC system, he/she can specify that
efficient sources, where and when it is
needed, and not providing light where cost. Because the 480 V to 208Y/120 V all motors with continuous or long duty
stepdown transformers in an office cycles are specified as energy-efficient
16 or when it is not necessary. Using the
building are usually energized 24 hours types, and that the variable-air-volume
best of techniques, office spaces that
originally required as much as 3.5W a day, savings from lower losses can fans do not use inlet vanes or outlet
be substantial, and should be consid- dampers, but are driven by variable-
17 per square foot have been given
ered in all transformer specifications. speed drives. Variable-speed drives
improved lighting, with less glare
and higher visual comfort, using as One method of obtaining reduced can often be desirable on centrifugal
losses is to specify transformers with compressor units as well. Since some
18 little as 1.0 to 2.0W per square foot.
220 C insulation systems designed for of these requirements will be in HVAC
In an office building of 200,000 square
feet (60,960 m), this could mean a 150 C average winding temperature specifications, it is important for the
rise, with no more than 80 C (or energy-conscious electrical engineer
19 saving of 400 kW, which, at $0.05 per
sometimes 115 C) average winding to work closely with the HVAC engineer
kWh, 250 days per year, 10 hours per
day, could save $50,000 per year in temperature rise at full load. A better at the design stage.
method would be to evaluate transformer
20 energy costs. Obviously, efficient
losses, based on actual loading cycles
lighting is a necessity.
throughout the day, and consider the
cost of losses as well as the initial cost
21 of the transformers in purchasing.

Sheet 01 089
Building Control Systems Because building design and control This has been changed by the high
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
for maximum energy saving is impor- cost of purchased energy, plus a i
tant and complex, and frequently federal law (Public Utility Regulatory
from these energy-saving lighting, involves many functions and several Policies Act, known as PURPA) that
power and HVAC systems, they must systems, it is necessary for the design requires public utilities to purchase ii
be controlled to perform their functions engineer to make a thorough building any excess power generated by the
most efficiently. Constant monitoring and environmental study, and to weigh cogeneration plant. In many cases,
would be required for manual operation,
so some form of automatic control
the costs and advantages of many practical commercial cogeneration 1
systems. The result of good design systems have been built that provide
is required. The simplest of these can be economical, efficient operation. some or all of the electric power
energy-saving controls, often very Poor design can be wasteful and required, plus hot water, steam, and 2
effective, is a time clock to turn various extremely costly. sometimes steam absorption-type
systems on and off. Where flexible air conditioning. Such cogeneration
control is required, programmable Distributed Energy Resources systems are now operating success- 3
controllers may be used. These range fully in hospitals, shopping centers,
from simple devices, similar to multi- Distributed energy resources (DER)
are increasingly becoming prominent high-rise apartment buildings and
function time clocks, up to full micro-
sources of electric power. Distributed even commercial office buildings. 4
processor-based, fully programmable
devices, really small computers. For energy resources are usually small-to- Where a cogeneration system is being
complete control of all building systems, medium sources of electric generation, considered, the electrical distribution 5
computers with specialized software either from renewable or non-renew- system becomes more complex. The
can be used. Computers can not only able sources. Sources include: interface with the utility company is
control lighting and HVAC systems,
Photovoltaic (PV) systems critical, requiring careful relaying 6
and provide peak demand control, to to protect both the utility and the
(solar systems)
minimize the cost of energy, but they cogeneration system. Many utilities
Wind
can perform many other functions. Fire have stringent requirements that 7
detection and alarm systems can oper- Fossil-fueled (diesel, natural gas, must be incorporated into the system.
ate through the computer, which can landfill gas, coal-bed methane) Proper generator control and protec-
also perform auxiliary functions such generators (reciprocating engines) tion is necessary, as well. An on-site 8
as elevator control and building com- Gas-fired turbines (natural gas, land- electrical generating plant tied to an
munication in case of fire. Building fill gas, coal-bed methane) electrical utility, is a sophisticated
security systems, such as closed-circuit Water-powered (hydro) engineering design. 9
television monitoring, door alarms and
Fuel cells Utilities require that when the
intruder sensing, can be performed by
the same building computer system. Microturbines protective device at their substation 10
Wave power opens that the device connecting a
The time clocks, programmable cogenerator to the utility open also.
Coal-fired boilers
controllers and computers can 11
obtain data from external sensors One reason is that most cogenerators
Distributed energy resources may also
and control the lighting, motors and are connected to feeders serving other
be termed alternative energy resources.
other equipment by means of hard customers. Utilities desire to reclose
wiring-separate wires to and from Prime Power the feeder after a transient fault is 12
each piece of equipment. In the more DER can be used for generating prime cleared. Reclosing in most cases will
complex systems, this would result in damage the cogenerator if it had
a tremendous number of control
power or for cogeneration. Prime power
concerns a system that is electrically remained connected to their system. 13
wires, so other methods are frequently separated from the electrical grid. Islanding is another reason why the
used. A single pair of wires, with elec-
tronic digital multiplexing, can control
Prime power is generated at remote utility insists on the disconnection of 14
sites where commercial electrical the cogenerator. Islanding is the event
or obtain data from many different power is not available. that after a fault in the utilitys system
points. Sometimes, coaxial cable is is cleared by the operation of the 15
used with advanced signaling equip- Cogeneration protective devices, a part of the
ment. Some systems dispense with system may continue to be supplied
Cogeneration is another outgrowth of
control wiring completely, sending and
the high cost of energy. Cogeneration by cogeneration. Such a condition is 16
receiving digital signals over the dangerous to the utilitys operation
is the production of electric power con-
power wiring. The newest systems during restoration work.
currently with the production of steam,
may use fiber-optic cables to carry
hot water and similar energy uses. The 17
tremendous quantities of data, free Major cogenerators are connected to
electric power can be the main prod-
from electromagnetic interference. the subtransmission or the transmission
uct, and steam or hot water the
The method used will depend on
byproduct, as in most commercial
system of a utility. Major cogenerators 18
the type, number and complexity have buy-sell agreements. In such
installations, or the steam or hot water
of functions to be performed. cases, utilities use a trip transfer
can be the most required product,
and electric power a byproduct, as
scheme to trip the cogenerator breaker. 19
in many industrial installations. In Guidelines that are given in ANSI
some industries, cogeneration has Guide Standard 1001 are a good
been common practice for many starting point, but the entire design 20
years, but until recently it has not should be coordinated with the utility.
been economically feasible for most
commercial installations. 21

Sheet 01 090
PV System Design Considerations The S-Max follows standard industry High Temperature Equation
i Successful photovoltaic (PV) design
and code practices in determining the Once the maximum number of
maximum number of solar modules modules per string is established,
and construction is a complex multi- per string for the open-circuit photo- the minimum number of modules per
ii discipline endeavor. Proper planning
includes the site-layout study for
voltaic (PV) voltage rise in cold string needs to be calculated. Here,
weather (Voc < 600 V as per NEC). Its more site-related aspects come into
maximizing the suns energy harvest- low 300 V MPPT lower-limit ensures play, as the voltage of solar modules
1 ing for solar module selection, and
that multiple configurations are decreases with increasing tempera-
for updating the electrical/mechanical
possible for solar systems hot weather ture. The modules (photovoltaic cell)
design and construction to the latest voltage drop (i.e., Vmp as a function temperature is influenced by the
2 code and local constraints, including
of temperature, solar irradiance and ambient temperature, reflected sun-
fire marshal and seismic regulations.
array-conductor voltage drop). The loads from nearby structures, parapet
Professionally prepared bid, permit, following equations are the basis of walls, roof-coatings, etc. Air-flow
3 construction and as-build drawings
all solar system layout and design. above and behind the solar modules
shall be required and maintained.
Consult professional engineering to affect the cell temperature. The
For installation in/on/for existing help when planning any solar system. accepted industry standards to add
4 structures and sites, it is advised
Engineering design firms offering to the module heating is listed below.
that, at the minimum, pre-design
complete solar systems turn-key Unusual mounting systems may
and construction tests be performed calculations, drawings, construction adjust these figures, and it is best to
5 for existing power-quality issues,
management and procurement are seek assistance in establishing and
water drainage and the utility feeder/
a good place to start. Eaton offers planning such installations.
transformer, and that electrical professional S-Max inverter applica-
6 distribution panel ratings are verified
tion assistance, on-site commissioning 20 C for ground or pole mounted
sufficient for the planned solar system, solar systems
and maintenance services. Eaton
and the necessary arc flash studies be maintains a working relationship with 25 C for roof-top solar systems
7 performed. Connection to the utility
the best engineering services firms mounted at inclined angles
is always a utility interconnect agree-
across the country, and helps arrange (offers improved air-flow behind
ment (application) process, and is the successful implantation of your the modules)
8 typically required for the available
solar system. The S-Max 250 kW 30 C for roof-top solar systems
solar incentives and programs offered
inverter and up-fit solutions easily mounted flat, yet at least 6.00 inches
by the utility, municipality, state, and perform well in Mega-Watt and Utility-
9 various federal agencies and depart- (152.4 mm) above the roof surface
Scale systems. Eaton also offers a
ments. State, and IRS tax incentives Vmp_min = Vmp + (temp-differential x
wide range of balance-of-system
require well-documented records. (BOS) products, ranging from solar temp-coefficient-of-Vmp)
10 Solar systems, while low maintenance, module source and array combiners,
The temp-differential in this case
do require periodic service. The solar to DC and AC breakers, electrical and
includes the above temperature
modules need to be washed-clean on distribution panels and switchgear.
11 a regular basis and electrical termina-
adders. The Vmp and related
Low Temperature Equation temperature coefficients are listed
tions require initial and annual checks. on the solar modules data sheets.
Cooling system filters are periodic Voc_max = Voc + (temp-differential x
12 maintenance items, with the re-fresh temp-coefficient-of-Voc) While the code doesnt indicate the
rate dependent upon typical and The temp-differential is the difference high temperature to use (i.e., because
13 unusual circumstances. between the standard module rating it is an equipment application issue),
at 25 C and the low temperature. the industry standard is to evaluate the
Solar systems installed near other new ASHRAE 2% and 4% high temperature
construction where dust is generated The voltage (Voc) will rise with
14 temperatures under 25 C. figures, coupled to known location
(e.g., grading, paving) or agricultural differences. Record high temperatures
environments may require additional Seek the solar module data sheet for provide an indication of system
solar-system checks and services. a list of standard test condition (STC)
15 Planning for such contingencies is data, temperature coefficients, and any
performance when climatic condition
reaches these levels.
the business of solar-system design, special module-related information to
construction and on-going operation. determine the low-temperature open Beyond the damaging temperature
16 Performance-based incentives circuit voltage. The NEC 2011, and affects on photovoltaic module Vmp
require verifiable metering, often industry practice, requires the voltage levels, voltage drop in PV
by registered/approved independent conductors under such conditions also
17 third parties. Such monitoring periods
use of the sites Extreme Annual
Mean Minimum Design Dry Bulb need to be calculated and evaluated,
are typically for 60 or more months. Temperature data, available in the beyond normal temperatures. The
inverter only uses (knows) the Vmp
18 The S-Max inverter offers a wide range ASHRAE Handbook. Code requires
voltage at the inverter, not at the
of features and options to enable a that the resulting maximum voltage
(Voc) when added in the string of PV modules.
successful and long-lived solar-energy
19 harvesting solution. The isolation modules be under 600 V. Record Increasing grid voltages also puts a
step-up transformer, coupled to either low temperatures provide an constraint on the minimum Vmp
a negative or a positive grounded indication of system performance voltage at the DC input stage.
20 solar array, ensures that the S-Max when temperatures drop to these
can match to all (known) solar module levels. The S-Max inverter is designed
technologies. to standards higher than 600 Vdc.
21

Sheet 01 091
To ensure the full MPPT range without governmental agency having jurisdic- a charger to keep it at full capacity
power-clipping (reduced power output), tion. Optional standby systems, not when normal power is on, one or more i
prudent PV system designs shall con- legally required, are also covered in lamps, and a relay to connect the
sider the PV arrays Vmp voltage drop the NEC (Article 702). battery to the lamps on loss of normal
to the point of the inverter connection, power, is also permitted. Because ii
ambient temperatures and the PV Emergency systems are intended to of the critical nature of emergency
system installation types effects on supply power and illumination essen- power, ground fault protection is not
Vmp, solar module miss-match and tial for safety to human life, when the required. It is considered preferable 1
tolerance variations, degradation of normal supply fails. NEC requirements to risk arcing damage, rather than to
solar modules over time (solar system are stringent, requiring periodic testing disconnect he emergency supply com-
life), etc. Typical Vmp design values, under load and automatic transfer to pletely. For emergency power, ground 2
based upon known and expected emergency power supply on loss of fault alarm is required by NEC 700.7(D)
conditions are 510% over the normal supply. See Figure 1.4-23. to indicate a ground fault in solidly
minimum MPPT tracking voltage. All wiring from emergency source to grounded wye emergency systems 3
Reference NEC 2011 Section 690, emergency loads must be kept separate of more than 150 V to ground and
Solar Photovoltaic Systems. from all other wiring and equipment, circuit-protective devices rated 1000 A
in its own distribution and raceway or more. 4
Emergency Power system, except in transfer equipment
enclosures and similar locations. The Legally required standby systems, as
Most areas have requirements most common power source for large required by the governmental agency 5
for emergency and standby power emergency loads is an engine-generator having jurisdiction, are intended to
systems. The National Electrical Code set, but the NEC also permits the supply power to selected loads, other
does not specifically call for any emergency supply (subject to local code than those classed as emergency 6
emergency or standby power, but requirements) to be storage batteries, systems, on loss of normal power.
does have requirements for those uninterruptible power supplies, a These are usually loads not essential
systems when they are legally
mandated and classed as emergency
separate emergency service, or a to human safety, but loss of which 7
connection to the service ahead of the could create hazards or hamper
(Article 700), legally required standby normal service disconnecting means. rescue or fire-fighting operations.
(Article 701) by municipal, state, Unit equipment for emergency illumi- 8
federal or other codes, or by any nation, with a rechargeable battery,
9
Utility
Source
Typical Application: Three engine generator sets serve the load, plus one additional engine
generator set for redundancy to achieve N+1 level of performance. Open or Closed transition is available. 10
G1 G2 G3 G4
Paralleling Switchgear 11
with Distribution
Revenue
Metering
HMI 12
Touchscreen
52G1 52G2 52G3 52G4
Main D1 D2 D3 D4
13
Service
14
15
16
ATS1 N E ATS2 N E ATS3 N E ATS4 N E
To Normal To Emergency
Distribution Circuits 17
Circuits
EDP1 EDP2 EDP3 EDP4 18
Optional Remote PC 19
with Software
LP1 BP1 LP2 BP2 LP3 BP3 LP4 BP4
20
Figure 1.4-23. Typical Emergency Power System
21

Sheet 01 092
NEC requirements are similar to those Industrial plants, especially in process It is important that the electrical sys-
i for emergency systems, except that industries, usually have some form tem designer providing a substantial
wiring may occupy the same distribu- of alternate power source to prevent source of emergency and standby
tion and raceway system as the extremely costly shutdowns. These power investigate the possibility of
ii normal wiring if desired. Optional standby generating systems are using it for peak shaving, and even
standby systems are those not legally critical when needed, but they are of partial utility company financing.
required, and are intended to protect needed only infrequently. They Frequently, substantial savings in
1 private business or property where represent a large capital investment. power costs can be realized for a
life safety does not depend on To be sure that their power will be small additional outlay in distribution
performance of the system. Optional available when required, they should and control equipment.
2 systems can be treated as part of the be tested periodically under load.
normal building wiring system. Both Peak shaving equipment operating in
legally required and optional standby The cost of electric energy has risen parallel with the utility are subject to the
3 systems should be installed in such to new high levels in recent years, and comments made under cogeneration
a manner that they will be fully avail- utilities bill on the basis not only of as to separation from the utility under
able on loss of normal power. It is power consumed, but also on the fault conditions.
4 preferable to isolate these systems basis of peak demand over a small
as much as possible, even though not interval. As a result, a new use for Sound Levels
required by code. in-house generating capacity has
5 developed. Utilities measure demand Sound Levels of Electrical Equipment
Where the emergency or standby charges on the basis of the maximum for Offices, Hospitals, Schools and
source, such as an engine generator demand for electricity in any given Similar Buildings
6 or separate service, has capacity to specific period (typically 15 or 30 Insurance underwriters and building
supply the entire system, the transfer minutes) during the month. Some owners desire and require that the
scheme can be either a full-capacity utilities have a demand ratchet clause electrical apparatus be installed
7 automatic transfer switch, or, less that will continue demand charges on for maximum safety and the least
costly but equally effective, normal a given peak demand for a full year, interference with the normal use of
and emergency main circuit breakers, unless a higher peak results in even the property. Architects should take
8 electrically interlocked such that on higher charges. One large load, coming particular care with the designs for
failure of the normal supply the on at a peak time, can create higher hospitals, schools and similar build-
emergency supply is connected to the electric demand charges for a year. ings to keep the sound perception of
9 load. However, if the emergency or
Obviously, reducing the peak demand such equipment as motors, blowers
standby source does not have capacity and transformers to a minimum.
for the full load, as is usually the can result in considerable savings in
10 case, such a scheme would require the cost of electrical energy. For those Even though transformers are
automatic disconnection of the installations with engine generators relatively quiet, resonant conditions
nonessential loads before transfer. for emergency use, modern control may exist near the equipment, which
11 Simpler and more economical in systems (computers or programmable will amplify their normal 120 Hz hum.
such a case is a separate emergency controllers) can monitor the peak Therefore, it is important that consid-
bus, supplied through an automatic demand, and start the engine-generator eration be given to the reduction of
12 transfer switch, to feed all critical to supply part of the demand as it
approaches a preset peak value. The
amplitude and to the absorption of
loads. The transfer switch connects energy at this frequency. This problem
this bus to the normal supply, in engine-generator must be selected begins in the designing stages of the
13 normal operation. On failure of the to withstand the required duty cycle. equipment and the building. There are
normal supply, the engine-generator The simplest of these schemes transfer two points worthy of consideration: 1)
is started, and when it is up to speed specific loads to the generator. More What sound levels are desired in the
14 the automatic switch transfers the complex schemes operate the generator normally occupied rooms of this build-
emergency loads to this source. On in parallel with the normal utility supply. ing? 2) To effect this, what sound level
return of the normal source, manual or The savings in demand charges can in the equipment room and what type
15 automatic retransfer of the emergency reduce the cost of owning the emer- of associated acoustical treatment
loads can take place. gency generator equipment. will give the most economical
In some instances, utilities with little installation overall?
16 Peak Shaving reserve capacity have helped finance A relatively high sound level in the
Many installations now have the cost of some larger customer- equipment room does not indicate
emergency or standby generators. owned generating equipment. In an abnormal condition within the
17 In the past, they were required for return, the customer agrees to take apparatus. However, absorption may
hospitals and similar locations, but some or all of his load off the utility be necessary if sound originating in
not common in office buildings or system and on to his own generator at
18 shopping centers. However, many the request of the utility (with varying
an unoccupied equipment room is
objectionable outside the room.
costly and unfortunate experiences limitations) when the utility load Furthermore, added absorption
during utility blackouts in recent years approaches capacity. In some cases,
19 have led to the more frequent installa- the customers generator is paralleled
material usually is desirable if
there is a build-up of sound
tion of engine generators in commer- with the utility to help supply the peak due to reflections.
cial and institutional systems for safety utility loads, with the utility buying
20 and for supplying important loads. the supplied power. Some utilities
have been able to delay large capital
expenditures for additional generating
21 capacity by such arrangements.

Sheet 01 093
Some reduction or attenuation takes Table 1.4-11. Maximum Average Sound Levels for Medium Voltage TransformersDecibels
place through building walls, the kVA Liquid-Filled Transformers Dry-Type Transformers i
remainder may be reflected in various Self-Cooled Forced-Air Self-Cooled Forced-Air
directions, resulting in a build-up or Rating (OA) Cooled Rating (FA) Rating (AA) Cooled Rating (FA)
apparent higher levels, especially if ii
resonance occurs because of room 300 55 58 67
dimensions or material characteristics. 500 56 60 67
750 57 67 64 67
1
Area Consideration 1000 58 67 64 67
1500 60 67 65 68
In determining permissible sound lev-
2000 61 67 66 69
els within a building, it is necessary to
2500 62 67 68 71
2
consider how the rooms are to be used
3000 63 67 68 71
and what levels may be objectionable 3750 64 67 70 73
to occupants of the building. The
5000 65 67 71 73
3
ambient sound level values given in 6000 66 68 72 74
Table 1.4-10 are representative average 7500 67 69 73 75
values and may be used as a guide in 10,000 68 70 76
4
determining suitable building levels.
Because values given in Table 1.4-11 transmitted vibration is approximately
Decrease in sound level varies at an
are in general higher than those given 98%. If the floor or beams beneath 5
approximate rate of 6 dB for each
doubling of the distance from the in Table 1.4-10, the difference must be the transformer are light and flexible,
attenuated by distance and by proper the isolator must be softer or have
source of sound to the listener. For
use of materials in the design of the improved characteristics in order to 6
example, if the level 6 ft (1.8 m) from
a transformer is 50 dB, the level at a building. An observer may believe keep the transmitted vibrations to a
that a transformer is noisy because minimum. (Enclosure covers and
distance of 12 ft (3.7 m) would be 44 dB
the level in the room where it is ventilating louvers are often improp- 7
and at 24 ft (7.3 m) the level decreases
to 38 dB, etc. However, this rule applies located is high. Two transformers of erly tightened or gasketed and
the same sound output in the same produce unnecessary noise.) The
only to equipment in large areas
room increase the sound level in the building structure will assist the 8
equivalent to an out-of-door installation,
with no nearby reflecting surfaces. room approximately 3 dB, and three dampeners if the transformer is
transformers by about 5 dB, etc. mounted above heavy floor members
Table 1.4-10. Typical Sound Levels or if mounted on a heavy floor slab. 9
Sounds due to structure-transmitted Positioning of the transformer in
Description Average vibrations originating from the trans- relation to walls and other reflecting
Decibel
Level (dB) former are lowered by mounting the surfaces has a great effect on reflected
10
transformers on vibration dampeners noise and resonances. Often, placing
Radio, recording and TV studios 2530 or isolators. There are a number of the transformer at an angle to the wall,
Theatres and music rooms 3035 different sound vibration isolating rather than parallel to it, will reduce
11
Hospitals, auditoriums and churches 3540
materials that may be used with noise. Electrical connections to a
Classrooms and lecture rooms 3540 good results. Dry-type power trans- substation transformer should
Apartments and hotels
Private offices and conference rooms
3545
4045
formers are often built with an isolator be made with flexible braid or
12
mounted between the transformer conductors; connections to an
Stores 4555
support and case members. The individually mounted transformer
Residence (radio, TV off)
and small offices 53 natural period of the core and coil should be in flexible conduit.
13
Medium office (3 to 10 desks) 58 structure when mounted on vibration
Residence (radio, TV on) 60 dampeners is about 10% of the funda-
Large store (5 or more clerks) 61 mental frequency. The reduction in the 14
Factory office 61
Large office 64
Average factory 70 15
Average street 80
Transformer Sound Levels 16

Transformers emit a continuous
120 Hz hum with harmonics when
connected to 60 Hz circuits. The 17
fundamental frequency is the hum
that annoys people primarily because
of its continuous nature. For purposes 18
of reference, sound measuring
instruments convert the different
frequencies to 1000 Hz and a 40 dB 19
level. Transformer sound levels based
on NEMA publication TR-1 are listed
in Table 1.4-11. 20
21

April 2016
Sheet 01 094

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Reference Data
Sheet 01 095
IEEE Protective Relay Numbers
Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus

Device Function Definition Typical
i
Number Uses
2 Time-delay starting or closing relay A device that functions to give a desired amount
of time delay before or after any point of operation
Used for providing a time-delay for
re-transfer back to the normal source
ii
in a switching sequence or protective relay system, in an automatic transfer scheme.
except as specifically provided by device functions
48, 62 and 79 described later. 1
6 Starting circuit breaker A device whose principal function is to connect
a machine to its source of starting voltage.
19 Starting to running transition timer A device that operates to initiate or cause the Used to transfer a reduced voltage
2
automatic transfer of a machine from the starting starter from starting to running.
to the running power connection.
21 Distance relay A device that functions when the circuit 3
admittance, impedance or reactance increases or
decreases beyond predetermined limits.
23 Temperature control device A device that functions to raise or to lower the Used as a thermostat to control 4
temperature of a machine or other apparatus, or space heaters in outdoor equipment.
of any medium, when its temperature falls below
or rises above, a predetermined level. 5
24 Volts per hertz relay A device that operates when the ratio of voltage
to frequency is above a preset value or is below
a different preset value. The relay may have any
combination of instantaneous or time delayed
6
characteristics.
25 Synchronizing or synchronism check device A device that operates when two AC circuits are In a closed transition breaker
within the desired limits of frequency, phase angle transfer, a 25 relay is used to ensure 7
or voltage, to permit or cause the paralleling of two-sources are synchronized before
these two circuits. paralleling. Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000
feeder protective relays. 8
27 Undervoltage relay A device which functions on a given value of Used to initiate an automatic transfer
undervoltage. when a primary source of power is lost.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/MP-4000/
EDR-5000/EDR-4000 protective relays.
9
30 Annunciator relay A non-automatically reset device that gives a Used to remotely indicate that a
number of separate visual indications upon the
functioning of protective devices, and which may
protective relay has functioned, or
that a circuit breaker has tripped.
10
also be arranged to perform a lockout function. Typically, a mechanical drop type
annunciator panel is used.
32 Directional power relay A relay that functions on a desired value of power Used to prevent reverse power from 11
flow in a given direction, or upon reverse power feeding an upstream fault. Often
resulting from arc back in the anode or cathode used when primary backup generation
circuits of a power rectifier. is used in a facility. Eaton FP-5000/
EDR-5000 protective relays.
12
33 Position switch A device that makes or breaks contact when the Used to indicate the position of a
main device or piece of apparatus, which has no
device function number, reaches a given point.
drawout circuit breaker (TOC switch). 13
34 Master sequence device A device such as a motor-operated multi-contact
switch, or the equivalent, or a programmable
device, that establishes or determines the operating
14
sequence of the major devices in equipment
during starting and stopping, or during sequential
switching operations. 15
37 Undercurrent or underpower relay A relay that functions when the current or power Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000
flow decreases below a predetermined value. motor protective relays.
38 Bearing protective device A device that functions on excessive bearing Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000 motor 16
temperature, or on other abnormal mechanical protective relays.
conditions, such as undue wear, which may
eventually result in excessive bearing temperature. 17
40 Field relay A device that functions on a given or abnormally
high or low value or failure of machine field current,
or on an excessive value of the reactive component
of armature current in an AC machine indicating
18
abnormally high or low field excitation.
41 Field circuit breaker A device that functions to apply, or to remove,
the field excitation of a machine. 19
42 Running circuit breaker A device whose function is to connect a machine
to its source of running or operating voltage.
This function may also be used for a device, such 20
as a contactor, that is used in series with a circuit
breaker or other fault-protecting means, primarily
for frequent opening and closing of the circuit. 21

Reference Data April 2016
Sheet 01 096
Table 1.5-1. Selected IEEE Device Numbers for Switchgear Apparatus (Continued)
i Device Function Definition Typical
Number Uses
ii 43 Manual transfer or selector device A manually operated device that transfers control
or potential circuits in order to modify the plan of

operation of the associated equipment or of some

of the associated devices.
1 44 Unit sequence starting relay A device that functions to start the next available
unit in multiple-unit equipment upon the failure or
non-availability of the normally preceding unit.
2 46 Reverse-phase, or phase balance, A relay that functions when the polyphase Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
current relay currents are of reverse-phase sequence, or when EDR-4000 feeder protective relays and
the polyphase currents are unbalanced or contain MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000 motor
3 the negative phase-sequence components above protective relays.
a given amount.
47 Phase-sequence voltage relay A relay that functions upon a predetermined Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
4 value of polyphase voltage in the desired phase
sequence.
EDR-4000 feeder protective relays
and MP-3000/MP-4000 motor
protective relays.
5 48 Incomplete sequence relay A relay that generally returns the equipment to the
normal, or off, position and locks it out of the

normal starting, or operating or stopping sequence

is not properly completed within a predetermined
6 amount of time. If the device is used for alarm
purposes only, it should preferably be designated
as 48 A (alarm).
7 49 Machine, or transformer, thermal relay A relay that functions when the temperature of a Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
machine armature, or other load carrying winding ETR-4000 motor protective relays.
or element of a machine, or the temperature
of a power rectifier or power transformer
8 (including a power rectifier transformer) exceeds
a predetermined value.
50 Instantaneous overcurrent, A relay that functions instantaneously on an Used for tripping a circuit breaker
9 or rate-of-rise relay excessive value of current, or an excessive rate of instantaneously during a high-level
current rise, thus indicating a fault in the apparatus short circuit. Can trip on phase-
of the circuit being protected. phase (50), phase-neutral (50N),
10 phase-ground (50G) faults.
Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/
FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/
EDR-3000 protective relays,
11 MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
ETR-4000 motor protective relays.
51 AC time overcurrent relay A relay with either a definite or inverse time Used for tripping a circuit breaker
12 characteristic that functions when the current in an after a time delay during a sustained
AC circuit exceeds a predetermined value. overcurrent. Used for tripping a
circuit breaker instantaneously
during a high-level short circuit.
13 Can trip on phase (51), neutral (51N)
or ground (51G) overcurrents.
Eaton Digitrip 3000, FP-5000/
14 FP-4000/EDR-5000/EDR-4000/
EDR-3000 protective relays,
MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000/
ETR-4000 motor protective relays.
15 52 AC circuit breaker A device that is used to close and interrupt an A term applied typically to medium
AC power circuit under normal conditions or to voltage circuit breakers, or low
interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency voltage power circuit breakers.
16 conditions. Eaton VCP-W vacuum circuit
breaker, magnum DS low voltage
power circuit breaker
17 53 Exciter or DC generator relay A device that forces the DC machine field excitation
to build up during starting or that functions when
the machine voltage has built up to a given value.
18 55 Power factor relay A relay that operates when the power factor Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000
in an AC circuit rises above or below a feeder protective relays and MP-4000
predetermined value. motor protective relay.
19 56 Field application relay A device that automatically controls the application
of the field excitation to an AC motor at some
predetermined point in the slip cycle.
20 59 Overvoltage relay A relay that functions on a given value of

overvoltage.
Used to trip a circuit breaker,
protecting downstream equipment
from sustained overvoltages.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000
21 feeder protective relays and MP-4000
motor protective relay.

Sheet 01 097
Device Function Definition Typical i
Number Uses
60 Voltage or current balance relay A relay that operates on a given difference in

voltage, or current input or output of two circuits.
ii
62 Time-delay stopping or opening relay A time-delay relay that serves in conjunction with Used in conjunction with a 27 device
the device that initiates the shutdown, stopping
or opening operation in an automatic sequence.
to delay tripping of a circuit breaker
during a brief loss of primary voltage,
1
to prevent nuisance tripping.
63 Pressure switch A switch that operates on given values or on a Used to protect a transformer during
given rate of change of pressure. a rapid pressure rise during a short 2
circuit. This device will typically act
to open the protective devices above
and below the transformer. Typically 3
used with a 63-X auxiliary relay to
trip the circuit breaker.
64 Ground protective relay A relay that functions on a failure of the insulation Used to detect and act on a ground-
of a machine, transformer or of other apparatus to fault condition. In a pulsing high
4
ground, or on flashover of a DC machine to ground. resistance grounding system, a 64
device will initiate the alarm.
65 Governor A device consisting of an assembly of fluid,
5
electrical or mechanical control equipment used for
regulating the flow of water, steam or other media
to the prime mover for such purposes as starting, 6
holding speed or load, or stopping.
66 Notching or jogging device A device that functions to allow only a specified Eaton MP-3000/MP-4000/EMR-3000
number of operations of a given device, or motor protective relays. 7
equipment, or a specified number of successive
operations within a given time of each other. It also
functions to energize a circuit periodically or for
fractions of specified time intervals, or that is used 8
to permit intermittent acceleration or jogging of a
machine at low speeds for mechanical positioning.
67 AC directional overcurrent relay A relay that functions on a desired value of AC Eaton FP-5000/EDR-5000 feeder 9
overcurrent flowing in a predetermined direction. protective relays.
69 Permissive control device A device that is generally a two-position manually Used as a remote-local switch for
operated switch that in one position permits the circuit breaker control. 10
closing of a circuit breaker, or the placing of
equipment into operation, and in the other position
prevents the circuit breaker to the equipment from
being operated.
11
71 Level switch A switch that operates on given values, or on a Used to indicate a low liquid level within
given rate of change of level. a transformer tank in order to save
transformers from loss-of-insulation 12
failure. An alarm contact is available
as a standard option on a liquid level
gauge. It is set to close before an unsafe 13
condition actually occurs.
72 DC circuit breaker A device that is used to close and interrupt a
DC power circuit under normal conditions or to
interrupt this circuit under fault or emergency
14
conditions.
73 Load-resistor contactor A device that is used to shunt or insert a step of
load limiting, shifting or indicating resistance in

15
a power circuit; to switch a space heater in circuit; or
to switch a light or regenerative load resistor
of a power rectifier or other machine in and out 16
of circuit.
74 Alarm relay A device other than an annunciator, as covered
under device number 30, which is used to operate,
or to operate in connection with, a visible or
17
audible alarm.
78 Phase-angle measuring relay A device that functions at a predetermined phase
angle between two voltages, between two currents,
18
or between voltage and current.
79 AC reclosing relay A relay that controls the automatic closing and
locking out of an AC circuit interrupter.
Used to automatically reclose a
circuit breaker after a trip, assuming
19
the fault has been cleared after the
power was removed from the circuit.
The recloser will lock-out after a 20
predetermined amount of failed
attempts to reclose.
21

Sheet 01 098
i Device Function Definition Typical
Number Uses
ii 81 Frequency relay A relay that functions on a predetermined value of

frequencyeither under or over, or on normal
Used to trip a generator circuit
breaker in the event the frequency
system frequencyor rate of change frequency. drifts above or below a given value.
Eaton FP-5000/FP-4000/EDR-5000/
1 EDR-4000 feeder protective
relays and MP-4000 motor
protective relay.
2 83 Automatic selective control or transfer relay A relay that operates to select automatically Used to transfer control power
between certain sources or conditions in sources in a double-ended
equipment, or performs a transfer operation switchgear lineup.
3 automatically.
85 Carrier or pilot-wire relay A device that is operated or restrained by a signal
transmitted or received via any communications
media used for relaying.
4 86 Locking-out relay An electrically operated hand, or electrically, reset Used in conjunction with protective
relay that functions to shut down and hold an relays to lock-out a circuit breaker
equipment out of service on the occurrence of (or multiple circuit breakers) after
5 abnormal conditions. a trip. Typically required to be
manually reset by an operator before
the breaker can be reclosed.
6 87 Differential protective relay A protective relay that functions on a percentage or Used to protect static equipment,
phase angle or other quantitative difference of two such as cable, bus or transformers,
currents or of some other electrical quantities. by measuring the current differential
7 between two points. Typically the
upstream and/or downstream circuit
breaker will be incorporated into the
zone of protection. Eaton FP-5000
8 feeder protective relay (87B) and
MD-3000 protective relay.
90 Regulating device A device that functions to regulate a quantity or
9 quantities, such as voltage, current, power, speed,
frequency, temperature and load, at a certain value
or between certain (generally close) limits for
machines, tie lines or other apparatus.
10 91 Voltage directional relay A device that operates when the voltage across an
open circuit breaker or contactor exceeds a given
value in a given direction.
11 94 Tripping or trip-free relay A relay that functions to trip a circuit breaker,
contactor or equipment, or to permit immediate
tripping by other devices, or to prevent immediate
12 reclosure of a circuit interrupter, in case it should
open automatically even though its closing circuit
is maintained closed.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 099
Suggested IEEE Designations for Suffix Letters
Suggested IEEE Designations Main Device Other Suffix Letters

i
for Suffix Letters The following letters denote the main The following letters cover all other
device to which the numbered device distinguishing features, characteristics
Auxiliary Devices is applied or is related: or conditions not specifically described ii
in Auxiliary Devices through Main
These letters denote separate auxiliary A Alarm/auxiliary power Device Parts, which serve to describe
devices, such as the following:
AC Alternating current the use of the device in the equipment, 1
C Closing relay/contactor such as:
BP Bypass
A Automatic
CL Auxiliary relay, closed
BT Bus tie 2
(energized when main device BF Breaker failure
is in closed position) C Capacitor
C Close 3
CS Control switch DC Direct current
D Decelerating/down
D Down position switch relay E Exciter
E Emergency 4
L Lowering relay F Feeder/field
F Failure/forward
O Opening relay/contactor G Generator/ground
HS High speed 5
OP Auxiliary relay, open M Motor/metering
(energized when main device L Local/lower
is in open position) MOC Mechanism operated contact
M Manual
6
PB Push button S Synchronizing/secondary
O Open
R Raising relay T Transformer 7
OFF Off
U UP position switch relay TOC Truck-operated contacts
ON On
8
X Auxiliary relay Main Device Parts R Raise/reclosing/remote/reverse
Y Auxiliary relay These letters denote parts of the
main device, except auxiliary con- T Test/trip 9
Z Auxiliary relay tacts, position switches, limit switches TDC Time-delay closing contact
and torque limit switches:
Actuating Quantities TDDO Time delayed relay coil 10
C Coil/condenser/capacitor drop-out
These letters indicate the condition or
electrical quantity to which the device CC Closing coil/closing contactor
responds, or the medium in which it is
TDO Time-delay opening contact 11
located, such as the following: HC Holding coil TDPU Time delayed relay coil pickup
A Amperes/alternating M Operating motor THD Total harmonic distortion 12
C Current OC Opening contactor
F Frequency/fault S Solenoid 13
I0 Zero sequence current SI Seal-in
I-, I2 Negative sequence current T Target 14

I+, I1 Positive sequence current TC Trip coil
15
P Power/pressure
PF Power factor
16
S Speed
T Temperature 17
V Voltage/volts/vacuum
VAR Reactive power 18
VB Vibration
W Watts 19
20
21

Sheet 01 100
Codes and Standards
Codes and Standards a number of other testing laboratories A design engineer should conform
i The National Electrical Code (NEC),
have been recognized and accepted. to all applicable codes, and require
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic equipment to be listed by UL or
NFPA Standard No. 70, is the most Engineers (IEEE) publishes a number another recognized testing laboratory
ii prevalent electrical code in the United
States. The NEC, which is revised every
of books (the color book series) on wherever possible, and to meet
recommended practices for the design ANSI or NEMA standards. ANSI/IEEE
three years, has no legal standing of of industrial buildings, commercial recommended practices should
1 its own, until it is adopted as law by buildings, emergency power systems, be followed to a great extent. In
a jurisdiction, which may be a city, grounding, and the like. Most of these many cases, standards should be
county or state. Most jurisdictions IEEE standards have been adopted as exceeded to get a system of the
2 adopt the NEC in its entirety; some ANSI standards. They are excellent quality required. The design goal
adopt it with variations, usually more guides, although they are not in any should be a safe, efficient, long-
rigid, to suit local conditions and way mandatory. lasting, flexible and economical
3 requirements. A few large cities, such
electrical distribution system.
as New York and Chicago, have their
own electrical codes, basically similar Professional Organizations
4 to the NEC. The designer must deter-
American National Standards Institute National Electrical Manufacturers
mine which code applies in the area
of a specific project. (ANSI) Association (NEMA)
5 The Occupational Safety and Health Headquarters: 1300 North 17th Street
Suite 1847
Act (OSHA) of 1970 sets uniform 1819 L Street, NW Rosslyn, VA 22209
national requirements for safety in the 6th Floor
6 workplaceanywhere that people are Washington, DC 20036
703-841-3200
employed. Originally OSHA adopted 202-293-8020 www.nema.org
the 1971 NEC as rules for electrical
7 safety. As the NEC was amended every Operations: National Fire Protection Association
three years, the involved process for 25 West 43rd Street (NFPA)
modifying a federal law such as OSHA 4th Floor 1 Battery March Park
8 made it impossible for the act to adopt New York, NY 10036 Quincy, MA 02169-7471
each new code revision. To avoid this 212-642-4900 617-770-3000
problem, the OSHA administration
9 in 1981 adopted its own code, a con- www.ansi.org www.nfpa.org
densed version of the NEC containing Institute of Electrical and Electronic Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
10 only those provisions considered Engineers (IEEE) 333 Pfingsten Road
related to occupational safety. OSHA
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096
was amended to adopt this code, Headquarters:
847-272-8800
11 based on NFPA Standard 70E, Part 1, 3 Park Avenue
which is now federal law. 17th Floor www.ul.com
The NEC is a minimum safety New York, NY 10016-5997
International Code Council (ICC)
12 standard. Efficient and adequate 212-419-7900
5203 Leesburg Pike
design usually requires not just Operations: Suite 600
meeting, but often exceeding NEC
13 requirements to provide an effective,
445 Hoes Lane Falls Church, VA 22041
1-888-422-7233
Piscataway, NJ 08854-1331
reliable, economical electrical system.
732-981-0060
www.iccsafe.org
14 Many equipment standards have been
www.ieee.org
established by the National Electrical The American Institute of Architects (AIA)
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) International Association of Electrical 1735 New York Avenue, NW
15 and the American National Standards Inspectors (IAEI) Washington, DC 20006-5292
Institute (ANSI). Underwriters 202-626-7300
901 Waterfall Way
Laboratories (UL) has standards that
Suite 602
16 equipment must meet before UL will
Richardson, TX 75080-7702
www.aia.org
list or label it. Most jurisdictions and
972-235-1455
OSHA require that where equipment
17 listed as safe by a recognized labora- www.iaei.org
tory is available, unlisted equipment
may not be used. UL is by far the most
18 widely accepted national laboratory,
although Factory Mutual Insurance
Company lists some equipment, and
19
20
21

Sheet 01 101
Motor Protective Device Data
Motor Protection Table 1.5-2. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP), Circuit Breaker and Fusible Switch Selection Guide
Consistent with the 2011 NEC Horsepower Full Load Fuse Size NEC 430.52 Recommended Eaton i
Amperes Maximum Circuit Motor Circuit
430.6(A)(1) circuit breaker, HMCP and (NEC) FLA Amperes
fuse rating selections are based on Breaker Protector Type HMCP
full load currents for induction motors Time Delay Non-Time Delay Amperes Amperes Adj. Range
ii
running at speeds normal for belted 230 V, Three-Phase
motors and motors with normal 1 3.6 10 15 15 7 2170 1
torque characteristics using data taken 1-1/2 5.2 10 20 15 15 45150
from NEC Table 430.250 (three-phase). 2 6.8 15 25 15 15 45150
3 9.6 20 30 20 30 90300
Actual motor nameplate ratings shall 2
be used for selecting motor running 5 15.2 30 50 30 30 90300
overload protection. Motors built 7-1/2 22 40 70 50 50 150500
10 28 50 90 60 50 150500
special for low speeds, high torque 15 42 80 150 90 70 210700 3
characteristics, special starting
20 54 100 175 100 100 3001000
conditions and applications will 25 68 125 225 125 150 4501500
require other considerations as 30 80 150 250 150 150 4501500 4
defined in the application section 40 104 200 350 150 150 7502500
of the NEC. 50 130 250 400 200 150 7502500
These additional considerations may
60 154 300 500 225 250 12502500 5
75 192 350 600 300 400 20004000
require the use of a higher rated HMCP, 100 248 450 800 400 400 20004000
or at least one with higher magnetic
pickup settings.
125
150
312
360
600
700
1000
1200
500
600
600
600
18006000
18006000
6
200 480 1000 1600 700 600 18006000
Circuit breaker, HMCP and fuse
ampere rating selections are in
460 V, Three-Phase 7
line with maximum rules given in 1 1.8 6 6 15 7 2170
1-1/2 2.6 6 10 15 7 2170
NEC 430.52 and Table 430.250. Based
on known characteristics of Eaton type
2
3
3.4
4.8
6
10
15
15
15
15
7
15
2170
45150
8
breakers, specific units are recom- 5 7.6 15 25 15 15 45150
mended. The current ratings are no 7-1/2 11 20 35 25 30 90300
more than the maximum limits set by 10 14 25 45 35 30 90300 9
the NEC rules for motors with code 15 21 40 70 45 50 150500
letters F to V or without code letters. 20 27 50 90 50 50 150500
Motors with lower code letters will 25 34 60 110 70 70 210700 10
require further considerations. 30 40 70 125 70 100 3001000
40 52 100 175 100 100 3001000
In general, these selections were 50 65 125 200 110 150 4501500 11
based on: 60 77 150 150 125 150 7502500
75 96 175 300 150 150 7502500
1. Ambientoutside enclosure not
more than 40 C (104 F).
100 124 225 400 175 150 7502500
12
125 156 300 500 225 250 12502500
150 180 350 600 250 400 20004000
2. Motor startinginfrequent 200 240 450 800 350 400 20004000
starting, stopping or reversing. 575 V, Three-Phase
13
3. Motor accelerating time 1 1.4 3 6 15 3 930
10 seconds or less. 1-1/2
2
2.1
2.7
6
6
10
10
15
15
7
7
2170
2170
14
4. Locked rotormaximum 6 times 3 3.9 10 15 15 7 2170
motor FLA. 5 6.1 15 20 15 15 45150
7-1/2 9 20 30 20 15 45150 15
Type HMCP motor circuit protector 10 11 20 35 25 30 90300
may not set at more than 1300% of 15 17 30 60 40 30 90300
the motor full-load current to comply 20 22 40 70 50 50 150500 16
with NEC 430.52. (Except for NEMA 25 27 50 90 60 50 150500
Design B energy high-efficiency 30 32 60 100 60 50 150500
motors that can be set up to 1700%.) 40 41 80 125 80 100 3001000 17
50 52 100 175 100 100 3001000
Circuit breaker selections are based 60 62 110 200 125 150 7502500
on types with standard interrupting 75
100
77
99
150
175
250
300
150
175
150
150
7502500
7502500
18
ratings. Higher interrupting rating types
may be required to satisfy specific 125 125 225 400 200 250 12502500
150 144 300 450 225 250 12502500
system application requirements.
200 192 350 600 300 400 20004000
19
For motor full load currents of
208 V and 200 V, increase the
corresponding 230 V motor values
20
by 10 and 15% respectively.
21

Sheet 01 102
Motor Protective Device Data
Table 1.5-3. 60 Hz, Recommended Protective Setting for Induction Motors

i hp Full Load Minimum Wire Size Minimum Conduit Size, Fuse Size NEC 430.52 Recommended Eaton:
Amperes 75 C Copper Ampacity Inches (mm) Maximum Amperes 1 Circuit Motor Circuit
(NEC) FLA at 125% FLA THW THWN Time Non-Time Breaker 2 Protector
ii Size Amperes XHHN Delay Delay Amperes Amperes Adjustable Range
115 V, Single-Phase
1 3/4 13.8 14 20 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 25 45 30 Two-pole device
1 16 14 20 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 30 50 35 not available
1-1/2 20 12 30 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 35 60 40
2 2
3
24
34
10
8
30
50
0.50 (12.7)
0.75 (19.1)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
45
60
80
110
50
70
5 56 4 85 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 100 175 100
7-1/2 80 3 100 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 150 250 150
3 230 V, Single-Phase
3/4 6.9 14 20 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 15 25 15 Two-pole device
4 1
1-1/2
8
10
14
14
20
20
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
0.50 (12.7)
15
20
25
30
20
25
not available
2 12 14 20 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 25 40 30

3 17 12 30 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 30 60 40
5 5 28 10 50 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 50 90 60
7-1/2 40 8 50 0.75 (19.1) 0.50 (12.7) 70 125 80
1 Consult fuse manufacturers catalog for smaller fuse ratings.
6 2 Types are for minimum interrupting capacity breakers. Ensure that the fault duty does not exceed breakers I.C.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 103
Chart of Short Circuit Currents for Transformers
Table 1.5-4. Secondary Short-Circuit Current of Typical Power Transformers

Trans- Maximum 208 V, Three-Phase 240 V, Three-Phase 480 V, Three-Phase 600 V, Three-Phase i
former Short- Rated Short-Circuit Current Rated Short-Circuit Current Rated Short-Circuit Current Rated Short-Circuit Current
Rating Circuit Load rms Symmetrical Amps Load rms Symmetrical Amps Load rms Symmetrical Amps Load rms Symmetrical Amps
Three-
Phase
kVA
Available
Contin- Trans- 50% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com- Contin- Trans- 100% Com-
ii
uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined uous former Motor bined
kVA and from Current, Current, Current, Current,
Impedance Primary Alone 1 Load 2 Alone 1 Load 2 Alone 1 Load 2 Alone 1 Load 2
Amps Amps Amps Amps
Percent System 1
300 50,000 834 14,900 1700 16,600 722 12,900 2900 15,800 361 6400 1400 7800 289 5200 1200 6400
5% 100,000 834 15,700 1700 17,400 722 13,600 2900 16,500 361 6800 1400 8200 289 5500 1200 6700
150,000 834 16,000 1700 17,700 722 13,900 2900 16,800 361 6900 1400 8300 289 5600 1200 6800 2
250,000 834 16,300 1700 18,000 722 14,100 2900 17,000 361 7000 1400 8400 289 5600 1200 6800
500,000 834 16,500 1700 18,200 722 14,300 2900 17,200 361 7100 1400 8500 289 5700 1200 6900
Unlimited 834 16,700 1700 18,400 722 14,400 2900 17,300 361 7200 1400 8600 289 5800 1200 7000 3
500 50,000 1388 21,300 2800 25,900 1203 20,000 4800 24,800 601 10,000 2400 12,400 481 8000 1900 9900
5% 100,000 1388 25,200 2800 28,000 1203 21,900 4800 26,700 601 10,900 2400 13,300 481 8700 1900 10,600
150,000 1388 26,000 2800 28,800 1203 22,500 4800 27,300 601 11,300 2400 13,700 481 9000 1900 10,900
250,000 1388 26,700 2800 29,500 1203 23,100 4800 27,900 601 11,600 2400 14,000 481 9300 1900 11,200
4
500,000 1388 27,200 2800 30,000 1203 23,600 4800 28,400 601 11,800 2400 14,200 481 9400 1900 11,300
Unlimited 1388 27,800 2800 30,600 1203 24,100 4800 28,900 601 12,000 2400 14,400 481 9600 1900 11,500
750 50,000 2080 28,700 4200 32,900 1804 24,900 7200 32,100 902 12,400 3600 16,000 722 10,000 2900 12,900 5
5.75% 100,000 2080 32,000 4200 36,200 1804 27,800 7200 35,000 902 13,900 3600 17,500 722 11,100 2900 14,000
150,000 2080 33,300 4200 37,500 1804 28,900 7200 36,100 902 14,400 3600 18,000 722 11,600 2900 14,500
250,000 2080 34,400 4200 38,600 1804 29,800 7200 37,000 902 14,900 3600 18,500 722 11,900 2900 14,800 6
500,000 2080 35,200 4200 39,400 1804 30,600 7200 37,800 902 15,300 3600 18,900 722 12,200 2900 15,100
Unlimited 2080 36,200 4200 40,400 1804 31,400 7200 38,600 902 15,700 3600 19,300 722 12,600 2900 15,500
1000
5.75%
50,000
100,000
2776
2776
35,900
41,200
5600
5600
41,500 2406
46,800 2406
31,000
35,600
9800
9800
40,600 1203
45,200 1203
15,500
17,800
4800
4800
20,300
22,600
962
962
12,400
14,300
3900
3900
16,300
18,200
7
150,000 2776 43,300 5600 48,900 2406 37,500 9800 47,100 1203 18,700 4800 23,500 962 15,000 3900 18,900
250,000 2776 45,200 5600 50,800 2406 39,100 9800 48,700 1203 19,600 4800 24,400 962 15,600 3900 19,500
500,000 2776 46,700 5600 52,300 2406 40,400 9800 50,000 1203 20,200 4800 25,000 962 16,200 3900 20,100 8
Unlimited 2776 48,300 5600 53,900 2406 41,800 9800 51,400 1203 20,900 4800 25,700 962 16,700 3900 20,600
1500 50,000 4164 47,600 8300 55,900 3609 41,200 14,400 55,600 1804 20,600 7200 27,800 1444 16,500 5800 22,300
5.75% 100,000
150,000
4164
4164
57,500
61,800
8300
8300
65,800 3609
70,100 3609
49,800
53,500
14,400
14,400
64,200 1804
57,900 1804
24,900 7200 32,100 1444 20,000 5800 25,800 9
26,700 7200 33,900 1444 21,400 5800 27,200
250,000 4164 65,600 8300 73,900 3609 56,800 14,400 71,200 1804 28,400 7200 35,600 1444 22,700 5800 28,500
500,000 4164
Unlimited 4164
68,800
72,500
8300
8300
77,100 3609
80,800 3609
59,600
62,800
14,400
14,400
74,000 1804
77,200 1804
29,800
31,400
7200
7200
37,000 1444
38,600 1444
23,900
25,100
5800
5800
29,700
30,900
10
2000 50,000 2406 24,700 9600 34,300 1924 19,700 7800 27,500
5.75% 100,000 2406 31,000 9600 40,600 1924 24,800 7800 32,600
150,000 2406 34,000 9600 43,600 1924 27,200 7800 35,000 11
250,000 2406 36,700 9600 46,300 1924 29,400 7800 37,200
500,000 2406 39,100 9600 48,700 1924 31,300 7800 39,100
Unlimited 2406 41,800 9600 51,400 1924 33,500 7800 41,300 12
2500 50,000 3008 28,000 12,000 40,000 2405 22,400 9600 32,000
5.75% 100,000 3008 36,500 12,000 48,500 2405 29,200 9600 38,800
150,000
250,000

3008
3008
40,500
44,600
12,000
12,000
52,500 2405
56,600 2405
32,400
35,600
9600
9600
42,000
45,200
13
500,000 3008 48,100 12,000 60,100 2405 38,500 9600 48,100
Unlimited 3008 52,300 12,000 64,300 2405 41,800 9600 51,400
3000 50,000 3609 30,700 14,000 44,700 2886 24,600 11,500 36,100
14
5.75% 100,000 3609 41,200 14,000 55,200 2886 33,000 11,500 44,500
150,000 3609 46,600 14,000 60,600 2886 37,300 11,500 48,800
250,000 3609 51,900 14,000 65,900 2886 41,500 11,500 53,000 15
500,000 3609 56,800 14,000 70,800 2886 45,500 11,500 57,000
Unlimited 3609 62,800 14,000 76,800 2886 50,200 11,500 61,700
3750
5.75%
50,000
100,000

4511
4511
34,000
47,500
18,000
18,000
52,000 3608
65,500 3608
27,200
38,000
14,400
14,400
41,600
52,400
16
150,000 4511 54,700 18,000 72,700 3608 43,700 14,400 58,100
250,000 4511 62,200 18,000 80,200 3608 49,800 14,400 64,200
500,000 4511 69,400 18,000 87,400 3608 55,500 14,400 69,900 17
Unlimited 4511 78,500 18,000 96,500 3608 62,800 14,400 77,200
1 Short-circuit capacity values shown correspond to kVA and impedances shown in this table. For impedances other than these, short-circuit currents
are inversely proportional to impedance. 18
2 The motors short-circuit current contributions are computed on the basis of motor characteristics that will give four times normal current.
For 208 V, 50% motor load is assumed while for other voltages 100% motor load is assumed. For other percentages, the motor short-circuit
current will be in direct proportion. 19
20
21

Sheet 01 104
Transformer Full Load Amperes
Table 1.5-5. Transformer Full-Load Current, Three-Phase, Self-Cooled Ratings

i Voltage, Line-to-Line
kVA 208 240 480 600 2400 4160 7200 12,000 12,470 13,200 13,800 22,900 34,400
ii 30 83.3 72.2 36.1 28.9 7.22 4.16 2.41 1.44 1.39 1.31 1.26 0.75 0.50
45 125 108 54.1 43.3 10.8 6.25 3.61 2.17 2.08 1.97 1.88 1.13 0.76
75 208 180 90.2 72.2 18.0 10.4 6.01 3.61 3.47 3.28 3.14 1.89 1.26
1 112-1/2
150
312
416
271
361
135
180
108
144
27.1
36.1
15.6
20.8
9.02
12.0
5.41
7.22
5.21
6.94
4.92
6.56
4.71
6.28
2.84
3.78
1.89
2.52
225 625 541 271 217 54.1 31.2 18.0 10.8 10.4 9.84 9.41 5.67 3.78
300 833 722 361 289 72.2 41.6 24.1 14.4 13.9 13.1 12.6 7.56 5.04
2 500 1388 1203 601 481 120 69.4 40.1 24.1 23.1 21.9 20.9 12.6 8.39
750 2082 1804 902 722 180 104 60.1 36.1 34.7 32.8 31.4 18.9 12.6
1000 2776 2406 1203 962 241 139 80.2 48.1 46.3 43.7 41.8 25.2 16.8
3 1500 4164 3608 1804 1443 361 208 120 72.2 69.4 65.6 62.8 37.8 25.2
2000 4811 2406 1925 481 278 160 96.2 92.6 87.5 83.7 50.4 33.6
2500 3007 2406 601 347 200 120 116 109 105 63.0 42.0
4 3000
3750

3609
4511
2887
3608
722
902
416
520
241
301
144
180
139
174
131
164
126
157
75.6
94.5
50.4
62.9
5000 4811 1203 694 401 241 231 219 209 126 83.9
7500 1804 1041 601 361 347 328 314 189 126
5 10,000 2406 1388 802 481 463 437 418 252 168
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 105
Impedances Data
Approximate Impedance Data Table 1.5-9. 15 kV Class Primary Table 1.5-11. 600V Primary Class Three-Phase
Table 1.5-6. Typical Impedances
Dry-Type Substation Transformers DOE 2016 Energy-Efficient Dry-Type i
kVA %Z %R %X X/R
Distribution Transformers, Copper Wound
Three-Phase Transformers Liquid-Filled 1
150 C Rise kVA %Z %X %R X/R
kVA Liquid-Filled
150 C Rise Copper
ii
300 4.50 2.87 3.47 1.21
Network Padmount
500 5.75 2.66 5.10 1.92 15 3.10 1.59 2.66 0.60
750 5.75 2.47 5.19 2.11 30 2.52 0.79 2.39 0.33
37.5
45

1000 5.75 2.16 5.33 2.47 45 3.80 2.60 2.77 0.94
1
50 1500 5.75 1.87 5.44 2.90 75 2.84 1.94 2.08 0.93
75 3.4 2000 5.75 1.93 5.42 2.81 112.5 3.63 3.11 1.88 1.66
112.5 3.4 2500 5.75 1.74 5.48 3.15 150 3.02 2.64 1.46 1.81 2
150 3.4
80 C Rise 225 4.34 3.98 1.73 2.31
225 3.4 300 3.48 3.19 1.38 2.31
300 5.00 3.4
300
500
4.50
5.75
1.93
1.44
4.06
5.57
2.10
3.87 115 C Rise Copper
3
500 5.00 4.6
750 5.75 1.28 5.61 4.38
750 5.00 5.75 15 2.90 1.59 2.43 0.66
1000 5.75 0.93 5.67 6.10 30 2.35 0.97 2.14 0.45
1000
1500
5.00
7.00
5.75
5.75
1500 5.75 0.87 5.68 6.51 45 3.85 2.87 2.57 1.12 4
2000 5.75 0.66 5.71 8.72
2000 7.00 5.75 75 2.86 2.12 1.92 1.10
2500 5.75 0.56 5.72 10.22 112.5 4.02 3.59 1.82 1.97
2500 7.00 5.75
3000 5.75 150 3.34 3.05 1.37 2.23 5
3750 6.00
Table 1.5-10. 600 V Primary Class Three- 225 5.03 4.78 1.58 3.02
5000 6.50 Phase DOE 2016 Energy-Efficient Dry-Type 300 4.14 3.94 1.29 3.06
1 Values are typical. For guaranteed values,
Distribution Transformers, Aluminum Wound 80 C Rise Copper
6
refer to transformer manufacturer. kVA %Z %X %R X/R 15 3.09 2.04 2.32 0.88
150 C Rise Aluminum 30 2.53 1.73 1.85 0.94
Table 1.5-7. 15 kV Class Primary 45 1.70 1.16 1.25 0.93 7
15 4.04 2.08 3.46 0.60
Oil Liquid-Filled Substation Transformers 30 2.52 1.13 2.25 0.50 75 2.42 2.07 1.25 1.66
45 3.75 2.64 2.67 0.99 112.5 2.27 1.98 1.09 1.81
kVA %Z %R %X X/R
75 4.05 3.34 2.29 1.46
150 2.89 2.65 1.15 2.31 8
65 C Rise 225 3.11 2.95 0.96 3.06
112.5 4.66 4.22 1.99 2.12
112.5 5.00 1.71 4.70 2.75
150 3.48 3.09 1.61 1.92
150
225
5.00
5.00
1.88
1.84
4.63
4.65
2.47
2.52 225 4.20 3.96 1.39 2.85
9
300 5.00 1.35 4.81 3.57 300 4.46 4.26 1.32 3.23
500 5.00 1.50 4.77 3.18 115 C Rise Aluminum
750 5.75 1.41 5.57 3.96 10
15 3.77 2.08 3.14 0.66
1000 5.75 1.33 5.59 4.21 30 2.34 1.37 1.90 0.72
1500 5.75 1.12 5.64 5.04 45 4.26 3.44 2.52 1.37
2000 5.75 0.93 5.67 6.10
75 4.45 3.90 2.14 1.83
11
2500 5.75 0.86 5.69 6.61 112.5 5.17 4.81 1.89 2.54
150 3.89 3.59 1.49 2.41
Table 1.5-8. DOE 2016 Transformer 225 4.90 4.73 1.28 3.69
12
EfficienciesMedium Voltage Three-Phase 300 4.80 4.65 1.21 3.85
Distribution Transformers 1 80 C Rise Aluminum
kVA % Efficiency 15 4.19
13
2.94 2.98 0.99
Liquid- Dry Transformers 30 2.50 1.76 1.78 0.99
Filled 45 2.43 2.01 1.37 1.46
All 2545 4695 M96 kV 75 3.11 2.81 1.32 2.12
14
BILs kV BIL kV BIL BIL 112.5 2.61 2.31 1.21 1.92
150 2.80 2.64 0.93 2.85
15 98.65 97.5 97.18 225 3.35 3.20 0.99 3.23 15
30 98.83 97.9 97.63
45 98.92 98.1 97.86
75 99.03 98.33 98.13 16
112.5 99.11 98.52 98.36
150 99.16 98.65 98.51
225
300
99.23
99.27
98.82
98.93
98.69
98.81
98.57
98.69
17
500 99.35 99.09 98.99 98.89
750
1000
99.40
99.43
99.21
99.28
99.12
99.2
99.02
99.11
18
1500 99.48 99.37 99.3 99.21
2000 99.51 99.43 99.36 99.28
2500 99.53 99.47 99.41 99.33 19
1 Based on transformer operating at 50% of
nameplate base kVA.
20
21

Sheet 01 106
Transformer Losses
Transformer Loss Data Transformer losses for various At 0% load:

i See product sections for data.
loading can be estimated in the 1800 watts
following manner. The no load watt
Transformer Losses at Reduced Loads losses of the transformer are due to At 50% load:
ii Information on losses based on actual
magnetization and are present 1800 watts + (13,300)(0.5)2 =
whenever the transformer is 1800 watts + 3325 watts = 5125 watts
transformer test data can be obtained
energized. The load watt losses are
1 from the manufacturer. Transformer At 100% load:
the difference between the no load
manufacturers provide no load watt 1800 watts + 13,300 watts = 15,100 watts
watt losses and the full load watt
losses and total watt losses in accor-
losses. The load watt losses are
2 dance with ANSI standards. The At 110% load:
proportional to I2R and can be
calculated difference between the 1800 watts + (13,300)(1.1)2 =
estimated to vary with the transformer
no load losses and the total losses 1800 watts + 16,093 watts = 17,893 watts
load by the square of the load current.
3 are typically described as the load
losses. Although transformer coils For example, the approximate watts Because transformer losses vary
are manufactured with either aluminum loss data for a 1000 kVA oil-filled between designs and manufacturers,
or copper conductors, the industry additional losses such as from
4 has sometimes referred to these load
substation transformer is shown in
cooling fans can be ignored for
the table as having 1800 watts no
losses as the copper losses. load losses and 15,100 watts full load these approximations.
5 losses, so the load losses are approxi- Note: 1 watthour = 3.413 Btu.
mately 13,300 watts (15,1001800). The
transformer losses can be calculated
6 for various loads as follows.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 107
Power Equipment Losses and Enclosures/Knockout Dimensions
Power Equipment Losses Enclosures

Table 1.5-12. Power Equipment Losses The following are reproduced from NEMA 250.
i
Equipment Watts Table 1.5-13. Comparison of Specific Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Nonhazardous Locations
Loss
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Enclosure Type
ii
Medium Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 5 and 15 kV) Following Environmental Conditions 11 21 4 4X 5 6 6P 12 12K 13
1200 A breaker 600
2000 A breaker 1400 Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment 1
3000 A breaker 2100 Falling dirt
4000 A breaker 3700 Falling liquids and light splashing
Medium Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 5 and 15 kV) Circulating dust, lint, fibers and flyings 2 2
Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers and flyings 2
600 A unfused switch 500
Hosedown and splashing water
1200 A unfused switch 750

100 A CL fuses 840 Oil and coolant seepage
Oil or coolant spraying and splashing
3
Medium Voltage Starters (Indoor, 5 kV) Corrosive agents
400 A starter FVNR 600 Occasional temporary submersion
800 A starter FVNR 1000 Occasional prolonged submersion 4
600 A fused switch 500 1 These enclosures may be ventilated.
1200 A fused switch 800
2 These fibers and flying are nonhazardous materials and are not considered the Class III type
Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 480 V) ignitable fibers or combustible flyings. For Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings, 5
800 A breaker 400 see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
1600 A breaker 1000
2000 A breaker 1500 Table 1.5-14. Comparison of Specific Applications of Enclosures for Outdoor Nonhazardous Locations 6
3200 A breaker 2400 Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Enclosure Type
4000 A breaker 3000 Following Environmental Conditions 3 3R 3 3S 4 4X 6 6P
5000 A breaker 4700 7
Fuse limiters800 A CB 200 Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment
Fuse limiters1600 A CB 500 Rain, snow and sleet 4
Sleet 5
Fuse limiters2000 A CB 750
Windblown dust
8
Fuse truck3200 A CB 3600
Hosedown
Fuse truck4000 A CB 4500
Corrosive agents
Structures3200 A
Structures4000 A
4000
5000
Occasional temporary submersion 9
Occasional prolonged submersion
Structures5000 A 7000
3 These enclosures may be ventilated.
High resistance grounding 1200
4 External operating mechanisms are not required to be operable when the enclosure is ice covered. 10
Panelboards (Indoor, 480 V) 5 External operating mechanisms are operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
225 A, 42 circuit 300
Low Voltage Busway (Indoor, Copper, 480 V) Table 1.5-15. Comparison of Specific Applications of Enclosures for Indoor Hazardous Locations 11
800 A 44 per foot Provides a Degree of Protection Against Class Enclosure Types Enclosure Type
1200 A 60 per foot Atmospheres Typically Containing 7 and 8, Class I Groups 6 9, Class II Groups 6
1350 A 66 per foot (For Complete Listing, See NFPA 497M) A B C D E F G 10 12
1600 A 72 per foot Acetylene I
2000 A 91 per foot Hydrogen, manufactured gas I
2500 A 103 per foot diethyl ether, ethylene, cyclopropane I 13
3200 A 144 per foot Gasoline, hexane, butane, naphtha, propane,
4000 A 182 per foot acetone, toluene, isoprene I
5000 A 203 per foot Metal dust II 14
Motor Control Centers (Indoor, 480 V) Carbon black, coal dust, coke dust II
Flour, starch, grain dust II
NEMA Size 1 starter 39

Fibers, flyings 7
Methane with or without coal dust
III
MSHA
15
6 For Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings, see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
7 Due to the characteristics of the gas, vapor or dust, a product suitable for one class or group may
not be suitable for another class or group unless so marked on the product.
16
Structures 200
Note: If the installation is outdoors and/or additional protection is required by Tables 1.5-13 and
Adjustable Frequency Drives (Indoor, 480 V) 1.5-14, a combination-type enclosure is required.
Adjustable frequency drives > 96% 17
efficiency
Note: The information provided on power 18

equipment losses is generic data intended
to be used for sizing of HVAC equipment.
19
20
21

Sheet 01 108
Power Equipment Losses and Enclosures/Knockout Dimensions
Table 1.5-16. Conversion of NEMA Enclosure Type Ratings to IEC 60529 Enclosure Classification Designations (IP)
i (Cannot be Used to Convert IEC Classification Designations to NEMA Type Ratings)
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 109
Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
2 2
Average Characteristics of Application Notes Z X R
600 V Conductors Resistance and reactance are For busway impedance data, see
i
phase-to-neutral values, based on Tab 21 of this catalog
Ohms per 1000 ft (305 m)
60 Hz AC, three-phase, four-wire For PF (power factor) values less ii
The tables below are average charac- distribution, in ohms per 100 ft than 1.0, the effective impedance Ze
teristics based on data from IEEE (30 m) of circuit length (not total is calculated from
Standard 141-1993. Values from
different sources vary because of
conductor lengths) Z e R PF X sin (arc cos PF) 1
Based upon conductivity of 100% for
operating temperatures, wire For copper cable data, resistance
copper, 61% for aluminum
stranding, insulation materials based on tinned copper at 60 Hz;
and thicknesses, overall diameters, Based on conductor temperatures
600 V and 5 kV nonshielded cable
2
random lay of multiple conductors of 75 C. Reactance values will
based on varnished cambric insula-
in conduit, conductor spacing, and have negligible variation with
tion; 5 kV shielded and 15 kV cable 3
other divergences in materials, test temperature. Resistance of both
based on neoprene insulation
conditions and calculation methods. copper and aluminum conductors
will be approximately 5% lower For aluminum cable data, cable is
These tables are for 600 V 5 kV and
15 kV conductors, at an average at 60 C or 5% higher at 90 C. cross-linked polyethylene insulated 4
temperature of 75 C. Other parame- Data shown in tables may be
ters are listed in the notes. For used without significant error
medium voltage cables, differences between 60 and 90 C 5
among manufacturers are consider- For interlocked armored cable,
ably greater because of the wider vari- use magnetic conduit data for
ations in insulation materials and steel armor and non-magnetic
6
thicknesses, shielding, jacketing, over- conduit data for aluminum armor
all diameters, and the like. Therefore, 7
data for medium voltage cables should
be obtained from the manufacturer
of the cable to be used. 8
Table 1.5-17. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305 m) at 75 C (a) Three Single Conductors
Wire Size, In Magnetic Duct In Non-Magnetic Duct
9
AWG or 600 V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV 600 V and 5 kV Non-Shielded 5 kV Shielded and 15 kV
kcmil
R X Z R X Z R X Z R X Z
10
8 0.811 0.0754 0.814 0.811 0.0860 0.816 0.811 0.0603 0.813 0.811 0.0688 0.814
8 (solid) 0.786 0.0754 0.790 0.786 0.0860 0.791 0.786 0.0603 0.788 0.786 0.0688 0.789
6 0.510 0.0685 0.515 0.510 0.0796 0.516 0.510 0.0548 0.513 0.510 0.0636 0.514 11
6 (solid) 0.496 0.0685 0.501 0.496 0.0796 0.502 0.496 0.0548 0.499 0.496 0.0636 0.500
4 0.321 0.0632 0.327 0.321 0.0742 0.329 0.321 0.0506 0.325 0.321 0.0594 0.326
4 (solid)
2
0.312
0.202
0.0632
0.0585
0.318
0.210
0.312
0.202
0.0742
0.0685
0.321
0.214
0.312
0.202
0.0506
0.0467
0.316
0.207
0.312
0.202
0.0594
0.0547
0.318
0.209
12
1 0.160 0.0570 0.170 0.160 0.0675 0.174 0.160 0.0456 0.166 0.160 0.0540 0.169
1/0 0.128 0.0540 0.139 0.128 0.0635 0.143 0.127
2/0 0.102 0.0533 0.115 0.103 0.0630 0.121 0.101
0.0432
0.0426
0.134
0.110
0.128
0.102
0.0507
0.0504
0.138
0.114
13
3/0 0.0805 0.0519 0.0958 0.0814 0.0605 0.101 0.0766 0.0415 0.0871 0.0805 0.0484 0.0939
4/0 0.0640 0.0497 0.0810 0.0650 0.0583 0.0929 0.0633 0.0398 0.0748 0.0640 0.0466 0.0792
250 0.0552 0.0495 0.0742 0.0557 0.0570 0.0797 0.0541 0.0396 0.0670 0.0547 0.0456 0.0712 14
300 0.0464 0.0493 0.0677 0.0473 0.0564 0.0736 0.0451 0.0394 0.0599 0.0460 0.0451 0.0644
350 0.0378 0.0491 0.0617 0.0386 0.0562 0.0681 0.0368 0.0393 0.0536 0.0375 0.0450 0.0586
400 0.0356 0.0490 0.0606 0.0362 0.0548 0.0657 0.0342 0.0392 0.0520 0.0348 0.0438 0.0559 15
450 0.0322 0.0480 0.0578 0.0328 0.0538 0.0630 0.0304 0.0384 0.0490 0.0312 0.0430 0.0531
500 0.0294 0.0466 0.0551 0.0300 0.0526 0.0505 0.0276 0.0373 0.0464 0.0284 0.0421 0.0508
600
750
0.0257
0.0216
0.0463
0.0495
0.0530
0.0495
0.0264
0.0223
0.0516
0.0497
0.0580
0.0545
0.0237
0.0194
0.0371
0.0356
0.0440
0.0405
0.0246
0.0203
0.0412
0.0396
0.0479
0.0445
16
Note: More tables on Page 1.5-16.
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 110
Conductor Resistance, Reactance, Impedance
Table 1.5-18. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Copper Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (305 m) at 75 C (b) Three Conductor Cable
i Wire Size, In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor
kcmil
ii R X Z R X Z R X Z R X Z
8 0.811 0.0577 0.813 0.811 0.0658 0.814 0.811 0.0503 0.812 0.811 0.0574 0.813
8 (solid) 0.786 0.0577 0.788 0.786 0.0658 0.789 0.786 0.0503 0.787 0.786 0.0574 0.788
1 6
6 (solid)
0.510
0.496
0.0525
0.0525
0.513
0.499
0.510
0.496
0.0610
0.0610
0.514
0.500
0.510
0.496
0.0457
0.0457
0.512
0.498
0.510
0.496
0.0531
0.0531
0.513
0.499
4 0.321 0.0483 0.325 0.321 0.0568 0.326 0.321 0.0422 0.324 0.321 0.0495 0.325
2 4 (solid)
2
0.312
0.202
0.0483
0.0448
0.316
0.207
0.312
0.202
0.0508
0.0524
0.317
0.209
0.312
0.202
0.0422
0.0390
0.315
0.206
0.312
0.202
0.0495
0.0457
0.316
0.207
1 0.160 0.0436 0.166 0.160 0.0516 0.168 0.160 0.0380 0.164 0.160 0.0450 0.166
1/0 0.128 0.0414 0.135 0.128 0.0486 0.137 0.127 0.0360 0.132 0.128 0.0423 0.135
3 2/0 0.102 0.0407 0.110 0.103 0.0482 0.114 0.101 0.0355 0.107 0.102 0.0420 0.110
3/0 0.0805 0.0397 0.0898 0.0814 0.0463 0.0936 0.0766 0.0346 0.0841 0.0805 0.0403 0.090
4/0 0.0640 0.0381 0.0745 0.0650 0.0446 0.0788 0.0633 0.0332 0.0715 0.0640 0.0389 0.0749
4 250 0.0552 0.0379 0.0670 0.0557 0.0436 0.0707 0.0541 0.0330 0.0634 0.0547 0.0380 0.0666
300 0.0464 0.0377 0.0598 0.0473 0.0431 0.0640 0.0451 0.0329 0.0559 0.0460 0.0376 0.0596
350 0.0378 0.0373 0.0539 0.0386 0.0427 0.0576 0.0368 0.0328 0.0492 0.0375 0.0375 0.0530
5 400 0.0356 0.0371 0.0514 0.0362 0.0415 0.0551 0.0342 0.0327 0.0475 0.0348 0.0366 0.0505
450 0.0322 0.0361 0.0484 0.0328 0.0404 0.0520 0.0304 0.0320 0.0441 0.0312 0.0359 0.0476
500 0.0294 0.0349 0.0456 0.0300 0.0394 0.0495 0.0276 0.0311 0.0416 0.0284 0.0351 0.0453
600 0.0257 0.0343 0.0429 0.0264 0.0382 0.0464 0.0237 0.0309 0.0389 0.0246 0.0344 0.0422
6 750 0.0216 0.0326 0.0391 0.0223 0.0364 0.0427 0.0197 0.0297 0.0355 0.0203 0.0332 0.0389
Table 1.5-19. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 Ft (305 m) at 90 C (a) Three Single Conductors
7 Wire Size, In Magnetic Duct In Non-Magnetic Duct
kcmil
8 R X Z R X Z R X Z R X Z
6 0.847 0.053 0.849 0.847 0.042 0.848

4 0.532 0.050 0.534 0.532 0.068 0.536 0.532 0.040 0.534 0.532 0.054 0.535
9 2 0.335 0.046 0.338 0.335 0.063 0.341 0.335 0.037 0.337 0.335 0.050 0.339
1 0.265 0.048 0.269 0.265 0.059 0.271 0.265 0.035 0.267 0.265 0.047 0.269
1/0 0.210 0.043 0.214 0.210 0.056 0.217 0.210 0.034 0.213 0.210 0.045 0.215
10 2/0
3/0
0.167
0.133
0.041
0.040
0.172
0.139
0.167
0.132
0.055
0.053
0.176
0.142
0.167
0.133
0.033
0.037
0.170
0.137
0.167
0.132
0.044
0.042
0.173
0.139
4/0 0.106 0.039 0.113 0.105 0.051 0.117 0.105 0.031 0.109 0.105 0.041 0.113
11 250
300
0.0896
0.0750
0.0384
0.0375
0.0975
0.0839
0.0892
0.0746
0.0495
0.0479
0.102
0.0887
0.0894
0.0746
0.0307
0.0300
0.0945
0.0804
0.0891
0.0744
0.0396
0.0383
0.0975
0.0837
350 0.0644 0.0369 0.0742 0.0640 0.0468 0.0793 0.0640 0.0245 0.0705 0.0638 0.0374 0.0740
400 0.0568 0.0364 0.0675 0.0563 0.0459 0.0726 0.0563 0.0291 0.0634 0.0560 0.0367 0.0700
12 500 0.0459 0.0355 0.0580 0.0453 0.0444 0.0634 0.0453 0.0284 0.0535 0.0450 0.0355 0.0573
600 0.0388 0.0359 0.0529 0.0381 0.0431 0.0575 0.0381 0.0287 0.0477 0.0377 0.0345 0.0511
700 0.0338 0.0350 0.0487 0.0332 0.0423 0.0538 0.0330 0.0280 0.0433 0.0326 0.0338 0.0470
13 750 0.0318 0.0341 0.0466 0.0310 0.0419 0.0521 0.0309 0.0273 0.0412 0.0304 0.0335 0.0452
1000 0.0252 0.0341 0.0424 0.0243 0.0414 0.0480 0.0239 0.0273 0.0363 0.0234 0.0331 0.0405
14 Table 1.5-20. 60 Hz Impedance Data for Three-Phase Aluminum Cable Circuits, in Approximate Ohms per 1000 ft (30 m) at 90 C (b) Three Conductor Cable
Wire Size, In Magnetic Duct and Steel Interlocked Armor In Non-Magnetic Duct and Aluminum Interlocked Armor
15 kcmil
R X Z R X Z R X Z R X Z
6 0.847 0.053 0.849 0.847 0.042 0.848

16 4
2
0.532
0.335
0.050
0.046
0.534
0.338

0.335 0.056

0.340
0.532
0.335
0.040
0.037
0.534
0.337

0.335

0.045

0.338
1 0.265 0.048 0.269 0.265 0.053 0.270 0.265 0.035 0.267 0.265 0.042 0.268
1/0 0.210 0.043 0.214 0.210 0.050 0.216 0.210 0.034 0.213 0.210 0.040 0.214
17 2/0 0.167 0.041 0.172 0.167 0.049 0.174 0.167 0.033 0.170 0.167 0.039 0.171
3/0 0.133 0.040 0.139 0.133 0.048 0.141 0.133 0.037 0.137 0.132 0.038 0.138
4/0 0.106 0.039 0.113 0.105 0.045 0.114 0.105 0.031 0.109 0.105 0.036 0.111
18 250 0.0896 0.0384 0.0975 0.0895 0.0436 0.100 0.0894 0.0307 0.0945 0.0893 0.0349 0.0959
300 0.0750 0.0375 0.0839 0.0748 0.0424 0.0860 0.0746 0.0300 0.0804 0.0745 0.0340 0.0819
350 0.0644 0.0369 0.0742 0.0643 0.0418 0.0767 0.0640 0.0245 0.0705 0.0640 0.0334 0.0722
19 400
500
0.0568
0.0459
0.0364
0.0355
0.0675
0.0580
0.0564
0.0457
0.0411 0.0700 0.0563 0.0291 0.0634 0.0561 0.0329 0.0650
0.0399 0.0607 0.0453 0.0284 0.0535 0.0452 0.0319 0.0553
600 0.0388 0.0359 0.0529 0.0386 0.0390 0.0549 0.0381 0.0287 0.0477 0.0380 0.0312 0.0492
700 0.0338 0.0350 0.0487 0.0335 0.0381 0.0507 0.0330 0.0280 0.0433 0.0328 0.0305 0.0448
20 750 0.0318 0.0341 0.0466 0.0315 0.0379 0.0493 0.0309 0.0273 0.0412 0.0307 0.0303 0.0431
1000 0.0252 0.0341 0.0424 0.0248 0.0368 0.0444 0.0239 0.0273 0.0363 0.0237 0.0294 0.0378
21

Sheet 01 111
Conductor Ampacities
Current Carrying Capacities of Copper and Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors
From National Electrical Code (NEC), 2011 Edition (NFPA 70-2011)
i
Table 1.5-21. Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 02000 V, 60 to 90 C (140 to 194 F).
Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway, cable or earth (directly buried), based on ambient temperature of 30 C (86 F). ii
Size Temperature Rating of Conductor (See Table 310.15 [B][16]) Size
AWG or 60 C (140 F) 75 C (167 F) 90 C (194 F) 60 C (140 F) 75 C (167 F) 90 C (194 F) AWG or
kcmil Types Types kcmil 1
TW, UF RHW, THHW, TBS, SA, SIS, FEP, TW, UF RHW, THHW, TBS, SA, SIS,
THW, THWN,
XHHW, USE, ZW
FEPB, MI,
RHH, RHW-2,
THW, THWN,
XHHW, USE
THHN, THHW,
THW-2, THWN-2,
2
THHN, THHW, RHH, RHW-2,
THW-2, THWN-2, USE-2, XHH,
USE-2, XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, 3
XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW-2
ZW-2
Copper Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum 4
18 14
16 18
14 1 15 20 25 5
12 1 20 25 30 20 20 25 12 1
10 1 30 35 40 25 30 35 10 1
8 40 50 55 30 40 45 8 6
6 55 65 75 40 50 60 6
4 70 85 95 55 65 75 4
3 85 100 110 65 75 85 3 7
2 95 115 130 75 90 100 2
1 110 130 150 85 100 115 1
1/0 125 150 170 100 120 135 1/0 8
2/0 145 175 195 115 135 150 2/0
3/0 165 200 225 130 155 175 3/0
4/0 195 230 260 150 180 205 4/0 9
250 215 255 290 170 205 230 250
300 240 285 320 190 230 255 300
350 260 310 350 210 250 280 350
10
400 280 335 380 225 270 305 400
500 320 380 430 260 310 350 500
600 355 420 475 285 340 385 600
700 385 460 520 310 375 420 700
11
750 400 475 535 320 385 435 750
800 410 490 555 330 395 450 800
900 435 520 585 355 425 480 900
12
1000 455 545 615 375 445 500 1000
1250 495 590 665 405 485 545 1250
1500 520 625 705 435 520 585 1500 13
1750 545 650 735 455 545 615 1750
2000 560 665 750 470 560 630 2000
1 See NEC Section 240.4 (D). 14
Note: For complete details of using Table 1.5-21, see NEC Article 310 in its entirety.
Table 1.5-22. Correction Factors From NFPA 70-2011 (See Table 310.15 [B][2][a]) 15
Ambient For ambient temperatures other than 30 C (86 F), multiply the allowable ampacities shown Ambient
Temperature C above by the appropriate factor shown below. Temperature F
16
2125 1.08 1.05 1.04 1.08 1.05 1.04 07077
2630 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 07886
3135 0.91 0.94 0.96 0.91 0.94 0.96 08795 17
3640 0.82 0.88 0.91 0.82 0.88 0.91 096104
4145 0.71 0.82 0.87 0.71 0.82 0.87 105113
4650 0.58 0.75 0.82 0.58 0.75 0.82 114122
18
5155 0.41 0.67 0.76 0.41 0.67 0.76 123131
5660 0.58 0.71 0.58 0.71 132140
6170 0.33 0.58 0.33 0.58 141158
7180 0.41 0.41 159176
19
20
21

Sheet 01 112
i Ampacities for Conductors (4) Preservation of the safety benefits (4) Adjustment factors shall not
of established industry practices apply to Type AC cable or to
Rated 02000 V (Excerpted and standardized procedures. Type MC cable under the following
ii from NFPA 70-2011, 310.15) (1) General. For explanation of type let-
conditions:
Note: Fine Print Note (FPN) was changed ters used in tables and for a. The cables do not have an overall
to Informational Note in the 2011 NEC. recognized sizes of conductors for outer jacket.
1 (A) General.
the various conductor insulations,
b. Each cable has not more than three
see Table 310.104(A) and Table
310.104(B). For installation current-carrying conductors.
(1) Tables or Engineering Supervision.
2 Ampacities for conductors shall requirements, see 310.1 through c. The conductors are 12 AWG copper.
be permitted to be determined by 310.15(A)(3) and the various
tables as provided in 310.15(B) or articles of this Code. For flexible d. Not more than 20 current-carrying
3 under engineering supervision, cords, see Table 400.4, Table conductors are installed without
as provided in 310.15(C). 400.5(A)(1) and Table 400.5(A)(2). maintaining spacing, are stacked,
or are supported onbridle rings.
Note: Informational Note No. 1: Ampacities (3) Adjustment Factors.
4 provided by this section do not take voltage (5) An adjustment factor of 60 percent
drop into consideration. See 210.19(A), (a) More Than Three Current- shall be applied to Type AC cable or
Informational Note No. 4, for branch circuits Carrying Conductors in a Raceway Type MC cable under the following
5 and 215.2(A), Informational No. 2, for feeders. or Cable. Where the number of conditions:
Note: Informational Note No. 2: For the current-carrying conductors in a
allowable ampacities of Type MTW wire, raceway or cable exceeds three, or a. The cables do not have an overall
6 see Table 13.5.1 in NFPA 79-2007, Electrical where single conductors or multi- outer jacket.
Standard for Industrial Machinery. conductor cables are installed
b. The number of current carrying
without maintaining spacing for
7 (2) Selection of Ampacity. Where a continuous length longer than
conductors exceeds 20.
more than one ampacity applies 24.00-inch (600 mm) and are not c. The cables are stacked or bundled
for a given circuit length, the installed in raceways, the allowable longer that 24.00-inch (600 mm)
8 lowest value shall be used. ampacity of each conductor shall be without spacing being maintained.
Exception: Where two different reduced as shown in Table
ampacities apply to adjacent 310.15(B)(3)(a). Each current-carry- (b) More Than One Conduit, Tube,
9 portions of a circuit, the higher ing conductor of a paralleled set of or Raceway. Spacing between
ampacity shall be permitted to conductors shall be counted as a conduits, tubing, or raceways
be used beyond the point of current-carrying conductor. shall be maintained.
10 transition, a distance equal to 10 ft
(c) Circular Raceways Exposed to
(3.0 m) or 10 percent of the circuit Note: Informational Note No. 1: See Annex
length figured at the higher B, Table B.310.15(B)(2)(11), for adjustment Sunlight on Rooftops.
11 ampacity, whichever is less.
factors for more than three current-carrying
conductors in a raceway or cable with Where conductors or cables are
Note: Informational Note: See 110.14(C) for load diversity. installed in circular raceways exposed
conductor temperature limitations due to to direct sunlight on or above rooftops,
12 termination provisions. Note: Informational Note No. 2: See 366.23(A) the adjustments shown in Table 1.5-23
for adjustment factors for conductors in shall be added to the outdoor
(B) Tables. Ampacities for conductors sheet metal auxiliary gutters and 376.22(B) temperature to determine the
13 rated 02000 V shall be as specified for adjustment factors for conductors in
applicable ambient temperature
metal wireways.
in the Allowable Ampacity for application of the correction
Table 310.15(B)(16) through factors in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or
14 Table 310.15(B)(19), and
(1) Where conductors are installed in
Table 310.15(B)(2)(b).
cable trays, the provisions of
Ampacity Table 310.15(B)(20) and 392.80 shall apply. Note: Informational Note: One source for
Table 310.15(B)(21) as modified
15 by 310.15(B)(1) through (B)(7). (2) Adjustment factors shall not apply
the average ambient temperatures in various
locations is the ASHRAE Handbook
to conductors in raceways having Fundamentals.
Note: Informational Note: Table
a length not exceeding 24.00-inch
16 310.15(B)(16) through Table 310.15(B)(19)
(600 mm). Table 1.5-23. NEC (2011) Table 310.15(B)(3)(c)
are application tables for use in determining
conductor sizes on loads calculated in Ambient Temperature Adjustment for Circular
(3) Adjustment factors shall not apply Raceways Exposed to Sunlight On or
17 accordance with Article 220. Allowable
ampacities result from consideration of one to underground conductors enter- Above Rooftops
or more of the following: ing or leaving an outdoor trench
Distance Above Roof to Temperature
if those conductors have physical
18 (1) Temperature compatibility with protection in the form of rigid
Bottom of Conduit Adder F (C)
connected equipment, especially metal conduit, intermediate metal 00.51-inch (013.0 mm) 60 (33)
the connection points. conduit, rigid polyvinyl chloride Above 0.51-inch (13.0 mm) 40 (22)
19 conduit (PVC), or reinforced 3.54-inch (90.0 mm)
(2) Coordination with circuit and thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) Above 3.54-inch (90.0 mm) 30 (17)
system overcurrent protection. having a length not exceeding 11.81-inch (300.0 mm)
20 (3) Compliance with the requirements 10 ft (3.05 m), and if the number of Above 12.00-inch (300.0 mm) 25 (14)
of product listings or certifications. conductors does not exceed four. 36.00-inch (900.0 mm)
21 See 110.3(B).

Sheet 01 113
(4) Bare or Covered Conductors. (b) In a three-wire circuit consisting (6) Grounding or Bonding Conductor.
Where bare or covered conductors of two phase conductors and the A grounding or bonding conductor i
are installed with insulated neutral conductor of a four-wire, shall not be counted when applying
conductors, the temperature three-phase, wye-connected the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
rating of the bare or covered system, a common conductor ii
conductor shall be equal to the carries approximately the same
lowest temperature rating of the current as the line-to-neutral load
insulated conductors for the currents of the other conductors 1
purpose of determining ampacity. and shall be counted when applying
the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(5) Neutral Conductor. 2
(c) On a four-wire, three-phase wye
(a) A neutral conductor that carries circuit where the major portion of
only the unbalanced current from
other conductors of the same
the load consists of nonlinear loads, 3
harmonic currents are present in
circuit shall not be required to the neutral conductor; the neutral
be counted when applying the
provisions of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
conductor shall therefore be con- 4
sidered a current-carrying conductor.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 114
Formulas and Terms
Table 1.5-24. Formulas for Determining Amperes, hp, kW and kVA

i To Direct Alternating Current
Find Current Single-Phase Two-PhaseFour-Wire 1 Three-Phase
ii Amperes (l) when hp 746
hp 746

hp 746

hp 746

horsepower is known E % eff E % eff pf 2 E % eff pf 3 E % eff pf
Amperes (l) when kW 1000 kW 1000 kW 1000 kW 1000

1 kilowatts is known E E pf 2 E pf 3 E % pf
kVA 1000 kVA 1000 kVA 1000
Amperes (l) when

kva is known E 2E 3E
2 Kilowatts IE

l E pf

l E 2 pf

l E 3 pf

1000 1000 1000 1000
kVA IE IE2 IE 3

3 1000 1000 1000
Horsepower (output) I E % eff I E % eff pf I E 2 % eff pf I E 3 % eff pf

746 746 746 746
4 1 For two-phase, three-wire circuits, the current in the common conductor is 2 times that in either of the two other conductors.
Note: Units of measurement and definitions for E (volts), I (amperes), and other abbreviations are given below under Common Electrical Terms.
5 Common Electrical Terms How to Compute Power Factor

Ampere (l) = unit of current or rate of flow of electricity
Watts
Determining Watts pf = ----------------------------------------------
6 Volt (E) = unit of electromotive force Volts Amperes
Ohm (R) = unit of resistance 1. 1. From watthour meter.

Watts = rpm of disc x 60 x Kh
7 E
Ohms law: I = (DC or 100% pf)
R
Where Kh is meter constant
Megohm = 1,000,000 ohms
printed on face or nameplate
8 Volt Amperes (VA) = unit of apparent power of meter.
= E l (single-phase)
If metering transformers are used,
9 = El 3 above must be multiplied by the
Kilovolt Amperes (kVA) = 1000 volt-amperes transformer ratios.
10 Watt (W) = unit of true power 2. Directly from wattmeter reading.
Where:
= VA pf
11 = 0.00134 hp Volts = line-to-line voltage as
measured by voltmeter.
Kilowatt (kW) = 1000 watts
12 Power Factor (pf) = ratio of true to apparent power Amperes = current measured in
W kW line wire (not neutral) by ammeter.
= -------- ----------
-
13 VA kVA Table 1.5-25. Temperature Conversion
Watthour (Wh) = unit of electrical work (F to C) C = 5/9 (F32)
= 1 watt for 1 hour (C to F) F = 9/5(C)+32
14 = 3.413 Btu C 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20
= 2655 ft-lbs F 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68
15 Kilowatt-hour (kWh) = 1000 watthours

C 25
F 77
30
86
35 40 45
95 104 113
50 55
122 131
60
140
C 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Horsepower (hp) = measure of time rate of doing work
F 149 158 167 176 185 194 203 212
16 = equivalent of raising 33,000 lbs 1 ft in 1 minute
= 746 watts 1 Inch = 2.54 centimeters
17 Demand Factor = ratio of maximum demand to the total connected load
1 Kilogram = 2.20 lbs
1 Square Inch = 1,273,200 circular mills
Diversity Factor = ratio of the sum of individual maximum demands of 1 Circular Mill = 0.785 square mil
18 the various subdivisions of a system to the maximum
1 Btu = 778 ft lbs
demand of the whole system
= 252 calories
19 Load Factor = ratio of the average load over a designated period 1 Year = 8760 hours
of time to the peak load occurring in that period
20
21

Sheet 01 115
Seismic Requirements
Seismic Requirements i
ii
1
General
In the 1980s, Eaton embarked on a 2
comprehensive program centered
around designing and building
electrical distribution and control 3
equipment capable of meeting and
exceeding the seismic load require-
ments of the Uniform Building Code 4
(UBC) and California Building Code
(CBC). These codes emphasize build-
ing design requirements. Electrical 5
equipment and distribution system
components are considered attach-
ments to the building. The entire 6
program has been updated to show
compliance with the 2009 International
Building Code (IBC) and the 2010 CBC 7
seismic requirements. A cooperative Figure 1.5-1. Typical Earthquake Ground Motion Map for the United States
effort with the equipment user, the
building designer and the equipment International Building Code (IBC) California Building Code 8
installer ensures that the equipment On December 9, 1994, the International The 2001 CBC was based upon the
is correctly anchored such that it can Code Council (ICC) was established 1997 UBC. In August of 2006, it was
withstand the effects of an earthquake. as a nonprofit organization dedicated repealed by the California Building 9
Eatons electrical distribution and to developing a single set of compre- Standards Commission (CBSC) and
control equipment has been tested hensive and coordinated codes. The replaced by the 2007 CBC, California
and seismically proven for require- ICC foundersthe Building Officials Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, 10
ments exceeding the IBC and CBC. and Code Administrators (BOCA), the Part 2 and used the 2006 IBC as the
Over 100 different assemblies International Conference of Building basis for the code. The 2010 CBC
representing essentially all product Officials (ICBO), and the Southern is based upon the 2009 IBC, with 11
lines have been successfully tested Building Code Congress International amendments as deemed appropriate
and verified to seismic levels higher (SBCCI)created the ICC in response by the CBSC. Eatons seismic
than the maximum seismic require- to technical disparities among the qualification program fully envelopes 12
ments specified in the IBC and CBC. three nationally recognized model the requirements of the 2010 CBC.
The equipment maintained structural codes now in use in the U.S. The
integrity and demonstrated the ability ICC offers a single, complete set of Process 13
to function immediately after the construction codes without regional
seismic tests. A technical paper, According to Chapter 16 of the 2009
limitationsthe International
Earthquake Requirements and Eaton Building Code.
IBC, structure design, the seismic 14
Distribution and Control Equipment requirements of electrical equipment
in buildings may be computed in two
Seismic Capabilities (SA12501SE), Uniform Building Code (UBC)
provides a detailed explanation steps. The first step is to determine 15
of the applicable seismic codes 1997 was the final year in which the the maximum ground motion to be
and Eatons equipment qualification UBC was published. It has since been considered at the site. The second step
program. The paper may be found replaced by the IBC. is to evaluate the equipment mounting 16
at www.eaton.com/seismic. Type and attachments inside the building
in SA12501SE in the document or structure. These are then evaluated
search field. to determine appropriate seismic test 17
requirements. The ground motion,
seismic requirements of the equipment,
and the seismic response spectrum 18
requirements are discussed on
Page 1.5-23, see Figure 1.5-3.
19
20
21

Sheet 01 116
Ground Motion If the latitude and longitude of the SDS, the peak spectral acceleration,
i According to the code, the first and
building location is not known, extends between the values of T0 and
another convenient Web site is TS. T0 and TS are defined in the codes
most important step in the process available that will provide this as follows:
ii is to determine the maximum
considered earthquake spectral
information based upon a street
T0 = 0.2 SD1/SDS = 0.2 x 1.24/1.90 =
address: http://geocoder.us/
response acceleration at short 0.131 seconds (7.63 Hz)
1 periods of 0.2 seconds (SS) and at
a period of 1.0 second (S1). These
To determine the maximum considered
TS = SD1/SDS = 1.24/1.90 =
earthquake ground motion for most
values are determined from a set 0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz)
site classes (A through D), the code
2 of 24 spectral acceleration maps introduces site coefficients, which According to the IBC and ASCE 7, the
(Figure 1.5-1) and include numerous when applied against the location- spectral acceleration (Sa) at periods
contour lines indicating the severity specific site class, produces the less than 1.45 seconds may be com-
3 of the earthquake requirements at a adjusted maximum considered puted by using the following formula:
particular location in the country. earthquake spectral response
acceleration for the required site. Sa = SDS (0.6 T/T0 + 0.4)
The spectral acceleration maps
4 indicate low to moderate seismic
The site coefficients are defined as Where T is the period where Sa is
Fa at 0.2 seconds short period and being calculated:
requirements for the entire country, FV at 1.0 second period. From the
with the exception of two particular
5 areas; the West Coast and the Midwest
tables in the code, the highest adjust- Therefore, the acceleration at
ing factor for SS is equal to 1.0 and the 0.0417 seconds (24 Hz), for example,
(the New Madrid area). The seismic highest adjusting factor for S1 is 1.50. is equal to:
requirements at the New Madrid area
6 are approximately 30% higher than the As a result, the adjusted maximum Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.0417/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.12 g
maximum requirements of the West considered earthquake spectral
Coast. The maps also suggest that the response for 0.2 second short period The acceleration at 0.03 seconds
7 high seismic requirements in both (SMS) and at 1.0 second (SM1), adjusted (33 Hz) is equal to:
regions, West Coast and Midwest, for site class effects, are determined Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.03/0.131) + 0.4) = 1.02 g
quickly decrease as one moves away from the following equations:
8 from the fault area. Therefore, the high At zero period (infinite frequency),
requirements are only limited to a SMS = Fa SS = 1.0 x 2.85 g = 2.85 g T = 0.0, the acceleration (ZPA) is
relatively narrow strip along the fault equal to:
9 lines. Just a few miles away from this
SM1 = Fv S1 = 1.5 x 1.24 g = 1.86 g
Sa = 1.90 (0.6 (0.0/0.131) + 0.4) =
strip, only a small percentage of the ASCE 7 (American Society of Civil
0.76 g (ZPA)
maximum requirements are indicated. Engineers), Section 11.4, provides a
10 plot of the final shape of the design The acceleration to frequency
Assuming the worse condition, which response spectra of the seismic relationship in the frequency range
is a site directly located near a fault, ground motion. The plot is shown in
11 the maximum considered earthquake Figure 1.5-2. ASCE 7 is referenced
of 1.0 Hz to TS is stated equal to:
spectral response acceleration at short throughout the IBC as the source for Sa = SD1/T
periods of 0.2 seconds (SS) is equal to numerous structural design criteria.
12 285% gravity and at 1.0 second period Where Sa is the acceleration at the
(S1) is 124% gravity. These numbers The design spectral acceleration curve T period.
are the maximum numbers for the can now be computed. The peak spec- At 1.0 Hz (T=1.0) this equation yields
13 entire country except for the New tral acceleration (SDS) and the spectral the following acceleration:
Madrid area. These particular sites are acceleration at 1.0 second (SD1) may
on the border of California and Mexico now be computed from the following Sa = 1.24/1 = 1.24 g
14 (S1) and in Northern California (SS). formulas in the code:
To help understand the 2009 IBC (and SDS = 2/3 x SMS = 2/3 x 2.85 g = 1.90 g
15 2010 CBC) seismic parameters for a
SD1 = 2/3 x SM1 = 2/3 x 1.8 g = 1.24 g
specific building location, the link to
the US Geological Society is extremely
16 helpful: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/
Spectural Response Acceleration Sa(g)
research/hazmaps/design/
SDS
17 Download the file Java Ground
Motion Parameter Calculatorand SD1
Sa =
T
save it to your hard drive, then run the
18 executable that was downloaded.
The program will allow one to enter SD1 SD1 TL
Sa =
the latitude and longitude of a T2
19 location. (One must be connected
to the Internet to run this application,
even after downloading the program.)
20 The IBC (CBC) seismic parameters for
T0 TS 1.0 TL
that location will then be displayed. Period T (sec)
21
Figure 1.5-2. Design Response Spectrum

Sheet 01 117
Testing has demonstrated that the It can be seen that Eaton has elected to This completes the ground motion
lowest dominant natural frequency of develop generic seismic requirements design response spectrum. The i
Eatons electrical equipment is above that envelop two criteria: spectral accelerations are equal to
3.2 Hz. This indicates that testing at 0.76 g at ZPA, or 33 Hz, and increases
The highest possible spectral peak ii
1.24g at 1 Hz is not necessary. In linearly to a peak acceleration of 1.90 g
addition, having the low end of the accelerations and ZPA at 0.09 seconds (or 11.49 Hz) and stays
spectra higher than realistically The maximum frequency range constant to 0.653 seconds (1.53 Hz),
required forces the shake table to required for many different sites then gradually decreases to 1.24 g at 1
move at extremely high displacements 1 second (or 1.0 Hz). This curve is
to meet the spectral acceleration at shown in Figure 1.5-3.
the low frequencies. 2
Testing to accommodate the low end
10
of the spectra using this acceleration 9
8
3
component can result in testing to a 7 Test Response Spectrum Zero Period
Acceleration (g peak)
factor 2 to 3 times greater than that 6 (TRS) Acceleration = Maximum
realistically required. 5
4
Table Test Motion 4
Through testing experience and data 3
analysis, the seismic acceleration at
1.0 Hz is taken equal to 0.7 g, which 2 Spectrum Dip Not Important
5
will ensure that the seismic levels are Because Frequency is Not an
Equipment Natural Frequency
achieved well below 3.2 Hz. This yields
a more vigorous test over a wider 1.0
6
.9
range of seismic intensities. .8
.7
In developing the seismic requirements .6 Required Response Spectrum

(RRS)
Zero Period
Acceleration = Maximum
7
.5
above, it is important to recognize Floor Motion
.4
the following:
.3 8
T0 and TS are dependent on SMS and
SD1. If SD1 is small relative to SMS then .2
T0 and TS will be smaller and the 9

associated frequencies will shift
.1
higher. The opposite is also true. 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
This must be realized in developing Frequency Hz 10
the complete required response
spectrum (RRS). Therefore, it is not Figure 1.5-3. Design Response Spectrum
adequate to stop the peak spectral 11
acceleration at 7.63 Hz. There are other ASCE 7 Section 13.3Seismic Rp = Component response modifica-
contour line combinations that will tion factor that for electrical equipment
produce higher T0. To account for this Demands on Non-Structural varies from 2.5 to 6.0. 12
variation it is almost impossible to Components
consider all combinations. However, Ip = Component importance factor that
ASCE 7 Paragraph 13.3.1 (IBC Section is either 1.0 or 1.5.
a study of the spectral acceleration 1621.1.4) provides a formula for 13
maps indicates that all variations with computing the seismic requirements Z = Highest point of equipment in a
high magnitude of contour lines could of electrical and mechanical equipment building relative to grade elevation.
very well be enveloped by a factor inside a building or a structure. The 14
of 1.5. Therefore, T0 is recomputed formula is designed for evaluating the h = Average roof height of building
as follows: equipment attachment to the equip- relative to grade elevation.
T0 = 0.2 SD1/(SDS x 1.5) = 0.2 x 1.24/(1.90 ment foundations. The seismic loads The following parameters produce the
15
x 1.5) = 0.087 seconds (11.49 Hz) are defined as: maximum required force:
Eaton ensures maximum certification Fp = 0.4 ap SDS Wp (1 + 2 Z/h)/(Rp/Ip) Z is taken equal to h (equipment 16
by requiring peak acceleration during Where: on roof)
testing to extend to 12 Hz. Ip is taken equal to 1.5
Fp = Seismic design force imposed ap is taken equal to 2.5
17
at the components center of gravity
Rp is taken equal to 2.5
(C.G.) and distributed relative to
component mass distribution. SDS is equal to 1.90 g as indicated 18
in the previous section
ap = Component amplification factor
that varies from 1.00 to 2.50. The acceleration (Fp/Wp) at the C.G. 19
of the equipment is then computed
SDS = Ground level spectral equal to:
acceleration, short period. 20
Acceleration = Fp/Wp = 0.4 x 2.5 x
Wp = Component operating weight. 1.90 g (1 + 2) / (2.5/1.5) = 3.42 g
21

Sheet 01 118
For equipment on (or below) grade,

i the acceleration at the equipment C.G. 10
is then computed equal to:
ii Acceleration = Fp/Wp = 0.4 x 2.5 x

1.90 g (1 + 0) / (2.5 /1.5) = 1.14 g IBC 2009/CBC 2010 IBC 2009 New Madrid
It is impractical to attempt to measure

1 the actual acceleration of the C.G. of a
piece of equipment under seismic test.
Acceleration (g)
The seismic response at the middle of
2 base mounted equipment close to its 1
C.G. is at least 50% higher than the
Eaton Seismic
floor input at the equipment natural
3 frequency. The base accelerations
associated with the accelerations of
FP/WP at the C.G. of the equipment
4 could then be computed as 3.42 /1.5
= 2.28 g. It is the equipment base input
acceleration that is measured and
5 documented during seismic testing
0.1
1 10 100
and is the acceleration value shown
on Eatons seismic certificates. Frequency (Hz)
6
Final Combined Requirements Figure 1.5-4. Required Response Spectrum Curve
7 To better compare all seismic levels
and determine the final envelope
10
seismic requirements, the 2010 CBC,
8 2009 IBC for California, and 2009 IBC
for New Madrid area seismic require-
ments are plotted in Figure 1.5-4. All Eaton 120% Seismic Envelope
9 curves are plotted at 5% damping. An
envelopment of the seismic levels in
the frequency range of 3.2 Hz to 100 Hz
10
Acceleration (g)
is also shown. This level is taken as

Eaton 100% Seismic Envelope
Eatons generic seismic test require- 1
ments for all certifications. Eaton
11 performed additional seismic test runs
on the equipment at approximately
120% of the generic enveloping seismic
12 requirements (see Figure 1.5-5). Eaton
has established this methodology to
provide additional margin to accom-
13 modate potential changes with the
spectral maps, thus eliminating the
0.1
need for additional testing. 1
14 10 100
Frequency (Hz)
15 Figure 1.5-5. Eaton Test Required Response Spectrum Curve
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 119
Product Specific Test Summaries

Table 1.5-26. Distribution Equipment
i
Tested and Seismically Proven Against
Requirements within IBC 2009 y
ii
Eaton Equipment
Low voltage metal-enclosed switchgear

DS II 1
Magnum DS
High resistance ground
Panelboards 2
Pow-R-Line C 1a, 1a-LX, 2a, 2a-LX, 3a, 3E, 4,
5P, F-16 and Pow-R-Command
Switchboards
Instant Pow-R-Line 5P
3
Integrated facilities Pow-R-Line C
Multimeter Pow-R-Line i
MCC 4
Advantage IT.
FlashGard Series 2100
Freedom 2100 5
Low voltage busway
Pow-R-Way and associated fittings
Pow-R-Way III and associated fittings 6
Dry type transformers
Mini powercenters
EP, EPT, DS-3, DT-3
Transfer switches
7
Automatic transfer switch equipment
Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)
Battery modules 8
UPSs
Enclosed control safety switches
General-duty 9
Heavy-duty
Elevator control module
Medium voltage switchgear
Type VacClad-W Type MMVS
10
MEF Type MVS/MEB
MV bus
Metal-enclosed non-segregated phase bus
11
Network protectors
Type CM-22
Type CMD 12
Medium voltage control
AMPGARD
SC9000 drives 13
Substation transformers
Dry-type
Liquid type
Unitized dry-type power centers Figure 1.5-6. Sample Seismic Certificate 14
Note: See www.eaton.com/seismic for
current seismic certificates. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 01 120
Additional Design and If steel, factors such as thickness or Stand-Alone or Free-Standing Equipment
i Installation Considerations gauge, attachment via bolts or welding, If stand-alone or free-standing, then
and the size and type of hardware this may require that additional width
When installing electrical distribution must be considered. space be allowed at each end of the
ii and control equipment, consideration equipment for additional seismic
must be given as to how the methods If concrete, the depth, the PSI, the type
of re-enforcing bars used, as well as bracing supplied by the manufacturer.
employed will affect seismic forces
1 imposed on the equipment, equipment the diameter and embedment of Additional thought must be given to
mounting surface, and conduits anchorage all must be considered. the clearances around the equipment
entering the equipment. The designer must also give consider- to rigid structural edifices. Space must
2 ation if the equipment will be secured be allowed for the differing motions of
Eaton recommends that when specify- the equipment and the structure, so
ing a brand of electrical distribution to the wall, versus stand-alone or free-
standing, which requires the equip- that they do not collide during a seis-
3 and control equipment, the designer
ment to withstand the highest level of mic event and damage one another.
references the installation manuals of
that manufacturer to ascertain that the seismic forces. Top cable entry should Note: If the equipment is installed as stand-
be avoided for large enclosures, as alone or free-standing, with additional
4 requirements can be met through the
accommodation for cable/conduit seismic bracing at each end and not
design and construction process.
flexibility will need to be designed attached to the structure as tested, and yet,
For Eaton electrical distribution and into the system. it is fitted tightly against a structural wall,
5 control products, the seismic installa- then this would be an incorrect installation
tion guides for essentially all product For a manufacturer to simply state for the application of the seismic certificate.
lines can be found at our Web site: Seismic Certified or Seismic
6 http://www.eaton.com/seismic. Qualified does not tell the designer Furthermore, if conduits are to be
if the equipment is appropriate for installed overhead into the equipment,
Electrical designers must work closely the intended installation. does the design call for flexible conduits
7 with the structural or civil engineers of sufficient length to allow for the
for a seismic qualified installation. Note: Eaton recommends that designers conflicting motion of the equipment
confirm with the manufacturer if the and the structure during a seismic event
seismic certification supplied with the
8 Consideration must be given to the
equipment is based on:
so as to not damage the conductors
type of material providing anchorage contained therein, and the terminations
for the electrical equipment. points within the equipment.
1. ACTUAL shaker table test as
9 required by the IBC and CBC. Structure Attached Equipment
2. The seismic certificate and test The designer must work closely
10 data clearly state if the equipment with the structural engineer if the
was tested as free-standing equipment is to be attached to the
anchored at the bottom of the structure to ascertain that the internal
11 equipment to the shaker table. wall re-enforcement of the structure,
type of anchor, and depth of embed-
3. Structure attached, that is, ment is sufficient to secure the
12 anchored at the center of gravity equipment so that the equipment,
(C.G.) or at the TOP of the equip- conduits and structure move at or
ment to a simulated wall on the near the same frequency.
13 shaker table.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring 2.0-1
April 2016
Sheet 02001
Power Management
Connectivity & Monitoring
Contents i
Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring
Introduction ii
Designing a Power Monitoring and Control System for the
Entire Power Distribution and Motor Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0-2
Copper and Fiber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines for Ethernet Networks . . 2.0-5
1
Power Monitoring and Control for Power Distribution and Control Assemblies
Medium Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1 2
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-3
Medium Voltage Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-4 3
Low Voltage Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-5
Low Voltage Commercial Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-6
4
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-7
Low Voltage Panelboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-8
Connectivity and Software Products 5
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
Power Xpert Gateway 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-2 6
Power Xpert Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-9
Power Xpert Insight Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-14 7
Foreseer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-20
Power Management Systems & Products for Third-Party Integration
8
MINTII RS-232 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-2
PMINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3 9
Specifications 10
See Eatons Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Section 16901 & Section 26 27 13.11 & 11
Section 16911 Section 26 09 13.13
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

2.0-2 Power Management Connectivity & Monitoring
Introduction April 2016
Sheet 02 002
i Designing a Power What is Needed in this 2. Add Power Quality Metering

(PQM) to monitor and record
Monitoring and Control Environment? electrical information such as:
ii System for the Entire Power By obtaining information and making

Voltage
it available in real time to the people
Distribution and Motor who need to have it...provide energy Current
Control System consumption and performance informa- Power
1 tion for the electrical distribution and Demand
Introduction control system effectively in a simple
Energy
format that each person can understand
2 The main objective of system design and utilize. This information can be Power factor
is to produce a cost-effective, high- obtained from a power monitoring and Frequency
quality product. Several things stand control system (PMCS). The PMCS is a THD
3 in the wayunexpected equipment complete family of solid-state products Alarms
downtime, energy costs, reduced including protective relays, meters and
maintenance personnel and budgets, Waveform capture
control relays designed to provide
4 and limited capital. Downtime or superior protection and metering from Critical or key points in the
power outage costs range from a few the utility incoming line down to a 15 A electrical distribution and control
thousand to hundreds of thousands of breaker or fractional horsepower motor. system such as:
5 dollars per hour in the lost production When connected together over a high-
and related costs. In many facilities, speed Ethernet network, it provides Incoming main breakers on
the electrical energy consumption the necessary information to the right distribution equipment
6 contributes significantly to overall person in real time to ensure the plant Large feeders on distribution
cost of energy. Having the ability to and facility operates efficiently. It is equipment 225 A and greater
monitor and control every aspect of also open to communicate with Main breaker or Main Lug Only
7 the electrical use throughout the entire other communications systems used (MLO) panels
facility, provides the mechanism for in a facility.
Main breaker on motor control
turning off noncritical loads during
8 times of high peak usage and during During the initial design of the power centers
power outages to keep critical loads monitoring and control system, the Starters with large loads such
operational with limited electrical designer will need to consider the type as 100 hp and above
9 supply from a standby generator. of information required for the right Bus duct feeder runs
person in the facility.
Large loads; 100 A bus plugs
Consider These Facts and above
10 Energy costs are growing at an
Design Considerations
The following checklist provides 3. Coordinate with other divisions
average of 8 percent to 10 percent
a good set of guidelines to follow (mechanical systems, control
11 per year and any increase in power
when designing a Power Monitoring systems, network infrastructure)
demand is dramatically more
and Control System (PMCS) for for making OCPD information
expensive (up to $40/kW)
the electrical distribution and accessible on the company
12 Engineering and maintenance staffs
control system. network or control networks.
are being asked to do more with
fewer personnel 1. Consider solid-state overcurrent 4. Take into consideration which
13 Product quality is very dependent on protection devices (OCPDs) such personnel need access to certain
the consistency of the power supply as: protection relays, circuit levels of control of the OCPD or
at a time when the utilities are being breaker trip units and overload other communicating devices
14 pushed to deliver more with no relays, on all circuits greater than such as: meters, relays and
increase in generating capacity 100 A. This provides the founda- communications gateways.
With the rise in energy costs and tion to add: remote I/O, shunt trip 5. Plan for the installation and
15 the shrinking energy availability, release, motor operator, remote routing of necessary communica-
increasingly complex energy racking device, and communication cables, conduits and trays
reporting and cost saving programs tions for remote monitoring, to connect equipment together to
16 require elaborate monitoring and configuration and control of form a network or to connect to an
reporting systems the OCPD. existing network.
17 Power monitoring and control principles 6. Work closely with the customer
can be applied to the entire power or building owner to discuss
distribution and control system. the long-term ownership of the
18 Ranging from medium voltage to low power monitoring system and the
voltage equipment, solid-state devices maintenance associated with it.
equipped with communication interface Items to discuss are: firmware
19 modules make up the backbone of the updates to all electronic equip-
power monitoring and control system ment, long-term data storage of
network. The recommended approach monitored trend data, and security
20 to building the system is to use best- passwords for key personnel to
of-breed components that individually access the equipment.
and together provide the best possible
21 solution at the lowest cost.

April 2016 Introduction
Sheet 02 003
Safety Considerations The differences between information Controlling access to the power
Safety is a concern anytime mainte-
technology (IT) and networks can be monitoring system is an excellent step i
summarized as follows: toward securing it. Many regulatory
nance personnel are required to be agencies and standards organizations
near or perform service on energized The main focus of the IT network is ii
now recommend/require Role-Based
electrical equipment. Eaton has taken to ensure the confidentiality and the Access Control (RBAC) as part of any
this concern very seriously and has integrity of the data using rigorous access control effort. To support this,
designed a system to make safety the access control and data encryption the power monitoring system compo- 1
number one focus. The design goal of The main focus of the ICs network nents have a robust set of tools to
the system is to limit the interaction is safety, availability, and integrity create the set of users and role-based
with energized electrical equipment of data permissions needed to comply with 2
to the absolute minimum. The biggest
Enterprise security protects the security policies in effect at your site.
area of concern pertains to opening and As a good rule of thumb, it is a good
servers data from attack
closing switches and circuit breakers
Control system security protects idea to have the customer review their 3
while equipment is energized. policies and have a good understand-
the facilitys ability to safely and
securely operate, regardless of what ing of the access control requirements
Security Considerations for their site. 4
may befall the rest of the network
Every day, cyber-attacks against
government and commercial computer Cybersecurity threat vectors are paths By default, most power monitoring
networks number in the millions. or tools that an entity can use to gain systems are provided with two user 5
According to U.S. Cyber Command, access to a device or a control network types:
pentagon systems are probed 250,000 in order to deliver a malicious attack. Admin: has access to all functions and
times per hour. Similar attacks are can edit anything (admin role). The
6
Potential threats include:
becoming more prevalent on other password for the admin account is
kinds of information-based smart External users accessing the also admin.
networks as well, such as those that network through the Internet 7
operate buildings and utility systems. misconfigured firewalls User: can view any information on the
Whether the objective is to steal tabs, but cant access Settings or edit
Unsecure wireless routers and 8
intellectual property or halt operations, anything. The password is user.
wired modems
the tools and the techniques used for
Infected laptops located elsewhere Before doing anything else, change the
unauthorized network access are
increasingly sophisticated. that can access the network behind default account names and logins. Not 9
the firewall only are these users not compliant
Connectivitywhy do we need to Infected USB keys and PLC with RBAC, keeping them is a security
address cybersecurity for power moni- logic programs hazard. Keep in mind that this manual, 10
toring and control systems (PMCS)? along with the login names and pass-
Unsecure RS-232 serial links
words, is published on the Internet.
There is increasing concern regarding The most common malicious attacks Anyone with either physical access to 11
cybersecurity across industries where come in the following forms: the PXG or to your ICS network could
companies are steadily integrating field know how to login as the admin user.
devices into enterprise-wide informa- Virusa software program that You'll need to replace these accounts 12
tion systems. This occurs in discrete spreads from one device to another, with RBAC compliant ones to meet the
manufacturing and process industrial affecting operation needs of your security policy. While
environments, a wide range of general Trojan horsea malicious device the Admin user is useful for commis- 13
and specific purpose commercial program that hides inside other sioning, its a security risk to maintain
buildings, and even utility networks. programs and provides access to a single account with all permissions.
Traditionally, electrical systems were that device 14
controlled through serial devices Worma device program that
connected to computers via dedicated spreads without user interaction and
transceivers with proprietary protocols. affects the stability and performance 15
In contrast, todays control systems of the ICs network
are increasingly connected to larger
Spywarea device program that
enterprise networks, which can expose
changes the configuration of a 16
these systems to similar vulnerabilities
that are typically found in computer device
systems. 17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 004
Design Considerations for Benefits of the Power Monitoring Instantaneous Troubleshooting Information
i Interoperability with Open Systems and Control System Information on with breaker
tripped, the cause and magnitude
Eaton has chosen to use Ethernet is available instantaneously
Improved Energy Management
ii communication networks both internal
Alarms which time stamping
and external to the switchgear. The use Historical trending functions used
to develop daily or seasonal load provide an indication of which
of Ethernet technology has become
1 profiles event occurred first, second and
more accepted and prevalent for indus-
Rapid reaction to utility load so forth. This narrows the potential
trial applications. Ethernet networks are
shedding requirements cause of a given trip
faster and have become much more
2 deterministic over the years. Accurate allocation of energy Maintenance personnel are
costs within a facility provided with information to
The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway / identify the problem and have
Reduce a peak demand
3 Dashboard Server is typically installed
Equalize loads to reduce potential
the system up and operating in
inside the switchgear assembly to minutes instead of hours
consolidate all of the device data into downtime
4 a single point of access. Increased Personnel Productivity
Scheduled Maintenance Reduces Costs Time-consuming data collection by
The gateway function of this device Preventive maintenance schedules dedicated personnel is unnecessary
provides a source of data to third-party can be developed from the
5 systems e.g.: Building Management database of real time mechanical
Maintenance personnel are free
System (BMS) using common data to perform actual maintenance
and electrical equipment usage functions to keep the equipment
protocols such as: BACnet/IP and
6 Modbus TCP/IP. These protocols
Alerts are provided to remind when and facility operating
preventive maintenance is required Scheduled maintenance based on
provide the means to request and on monitored equipment
receive metering and breaker status real time eliminates unnecessary
7 information for visualization, data Costs can be reduced through maintenance
trending and status within the BMS elimination of unnecessary Time-consuming troubleshooting to
software graphics screens. maintenance dictated only by determine overload or fault source
8 time instead of actual use is eliminated
Eaton provides data reference tables Emergency maintenance problems
for Modbus TCP/IP in the form of are dramatically reduced
9 printed register maps that are
available in PDF format on the Eaton Early Warning Alerts to Potential Problems
website. These register maps will The operator is alerted to problems
10 assist the BMS integrator personnel before they occur such as a breaker
when building their data tables. beginning to time out or a load
about to be exceeded
11 Alternatively, if the BMS integrator
Problems can be corrected by
personnel choose to use the BACnet/IP
data path, all that needs to be done is shedding or equalizing loads while
the cause is identified and corrected
12 discover the entire device tree shown
below as a new BACnet object. This Isolation and correction of problems
method eliminates the need to help ensure that a process or facility
13 manually create the device tables will not shut down
and simply drag and drop elements
on the BMS graphic screens.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Introduction
Sheet 02 005
Copper and FIber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines for Ethernet Networks
Copper Ethernet Cable As a general rule for noise protection, Patch cords from a wall jack to the
Ethernet Cable should maintain a work area PC (or device) shall not i
Wiring Guidelines minimum distance of 3 inches exceed 16 ft (5 m)
(8 cm) from electric power conductors Ethernet cable used in harsh
The following information can be used for up to 100 V and 1 inch (3 cm) for ii
as a guide when designing an Ethernet environments must be selected to
each additional 100 V up to 400 V. withstand the following conditions:
system using copper Ethernet cable. STP cable is recommended vibration, air born contaminants,
Cables should not be routed near For Ethernet cable run within chemicals, temperature, electro- 1
equipment that generates strong conduit but near conductors with magnetic interference, combustible
electric or magnetic fields such potentially noisy power conductors atmospheres and local regulatory
as motors, drive controllers, arc carrying currents of greater than standards such as UL and NEMA 2
welders and conduit 20 A or voltages greater than 400 V, Ethernet connectors used in harsh
Ethernet cable insulation has a maintain the following distances. environments must be robust
voltage rating of 300 Vac. Use of STP cable is required enough to withstand vibration,
3
barriers, cable trays or high voltage Conductors of less than multiple connection cycles, tempera-
sheathing with STP Ethernet cable 20 A = 3 inches ture changes, and provide a proper 4
may be required in installations Conductors of 20 A or more seal to protect against moisture,
with cables carrying voltages greater and up to 100 kVA = 6 inches dust/dirt and chemical attack
than 300 Vac. This may also be Different cable media support 5
Conductors greater than
necessary in order to comply with different bandwidth capabilities.
UL requirements. In installations 100 kVA = 12 inches
When installing cable in a network,
where the cable cannot be physically For Ethernet cable run near
separated from the power cables conductors with potentially noisy
care should be taken to install the 6
cable that will fill current network
(where a physical barrier is not power conductors carrying currents loading requirements and future
practical) fiber optic cable should of greater than 20 A or voltages expansion needs. In general, fiber 7
be used greater than 400 V, maintain the optic cable can support the greatest
When crossing power conductors following distances. STP cable is bandwidth (upward of 25,000 giga-
with Ethernet cable, cross at right recommended bits) and UTP has the lowest. CAT5e 8
angles Conductors of less than cabling is designed to operate a bit
Shielded twisted pair (STP) Ethernet 20 A = 6 inches rates up to 1000 Mb and CAT6 cable
cable should be specified for use in Conductors of 20 A or more up to 2000 Mb 9
high noise environments. Shielded and up to 100 kVA = 12 inches Operating your cable at maximum
shrouded connectors must be used Conductors greater than
speed reduces the distance between
and the shield must be connected at 100 kVA = 24 inches network segments. Check with your 10
both ends of the wire. The mating cable supplier for specifications
plug must have a shielded shroud Route Ethernet cable at least 5 ft regarding segment distance vs. speed
that is terminated to ground at both (1.5 m) from sources of rf/microwave
Cable with 5% impedance mismatch 11
ends. Where there is a possibility of radiation. STP cable is required
or return loss of 27 to 32 dB is
a difference in ground potential Do not cascade more than four recommended. Ethernet cable
(common mode) voltages between Ethernet repeaters (router, switch or impedance can vary by as much 12
the two terminated ends, fiber optic hub) within a network segment as 15% (85 to 115 ohms). Average
cable is recommended Environmentally sealed connectors Ethernet cable with 15% impedance
When using conduit or a metal should be specified for cables used variation can have up to 10 dB addi-
13
cable tray, each section of the in outdoor installations tional return loss. This discontinuity
conduit or tray must be bonded Avoid pinching the cable when using is referred to as return loss, since
to each adjacent section and the cable ties it causes some of the signal to be
14
conduit or tray needs to be bonded Total distance between an Ethernet reflected back down the cable
to earth ground. Do not allow the instead of propagating forward. It
shields to touch the conduit or metal
transmitter and receiver at the end
is measured in decibels or ratio of
15
points of the network should not
tray at any point exceed 328 ft (100 m) transmitted versus reflected signal
Only shielded (STP) Ethernet cables Total distance from a patch panel to 16
should be placed into metal conduit. a wall jack (using solid cable) shall
Some UTP cables may not function not exceed 295 ft (90 m). Splices are
properly when installed in conduit, not permitted 17
as the metal conduit can affect the
Patch cords used as cross-connect
electrical properties of an unshielded
jumpers in a patch panel should not
cable. Consult the cable manufac-
exceed 20 ft (6 m) 18
turer when installing UTP cables
in conduit
19
20
21

Sheet 02 006
Copper and FIber Optic Cable Wiring Guidelines for Ethernet Networks
Fiber Optic Technology Fiber Optic Cable Care should be taken when
i purchasing connectors to include
The use of fiber optics in telecommuni- Wiring Guidelines strain relief, which reduces
cations and wide area networking mechanical strain (vibration) within
ii has been common for many years,
but more recently fiber optics have
The following information can be used
as a guide when designing an Ethernet
the cable, as well as the connector.
Strain relief also provides support
become increasingly prevalent in system using fiber optic Ethernet to the cable to ensure proper bend
1 industrial data communications cable: radius at the connector
systems as well. High data rate
Select a fiber cable that is suited for Single-mode fiber is used for
capabilities, noise rejection and
the application, e.g., outdoor, aerial, long distance transmission of
2 electrical isolation are just a few of
duct, intra-building, risers, general up to 120 km. Distance may vary
the important characteristics that make
fiber optic technology ideal for use in building and plenum applications depending on speed and type of
Fiber optic cable is useful in converter used
3 industrial and commercial systems.
applications where the environment Multi-mode graded-index fiber cable
Although often used for point-to-point is combustible, electrically noisy, is used for communication over
connections, fiber optic links are being the cable must be bundles with high shorter distances of up to 2 km
4 used to extend the distance limitations voltage wires or where common Fiber cable is composed of glass
of RS-232, RS-422/485 and Ethernet mode voltages may exist between and is not well suited for applica-
systems while ensuring high data the earth ground points of the
5 rates and minimizing electrical terminating connectors
tions requiring tight bend radiuses.
Cable radius dimensions vary per
interference. Fiber optic cable is available in manufacturer. If the manufacturer
6 Conventional electrical data signals various operating temperature does not provide a bend radius, a
are converted into a modulated light ranges. Care should be taken to typical rule of thumb is a radius not
beam, introduced into the fiber and match the temperature rating of less than 15x the cable diameter
7 transported via a very small diameter the fiber to the environment it will Fiber cable to connector termina-
glass or plastic fiber to a receiver that be exposed to. The temperature tions can be performed in the field
converts the light back into electrical specification for fiber may be using special equipment. This
8 signals. narrower than copper cable. Consult method is not recommended
the cable manufacturer for tempera- Tier One testing is recommended
Optical fibers allow data signals to ture specifications of your cable type when diagnosing system irregu-
9 propagate through them by ensuring Sealed fiber connectors are available larities and should be performed
that the light signal enters the fiber at for use in harsh environments to
an angle greater than the critical angle in all new installations
prevent contamination from enter-
10 of the interface between two types of Tier Two testing is recommended
ing the connector and fiber. The type
glass. Optical fiber is actually made to certify that a system complies
of seal required will be application
up of three parts. The center core is with standards set forth by the
dependant and can vary from dust-
11 composed of very pure glass. Core and moisture-proof to water-tight
owner/installer
dimensions are usually in the range
Mixing fiber cable types is not
of 50125 um for multi-mode cables
permitted. The same core
12 and 89 um for single-mode cables.
dimensions and mode must be
The surrounding glass, called clad-
ding, is a slightly less pure glass. used within cable segments
13 The diameter of the core and cladding
together is in the range of 125440 um.
14 Surrounding the cladding is a protec-

tive layer of flexible silicone called
the sheath.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Power Management Systems & Products 2.1-1
March 2016 Power Monitoring and Control
Sheet 02 007
Medium Voltage Switchgear
Medium Voltage Switchgear Protective Relay Selection

i
Eatons medium voltage switchgear is supplied with both
standard and advanced protective relays and meters. Depend-
ing upon the level of functionality required at each point in the
Connect to Local
Area Network Building switchgear, Eaton offers a choice in device selection. ii
Management System (BMS)
Protection Functions
All of Eatons E-Series protective relays are fully equipped 1
with a standard set of protection functions and additional
Network Coupler
optional features.
PXG
to be Provided
by Electrical
ES 2
Contractor
The EDR-3000 is Eatons standard protective relay typically
selected for feeder protection. This relay monitors phase and
ground current. The EDR-5000 is Eatons advanced protective 3
relay typically selected for main breakers. This relay monitors
the line side voltage and bus voltage, as well as bus current.
This provides the needed level of protection for the primary 4
switchgear bus.
R2
Features 5
Depending upon the specific requirements for local access
1200
to metering information at the switchgear, using the protec-
tive relay for metering as opposed to adding an additional
6
Feeder 1 set of current transformers and meters, may be acceptable.
Table 2.1-1. Metering Feature Comparison 7
Description EDR-3000 EDR-5000
Metering and Monitoring Features
Feeder 2
8
Current (pos., neg. and zero seq.)
Current unbalance % (I2/I1)
M1 1200 1200 Differential current 9
Voltage (LL, LN, pos., neg. and zero seq.)
Main
Voltage unbalance % (V2/V1)
R1 R2
Phase angles
10
Volt-amps, watts, volt-amps reactive
kWh (forward, reverse and net) 11
kVArh (lead, lag and net)
Power factor
Legend Frequency
12
Designation Product Make/Model Description Volts/Hz
M1 Eaton PXM6000 Power Quality Meter 2nd harmonic current % (H2/fund.) 13

R1 Eaton EDR-5000 Advanced Relay 3rd harmonic voltage
THD current (% and magnitude)
R2 Eaton EDR-3000 Standard Relay
PXG Eaton PXG900 Ethernet Gateway THD voltage (% and magnitude) 14
Minimum/maximum recording
ES Eaton ES6P 6 Port Switch

Sync values
15
Figure 2.1-1. Two Section Medium Voltage Lineup Temperature with remote URTD module
Trip circuit monitoring
General Description Breaker wear and general counters 16
CT supervision
Device Selection
VT supervision
The devices shown in Figure 2.1-1 have been chosen to
Waveform recorder (7200 cycles total storage)
17
provide the best feature/benefit to the end user. Typically the
Fault recorder (20 events)
specifying consulting engineer or end user will have device
preference; however, for the purpose of illustration, all Eaton Sequence of events recorder (300 events) 18
devices have been selected. If there are no significant Trend recorder
differences between the switchgear manufacturers devices Motor history, start trending, thermal capacity
and those of a recommended third party, there are distinct Generator hours of operation
19
advantages to allow the switchgear manufacturer to provide Programmable logic equations (up to 80)
them. This allows the switchgear manufacturer to test to
internal standards and minimize variation to aid in providing 20
a high-quality and cost-effective product to the customer.
21

2.1-2 Power Management Systems & Products
Power Monitoring and Control March 2016
Sheet 02 008
Medium Voltage Switchgear
i Model Comparison GuideProtective Functions

EDR-3000 EDR-5000
Protection Functions The EDR-5000 has all of the same protection functions as the EDR-3000 with additional features.
ii 46 Current unbalance elements Enhanced protection functions
50BF Breaker failure 27A/M Auxiliary and main three-phase 51V Voltage restraint elements
50P Phase instantaneous overcurrent undervoltage elements 79 Auto-reclosing
1 elements 47 Voltage unbalance elements 27T Low voltage ride-through (LVRT)
50R Calculated ground or neutral 55A/D Apparent and displacement power 27Q Reactive power and undervoltage
instantaneous overcurrent elements factor elements
50X Measured ground or neutral
2 instantaneous overcurrent elements
59A/M Auxiliary and main three-phase
overvoltage elements
51P Phase overcurrent protection per 59N Ground fault overvoltage elements
time-current curve elements 67P Directional overcurrent elements
3 51R Calculated ground fault protection
per time-current curve elements
67X Calculated directional overcurrent
elements
51X Measured ground or neutral fault 78V Vector surge element
protection per time-current curve
4 elements
81U/O/R Under and over and rate of change
frequency elements
CLPU Cold load pickup LOP Loss of potential
SOTF Switch on to fault 25 Sync check
5 CTS Current transformer supervision
74TCM Trip coil monitor (option)
32 Forward and reverse watts elements
32V Forward and reverse VARs elements
ZI Zone selective interlocking (option)
6 Typical One-Line ExampleANSI Protective Elements Guide
Protective Elements Key

7 1 = Elements available on
EDR-3000 and EDR-5000
1 = Elements available
on EDR-5000
8 52 27A 59N 59A See Page 1 for metering features.
9 79
74
TCM 50P 51P
50
BF 50R 51R 46 67P 67R LOP
10
3 CTS SOTF CLPU
25
11
1 55
50X 51X A/D 67X
12
3
81
13 47 U/O 81R 78V 27M 59M 51V 32 32V
14 1 52circuit breaker.
15 Figure 2.1-2. Protection Feature Comparison
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 009
Low Voltage Switchgear
Low Voltage Switchgear i
ii
4
TO COME
5
General Description
COPY TO COME. 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 010
Medium Voltage Motor Control
i Medium Voltage
Motor Control
ii
5
TO COME
6 General Description
COPY TO COME.
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 011
Low Voltage Motor Control
Low Voltage Motor Control i
ii
4
TO COME
5
General Description
COPY TO COME. 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 012
Low Voltage Commercial Power Distribution
i Low Voltage Commercial

Power Distribution
ii
5
TO COME
6 General Description
COPY TO COME.
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 013
Low Voltage Switchboard i
ii
4
TO COME
5
General Description
COPY TO COME. 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 014
i Low Voltage Panelboard
ii
4
TO COME
5
General Description
6 COPY TO COME.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

March 2016 Connectivity and Software Products
Sheet 02 015
Power Xpert Ethernet Technical Data and Specifications

i
Switches Table 2.2-1. Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Description Catalog
Number ii
4 port Ethernet switchcopper only PXES4P24V
6 port Ethernet switchcopper only PXES6P24V
6 port Ethernet switch5 copper/1 fiber (ST connector) PXES6P24V1ST 1
6 port Ethernet switch4 copper/2 fiber (ST connector) PXES6P24V2ST
Table 2.2-2. Accessories 2

Description Catalog
Number
3
Power supply (preferred)100240 Vac input ELC-PS02
Convenient Network Expansion DIN rail mount with screw24 Vdc output terminals
Power supply (alternate)120 Vac input PXESPS12V 4
General Description Wall plug-in type with 6 ft. cord12 Vdc output
Eatons Power Xpert Ethernet switches DIN rail mounting bracket PXESDINRL
are ideal for extending Ethernet 19-inch rack mount tray PXESTRAY 5
networks via CAT5 wiring or fiber
in harsh, industrial environments. Table 2.2-3. Operating Environment
Built with high-grade components Description Specifications 6
and constructed using special thermal
Ambient temperature ratings 25 to 60 C long-term per independent agency tests (UL),
techniques, PXE switches can with-
stand the unpredictable conditions
or 40 to 85 C short-term per IEC type tests 7
Storage temperature 40 to 185 F (40 C to 85 C)
of such environments.
Cold start to 20 C
Features Ambient relative humidity 5%95% (noncondensing) 8
Simultaneous, full-duplex, high- Altitude 200 to 50,000 ft (60 to 15,000 m)
speed communication on all ports MTBF > 15 years
9
no network performance bottlenecks
Hardened for factory floorideal Table 2.2-4. Network Standards
for both industrial or data center Description 10
applications Ethernet IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u; IEEE 802.1p, 100Base-TX, 10Base-T, 100Base-FX
Unmanaged, plug-and-play
implementationno software or Table 2.2-5. Agency Approvals and Standards Compliance 11
additional hardware required for Description
configuration
Seamlessly integrates into Eatons UL listed (UL60950), cUL, CE, emissions meet FCC Part 15, Class A 12
Power Xpert Architecturequality
and reliability of Eaton guaranteed Table 2.2-6. Power Consumption
Description
13
Mounting options include stand-
alone panel-mounting, DIN rail 7.0 watts typical9 watts maximum
mounting, or 19-inch standard 14
rack mounting Table 2.2-7. Packaging
PXE 6-Port Switch10/100 Mb with Description Specifications
Optional 100 Mb Fiber
15
Enclosure Robust sheet metal (steel)
This compact switch provides Dimensions of PXES4P series 3.50 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.00 in D (8.9 cm x 7.6 cm x 2.5 cm)
six Ethernet ports, with flexible Weight of PXES4P series 8.6 oz. (243g) 16
configurations. The base models Dimensions of PXES6P series 3.60 in H x 3.00 in W x 1.70 in D (9.2 cm x 7.6 cm x 4.3 cm)
have one of three options: Weight of PXES6P series 13 oz. (370g)
Two 100 Mb fiber and four 10/100 Cooling method Case used as a heat sink 17
copper ports
Table 2.2-8. Mounting Note: These specifications are subject to
One fiber and five copper ports change without notice and represent the 18
Description Specifications
Six copper ports maximum capabilities of the product with
Metal panel mounting clips Included all options installed. This is not a complete
PXE 4-Port Switch10/100 Mb DIN rail mounting Optional feature list. Features and functionality
19
For smaller applications requiring 19-inch rack mount Optional may vary depending on selected options
fewer connection points and no fiber, and product model. Please refer to the
technical data sheet and user manual
the 4-port Power Xpert Ethernet switch for detailed specifications. Please see 20
is a versatile option. It provides edge www.eaton.com/powerxpert for latest
access Ethernet ports in a convenient information.
and compact package. 21

Connectivity and Software Products March 2016
Sheet 02 016
Power Xpert Gateway 900
Power Xpert Gateway 900 Information at a glance Features and Benefits

i Private Network mode on the
Net 2 port will allow for the Rugged, Industrial Design
ability to establish a private Designed specifically for industrial
ii subnet to attach Modbus TCP environments, the PXG has a
communication devices compact design that only requires
Using a standard Web browser, convection cooling
1 view the PXGs Web interfaces Stringent EMI design requirements
that include a Network tab, ensure that the PXG will function in
2 Alarms tab, individual device the most difficult EMI situations to
Delivers real-time, Web-enabled detail pop-outs, and One Line deliver high reliability
monitoring of electrical distribution graphics tab Mounting options are provided for
3 and control equipment Comprehensive, well-organized panel mounting or DIN rail, allowing
device Web pages present for installation flexibility
General Description measured parameters such as
Smart Configuration and User Interface
4 The Power Xpert Gateway 900 current, voltage, power, energy,
frequency, power factor, and As an out-of-the-box, plug-and-play
(PXG 900) has been designed to be
voltage THD, just to name a few device, there is no additional
installed in electrical assemblies or
5 systemslow and medium voltage Combine with Power Xpert
software required to configure
and view downstream devices
switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, Insight for viewing multiple
transfer switches, and motor control All configuration menus are
gateways and other power
6 centers to acquire and consolidate data system equipment for more straightforward and easy to follow
available from components such as trip extensive energy monitoring Upon configuring the PXG and
units, meters, relays, drives, and I/O. and capacity analysis associated devices, the data will
7 automatically appear in the Web UI
Product Overview Monitoring Power and Energy when you point your browser to the
Open communication architecture in a Networked World IP address of the PXG
8 Connects to both Eaton and Through standard on-board Web
third-party electrical equipment; pages, Power Xpert Insight, or third- Three operational modes
communicates to INCOME, party software, Eatons Power Xpert The Power Xpert Gateway can operate
9 Modbus TCP, and Modbus Gateway (PXG) 900 allows you to in three modes, simultaneously if
RTU devices closely monitor the performance required, providing flexibility for
of your power and energy efficiency varying protocols, devices, and
10 Modbus TCP and BACnet/IP
with easily accessed, real-time, systems. For further details of each
support facilitates integration with operational mode, see user manual.
third-party monitoring solutions Web-enabled data. Eatons PXG 900
provides a central point to connect For a graphical representation of each
11 Ethernet/Web-based support devices to an Ethernet network. The mode, see Figure 2.2-1.
uses your existing network infra- gateway may be used as a standalone
structure, reducing costs 1. INCOM Pass-Through mode
device to view one system or location,
12 or it can be easily integrated into a
allows data from INCOM serial
Flexible and expandable solutions devices to flow directly through
large, multi-location system. the gateway to be viewed in
Stand-alone or small systems
13 benefit from comprehensive, on- The PXG is our configurable data PowerNet software for logging
board Web pages; no additional acquisition solution for facility equip- and consolidation with other
programming or software is ment like switchgear, switchboards, connected devices.
14 necessary for virtually out-of-the- motor control centers, etc. Power and Expansion of an existing
box, plug-and-play functionality energy data from the downstream PowerNet system with addi-
Larger systems, such as campus devices are time stamped and stored tional equipment can be easily
15 installations or power systems in non-volatile memory. This interval achieved by adding a PXG 900
with remote locations can view data can be stored or updated to a to the system to bring the
multiple PXGs via Power Xpert destination of the users choice INCOM communicating
16 Insight or a third-party through CSV. Data can also be devices online in INCOM
monitoring system accessed through any Web browser pass-through mode.
directly on the PXG. Users can move
17 Existing equipment can be
data into Power Xpert Insight v. 3.2 Note: INCOM serial communication can
connected to the PXG to reap either be cached or EMINT/pass-through,
or higher, BMS, BAS, building dash-
the benefits of Power Xpert not both at the same time.
boards, custom software applications,
18 Architecture at minimal cost,
or virtually any Web interface.
without the need to upgrade
19
20
21

Sheet 02 017
2. The Modbus RTU-Modbus TCP 3. Cache mode allows data from Secure Cyber Communication
Pass-Through mode allows INCOM serial devices and Modbus Controlling access to the PXG 900 i
information from Modbus serial RTU and TCP devices into the is a vital component in any effort to
devices to pass directly through gateway, creating real-time secure it. Many regulatory agencies
the gateway to be viewed by a (or viewing status through a Web and standards organizations now ii
multiple) Modbus TCP monitoring browser as well as logging for recommend/require Role-Based
software, i.e., an existing Building historical reference and trending. Access Control (RBAC) as part of any
Management System. Cached data from the connected access control effort. To support this, 1
devices can be shared with other the PXG 900 has a robust set of tools
The PXG allows users to do client software similar to pass you can use to create the set of users
simple protocol translation, through. and role-based permissions you need 2
with minimal configuration in
the PXG for those applications The PXG in Cache mode serves to comply with security policies in
effect at your site.
where they need Modbus TCP as an acquisition tool and 3
to bring devices into their provides the ability for users to Password protection
existing system. view their devices on the ports Role-Based Access Control (RBAC)
The flexibility of the PXG for connected to the PXG through as part of any access control effort. 4
simple Modbus protocol a Web browser. This allows To support this, the PXG 900 has a
translation in conjunction users to bring power infrastruc- robust set of tools you can use to
with other modes makes ture equipment online to create the set of users and role- 5
the PXG more than a simple monitor operation and record based permissions you need to
Modbus protocol translator. power and energy usage. comply with security policies in
effect at your site 6
Secure Web browsing
SSL Encryption option ensures
that information and passwords 7
exchanged with the PXGs Web
server cannot be intercepted on
the LAN 8
Access control / trusted host list
Provides an additional method of 9
security by limiting access to the
communication ports by authorized
trusted hosts IP addresses 10
11
PowerNet
INCOM Serial Devices INCOM Mode

12
13
Pass-through EMINT
14
INCOM Serial Devices Web Browser
Modbus Serial Devices
Modbus TCP Devices Cached Data Mode 15
16
Cashed Data
17
Modbus Masters PowerPort-E
Modbus Serial Devices
18
Modbus Mode
Modbus TCP Devices
19
Pass-Through Modbus RTU-TCP 20
Figure 2.2-1. Three Operational Modes 21

Sheet 02 018
Time Synchronization Table 2.2-1. Summary of PXG 900 features

i The PXG supports synchronization of Features PXG 900
clocks on INCOM devices that support
Protocols supported on downstream devices: INCOM, Modbus TCP, and Modbus RTU Yes
the set time and date command.
ii Additionally, the PXG can be Number of downstream communication ports 3
combined with a network time server Number of downstream protocols supported simultaneously 2
for accurate time stamping via NTP. USB port for configuration Yes
1 Two RJ-45 Ethernet ports10/100/1000Base-T Yes
Real-time trending and viewing
Modbus TCP/IP protocol supported Yes
The PXG 900 allows the user to enable
2 pre-selected parameters to be trended BACnet/IP protocol supported Yes
for each supported device. This feature INCOM date and time settings supported Yes
is user-selectable on the device Network tab, alarm tab, one line tab, device and alarm detail sidebar, and pop-out Yes
3 configuration page. A trend symbol Device waveform access and storageCOMTRADE file format Yes
is displayed next to the trended Set user-defined alarms Yes
parameter on the device page.
4 Selecting the trend symbol will
Real-time trending Yes
Trend graphs displayed in Web browser Yes
generate a real-time graph via the
Web UI for that parameter and can be Alarm notification via the Web interface Yes
5 viewed for the past 24 hours, 7 days, Alarm logscsv file format, downloadable to Excel Yes
30 days or all past history. Trend logscsv file format, downloadable to Excel Yes
6 Trend and alarm logging and analysis Email notification on alarms and daily updates if requested Yes
Secure Ethernet communicationSSL encryption Yes
The PXG 900 stores both historical
Secure communication ports via access control/trusted host list Yes
data and alarms that can be down-
7 loaded into a comma separated value IPv4 support Yes
(CSV) file format. Using Excel will Save and restore configuration settings Yes
allow you to perform analysis to Audit logs Yes
8 discover potential system issues or
proactively perform maintenance. Note: The Eaton Power Xpert Gateway 900 includes the Power Xpert Gateway Module,
USB A to Mini-B USB cable, and DIN rail adapter with mounting screws.
9 Waveforms capture and downloads
The PXG 900 supports waveform
acquisition for INCOM supported
10 devices capable of generating wave-
forms. This feature is user-selectable
on the device configuration page.
11 The waveform files are converted and
stored as a COMTRADE file format
in the PXG 900. The files can then
12 be downloaded and viewed using a
standard COMTRADE waveform
viewer of your choice.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 019
Power Xpert Insight Gateway user interface One-Lines Tab

Allows users the ability to create a graphical representation i
Network Tab
of a one-line diagram based on the users desired represen-
Default log-in screen that provides general configuration of tation. Through the device tree, a user can select devices
the gateway, serial communication ports, and devices. The and group them in locations and generate a multiple level ii
Network tab provides a simple view of the serial devices one-line representing the devices connected to the gateway.
and their current status of operation by color changes and The one-line graphic will provide device status graphically,
symbols. Additional detail and functionality is accessible and additional detail can be found on the device and its 1
from the Network tab sidebar for all communicating devices. supported channels in the sidebar of a selected device on
the one-line or device tree.
2
7
Alarms Tab
Provides a single screen that provides details on all alarms Device Details and Trend Viewer 8
associated with the device communicating in cache
mode through the gateway. Alarms can be reviewed and Selected devices on the Network tab and One-Lines tab
acknowledged, as well as sorted and filtered based on provide a device sidebar. From that sidebar, a user can
status. Additional information regarding the alarm can be get additional detail about the device and its monitored 9
found by selecting the alarm and specifics on the alarm will channels, by selecting the choose an action menu on the
be displayed in the sidebar. sidebar. This will allow users to see the device details
pop-out as well as gain access to historical trend data and 10
other available information regarding the selected device.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 020
User-Defined Alarms Email Notification Save and Restore Configuration Settings

i The PXG 900 supports the setting of A user has the ability to customize and The PXG provides the ability to
user-defined alarms on an individual direct email to notifications to up to save the PXG device and network
device and channel basis. This feature 10 users in their organization. Select configuration settings to an XML
ii is set for enabled channels via the from alarm notifications, trend log, file format. It can be used to restore
Setting button in the header under the alarm log, and daily emails. This settings to any PXG to facilitate
alarms setting tab. An example of a function provides yet one more way configuration of similar systems.
1 user-defined alarm would be a low to effectively and proactively manage
and high limit on the phase A current your monitored system.
channel for a device. The alarm limit
2 values and the alarm names can be
chosen by the user.
3
DHCP
Com2 Com1 INCOM Bridge NTP
4 Power Status Web
5
USB Connection for Local
6 24 Vcd
Input Power
Configuration Capability
7 RJ-485 Connections RJ-45 Connections with Link

Speed and Activity Indicators
Figure 2.2-2. Power Xpert Gateway 900

8
5.625 (142.875)
9
10 2 (50.8)
1.625 (41.275)
11
12 6 (152.4)
4.5 (114.3)
Front View
13 Side View
Figure 2.2-3. Power Xpert Gateway 900 with Standard Panel Mounting
14
15
2.56 (65)
16 5.04 (128)
Top View
Remove and then reattach these
17 screws to rotate for vertical mounting
18
2.023 1.97
(51.402) (50)
19
20 6 (152.4) 0.556
(14.12)
Front View Side View
21
Figure 2.2-4. Power Xpert Gateway 900 with DIN Rail Mounting (Brackets Included)

Sheet 02 021
Power Xpert Gateway Enclosed Version PXG Daisy Chain Application

Enclosed Version Cost-effective solution to add in Bridge Mode i
communications to new or existing The PXG allows for units to be con-
equipment that has no physical nected together through two RJ-45
space to install the PXG in the 10/100/1000 connectors on the front of ii
equipment structure the PXG series of products. Default is
NEMA 12 enclosure rating bridged mode for the daisy chain
application. This arrangement is a 1
Prewired with a PSG60N24RP power
supply and terminal blocks for ease pass-through of Ethernet communica-
tions, allowing a single network
of wiring of incoming power and
drop to connect up to five Ethernet
2
connected devices
communicating devices. The maxi-
mum length of a copper cable run
should not exceed 295 ft (90 m) total.
3
Note: In this configuration, if any of the
PXG units go offline or lose power, the 4
communication to the downstream Ethernet
devices will lose connection to the LAN.
5
10
11
12
13
Figure 2.2-5. Power Xpert Gateway Enclosure Dimensions
14
Ethernet LAN
15
LAN Connection
16
Cat-5 Patch Cables 17
295 ft (90 m) 18
PXM2000
19
Figure 2.2-6. PXG Daisy Chain Application
20
21

Sheet 02 022
Technical Specifications Weight

i Table 2.2-2. PXG Part Numbers 1.7 pounds
Description Eaton Eaton Supported Devices and Performance
ii Style Number Catalog Number
PXG performance will vary depending upon the number and
Power Xpert Gateway 900 66D2325G01 PXG900 type of connected devices. This is driven by the following:
Power supply24 Vdc PSG60N24RP-A1 PSG60N24RP
1 Enclosed Power Xpert Gateway PXG900-2A
Each supported device has a distinct number of channels
to report back to the PXG, ranging from as few as 4 to
over 900
2 Memory The channels are prioritized
Flash: 2 GB Device protocol, Modbus or INCOM
RAM: 1 GB Baud rate setting
3
Communication Ports For this reason, a PXG modeling tool has been developed
Network ports: Two 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 connectors to assist in understanding the expected performance for a
4 Serial ports given application since all systems are unique. This tool
Two RS-485 ports for connection to Modbus RTU can be found at www.eaton.com/pxg. For a high level perfor-
devices mance comparison, see the table below for three examples.
5
One dedicated RS-485 port for INCOM devices
Configuration port: One USB port How long does it take For this combination of devices
6 (all times in seconds)
Network Protocols Supported 64 INCOM / 15 INCOM / 5
Modbus TCP/IP: Supports data access from 32 Modbus 15 Modbus INCOM
7 Modbus TCP clients Between value change in the UI 21.9 3.7 1.4
Web server: Supports data access from Web browsers (INCOM 9600)Priority 1
(HTTP and HTTPS) Between value change in the UI 3.5 1.6
8 DHCP: Supports automatic IP address assignments, (Modbus 57600)Priority 1
if enabled Between value change in the UI 44.3 7.4 2.6
(INCOM 9600)Priority 2
9 NTP: Supports time synchronization via a network time
Between value change in the UI 7.0 3.1
server for PXG synchronization
(Modbus 57600)Priority 2
SMTP: Supports mail server for email notification Modbus server pass-through 0.061 0.059
10 BACnet/IP: Supports data access from BACnet clients response time (57600)
(local connection)
Serial Protocols Supported For the UI to show an alarm 17.0 3.0 3.0
11 INCOM (INCOM device)
Modbus RTU To boot up (all devices 399.0 85.0 51.0
communicating)
12 Web Browsers Recommended
Internet Explorer versions 10 and 11 Regulatory and Standards Compliance
Google Chrome UL 508, Standard for Programmable Controller Equipment
13 FCC, Class A, Part 15, Subpart B, Sections 15.107b
Power Input
and 15.109b
Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.3 A minimum
14 Input voltage range: 10% nominal
EN55022:2010/A1:2011 Class A and EN55024:2010
Information Technology Equipment
Power Consumption EN 61326-1:2006 and EN 61326-2-2:2006 Electromagnetic
15 8 W maximum Compatibility (EMC) in Industrial Environments
Note: Features and specifications listed in this document are subject
Operating Temperature
16 +32 to +140 F (0 to +60 C)
to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities
of the product with all options installed. Although every attempt
has been made to ensure the accuracy of information contained
Ambient Storage Temperature within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness,
17 40 to +185 F (40 to +85 C) correctness, or accuracy and assumes no responsibility for any
errors or omissions. Features and functionality may vary depending
Relative Humidity on selected options.
18 5 to 95% noncondensing at 122 F (50 C)
Size (H x D x L) in Inches
19 2.00 x 4.50 x 6.00
20
21

Sheet 02 023
Power Xpert Dashboard
Power Xpert Dashboard i

General Description
The Power Xpert Dashboard allows users to monitor ii
and control Eaton electronic devices installed in an Eaton
Magnum DS low voltage or VacClad medium voltage
switchgear assemblies and transformers as part of a unit 1
substation. These devices include Eaton E-Series protective
relays, Digitrip 1150 and 520MC trip units, Power Xpert
meters, and Eaton diagnostic devices. The Power Xpert 2
Dashboard can be mounted on the switchgear, on the wall in
an enclosure, or in a kiosk. The wallmount enclosure or kiosk
can be placed near the switchgear but outside the arc flash 3
boundary to provide safe access to control and monitoring
of the equipment.
4
It provides features such as: Timeline View
Open/close circuit breakers through Control Mode
Enable Arcflash Reduction Maintenance Mode and 5
see status
Monitor or initiate a transfer scheme in a Main/Tie/Main
switchgear and adjust timer settings and sequence details 6
Ability to configure/monitor alarms for various devices
Rich interface to monitor parameters of all devices and 7
study the trends of those parameters
Oneline View 10
11
12
Elevation View
13
14
15
16
Docs
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 024
One-Line View Elevation View

i The one-line view shows the lineup of all the configured Elevation view shows the front view of the switchgear
devices with their top 5 parameters in the widget. It lineup with the status of breakers and buses
ii graphically represents the power flow between the
configured devices
Any alarm or fault causes the corresponding compartment
to be highlighted
6 Clicking on a widget provides the top 16 parameters

of the device
The navigator shows the visible portion of the lineup.
Clicking on the More button in the top parameters
7 sidebar opens the Device Details page
Clicking on a widget provides the top 16 parameters
of the device
The Device Details page allows the user to customize
8 top parameters, alarms, trends, etc. Control Feature
Control Mode allows an authorized user to open/close
breakers remotely. Control Mode can be entered from
9 the one-line or elevation view
Trip units and protective relays may be placed in the
10 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance Mode and this is
indicated by blue dashed bus lines
11
12
13
14 The navigator at the bottom can be used to move

between various sections of the lineup
15 The timeline is highlighted if any alarm is active
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 025
Timeline Transfer
Clicking on an alarm opens the sidebar as follows. The Power Xpert Dashboard allows the user to monitor
i
The alarm can be acknowledged by clicking the tab the transfer state and see a visual indication of the
transfer process ii
Various standard transfer schemes are supported
using a switchgear installed programmable controller
The user can set the transfer to be automatic or manual. 1
The type of transition can be configured as Open/Closed
Timing for various parameters can also be adjusted
through the dashboard interface 2
5
Clicking on View Alarm Details opens the Alarm Details
page. This page lists the alarm information such as time
6
of occurrence, value at occurrence, and all the instances
of the same alarm 7
8
Docs
Docs from the menu lists the support documents provided 9
with the switchgear. One can navigate between various
documents, including mechanical drawings, electrical
schematics, component instruction books, and spare 10
parts information using the right arrow at the bottom
On entering the Edit Mode, more documents can be added
under switchgear or manual
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 026
Device Configuration Using Settings Tab Import a configuration that is already provided or save
Add compartments and devices to switchgear
your custom configuration i
Under Settings>General, select the Application Mode
using Settings tab
(MVA/LVA)
Select the source arrangement and breaker arrangement
ii
5
In Edit Mode, click on a compartment (under Devices) 6
to add a unit Provision for transfer schemes settings
Under Add Devices, add the device that is to be monitored Eaton Logic Controller settings provided for
with its IP address source transfer 7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 027
The Notification tab allows the user to set up a mailing System Requirements
functionality. Any alarms, warnings, or alerts that are i
generated will be mailed to the configured mail ID Compatible Devices
Eaton low and medium voltage switchgear with:
Eaton Power Xpert meters
ii
Eaton Magnum DS circuit breakers with Digitrip 520MC
or Digitrip 1150 trip units (Digitrip 1150 trip units required 1
for remote breaker and Arcflash Reduction Maintenance
Mode control)
Eaton E-Series protective relays 2
Eaton TC-50/TC-100 transformer temperature controllers
Eaton InsulGard medium voltage insulation monitor
Eaton Logic Controller (ELC)
3
Software Specifications
Server side:
4
Visual Designer software version 7.1, Service Pack 3,
Patch 3 5
SQL Server 2008
Monitor the configured devices on the network Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010
(red: healthy, green: failed) 6
The number of passed and failed packets is recorded
Client side:
Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) 9, 10, or 11
Error message displayed for devices with failed
communication
7
Hardware Specifications
Export the network information for later reference HMI module (XP503 WXGA, 1366 x 768 pixel resolution)
8
10
11
12
13
The Security tab allows users to have a secured login 14
A user can set a password for their account
Complex password and password expiry feature
A user with admin rights can add/remove users and 15
change the passwords of all users
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 028
Power Xpert Insight
i Power Xpert Insight

General Description
ii Eatons Power Xpert Insight is a power and energy
monitoring system that is designed to be easy to install,
easy to update and easy to use. It provides you with the
1 energy and power information you need to:
Keep the lights on with real-time, actionable alarms
2 across desktop and mobile
Save money and energy with easy to use and share
energy reports
3 Stay up to speed on your most critical devices with
adjustable dashboards
Drill into problems quickly with powerful graphics and One-Lines
4 detailed data
Understand current issues and plan for future investments
5 using trends and visualizations
9
Favorites
10
Energy
11
12
13
14
15
16 Alarms
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 029
Power Xpert Insight
Energy Alarms
View energy usage and demand View color-coded alarms on one page (Black = Normal,
i
Select the desired devices and time range, 24 hours to a Red = Alarm, Orange = Loss of Communication)
custom range Sort alarms by Time, Device or Priority for a specified time ii
Choose the type of graph that best suits; line or stacked range, view by Alarm Status
bar chart Acknowledge Alarms by individual device or group
Move the cursor over the graph to view detailed data together 1
Export data to a CSV-format file Open the Alarm Pop Out to view additional data and
add notes
Expand to the Trend Viewer for additional information
Export alarm history to a CSV-format file
2
Energy usage is automatically added up for the devices
shown in the table
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 030
Power Xpert Insight
Capacity Modbus Protocol Adapter

i Benchmark capacity usage in real-time to determine The Protocol Adapter provides a Modbus server that regularly
tripping points and avoid downtime updates values for a specific set of Power Xpert Insight
ii Custom trigger thresholds for cautionary and critical channels and makes these available as Modbus registers.
You can specify the Power Xpert Insight channels you want
levels support all type of electrical environments and
changing needs and set the update characteristics of the Modbus server.
1 Simulate and trend with line graphics load additions prior
to device installation to avoid tripping and downtime One-Lines
Forecast, budget and plan capacity requirements Build an electrical one-line representation of the system
2 Proactively predict overall electrical system performance with device widgets and the symbols library
by modeling capabilities Drag-and-drop devices, lines, symbols where needed, add
text boxes. Easily updated when devices are removed or
3 added to service
The top 4 device channels are automatically populated on
4 the device widgets and alarm color-coding carries through
on the one-lines
Upload a unique background image
5 Use the Device Tree to set up the one-line structure
8
Favorites Dashboard
9 Each user can create a unique dashboard to focus on the
devices or systems that they are interested in
Devices are displayed by device type (Main, Meter,
10 Protection) and populate the top 4 channels for that device
Alarm color-coding is automatically propagated
across pages
11 A quick Trend Graph and Energy Graph are also displayed
for a selected device and channel over a time range up
to 24 hours
12 Quickly add or remove devices from the Favorites
dashboard
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 031
Power Xpert Insight
Event Notification
Power Xpert Notify will send out emails to selected
i
recipients when alarms occur. The user can select the
devices, recipients and frequency of notifications. ii
Offline Configuration
Power Xpert Insight provides the ability to completely 1
configure a system in advance. The more you know about
the final system, the more complete the offline configuration
process will be. 2
Configure Power Xpert Insight in advance using an Excel
spreadsheet (template available at Eaton.com/pxi) 3
Upload the spreadsheet to an offline Power Xpert
Insight system
Set up one-line graphics in the offline Power Xpert 4
Insight system
Extract that entire system configuration
5
Upload the configuration into the target system when ready
and connect when the devices are online.
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 032
Power Xpert Insight
System Architecture Diagram

i Power Xpert Insight (PXI) seamlessly communicates over
Ethernet with other Power Xpert-enabled products and
ii third-party products via the Power Xpert bridge and Power
Xpert Gateways.
Power Xpert Insight can be accessed via personal computer
1 or Windows Surface Pro tablet computer. It supports
multiple Web browsers including Windows Internet
Explorer, Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox.
2
For a complete list of supported devices, see the Hardware
Compatibility List at Eaton.com/pxi.
3
4 Ethernet
5
PXG
Meters
Relays
6 PXGX Meters Trip Units
Trip Units Drives
7 UPS, PDUs ModBus
INCOM
9 Ethernet
10 MOXA SNMP
Serial
11 Over 600 facility-centric drivers

PXI
Contact Eaton's Power Systems
Automation group for delivery options
PXb
12 Server
UPS
13 ePDU
14
15
Computer
Windows Surface Pro

16
Figure 2.2-7. System Architecture Diagram
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 033
Power Xpert Insight
System Requirements Table 2.2-6. Power Xpert Software General Features

Table 2.2-3. Hardware Requirements Features i
Power Xpert Insight requires a server-class machine with the General
following minimum hardware specifications: Web browser user interface
Web-based monitoring capabilities ii
Hardware Specification Downloadable software version updates
Event Notification
Processor Quad Core
Event notification via e-mail notification 1
Memory 16 GB Event Notification via pagers, text message or third-party interfaces
Hard disk drive 100 GB5 years estimated data storage Alarm state management
Video resolution 1920 x 1080
Event indicator displayed without Web page active 2
Alarm/event searching and filtering
Waveform attached to applicable power event
Table 2.2-4. Software Requirements Web browser based waveform viewing
Alarm capabilities based on device driven events
3
Description Specification
Supported Operating Systems Analysis and Trending
Server Windows Server 2008 R2, Standard and Enterprise, SP1 Graphic trend viewer 4
Chart or data option selection
Windows Server 2012 Standard and Datacenter Multiple trends display
Client Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate or Enterprise, x64, SP1
Windows 8 Professional/Enterprise X86 and X64
Multiple axis support
View multiple variables (i.e., Ia, Ib, Ic, Vab, Vbc, etc.) for a single waveform
5
Standard COMTRADE file format support
Supported SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard
Customizable trend viewer look and feel
versions of
Microsoft
(and Standard for Small Business) SP2
Fixed or custom time frames 6
SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Trend analysis capabilities
SQL Server
SQL Server 2012 Express with Advanced Services, Data export
Standard, Enterprise, Enterprise Core and
Business Intelligence
Custom Graphics and Layouts 7
Custom graphics development via Web browser
If you do not have one of the above versions installed, Power Xpert Insight Four user view example templates included as standard
will install SQL Server 2012 Express with Advanced Services. iFrame capability 8
Supported Web Browsers Browser portal widget support
Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) 9, 10 or 11 Streaming media support
Google Chrome
Graphic object library included as standard
ISO standard electrical picture objects available
9
Firefox Graphic files import capability
Graphic object animation capability
Other browsers (such as Opera and Safari) that support Silverlight may
also work, but are not officially supported by Eaton. Gauge object library support
10
External Web Links support
Table 2.2-5. Ordering Information Alarm bubble-up support through several page layers
Trend object support 11
Description Catalog Number UPS Shutdown
Power Xpert Insight File saving during shutdown
PXI for up to 10 device connections PXI-A Automatic, orderly and sequential shutdown 12
Parallel redundant UPS shutdown capability
PXI for up to 25 device connections PXI-B
Security and Administration
PXI for up to 50 device connections PXI-C
PXI for up to 100 device connections PXI-D
Windows authentication security 13
Two tier secure system access support
PXI for up to 200 device connections PXI-E SSL
Secure Web browser access (support for HTTPS)
Power Xpert Insight Upgrades
Time Synchronization
14
PXI 10 to 25 upgrade PXI-A2B
Time synchronization support for connected devices with 1 millisecond
PXI 10 to 50 upgrade PXI-A2C
PXI 10 to 100 upgrade PXI-A2D
time resolution
Export and Integration
15
PXI 10 to 200 upgrade PXI-A2E Extended Excel spreadsheet support
PXI 25 to 50 upgrade PXI-B2C SQL database query support
Logs
16
PXI 25 to 100 upgrade PXI-B2D
System log
PXI 25 to 200 upgrade PXI-B2E
PXI 50 to 100 upgrade PXI-C2D
Error log
17
Service
PXI 50 to 200 upgrade PXI-C2E Eaton help desk services (1-877-ETN-CARE)
PXI 100 to 200 upgrade PXI-D2E Turnkey startup service 18
Service Packs System Backup
Power Xpert 1-day startup Service Pack PX-1S Power Xpert Software system backup
Power Xpert 2-day startup Service Pack PX-2S Documentation and Training Videos 19
System Administrators Guide
Power Xpert 5-day startup Service Pack PX-5S
Power Xpert Software Users Guide
Layout Manager Guide 20
Quick Start Guide
Power Xpert Software introduction and training video
Power Xpert Reporting introduction and training video
21

Sheet 02 034
Foreseer Services
i Foreseer Services Foreseer Services Categories Data Gathering, 24/7

Foreseer Services has three A proactive algorithm gathers data
Foreseer Software and Engineering 24/7, enabling you to sample data
general categories:
Services (Foreseer Services) provide points from thousands of devices,
ii vendor independent, power and Foreseer Software Services every second.
energy infrastructure integration Foreseer Project Management
solutions that help companies reduce User-Defined Formulas
Services
1 energy consumption and unplanned Information from multiple sources
Foreseer Engineering Services
downtime due to the failure of critical and systems can be inserted into user
power, environmental, safety or defined formulas, providing knowl-
2 security systems. Foreseer Software Services edge for informed decision making.
Turnkey software and connectivity Unique Features Extensive Device Driver Library
3 solutions are coupled with state-of-
Completely Scalable Solution Foreseer Software Services enables
the-art project management, systems the full-scale integration of third-party
design, third-party device integration, Several classes, capable of handing up products. A device library of over
4 testing and custom application devel- to 512,000 data streams (channels) 600 drivers has been developed. For a
opment to develop a comprehensive while available to start with a low point full list of compatible devices, see the
monitoring solution to meet your of entry. Foreseer services/hardware compati-
5 custom needs.
Foreseer A-Class server software bility list at www.eaton.com/foreseer.
Foreseer Services is delivered in four (up to 5,000 channels) Trend Analysis
6 categories, each offering a multitude Foreseer C-Class server software
of unique value-add services that High performance analysis and
(up to 15,000 channels) forecasting tools assess equipment
you can discuss with your Eaton Foreseer M-Class server software
sales professional. performance specifications including
7 (up to 25,000 channels) cause analysis, impact analysis,
Design services Foreseer R-Class server software capacity planning, preventive mainte-
Installation services (up to 100,000 channels) nance assessments and trending.
8 Foreseer S-Class server software
Commissioning services Custom User Interfaces
Follow-up services (up to 256,000 channels)
Mimic graphics, dynamic one-line
9 Hardware services Foreseer X-Class server software views, dashboards, 3D renderings
(up to 512,000 channels) and virtually any custom view to help
Software services
Redundant, Worldwide Coverage operators manage their facility.
10 Foreseer services is fully distributable
The inclusion of one or more extra
to allow different monitoring capabili- Web Browser AccessUnlimited Seats
ties to be deployed at different sites Foreseer servers provides the highest Web browser access enables easy
11 allowing you to purchase only what is possible levels of system reliability. In system access. Multiple users can
needed. Many competitive systems the unlikely event that one Foreseer access Foreseer software without the
offer a one-size-fits all type approach server fails then the remaining servers need for additional client seat licenses.
12 where you end up paying for more can carry the load of the power
capacity than is needed. With Foreseer monitoring system. Alarm Notifications
Services, you pay only for what you With the Manager of Managers (MOM) For each channel being monitored, you
13 need, when you need it. software option, data from one server can assign up to four alarm thresh-
can be monitored alongside data oldsfrom routine maintenance alerts
from other servers, enabling you to to system failureplus handling
14 aggregate multiple Foreseer sites into instructions and escalation procedures
a single system. for each.
15 Foreseer Project Management Services

Each Foreseer integration project can
be customized. See Figure 2.2-8 for an
16 overview of project flow.
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 2.2-8. Foreseer Project Management Services

Sheet 02 035
Foreseer Services
Foreseer Engineering Services Calculates DCiE and PUE

Use Foreseer Software Services Power Xpert Reporting i
Design Services
option to automatically calculate Data Center Infrastructure
After extensive assessment of your requirements and the Efficiency (DCiE) and Power Usage Effectiveness (PUE).
existing device and facility infrastructure, the Foreseer These industry-standard efficiency metrics help IT managers ii
design services team configures your system, complete with to understand and to track how efficiently their data center is
a bill of materials and recommendations unique to your running and how effective improvement efforts have been.
needs. Specification development, drawings and detailed 1
documentation for your project is part of this step. Third- Energy Cost Allocation
party device support and communication interface planning
is critical, including driver development and enhancement, if Fair Share Utility Cost Distribution 2
necessary. User interfaces are designed with default views Foreseer Software provides energy usage by individual
to meet your specifications. circuit so each device can be a part of the energy manage-
ment strategy. It even allocates electrical cost to individual 3
Installation Services and branch circuits, which can then be assigned to individual
Installation services team members are with you from proj- users of a department or device.
ect initiation to handing over the Foreseer system when 4
work is complete. Tasks include: Power Density
Pinpoint Hot Spots in Your Data Center

Startup needs, testing and customization
Power density is a critical measurement as racks proliferate
5
Drawings and custom graphic layout development
and expand from TCP/IP networks and servers and other
Customized device gauge graphics and status indicators
elements of the infrastructure are placed into smaller areas. 6
Third-party software integration Foreseer Software manages power density by device, for a
Custom software and application development single rack, floor or an entire building, allowing identification
Setup and configuration of reporting packages and basic of overloaded racks and incorrect power drains due to
device failure.
7
Foreseer training
Commissioning Services Growth Planning
8
Commissioning services consist of overall and tiered systems
testing and full point-to-point system commissioning options.
Post Project Services 9
Once your system is successfully deployed, the Foreseer
Service team is available to provide ongoing services such 10
as system expansion, upgrades, troubleshooting and
support, and advanced Foreseer training. Customized
support contracts are available to tailor toward customer 11
needs and requirements.
Custom Foreseer Services Applications 12

Management Dashboards
Standard with all new deployments, Foreseers management 13
dashboards provide high-level facility information for one-
stop overview management. Utilizing Foreseers powerful
derived equations, measurables like utility power availability, Power Capacity View 14
emergency power availability, facility efficiency, environmental
impact, facility environment, facility cooling, outside weather The Power Capacity View provides an at-a-glance simple
conditions, security system(s) status, fire system(s) status, analysis of the data centers electrical capacity. Normal,
cautionary and alarm events are triggered automatically,
15
monitoring system status, and others are available to provide
quick glance management of a facility. both online and remotely once a threshold has been
reached. Mapping the data centers capacity is critical for 16
power, cooling and redundancy planning. With Foreseer
Software projection graphing capability, data center manag-
ers can easily predict when they are going to hit a capacity 17
threshold going into the future and can prepare accordingly.
Plan with the Electrical Capacity Planning Tool
Demand on devices grows as organizations expand.
18
While average demand may not be a concern, peak
demand is. Foreseer software tracks the kW and kVA over
time, immediately informs of peak levels, and projects future
19
demands based on past usage. Assisting in planning for
electrical upgrades and/or changes to the power system to 20
support changing load patterns.
Eaton Powerware UPS-Primary View

21

Sheet 02 036
Foreseer Services
Load Balancing
i
Prevent Unbalanced Loads
Improper load balancing contributes to harmonic distortion. re-distribute the load. Foreseer software visually illustrates
ii Foreseer software tracks load levels by phase, giving instant the load balance of a device or system in real-time, while
notification when extreme imbalances begin to occur, and showing what the balanced model should be. You see the
providing the knowledge to take the necessary steps to current state, the worst-case scenario and the proper load.
1
10
11
12
13 Figure 2.2-9. Data Center/Co-Location DeviceThe typical Data Center/Co-Location device mixture includes a large variety of power distribution,
cooling, environmental monitoring, lighting, safety and security, backup and emergency power systems that have been purchased over a long
period of time. Foreseer Services integrates all of these systems into a simple, single software monitoring package. Support for metering and
energy measurement, including greenhouse gas monitoring, are requirements that need to be taken into consideration as well as, for example,
14 Building Management System integration.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 037
Foreseer Services
A/C Control Client Software Foreseer Services Available Options

i
Power Xpert Reporting
Eatons Power Xpert Reporting works in conjunction with
Foreseer Software allowing a view past individual measure- ii
ments, trend graphs and events. It consolidates complex data
from a multitude of devices from around the globe into easy-
to-understand graphical reports. It provides a standard set of 1
reports for the most common report requests. Simply choose
from 10 ready-to-go report templates. Power Xpert Reporting
can be set to run the report automatically and send you new, 2
updated reports via e-mail at predefined intervals.
Manager of Managers (MOM) 3
Provides a powerful means to integrate data from multiple
locations where each location is running its own Foreseer
software server. This unique feature provides a scalable 4
system where the total number of integrated points on the
centralized MOM server can be as large as 256,000 points.
AC Control-Zone Assignment
5
Sequence of Events Recorder
Take Control of Your Environment Enables breaker status monitoring capability at a time
The Foreseer software A/C interface offers comprehensive stamping resolution of 1 millisecond. During a critical 6
monitoring and optional lead/lag control for Air Flow, Data or catastrophic event, sequence of event information is
Aire and Liebert System 3 air conditioning units. Lead/lag captured by the recorder for retrospective analysis and
control and scheduling is viewable via a Web-browser and is root cause issue mitigation. 7
controllable with the proper user authority.
Secure Web Server (https)
Maintenance Scheduler Provides an encrypted means to protect all data that is 8
viewed via a standard Web browser on the Internet or
intranet. Using the OpenSSL package from the Internet,
Foreseer software is able to provide 128 bit encryption 9
between the Foreseer Software and the Web browser. Both
registered certificates from a third-party provider or self-
signed certificates are allowed to be used with this option. 10
Foreseer Gateway
Most facilities utilize multiple systems to help manage 11
a facility including power monitoring systems, building
management or automation systems, data center infra-
structure management systems, control systems, etc. 12
Successful and efficient management of a facility may
depend on interaction of some of these systems. Foreseers
gateway interface makes this interaction with other systems 13
simple and reliable, utilizing data availability through open
protocols such as Modbus, SNMP, BACnet and OPC. Every
data channel in the Foreseer server can be made available 14
Maintenance Scheduler to another system at intervals up to once per second for
processing or analysis.
Eliminate the Hassles 15
The Foreseer software maintenance scheduler offers the Redundancy
ability to preset scheduled (weekly or periodic) maintenance Safeguards valuable information. The inclusion of one or
windows within the system to disarm selected devices more extra Foreseer software servers provides the highest 16
on which maintenance will be performed. Disarming the levels of system reliability. In the event that one Foreseer
devices allows continued monitoring and archiving software server fails, the remaining servers carry the load
during the maintenance period while disabling alarms of the power monitoring system. 17
and preventing unnecessary notification of personnel.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 038
Foreseer Services
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE) Universal Input Enclosure To further expand the reach of
i Designed specifically for geographically (UIE2, UIE2+) Foreseer Services, several hardware
or physically removed sites where options are offered.
local IT expertise may not exist. Provides network connectivity for
ii The data acquisition engine (see analog and contact input information The Foreseer data acquisition engine is
along with device server capability. designed specifically for geographically
Page 2.2-25 for details) automatically or physically removed Foreseer class
collects and sends data from critical Each enclosure contains from one to
1 infrastructure devices, and communi- five input modules with pluggable sites where local IT expertise may
connectors used for power and not exist.
cates that data back to the Foreseer
software server. Using local processing input wiring, enabling cost-efficient The Foreseer data acquisition
2 and the shared bandwidth of an IP monitoring of equipment in small, terminal easily integrates monitored
network, the DAE reduces the cost remote facilities. equipment and sensors located in
required to transmit data to the central small, networked remote sites.
3 server. The DAE also continues to
The universal input enclosure provides
network connectivity for analog and The Foreseer universal input enclosure
operate independently and generate contact input information along with
alarms even if the connection to is designed for small remote sites
4 the central server is unavailable,
the option for concentration of a containing equipment with several
variety of monitored points via connectivity types.
increasing the overall availability of several communication means at
the management system.
5 a single point. Each UIE2 contains up Designed for small remote sites
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT) to five input modules with pluggable containing equipment with several
connectors used for power and connectivity types. The universal input
Easily integrates monitored
6 equipment and sensors located in
input wiring, enabling cost-efficient enclosure provides modular termina-
monitoring of equipment in small, tions for analog contacts, such as flow
small, networked remote sites. The remote facilities. Serial-to-Ethernet metering and temperature/humidity
DAT (see Page 2.2-25 for details)
7 employs standard Modbus communi-
conversion hardware and network sensors, and digital contacts, such as
switch may be added to give a single summary alarms and door open/close
cations to relay information to either point of monitoring connection for contacts, based on quantity and
a Foreseer software server or a data
8 acquisition engine over a TCP/IP
all analog/digital contacts, serial- type for flexible integration into the
based devices and Ethernet-based Foreseer monitoring system. In situa-
network. Data is packaged in devices, making the UIE2 an tions where space is at a premium, the
sequential Modbus registers to
9 enable optimum scan times without
extremely flexible building block UIE2+ can be utilized to concentrate
of a monitoring infrastructure. serial communicating wiring and
impacting network bandwidth. Ethernet communication wiring and
10 provide a single Ethernet connection
out to the Foreseer system. Housed
inside a NEMA 12 enclosure with all
11 modules mounted and internal power
connected, the UIE2 is a very contrac-
tor-friendly communication center of
12 the Foreseer monitoring architecture.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 039
Foreseer Services
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE) Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT)

i
ii
Data Acquisition Terminal (DAT)
Data Acquisition Engine (DAE) Easily integrates monitored 1

equipment and sensors located in
Designed specifically for geographi- small, networked remote sites. The
cally or physically removed sites DAT employs standard Modbus 2
where local IT expertise may not exist. communications to relay information
The data acquisition engine automati- to either a Foreseer server or a data
cally collects and sends data from acquisition engine over a TCP/IP 3
critical infrastructure devices, such as network. Data is packaged in
UPS, generator and power distribution sequential Modbus registers to
units, and communicates that data, as enable optimum scan times without 4
well as status and alarms, back to the impacting network bandwidth.
centrally located Foreseer server.
Using local processing and using the DAT Technical Specifications 5
shared bandwidth of an IP network,
the DAE reduces the cost required to External power input: 100/240 Vac,
transmit data to the central server. 47/63 Hz,1 A (0.5 A at 240) optional 6
The DAE can also continues to operate 48 Vdc
independently and generate alarms Ethernet: 10Base-T, status and
even if the connection to the central activity LEDs 7
server is unavailable, increasing Communications: Modbus RTU
the overall availability of the via UDP using TCP/IP Port 7010
management system. or Modbus TCP 8
Dimensions in inches (H x W x D):
DAE Technical Specifications 1.75 x 19.00 x 4.63
External power input: 115/230 Vac in, Weight: 3 lbs
9
5 Vdc 8 A out, optional48 Vdc Environment: 4 to 185 F
Ethernet: dual 10/100Base-T
Ethernet ports
(20 to 85 C), 0% to 90% 10
noncondensing RH
Communications ports: four RS-232/ Discrete inputs: 16 channels
422/485 and four USB ports configure as dry contact 11
Dimensions in inches (H x W x D): Relay outputs: 16 channels, SPDT
3.50 x 17.00 x 11.00, 19.00-inch rack- configuration, contacts rated at
mount with removable flanges 500 mA, 125 Vac 12
Environment: 32 to 104 F Analog inputs: eight channels of
(0 to 40 C), 0% to 90% 12-bit A/D up to 16 digital inputs
noncondensing RH 13
Monitoring: 3072 channels,
maximum of 1536 analog
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 040
Power Xpert Reporting Software
Power Xpert Reporting Software Greenhouse Gas Report: Captures Capacity Summary Report: The
i the six offensive greenhouse gasses: summary of top- and bottom-loaded
carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide, circuits, as well as loading details
nitrogen oxide, mercury, methane for each circuit according to user-
ii Power Xpert Reporting
and nitrous oxide broken down by defined date/time range and facility
selected locations within a facility hierarchy location
1 Foreseer Software
(one or more instances)
2
Power Xpert
Device
4CR Data Devices
Aggregators
3 Acquisition
Engine
(PowerNet,
(Meters,
Gateways,
Gateways)
Other)
4
Third-Party Devices, Non-Power Xpert Devices
Greenhouse Gas Report
5
Figure 2.2-10. Power Xpert Reporting Utilities Report: Captures
Architectural Overview consumption of water, air, gas,
6 Power Xpert Reporting brings the electricity and steam (WAGES)
power system information together
to compare and contrast. Power Xpert
7 Reporting provides a standard set
of reports, including:
8 Data Center Efficiency Report:
A summary of data center
infrastructure efficiency and power
9 usage effectiveness, including such
information as temperature and
humidity, and energy consumption
10
11
12
13 Capacity Summary Report
Utilities Report
14
15
16
17 Data Center Efficiency Report
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 041
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report: Energy Summary Report: The Power Quality Report: The
Determine branch circuit loading summary of consumption (kWh) distribution and trend for amps, i
levels at a glance with color-coded and demand (kW) for a user- volts and THD according to user-
graphics indicating loading status defined date/time range and defined date/time ranges and
against capacity. Redundant sources facility hierarchy location facility hierarchy location ii
can be reviewed, as well as single
source loads
1
Energy Summary Report 10

Energy Cost Allocation Report: The
total energy bill dollar value or a cost
per kWh across a facility hierarchy
11
for a user-defined date/time range
12
13
Power Quality Report
Branch Circuit Monitoring Report
14
15
Energy Cost Allocation Report
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 02 042
Event Summary Report: Provides a Joint Commission Report: Standard

i Pareto chart of events according to Joint Commission Compliant Report
user-defined date/time ranges and supports hospital power test require-
facility hierarchy location ments. It checks events, key metrics
ii of generators and automatic transfer
switches (ATS) during generator
testing at user-defined date/time
1 ranges and facility hierarchy location
6 Event Summary Report
9 Joint Commission Report
10 Table 2.2-7. Power Xpert Reporting Software

Description Catalog
Number
11 Power Xpert Reporting
Power Xpert Reportingsingle source DB connection PXR
12 Power Xpert Reportingup to 2 source DB connections
Power Xpert Reportingup to 5 source DB connections
PXR-2DB
PXR-5DB
Power Xpert Reportingup to 10 source DB connections PXR-10DB
Power Xpert Reportingup to 25 source DB connections PXR-25DB
13 Power Xpert Reportingup to 50 source DB connections PXR-50DB
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 for Third-Party Integration
Sheet 02 043
MINTII RS-232 Converter
MINTII RS-232 Converter Technical Data and Specifications Master INCOM Network Translator II
i
Temperature: 0 to 60C The Master INCOM Network
Translator II (MINTII) converts the
Humidity: 095%
twisted shielded pair network of
Power: 120 V INCOM devices to an RS-232 signal. ii
Speed: 1200, 2400 and 9600 baud This signal can be accessed by PLCs,
(INCOM), 19.2K baud (RS-232) computer serial ports and building
Communications: INCOM, RS-232 management system serial interface 1
cards. The MINTII is also often
MINTII RS-232 Converter Product Selection applied as an interface to standard
2
line drivers and converters to allow
Table 2.3-1. MINTII RS-232 Converter communication through dedicated
General Description Description Catalog telephone lines, dial-up modems,
Number fiber-optic line drivers, radio 3
Applications
Master INCOM MINTII frequency or wireless modems.
Converts a network of power manage-
ment software devices to ASCII RS-232
Network Translator II
4
format for access through a serial port
of a PC, laptop, or Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC). 5
Displayed Parameters
Eatons MINTII provides access to 9-Pin 6
all parameters monitored over a PC Comport
system monitoring system such as
Power Xpert Software or Foreseer 7
Services
PC MINTII
Supports INCOM networks up to
8500 ft (2590 m) in distance and Twisted Pair 8
device counts up to 1000 INCOM Network
Physical Characteristics 9
Suitable for panel mounting or 9-Pin Female to
desktop use 25-Pin Male
120 Vac power cord included for Straight-Through 10
RS-232 Cable
plug-in to standard duplex receptacle
Height: 2.25 inches (57.2 mm) 11
Figure 2.3-1. MINTII Connection Diagram for Use with a PC
Width: 11.50 inches (292.1 mm)
Depth: 4.25 inches (108.0 mm)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

for Third-Party Integration April 2016
Sheet 02 044
mMINT
mMINT LED indicators for INCOM transmit Modbus RS-485 Network

i and receive communications The following simplified rules apply to
exchanges a given system consisting of a cable
LED indicators for Modbus RS-485 link between master and slave devices
ii transmit and receive communica- (see Figure 2.3-3). For more complex
tions exchanges configurations, please refer to standard
Input power for the module from Modbus RTU wiring specification
1 either 120 Vac or 24125 Vdc rules for the RS-485 network.
DIN rail mount package The recommended Modbus cable
2 0 to 60C ambient operation has twisted-pair wires (24 AWG
stranded 7x32 conductors with PVC
Module Mounting insulation) having an aluminum/
3 When mounting the mMINT, verify mylar foil shield with drain wire
that an 11 mm H x 28 mm W DIN rail The maximum system capacity
is used and that it is within an is 4000 feet of communications
4 enclosed space. cable and 247 devices on the
Modbus RTU network
mMINT Module
5 Simplified Wiring Rules Make sure that there is twisted-
General Description pair wire that is recommended
INCOM Network for Modbus RTU network use.
The mMINT (Modbus Master INCOM The following simplified rules apply Use shielded twisted-pair wire to
6 Network Translator) Module is an to a given system consisting of a connect each slave to the Modbus
Eaton accessory product that will single daisy-chained main cable link RTU network, daisy-chain style.
provide communication between a between master and slave devices The polarity of the twisted pair is
7 Modbus RTU network and an INCOM (see Figure 2.3-2). For more complex critically important
(INdustrial COMmunications) network considerations including star configu-
(see Figure 2.3-2). This module is rations, please refer to the IMPACC
8 transparent to the Modbus network. wiring specification T.D. 17513. RS-485
It communicates to a master on the Modbus
A B COM SHD
Modbus network using the Modbus
9 RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) protocol. Modbus RTU Serial Network
It communicates to slave devices on
the INCOM network using the IMPACC J3
10 (Integrated Monitoring, Protection,
and Control Communication) protocol. (Slave) Modbus
The catalog number of this product
11 is mMINT. Modbus
Master
4.25
mMINT (108.0)
12 Features (Master)
The mMINT module is a slave
INCOM Network
device on the Modbus network and
13 as such requires a master that will J1 J2
exchange register objects with the
mMINT module.
14 Handles generic pass-through com-
INCOM
Slaves
24125 Vdc Shield INCOM
mands (Modbus/INCOM/Modbus) 120 Vac
3.54
15 Capable of passing Modbus register Figure 2.3-2. mMINT in a Communications (89.9)
objects from Eatons existing prod- Network
ucts and newer PnP (Plug-n-Play) Recommended INCOM cable styles
Figure 2.3-3. mMINT Module Dimensions
16 products to a Modbus RTU master are Belden 9463 or C-H style
Data in IEEE Floating Point format 2A957805G01 Burden
and fixed point The maximum system capacity is 24 Vac/dc 3 VA
17 Modbus RTU communications 10,000 feet of communications cable
Safety Standards
data transfer rates of 1200, 9600 and 32 slave devices on the INCOM
network under the mMINT UL
or 19200 baud with one start bit,
18 eight data bits, no parity, and either Non-terminated taps, up to 200 feet in CSA
one or two stop bits length, off the main link are permitted, CE mark
Up to 32 products connected to but add to the total cable length
19 INCOM network port (246 unique Make sure that there is twisted-pair
Communications Speed
addresses maximum) wire that is recommended for INCOM: 1200, 9600 baud
IMPACC network use. Use shielded N2 Bus: 9600 baud
20 Flashing Status LED to indicate an
twisted-pair wire to connect each
active module
slave to the INCOM network,
daisy-chain style. The polarity of
21 the twisted pair is not important

April 2016 for Third-Party Integration
Sheet 02 045
PMINR
PMINT Features The following simplified rules apply

i
to a given system consisting of an
The PMINT module is a slave device INCOM master and the slave trip unit.
on the PROFIBUS network and as such
requires a PROFIBUS master that will Recommended INCOM cable styles ii
interrogate the PMINT module. are Belden 3073F or Eaton style
2A957805G01
The PMINT uses the VPC3+C Pro-
fiChip integrated circuit, providing A 100 ohm terminating resistor is 1
PROFIBUS communications support required across the INCOM carrier
with automatic recognition of data signal pair at the trip unit
transfer rates up to 12 Mbits/s The maximum system capacity 2
Flashing Status LED to indicate an is 8000 feet of communications
active module cable on an INCOM network under
the PMINT 3
LED indicators for PROFIBUS
SYSFAULT and BUSFAULT Make sure that there is twisted pair
PMINT Module LED indicators for INCOM transmit wire that is recommended for INCOM 4
and receive communications network use. Use shielded twisted pair
General Description exchanges wire to connect between the PMINT
The PMINT (PROFIBUS DPMaster Input power for the module from and the INCOM communications 5
either 100240 Vac or 24150 Vdc based trip unit. The polarity of the
INCOM network translator) module is
twisted pair is not important.
an Eaton accessory product that will DIN rail mount package
provide communications between a PROFIBUS DP RS-485 Network
6
40 to 85 C ambient operation
PROFIBUS DP network master and an Reference material pertaining to
INCOM (INdustrial COMmunications) INCOM Connection
based Digitrip Magnum 520MC INCOM communications is based on
PROFIBUS can be obtained from the 7
http://wwwPROFIBUS.com Web site.
or 1150 trip unit. The module is a master-slave protocol. The PMINT Refer to the PROFIBUS DP standard for
transparent to the PROFIBUS network is a master on the INCOM connection
master. It communicates to a master and continually obtains data from the
transmission using copper cables 8
(RS-485). A 9-pin D-SUB connector
on the PROFIBUS network using attached trip unit. Reference material interface is provided.
the PROFIBUS-DP-V0 protocol. It
communicates to a slave Magnum
pertaining to INCOM can be obtained
from http://www.eaton.com, then
9
trip unit device on INCOM. search on 17384.
IL17384Part A: INCOM 10
Communications Standard
IL17384Part C: Protective Relays
and Trip Units
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Advanced and Electronic Metering 3.0-1
April 2016
Sheet 03001
Electronic Metering
Contents
Advanced and Advanced and Electronic Metering
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-2
Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0-3
i
ii
Eaton Advanced Meters
1
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-20
Power Xpert Energy Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-31
2
IQ 250/260 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-32
IQ 130/140/150 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-35 3
Eaton Submeter Overview
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1 4
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-16
5
Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-27
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and
Metering Module (PM3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-36 6
Accessories
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series 7
and PXM 2000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-1
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-2
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3-16 8
Specifications
See Eatons Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web. 9
CSI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Section 16901 Section 26 27 13.11
10
Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.A Paragraph 2.02.A
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.B Paragraph 2.02.B 11
IQ 250/260 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.E Paragraph 2.02.E
IQ 100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.D Paragraph 2.02.D 12
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.G Paragraph 2.02.G
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.I Paragraph 2.02.I
13
Breaker Power Monitoring and
Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02.J Paragraph 2.02.J
IQ 150S/250S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02K Paragraph 2.02K 14
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . Paragraph 2.02L Paragraph 2.02L
15
16
17
NEED
NEW 18
PHOTO
19
20
Metering Products Family
21

3.0-2 Advanced and Electronic Metering
Overview April 2016
Sheet 03 002
General Description
i General Description
Eatons metering products provide
solutions needed to monitor and NEED
ii manage all aspects of an electrical NEW
distribution system. PHOTO
1 When seeking greater reliability,

increased productivity and significant
cost savings to remain competitive
2 in todays market, Eatons metering
products fit the bill. These innovative
meters and communications systems,
3 along with Power Management
software, make it possible to success-
fully take control of the electrical
4 distribution system.
Power Xpert Meters Metering Products Family

5 Power Xpert Meters are the benchmark
for intelligent Web-enabled top-quality Reduced Energy and Operating Costs
metering devices for the power chain. When we think about meters and When an Eaton meter is used with
6 Power Xpert Meters provide measure- power quality, the common thread Eaton trip units and relays incorporating
ment of the critical elements found throughout the basket of solutions is built-in metering capabilities, the
in the power chain whether that be information. Collecting, monitoring, entire electrical distribution system
7 voltage, power, current, transients, and managing data from the electrical can be cost-effectively managed.
harmonics or even time. Power distribution system can help reduce
Xpert Meters provide Web-enabled costs for those facilities prepared to Eaton is an industry leader offering
8 high definition communications define and analyze present electrical a complete integrated solution to over-
for use with the Power Xpert Software. energy usage levels and patterns. see your entire electrical distribution
All Power Xpert Meters provide a Data provided by Eaton metering system. As a global manufacturer of
9 standard communications protocol for products comprise the data for low and medium voltage electrical
easy integration into other systems. verifying utility bills for energy distribution system equipment and
management and lowering operating components, Eaton is an experienced
10 Greater Reliability costs. Deregulation in some geograph- innovator of Metering Products that
ical locations permits energy users to incorporate leading-edge technology.
Eaton metering products permit These innovations result from
select a utility provider and negotiate
11 receiving an early warning of potential
rate structures. For large users with our scientific and engineering
problems, eliminate unnecessary expertise, physical resources and
trips, isolate faults to ensure minimum heavy utility bills this may be an
incentive to verify the utility bill, the ongoing R&D programs at our
12 downtime and shed or equalize loads
identify an opportunity for savings, technology centers.
while a problem is being corrected.
negotiate a better utility rate, and apply
13 the savings directly to the bottom line.
Increased Productivity Users are also empowered to decrease
Equipment downtime resulting from energy consumption, thereby lowering
voltage or frequency variations can be peak demand charges and decreasing
14 very costly to an operation. Monitoring operating costs.
power quality with Eatons metering
products throughout the electrical
15 distribution system provides data to
identify, isolate and correct problems
quickly and efficiently.
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Overview
Sheet 03 003
Selection Chart
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm)

Device Name Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series IQ 250/260 Series i
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
ii
Section Page Number 3.1-1 3.1-20 3.1-32 1
Electrical Parameters
Volts 0.1% of RV + 0.02% FS 0.1% of RV 0.1% of RV
Amperes
Current range (% of nominal)
0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS
0.00520 A (400%)
0.1% of RV
0.1200%
0.1% of RV
0.1200%
2
Watts 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV
VARs 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV
VA 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV 3
PF-apparent 0.1% 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV
PF-displacement 0.1%
Frequency 0.01 Hz 0.03 Hz 0.03 Hz
THD-voltage 127th 40th 2345 40th 6 4
THD-current 127th 40th 2345 40th 6
Watthours 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
VAR-hours
VA-hours
0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
5
Ampere-demand 0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS 0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
Watt-demand 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
VAR-demand
VA-demand
6
Revenue accuracy 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
Individual ampere harmonics 85th 7 40th 345
Individual voltage harmonics 85th 7 40th 345 7
Interharmonics Yes hi
Minimum and/or Maximum Values
Volts L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L L-L, L-N L-L, L-N
8
Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C, N A, B, C
Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
Apparent/displacement
Hertz
Apparent
Hertz
Apparent
Hertz
9
THD Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L) Amperes/volts 2345 Amperes/volts 6
Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes
Trend analysis 2/4 h/8 i GB 256/512 2/768 345 MB j 10
Event logging 2/4 h/8 i GB 100,000 alarms/events with timestamp 128 KB k
Disturbance recording 2/4 h/8 i GB, 60 cycles per event 768 MB, up to 64 cycles per event 45
Other Features
Storage 2/4 h/8 i GB 256/512 2/768 345 MB 128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every
11
15 minutes for 30 days k
PG output relays 5 maximum Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Optional (2) Form C, 5 A or (4) Form A, 120 mA
PG analog outputs Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA Optional (4) 420 mA or (4) 01 mA 12
Discrete contact inputs 8 Optional (2) or (4) Optional (2) or (4)
Analog inputs
Synch-input kW utility Via status input Via end of interval pulse with
optional digital inputs
Via end of interval pulse with
optional digital inputs 13
Auxiliary voltage Yes
kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes Yes
Waveform display Local/computer j 14
Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 512 Yes, up to 64 4, up to 512 5
Frequency distribution display
LCD k
Display type
Display lines/character Graphic (320 x 240 pixels)
Red LED
3 lines, 4 characters
Red LED
3 lines, 4 characters 15
Display character height 5.5 mm H x 4 mm W 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H
Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
k Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP,
HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP,
Network: Modbus TCP via
Power Xpert Gateway
16
45 Waveform FTP
Setup configuration Via Web browser/display Via Web browser/display Via configuration software/display
Dimensions inches (mm) Meter: 8.82 (224.0) H x 8.22 (208.8) W x 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 17
6.72 (170.7) D 4.97 (126.2) D 4.97 (126.2) D
Display: 9.02 (229.1) H x 7.80 (198.1) W x (see Page 3.1-26) (see Page 3.1-34)
2.49 (63.2) D
Operating temperature range 20 to 60C display unit
20 to 70C meter base unit m
20 to 70C 20 to 70C 18
Reference literature TD02601007E TD02601017E TD02601016E
1 Under typical operating conditions. h PXM 6000 only. Legend: PG = Programmable
2 PXM 2260 only. i PXM 8000 only. FS = Full scale 19
3 j At computer only. RV = Read value
PXM 2270 only.
4 PXM 2280 only. k Optional. Auxiliary Voltage
5 PXM 2290 only.
l The auxiliary voltage option adds three (Optional) = Provides three additional 20
6 IQ 260 only. additional voltage input channels to voltage inputs to the
7 Power Xpert Meters. meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Individual values reported to 85th harmonic;
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter
anti-alias filtering prevents higher frequencies
m Using <10 VA meter sourced 24 V power.
6000/8000 supported.
21
from distorting readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).

Overview April 2016
Sheet 03 004
Selection Chart
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

i Device Name IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 35M IQ 150S/250S Series
Accessories
See Page 3.1-18
ii
1
Section Page Number 3.1-35 3.2-1 3.2-11
2 Electrical Parameters
Volts 0.25% of RV 0.4% +0.015% per C deviation from 25C 0.1% of RV
Amperes 0.25% of RV 0.4% (5100%), 0.8%(15%) +0.015% per C from 25C 0.1% of RV
Current range (% of nominal) 0.1200% 1120% 0.1200%
3 Watts 0.5% of RV 1 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 0.2% of RV
VARs 0.5% of RV 1 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 0.2% of RV
VA 0.5% of RV 1 Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs 0.2% of RV
0.5% of RV 1
4 PF-apparent
PF-displacement
Calculated: watts/VAs

0.2% of RV

Frequency 0.03 Hz 1 0.02 Hz 0.03 Hz
THD-voltage
5 THD-current
Watthours


0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S

VAR-hours 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
VA-hours 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
6 Ampere-demand 0.25% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 1 0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
Watt-demand 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 1 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
VAR-demand 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 1 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
VA-demand 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 1 Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs 0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
7 Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S ANSI C12.20 (0.2%)
Individual ampere harmonics
Individual voltage harmonics
8 Interharmonics
Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N
9 Current
Power
A, B, C
Watt, VAR, VA 1

A, B, C,
Watt, VAR, VA
Power factor Apparent 1 Apparent (low alert) Apparent
Frequency Hertz 1 Hertz (out of range alert) Hertz
10 THD
Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 1 kW, kVAR, kVA; maximum kW, kVAR, kVA kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes
Trend analysis 3 2 MB 5
Event logging 3 Logging on demand interval or Modbus command 4 2 MB 5
11 Disturbance recording
Other Features
Storage 10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each 2 MB 5
12 (115 KB) 4
PG output relays
PG analog outputs
13 Discrete contact inputs
Analog inputs

2-pulse inputs with BACnet

Synch-input kW utility Optional demand synchronization via Modbus
Auxiliary voltage 6
14 kWh pulse initiator 4 Yes Yes
Waveform display
Waveform capture
15 Display type Red LED Backlit LCD Red LED
Display lines/character 3 lines, 4 characters 2 lines by 5 characters each (full alphanumeric top row) 3 lines, 4 characters
Display character height 0.56 (14.2) H 7.5 mm 0.56 (14.2) H
16 Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII 4
Network: Modbus TCP 4
Serial: Modbus RTU 4, BACnet MS/TP 4
Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless
Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via display/configuration software Via configuration software/display
17 Dimensions inches (mm) 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D

(see Page 3.1-37)
3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D
(see Page 3.2-4)
7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D
Operating temperature range 20 to 70C Meter: 30 to 70C 20 to 70C

Display: 10 to 50C
18 Reference literature
1
TD02601016E TD02601018E TD02601019E
IQ 140/150. Legend: PG = Programmable
2 IQ 150 only. FS = Full scale
3 RV = Read value
19 4
At computer only.
Optional. Auxiliary Voltage
5 IQ 250S only. (Optional) = Provides three additional
6 The auxiliary voltage option adds three voltage inputs to the
20 additional voltage input channels to meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Power Xpert Meters. Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter
6000/8000 supported.
21

April 2016 Overview
Sheet 03 005
Selection Chart
Table 3.0-1. Metering Selection ChartDimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

Device Name Power Xpert Power Monitoring/ Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor i
Accessories Multi-Point Meter Metering Module (PM3)
See Page 3.1-18
ii
1
Section Page Number 3.2-16 3.2-36 3.2-27
Electrical Parameters 2
Volts 0.2% RV 0.5% of RV
Amperes 0.2% RV 0.5% of RV
Current range (% of nominal) 3
Watts 0.5% RV 1.0% of RV
VARs 0.5% RV 1.0% of RV
VA 0.5% RV 1.0% of RV
PF-apparent 0.5% RV 2.0% of RV
4
PF-displacement
Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.1 Hz
THD-voltage 5
THD-current
Watthours 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class 1.0% per ANSI C12.1
VAR-hours
VA-hours
0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class
1.0% of RV
1.0% of RV 6
Ampere-demand
Watt-demand 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class
VAR-demand
VA-demand

7
Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) 1.0% per ANSI C12.1
Individual ampere harmonics
Individual voltage harmonics 8
Interharmonics
Volts L-L, L-N 9
Current A, B, C
Power Watts, VAR, VA
Power factor
Frequency
Apparent
Hertz

10
THD
Demand values Watts (Delivered & Received), Watts (Q1Q4),
Trend analysis
VA (Q1, Q4), VA (Q2, Q3)
Interval data
11
Event logging 20 latest events and historical
Disturbance recording
Other Features 12
Storage 256 MB standard, 2 GB optional
PG output relays 1 standard, 8 each module 3
PG analog outputs 13
Discrete contact inputs 3 standard, 8 each module 3 Circuit breaker status
Analog inputs
Synch-input kW utility
Auxiliary voltage 2
Via communications and digital input

14
kWh pulse initiator Aggregate or main-digital output, LED output
on meter modules (accuracy check)
Waveform display 15
Waveform capture
Display type LCD color touchscreen 3
Display lines/character 6-inch diagonal 16
Display character height Graphics
Communications Serial: Modbus RTU Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU
3 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet
TCP/IP, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, SFTP
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
17
Setup configuration Via PXMP configuration software
Dimensions inches (mm) Refer to TD150006EN (see Page 3.2-25) Refer to IL01219085E
Operating temperature range 20 to 70C 25 to 70C 18
Reference literature TD150006EN IL01219085E
1 At computer only. Legend: PG = Programmable
2 The auxiliary voltage option adds three FS = Full scale 19
additional voltage input channels to RV = Read value
Power Xpert Meters. Auxiliary Voltage
3 Optional. (Optional) = Provides three additional
voltage inputs to the
20
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter
6000/8000 supported. 21

April 2016
Sheet 03 006

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Eaton Advanced Meters
Sheet 03 007
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series
Power Xpert Meter Both the local graphic display and the Detect and Record High-Speed
i
embedded Web server present real Transients to Help:
4000/6000/8000 Series time, historical and event information Avoid equipment damage and
in a browser-style graphical format disruption
to help the user interpret key circuit
Identify equipment malfunction
ii
information, such as:
Monitor Circuit Loading to Help:
Current loading
Avoid overloads and nuisance
1
Voltage and power levels
overload trips
Power factor
energy usage
Maximize equipment utilization 2
Manage emergency overloads
I/O status
Power quality measurements Manage Energy Utilization to Help: 3
Harmonic plots Reduce peak demand charges
Disturbance and transient and power factor penalties
waveforms Identify excessive energy 4
ITIC disturbance summary screen consumption
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Metered/Monitored Parameters 5

8000 Series Graphic Display uses a Note: See Table 3.1-2.
simple twist and click navigation
control dial to easily navigate the Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N, N-G 6
menus and drill down into increasing Phase neutral and ground currents
levels of important detail. A back key Power: real, reactive and apparent
enhances the browser-like Frequency
7
navigation of the graphic display.
Power factor: apparent and
The Web server provides the energy displacement 8
and demand readings required to help Energy
manage the cost of energy. It also Demand
provides critical information regard-
% THD 9
ing power quality, such as harmonic
distortion, flicker, crest factor, K-Factor Minimum and maximum values
and more. Harmonics 10
Flicker
Note: Features and functionality may vary
depending on the meter model and options Individual harmonics
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 being used. Review the Features and Interharmonics
11
Series Display and Meter Base Benefits chart in Table 3.1-2 for details.
% TDD
General Description Application Description ITIC events plot, duration, magnitude 12
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Energy comparisons
8000 Series monitors the critical Identify Power Quality Problems to Help: Demand comparisons
aspects of an electrical distribution Identify harmonics, sags, swells Event calendar
13
system. This premier power quality and transients damaging or Event timeline and sequence
metering instrument is simple to use, disrupting sensitive, mission-
powerful, scalable and highly flexible. critical IT equipment Number of 9s of availability 14
Phasors
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Boost IT equipments service life
Sequence components
8000 offers a new level of intuitive to the maximum
Crest factor
15
user interface design, presenting criti- Analyze sequence of events up to
cal electrical distribution system 1 millisecond time resolution K-Factor
information in simple-to-navigate Protect motors from damage PQ index 16
and easy-to-understand information Preserve the integrity of processes
architecture. The Power Xpert Meter and batches Accuracy
4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display
Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses Currents: 0.05% RV + 0.025%FS
17
visualizes the information from up to
16 meter modules. The embedded Protect transformers and conductors Voltage: 0.1% RV + 0.025% FS
Web server displays complex power from overheating Energy, and demand power: 18
quality data using standard Internet 0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20
browsers and allows for device Frequency: 0.01 Hz
configuration from the browser. Power factor: 19
0.10% at Unity PF
0.30% at 0.5 PF
20
21

Eaton Advanced Meters April 2016
Sheet 03 008
Communications For Optional Graphic Display Physical Characteristics

i Multiple communications ports including: Note: Display ports restrict access to up
to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Two-Piece Design
Standard meter modules located on the display Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
ii RS-485 remote display port RS-485 network. meter module
RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave port RS-485 meter display network port Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
RJ-45 10/100Base-T Local Configuration RJ-45 10/100Base-T for access to Graphic Display 320 x 240 pixel
1 Port (local Web server connection) Local Display Power Xpert network backlight LCD remote graphics
HTTP (local), FTP, COMTRADE display (supports up to 16 Power
Communication Protocols Supported Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
2 Optional Modbus RTU meter modules)
Communications Expansion Card (CEC) Modbus TCP Display/Meter Mounting Options
Selectable 100FX or 10/100Base-T
3 Ethernet network port
Ethernet TCP/IP Remotely mount the display up to
HTML 2000 ft (1210 m) away from 1 to 16
RS-485 Modbus RTU Selectable Power Xpert Meter modules
NTP (Network Time Protocol)
4 Master/Slave port
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Mount the display and Power Xpert
RS-232 Modbus RTU Slave port Meter module on opposite sides of a
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
panel. 15 additional meter bases can
HTTP (remote), Modbus TCP,
5 SNMP, SMTP, NTP, DNP 3.0
SNMP (Simple Network be remotely mounted
Management Protocol)
COMTRADE (IEEE C37.111-1999) Meter Base Unit Characteristics
6 DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Height: 8.88 inches (225.6 mm)
Network Protocol)
7 Depth: 6.72 inches (170.8 mm)
including optional wall mounting
brackets
8 NEMA rating: NEMA 1, IP3
Display Unit Characteristics

9 Height: 9.02 inches (229.0 mm)
10 eolr Depth:
1.45 inches (36.8 mm) behind
panel surface
11 Power Xpert Meter in
Modbus RTU Slave Mode
Modbus Master
1.04 (26.3 mm) projection in
PLC front of panel surface
NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front
12 Figure 3.1-1. RS-485 Network
of panel rating
1. When using Modbus RTU over an 2. Connections should be made
RS-485 communications network, using communication/control
13 the data rate, data protocol (data shielded cable equivalent to Standards and Certifications
bit, stop bit and parity) and wiring Belden cable p/n 9463. Safety: EN61010-1, UL/cUL 61010-1
topology (two-wire or four-wire) Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class,
14 must be the same for each of ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
the devices. EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
EN55011 Class A
15 Measurement Canada approval
AE-1898 (4000/6000 meters)
16 Immunity IEC 61326
CE Mark
17 Power Xpert
Ethernet Switch
18
19
Power Xpert Meter Standard Web Browser
20 Figure 3.1-2. Ethernet Network
1. Optional Ethernet Communica- 2. Available Ethernet connections
21 tions Card must be ordered with are: 10Base-T and ST fiber.
the meter.

Sheet 03 009
Ease-of-UsePower Xpert Meter Both the Power Xpert Meter 4000/ Historical Trend Logging
4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display 6000/8000 embedded Web server
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
i
and the local graphic display support
(Option) graphical trend charts of key circuit records historical data for graphical
measurements such as current, viewing from the Local display or the ii
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ embedded Web server. Graphical
8000 display features a large easy-to- voltage, power and energy. The trend
chart supports a zoom feature that views of historical data support
read white backlit graphic LCD. The
information presented by the display allows the user to view data over a pan and zoom. 145 standard metering 1
short period of 16 hours up to 4 years. parameters are logged as part of the
is organized into an information standard meter functionality including
architecture that is easy-to-navigate The trend chart includes zoom in/out
and organized for simplicity. Screen buttons and a horizontal slider bar min./max. and average for each 2
control to manage scrolling forward parameter. The averages are calculated
navigation is accomplished using a over the interval period. The minimum
navigation control dial and a back and backward through the data. Trend
button. The user simply twists the charts of basic readings include and maximum readings are based on 3
minimum, maximum and average 200 ms calculations.
knob on the navigation control dial to
move between menu selections and readings. Trend charts of interval by Storage capacity for standard trend
drill down links on the screen. When interval energy data also display plots includes all of the following 4
the selection is highlighted, pressing peak demand. intervals:
the dial makes the selection.
Information is displayed from a single
Note: For remote access and networking
capabilities such as connecting to a LAN/
Every 5 minutes for 48 hours (2 days) 5
meter or an RS-485 daisychain of up to WAN, use the optional Communications Every 15 minutes for 192 hours
16 meters. The display features a rich Expansion Card (CEC). (8 days)
set of screens including real-time data, Every hour for 28 days (4 weeks)
6
trend plots, waveform views and an Sag/Swell/Transient Capture Every 8 hours for 56 weeks
ITIC Plot. The graphic display allows and Recording Every week for 44 months 7
basic device setup and password
protected resets. An audible alarm 60 cycles of waveform are oversampled Note: Trend plot data can be easily exported
is available to annunciate at 4096 samples per cycle (Power Xpert to third-party applications, such as Microsoft
alarm conditions. Meter 4000/6000), filtered through anti- Excel in csv-file format. 8
aliasing and recorded at 512 samples
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 per cycle and post event data. The In addition, metered parameters are
Power Xpert Meter 8000 samples at automatically stored on the built-in 9
Embedded Web Server a rate of 100,000 samples per cycle. FTP Servers, where they can be easily
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Embedded Web server supports copied and imported into third-party
embedded Web server offers Eaton viewing of triggered waveforms one applications for benchmarking and 10
customers a new level of accessibility channel at a time and includes the analysis. Logs on the FTP Server
to the critical information required to ability to zoom and to scroll horizontally include the min./max. and average
manage their electrical distribution using a slider bar. for 145 standard metering parameters 11
system. The Web server includes at 5-minute intervals.
real-time circuit information in both The Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000
numeric and graphical visual formats Series have preconfigured (600 V and Storage capacity for trend data: 12
below) trigger settings for sags, swells 63 days of 5-minute interval trend
to help monitor circuit parameters such
and transients, and do not require data. Capacity=18,144 intervals.
as current loading, voltage and power
levels, power factor, THD, Flicker and additional setup by the user. Wave- 13
more. The Web server also provides forms are stored in non-volatile flash
energy and demand readings with memory using an industry standard
graphic usage plots to help analyze COMTRADE format. Waveforms 14
energy usage patterns. Energy readings can be automatically sent out as
include kWh, kVARh, delivered and COMTRADE attachments to an e-mail
received and kVAh with time of use following an event, or can be retrieved 15
and RTP displays. The interval energy from an FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
usage plot includes the ability to do directory structure in the Power Xpert
week-to-week and month-to-month meter modules memory. 16
energy consumption graphical
comparisons for benchmarking 17
purposes. The embedded Web server
will also display in simplified Chinese
if connected to a computer configured 18
for Chinese language.
19
20
21

Sheet 03 010
Energy Profile Data Power Xpert Meter Profiler

i The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Free Download
8000 records Real and Reactive energy The Power Xpert Meter Profiler is a
ii forward, reverse, net and absolute
sum, as well as Apparent energy
free energy-management software
download, compatible with the Power
(kVAH). Up to eight status inputs can Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, allowing
1 be configured as energy accumulators a comparison of expected or baseline
for counting KYZ pulse inputs (option). energy consumption patterns to actual
These readings are stored over a usage, and flagging areas of concern
2 configurable interval from 1 to using deviations from modeled energy
60 minutes, as well as in daily and patterns. These deviations point to
weekly totals. targets as they hunt for energy
3 With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet consumption offenders in their facility. Multi-Day Detail Comparison View
Communication Expansion Card, users By applying pattern analysis The Profiler uses the previous 9 weeks
can easily configure the meters to of data for the energy use baseline, but
4 send periodic e-mails at user-defined
techniques and intelligently
you can manually add more values to
using color and shape to convey
intervals of energy consumption and the results, the Power Xpert Meter the baseline.
power demand. E-mails contain
5 a summary of readings per rate
Profiler provides the user an easy-to- The Power Xpert Meter Profiler is also
understand visualization of energy a predictor: It can predict what energy
structures and also have the actual usage, thus offering information for
measurements attached to the e-mails consumption would be expected later
6 body as a CSV file in a ZIP container.
proactive energy management. in a day. The Real-Time view generates
a baseline from the last two months
In addition, metered parameters are and makes a prediction of the future
7 automatically stored on the built-in FTP load. The view represents the current
Server, where they can be easily copied day (today), and shows three graphs:
and imported into third-party applica- the baseline for the day, the historical
8 tions for benchmarking and analysis. data (up to present) and the predicted
Logs on the FTP Server include energy future data. Instantaneous data is
consumption logs, one for every month retrieved and averaged to keep the
9 in CSV file format, trended measure- graphs up-to-date. The averaged
ment logs also in CSV file format and values are shown as shapes at the
Calendar Usage View
waveform captures in COMTRADE current time: Instantaneous, 1-minute
10 file format.
Features and Benefits average and 15-minute average.
Storage capacity for energy profile data: Develops a baseline of energy In addition, users can add the data
11 62 days of 15 minute interval demand for management analysis from two different Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000s into one calendar
energy and pulse interval data Easily identifies periods of high
view. The profiler will mathematically
(Fixed interval capacity = 5952
energy demand at-a-glance by day,
12 week and month
combine the two loads into a totalized
intervals. Configurable intervals view. It is also possible to change the
from 1 to 60 min) Allows for a daily, weekly, monthly percentage contribution of each meter,
13 372 days of 1 day accumulated
comparison of energy usage as well as subtract a portion of one
energy and pulse interval data compared to baseline meter from another.
Allows for detailed comparison
208 weeks of 1 week accumulated To download the tool, go to
14 energy and pulse interval data of multi days energy usage
www.eaton.com/pxm and click on
Offers multi views of energy usage
the link for the Power Xpert Meter
Energy and Demand Comparisons and baseline comparisons to quickly
Profiler. Registration will be required
15 Energy and demand usage patterns can
identify anomalies
to download.
be analyzed with the month-to-month,
16 week-to-week comparison chart built
into the meter. Raw data can be
exported with the Save Table option
17 to other applications, such as Excel, for
further analysis and graphing.
18
19
Daily Detailed Energy Usage View
20
21

Sheet 03 011
Eaton Power Xpert Energy Event Logging ITIC Analysis Plot

ViewerFree Download The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ The Power Xpert Meter graphic
i
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV) 8000 local graphic display or the display (option) and Web server
provides the means to develop an embedded Web server both allow the (option) include a graphic representa- ii
energy usage baseline for energy user to view a list of triggered events tion of the ITIC plot (Power Xpert
management programs, comparing along with any captured parameters, Meter 6000/8000) with counts of
interval logged data points. It is a free event details, and triggered wave- disturbances and transients that 1
Web download for compatible Eaton forms. In addition, a separate event log have occurred. The ITIC plot organizes
product home pages. This tool allows includes a variety of activities includ- events into eight distinct disturbance
easy interpretation of the data collected ing acknowledged triggers, zones corresponding to severity and 2
by compatible devices via graphical new min. and max. events, and system a 9th zone for transients. A pass/fail
charts, graphs and reports without operations such as resets. The size count is displayed to indicate how
having to export the available .csv file of the event log is virtually unlimited many events are outside the ITIC 3
into Microsoft Excel or another tool. based only on the memory limits. Clicking on any counter in the
See Page 3.1-31 for more information. option selected. ITIC Web page will link the user to the
event view and display all triggered 4
E-mail Notification events in the selected zone. This
With the optional LAN/WAN Ethernet makes it simple to view disturbance
Communication Expansion Card waveforms associated with the 5
attached to the Power Xpert Meter ITIC plot.
4000/6000/8000, the users can easily A separate ITIC graph is available to
configure the meters to send periodic review individual ITIC events. This
6
e-mails at user-defined intervals for graph will show the user the event hit
energy consumption and power position on the graph and the event
demand. E-mails contain a summary duration and magnitude.
7
of readings per rate structures and
also have the actual measurements Inputs and Outputs
attached to the e-mails body as a CSV 8
file in a ZIP container. Prompt alarm Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 is
e-mails can also be sent for any event available with an optional digital I/O
Comparison Summary
condition either standard in the meter card that includes: 9
or ones set up by the user based on Eight digital inputsself sourced
Event Triggers thresholds, dV/dt triggers or IO status 24 Vdc 10
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ changes with the optional IO Card.
Three relay outputs5 A max.
8000 supports five types of Alarm e-mails can be configured to
configurable event triggers: continuous, 240 Vac max.,
have the COMTRADE waveform
capture attached to the e-mails body.
30 Vdc max. 11
Out of limits (4000/6000/8000) Two solid-state outputs80 mA
Demand overload (4000/6000/8000) max. continuous, 30 Vdc max.
Sub-cycle disturbance 12
Each of the eight inputs are interrupt
(4000/6000/8000) driven, allowing for 1 ms accuracy
ITIC (6000/8000) of digital events time stamps 13
Fast transient (8000) (1 ms accuracy requires local NTP
TimeServer). Inputs can also be
These triggers permit pickup, reset
and pickup delay to be configured
configured for demand synch, and 14
pulse counting. Inputs selected for
by the user. When a trigger occurs, pulse counting can be scaled. Interval
actions include Performance Monitoring
(#9s analysis), Capturing Waveform,
by interval pulse recordings are 15
maintained in profile memory and
Capture Parameters, Send E-mail and can be displayed graphically.
Operate a Relay Output. The Graphic
Display flashes an LED to annunciate
Outputs can be used for KYZ, or 16
alarm annunciation.
the alarm condition. An audible alarm
is also available.
17
Trigger options include:
Out of limits: over 100 triggers 18
Demand overload: 10 triggers
ITIC: eight triggers
Fast transient: dV/dT and absolute
19
per phase Periodic E-mail Message
Sub-cycle disturbancedV/dT 20
and absolute
21

Sheet 03 012
Ratings
i Application to 500 kV, no PTs to 600 V
CT ratios selectable from standard
ii 120/600 Vac line
CT inputs accept 5 A secondary
Power supply: standard 120/240 Vac
1 or 110/250 Vdc
2 Storage Capacity
Table 3.1-1. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Estimated Memory and Storage Capacity with 2/4/8 GB Memory Capacity
3 Model Memory Event File Size Occurrence Memory Months of Capacity
(KB) Per Month 1 Usage (MB) with 8 GB Memory 2
4 Typical Severe Typical Severe Typical Severe
PXM 4000 2 GB Subcycle disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 166 28

PXM 6000 4 GB ITIC event 1260 5 20 6.2 24.6 666 166
5 Subcycle disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 333 55
ITIC + subcycle disturbance Total---> 15 80 18.5 98.4 222 42
6 PXM 8000 8 GB ITIC event 1260 5 20 6.2 24.6 1332 333
Subcycle disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 666 111
Transients 2048 3 30 6.0 60.0 1365 137
7 ITIC + subcycle disturbance + transients Total---> 18 110 24.5 158.4 335 52
1 The typical and severe power quality event occurrences are estimates and may vary depending on the electrical environment.
2 Memory is not allocated by event category; memory is used first come, first served.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 013
Power Xpert Meter 4000 Power Xpert Meter 6000 Power Xpert Meter 8000
Harmonics Harmonics, including individual Impulsive transient capture at 6 MHz
i
Disturbance capture harmonics 100,000 samples per cycle
Low frequency transient detection Flicker calculations Premium power quality index ii
and capture ITIC performance curve 8 GB data logging
Standard power quality index Event calendar view
2 GB data logging Events timeline view
1
Sequence of events waveform plot
Enhanced power quality index 2
4 GB data logging
3
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benefits
Feature Power Xpert Meter Benefit
4000 6000 8000
4
General
Embedded Web server Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter
over the network, Internet.
5
TOU metering support Time of usage can be set up to support four different schedules.
Firmware flash update support Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware updates. 6
Self-learning capability The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm
(characterizes normal per circuit) only when real events occur.
Power, Energy and Demand 7
Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze
trend graph analysis, export, print parameters right on the meter or external software.
Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month, Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand 8
week-to-week comparison.
Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential
PF penalties. 9
Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, TOU, profile, Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage
previous month comparison, graph analysis, export, print and usage against previous month, identify peaks to conserve
energy usage. 10
Power Quality Analysis
Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average) Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas.
Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms. 11
Symmetrical components: zero, negative, positive Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems.

Low frequency transient detection and capture Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective
analysis or e-mailing.
12
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 4096 1 4096 1 100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture
impulsive transients.
Number of Nines uptime data (e.g., 6 nines=99.9999%) Review uptime availability per cent.
13
K-factor Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving
non-linear and linear loads.

14
Crest factor Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform.
Security
Secure 5 level user access privileges Define appropriate security access level per user. 15
1 Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.
Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and
16
product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user manual for detailed specifications.
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 014
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benefits (Continued)

i Feature Power Xpert Meter Benefit
4000 6000 8000
ii Communications and I/O

Modbus TCP Easy integration with standard protocol to power management
and other software.
1 Modbus RTU Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several
(116) meters together.
HTML Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web
2 browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to
existing NMS system.
3 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture files on the meter with
an FTP Client.
4 NTP (Network Time Protocol) Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize
time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution.
COMTRADE, open IEEE standard file format for waveform Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COM-
5 capture export TRADE file format to third-party software.
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Network Protocol) Communicate with the meter via DNP 3.0 over Ethernet, hook to
existing utility systems.

6 Trend measurements CSV file export Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g.,
Microsoft Excel in standard CSV file format.
I/O (eight digital inputs, three relay outputs, The Power Xpert Meter I/O Card is extremely flexible and can be
two solid-state KYZ outputs) used in a large variety of different applications. Digital inputs and
7 relay outputs can be programmed to interact during various
conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as
alarm, pulse meters, trip units, sensors can be easily integrated to
8 the Power Xpert Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the
meters standard functions such as, e.g., e-mail, logs and trends.
Time Synchronization
9 NTP time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize
time over the network up to the 1 millisecond resolution
GPS time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy 1 1 1 The GPS option allows the meter to synchronize time over the GPS
10 satellite positioning system up to the 1 millisecond resolution
Logs
Trend logging Log trend information for easy statistical analysis.
11 Load profile Review the load profile graph to get a better understanding of
your electrical load versus time.
Event logging Log events for retrospective event analysis.
12 Memory and Storage
Standard memory, GB 2 4 8 Store large amounts of waveform captures and events for
historical analysis.
13 Harmonics
Harmonic levels 127 127 127 Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion.
14 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter.
Delta-Sigma D/A conversion technology Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion.
Harmonics over-sampling (4096 samples per cycle) Over-sampling enables the usage of Anti-Aliasing technology,
15 increasing accuracy.
Anti-alias filtering Technology to remove out-of-band signal components resulting
in more accurate data.
16 Individual harmonics Review individual harmonic levels directly on the meter.
Total Demand Distortion (TDD) Identify harmful harmonics in, e.g., lightly loaded variable-speed
drive environments where THD may be high but not relative.
17 Interharmonics Interharmonics allow you to see what is going on between the
integer multiples of the fundamental. Zoom in on the harmonics
trend graph and review frequency content every 5 Hz instead of
18 every 60 Hz.
1 When used with third-party device and I/O option.
19 Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
20
21

Sheet 03 015
Table 3.1-2. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000Features and Benefits (Continued)

Feature Power Xpert Meter Benefit i
4000 6000 8000
Highlights ii
Subcycle disturbance capturing Capture fast voltage changes/low frequency transient
(e.g., capacitor switching transient).
dV/dt triggers for subcycle oscillatory transients Detect and record a large magnitude oscillation transient
resulting in equipment damage.
1
Absolute threshold and dV/dt triggering Detect and record if a surge suppressor is necessary.
Power quality indexstandard Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format. 2
(includes dv/dt count, %TDDi and %THDv)
Power quality indexenhanced (includes standard Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format
index plus Sag level, swell level and flicker) (includes ITIC events and flicker calculations). 3
Flicker calculations Detect and quantify low frequency rms voltage variations
causing incandescent lighting flicker.
Automatic trigger setting Trigger thresholds are automatically set according to ITIC
(CBEMA) standard, no need to figure this out by yourself.
4
Automatic event severity analysis Automatically analyze the severity of the event with the ITIC
(CBEMA) performance curve plot, see where the event actually hit.
5
Event severity counters An ITIC (CBEMA) event counter keeps track of the number
of all sags, swells and transients.
ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously
CBEMA performance curve
ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously
CBEMA performance curve for easy power problem evaluation.
6
Custom ITIC (CBEMA) plot with individual event magnitude Review custom ITIC (CBEMA) plots of individual events
and duration showing you the actual magnitude, duration and hit are in
a simple graphical representation.
7
Event calendar view The Events Timeline calendar view provides instant insight to the
frequency of power events and helps detect reoccurring problems.
Events timeline view View and understand the sequence of events that have
8
occurred during a period of time.

Sequence of events and events plot on waveform Plot color-coded events on a captured waveform to gain
insight into the sequence of events cycle per cycle.
9
Power quality indexpremium (includes enhanced Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format
index plus counts of impulsive transients) (includes ITIC events and flicker calculations).
10
High-Speed Transient Capture and Detection
6 MHz capture of impulsive transients Capture impulsive transients by taking six samples every
millionth of a second. 11
Transient capture duration: ~20 ms/6M Hz ~120 ms/1 MHz Record and analyze transients during a longer timeframe.
Waveform recorded at 100,000 samples per cycle High-speed ensures impulsive transients are correctly
captured (fast rise time). 12
Three-phase voltage and neutral-to-ground fast Capture impulsive transients on all four channels.
transient capture
13
Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user manual for detailed specifications. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 016
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Selecting the trend plot for a given
i Graphic Display (Option) Features parameter displays a historical graph
of the selected parameter over the last
A menu-driven graphical display 16 hours. The zoom buttons change
ii with information organized into a the time scale to one of several data
user-friendly information architecture. views based on historical averages
with min./max. The Pan button allows
1 The Homepage (see below) offers: scrolling within the selected view.
Graphical level indicator based on
a statistical analysis for three-phase
2 line-to-line and line-to-neutral
voltage and per phase currents
to quickly indicate out of normal
3 readings Ethernet Settings
Large easy-to-read average L-L
Ethernet and other settings can be
4 voltage average phase currents input or verified via the Power Xpert
and system frequency can be LCD Display.
highlighted and selected using
5 the navigation control dial to drill Note: Some of the other settings are
down for additional detail specific only to the Web Browser GUI.
Menu selections for meter, power,
6 quality, events and setup are shown Trend Plot
for ease of navigation into display for
more detail, or basic device setup Waveforms can be displayed for
7 currents and voltages. The waveforms
can be viewed on demand for steady-
state conditions. Triggered waveforms
8 can also be displayed to view sag/
swell or transient data.
10 ITIC Plot (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
The Power Xpert Meter classifies

11 disturbances and summarizes the
results graphically using the ITIC plot.
Homepage The number of ITIC sags and swells
12 Highlighting a field such as the are indicated for each of nine severity
avg. current value and pressing the levels. A pass/fail summary is shown
navigation control dial brings up a to indicate how many events are
13 detail screen like the one below. Waveform Viewer outside the ITIC pass zone.
14
15
16
17
18 Current Summary Harmonic Spectrum
Highlighting an individual reading The harmonic spectral plot displays

19 on the detail summary level screen both harmonics and interharmonics up
and selecting it drills down to a level to the 85th order. A detailed table also
including links to min./max., historical includes individual magnitudes and
20 trend plots, triggers, harmonic spectral angles of current and voltage
data, and waveform viewing. harmonics, as well as a harmonic
power calculation at each frequency.
21

Sheet 03 017
Power Xpert Meter Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 The Web server allows the user
Graphic Display (Option) Screens Web Browser Views to view waveforms of the voltage i
and current to spot power quality
problems such as notching.
Meter Top Level Screen
ii
V-LL avg, V-LN avg, IA, IB, IC, Iavg, Freq.
Meter Detail Screens
Per phase detail L-L, L-N, Symmetrical
1
Comp, Aux. Channels, Min./Max. with
date/time of occurrence, Trend Plots, 2
Triggers, Phasors.
Power Top Level Screen
Three-Phase Power Factor, kWHr,
3
kWd, Real-Time kW, kVAR, kVA,
Load Profile Link. 4
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Power Detail Screens Web Browser Homepage (Note: 4000 Events Timeline
does not include flicker, ITIC) (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
Per phase detail, kVA, kVAR, kW, Min./
Max. with date/time of occurrence, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 View and understand the sequence
5
Trend Plots, Triggers. embedded Web server offers Eaton of events that have occurred during a
customers a new level of accessibility period of time. Plot color-coded events
Quality Top Level Screen to the critical information required to on captured waveforms to gain insight
6
10 min. and 24 hr. PQIndex, THDI, manage the electrical distribution into the sequence of events from
THDV, K-Factor, Crest Factor, Flicker system. The embedded Web server one single cycle to the next one. This
Pst, %9s of Reliability. includes real time circuit information provides the user an excellent vantage
7
in both numeric and graphical formats point to review and compare multiple
Quality Detail Screens to help monitor circuit parameters events at an unprecedented resolution.
Per phase detail L-L, L-N,V aux, such as current loading, voltage and
8
Odd, Even, Interharmonics, Present, power levels, power factor.
Min/Max, Trend Plots, Harmonic
spectrum plots, waveform plots. The Web server also provides the 9
energy and demand readings required
Events Top Level Screen to help manage the cost of energy.
Active/Acknowledged Event list, Trig- Readings include kWh, kVARh, 10
ger List, System Log, ITIC Curve Link. delivered and received and kVAh with
time-of-use and separate status input
Event Detail Screens controlled energy accumulation to 11
Event List, Condition, Acknowledge account for energy during special times
Button, Trigger Date/Time, Trigger such as rate alert periods or stand-by
description. generator times of operation. 12
Setup Top Level Screen The Web server also includes critical Harmonic Spectral Plot
View setup, Edit setup, Login, Logout. information regarding Power Quality The harmonic spectral plot displays 13
such as harmonic distortion, flicker both harmonics and interharmonics up
Setup Detail Screens (Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000), crest to the 85th order. A detailed table also
Quick Setup, Trigger setup, factor, K-Factor and more. includes individual magnitudes and 14
Detail setting. angles of current and voltage
harmonics, as well as a harmonic
power calculation at each frequency. 15
Even, odd and total THD are displayed
for diagnostic purposes. In addition,
the Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 16
provides interharmonics, which
allow users to see what is going on
between the integer multiples of 17
the fundamental.
18
Steady-State Waveform 19
20
21

Sheet 03 018
ii
2
Demand Comparison
3 Historical Trend Plot ITIC Analysis Plot (Power Xpert 6000/8000)
Graphical Trending of Data Demand comparison compares power The ITIC Web page includes counters to
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ consumption day-to-day, month-to- track the occurrence of disturbances and
4 8000 embedded Web server supports month or week-to-week. Power Xpert a pass/fail summary. In addition, select-
graphical trend charts of key circuit Meters can set to measure demand at ing any disturbance counter links to a
measurements such as current, 1 to 60 minute intervals. Both sliding detailed event view of the disturbances
5 voltage, power and energy. The trend and fixed interval windows are in that ITIC category. Disturbance wave-
chart supports a zoom feature that supported for maximum flexibility. forms can be viewed from the browser.
allows the user to view data over a
6 short period of 16 hours or a longer
period of 48 months. The trend chart
has a horizontal slider bar control to
7 manage scrolling forward and back-
ward through the data. Trend charts
of basic readings include minimum,
8 maximum and average readings.
Trend charts of energy data also
display demand values.
9
10 Disturbance Recording Events Calendar

(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000)
11 Sag/Swell Recording The Events Timeline calendar view

60 cycles of waveform are recorded provides instant insight to the
at 256 samples per cycle including frequency of power events and
12 30 cycles of pre and post trigger data. helps detect reoccurring problems.
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Color-coded events can be filtered
8000 embedded Web server supports to detect specific issues.
13 viewing of triggered waveforms one
Energy Comparison channel at a time including the ability Web Server Device Configuration
to zoom and to scroll horizontally Special software is not required to con-
14 Energy usage patterns can be effort- using a slider bar. Waveforms are figure a Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
lessly analyzed with the month-to- stored in Power Xpert Meter 4000/
month, week-to-week comparison 8000. The embedded Web server
6000/8000 non-volatile flash memory includes comprehensive device
15 chart. Raw data can be easily exported using an industry standard Comtrade setup capability.
with the Save Table option to other format. Waveforms can be automati-
applications such as Excel for further cally sent out by e-mail following an
16 analysis or graphing (firmware event, or can be retrieved from an
version 12.x.x and higher only). FTP directory structure in the meter
Note: All data logging for trend plotting is modules memory.
17 automatically preconfigured in the Power
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000. In addition,
the 6000 and 8000 Series Meters have
18 sag, swell and transient triggers built-in
according to the ITIC (CBEMA) standard.
19
20
21

Sheet 03 019
PQ Index Power at a Glance

i
ii
3
Figure 3.1-5. Power at a Glance
4
Easily Upgrade Your Power Xpert Relay Outputs
Meter 4000 to a 6000 The optional PXIO-B card includes
Eaton understands that our customers three 5 A form C relay outputs rated 5
needs change over time. Thats why for 240 Vac or 30 Vdc. These outputs
weve developed meters that can grow can be used for applications such as:
Figure 3.1-3. PQ Index
with you. Once a Power Xpert Meter
6
Alarm annunciation
A statistical analysis comparing the 4000 is purchased, you have the
KYZ pulse output
last 10 minute and 24 hour periods ability to upgrade to a Power Xpert
Power Quality to the historical norm Meter 6000, with no intervention from
7
Alarm outputs can be driven from
for the circuit. Eaton, when needed. All the features triggers based on metering values.
of the Power Xpert Meter 4000 that Output modes include: 8
The PQ Index score results in a
you have been using and depend on
Power Quality rating of Normal, Normalrelay energized during
remain, however, once updated, all the
Caution and Alert for the period. alarm condition
additional features of the Power Xpert 9
Meter 6000 are available. The self- Latchedrelay energized by
Flicker (EN61000-4-15; Power Xpert upgrade is available on Eatons Web event trigger, de-energized
Meter 6000/8000) site. Youll need a credit card, your by acknowledgement 10
Power Xpert Meter 4000 serial number Timedrelay energized by
and date code (you will be presented event trigger, maintained for a
with this information if you are using programmed interval 11
the upgrade link directly from your
Power Xpert Meter) and your e-mail Auxiliary Voltage Option
address. Once you have completed
The optional auxiliary voltage 12
the purchase, we will send you your
new license key information via selection allows for sensing of
another input voltage such as a
e-mail that will allow you to complete
transformer or UPS and secondary 13
the upgrade.
voltage from transformer or UPS
High-speed triggering of wave- output. This option permits waveform
forms based on events such as or harmonic comparisons across 14
breaker trips or static transfers these devices.
Figure 3.1-4. Flicker Demand interval timing taken
from a master utility meter end Discrete Contact Inputs 15
Flicker values for Perceptibility,
PST and PLT are calculated based of interval pulse The optional PXIO-B expansion
on EN61000-4-15 guidelines. Status inputs are self sourced provid-
card offers eight digital inputs that 16
are useful for a variety of applications
ing a nominal 24 Vdc (2030 Vdc)
such as:
across the circuit.
Status indication with time
17
Names can be configured for each
stamping of transitions
input for ease of use.
(1 ms precision)
18
Pulse Counting of KYZ or other
utility pulses such as air, water
or gas 19
20
21

Sheet 03 020
Communications Expansion
i
Card (CEC)
The optional CEC Card offers
ii two Ethernet connection options,
10/100Base-T and a fiber-optic port that
can be used for the following applica-
1
tions:
Monitoring, managing and configur-
2 ing the meter remotely using a
standard Web Browser interface
like Microsoft Internet Explorer
3 Alarm notifications via e-mail, SMTP

Enabling access to the meters
FTP server (energy, trend and
4 waveform logs)
Providing Modbus TCP/IP or RTU
communications to BMS systems
5 Providing DNP 3.0 over Ethernet to
utility systems

6 Providing SNMP communications
to NMS systems
Synchronizing with an NTP server
7 for 1ms timestamping resolution
Asset management via SNMP to
Network Management Systems
8 Updating firmware on the meter

9
Figure 3.1-6. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module Layout
I/O Card (option)
10 1 Digital inputs 1-8.
b Solid-state outputs 1-2.
c Relay outputs 1-3.
11 CT and Voltage Connections

4 CT input connections.
e Standard three-phase voltage phase inputs.
12 f Auxiliary channel voltage inputs (option).

Communication Expansion Card (LAN/WAN Ethernet Networking) (option)
g 100FX ST-type Ethernet (multi-mode).
h 10/100Base-T Ethernet.
13 i RS-485 (two-wire w/shield)24 V accessory power (Com 2).
j RS-232 (Tx Rx) Modbus RTU (Com 3).
Standard Features
14 k Local RJ-45 config. port (non-networkable Ethernet).
l RS-485 (two-wire w/shield) Modbus RTU (Com 1).
m Meter mounting brackets.
15 n Sealable mode switch cover.
o Control power (100240 Vac and 110250 Vdc) (20%).
p Display RS-485 network port (up to 15 meters)24 V accessory power (Com 0).
16 q Meter base address.

r Com reset button.
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 021
i
Voltage Inputs Current Inputs
Control V1 V2 V3 V4 VR 5 4 3 2 1
3
Power () N 52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11 ii
PSI-
2
120/240 AC
(+) L
110/250 DC 1
Protective
Earth / 1
Chassis
Disconnect Ground
Switch 2
Breaker Shorting
Disconnect Block
Switch 3
4
L3
L2
5
Load
Line
L1 6
7
Figure 3.1-7. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Up to 600 V)
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power. 8
9
Voltage Inputs Current Inputs
Control V1 V2 V3 V4 VR 5 4 3 2 1 10
3
Power () N 52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
PSI-
2
120/240 AC (+) L
1
110/250 DC
Protective 11
Earth /
Chassis
Disconnect Ground
Switch 12
Breaker
Disconnect Shorting 13
Switch Block
14
15
L3
16
L2
Load
Line
L1
17
18
Figure 3.1-8. Three-Phase Three-Wire Delta (Above 600 V)
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power. 19
20
21

Sheet 03 022
i 0.063~0.240
(1.6~6.1)
7.24
(183.9)
ii
1
5.67
(144.0)
2
4 Figure 3.1-9. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Multimeter Graphic

Display (PXM468K-DISP-6)Sold Separately, Supports up to 16
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Modules
5
9.56 (242.8)
6
8
4x 0.20
( 5.2)
9 4x R0.11
(R2.8)
10 8.88 (255.6)
6.72 (208.3)
6.33 (160.8)
11
12
8.32
(211.3) 5.00
13 (127.0)
7.36
(186.9)
14
1.60
(40.6)
15 0.34
0.42 (10.7) 8.20 (208.3)
(8.6)
16 Figure 3.1-10. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 023
Power Xpert Meters Configuration and Wiring Examples i

Up to 16 Meters can be Daisy-Chained to a Modbus RTU Power Xpert Web Modbus TCP
Single Power Xpert Meter LCD Display (RS-485) Master Software Browser Master ii
1
Up
to 16 2
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Display Link (RS-485)
3
Figure 3.1-11. Display Link
4
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Master
Figure 3.1-14. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality 5
6
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
7
Flow Meter
Up (Pulse Count)
to 16
Rack Monitoring
8
Open Door/Tamper Switch
9
Figure 3.1-12. Modbus RTU (RS-485)Non-Web Enabled
Web Modbus TCP

10
Modbus RTU (RS-485) Trip and Sequence
Browser Master
Master Alarm of Events
Eight programmable digital inputs
Two solid-state programmable outputs 11
Three relay programmable outputs
Figure 3.1-15. AccessoriesI/O Card (Option) 12
Modbus RTU (RS-485) 13

Up
to 16
Water Leak and
Vibration Sensors
14
Display Link (RS-485) Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
15
Tamper Switch
Figure 3.1-13. Web EnabledBrowser and Modbus TCP
16
17
Smoke Alarm
Alarm
Eight programmable digital inputs
Two solid-state programmable outputs
Three relay programmable outputs
18
Figure 3.1-16. IT Configuration ExamplesAccessories
I/O Card (Option)
19
20
21

Sheet 03 024
Ordering Information up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Technical Data

i To order a Power Xpert Meter 4000/
8000 meter modules over a distance
of up to 2000 ft. Power Xpert meter Environmental Conditions
6000/8000, the catalog number should modules include panel mounting Operating temperature:
ii be determined using the chart shown brackets. The Multi-Meter Graphic Meter: 20 to +70 C
in Table 3.1-3. The chart illustrates how Display is designed to mount sepa- Display: 20 to 60 C operating
to include the desired factory options rately. If back-to-back meter to display Storage temperature: 40 to 85 C
1 as part of a catalog number. Option panel mounting is desired, a mounting Operating humidity:
cards that are selected at time of order bracket kit is available (PX-PMBA). 595% condensing
entry will be installed at the factory.
Device weight: 7.1 lbsmeter
2 Option cards are also field installable
for field upgrades.
Example 1: PXM8251A1BB 2.1 lbsdisplay
(PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Meter and back of display are
Com. Exp. and I/O Cards) pollution degree 2
If a display is required, it should be
3 ordered separately. The Multi-Meter Example 2: PXM6251A1BA Elevation to 6562 ft (2000 m)
Graphic Display is capable of display- (PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Current Inputs (Each Channel)
ing data from an RS-485 daisychain of Com. Exp. Card)
4 Conversion: 4096 samples per cycle
delta-sigma converter digitally filtered
Table 3.1-3. Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Meter Catalog Numbering System down to 512 samples per cycle
CT Input: 4096 rms samples
5
PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B per cycle delta-sigma converter
digitally filtered down to 512
samples per cycle for anti-aliasing
6 Burden: less than 10 milliohms
Model Series Overload withstand: 500 A for
4 = 4000 (standard 1 second, non-repeating
7 power quality), 2 GB Range: 0.00520 A continuous
6 = 6000 (enhanced Accuracy: 0.05% or reading plus
power quality), 4 GB Card Slot 3 Configuration 0.01% of full scale (from 50 milliamps
8 8 = 8000 (premium PQ w/
A = No card option to 20 A)
transient capture), 8 GB
B = I/O option card
(eight digital inputs, Voltage Inputs (Each Channel)
9 Voltage Input Configuration two solid-state outputs, Conversion: 4096 rms samples
three relay outputs) per cycle delta-sigma converter
0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4)
2 = Standard plus auxiliary
digitally filtered down to 512
10 (V6, V7, V8) Card Slot 2 Configuration samples per cycle for anti-aliasing
PT input: 120500,000 V primary
A = No card option
B = Communication expansion card Input range: 600 V L-L, 347 L-N
11 Power Supply Configuration
for LAN/WAN Ethernet direct connect
1 = Standard 100240 Vac or networking w/10/100Base-T, Nominal full scale: 1000 V rms
110250 Vdc power supply 100F, RS-485, RS-232 Ports Input impedance: 2 megohms
12 Frequency Range
Card Slot 1 Configuration
4763 Hz
1 = Standard communications module
13 with RS-485 Harmonic Response (Voltage, Current)
127th harmonic
Example 1: PXM8251A1BB (PXM 8000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. and I/O Cards)
14 Example 2: PXM6251A1BA (PXM 6000 Meter, w/VAUX, Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. Card) Accuracy
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
IEC 687 0.2 Class
15 Table 3.1-4. Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Accessories
Discrete Inputs
Description Catalog
Self sourced: 24 Vdc
Number
16 Relay Output Contacts
Digital I/O Card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output PXMIO-B
Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking: PXMCE-B 5 A maximum, 240 Vac maximum,
100FX fiber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232 30 Vdc maximum
17 Graphic display module PXM468K-DISP-6 Lifetime: 1,000,000 no load operations
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic PX-PMBD 100,000 under rated voltage and load
display mounting
18 Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a graphic display to an PX-PMBB Solid-State Outputs
IQ Analyzer cutout Maximum load: 100 milliamps
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance PX-PMBC
Max. voltage: 30 V (externally sourced)
19 Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key 1 PXM-4KUPG
1 Applicable to PXM 4000 Meters only. Upgrade package to be field loaded by customer. Control Power Input
Provides enhanced PXM 6000 functionality in an existing PXM 4000 Meter, including ITIC Input range AC: 100240 Vac (20%)
20 and calendar functions. Frequency range: 4763 Hz
Note: Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for Input range DC: 110250 Vdc 20%
meter module connection.
Burden 50 VA
21 Ride-through: 15s

Sheet 03 025
Ethernet-Ready Power Layout Diagrams

i
Quality & Energy (PQ&E)
Power Xpert Meters Modbus Master
ii
General Description
One or more Ethernet-ready PQ&E 1
Power Xpert Meters may be deployed
in various power distribution and
motor control applications. 2
Equipment
Power Xpert Meter 4000 3
Power Xpert Meter 6000
4
Options
Ethernet Expansion CardCEC eolr
(recommended one per meter)
Modbus RS-458 Network 5
Local display (one per 16 meters)
Figure 3.1-17. Power Xpert Meter Used in a Modbus RS-485 Network Application
Communication Interfaces 6
Modbus RTU (RS-485) (standard)
Building
Display link (RS-485) (standard)
Power Xpert Management Web 7
Modbus TCP/IP (with CEC) Software System Browser
HTTP (with CEC)
FTP (with CEC) 8
Network
SMTP (with CEC) Time Server
SNMP (with CEC) 9
XML/SOAP (with CEC)
Ethernet
DNP 3.0 (with CEC) Network XML/SOAP Modbus TCP/IP HTTP NTP
10
Application Description
Metering/Monitoring Applications 11
Identify power quality problems,
view waveforms, monitor circuit
loading, and manage energy 12
use via standard Web browser
(PXM 4000/6000/8000) Figure 3.1-18. Power Xpert Meter Used in an Ethernet Network Application
View ITIC plots, Enhanced Power
13
Quality Index (PQI), and event/
calendar view via Web browser 14
(PXM 6000/8000)
Detect and record high-speed
transients (PXM 8000) 15
Installation Applications
Low voltage switchgear 16
Medium voltage switchgear
Low voltage motor control centers
Medium voltage motor starters
17
Communications Applications
Building Management System 18
(BMS)
Energy Management Systems 19
Network Management Systems
HMI
Power Xpert Software 20
Foreseer Software
21

Sheet 03 026
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
i Power Xpert Meter The embedded Web server displays Accuracy

comprehensive power quality data
2000 Series using standard Internet browsers and
Note: Under typical operating conditions.
allows for device configuration from Currents: 0.1% RV
ii the browser. The embedded Web Voltage: 0.1% RV
server presents real time, historical, Energy, and demand power:
and event information in a browser- 0.2% in accordance with ANSI C12.20
1 style graphical format to help the user Frequency: 0.03 hertz
interpret information such as current Power factor: 0.2% RV
loading, voltage and power levels,
2 power factor, energy usage, I/O status, Communications
power quality measurements, as well Multiple communications ports including:
as harmonic plots. The embedded
3 Web server also allows for waveform Standard
capture and for visualizing steady-state RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave port
harmonic content that is critical for 10/100Base-T Ethernet network port
4 power quality analysis.
Communication Protocols Supported
The Web server provides the energy
Modbus RTU
5 and demand readings required to help
Modbus TCP
manage the cost of energy.
BACnet/IP
Ethernet TCP/IP
6 Application Description
HTTP, HTTPS
Identify Power Quality Problems to Help: NTP (Network Time Protocol)
7 Protect motors from damage SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Preserve the integrity of processes Protocol)
and batches SNMP (Simple Network
8 Prevent blown capacitor bank fuses
Management Protocol) v1, v3
DNP 3.0
Protect transformers and conductors
9 from overheating Physical Characteristics
Monitor Circuit Loading to Help: Power Xpert Meter 2000 with
integral display
Avoid overloads and nuisance
10 overload trips Power Xpert Meter 2000 transducer
only (no display) meter module
Maximize equipment utilization
NEMA rating: NEMA 12, IP42 front
11 Manage emergency overloads
of panel rating
Manage Energy Utilization to Help:
12 General Description Reduce peak demand charges
Meter with Integral Display
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series and power factor penalties Dimensions
power quality instrument monitors the Identify excessive energy Height: 4.85 inches (123.2 mm)
13 most critical aspects of an electrical consumption Width: 4.85 inches (123.2 mm)
distribution system. This premier
Depth:
power quality metering instrument Metered/Monitored Parameters
14 uses the latest in advanced technology Note: See Table 3.1-8.
3.96 inches (100.5 mm) behind
to make it simple to use, powerful, panel surface
Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Avg. L-N
scalable and highly flexible. The Power 1.01 (25.6 mm) projection in
15 Xpert Meter 2000 offers the same level Phase and neutral currents front of panel surface
of intuitive user interface design as the Power: real, reactive and apparent
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, Frequency Standards and Certifications
16 presenting critical electrical distribu-
Power factor: apparent UL/cUL Electrical and Electronic
tion system information in a simple
Energy: real, forward, reverse, sum Measuring and Test Equipment 22CZ
to navigate and easy-to-understand
17 information architecture. Demand: peak with date and time Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 0.2 class,
ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
% THD
ANSI C62.41 Burst
18 Minimum and maximum values
CE Mark
Harmonics
Individual harmonics
19 Demand comparisons
Phasors
20
21

Sheet 03 027
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Historical Trend Logging Event Logging

Embedded Web Server The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records The Power Xpert Meter 2000
i
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded historical data for graphical viewing embedded Web server allows the
Web server offers Eaton customers a from the embedded Web server. user to view a list of triggered events. ii
new level of accessibility to the critical Graphical views of historical data In addition, a separate system log
information required to manage their support pan and zoom. Over 100 records system operations such
electrical distribution system. The Web standard metering parameters are as resets. 1
server includes real-time information logged as part of the standard meter
in both numeric and graphical visual functionality including min./max. and E-mail
formats to help monitor parameters average for each parameter. The The Power Xpert Meter 2000 contains 2
such as current loading, voltage and averages are calculated over the the ability to send e-mails based on
power levels, power factor, THD, and interval period. an event that has been triggered
more. The Web server also provides or cleared along with the option to 3
energy and demand readings with Energy Profile Data send an event or data log file. The
graphic usage plots to help analyze The Power Xpert Meter 2000 records Power Xpert Meter 2000 also has the
energy usage patterns. Energy read- Real and Reactive energy forward, ability to send a configurable periodic 4
ings include kWh, kVARh, delivered reverse, net and absolute sum, as e-mail with meter information.
and received and kVAh with time. well as Apparent energy (kVAH).
These readings are stored on a fixed Inputs and Outputs 5
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded 5 minute interval. Up to 4 status inputs
Web server supports graphical trend Power Xpert Meter 2000 is available
can be configured as energy accumu- with a standard KYZ output. The
charts of key measurements such as lators for counting KYZ pulse inputs. base meter also includes two
6
current, voltage, power and energy.
The trend chart supports a zoom feature expansion slots for plug-in cards.
Demand Comparisons
that allows the user to view data over
Demand usage patterns can be
See Figure 3.1-19 on Page 3.1-23 for
details. The Power Xpert Meter 2000
7
predefined ranges from as little as
16 hours to as much as 4 years. The analyzed with the month-to-month, embedded Web server card takes up
trend chart includes zoom in/out buttons week-to-week comparison chart one of these option slots, leaving an 8
and a horizontal slider bar control to built into the meter. Raw data can be additional slot that can be populated
manage scrolling forward and backward exported as a .csv file with the Save by one of the following I/O cards.
through the data. Trend charts of basic Table option to other applications for
Two relay outputs/two status inputs 9
readings include minimum, maximum further analysis and graphing.
and average readings. Trend charts of Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
interval by interval energy data also Event Triggers Four analog outputs 01 mA 10
display peak demand. The Power Xpert Meter 2000 has two Four analog outputs 420 mA
levels of configurable event triggers:
Waveform Display Inputs can also be configured for 11
On-board meter limits (PXM 2260/ demand synch and pulse counting.
Sixty cycles of waveform are sampled Inputs selected for pulse counting
2270/2280/2290)
at 400 samples per cycle. The Power
Xpert Meter 2000 embedded Web On-board gateway card limits
can be scaled. Accumulated pulse 12
recordings are maintained in profile
server offers a view of a single-cycle The on-board meter limits can be set memory. Outputs can be used for
waveform to visualize steady-state
harmonic content. Waveforms are
for any measured parameter, for up to alarm annunciation. 13
16 limits. If either of the 16 limits are
presented via a Web browser. By exceeded, an alarm condition will be Ratings
clicking refresh, the waveform is
updated to that period in time.
present and illuminate one of the LEDs Application to any PT ratio, no PTs 14
on the meter faceplate. The on-board required to 600 Vac
meter out of limits can also be used to
Waveform Recording energize a relay output, if so equipped. CT ratios to any CT ratio
15
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 can CT inputs available as 5 or 1 A
The on board gateway limits can secondary
record waveforms at up to 512 samples
trigger an alarm off of any measured
per cycle. Waveform captures are
parameter on any of the PXM 2000
Separate Source Control Power 16
automatically stored on the FTP server Input:
model series. These triggers permit
in the IEEE standard COMTRADE file 90265 Vac or 100370 Vdc
pickup, reset and pickup delay to be
format. This allows users to view
configured by the user. Low voltage 1860 Vdc
17
and analyze the waveforms in any
standard free-of-charge or commercial
COMTRADE file viewer.
Displayed Information 18
Monitored information is available
locally through the display, the
Web browser or system power 19
management software
True rms values through
40th harmonic 20
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2% revenue
metering specification
21

Sheet 03 028

i Web Browser Views
ii
3 Harmonic Spectral Plot Energy Demand Profile
The harmonic spectral plot displays Energy Managers can view load
4 harmonics up to the 40th order. A profile data compared against the peak
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Web Browser detailed table also includes individual demand. The plot allows comparison
magnitudes and angles of current and of present and past months usage.
Power Xpert Meter 2000s embedded voltage harmonics, at each frequency.
5 Web server offers Eaton customers a Individual and total THD are displayed Web Server Device Configuration
new level of accessibility to the critical for diagnostic purposes.
information required to manage the Special software is not required
6 electrical distribution system. The to configure a Power Xpert Meter
embedded Web server includes real 2000. The embedded Web server
time circuit information in both numeric includes a comprehensive device
7 and graphical formats to help monitor configuration engine.
parameters such as current loading,
voltage and power levels and power Discrete Contact Inputs
8 factor. The Web server also provides The optional I/O expansion cards
the energy and demand readings offers two or four digital inputs that
required to help manage the cost of are useful for a variety of applications
9 energy. Readings include kWh, kVARh, such as:
delivered and received and kVAh.
The Web server also includes critical Pulse Counting of KYZ or other utility
10 information regarding Power Quality pulses such as air, water or gas
such as harmonic distortion. Historical Trend Plot Demand interval timing taken
from a master utility meter end
11 Graphical Trending of Data
of interval pulse
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 embedded
Web server supports graphical trend Names can be configured for each
12 charts of key circuit measurements such input for ease of use.
as current, voltage, power and energy.
The trend chart supports a zoom feature
13 that allows the user to view data over
a short period of 16 hours or a longer
period of 48 months. The trend chart
14 has a horizontal slider bar control to
manage scrolling forward and backward
through the data. Trend charts
15 of basic readings include minimum,
Real-Time Visualization of Harmonic Content maximum and average readings.
Trend charts of energy data also
16 The Web server offers a waveform
view to visualize steady-state harmonic display demand values.
content of the voltage and current to
17 spot power quality problems.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 029
Relay Outputs
The optional I/O card includes two 5 A
i
Form C relay outputs rated for 240 Vac
or 30 Vdc or 4 Form A solid-state ii
outputs. These outputs can be used c
for applications such as
Alarm annunciation 1
KYZ pulse output
Alarm outputs can be driven from 2

triggers based on metering values.
Analog Outputs a 3
The optional IO card includes either d
four 420 mA outputs or 01 mA 4
outputs. These outputs can be used
for applications such as:
e
Input to BMS or PLC systems 5
for tracking a measured meter b
parameter
6
Standard Communications Card f
The standard communications card 7
provides one Ethernet connection
and 10/100Base-T port (copper only)
that can be used for the following g 8
applications:
Monitoring, managing and configur- Figure 3.1-19. PXM 2000 Rear View
ing the meter remotely using a 1
9
Power supply inputs
standard Web Browser interface 2 System voltage inputs
Alarm notifications via e-mail, SMTP 3 NEMA 12 gasket 10
4 RS-485
Providing Modbus TCP/IP, RTU
5 KYZ out
and BACnet/IP communications
6
to BMS systems 7
Meter gateway card
I/O slot
11
Providing SNMP communications
to NMS systems
Synchronizing with an NTP server 12
Asset management
Updating firmware on the meter 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 030
i N A B C N A B C
ii 90265 Vac
100370 Vdc
Optional 1860 Vdc
1
GND Control GND
L (+) Power Power
2 HI HI HI
N () Supply HI HI HI
L (+)
N () Supply
Ic Ib Ia VRef Ic Ib Ia VRef
A A
3 LO LO LO
B LO LO LO
B
C x
6
C C
7 N A B C
A
N A B C
8 B A B
9 Figure 3.1-20. Service: Wye or Delta, Four-Wire with No PTs, Two or Three CTs
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
10
A B C
11
12
13 90265 Vac
100370 Vdc
Optional 1860 Vdc
GND
14 L (+)
Control
Power
HI HI HI
N () Supply
Ic Ib Ia VRef
15 LO LO LO
A
B
C
16 C C
or
17
B A B A
18
Not Connected to Meter
19
A B C
20
Figure 3.1-21. Service: Delta, Three-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
21

Sheet 03 031
Power Xpert Meters Configuration and Wiring Examples

i
Modbus RTU Building
(RS-485)
Master
Power Xpert
Software
Web
Browser
Modbus TCP
Master
Automation
System
ii
Water Leak &
Vibration Sensors
1
Rack Monitoring
Open Door/
Tamper Switch 2
Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
3
Alarm
Smoke Alarm 4
Connections:
= Ethernet(Modbus TCP and BACnet/IP Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs
= Modbus RTU (RS-485) Four KYZ pulses/two programmable inputs
Four programmable analog outputs
5
Figure 3.1-22. Web EnabledAdvanced System Functionality Figure 3.1-24. IT Configuration ExamplesAccessories 6
I/O Cards (Option)
8
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count)
Rack Monitoring
9
Open Door/
Tamper Switch
10
11
Alarm Trip and Sequence
of Events
12
Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs
Four KYZ pulses/four programmable inputs
Four programmable analog outputs
13
Figure 3.1-23. AccessoriesI/O Cards (Option)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 032
PXM 2000 Dimensions

i
0.08
ii (2.0)
4.85
(123.2)
1
4.85
2 (123.2)
5.02
4.85 (127.5)
3 (123.2)
4 0.77
(19.6)
0.91
3.25
(23.1)
5 0.95
(82.6)
3.25 0.77
(24.0)
(82.6) (19.6)
6
Figure 3.1-25. PXM 2000 Display Figure 3.1-26. PXM 2000 Meter/Display Figure 3.1-27. PXM 2000 Transducer Only
Front View Side View Side View
7
8 3.38
(85.9) 3.62
4 x .02 (92.0)
(0.5)
9
4.0
(101.6)
10 3.54
(89.9)
3.62
(92.0)
11
12
3.54 1.69
(89.9) (42.9)
13
Figure 3.1-28. PXM 2000 Rear View Figure 3.1-29. ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout Figure 3.1-30. DIN Mounting Cutout
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 033
Ordering Information Power Xpert Meter modules include

To order a Power Xpert Meter 2000,
panel mounting brackets. i
the catalog number should be Example 1: PXM2270MA65145
determined using the chart shown (PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5 A, ii
in Table 3.1-5. The chart illustrates 90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO).
how to include the desired factory
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105
options as part of a catalog number.
(PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5 A, 1
Option cards that are selected at time
of order entry will be installed at the 90265 Vac/Vdc).
factory. Option cards are also field 2
installable for future upgrades.
Table 3.1-5. Power Xpert Meter 2000 Catalog Numbering System 3

PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5
4
Model Series 1 I/O Slot 2
5 = Gateway card
5
2250 =
Energy meter
2260 =
Power quality meter Frequency
2270 =
Power quality plus meter 5 = 50 Hz system
2280 =
Power quality plus with 6 = 60 Hz system Power Supply I/O Slot 1 6
up to 64 samples/cycle 1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc 0 = None
waveform recording 4 = 2460 Vdc 1 = Two relay outputs/two status inputs
meter
2290 = Power quality plus with
2 = Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA
7
up to 512 samples/cycle Current Input 4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA
recording meter 1 = 1 A secondary
5 = 5 A secondary
8
Meter Type
M = Meter (with integral 9
display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
10
Example 1: PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 meter/display 60 Hz, 5 A, 90265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO)
Example 2: PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 meter/display 60 Hz, 5 A, 90265 Vac/Vdc)
11
1 Refer to Table 3.1-8 for model-specific features.
Table 3.1-6. Power Xpert 2000 Meter Accessories 12

Description Catalog
Number
13
Panel-mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a PXM 2000 to an IQ250-PMAK
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ data cutout
PXM 2000 gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK 14
Table 3.1-7. Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards
Description Catalog 15
Number
PXM 2000 I/O card2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1

PXM 2000 I/O card4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2
16
PXM 2000 I/O card4 analog outputs 01 mA IQ250/260-IO3
PXM 2000 I/O card4 analog outputs 420 mA IQ250/260-IO4 17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 034
i Technical Data Isolation KYZ Pulse

All inputs and outputs are galvani- Contacts: 1 Form A
PXM 2000 Series Electronic Power cally isolated to 2500 V On resistance, maximum: 35 ohms
ii Meter Technical Information Environmental Ratings Peak switching voltage: 350 Vdc
Operating temperature: 20 to 70 C Continuous load current: 120 mA
Current Inputs Peak load current: 350 mA (10 ms)
Storage temperature: 20 to 70 C
1 Class 10: 5 A nominal, 10 A maximum
Operating humidity: to 95% RH Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc:
Class 2: 1 A nominal, 2 A maximum 1 uA
noncondensing
Fault current withstand:
2 Faceplate rating: Opto-isolation: 3750 Vac
100 A for 10 seconds
NEMA 12 Dimensions and Shipping
300 A for 3 seconds
Mounting gasket included Weight: 2 lbs (0.91 kg)
3 500 A for 1 second
Sensing Method Basic unit: H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00
Continuous current withstand: inches (H 127.0 x W 124.5 x
Voltage, current: true rms
4 20 A for screw terminated or pass-
Power: sampling at over 400
L 127.0 mm)
through connections PXM 2000 Series: mounts in
Programmable current: full scale samples per cycle on all channels 3.62-inch (92.0 mm) DIN and
5 to any CT ratio Harmonics Resolution: 40th order ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs
Burden: 0.005 VA per phase Update Rate Shipping container dimensions:
maximum at 11A 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) cube
6 Pickup current: 0.1% of nominal
Watts, VAR and VA: 100 msec at
Tolerance: 0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
60 Hz
Class 10: 5 mA
All other parameters: 1 second Compliance
7 Class 2: 1 mA at 60 Hz IEC/EN60687: 0.2% accuracy
Connections: Power Supply ANSI C12.20: 0.2% accuracy
Pass-through wire gauge
8 dimension: 0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
AC/DC voltage option: 90265 Vac ANSI C62.41: burst
at 50/60 Hz or 100370 Vdc, UL/cUL: Electrical & Electronic
Quick connect: 0.25-inch universal AC/DC supply Measuring & Test Equipment 22CZ
9 (6.35 mm) male tab Low voltage DC voltage option: CE
Voltage Inputs 1860 Vdc
Burden: 10 VA maximum
10 Range:
Line-to-neutral 20576 Vac Serial Communications Format
Line-to-line 0721 Vac Connection type: RS-485
11 Programmable voltage range: (through back plate)
full scale to any PT ratio Com port baud rate: 9600
57,600 bauds
12 Supported systems:
3 element wye, 2.5 element wye Com port address: 01247
Data format: 8-bit, no parity
2 element delta, four-wire delta
13 systems Protocols: Modbus ASCII, RTU
or DNP 3.0
Input impedance: 1 megohm/phase
14 Burden: 0.36 VA/phase maximum Network Communications Format
at 600 V; 0.014 VA at 120 V Connection type: RJ-45
Connection: 7-pin 0.400-inch 10/100Base-T Ethernet Network port
15 pluggable terminal block, Protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP,
AWG #1226 (0.1293.31 mm2) Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, HTTP,
HTTPS, NTP, SMTP, SNMP
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 035
Power Xpert Meter 2250 Power Xpert Meter 2260 Power Xpert Meter 2280
Measures basic meter parameters Features of PXM 2250 plus: Features of 2270 plus:
i
256 MB for data logging Harmonics
Up to 64 samples per cycle for
Ethernet On-board meter hardware limits to waveform recording ii
On-board gateway card activate optional relay outputs Configuration of total, pre- and
limits/alarms Visual indication of limits exceeded post-event cycles.
at meter face 1
512 MB for data logging Power Xpert Meter 2290
Features of 2280 plus: 2
Up to 512 samples per cycle for
Features of PXM 2260 plus:
waveform recording 3
Harmonics, including individual
Waveform view to visualize
steady-state harmonic content
768 MB for data logging
4
Table 3.1-8. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benefits 5

Feature Power Xpert Meter Benefit
2250 2260 2270 2280 2290
General
6
Embedded Web Server Use a standard Web browser to monitor and
manage the meter over the network, Internet.
7
Firmware flash update support Enables you to flash the meter with the
latest firmware updates.
Power, Energy and Demand 8
Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, Review voltage and current trends, export, print
average, trend graph analysis, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter or
external software.
Demand plot comparisons month-to-month, Plot two months or two weeks for vivid
9
week-to-week demand comparison.

Power, apparent, real, reactive, power factor Review power usage and power factor and
avoid potential PF penalties.
10
Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, Keep track of your energy usage, identify peaks
TOU, profile, export, print to conserve energy usage.
Power Quality Analysis
11
Statistical analysis (minimum, maximum, average) Review statistical trends, identify past and
future problem areas.
12
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 400 400 400 400 400 High sampling rate resulting in high accuracy.
Security
Secure two level user access privileges Define appropriate security access level per user. 13
Communications
Modbus TCP Easy integration with standard protocol to power
management and other software. 14
Modbus RTU Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks,
daisy chain several (132) meters together.
HTTP, HTTPS Communicate to the meter over the Internet
15
via standard Web browser.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Communicate with the meter via Simple Network
Protocol; hook to existing NMS system. 16
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Send e-mail messages via standard Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol.
NTP (Network Time Protocol) Network Time Protocol support enables the 17
meter to synchronize time over the network.
DNP 3.0 Easy integration with serial DNP networks.
Trend measurements CSV file export Easily export trend measurements to third-party
18
applications, in standard CSV file format.
Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options 19
20
21

Sheet 03 036
Table 3.1-8. Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270Features and Benefits (Continued)

i Feature Power Xpert Meter Benefit
2250 2260 2270 2280 2290
ii Logs
Trend logging Log trend information for easy statistical analysis.
Load profile Review the load profile graph to get a better understanding of
1 your electrical load versus time.
Event logging Log events for retrospective event analysis.
Memory and Storage
2 Standard memory, MB 256 512 768 768 768 Store trend data and events for historical analysis.
Harmonics
3 Harmonic levels 40th 40th 40th 40th Allows you to identify potential harmful harmonics.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter.
Individual harmonics Provides simple metric for power quality viewable from the
4 embedded Web server.
Waveform
Waveform display Waveform view on a PC to visualize steady-state harmonic content
5 through embedded Web server to identify power quality issues.
Waveform recording 64 512 Ability to record waveforms up to specified samples/cycle.
6 I/O
I/O Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional The Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards are extremely flexible
Two relay outputs/two status inputs and can be used in a large variety of different applications. Digital
Four KYZ pulses/four status inputs inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact during
7 Four analog outputs 01 mA various conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices,
Four analog outputs 420 mA such as alarms, pulse meters, trip units and sensors, can be easily
integrated to the Power Xpert Meter 2000. Triggers and events can
8 be tied to the meters standard functions such as e-mail, logs and
trends. Analog outputs can be programmed to output meter
parameters to BMS or PLC systems.
9 Note: These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 037
Power Xpert Energy Viewer
Power Xpert Energy Viewer The final report consists of four tabs. Compatible Devices
i
The first tab, the Power tab, shows the Power Xpert Meter 2000 series
statistics on the raw power data. The
General Description Day, Week and Month tabs show the
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/
8000 series
The Power Xpert Energy Viewer (PXEV) statistics for energy, calculated by ii
provides the means to develop an integrating the power over the Power Xpert Gateway 600 A
energy usage baseline for energy corresponding interval duration. (connected devices that capture watt
management programs, comparing Users can select up to four different and kWh values, i.e., IQ 100 series) 1
interval logged data points. It is a free devices for energy comparison. Power Xpert Gateway PDP card
Web download for compatible Eaton Power Xpert Gateway
product home pages. This tool allows Series 1000 card 2
easy interpretation of the data collected
by compatible devices via graphical
charts, graphs and reports without 3
having to export the available .csv file
into Microsoft Excel or another tool.
4
Application Description
The PXEV is a versatile tool suited
for a wide range of customer
5
applications. Two basic examples
are presented below.
6
Schools and Dormitories
An excellent application for the PXEV
is a Schools and/or Dormitory
7
scenario where each elementary
school in a school district or college
dorm (building) on a campus has a
8
three-phase main meter. The PXEV
could be used to graphically compare
each building, thus determining which
9
is the most energy efficient.
Monitoring Secondary Transformers 10
PXEV users can monitor the secondary
of three-phase transformers (kVA) to
compare transformer loading over Summary Report: Select the different tabs to view the appropriate energy values. The
11
time. This determines the unused, Power tab shows kW or MW power on a 15-minute demand window (normal setting
available capacity when expansion on our devices). The Day/Week/Month tabs show kWh or MWh for those time periods.
projects are planned and engineers
12
need to determine if additional power
transformers need to be purchased/
installed. In the case where more
13
transformers are not necessary
to carry the expansion load, the
information from the PXEV can
14
assist in providing significant
monetary savings. 15
Features
Quickly add an Eaton device 16
specified above using its IP address
Compare two devices energy usage
Compare last month to the
17
current month
Develop an energy baseline 18
Customize/specify values from
the source:
Invert values 19
Magnitude
Resolution 20
Interpolation
Comparison Summary: Users can select up to four different
Customize data range for
summary data
devices for energy comparison. This graphic shows two devices. 21

Sheet 03 038
IQ 250/260 Series
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Features and Benefits Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test
i pulse self-certification capabilities
Power Meters Measure and display real-time
Standard Modbus RTU
information about critical power
communications
ii parameters with a sampling rate
of 400 samples per cycle Available as transducer only or
Monitor power utilization and quality with display
1 with ANSI C12.20 accuracy (0.2%) Field upgradeable to a Power Xpert
Optional 128 KB for data logging, Meter 2000
which guards against loss of Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert
2 historical data Architecture for a holistic system-
level view
3 Additional Features
Table 3.1-9. Features of IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters

4 Features IQ 250 IQ 260
Instrumentation
Current, per phase
5 IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
Current demand
General Description Calculated neutral current
6 The IQ 250 and IQ 260 meters provide Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N)
capabilities you would not normally Frequency
expect in affordable, ultra-compact Power, Energy and Demand
7 meters, such as fast sampling rate Real, reactive and apparent power, total and per phase (kW, kVAR, kVA)
and accurate metering for a full Real, reactive and apparent energy, total and per phase (kWh, kVARh, kVAh)
range of power attributes. Providing
8 the first line of defense against costly Real, reactive and apparent power demand
power problems, Eatons IQ 250 and Power factor, total and per phase
IQ 260 electronic power meters can Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, THD (IQ 260), kW, kVAR, kVA
9 perform the work of an entire wall Demand Methods
of legacy metering equipment using Block interval (sliding, fixed)
todays technology.
10 Data Logging
When space is at a premium, yet you 128 KB for data logging Optional Optional
need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the IQ 250/ Communications
11 260 series fit the bill. These meters are RS-485
ideal for electrical equipment assem-
KYZ output
blies, machine control panels, such as

12 panelboard and switchboard mains and Modbus RTU

feeders, low voltage metal-enclosed Modbus ASCII
switchgear feeders and motor control DNP 3.0
13 centers. Requiring far less space than I/O
other meters with similar functionality, Two digital in/two digital out 1 Optional Optional
IQ 250/260 series fit into a standard
Four digital in/four KYZ out Optional Optional
14 ANSI or IEC cutout on a panelboard or
Four analog output (420 mA) 2 Optional Optional
other electrical equipment, and there-
fore fit easily into retrofit applications. Four analog output (01 mA) Optional Optional
15 Power Quality Analysis
Application Description Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) voltage and current per phase
Utility and commercial metering Alarming
16 Substations, industrial facilities, Set point driven alarm
power generation sites and campuses 1 Digital Out with IQ 250 requires external command.
17 Submetering 2 Requires external power supply.
Load studies and voltage recording
Analog meter replacement
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 039
IQ 250/260 Series
Technical Data and Specifications

i
Table 3.1-10. IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
Description Specifications Description Specifications
ii
Current Inputs Sensing Method
Class 105 Amp. nominal, 10 A maximum Voltage, current True rms
Class 2 1 A nominal, 2 A maximum Power Sampling at over 400 samples 1
per cycle on all channels
Fault current withstand
100 A for: 10 seconds Harmonics resolution 40th order
300 A for: 3 seconds Update Rate 2
500 A for: 1 second
Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
Continuous current withstand 20 A for screw terminated
or pass-through connections All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz 3
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio Power Supply
Burden 0.005 VA per phase maximum AC/DC voltage option 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
at 11A 100370 Vdc, universal 4
AC/DC supply
Pickup current 0.1% of nominal
Class 10 5 mA DC voltage option 1860 Vdc
Class 2 1 mA Burden 10 VA maximum 5
Connections Standard Communications Format
Pass-through wire gauge dimension 0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
Quick connect 0.25-inch male tab Connection type RS-485 (through back plate)
6
Voltage Inputs Com port baud rate 960057,600 bauds
Range Com port address 01247

Line-to-neutral 20576 Vac Data format 8-bit, no parity 7
Line-to-line 0721 Vac Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU or DNP 3.0
Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio KYZ Pulse
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element Contacts 1 Form A
8
wye, 2 element delta, four-wire
delta systems On resistance, maximum 35 Ohms
Input impedance 1 megohm/phase Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc 9
Burden 0.36 VA/phase maximum at Continuous load current 120 mA
600 V; 0.014 VA at 120 Volts Peak load current 350 mA (10 ms)
Connection 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
10
terminal block, AWG #1226
Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
(0.1293.31 mm2)
Isolation
Dimensions and Shipping 11
Weight 2 lbs
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V
Basic unit H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches
Environmental Ratings
IQ 250/260 Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI 12
Operating temperature 20 C to +70 C
C39.1 round cut-outs
Storage temperature 20 C to +70 C
Shipping container dimensions 6.00-inch cube
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing
Tolerance 0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
13
Faceplate rating NEMA 12
Compliance
mounting gasket included
IEC 687 0.2% accuracy 14
ANSI C12.20 0.2% accuracy
ANSI C62.41 Burst
UL/cUL Electrical and electronic
15
measuring and test
equipment 22CZ
CE Meets EU safety, health and 16
environmental requirements
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 040
IQ 250/260 Series
IQ 250/260 Meter Dimensions

i
ii 4.85 (123.2) 4.97 (126.2) 4.93 (125.2)

4.20 (106.7) 4.16 (105.7)
2 4.85
(123.2)
5.02
(127.5)
3.54
(89.9)
3
Expandable I/O Componentry
4 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
IQ 250/260 Face IQ 250/260M Side IQ 250/260T Side
5
Figure 3.1-31. IQ 250/260 Meter DimensionsFace and Side Views
6 Ordering Information
Table 3.1-11. IQ 250/260 Meter Catalog Numbering System
7
IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0
8
Model Series I/O Slot 2
9 250 = Power I/O Slot 1 0 = None
260 = Power quality Data Logging 0 = None 1 = Two relay outputs/
A = None Current Input 1 = Two relay outputs/ two status inputs
10 Meter Type L = On-board 1 = 1 A secondary two status inputs 2 = Four KYZ pulses/
four status inputs
data logging 5 = 5 A secondary 2 = Four KYZ pulses/
M = Meter (with four status inputs 3 = Four analog
integral display) 3 = Four analog outputs: 01 mA
11 T = Transducer only Frequency Power Supply outputs: 01 mA 4 = Four analog
(no display) 4 = Four analog outputs: 420 mA
5 = 50 Hz system 1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc
outputs: 420 mA
6 = 60 Hz system 4 = 2448 Vdc
12
Table 3.1-12. IQ 250/260 Meter Accessories
13
Description Catalog
Number
14 Panel mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 250/260 to an IQ250-PMAK
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout
PXM 2000 Gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK
15
Table 3.1-13. Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards
Description Catalog
16 Number
IQ 250/260 I/O card2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1

17 IQ 250/260 I/O card4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2
IQ 250/260 I/O card4 analog outputs 01 mA IQ250/260-IO3
IQ 250/260 I/O card4 analog outputs 420 mA IQ250/260-IO4
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 041
IQ 130/140/150 Series
IQ 130/140/150 Electronic Application Description Monitor power utilization and

quality with ANSI C12.20 i
Power Meters Utility and commercial metering accuracy (0.5%)
Substations, industrial facilities, Verify meter accuracy with KYZ test
power generation sites and campuses pulse self-certification capabilities ii
Submetering Optional Modbus RTU or TCP
Load studies and voltage recording communications
Analog meter replacement
1
Available as transducer only or
with display
Features and Benefits Designed to accommodate 2
Measure and display real-time upgrades
information about critical power Integrate into Eatons Power
parameters with a sampling rate Xpert Architecture for a holistic 3
of 400 samples per cycle system-level view
Additional Features 4
Table 3.1-14. Features of IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters
IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter
Features IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150 5
General Description Instrumentation

The IQ 100 meter family provides
Current, per phase

6
Current demand
capabilities you would not normally
expect in affordable, compact Calculated neutral current
meters, such as fast sampling rate Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) 7
and accurate metering for a full range Min./max. readings, I, V
of power attributes. Providing the Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA
first line of defense against costly Frequency
8
power problems, Eatons IQ 100 series
Power
electronic power meters can perform
the work of an entire wall of legacy Real, reactive and apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA) 9
metering equipment utilizing Power factor, total
todays technology. Real, reactive and apparent power demand
Demand Methods
10
When space is at a premium, yet
you need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, the Block interval (sliding, fixed)
IQ 100 series fits the bill. These meters Energy 11
are ideal for electrical equipment Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, VAh)
assemblies, machine control panels, Communications
such as panelboard and switchboard
RS-485, Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, KYZ output Optional Optional Optional
12
mains and feeders, low voltage
metal-enclosed switchgear feeders RJ45, Modbus TCP, KYZ output Optional Optional Optional
and motor control centers. Requiring 13
far less space than other meters with
similar functionality, IQ 100 series
meters fit into a standard ANSI or 14
IEC cutout on a panelboard or other
electrical equipment, and therefore
fit easily into retrofit applications. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 042
IQ 130/140/150 Series

i
Table 3.1-15. IQ 100 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information
ii Description Specifications Description Specifications
Current Inputs Sensing Method
Class 10 5 A nominal, 10 A maximum Voltage, current True rms
1 Class 2 1 A nominal, 2 A maximum Power Sampling at over 400 samples
per cycle on all channels
Fault Current Withstand
100 A for: 10 seconds Update Rate
2 300 A for: 3 seconds Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
500 A for: 1 second
All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz
Continuous current withstand 20 A for screw terminated or
3 pass-through connections Power Supply
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio AC/DC voltage option 90265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
100370 Vdc, universal
Burden 0.005 VA per phase maximum
4 at 11A
AC/DC supply
DC voltage option 1860 Vdc
Pickup current 0.1% of nominal
Burden 10 VA maximum
Class 10 5 mA
5 Class 2 1 mA
Optional Communications Format
Connection type RS-485 or RJ45
Connections
(through back plate)
6 Pass-through wire gauge dimension
Quick connect
0.177 inches (4.5 mm)
0.25-inch male tab Com. port baud rate 960057,600 bauds
Voltage Inputs Com. port address 01247
7 Range Data format 8-bit, no parity
Line-to-neutral 20576 Vac Protocols Modbus ASCII/RTU or TCP
Line-to-line 0721 Vac
Optional KYZ Pulse
8 Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio
Contacts 1 Form A
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element
wye, 2 element delta, four-wire On resistance, maximum 35 Ohms
9 delta systems Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc

Input impedance 1 megohm/phase Continuous load current 120 mA
Burden 0.36 VA/phase maximum at Peak load current 350 mA (10 ms)
10 600 V; 0.014 VA at 120 V Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
Connection 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
(0.1293.31 mm2) Dimensions and Shipping
11
Isolation Weight 2 lbs
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V Basic unit H 5.00 x W 4.90 x L 5.00 inches
12 Environmental Ratings IQ 100 Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI
C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions 6.00-inch cube
13 Storage temperature 40 C to +85 C
Tolerance 0.10 inches (2.54 mm)
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing
Compliance
Faceplate rating NEMA 12 water-resistant
14 mounting gasket Included IEC 687 0.5% accuracy
ANSI C12.20 0.5% accuracy
ANSI C62.41 Burst
15 UL/cUL/CE Electrical and electronic
measuring and test
equipment 22CZ
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 043
IQ 130/140/150 Series
IQ 100 Meter Dimensions

i
4.85 (123.2) 4.97 (126.2) 4.93 (125.2)
ii
4.20 (106.7) 4.16 (105.7)
4.85
(123.2)
5.02
(127.5)
3.54 2
(89.9)
IQ 100T Transducer Only
3
3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6) 4

IQ 100M Front View IQ 100M Side View IQ 100T Side View
5
Figure 3.1-32. IQ 100 Meter DimensionsFront and Side Views
Ordering Information 6
Table 3.1-16. IQ 100 Meter Catalog Numbering System
7
IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1
8
Model Series Communication
130 = Volts/amps Meter Type
Frequency Current Input
Power Supply 0 = None 9
140 = Power M = Meter (with 1 = 90265 Vac/Vdc 1 = Modbus RTU
150 = Energy integral display) 5 = 50 Hz system 1 = 1 A secondary 4 = 2448 Vac and KYZ pulse
T = Transducer only
(no display)
6 = 60 Hz system 5 = 5 A secondary 2 = Modbus TCP
and KYZ pulse
10
11
Table 3.1-17. IQ 100 Meter Accessories
Description Catalog
Number 12
Panel mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 100 to an IQ250-PMAK
IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data cutout
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016
Sheet 03 044

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

April 2016 Eaton Submeter Overview
Sheet 03 045
IQ 35M
IQ 35M Application Description Features and Benefits

i
Commercial submetering DIN rail or surface mounted
Energy management watthour meter with demand
Industrial monitoring Affordable, lightweight and compact ii
Cost allocation
meter providing watthours energy
information
Included backlit LCD display for 1
local reading
Power and energy readings
kW
2
kWh
IQ 35M Peak demand available 3
Monitors
General Description
The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a DIN rail
Watts, watthours, watt demand 4
Volts, amperes
meter that combines exceptional
performance and easy installation PF, frequency
to deliver a cost-effective solution
5
VARs, VA
for energy and power monitoring
Optional data logging capability
applications, as well as submetering
applications. All models include pulse Optional serial communications 6
output and phase alarms for true (Modbus-RTU or BACnet MS/TP)
versatility in all situations. The Revenue grade, ANSI C12.20 0.5%
Modbus output options offer accuracy, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
7
added flexibility for configuration User-enabled password protection
and data analysis. On-board diagnostics 8
The IQ 35M allows you to:
Verify energy bills 9
Make informed load shifting
and shedding decisions
Fairly and accurately allocate 10
energy costs to users
IQ 35M mounted and wired in
Identify wasteful practices Eaton panelboard. Closeup photo 11
Decrease unnecessary usage showing IQ 35M panelboard
Produce an energy profile integration and deadfront cover.
Secure the optimum utility Note: Please refer to Tab 22 for 12

rate structure panelboard information.
IQ 35M in optional NEMA 4X enclosure.

13
Enclosure shipped loose for field
mounting of meter. Enclosure only
model number: IQ35M-ENC. 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Eaton Submeter Overview April 2016
Sheet 03 046
IQ 35M
Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications Environmental

i Voltage input Operating temperature range
Table 3.2-1. Catalog Number Selection UL: 90 V (L-N) to 600 V (L-L) Meter: 30 to 70 C (22 to 158 F)
Display: 10 to 50 C (14 to 122 F)
ii CE: 90 V (L-N) to 300 V (L-L)
Storage temperature range
IQ35M A 1 1 Current input
Meter: 40 to 85 C (40 to 185 F)
Scaling: 532,767A
1 Input range: 00.333 V or Display: 10 to 60 C (14 to 140 F)
Meter Series
01 V (selectable) Humidity range
Control power <95% RH noncondensing
Enclosure Type
2 UL: 90 V (L-N) to 600 V (L-L) Data Outputs
1 = Standard energy
CE: 90 V (L-N) to 300 V (L-L)
2 = Four quadrant energy kW, kWh: Total
3 Output Option
Accuracy Current: Three-phase average and
Real power and energy per phase
1 = Pulse output only 0.5% (ANSI C12.20, IEC 62053-22 Voltage: Three-phase average, per
4 2 = Pulse output + Modbus
3 = Pulse output + Modbus + Class 0.5S) phase, and line-line and line-neutral
data logging
Outputs Power: Real, reactive and apparent;
5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet + Three-phase total and per phase
5 data logging IQ35MAx1 thru 3:
Power factor: Three-phase average
Real energy pulse: NO static;
alarm contacts: NC static and per phase
6 Accessories IQ35MA11
Frequency
Reactive energy pulse 30 Vac/dc Power demand: most recent
NEMA 4 enclosure and peak
IQ35MAx2, IQ35MAx3
7 Fuse kits RS-485 two-wire Modbus RTU Demand configuration: fixed,
DIN rail IQ35MA15 RS-485 two-wire
rolling block and external sync
Replacement mounting clips Data logging (IQ35MAx3)
8 BACnet MS/TP
10 configurable data buffers;
CTssolid and split core
Inputs configurable demand subinterval
IQ35MA15 (when set at a 15-minute interval,
9 Two pulse accumulators buffers store data for 60 days)
Data logging (IQ35MA15)
Mechanical
10 Mounting
6 configurable data buffers;
configurable demand subinterval
DIN rail or 3-point screwmount (when set at a 15-minute interval,
11 buffers store data for 60 days)
Trending requires communication
network to retrieve data
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 047
IQ 35M
ii
9
Figure 3.2-1. IQ 35M Product Diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.2-2. IQ 35M Advanced CommunicationModbus RTU

Sheet 03 048
IQ 35M
ii
8
Figure 3.2-3. IQ 35M Advanced CommunicationBACnet
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 Figure 3.2-4. IQ 35M Mechanical Installation
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 049
IQ 35M
Dimensions
i
ii
5
Figure 3.2-5. Dimensional Drawing
Figure 3.2-7. Wall Mount Configuration
6
10
11
Figure 3.2-6. DIN Rail Configuration

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 050
IQ 35M
i IQ 35M Current Transducers

Low Current Ranges
ii 5600 A
General Description
1 Solid- and split-core AC current
transducers have different hole
sizes and current ratings to suit any
2 application. The solid-core models
are ideal for new construction projects.
Split-core models are perfect for
3 retrofits. Output is fixed at the industry Figure 3.2-8. IQ 35M-SO Solid Core
CT Dimensions
standard of 00.333 Vac.
Figure 3.2-9. IQ 35M-SO Split-Core
4 Application Description CT Dimensions
Data logging
Table 3.2-2. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)
5 Recording
Description A B C D E Model Number
Power monitoring
Solid Core
Energy management
6 Alternative energy monitoring
IQ 35M CT, 5 A:0.33 Vac,
0.30 inch
0.30
(8.0)
1.70
(44.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-30-5
Cost allocation IQ 35M CT, 20 A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 1.70 0.75 IQ35M-SO-030-20
0.30 inch (8.0) (44.0) (19.0)
7 Features IQ 35M CT, 50 A:0.33 Vac, 0.50 1.90 0.75 IQ35M-SO-050-50
0.50 inch (13.0) (49.0) (19.0)
High accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130%
8 of rated current IQ 35M CT, 50 A:0.33 Vac,
0.75 inch
0.75
(19.0)
2.10
(54.0)
0.75
(19.0)
IQ35M-SO-075-50
00.333 Vac standard output

IQ 35M CT, 100 A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 2.70 0.80 IQ35M-SO-125-100
Solid-core models have a rugged
9 epoxy encapsulated construction,
1.25 inch (32.0) (69.0) (21.0)
IQ 35M CT, 200 A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 2.70 0.80 IQ35M-SO-125-200
giving it outstanding durability 1.25 inch (32.0) (69.0) (21.0)
10 Split-core models have interleaving IQ 35M CT, 250 A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 2.70 0.80 IQ35M-SO-125-250
joints for reliability with a self- 1.25 inch (32.0) (69.0) (21.0)
locking mechanism and no IQ 35M CT, 300 A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 2.70 0.80 IQ35M-SO-125-300
11 exposed metal; a safe design 1.25 inch (32.0) (69.0) (21.0)
IQ 35M CT, 400 A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 2.70 0.80 IQ35M-SO-125-400
Standards and Certifications 1.25 Inch (32.0) (69.0) (21.0)
12 UR Split Core
CE IQ 35M CT, 5 A:0.33 Vac, 2.00 2.10 0.61 0.75 0.75 IQ35M-SP-075-5
0.75 inch (51.0) (54.0) (16.0) (20.0) (20.0)
RoHS
13 IQ 35M CT, 30 A:0.33 Vac, 2.00 2.10 0.61 0.75 0.75 IQ35M-SP-075-30
0.75 inch (51.0) (54.0) (16.0) (20.0) (20.0)
Technical Data and Specifications IQ 35M CT, 50 A:0.33 Vac, 2.00 2.10 0.61 0.75 0.75 IQ35M-SP-075-50
14 Inputs
0.75 inch (51.0) (54.0) (16.0) (20.0) (20.0)
IQ 35M CT, 100 A:0.33 Vac, 2.00 2.10 0.61 0.75 0.75 IQ35M-SP-075-100
Frequency range: 50400 Hz 0.75 inch (51.0) (54.0) (16.0) (20.0) (20.0)
15 Accuracy: 1% at 10% to 130% IQ 35M CT, 200 A:0.33 Vac, 2.00 2.10 0.61 0.75 0.75 IQ35M-SP-075-200
of rated current 0.75 inch (51.0) (54.0) (16.0) (20.0) (20.0)
IQ 35M CT, 250 A:0.33 Vac, 3.25 3.35 1.00 1.25 1.25 IQ35M-SP-125-250
16 Outputs 1.25 inch (83.0) (86.0) (26.0) (32.0) (32.0)
At rated current: 0.333 Vac IQ 35M CT, 300 A:0.33 Vac, 3.25 3.35 1.00 1.25 1.25 IQ35M-SP-125-300
1.25 inch (83.0) (86.0) (26.0) (32.0) (32.0)
17 Environmental
IQ 35M CT, 400 A:0.33 Vac, 3.25 3.35 1.00 1.25 1.25 IQ35M-SP-125-400
Operating temperature range: 1.25 inch (83.0) (86.0) (26.0) (32.0) (32.0)
10 to 55 C (14 to 131 F) IQ 35M CT, 600 A:0.33 Vac, 3.25 3.35 1.00 1.25 1.25 IQ35M-SP-125-600
18 Storage temperature range: 1.25 inch (83.0) (86.0) (26.0) (32.0) (32.0)
40 to 70 C (40 to 158 F)
19 Lead Length
8-foot twisted pair
20
21

Sheet 03 051
IQ 35M
IQ 35M Current Transducers Technical Data and Specifications

i
High Current Ranges Inputs
8002400 A Frequency range: 50/60 Hz
ii
Accuracy: 1% of reading from
General Description 10% to 100% of the rated current
The IQ 35M split-core current of the CTs 1
transducers, high current ranges, Outputs
provide a safe 00.333 Vac output for
At rated current: 0.333
use with the IQ 35M energy meter. 2
Mechanical
Application Description Installation category: Cat II or Cat III
Data logging 3
Environmental
Recording Figure 3.2-10. IQ 35M-SP-25X
Operating temperature range:
Power monitoring
15 to 60 C (5 to 140 F) 4
Energy management
Storage temperature range:
Alternative energy monitoring 40 to 70 C (40 to 158 F)
Cost allocation
5
Humidity range:
095% noncondensing
Features 6
Lead Length
High accuracy: 1% of reading from
10% to 100% of rated current 6-foot twisted pair
00.333 V output
Table 3.2-3. IQ 35MDimensions in Inches (mm)
7
Standards and Certifications Description A B C D E F Model Number
UR
Split Core 8
IQ 35M CT, 4.90 2.90 2.50 1.20 5.20 5.90 IQ35M-SP-253-800
CE 800 A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch (125.0) (73.0) (62.0) (30.0) (132.0) (151.0)
IQ 35M CT, 4.90 5.50 2.50 1.20 7.90 6.00 IQ35M-SP-255-1000 9
1000 A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch (125.0) (139.0) (62.0) (30.0) (201.0) (151.0)
IQ 35M CT, 4.90 5.50 2.50 1.20 7.90 6.00 IQ35M-SP-255-1200
1200 A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch (125.0) (139.0) (62.0) (30.0) (201.0) (151.0) 10
IQ 35M CT, 4.90 5.50 2.50 1.20 7.90 6.00 IQ35M-SP-255-1600
1600 A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch (125.0) (139.0) (62.0) (30.0) (201.0) (151.0)
IQ 35M CT, 4.90 5.50 2.50 1.20 7.90 6.00 IQ35M-SP-255-2000
11
2000 A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch (125.0) (139.0) (62.0) (30.0) (201.0) (151.0)
IQ 35M CT, 4.90 5.50 2.50 1.20 7.90 6.00 IQ35M-SP-255-2400
2400 A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch (125.0) (139.0) (62.0) (30.0) (201.0) (151.0) 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 052
IQ 35M
Supported System Types voltage inputs are valid, which are to loss algorithm is configured as a
i The IQ 35M power meters have a
be ignored, and whether neutral is percent of the Line-to-Line System
connected. Setting the correct System Voltage (except when in System
number of different possible system Type prevents unwanted energy Type 10) and also calculates the
ii wiring configurations (see wiring
diagrams on Page 3.2-9). To configure
accumulation on unused inputs, expected Line to Neutral voltages
selects the formula to calculate the for system types that have Neutral
the meter, set the System Type via the Theoretical Maximum System Power, (12 and 40).
1 User Interface or Modbus register 130 and determines which phase loss
(if so equipped). The System Type tells algorithm is to be used. The phase
the meter which of its current and
2 Table 3.2-4. Supported System Types
Number CTs Voltage Connections System Type Phase Loss Measurements Wiring
3 of Wires Qty ID Qty ID Type Modbus User Interface: VLL VLN Balance Diagram
Figure
Register 130 SETUP>S SYS
Number
4 Single-Phase Wiring
2 1 A 2 A, N L-N 10 1L + 1n AN 3.2-11
2 1 A 2 A, B L-L 11 2L AB 3.2-12
5 3 2 A, B 3 A, B, N L-L with N 12 2L + 1n AB AN, BN AN-BN 3.2-13
Three-Phase Wiring
3 3 A, B, C 3 A, B, C Delta 31 3L AB, BC, CA AB-BC-CA 3.2-14
6 4 3 A, B, C 4 A, B, C, N Grounded 40 3L + 1n AB, BC, CA AN, BN, CN AN-BN-CN 3.2-15
wye and AB-BC-CA 3.2-16
7 Table 3.2-5. Wiring

Symbol Description
8 Voltage disconnect switch
Fuse (installer is responsible for ensuring compliance with local

9 requirements. No fuses are included with the device.)
Earth ground
10
S1 Current transducer
11
S2
Potential transformer
12
Protection containing a voltage disconnect switch with a fuse or
disconnect circuit breaker. The protection device must be rated for
13 the available short-circuit current at the connection point.
Note: IQ 35MA1x models are not polarity sensitive. No need to observe polarity when wiring.
14 IQ 35MA2x models are polarity sensitive. Observe correct polarity when wiring.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 053
IQ 35M
Wiring Diagrams
i
Use System Type 31 (3L)
Use System Type 10 (1L + ln)
L1 L2 L3 ii
N L1
1
A
A
B
B
C
2
C
N N
X1 White X1 White
3
+ +
Black A Black A

X2
+
X2 X1 White + 4
B Black B

X2 X1 White
+ +

C Black
C 5
X2
Figure 3.2-11. Single-Phase Line-to-Neutral Two-Wire System, 1 CT Figure 3.2-14. Three-Phase, Three-Wire, 3 CTs, No PT
6
Use System Type 11 (2L) Use System Type 40 (3L + ln)

7
L1 L2 N L1 L2 L3
8
A A 9
B B
C C
N N 10
X1 White X1 White
+ +
Black

A
X2
Black

A 11
X2 X1 White
+ +
B Black B

+
X2 X1 White
+ 12
C Black C

X2
13
Figure 3.2-12. Single-Phase Line-to-Line Two-Wire System, 1 CT Figure 3.2-15. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Direct Voltage Connection,
3 CTs
14
Use System Type 12 (2L + ln)
N L1 L2 N L1 L2 L3
15
A A
16
B B
C
C
N N 17
X1 White X1 White
Black
+
A Black
+

A 18
X2 X1 White
X2
+ +
X1 White B Black B
Black
X2 X1 White

+
19
+ Black C
X2 C
X2
20
Figure 3.2-13. Single-Phase Direct Voltage Connection, 2 CTs Figure 3.2-16. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Connection, 3 CTs, 3 PTs
21

Sheet 03 054
IQ 35M
Control Power
i
ii
G 1 2 G 1 2
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
1
3
Figure 3.2-17. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Line) Figure 3.2-20. Control Power Transformer (CPT) Connection
4 Line-to-Line from 90 Vac to 600 Vac (UL) (520 Vac CE). In The Control Power Transformer may be wired L-N or L-L.
UL installations, the lines may be floating (i.e., a delta). If Output to meet meter input requirements
any lines are tied to an earth (i.e., a corner grounded delta),
Fuse Recommendations
5 see the Line-to-Neutral installation limits. In CE installations,
the lines must be neutral (earth) referenced at less than Keep the fuses close to the power source (obey local
300 Vac L-N. and national code requirements).
6 For selecting fuses and circuit breakers, use the
following criteria:
7 G 1 2
Current interrupt capacity should be selected based
N L1 L2 L3
on the installation category and the fault current capability
Overcurrent protection should be selected with
8 a time delay
The voltage rating should be sufficient for the input
voltage applied
9
Provide overcurrent protection and disconnecting means
to protect the wiring. For DC installations, the installer
10 must provide external circuit protection (suggested: 0.5 A,
time delay fuses)
Figure 3.2-18. Direct Connect Control Power (Line-to-Neutral)
The earth connection is required for electromagnetic
Line-to-Neutral from 90 Vac to 347 Vac (UL) or 300 Vac (CE).
11 compatibility (EMC) and is not a protective earth ground
12
G 1 2
13
14
Figure 3.2-19. Direct Connect Control Power (DC)
15 DC control power from 125 Vdc to 300 Vdc (UL and CE max.).
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 055
IQ 150S/250S Series
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Features and Benefits Perhaps you dont have network drops
i
in all the right places. The IQ 150S/250S
Electronic Meters Self-enclosed, these meters are an offers a wireless communications
ideal solution for surface mounting option. The transmissions are encrypted
next to a selected piece of equip- using 128-bit Wired Equivalent Pri- ii
ment for energy monitoring vacy (WEP) for security.
NEMA 12 enclosure with a large,
easy-to-read faceplate, consistent Industry-Standard Communication 1
with other Eaton meter models, Protocols
designed with knockouts for easy
installation Standard Modbus RS-485 Communication 2
Ethernet communications option Standard communication includes
for either wired or wireless setup, an RS-485 output speaking Modbus
allowing for additional ease of protocol. This allows the unit to be 3
installation and integration into connected to any serial RS-485 bus
existing networks using the Modbus interface. The unit
Available data and alarm recording
communicates easily with most building 4
automation, Power Xpert Software
for historical records/trending or other software systems. Baud rates
Integrate into Eatons Power Xpert are up to 57.6K baud to provide fast 5
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Architecture for a holistic system-
Electronic Meter update times.
level view
Wi-Fi or Land-Based Ethernet 6
General Description Wireless and High-End Capabilities you The unit offers an Ethernet option
With energy costs skyrocketing, you would not Expect from a Self-Enclosed, configured either as an RJ45 or Wi-Fi
need the ability to verify the accuracy Compact Meter
of utility billing and allocation of Providing the first line of defense
connection. The Wi-Fi configuration 7
allows the 150S/250S to be used on
energy costs among business units, against costly power problems, standard Wi-Fi base stations. The unit
different manufacturing areas or Eatons IQ 150S/250S electronic self- is assigned an IP address; it communi- 8
facilities, and tenants. Production enclosed meters can perform the work cates Modbus protocol over Ethernet
equipment and IT systems are of an entire wall of legacy metering TCP/IP. Wireless Ethernet is reliable
vulnerable to power anomalies;
therefore, you must ensure that power
equipment using todays secure and easy to integrate, making it the 9
wireless technology. Eatons IQ 150S/ superior solution for mass meter
is always up to specifications. If your 250S meters use 24-bit AD converters deployment.
infrastructure is an established facility, that sample at more than 400 samples
KYZ Pulse
10
you may not currently have metering per cycle and meet IEC 687 (0.2%
or may have addressed these concerns accuracy) and ANSI C12.20 (0.2% For applications in which a pulse is
by deploying a variety of analog accuracy) standards. With such high- needed, the unit also provides a KYZ 11
gauges and metersone for volts, one performance measurement capability, output that pulses proportional to
for amperes and so on, with separate these meters can be confidently used the amount of energy consumed.
meters for each measurement. for primary revenue metering and This feature is used for pulse counting 12
submetering applications. applications into building management
If youre planning an upgrade or a new systems where serial or Ethernet
power infrastructure, no doubt you Either model will help you monitor
would like to capitalize on the latest energy demand, while the IQ 250S pro-
protocol is not available. 13
technology to improve upon that vides the extra benefit of also Verify Energy Bills
cumbersome architecture and its monitoring and recording the changes
patchwork view. in the characteristics of your power.
The IQ 150S/250S models provide a 14
traceable watthour test pulse (used
Eatons IQ 150S/250S meters provide with a watthour pulse recorder or total-
Application Description izer), so you can verify the accuracy of 15
direct-reading metered values for
Industrial and commercial buildings, the most critical power aspects, such your meter and in turn, the accuracy of
metering and submetering as watts, watt demand, watthours, billing from your utility company and
Government facilities and military voltage amperes (VA), VA-hours, VARs, to internal customers. 16
Universities and airports VAR-hours and power factor. They have
Load studies and voltage recording high sampling speed and accuracy.
17
These meters are self-enclosed in a
NEMA 12 enclosure with knockouts
on the bottom for communication 18
and power, providing for an easy
installation.
19
20
21

Sheet 03 056
IQ 150S/250S Series
Integrated with Eatons Power Xpert Table 3.2-6. Features of IQ 150S/250S Electronic Power Meters
i Architecture Features IQ 150S IQ 250S
IQ 150S/250S meters integrate into Instrumentation
Eatons Power Xpert Architecture,
ii where meters, gateways and monitor-
Current, per phase
Calculated neutral current
ing devices collaborate to create a uni-
Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N)
fied, centralized view of the end-to-end
1 power and facility infrastructure. Frequency
Minimum/maximum readings, I 1, V 1, PF, F, W, VAR, VA Total Total and per phase
When used in this architecture, either
2 with a Power Xpert Gateway or directly
Power
via Ethernet, the meters with the Mod- Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA) Total Total and per phase
bus RTU option can provide Web- Power factor Average Average and per phase
3 based graphics of current power con- Demand Methods
ditions. Simply connect your meter to Block interval (fixed, sliding)
a Power Xpert Gateway to translate Current demand
4 Modbus-based information from the
Real, reactive and apparent power demand Total Total and per phase
meter into HTML-based Web pages
that are accessible from any standard Energy
5 Web browser. If you select a model Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh) Total Total and per phase
with the Ethernet option, the meter can Real and reactive, net and positive and negative (Wh, VARh) Total Total and per phase
easily be monitored remotely via I/O
6 Power Xpert Software or another third- Pulse output
party monitoring system. With access
to accurate, real-time information from Communications
7 IQ 150S/250S meters, Power Xpert RS-485, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0
Architecture can transform your power RJ45 or 802.11b, Modbus TCP 2 Optional Optional
system into an integrated, agile sys- Data Logging
8 tem, and an easily managed entity that 2 MB for data logging
performs better and costs less.
Alarming
9 Designed for the User Set point driven alarm
When space is at a premium, yet you 1 Per phase only.
need ANSI C12.20 accuracy, Eaton 2 If configured for Ethernet, RS-485 not available.
10 IQ 150S/250S meters fit the bill. These
ultra-compact meters are ideal for sur-
face mounting next to a selected piece
11 of equipment for energy monitoring.
Requiring far less space than other
meters with similar functionality,
12 and offering a NEMA 12 enclosure
and a large, easy-to-read faceplate,
consistent with other Eaton meter
13 models, these meters are designed
with knockouts for easy retrofit
installation.
14
Most meters in this class have small or
dark displays that can be hard to see,
15 especially from a distance. Eatons
IQ 150S/250S meters have a large,
bright red, three-line LED display, each
16 line more than a half-inch tall. This
display is very easy to read, even if the
meter is installed at a height or distance.
17 Using the keypad and menus on the
local display, users can display a
variety of electrical system values or
18 program the meter.
19
20
21

Sheet 03 057
IQ 150S/250S Series

i
Table 3.2-7. IQ 150S/250S Electronic Meter Technical Information
Description Specifications Description Specifications ii
Current Inputs Update Rate
Class 10 5 A nominal, 10 A maximum Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
Class 2 1 A nominal, 2 A maximum All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz 1
Fault Current Withstand Power Supply
20 A for: 10 seconds
60 A for: 3 seconds
AC/DC voltage option 90400 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
100370 Vdc, universal
2
100 A for: 1 second
AC/DC supply
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio
Burden 0.005 VA per phase maximum
Burden 16 VA maximum
3
at 11A Standard Serial Communications Format
Pickup Current 0.1% of nominal Connection type RS-485
Class 10 5 mA Communications port baud rate 960057,600 Bauds 4
Class 2 1 mA Communications port address 01247
Connections Data format 8-bit, no parity
Screw terminal #632 screws
Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU, DNP 3.0
5
Voltage Inputs
Optional Ethernet Communications Format
Range
Line-to-neutral 20416 Vac (IQ150S), Connection type RJ45 or 802.11b (wireless) 6
20576 Vac (IQ250S) Protocols Modbus TCP
Line-to-line 20721 Vac
KYZ Pulse
Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio
Contacts 1 Form A
7
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element
On resistance, maximum 35 Ohms
wye, 2 element delta, four-wire
delta systems Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc 8
Input impedance 1 megohm/phase Continuous load current 120 mA
Burden 0.36 VA/phase maximum at Peak load current 350 mA (10 ms)
600 V; 0.014 VA at 120V Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
9
Connection 7-pin, 0.400-inch screw Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
(0.1293.31 mm2) Dimensions and Shipping 10
Isolation Weight 4 lbs
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 V Basic unit H 7.90 x W 7.50 x D 3.10 inches
Environmental Ratings Compliance 11
Operating temperature 20 C to +70 C IEC 687 0.2% accuracy
Storage temperature 20 C to +70 C ANSI C12.20 0.2% accuracy 12
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing ANSI C62.41 Burst
Faceplate rating NEMA 12 ANSI (IEEE) C37.90.1 Surge withstand
Sensing Method UL/cUL Electrical and electronic 13
measuring and test equipment
Voltage, current rms 22CZ
Power Sampling at over 400 samples 14
per cycle on all channels Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and repre-
sent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed.
This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may
vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product
15
model. Please refer to User Manual for detailed specifications.
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 058
IQ 150S/250S Series
Wiring Diagram
i
ii
6 Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE Direct Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE with PTS
10
11
12
13
Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct
14 Figure 3.2-21. IQ 150S/250S Wiring Diagram
Installation Diagram Dimensions in Inches (mm)

15
16 7.53
(191.3)
3.70
17 (94.0)
18
5.60
Closed O Mounting 7.90 7.90
(142.2)
Plate (200.7) (200.7)
19
0.50
20 Lockable
Revenue Seal
(12.7) 5.95 Antenna Length: 3.11
(79.0)
(151.1) 4.40 (111.8)
21 Figure 3.2-22. IQ 150S/250S Installation Figure 3.2-23. IQ 150S/250S Meter Dimensions

Sheet 03 059
IQ 150S/250S Series
Ordering Information
i
Table 3.2-8. IQ 150S/250S Meter Catalog Numbering System
ii
IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1
1
Model Series Communication
150 = Energy Meter Type Power Supply 1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
250 = Energy plus S = Self-enclosed meter Frequency 1 = 90400 Vac/dc 2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485) 2
5 = 50 Hz system or TCP(RJ45)
6 = 60 Hz system or 802.11b (Wi-Fi)
Current Input
3
1 = 1 A secondary
5 = 5 A secondary
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 060
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
i Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter The circuits listed above can be mixed Features
provided that the total number of
High-Density Metering current sensors does not exceed 60. Monitors power and energy for up
The meter provides current; voltage; to 60 current sensors; spacesaving
ii power factor; demand and active, modular design allows measure-
ment from 1 to 60 circuits
reactive, and real power (VA, VAR,
kW); and active, reactive and real Built-in communication interfaces
1 energy (VA, VAR, kWh) measurements Monitors single-phase and three-
for each load. The unit also provides phase loads from 120 to 600 Vac
up to two years at 15-minute intervals Monitors current, voltage, power
2 or eight years at one-hour intervals of factor, frequency, power and energy
demand data logging storage in non- Stores extensive energy profile data
volatile memory for up to 60 submeters. for each metering point; can be used
3 to identify coincidental peak
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter can
be used with three different ratings demand contribution
4 of current sensors: 100 mA, 10 mA LEDs provide status of unit
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter or 333 mV. Switchboard/ panelboard communication activity and verify
applications will use the 100 mA sensor connections
Eatons Power Xpert? Multi-Point
5 Meter is an ANSI C12.20 revenue class
current sensors, which are highly accu- Meets rigid ANSI C12.20 accuracy
rate, self-protecting in the event specifications for revenue meters
Web enabled electronic submetering
of an open circuit condition under load Three standard digital inputs and
device that can be mounted in panel-
6 boards, switchboards or enclosures.
and are supplied with an integral plug- eight pulse inputs per optional
in connector. The PXMP automatically module to monitor WAGES
When mounted in a panelboard or a
detects the rating of the current sensor (water, air, gas, electric or steam)
switchboard, the Power Xpert Multi-
7 Point Meter provides customers with
that is connected.
One standard digital output and
an integrated power distribution and The PXMP can also use 10 mA current eight digital outputs per optional
energy metering solution that saves sensors that were previously installed module for alarm indication
8 space, reduces installation labor and for IQMESII retrofit applications. Three types of meter modules
lowers total cost. Additionally the PXMP can use 333 mV to support 10 mA, 100 mA or
9 split core current sensors for retrofit 333 mV sensors
The Eaton Power Xpert Multi-Point
applications where metering has not Can be directly mounted in a
Meter (PXMP Meter) offers a highly
previously existed. The 10 mA and UL Listed panelboard, switchboard
modular approach to high-density
10 333 mV current sensors are also or enclosure
metering applications in electrical
self-protecting in the event of an
power distribution systems. The PXMP 256 MB of memory in meter base
open circuit condition under load.
Meter is compatible with most three- for up to two years of 15-minute
11 phase industrial, commercial and
Application Description interval data (eight years of one-
single-phase residential low voltage hour interval data) for eight demand
electrical power systems. The PXMP The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter is values up to 60 submeters
12 is equipped with two Modbus RTU ideally suited to handle submetering in
communication ports for local display low voltage power distribution equip- Communication Capabilities
and remote serial communications. ment applications such as distribution With the Power Xpert Multi-Point
13 The PXMP also has optional pulse boards in multi-tenant buildings, com- Meters built-in communication
input and digital output modules along prehensive main and feeder metering in capabilities, remote meter reading
with one standard digital output and commercial/industrial switchboards or and monitoring functions can be
14 three digital inputs. The PXMP Energy medium voltage distribution equipment integrated into both new and retrofit
Portal Module is Web enabled, making with the use of voltage and current applications.
it suitable for use with Ethernet transformers.
15 networks and modems. Standard Modbus RTU
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Optional Modbus TCP / BACnet/IP /
provides a cost-effective solution for SNMP / HTTP / SMTP / NTP / SFTP
General Description
16 residential or commercial metering communications
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter installations. Typical installations include:
can measure up to any of the following Software Compatibility
High-rise buildings
17 number of circuits:
Government institutions
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter:
Sixty single-phase, two-wire Can be used as part of an
K12, universities and campuses
(single-pole)
18 Thirty single-phase, three-wire
Office buildings electrical energy monitoring
and cost allocation system
(two-pole) Medical facilities
Can be remotely monitored via
Apartment and condominium
19 Twenty three-phase, four-wire
complexes
onboard Web pages with Eatons
(three-pole) optional Energy Portal Module
Airports Is compatible with third-party soft-
20 Shopping malls ware platforms and interface devices
Industrial sites
Mixed-use facilities
21

Sheet 03 061
Configuration combination of single-phase and Easy to Install

The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter three-phase metering points corre- UL Listed for mounting inside i
is fully configurable using Power sponding to the voltage wiring of panelboards (e.g., PRL4), switch-
Xpert Multi-Point configuration the meter base boards, and NEMA 12 enclosures
software that can be downloaded Power Xpert Multi-Point configura- Quick connect terminals for current
ii
free from the Eaton website at tion software simplifies system sensors, Modbus communications,
www.eaton.com/meters commissioning and startup; and bus voltages make wiring the
Each Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter PXMP configuration software unit quick and easy
1
module can be configured for up supports both online and offline
to six metering points in any configurations
2
Table 3.2-9. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Features
Description Main/Aggregate Channel Data Tenant 3
Instrumentation
Current, per phase 1
Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N)
4
Frequency
Minimum/maximum readings, V Per phase 5
Minimum/maximum readings, W, VAR, VA Total and per phase
Minimum/maximum readings, PF, F Total
Power 6
Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA) Total and per phase Total and per phase Total
Power factor Average Average
7
Demand
Block interval (fixed, sliding)
Real, reactive and apparent power demand Total and per phase 8
Minimum/maximum readings, PF, W, VAR, VA Total and per phase Total
Energy
9
Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh) Total Total
Real, forward and reverse, and total (Wh)
1 Main only. 10
Product Selection
11
Table 3.2-10. Meter Selection
Meter Module Meter Base Typical Applications
12
Three-Phase Single-Phase New Switchboards Retrofit Existing Enclosed PXMP 333MV Enclosed
Application or Application PXMP Current IQMESII Sensors, Sensors, Split Core, PXMP
Single-Phase with ABN Sensors, Solid Core, Solid Core, CS-XXX, CS-SP-X-XXXX-333MV, Interface
with ABCN PXMP-CSXXX, Ampere Ratings Ampere Ratings Modules 13
Ampere Ratings
PXMP-MM100MA PXMP-MB 125, 250, 400 14

PXMP-MM333MV PXMP-MB 100, 200, 300, 400, 600, PXMP-IM333MV
800, 1000, 1200, 1600,
2000 2
15
PXMP-MM10MA PXMP-MB 5, 50, 70, 125,
200, 400
PXMP-MM100MA-AB PXMP-MB-AB 125, 250, 400 16
PXMP-MM333MV-AB PXMP-MB-AB 100, 200, 300, 400, 600, PXMP-IM333MV
800, 1000, 1200, 1600,
2000 2
17
PXMP-MM10MA-AB PXMP-MB-AB 5, 50, 70, 125,
200, 400
2 For applications requiring more than 2000 A current sensors, use a CS005 with 5 A CT in conjunction with PXMP-MM10MA. 18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 062
Technical Data and Specifications External Circuit Group Specifications COM1 and COM2 RS-485 Serial Ports
i No D+/D biasing reliance on fail-
Environmental PXMP-MB (-AB) Meter Base
safe driver and biasing at Master
The PXMP Meter and current sensors Discrete Output Baud rate configurable between
ii must be housed in a NEMA or UL 9600115K baud (default)
Quantity 1solid-state relay Form A
enclosure that keeps the internal NO Bidirectional FET Use cable designed for RS-485
environment within the PXMPs
1 environmental specification ranges Polarity of external source is communications
not important Low L:L capacitance
and provides suitable fire and
mechanical protection in the end Isolation circuit to ground Impedance of ~100120 ohms
2 product installation. 2 kV/1 min.
ShieldMylar for high fre-
Maximum external source quency; Braid for low frequency
Temperature range: 20 to +70 C voltage 28 Vdc
3 (4 to +158 F)
Line-to-line TVS clamp across
Separate common and shield for
Storage temperature range: best noise immunity
switching element at 32 Vdc
40 to +85 C Maximum cable length is 4000 ft
4 Humidity: 595% noncondensing
Solid-state relay on resistance
(1219.2 m) with 32 nodes at 19.2K
35 ohms maximum
environment baud increased data rates will
Maximum load current 80 mA reduce maximum cable distance
5 Pollution degree: II
Minimum pulse width
Elevation: 0 to 9843 ft (0 to 3000 m) 2000 ft (609.6 m) with 32 total
20 milliseconds nodes at 115.2K baud
Housing: IP20 Fixed 25 milliseconds for pulse
6 CE Mark initiator function Isolation 300 V to ground due to
EMC EN61326 Maximum pulse rate 25 Hz TVS diode clamps
Modbus RTU slave protocol,
7 Emissions Conducted and Radiated Wiring to two-position removable
address defined by rotary switch
terminal plug
FCC part 15 class B Green Rx and Red Tx LEDs
1218 AWG (3.310.82 mm2),
8 CISPR 11 class B
wire ferrules recommended per channel
Data + > Dataduring idle marked,
Table 3.2-11. Electromagnetic Immunity T1 (polarity not important)
logic 1 state
9 Standard Description Level T2 (polarity not important)
End of Line Termination resistance
EN61000-4-2 ESD 3 Discrete Inputs should match cable impedance
(typ. 100120 ohms)
10 EN61000-4-3 RF radiated 3 Quantity 3, common circuits
Four-position removable terminal
EN61000-4-4 Electrical fast 3 inputs 13
transient plug 1822 AWG (0.820.33 mm2)
Group isolation 2 kV
typical, wire ferrules recommended
11 EN61000-4-5 Surge 31 No input-to-input circuit isolation
COM1
EN61000-4-6 RF conducted 3
All inputs per module share a T7Shield
EN61000-4-11 Volt sag/swell/
12 variation common external
T8RS-485 common
1 24 Vdc PXMP inputs are for a local bus that 24 V (10%) supply
T9Data
is surge level 2. PXG60E AC mains connec- 24 V externally sourced between
13 tion will support level 3.
common and inputs T10Data +
Product Safety Design to interface with external COM2
14 IEC/EN61010-1 dry contact T11Shield
UL 61010-1 File E185559 Input impedance ~2.2K ohms T12RS-485 common
CNL evaluation to CAN/C22.2 Input current draw ~10 mA per
15 No 1010.1.92 input
T13Data
T14Data +
Accuracy Minimum pulse width
16 ANSI C12.20Accuracy Class 0.5% 10 milliseconds
with either CSXXX or PXMP-CSXXX Maximum pulse rate 20 Hz
sensors Wiring to four-position removable
17 Measurement Canada terminal plug
Approval Pending 1218 AWG (3.310.82 mm2),
18 wire ferrules recommended
T3Common (connect ext.
24 common here)
19 T4Input 1 (dry contact to
24 V hot)
20 T5Input 2 (dry contact to
24 V hot)
T6Input 3 (dry contact to
21 24 V hot)

Sheet 03 063
PXMP-MB Power Supply Input PXMP Meter Modules (PXMP-MMs) PXMP Pulse Input Modules (PXMP-PIMs)
24 Vdc 20% Compatible with all PXMP Meter Base Compatible with all PXMP-MB i
15W maximum load slots 110 LED indicators: slots 110
LED indicators
1 kV isolation barrier internal to Health and status green, blink to ii
PXMP-MB show activity Health and status green, blink to
Externally fuse circuit to protect wire Pulse energy output one red per
show activity
Green power OK LED group of three loads Input On/Off status one green per 1
Three-position terminal block Load energy direction red/green pair pulse input
1612 AWG (1.313.31 mm2), per load
wire ferrules recommended
Eight pulse inputs to external 2
All variations support six load inputs. dry contacts
T1524 Vdc (common) Maximum pulse rate is 20 Hz
T1624 Vdc + (Hot) Current sensor connection is one 2 x 2
Minimum pulse width is 3
connector per load.
T17Shield (optional) 20 milliseconds
capacitively referenced to Compatible with PXMP-SCXX sensor External circuit groups rated for
chassis ground for enhanced cables, total cable length to the sensor 24 Vdc (20%) 4
EMC performance should not exceed 28 ft (8.5 m). All circuits share the same
Meter Voltage Inputs Note that -AB suffix only affects what electrical common 5
Overvoltage CAT III voltage channels the loads are paired External supply connects to the
Maximum voltage rating
with for metering purposes. module with a two-position remov-
able terminal plug 6
480VL:G (corner grounded delta) PXMP-MM10MA supports the CSXXX
series of 10 mA maximum secondary The supply is internally fanned out
347VL:N
output current transformers. to all circuits 7
600VL:L
Group isolation limited to 300 V to
PXMP-MM100MA supports the ground due to TVS diode clamp
Frequency rating 4763 Hz PXMP-CSXXX series of 100 mA
Metering range (temporary maximum secondary output current Input impedance ~2.2K causing a 8
transitions) transformers. 10 mA load per input when
30700VL:N
energized
PXMP-MM333MV supports 333 mV External circuit groups connect 9
30700VL:L maximum secondary output current with a 16-position removable
Abuse withstand rating transformers with the use of the terminal plug
1000 V sustained PXMP-IM333MV interface module. Terminals support 1218 AWG
10
High pot withstand rating PXMP Digital Output Module (PXMP-DOM) (3.310.82 mm2), wire ferrules
recommended
2500 V/1min Compatible with all PXMP-MB 11
Input impedance 4M ohms slots 110
Fuse inputs rated to protect wiring LED indicators
to mains. External fuses must be Health and status green, blink to
12
installed between the meter voltage show activity
terminal and the mains disconnect
switch to the main lines to protect Output On/Off status one green 13
the lines. 600 V 1 A BUSS type per output
KTK-R-1 Fast Acting or equivalent Eight individual solid-state
fuses are recommended. relay outputs 14
Wiring to removable terminal plug Each circuit rated for 24 Vdc (20%)
1018 AWG (5.260.82 mm2), wire
ferrules recommended
with an 80 mA load maximum 15
24 Vdc is externally sourced
T18N (VR)
Group isolation to ground 2 kV
T19C (V3)
Each circuit has its own separate 16
T20B (V2) common, circuit-to-circuit
T21A (V1) isolation 120 V
16-position removable terminal plug
17
1218 AWG (3.310.82 mm2), wire
ferrules recommended 18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 064
PXMP Energy Portal Module (PXMP-EPM) LED four-stack for bottom LAN/WAN Bottom facing LAN/WAN
i Only functionally compatible with Ethernet port Ethernet port
PXMP-MB slot 10 Link (Tx/Rx blink) RJ45 Cat5 STP/UTP 10Base-T/
LED indicators 10/100 speed 100Base-Tx
ii STP required for full
Top health and status green, blink DHCP/Fixed
to show activity electromagnetic immunity
TX active
1 Com. reset buttonreset to Auto crossover capability
defaults Config. Ethernet RJ45 Cat5 STP/UTP supported
Local IP 192/10 10Base-T/100Base-Tx Supports Modbus TCP and Java
2 Auto crossover capability Web browser interface
RJ45 front-facing Ethernet config-
uration port LEDs supported
Bottom-facing telephone
3 Link (Tx/Rx blink) Java Web browser interface modem interface
10/100 speed Modem type V92/56K baud
RJ11 field interface
4
Table 3.2-12. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter SystemHardware Specifications
5 Components Field
Circuit
Power
Source
Rated
Voltage
Rated
Current
Circuit
Impedance
Isolation Note 1 Note 2
PXMP-MB Digital output External 24 20% 1 0.080 A 35 ohms 2.0 kV

6 PXMP-MB-AB maximum maximum
Digital input External 24 20% 1 0.01A 2.22K 2.0 kV Opto drops Group are electri-
supply by 2V cally common
7 COM1 RS-485 Internal 5V1 5060 ohms 300 V TVS diode
clamped to PE
COM2 RS-485 Internal 5V1 5060 ohms 300 V TVS diode
8 clamped to PE
Power External 24 20% 1 0.7 A N/A 1.0 kV Installation 15W
supply input maximum Class II input maximum
9 Voltage inputs External 480 V L:G 2 0.12 mA 4M ohms N/A Installation High pot 2500 V/
A (V1)/ B (V2)/ mains Class III 1 minimum
C (V3)/ N (VR) 347 V L:N 2 0.09 mA 4M ohms N/A Installation High pot 2500 V/
10 Class III 1 minimum
600 V L:L 2 0.09 mA 4M ohms N/A Installation High pot 2500 V/
Class III 1 minimum
11 PXMP-MM100MA CT secondary External N/A 100 mA 14.6 ohms N/A 20% over-range See sensor for
primary isolation
PXMP-MM10MA CT secondary External N/A 10 mA 67 ohms N/A 20% over-range See sensor for
12 primary isolation
PXMP-MM333MV CT secondary External 0.333 V 2 N/A 50,000 ohms N/A 20% over-range See sensor for
primary isolation
13 PXMP-DOM Digital output External 24 20% 1 0.080 A 10 ohms 2 kV group 120 V isolation Isolation
maximum maximum circuit-to-circuit dependent on
external source
14 PXMP-PIM Pulse input External 24 20% 1 0.01A 2.22K ohms 300 V to TVS diode Note: Opto
ground clamped to PE; creates 2.2 V
group isolated, drop sourced by
15 all circuits
common to 24 V
2.2 K ohms; isola-
tion dependent
external source on external
source
16 PXMP-EPM Ethernet 100 Bt Internal N/A N/A 1 kV
POT modem Internal N/A N/A
17 1
2
DC.
AC RMS.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 065
Catalog Information The Pulse Input Module (PXMP-PIM) can be used to totalize
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter, current sensors and
pulse outputs from water meters, gas meters, steam meters, i
or even old electrical meters with KZ pulse outputs. The
other accessories can be ordered from Eaton distributors. PXMP-PIM can also be used for status monitoring in
Refer to the following catalog numbers when ordering. applications where status indication updates of 6 seconds ii
over Modbus satisfies the application requirement.
Table 3.2-13. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Products
Product Catalog Support products for the Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter 1
Description Number include the HMI display, IMPCABLE and power supplies
Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABCN Voltage Inputs as described in Table 3.2-14.
PXMP meter basethree-phase with ABCN PXMP-MB 2
voltage inputs Table 3.2-14. Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Support Products
PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs PXMP-MM100MA Product Catalog
for use with PXMP current sensors Description Number 3
PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs PXMP-MM10MA Communication cable, 1000 ft (305 m), IMPCABLE
for use with IQMESII current sensors 600 V insulation
PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs PXMP-MM333MV PXMP meter display6-inch color touchscreen PXMP-DISP-6
4
for use with 333 mV current sensors (with cable)
Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABN Voltage Inputs Power supplysingle-phase 90264 Vac, PSG60E
PXMP meter basesingle-phase, three-wire PXMP-MB-AB 24 Vdc at 2.5 A 5
with ABN voltage inputs Power supplythree-phase 360575 Vac, PSG60F
PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs PXMP-MM100MA-AB 24 Vdc at 2.5 A
for use with PXMP current sensors Power supplythree-phase 600 Vac, 24 Vdc PSS55D
6
PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use PXMP-MM10MA-AB
with IQMESII current sensors
PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for PXMP-MM333MV-AB
7
use with 333 mV current sensors
IO Modules
8
PXMP meter pulse input module with eight inputs PXMP-PIM
PXMP meter digital output module with PXMP-DOM
eight outputs 9
Communication Module
PXMP meter energy portal module PXMP-EPM
Current Sensor Kits 10
KIT, PXMP CS125 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS125-3
KIT, PXMP CS250 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS250-3 11
KIT, PXMP CS400 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS400-3
Current Sensor Cable Kits
KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 4 ft (1.2 m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC4-3 12
KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 6 ft (1.8 m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC6-3
13
Current Sensor Extension Cable Kits
KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 8 ft (2.4 m), PXMP-SCE-8-3 14
quantity of 3
KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 16 ft (4.9 m), PXMP-SCE-16-3
quantity of 3 15
Interface Modules
PXMP current sensor interface module for 333 mV, PXMP-IM333MV-3
kit X 3 16
Note: Total sensor lead length must not exceed 28 ft (8.5 m).
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 066
Wiring Diagrams
i
PXMB-MB
Note: For all voltage connectionsFuses should be sized in accordance with best practices to protect the instrumentation wire.
ii
10
Figure 3.2-24. Four-Wire Wye Voltage Connection Inputs
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 Figure 3.2-25. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Service Current Sensor Connections

Sheet 03 067
ii
Figure 3.2-26. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Service (Ten Single-Phase, Single-Pole) Current Sensor Connections 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 3.2-27. Network 120/208 Three-Wire Apartment Service Current Sensor Connections 20
21

Sheet 03 068
PXMB-MB-AB
i Note: For all voltage connectionsFuses should be sized in accordance with best practices to protect the instrumentation wire.
ii
10
Figure 3.2-28. Single-Phase, Three-Wire 120/240 Voltage Connection Inputs
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 Figure 3.2-29. 120/240 Single-Phase, Three-Wire Service Current Sensor Connections

Sheet 03 069
Dimensions in Inches (mm)

i
Mounting Dimensions
ii
10.67
(271.0)
0.20
(5.1) 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mode
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Pulse In Output Portal Meter
24Vdc 80mA Output
1
2
2
Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Base
Com Com Com Com Com Com Com Com Com 24Vdc Inputs
Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Config. Port Common 3
Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Input 1 4
3
Slave Address
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 PI1 O1 Status
9
0
1 9
0
1
Input 2 5
PI2 O2 8 2 8 2 Input 3 6
Com
- - - - - - - PI3 O3
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Reset 7 3 7 3
+ + + + + + + PI4 O4 6
5
4 6
5
4
- - - - - - - PI5 O5 Shield 7
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Health
+ + + + + + + PI6 O6 Common 8
- - - - - - - PI7 O7 TX RS-485 D 9
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX
+ + + + + + + PI8 O8 (Com 1) D 10
RX
-
Pulse
1
XX
-
Pulse
1
XX
-
Pulse
1
XX
-
Pulse
1
XX
-
Pulse
1
XX
-
Pulse
1
XX
-
Pulse
1
XX
Power
Status
TX RS-485
Shield 11
Common 12
4
+ + + + + + + D 13
(Com 2)
- - - - - - - RX D 14
+
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1
- - - - - - -
+
A1 +
A1 +
A1 +
A1 +
A1 +
A1 +
A1 Cat. No. PXMP-MB-XX
12.00
5
Style No. 66D2261GXX Rev. X
100mA 100mA 100mA 100mA 100mA 100mA 100mA 24Vdc 24Vdc
11.67 CT
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor 80mA Max
SN: XXXXXX
Date Code: WYYMMDD
FW Version X.X
Made in USA (304.8)
Inputs
(296.4) Local IP
1
PI1 PI2 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8
O1
192/10
XX
2
3
O2
PS Input
4
XX
6
Rating -Vdc 15
O3
Link
Local
WARNING 24Vdc +Vdc 16
6
REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING 15W Max Shld 17
O4
MORE THAN ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE DIAGRAM.
XX AVERTISSEMENT: CET EQUIPEMENT RENFERME PLUSIEURS
8
CIRCUITS SOUS TENSION. VOIR LE SCHEMA.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
O5
DO NOT HIPOT / DIELECTRIC TEST
N (VR) 18
10/100
O6
Meter nc
XX
10/100
DHCP
Link
TX ST
C Voltage Inputs
C (V3) 19
7
O7
480V~ L:G Max.
LAN Delta B 347V~ L:N Max. nc
B1 Wye 600V~ L:L Max.
O8
A CAT III
/1PH B (V2) 20
Freq. 47-63 Hz
LAN
+ See manual for complete ratings nc
24V
A1 - Modem
b
A (V1) 21
8
Power Xpert
Multipoint Meter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8.74 9
(222.0)
Figure 3.2-30. Single UnitFront View 10
15.63 11
(397.0)
12
13
Figure 3.2-32. Single UnitTop View 14

12.50
(317.5) 1.54 15
Multipoint Meter
http://www.Eaton.com Made in USA

FW X.XX
(39.0)
Power Xpert
Technical Support 1-800-809-2772

Rev. X
0.06~0.12
(1.6~3.0) 6.10
Style No. 66D2250G0X
Cat. No. PXMP-EPM-X
Serial No. XXXXXX
(0.24) 0.12 (3.0) R Typ.

16
WYYMMDD
7.25 6.79
(184.1) (172.4)
17
Outer
5.67 5.21
(144.1) (132.4)
18
3.27
(83.1)
Cut-Out Dimensions 19
Figure 3.2-31. Single UnitSide View
Figure 3.2-33. PXMP Color Touchscreen Display
20
21

Sheet 03 070
Table 3.2-15. Current Sensor Dimensions in Inches (mm)

i Sensor H W ID
PXMP-CS125 2.66 (67.6) 1.66 (42.1) 0.53 (13.5)

ii PXMP-CS250 2.96 (75.2) 2.42 (61.5) 1.12 (28.4)
PXMP-CS400 3.64 (92.5) 3.03 (73.2) 1.74 (44.2)
1
ID Blue Locator LED Terminal Block
2 H
5 W
PXMP-SCX
Strain Relief
333 mV
Cable Connection Sensor
Strap Holes Secondary
Leads
6 Figure 3.2-34. Current Sensor Dimensions
Figure 3.2-35. Open Interface Module (PXMP-IM333MV)
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 071
Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor
Power Xpert Branch General Description Application Description

i
Circuit Monitor The Power Xpert Branch Circuit The Power Xpert BCM Meter Module
Monitor (PX BCM) meter module strip External (PXBCM-MME) was designed
provides ANSI C12.20 0.5% revenue for retrofit applications, or for installa- ii
class branch circuit metering in panel- tion in power distribution assemblies
board applications for 1-inch pole where 1-inch pole spacing 100 A CT
spacing branch circuit up to 100 A. strips cannot be applied. The BCM 1
Factory-installed meter module strips MME supports connection to a total
are available with 9, 15 and 21 CT of 25 333 mV sensors for power and
assemblies, enabling ANSI C12.20 energy metering. The meter module 2
0.5% accuracy metering of branch external is factory calibrated to meet
circuits in 18, 30, or 42 circuit panels. the ANSI C12.20 0.5% accuracy limits
Each meter module strip is equipped for a transformer rated meter. When 3
with four additional auxiliary 333 mV used with revenue accuracy 333 mV
current sensor inputs with ANSI 0.5% current sensors, the BCM MME
metering accuracy for metering of measures energy consumption with 4
additional circuits such as panelboard ANSI C12 meter accuracy for trans-
mains or other circuits with greater former rated metering applications.
than 100 A or 1-inch pole spacing. Each
Typical Submetering Applications 5
PX BCM meter module can be used to
meter circuits from separately derived The Power Xpert Branch Circuit
voltage sources because each meter Monitor is ideally suited to handle 6
module has its own metering voltage submetering in low voltage power
inputs. The branch circuit monitor distribution equipment applications
meter base supports up to four Meter such as distribution boards in multi- 7
Module Strips (PXBCM-MMS), provid- tenant buildings, PDUs in data center
ing metering of 84 branch circuits and applications, and separately installed
16 auxiliary 333 mV sensors for a total enclosures for retrofit metering needs. 8
of 100 metered poles.
The Power Xpert Branch Circuit
The Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor provides a cost-effective
Monitor meter base supports both solution for residential or commercial 9
RS-485 and Ethernet communications. metering installations. Typical
The meter base includes an embedded installations include:
Web server for user-friendly device
10
High-rise buildings
configuration and graphical data
display. Modbus RTU and Modbus Government institutions
TCP communications are supported K12, universities, and campuses
11
for connection to communications Office buildings
gateways or host software. An optional Medical facilities 12
graphics display can provide easy
Apartment and condominium
local access to metered data. When
mounted in a panelboard or a switch- complexes
board, the Power Xpert Branch Circuit Airports 13
Monitor provides customers with an Shopping malls
integrated power distribution and Industrial sites 14
energy metering solution that saves Mixed-use facilities
space, reduces installation labor, and
lowers total cost. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 072
Features and Benefits Table 3.2-16. Metered Values

i Description Main Channel Virtual Meter
BCM Overall Product Concept Architecture (Aggregated)
ii System Features Current (I) IA, IB, IC Per pole Average

Each Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor meter base, Minimum/ Maximum Maximum
equipped with four meter modules, can measure up to maximum average
1 any of the following number of circuits: Real power (W) A, B, C, total Per pole Total
Minimum/ Max Max total
100, two-wire (single-pole) maximum
2 48, three-wire (two-pole) Apparent A, B, C, total Per pole Total
32, four-wire (three-pole) power (VA) Minimum/ Maximum Maximum total
maximum
3 The circuits listed above can be mixed provided that
Voltage LN (V) AN, BN, CN N/A Average
multipole circuits are configured to be on the same meter
module. The meter provides current; voltage; power factor; Minimum/ N/A Maximum
maximum average
4 demand and active, reactive, and real power (VA, var, kW);
Voltage LL (V) AB, BC, CA N/A Average
and active, reactive, and real energy (VA, var, kWh)
measurements for each load. Minimum/ N/A Maximum
maximum average
5 System Communications Frequency System N/A Average
With the Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitors built-in Minimum/ N/A Maximum
6 communication capabilities, remote meter reading and maximum average
monitoring functions can be integrated into both new and Power factor System Per pole Total
retrofit applications. Minimum/ N/A N/A
7 Standard Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP / HTTP
maximum
communications Ampere demand A, B, C Per pole N/A

Peak A, B, C Peak per pole N/A
8 System Software Capability Forward watt Total Per pole Total
The Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor: demand Peak Total N/A Peak total
9 Can be used as part of an electrical energy monitoring Reverse watt
demand
Total Per pole Total
system using Modbus communications Peak Total N/A Peak total
Can be remotely monitored and configured via onboard Forward energy System Per pole Total
10 Web pages Reverse energy System Per pole Total
Platform independent HTML5 Web page technology
allows remote configuration and monitoring on any
11 browser equipped tablet or other mobile device
Compatible with third-party software platforms and
12 interface devices
How to configure and commission
13 The Power Xpert Branch Circuit Monitor is fully configurable
using its own embedded Web server.
Web server configuration includes combining multiple
14 poles into aggregated virtual meters
Virtual meters can be assigned user names for
easy identification
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 073
Each PXBCM meter base monitors power and energy from

up to four meter modules, which represents a total of up to i
100 current sensors.
Cover Mount
Built-in Modbus RS-485 and Ethernet Screw ii
communication interfaces
Green 1 Hz
Monitors single-phase and three-phase loads from Status LED
120 to 347 Vac LN 1
Monitors current, voltage, power factor, frequency,
power and energy
2
BCM Componentsmeter Base, MMS, MME, Display
AX
Terminal
Base Mounting
MMP LEDs 3
Rx Green
Screws #8 Tx Red
LED Indicators
4
5
VT
COM 1 RS-485 Terminal
COM Reset Modbus RTU
MMP Meter
Module Port
6
Button Case Exit
LAN
Ethernet 7
RJ45 CAT5+
STP Cover Mount PE #10 Stud
Screw with Nut 8
Configuration
Switches MMP 14
Meter
Module
Figure 3.2-38. Meter Left Oriented Strip 9
Ports
Left Meter Right Meter

10
Module Strip, Module Strip,
PXBCM-MMS-L21-A PXBCM-MMS-R21-A
Power Supply Mains Terminal PE/N/L
Shown Shown 11
Base Mounting
Screws #8
12
Figure 3.2-36. Meter Base
13
Base Screw Mounts #10
LED Indicators 14
MMP:
Meter 15
Module
Port
16
AX:
17
External
333 mV Meter Base
CT Inputs PXBCM-MB 18
VT: Voltage
Disconnect
Switch and
19
CT External Terminal
Fuse Block
33 mV CT Base Screw for Mains
Inputs Mounts #10 Metering
20
Figure 3.2-37. Meter Module External Figure 3.2-39. Typical OEM Arrangement with Meter Base and
Meter Module Strips 21

Sheet 03 074
ii
1
Approved Panel
2 with One or More
PXBCM-MMEs
Mounted. May Also
be Housed with the
3 PXBCM-MB.
4
PXBCM-CBL
5 nn Cable
6 Disconnect
Swtich and
Fuse Block
7
Existing Panel with Branch Approved Panel
Circuits Monitored by with PXBCM-MB
8 External CTs and PXBCM-MMs
9 Figure 3.2-40. Hybrid SystemRetrofit of External Meter Module in Existing Panelboard Tied to Meter Base in OEM Panelboard
with Meter Module Strips
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 075
Product Selection
i
Table 3.2-17. BCM Component Catalog Numbers
Description Suffix Description Catalog Number Notes ii
Meter base PXBCM-MB
Meter module strip Left 9 CT PXBCM-MMS-L09-A A = 1-in pitch, 100 A
1
Meter module strip Right 9 CT PXBCM-MMS-R09-A A = 1-in pitch, 100 A 2
Meter module strip Right 15 CT PXBCM-MMS-R15-A A = 1-in pitch, 100 A
Meter module strip Right 21 CT PXBCM-MMS-R21-A A = 1-in pitch, 100 A
Meter module external 21+4 external 333 mV CT PXBCM-MME-X25-333MV X = external CT
3
Meter module port cable Length 6 in PXBCM-MMP-CBL6I
Meter module port cable Length 1 ft PXBCM-MMP-CBL01 4
Meter module port cable Length 2 ft PXBCM-MMP-CBL02
6
Meter module port cable ext. Length 8 ft PXBCM-MMP-CBLEX08
Meter module port cable ext. Length 16 ft PXBCM-MMP-CBLEX16
8
BCM local display 6-in diameter display PXBCM-DISP-6
BCM local display cable 4-ft display cable PXBCM-DISP-CBL04 9
BCM local display cable 12-ft display cable PXBCM-DISP-CBL12
333 mV Current Sensor 10
11
12
13
14
15
Split-core 333mV sensors can be connected to the four

16
auxiliary current inputs on the BCM-MMS as well as any
of the 25 current inputs on the BCM-MME. A variety of
window sizes and ratios are available. Refer to TD121001EN
17
for ordering information.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 076
Technical Data and Specifications PXBCM-MMS PXBCM-MME

i Weight 09/15/21: 1.0/1.5/2.0 lb Weight: 1 lb
PXBCM-MB Width: 1.43.0 in (3.57.5 cm) W/H/D: 7.7 in (19.5 cm) /
Weight: 1 lb 8.5 in (21.6 cm) / 1.6 in (4.1 cm)
ii W/H/D: 7.0 in (17.6 cm) /
Height 2.5 in (6.4 cm)
Length 09/15/21: 16.9/22.9/28.9 in Housing NEMA 1, IP20, Pollution
6.3 in (15.8 cm) / 2.6 in (6.6 cm) (43/58.2/73.5 cm) Degree 2
1 Each meter base can interface Housing NEMA 1, IP20, Pollution Operational temperature range:
to 14 meter modules Degree 2 20 C to +70 C
(MMS and/or MME) Storage temperature range:
Operational/storage temp.:
2 Housing: NEMA 1, IP20 20 C to +70 C /45 C to +85 C 45 C to +85 C
Pollution degree 2 Elevation: 03000 m up to 277 V LN
Elevation: 03000 m up to 277 V LN
Operational temperature range: Humidity: 595% noncondensing
3 20 C to +70 C
Humidity: 595% noncondensing
Storage temperature range: Humidity: 595% noncondensing Humidity: 595% noncondensing
4 45 C to +85 C Requires metering voltage Requires metering voltage
Elevation: 03000 m up to 277 V LN transformers transformers
Humidity: 595% noncondensing CE mark
CE mark
5 Elevation: 02000 m up to 347 V LN UL file #E185559, UL standard
Safety: IEC/EN/UL61010-1, UL file
Humidity: 595% noncondensing UL61010-1
# E185559, CNL evaluation to
Requires control
6 power transformer
CAN/C22.2 No. 1010.1.92 CNL evaluation to CAN/
EMC EN61326IEC61000-4-X level 3 C22.2 No. 1010.1.92
UL file #E185559, EMC EN61326IEC61000-4-X level 3
Emissions conducted and radiated
7 UL standard UL61010-1 as part of PXBCM systemFCC Emissions conducted and
CNL evaluation to part 15 and CISPR 11/22 class B radiated as part of PXBCM
CAN/C22.2 No. 1010.1.92 MMP meter module ports system, FCC part 15 class B
8 CE mark 2x2 connector, 2 pair cable, CISPR 11/22 class B
EMC EN61326IEC61000-4-X level 3 1 pair power, 2nd data coms
Emissions conducted and
MMP Meter Module Ports
9 radiated as part of PXBCM
Use PXBCM-MMP-CBLnn
2 pair cable, 1 pair power,
CBLEnn cables
system, FCC part 15 class B 2nd data coms
VTVoltage Terminal Metering Inputs Use PXBCM-MMP-CBLnn
10 CISPR 11/22 class B
4763 Hz, CAT III, 5 Mohm input CBLEnn cables
External Circuit Connections impedance A/B/C/N
VTVoltage Terminal Metering Inputs
11 Com1 RS-485 ModbusT Slave RTU: Wye 277 Vac L:N(G) 480 V L:L
4763 Hz, CAT III, 5 Mohm input
9600115.2 K (default) baud maximum nominal rating
impedance
D, +D, Com/Shield Floating delta, corner grounded
12 delta, and high-impedance wye not Wye 277 Vac L:N(G) 480 V L:L
Use RS-485 cable maximum nominal
supported without the use of an
4 K m19.2 Kb, 2 K interposing PT potential transformer Floating delta, corner grounded
13 LAN ethernet RJ45 CAT5 Four-position fixed terminal block delta, and high-impedance
10/100Base-T Va, Vb, Vc, Vn, wye not supported without the use
Use STP Cat5+ for full of an interposing PT
2412 AWGferrules
14 EMC compliance recommended
potential transformer
Five-position fixed terminal block
MMP1-4 meter module ports: PEprotective earth grounding stud Va, Vb, Vc, Vn, PE
15 2 pair cable, 1 pair power, at base of MMS bracket#8 stud
2412 AWGferrules
2nd coms
AX CT Current Terminal Metering Inputs recommended
Use PXBCM-MMP-CBLnn
16 CBLEnn cables 333 mV secondary CT input to
MMS at maximum external CT
Each MMP is separately isolated primary rating
17 Power supply mains 100277 Vac Primary load rating determined by
L:N external CT
10%, CAT III, 4763 Hz, 6 W In-line terminal block 2414 AWG
18 Double insulated ferrules recommended for
320 Vac surge filter clamp L:N,
stranded wire
19 L:G, N:GDo not high pot
Provide external line fuse or
breaker sized to protect wiring
20 Three-position fixed terminal
block 1/2/3 = PE/N/L, supporting
12 AWG (2.5 mm) wire
21

Sheet 03 077
CT and AX CT Current Terminal Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Metering Inputs i
333 mV secondary CT input to
MME at maximum external CT
primary rating ii
Primary load rating determined
by external CT 1
CT 21 and AX 4 pair dual tier
terminal blocks
2412 AWGferrules 2
recommended
6.69
Cables (169.9) 3
~1-inch bend radius required
600 V insulation rating
105 C temperature rating
4
UL 61010-1
UL file #E185559 5
2 twisted pair, PVC jacket 0.28 inches
OD jacket
6
4.12
(104.6) 7
Figure 3.2-41. Meter Base Mounting
8
10
6.93 8.53 11
(176.0) (216.7)
12
13
7.70
(195.6)
14
Figure 3.2-42. MMS Mounting 15
7.24 16
(183.9)
17
5.67 18
(144.0)
19
20
Figure 3.2-43. MMS Mounting 21

Sheet 03 078
i 5.85
(14.86)
ii 2.96
1.37 (7.52)
(3.48)
1 16.93
(43.0)
2
1.31
2.53 (3.33)
3 Made in Mexico
SN: YYMMDDkXXXXX FW VX.X
Style No. 66D2312G01 Rev. X
Cat. No. PXBCM-MMS-L09
(6.43)
11.00 2.83
4 (27.94)
15.00 (7.19)
(38.1)
5
5.85
(14.86)
6
2.96
1.37 (7.52)
7 (3.48)
22.93
(58.24)
8
9 Made in Mexico
2.53
1.31
(3.33)
(6.43)
17.00
10 (43.18) 2.83
21.00 (7.19)
(53.34)
11
12 5.85
(14.86)
13 2.96
1.37 (7.52)
(3.48)
14 28.93
(73.48)
15
1.31
2.53 (3.33)
(6.43)
16 Made in Mexico
23.00 2.83
(58.42) (7.19)
17 27.00
(68.58)
18 Figure 3.2-44. MMS Mounting Dimensions in Inches (mm)
19
20
21

Sheet 03 079
Wiring Diagrams
Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Service MME Terminal Block i
CT Connections with Three-Phase,
Four-Wire and Apartment Loads
208Y/120 Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye
Service Single-Phase, 120/208 V,
MME Terminal Block ii
Three-wire Network Loads CT Connections
2
Va Vb Vc Vn
A A
3
Va Vb Vc Vn
A A
N
} Apt. 1
B
C
A
B
C
N
A
} Load 1
}
B B
C C B B
}
Load 2
N Apt. 2 C C
N
5
A A
A A
}
B B
C
N
C
} Apt. 3 B
C
B
C
Load 3 6
A A N
N
} Apt. 4 A A
B
C
B
C
N
} Apt. 5
B
C
B
C
N
} Load 4
7
C C
8
}
A A
N Apt. 1
B B
N
} Apt. 6 A
B
A
B
}
C C
N Apt. 2 9
C C
10
Figure 3.2-45. 120/208 V, Three-Wire Apartment Service Figure 3.2-47. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye
Figures 3.2-45, 3.2-46 and 3.2-48 are representative of 11

Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye Service MME Terminal Block wiring configurations that can be used with the BCM.
CT Connections Table 3.2-18 shows the supported service voltage system
types and corresponding meter load options. 12
Table 3.2-18. Service Voltage System
Service Voltage System Type Virtual Meter Load Options 13
Three-phase, four-wire wye Three-phase, four-wire wye
Three-phase, three-wire delta 14
120/208 three-wire apartment
Single-phase, two-wire
Va Vb Vc Vn
Three-phase, three-wire delta Three-phase, three-wire delta
15
A A
}
Three-phase, four-wire delta Three-phase, three-wire delta
B B
C C
Load 1 Single-phase, two-wire 16
N Single-phase, three-wire
A A
B
C
A
B
C
N
A
} Load 2
Single-phase, three-wire
Single-phase, three-wire
17
B
C
B
C
N
} Load 3
18
A A
19
B
C
B
C
N
} Load 4
20
21
Figure 3.2-46. Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye

Sheet 03 080
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Power Monitoring and Metering Module
i Molded-Case Circuit Features and Functions Communications

INCOM and Modbus RTU
Breaker Power Monitoring The PM3 provides the following
communications
metering, monitoring and
ii and Metering Module (PM3) communications functions: Shielded-twisted pair
communications
Metering
Daisy-chaining of multiple units
Phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, Iavg)
1 Web-based communications
Phase-to-phase voltages
available through a Power
(Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vavg)
Xpert Gateway
2 Phase-to-neutral voltages
TX and RX communication
(Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vavg)
diagnostic LEDs
Real power (kW)total and
3 per phase
Reactive power (kVAR)total and
per phase
4 Apparent power (kVA)total and
per phase
5 Power factortotal and per phase
Real energy (WHr)forward,
reverse and net
6 Reactive Energy (VARHr)forward,
reverse and net Metering Module
Apparent energy (VAHr)forward, Control Power
7 Power Monitoring/Metering Module (PM3) reverse and net
The PM3 is powered directly from the
General Description Accuracy circuit breaker voltage for applications
8 The Power Monitoring and Metering Voltage and amperage: 0.5% of
480 Vac and below. External control
reading power is not required for these
Module (PM3) is a UL-listed add-on applications. However, an auxiliary
communications module that Watts, VARs, VA: 1% of reading
9 mounts directly to the load side Energy: 1% per ANSI C12.1
24 Vdc external power input is
included for applications requiring
of three-pole molded-case circuit Revenue Grade Accuracy: ANSI C12.1 communications capability even when
breakers, similar to an earth leakage
10 module. The PM3 adds revenue Monitoring
the breaker circuit is de-energized.
accurate power metering and breaker Breaker status 1 Note: For 600 V applications, external 24
status monitoring to new and/or Vdc auxiliary power is required.
11 existing Series C and Series G
Open/close statusthru breaker
auxiliary contact
breakers. Regardless of the type of trip Product Selection
Tripped statusthru breaker bell
unit (thermal-magnetic or electronic),
12 the PM3 can be applied in applications
alarm contact Table 3.2-19.PM3 Product Selection
Unit healthflashing status LED PM3 Modules Catalog Number
where power metering, circuit breaker Frame
when module is powered 480 V 600 V
13 monitoring and/or communications 1 Breaker must include auxiliary contact Modbus
is essential. The PM3 is extremely
and bell alarm contact accessory.
flexible and can be used in main FD PM3FM
breaker or feeder breaker applications. JG PM3JM
14 The automatic voltage sensing KD and LG PM3LM
means that the same PM3 module INCOM
15 can be used on 208, 240 or 480 Vac FD PM3FI480 PM3FI600
applications. It can also be installed JG PM3JI480 PM3JI600
in reverse-feed and reverse-phasing KD and LG PM3LI480 PM3LI600
16 (CBA) applications.
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 081
Technical Data and Specifications Table 3.2-20. PM3 Power Monitoring and Communications Module Technical Specifications
for Modbus RTU i
Metered parameters Description Specification
Ia, Ib, Ic Current Inputs
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn Pickup current 0.3 A rms
ii
Apparent Energy, Forward Real Maximum reported current FD/JG 250 A rms
Energy, Reverse Real Energy, Net KD/LD 630 A rms 1
Real Energy, Lagging Reactive Accuracy 0.5% 0.5% of reading
Energy, Leading Reactive Energy, Voltage Inputs
Net Reactive Energy Range Line-to-neutral 30366 Vac 2
Apparent Power A, B, C; Apparent Line-to-line 52635 Vac
Power Total; Reactive Power A, B, C; Supported systems Three-element wye, three-element wye + neutral
Reactive Power Total; Real Power A, Two-element delta, four-wire delta systems 3
B, C; Real Power Total Input impedance 996 kiloohm/phase
Frequency, Apparent Power Factor, Burden per phase 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600 V;
Apparent PFA, Apparent PFB, 0.014 VA at 120 V 4
Apparent PFC Phase voltage connections Internal via screw terminal to busbar. For wye system, a neutral is
required to be connected to the PM3 on the right Phoenix connector.
Neutral connection If neutral is not available, the meter will calculate a virtual neutral
5
based on the phase-to-phase rms voltage. The system voltage must
be balanced for this to be accurate.
Frequency 6
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Accuracy 0.1 Hz 7
Resolution 0.1 Hz
Power and Energy
Accuracy 1% of reading (ANSI C12.1) 8
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 V. 9
Environmental Ratings
Storage temperature 20 C to +50 C 10
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH noncondensing
Sensing Method 11
Voltage, current True rms
Sampling rate 13.02K samples per second
Update Rate 12
Watts, VAR and VA 1.03 sec at 60 Hz
All other parameters 1.07 sec at 60 Hz
13
Power Supply (External)
DC voltage 1830 Vdc
Maximum current 30 mA at 24 Vdc 14
Burden 0.72W
Standard Communication Format
Connection type Three-wire RS-485 (A, B, Common)
15
Com port baud rate 9600 or 19,200 bauds Default: 19,200 bauds
Modbus address range 01247 16
Data format Selectable (8, N, 1 | 8, N, 2 | 8, Default: 8, N, 2
Even, 1 | 8, Odd, 1)
Protocols Modbus RTU 17
Internal termination resistor Via DIP switch Default: Enabled
selectable ON or OFF
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 082
Dimensions and Weights

i Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ii 4.31 (109.5)
3.50 (88.9)
4.06
1.38 3.39 1.72
(103.1)
(86.1) (43.7)
1 (35.1)
0.69
(17.5) Line End
3.19
0.86
(21.8) Line End
3.81
(96.8)
(81.0)
2 2.88 On
3.63
(92.2)
3.63
(92.2) 4.92 5.77
Off
(146.6) 5.77
(73.2) 6.00 (125.0) (146.6)
4.50 (152.4) On/I
3 (114.3)
CL
Handle
RY EA
S
LED
CL
Handle
CL CL
FACTO
Off/O Handle Handle
8.44
(214.4)
10.13
4 O
N 1 2 3 4 5 6
(257.3)
9.53 11.00
(242.1) (279.4)
12.14
5 (308.4)
Power Monitoring/
Metering Module
ON O
N1
Tx
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
Rx STATUS
Network Address
13.83
(351.3)
Bell Alarm
A
COM
B MODBUS
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
EARTH
V Neutral
24 Vdc (+) See breaker for terminal information.
Power See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
24 Vdc ()
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
123456789101112131415
6 2.06 3.34
2.74 Load End 3.98
(52.3) Load End (84.8)
(69.6) (101.1)
4.13 (104.9) 3.42 5.48 (139.2) 4.06
(86.9)
7 3.94 (100.1)
(103.1)
4.88 (124.0)
8 Figure 3.2-48. FD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus Figure 3.2-50. KD Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
9 3.57 (90.7)
3.44
4.31 (109.5)
4.06
1.38 (87.4) 1.72 (103.1)
(35.1) 3.34 (43.7)
0.69 0.86 3.98
Line End Line End
10 (17.5) (84.8)
123456789101112131415
(21.8) (101.1)
3.95 3.95
3.17
11 (80.5)
(100.3)
7.00
(100.3) 4.73
(120.1)
5.58
(141.7) 5.58
O
N
(177.8) (141.7)
O
F CL CL
F
Handle Handle
12 5.50
(139.7)
PUSH TO
TRIP
LED
8.44
CL
Handle
CL
RY EA
Handle
S
FACTO
(214.4)
10.13
(257.3)
13 10.50 O
1 2 3 4 5 6
12.00
(266.7)
N
(304.8)
12.14 Power Monitoring/
(308.4) 13.82
Metering Module Tx Rx STATUS
14 EARTH
A
B
COM
24 Vdc (+)
MODBUS
ON O
N1
Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 3 4 5 6
Network Address
See breaker for terminal information.

Bell Alarm
COM
COM
Aux. Alarm
V Neutral
(351.0)
Power See instruction sheet for high voltage tests.
24 Vdc ()
For use on Series G, L-Frame or Series C, K-Frame
Circuit Breaker, Switch, Motor Circuit Protector.
123456789101112131415
15 2.06
Load End
3.34 2.74
(69.6)
Load End
3.98
(101.1)
(52.3) (84.8)
4.13 (104.9) 3.42 5.48 (139.2) 4.06
(86.9) (103.1)
16 4.41 (112.0) 5.43 (137.9)
Figure 3.2-49. JG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus Figure 3.2-51. LG Three-Pole with PM3 Modbus
17
Table 3.2-21. PM3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights
18 Description Frame Dimensions and Weights
Weight in lb (kg) FD 1.26 (0.57)

JG 1.60 (0.73)
19 KD/LG 2.25 (1.02)
Basic unit in inches (mm) FD 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
20 JG 4.13 W x 5.00 L x 3.39 H (104.9 x 127.0 x 86.1)
KD/LG 5.48 W x 3.70 L x 4.06 H (139.2 x 94.0 x 103.2)
Shipping container dimensions in inches (mm) FD/JG 8.00 x 5.13 x 5.50 (203.2 x 130.3 x 139.7)
21 KD/LG 6.25 x 8.25 x 7.00 (158.7 x 209.5 x 177.8)

April 2016 Accessories
Sheet 03 083
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit Product Selection

i
for IQ 100/200 Series and Table 3.3-1. Ordering Information
PXM 2000 Meters Description Catalog ii
Number
Panel mounting adapter kit IQ250-PMAK

IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000 Series 1
adapter kit to IQ Analyzer/
IQ DP-4000/IQ Data
2
Dimensions
3
6.72
(170.7)
5.38 4
(136.7)
5
4.45
(113.0) 6
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
The flange adapter plate can be 10.25 7

installed as follows: (260.4)
1. Remove the old meter from the 8

panel or door. Many IQ metering 4.45
(113.0)
products use the typical IQ
drilling pattern shown in
Figure 3.3-1 for mounting
9
2. Install the flange adapter plate.
Mount it from the rear using the 10
six screws provided in the kit. The Figure 3.3-1. Flange Adapter Plate
flange adapter plate screw hole Screw Hole Pattern
pattern shown in Figure 3.3-1 11
should match the typical IQ
drilling pattern. If not, perform
the next step 12
3. Drill six holes in the panel or the
door to mount the flange adapter 13
plate. Follow the typical IQ drilling
pattern. You need only the top,
center and bottom sets of holes 14
4. Install the new IQ 100/200 Series
or PXM 2000 meter in the flange 15
adapter plate. Secure it from
behind with four flat washers,
lock washers and nuts provided 16
with the meter
17
18
19
20
21

Accessories April 2016
Sheet 03 084
Single and Multi Unit Enclosed Meters
i Single and Multi Unit Application Description Features and Benefits

Enclosed Meters Factory designed and wired to fit vari- Saves installation time and cost
ous Eaton power and energy meters at One part number to order; no need
ii varying price points, Eatons Enclosed
Meter line offers savings in labor and
to worry that any part has been
left out
installation costs because input current Pick the meter or meters you
1 and voltage wiring, as well as I/O need as it is designed to fit various
wiring, is pre-wired to terminal blocks Eaton power and energy meters,
inside the enclosure. Standalone, at varying price points
2 enclosed meters are ideal for new
metering applications where no Factory Wired
metering existed previously, retrofit Most electrical contractors are very
3 installations where energy monitoring familiar with wiring meters. However,
is a must or where ease of installation it does take time to place the disconnect,
is required. CT shorting blocks, terminal blocks,
Single and Multi Unit NEMA 12
4 Enclosed MetersFront Views Health care facilities control power transformer, etc. and
associated wiring. It is not uncommon
Educational facilities and campuses
General Description for errors to be introduced during the
5 The Eaton Enclosed Meter line provides
Industrial facilities installation of multiple meters; it's
Commercial facilities just inherent in wiring. With Eatons
a complete energy metering and data
Government facilities Enclosed Meter line, everything is
6 acquisition solution in a single enclo-
wired at the factory: the shorting block,
sure. Designed for Eatons IQ 35M, The multi unit offering consolidates terminal blocks, etc., assuring that its
IQ 150, IQ 250/260 and Power Xpert energy-related data available from the done right. Further, to ensure safety,
7 2000/4000/6000/8000 and Multi-Point
Meters, Eatons Enclosed Meter line
meters in the enclosure, but also allows Eatons Enclosed Meter line includes a
for external meters to be added to the primary fusible disconnect for line
offers mounting and installation flexi- embedded Power Xpert Gateway 200E. voltage that can be turned off during
8 bility, especially in retrofit applications Through the Power Xpert Gateway meter maintenance.
where no metering compartment or 200Es embedded Web server, infor-
mounting space is available in the mation can be presented in a variety For applications with line voltages
9 existing electrical distribution equip- of ways, a standard Web browser above the rated power supply of the
ment or where installation time is a being the most widely used method. meter, an optional control power
premium. Factory designed and wired, transformer is supplied in the enclo-
10 Eatons Enclosed Meter line offers The enclosed product is a standalone sure. Control voltage can also be
savings in labor and installation costs solution that is ideal for many infra- supplied via a separate source that is
because input current and voltage structure designs. Further, as needs wired to the field installation terminal
11 wiring, as well as I/O wiring, is pre-wired change and grow, the enclosed product block. CT inputs for the meter are
to terminal blocks inside the enclosure. can be integrated through Power Xpert wired directly to shorting terminal
Software into a broader solution that blocks for easy field installation.
The Enclosed Meter line has two offer-
12 ings; single, prewired unit (specific
encompasses other intelligent hard- Factory wired products also save on
ware and can integrate with third-party installation time and costs. The meters
IQ 150, IQ 250/260 or PXM 2000/4000/ network management systems (NMS) are flush mounted on the enclosure
6000/8000 or PXMP models) and a
13 multi unit (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/260
or building management systems door with all inputs/outputs factory-
(BMS) for system-wide monitoring and wired to terminal blocks.
or IQ 35M models). Because the multi reporting of energy and power.
unit automatically includes Eatons Note: A meter subpanel assembly is also
14 Power Xpert Gateway 200E, it facili- available, which includes all the internal
tates measurement and verification of components of the single-unit enclosed
the energy usage on processes and in meter for the IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000
15 buildings. This provides a convenient Meters wired and mounted on a subpanel
to be installed into an existing electrical
way to monitor energy usage from structure. It comes with a 48-inch lead
multiple points, collect and log specific
16 energy use parameters, and display
for flexibility in mounting the meters at
various distances.
and generate logs for historical energy
17 usage reports. Simply put, Eatons multi
unit enclosed meter solution helps meet
any measurement and verification
18 requirement to show energy efficiency
improvements and results. In addition
to the standard offering, Eaton can
19 also provide an enclosed metering
solution tailored around your
project needs.
20
21

Sheet 03 085
NEMA Rated Fused

NEMA 12 enclosure prevents dust and Disconnect i
Neutral,
other materials from entering. Internal
Ground and
gaskets also prevent air irritants from
harming the vital equipment inside.
Input/Output
(not shown)
ii
This quality enclosure meets most Terminal
indoor application needs. NEMA 3R Blocks
enclosure is constructed for either 1
indoor or outdoor use to provide a
degree of protection to personnel
against access to hazardous parts;
Control Power,
Voltage and CT
2
CT Shorting
to provide a degree of protection of the Inputs Terminal Block
equipment inside the enclosure
against ingress of solid foreign objects Pre-Wired 3
Control Power
(falling dirt); to provide a degree of Transformer
protection with respect to harmful
effects on the equipment due to the 4
ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow);
and that will be undamaged by the
external formation of ice on the enclo-
Meter Fusing 5
sure. NEMA 4X enclosure provides NEMA 12 Front View, Door Open, Pre-Wired and Tested
the same degree of protection as the
NEMA 3R with the additional protection Gateway Power Supply
6
against windblown dust, splashing and
hose directed water, and protection
against corrosion.
7
Fused Disconnect
8
Meter Fusing
PX Gateway 9
Control Power,
Voltage, CT and
Communications
Fused Control
Power Transformer
10
Inputs
11
Ground
12
NEMA 3R Single Unit Closed and Open CT Shorting
Blocks
13
14
NEMA 12 Multi Unit View, Door Open, Pre-Wired and Tested
Fused Disconnect Meter Fusing

15
16
Prewired Control
Power Transformer
NEMA 4X Single Unit Closed and Open 17
Display
Meter Control 18
Power, Voltage
and CT Inputs
19
CT Shorting Terminal Blocks 20

NEMA 12 Single-Unit Enclosed Meter Inside View, PXM 4000/6000/8000 Series
21

Sheet 03 086
Meter Fusing Gateway Power Supply Flex Center

i Eatons Meter Flex Center can provide above and beyond the
standard meter enclosure offerings. The Meter Flex Center
can tailor the enclosed solution to meet the specification
ii Fused requirements. Special requirements within the enclosures
Disconnect can be size, number of meters, differing meter models,
special communication equipment, uninterruptible power
1 supplies, electric heaters, power receptacles, or any other
custom need. Below is an example of just a few of the Meter
PX Gateway Flex Center capabilities.
2
Lifting Rings
3
Control Power, PXM 2000
4 Voltage
Current
Power Meters
Sensor and
Communicatio
5 ns Inputs
Removable Covers
6 for Future Meters
Current Sensor Terminal Strip
7 Multi-Unit Enclosed Meter, Inside View of IQ 35M
Fused Disconnect Fuses

8 PXMP Power
Supply
PXMP
9 6-Inch Color Meter Base
Touchscreen Connections
10
NEMA 12 PXMP Meter
Enclosure Base
11 (30H x 24W
x 12D Inches)
PXMP Meter Modules Single-Pole Touchsafe Fuse Block CT Shorting Blocks
12 (shown but sold separately)
Enclosed Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
13
48-Inch Meter
Harness
14
Grounding
Meter Fusing Bar
15 Fused
Disconnect
Fuses
Communications
Connections for ELC-PS02
16 Other Meters 24 Vdc
Power Supply
PXG-600E
17 Communications
Gateway
Single-Pole
Touchsafe
Optional CPT CT Shorting Block Fuse Holder
Switch for
Prewired Meter Backpan, Single Unit
18 PXM 2000
Incoming
Prewired panel to save installation time and cost for retro- Control Power Line Circuit
Transformer Protector
fits into existing equipment
19 Designed for Eatons:
IQ 100 Meter Series
Duplex Receptacle
20 250/260
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series NEMA 1 16 Meter Enclosure with PXM 2000
Front View and Door Open
With or without CPT, depending on voltage
21
Order meters separately

Sheet 03 087
Technical Data and Specifications Ordering Information

i
Table 3.3-2. Enclosed Meters Table 3.3-3. Single Unit Enclosed Meter Catalog Numbering System
Description Specification ii
Enclosure NEMA 12, 3R, 4X PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B
rating
Enclosure 20 C to +40 C 1
operating Note: Temperature range of meter is 20C to +70C. Meter Type
temperature If applied outside, proper precautions should be taken CPT Option
PXM2250MA65105 IQ250MA65100
to avoid exceeding the maximum and minimum
temperature ratings of the meter. PXM2250MA65115 IQ250MA65110 A = 120/240 Vac 2
PXM2250MA65145 IQ250MA65114 (No CPT)
Dimensions Single unit (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000): PXM2260MA65105 IQ260MA65100 B = 480 Vac (CPT)
NEMA 12 (8.00W x 16.30H x 10.40D inches),
NEMA 3R/4X (8.00W x 16.30H x 9.60D inches)
PXM2260MA65115 IQ260MA65110 3
PXM2260MA65145 IQ260MA65114 NEMA Rating
Single unit (PXMP): PXM2270MA65105 IQ150MA6511
NEMA 12/3R/4X (24.00W x 30.00H x 12.00D inches) PXM2270MA65115 IQ150MA6512 2 = NEMA 12
Single unit (PXM 4000/6000/8000): PXM2270MA65145 3 = NEMA 3R 4
NEMA 12 (20.00W x 24.00H x 14.10D inches), 4 = NEMA 4X
NEMA 3R/4X (20.20W x 24.00H x 13.90D inches)
Multi unit:
NEMA 12 (13.00W x 30.00H x 15.20D inches)
5
NEMA 3R (13.20W x 30.10H x 14.60D inches) Table 3.3-4. Enclosed PXMP Meter Catalog Numbering System
NEMA 4X (13.00W x 30.00H x 14.00D inches)
6
Meters Single unit: IQ 150, IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/
6000/8000 and PXMP models PXMP-MB - 2 B D
Multi unit: IQ 35M, IQ 150 and IQ 250/260
Communications Power Xpert Gateway 200E 7
(multi unit only) Meter Type
Control 120 V600 V (PXMP)power supply required PXMP-MB
voltage Up to 240 V (IQ 35M/150/250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/ PXMP-MB-AB Display 8
6000/8000)no CPT required A = None
Greater than 240 V (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000) D = 6-inch color
NEMA Rating
CPT required
Separate source controlno CPT required
touchscreen 9
2 = NEMA 12
Basic Fusible disconnectprimary voltage 3 = NEMA 3R
Power Supply
model Shorting block(s) not required for IQ 35M or PXMP 4 = NEMA 4X
Ground terminal block A = None 10
Neutral terminal block B = 120/240 Vac
Eight-point terminal block(s) for input/output modules C = 480 Vac
for IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000 D = 600 Vac
11
Wiring Wired for three-phase, four-wire applications.
Three-phase, three-wire applicationswill need to
change the wiring for both the voltage and current per
the wiring diagram in the meter instruction manual.
Table 3.3-5. Multi Unit Enclosed Meter Catalog Numbering System 12
Certifications UL 508A and cUL
Source No separate source control voltage required for
IQ150MA6511 - 2 B 4 C 13
control applications below 240 Vac (except PXMP)
Pre-wire Pre-wired current transformer, shorting terminal
block(s), neutral, ground, voltage, control power,
fusible disconnect and input/output terminal block(s)
Meter Type 14
IQ35MA12
Latch Padlocking latch provision IQ150MA6511 Communications
Optional Control power transformersingle unit: IQ250MA65100
IQ260MA65100
C = Includes PXG200E 15
features 50 VA (IQ 150/250/260 and 150 VA (PXM 4000/6000/
8000); multi unit: 250 VA control power supply for
meter where monitored voltage is 480 Vac (IQ 150/
250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/6000/8000)
NEMA Rating Number of Meters 16
2 = NEMA 12 1 4 = 4 meters
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and 3 = NEMA 3R
represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options 4 = NEMA 4X CPT Option 17
installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality A = No CPT
may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and B = CPT 1
product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and user 18
manual for detailed specifications. 1 Not available with IQ 35M.
19
20
21

Sheet 03 088

i
ii
8
Figure 3.3-2. NEMA 12 Single Unit Enclosure
9
13.00
10 (330.2)
11
12
13
14
15
8.50
16 23.9)
17
18
Right Side View Front View Rear View
19
Figure 3.3-3. NEMA 12 Multi Unit Enclosure
20
21

Sheet 03 089
20.00 i
(508.0)
ii
12.00
(304.8)
4x0.44 1
16.94 18.50
1/4-Turn
(430.3) (469.9)
Subpanel Width Mounting Width 2
0.75
(19.1) 3
24 00
21.00 22.50
(533.4) (571.5)
0.75
(19.1)
4
Subpanel Mounting
Height Height
5
Left Side View ight Side View Front View (Door Removed) External Rear View
6
Bottom View 9
Figure 3.3-4. NEMA 12 PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure
10
24.00
(609.6) 11
12.00
(304.8) 12
Top View 13
14
29.50 5.25 HMI
(749.3) (133.4) Cutout
Door 15
6.79
30.00 (172.4)
(762.0)
16
17
Left Side View Front View Right Side Front View
View (Door Removed)
23.63 (600.2)
Door 18
19
Bottom View 20
Figure 3.3-5. NEMA 12 PXMP Unit Enclosure
21

Sheet 03 090
ii
3
This Drip Cap is
on NEMA 3R On
4
7
(no door)
8
Figure 3.3-6. NEMA 3R/4X Single Unit Enclosure
9
13.20
10 (335.3)
(NEMA 3R)
13.00
11 (330.2)
(NEMA 4X)
12
13
14 This Drip Cap is

on NEMA 3R Only
15
27.00
(685.8)
16 (NEMA 3R)
28.50
17 (723.9)
(NEMA 4X)
18
19
Right Side View Front View Front View Rear View
(no door)
20
Figure 3.3-7. NEMA 3R/4X Multi Unit Enclosure
21

Sheet 03 091
20.20 (513.1) i
Top Width
20.00 (508.0)
Enclosure Width
ii
13.70
(348.0)
Top 1
12.00 Depth
17.50
(304.8) (444.5)
4x0.34
Enclosure
Depth Top View
Mounting Width
1.25
2
(31.8)
3
21.00
24.00 (533.4) Front View (Door Removed)
Mounting
4
(609.6)
Height
Left Side View Front View Right Side View External Rear View
1.50
6
19.63 (498.6) (38.1)
Door Turn
locking
ch
7
8
Front View (Subpanel Only)
Bottom View 9
Figure 3.3-8. NEMA 3R PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure
10
20.00
(508.0) 11
12.00
(304.8)
12
1/4-Turn 18.50
(469.9)
13
Padlocking
Mounting Width
14
0.75
(19.1)
15
22.50 (19.1)
24.00 (571.5)
(609.6) Mounting 16
Height
4x0.44
17
Left Side View Fron Right Side View External Rear View
18
19
20
Bottom View
21
Figure 3.3-9. NEMA 4X PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure

Sheet 03 092
i 24.00
(609.6)
ii 12.00
(304.8)
1 6.79
Top View (172.5)
3
5.25 HMI
(133.4) Cutout
30.00 30.80
4 (762.0)
Enclosure
(782.3)
Overall
6 Left Side View Front View Right Side View Front View Front View
(Door Removed) (Door Removed)
23.63 (600.2)
7 Door
9 Bottom View
Figure 3.3-10. NEMA 3R PXMP Multi Unit Enclosure

10
24.00
11 (609.6)
12 12.00
(304.8)
13 Top View
6.79
(172.5)
14
5.25 HMI
15 (133.4) Cutout
30.00 30.00
(762.0) (762.0)
Enclosure Overall
16
17
Left Side View Front View Right Side View Front View Front View
18 23.63 (600.2) (Door Removed) (Door Removed)
Door
19
13.07
(332.0)
Overall
20
Bottom View
21
Figure 3.3-11. NEMA 4X PXMP Multi Unit Enclosure

Sheet 03 093
Wiring Diagrams
i
ii
Figure 3.3-12. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Multi Unit IQ 35M Meters 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.3-13. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Multi Unit IQ 150/250/260 Meters

Sheet 03 094
ii
9
Figure 3.3-14. 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Multi Unit IQ 150/250/260 Meters
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 3.3-15. 120240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Single-Phase, Three-Wire System with Single PXMP Meter

Sheet 03 095
ii
9
Figure 3.3-16. 120240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye System with Single PXMP Meter
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3.3-17. 480600 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye System with Single PXMP Meter
21

Sheet 03 096
ii
9
Figure 3.3-18. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit IQ 150/250/260 or PXM 2000 Meter
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 Figure 3.3-19. 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit IQ 150/250/260 or PXM 2000 Meter

Sheet 03 097
ii
9
Figure 3.3-20. 200240 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit PXM 4000/6000/8000 Meter
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3.3-21. 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with Single Unit PXM 4000/6000/8000 Meter
21

Sheet 03 098
Current Transformers
i Current Transformers Product Selection Table 3.3-7. Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Primary ANSI B0.1 Window Catalog
Table 3.3-6. Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy Current Metering Size in Number
Rating Class Inches (mm)
ii Primary ANSI B0.1
Current Metering
Window
Size in
Catalog
Number
at 60 Hz
(Accuracy
Rating Class Inches (mm) in %)
at 60 Hz Diameter
1 (Accuracy 400 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 M000-401
in %) 500 2.4 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-501
600 2.4 M000-601
300 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-301
2 400 S050-401
800
1000
1.2
1.2
M000-801
M000-102
500 S050-501 1200 0.6 M000-122
600 S050-601 1500 0.6 M000-152
3 750 S050-751 1600 0.6 M000-162
Current Transformers 800 S050-801 2000 0.6 M000-202
1000 S050-102
600 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 M050-601
4 General Description 1200 S050-122
750 4.8 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-751
50 1.2 1.25 (31.8) S060-500 800 2.4 M050-801
Eatons low voltage current transformers 100 0.6 S060-101 1000 2.4 M050-102
are available in both solid core and split 150 0.3 S060-151 1200 1.2 M050-122
5 core designs. Engineered for electronic 200 0.3 S060-201 1500 1.2 M050-152
metering applications, all solid core 400 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-401 2000 0.6 M050-202
designs and selected split core designs 500 S080-501 2500 0.6 M050-252
6 offer ANSI metering quality accuracy. 600 S080-601 3000 0.6 M050-302
750 S080-751 3500 0.6 M050-352
The solid core designs also meet ANSI 4000 0.3 M050-402
800 S080-801
C57.13 relay accuracy requirements
7 including over-ranging capabilities. The
1000
1200
S080-102
S080-122 Table 3.3-8. Split Core Current Transformers
current transformer offering has a 5 A 500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-501 Primary Accuracy Window Catalog
secondary at the rated primary current. 600 S090-601
8 750 S090-751
Current at 60 Hz
Rating (in %)
Size in
Inches (mm)
Number
Split core CTs are specifically designed 800 S090-801
to be installed around primary conduc- 1000 S090-102 100 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 M030-101
9 tors without disconnecting wires or 1200 S090-122 150 5.0 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-151
breaking the circuit to be monitored. 1500 S090-152 200 4.0 M030-201
1600 S090-162 300 2.0 M030-301
These current transformers are per-
2000 S090-202
10 fect solutions for energy management 2500 S090-252
400 2.0 M030-401
applications and are manufactured 100 5.0 1.42 x 1.53 M040-101
3000 S090-302
150 4.0 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-151
for installation ease. 600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-601 200 1.5 M040-201
11 750 S025-751 300 1.5 M040-301
Application Description 800 S025-801 400 1.5 M040-401
1000 S025-102
For new construction and retrofit 200 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 M060-201
12 applications where no current
1200
1500
S025-122
S025-152
300 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-301
400 M060-401
transformer exists, Eaton offers a 1600 S025-162
500 M060-501
complete selection of low voltage 2000 S025-202
13 (up to 600 V) current transformers. 2500 S025-252
600
750
M060-601
M060-751
3000 S025-302
These current transformers can be 3500 S025-352
800 M060-801
used in commercial grade applications 1000 M060-102
14 such as control panels and panel-
4000 S025-402
1200 M060-122
25 0.3 Wound W190-025
boards. Additionally, they can be 500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 M080-501
50 Primary W190-050
600 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-601
used for most industrial metering and
15 relaying applications in switchboards,
800 M080-801
1000 M080-102
switchgear and motor control centers. 1200 M080-122
1500 M080-152
16 Note: Not for use with IQ 35M or IQ MESII. 1600 M080-162
2000 M080-202
2500 M080-252
17 3000 M080-302
18
19
20
21

Sheet 03 099

i
(4) Open Slots 0.22 x 0.34 2.75
(5.6 x 8.6) (69.9)
S050BRAC ii
1
2.23
(56.6) 1.10
1.67 (27.9) 2
(42.4)
X1
3
L
BE
LA 3.53 4
0.44
(11.2) (90.0)
3.00
(76.2)
5
H1
X1
6
3.70
(94.0) 7
1.56 Dia.
H1 (39.6)
8
0.31
1.88 (7.9)
(47.8)
9
2.25 10
Approximate weight: 1 lb (2) Holes 0.20 (5.1) Diameter (57.2)
Figure 3.3-22. S050Approximate Dimensions 11
5.25
(133.4)
12
4.00
(101.6)
13
3.10
(78.7)
2.88
(73.2)
14
X1
(2) Slots
0.28 x 0.50
(7.1 x 12.7) (2) 0.28 x 0.50 Slots
15
(7.1 x 12.7)
3.62
(91.9)
16
0.88
H1 (22.4)
0.44 (11.2)
17
X1
18
4.00
(101.6)
H1 See Tables
19
1.95
(49.5)
20
Approximate weight: 5.25 lbs

Sheet 03 100
i (8) Open Slots

0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
5.73 (145.5)
ii 4.85 (123.2)
S080BRAC 3.81 (96.8)
1
2.19 1.15 2.91
(55.6) (29.2) (73.9)
2 X1
L
BE
LA
3 1.09
0.44
(4) Holes (11.2)
0.42 (10.7) Dia. 0.55 (27.7)
4 (14.0)
H1 X1
5
5.73
(145.5)
6 H1 3.25 (82.6) Dia.
2.84
7 (72.1)
8 0.51 4.70
Approximate weight: 2.5 lbs (13.0) (119.4)
9 Figure 3.3-24. S080Approximate Dimensions
10 5.92 (150.4)
4.85 (123.2)
S090BRAC
3.81 (96.8)
11
2.91
1.15 2.19 (73.9)
12 (29.2) (55.6)
0
X1
13 (8) Open Slots 0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
B EL
LA
14 3.50
(88.9)
X1
15
6.17
(156.7)
16 H1 H1 4.25 (108.0) Dia.
0.42 2.97
17 (10.7) (75.4)
18
4.86 (123.4)
19 Approximate weight: 3 lbs (4) 0.28 x 0.63 (7.1 x 16.0) Slots
20 Figure 3.3-25. S090Approximate Dimensions
21

Sheet 03 101
S025BRAC
i
2.98 1.28 4.10
(75.7) (32.5) (104.1) ii
0
X1
6.37 1
0.56 (161.8) (4) Slots 0.44 x 1.00
B EL
LA (14.2) (11.2 x 25.4)
8.50
(215.9)
2
0.75
(19.1)
3
0.44
(11.2)
H1 4
8.50
6.31
(215.9) 5
6.75
H1 (160.3)
(171.5)
6
4.25
(108.0)
7
6.75
0.88 (171.5)
(4) 0.56 (14.2)
Diameter Holes
8
Approximate weight: 3 lbs (22.4)
(4) Closed Slots 10

2.75 (69.9) 0.21 x 0.50 (5.3 x 12.7)
11
4.69
4.12
2.19
(55.6)
(119.1) 12
X1 (104.6)
H2 H1 X2 X1 3.25
X2 (82.6)
13
H1
H2
L
BE
LA
3.50 (4) Open Slots
14
(88.9) 0.44 x 0.50 (11.2 x 12.7)
4.50
(114.3) 0.38 15
(9.7)
0.75
(19.1)
16
LABEL 0.44
(11.2) 17
4.88
(124.0)
18
0.50
(12.7)
19
3.48 (88.4)
(2) Mounting Holes
20
Approximate weight: 4 lbs 0.38 (9.7) Diameter
21
Figure 3.3-27. W190Approximate Dimensions

Sheet 03 102
i H1
X1
is ble
d
X2
En
X1
Th ova
ble
ii
a
ov
m
EL
m
Re
Re
LA
End
is
1
Th
H1
4.25 (108.0)
2 Approximate
weight: 1.5 lbs 2.00
0.44
(11.2)
0.75
(50.8) (19.1)
3 This End
Removable
LABEL
X1
H1
7.75
4 (196.9)
7.10
LABEL
5.50 (180.3)
(139.7) 4.10 10.90
10.00
5 (104.1) (254.0)
(276.9)
H1
6
X1 X2 This End Removable
7 3.50 (88.9)
0.38
(9.7)
6.40
(162.6)
1.63
(41.4)
1.13 7.30 (4) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Holes
(2) 0.19 (4.8) Diameter Holes (185.4)
(28.7)
8
Figure 3.3-28. M000Approximate Dimensions Figure 3.3-29. M050Approximate Dimensions
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 3.3-30. M030Approximate Dimensions
19
20
21

Sheet 03 103
2.50 ii
(63.5)
1
Terminal Arrangement for 3.38 (85.9)
H1 Ratios 250:5 through 400:5
1.20
2
(30.5)
X2
3
X2
4.78
LABEL
(121.4) 4
LABEL
3.52 1.53 4.12
(89.4) H1 (104.6)
(38.9)
X1 5
X1
6
Terminal Arrangement for

Ratios 100:5 through 200:5
1.42 7
(36.1)
Figure 3.3-31. M040Approximate Dimensions 8
9
L
BE
LA 10
H1
11
12
13
H1
14
15
16
H1 H1
17
2.70 (68.6) 6.25 (158.8)
5.80 (147.3) 18
9.25 (235.0) X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK
X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK
H1
H1
19
2.75 (69.9) 2.60 (66.0)
1.75 1.75 20
6.05 (153.7) (44.5) 6.05 (153.7) (44.5)
Figure 3.3-32. M060Approximate Dimensions Figure 3.3-33. M080Approximate Dimensions

21

Protective and Predictive Relays 4.0-1
October 2015
Sheet 04001
Predictive Relays
Contents
Protective and Protective and Predictive Relays
Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0-2
Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
i
ii
Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
Dual-Source Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-6 1
Digitrip 3000Drawout Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-8
FP-5000 Feeder Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-11
EDR-3000 Distribution Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-16 2
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-20
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
Freedom Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1 3
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
C441 Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-5
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-11
4
MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay with Voltage Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-17
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-22 5
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-29
EMR-5000 Motor Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-37
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-47 6
Transformer Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
ETR-5000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7 7
Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-18
EGR-5000 Generator Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-18
Transformer Temperature Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1
8
TC-100 Transformer Temperature Controller
for Dry-Type Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1 9
InsulGard Predictive Maintenance
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-4 10
General Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-5
Switchgear Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-5
Motor Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-6 11
Generator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-8
Connection Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-10
Specifications
12
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010 13
DT-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.A
FP-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.B
MP-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.02.C 14
MP-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.02.G
EDR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.C
EDR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.D
EMR-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.02.C 15
EMR-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.02.D
EMR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.02.E
ETR-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.F 16
ETR-5000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.G
EGR-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16903 26 09 11 Paragraph 2.04.E
Universal RTD Module . . . Section 16901 26 27 13.11 Paragraph 2.04.A 17
InsulGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16950A 26 13 13.41 Paragraph 2.03.A
Section 16950C 26 11 13.11 Paragraph 2.03.A
Section 16950D 26 32 13.11 Paragraph 2.03.A
18
19
20
21

4.0-2 Protective and Predictive Relays
Selection Guide October 2015
Sheet 04 002
General Description
i Selection Chart
Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart
Device Name Feeder Protection
ii Description IEEE DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000
Device
Number
1
2 Page Number Page 4.1-1 Page 4.1-16 Page 4.1-20 Page 4.1-11
Phase inst. OC 50
3 Phase TOC 51
Ground inst. OC (measured) 50G
4 Ground TOC (measured) 51G
Ground inst. OC (calculated) 50R
Ground TOC (calculated) 51R
5 No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) 11 11 11 10
Zone selective interlocking
6 Phase directional control 1 67
Ground directional control 1 67N
Phase voltage restrained OC 51VR
7 Undervoltage 27
Current unbalance 46

8 Voltage Unbalance 47
Power factor 55
Overvoltage 59
9 Frequency (over/under) 81
Rate of change of frequency 81R
Vector surge 78V
10 Forward/reverse power 32
Forward/reverse VARs 32V
11 Sync check 25
Reclosing 79
Ground overvoltage 59N
12 Thermal overload 2 49
Underload 37
13 Locked rotor 49S/51
Jam/stall 51R
Incomplete sequence 48
14 Number of starts limit
Starts per hour 66
15 Time between starts

Long acceleration time
Emergency override
16 Broken rotor bar detection
Loss of potential 60LOP
Current transformer supervision
17 Cold load pickup
Switch on to fault
18 Breaker failure 50BF
2nd harmonic restraint
4th harmonic restraint
19 5th harmonic restraint
Differential 87
20 Ground differential 87GD
Trip lock out 86
1 Directional elements are controlled by reverse, forward, or both directions.
21 2 When communicating to an external URTD device.

October 2015 Selection Guide
Sheet 04 003
General Description
Table 4.0-1. Selection Chart (Continued)

Device Name Feeder Protection i
Description IEEE DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000
Device
Number ii
1
Page Number Page 4.1-1 Page 4.1-16 Page 4.1-20 Page 4.1-11
Negative sequence current 51Q 2
External protection
Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) 24 3
Loss of field 40
Low voltage ride-through 27T
Reactive power and undervoltage 27Q 4
Inadvertent energization 50/27
Control Functions
5
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Digital inputs 1 4 or 8 8 8 6
Relay outputs 2 3 or 5 10 6
Supervisory/alarm output 1 1 1 1
Programmable logic control
7
Multiple settings groups 4 4 4
Adaptive parameters 8
Reduced voltage starting
Analog outputs
Analog inputs
9
Metering Functions
Amperes 10
Ampere Demand
Voltage (L-N and L-L)
Phase angle 11
Pos., neg., and zero sequence

Watts
12
Watt Demand
Watthour
VARs 13
VAR demand
VAR-hour
VA
14
VA Demand
VA-hour 15
Frequency
Minimum/maximum recording
Current unbalance
16
Voltage unbalance
Power factor 17
Sync values
Differential currents
2nd, 4th, 5th harmonic currents 18
3rd harmonic voltage
THD current 19
THD voltage
Volt/Hertz
Thermal capacity 20
Generator hours of operation
21

Sheet 04 004
General Description

i Device Name Feeder Protection
Description IEEE DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000
Device
ii Number
1
Page Number Page 4.1-1 Page 4.1-16 Page 4.1-20 Page 4.1-11
Monitoring Functions
2 Trip circuit monitor 74
Breaker wear
Fault recorder
3 Waveform recorder
Sequence of events recorder
4 Trend recorder (load profile)
Clock
Time synchronization
5 RTD temperature 1
Hottest RTD 1
6 Communications
Front access interface
Local human machine interface
7 RS-232
USB 2 2
Rear communication port interface

8 RS-485 Option Option
Ethernet copper (RJ45) Option Option
9 Fiber optic ST 2 2 2
Fiber optic LC 2 2 2
Protocol
10 INCOM Option
Modbus-RTU Option Option Option
11 Modbus-TCP Option Option

IEC 61850 Option Option
DNP 3.0 2 2 2
12 Profibus 2 2 2
IRIG-B Option
SNTP Option Option
13 Construction
Panel mount case Semi-flush or projected Semi-flush or projected
14 Drawout case Option Removable terminals Removable terminals Option
Self-shorting CT terminals
Operating Temperature Range 30 C to +55 C 40 C to +60 C 40 C to +60 C 40 C to +60 C
15 Power supply range (Vac) 120240 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 48125 Vdc
Power supply range (Vdc) 24250 Vdc 19 300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 48125 Vdc

16 AC current inputs
AC voltage inputs
Wye VT configuration
17 Open delta VT configuration
Sensitive ground 50/51G Option Option
Local display / HMI Backlit LCD w/8 pushbuttons Backlit LCD w/8 pushbuttons
18 LEDs (local targets) Programmable Programmable
Standards
19 ANSI
IEC
UL
20 CE DT-3030 only
CSA
1
21 2
When communicating to an external URTD device.
Option available beginning in late 2015.

Sheet 04 005
General Description

Device Name Motor Protection i
Description IEEE C306 C440/XT C441
Device Bimetallic OLR Solid-State OLR Solid-State OLR
Number ii
Page Number Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-5 2

Motor Protection
Thermal overload protection 49 Bi-metallic Microprocessor-based Microprocessor-based
3
Trip class
10 or 20 10A, 10, 20, 30 530
Selectable via heater packs Selectable via DIP switches Selectable via user interface 4
Adjustable FLA
Adjustable via dial Adjustable via dial Adjustable via user interface
(range approx.1.6:1) (range 5:1) (range 9:1 and 18:1) 5
Locked rotor/stall current 49S/51
Phase losscurrent 46 Selectable on/off (90% setting) Selectable on/off (60% setting)
6
Phase imbalance 46 Selectable on/off (50% setting) Adjustable (030% setting), off
Ground fault 51N Fixed at 50% of FLA setting Programmable threshold,
and alarm or trip mode 7
Jam/current level protection 50 Instantaneous and adjustable
Phase reversal 47
Load Protection 8
Undercurrent

Low power (kW)
9
High power (kW)
Voltage Protection
Overvoltage 59 10
Undervoltage 27
Voltage imbalance 47
Voltage phase loss 47
11
Power-up delay
Control Functions 12
Manual reset
Automatic reset
Electronic remote reset
13
Network command reset
Output Contacts 14
NO contacts 1 1 B600 1 B300 (Form A or Form C)
NC contacts 1 1 B600 1 B300 (Form B or Form C)
Ground fault shunt relay 1 1 B300 (Form A) 15
Independently programmable contacts 1
Control Power
16
Self (line) powered
Separate 24 Vdc supply
Separate 120 Vac supply 17
Metering Functions (via Local Display)
Amperes
Individual phase
18
Average
Current imbalance % 19
Voltage
Individual phase
Average
20
Voltage imbalance %
1 Depends on the catalog number ordered. 21

Sheet 04 006
General Description

i Device Name Motor Protection
ii Number
2 Page Number Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-5

Metering Functions (via Local Display) (continued)
Kilowatts
3 Power factor
Trip status
4 Diagnostics (10 fault queue)
Overload indication
Thermal capacity
5 Frequency
Run hours

6 Ground fault current
Monitoring Functions (via Communications)
Overload indication
7 Operating LED
Trip status
Configured settings
8 Thermal memory (time until reset)
Thermal capacity
9 Ground fault current
Frequency
Motor starts
10 Motor run hours
Power motor kW
11 Power factor
Current
Individual Phase I rms
12 Average Phase I rms
Current imbalance %
13 Voltage
Individual Phase V rms
Average Phase V rms
14 Voltage imbalance %
Fault Indication

15 Overload
Phase loss
Phase imbalance
16 Ground fault
Phase reversal
Jam/stall/current level
17 Undercurrent
Low power
18 High power
Voltage imbalance
Undervoltage
19 Overvoltage
20
21

Sheet 04 007
General Description

Device Name Motor Protection i
Number ii
Page Number Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-1 Page 4.2-5 2

Communications
Modbus RTU RS-485
Modbus RTU with I/O
3
DeviceNet with I/O
PROFIBUS with I/O 4
EtherNet/IP with I/O
Modbus TCP with I/O
Mounting 5
Panel mounting
Contactor mounting 6
DIN rail mounting
Optional remote mounted display
Standards 7
UL

CSA
8
CE
NEMA
IEC 9
RoHS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 008
General Description

i Device Name Motor Transformer Generator
Protection Protection Protection
Description IEEE MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000
ii Device
Number
1
Page Number Page 4.2-11 Page 4.2-17 Page 4.2-22 Page 4.2-29 Page 4.2-37 Page 4.3-1 Page 4.3-7 Page 4.3-18
2 Protection Functions
Phase inst. OC 50
Phase TOC 51
3 Ground inst. OC (measured) 50G
Ground TOC (measured) 51G
4 Ground inst. OC (calculated) 50R
Ground TOC (calculated) 51R
No. of curves (ANSI/IEC/thermal) 11 11 11 11 11 11
5 Zone selective interlocking
Phase directional control 1 67
Ground directional control 1
6 67N
Phase voltage restrained OC 51VR
Undervoltage 27
7 Current unbalance 46
Voltage Unbalance 47
Power factor 55
8 Overvoltage 59
Frequency (over/under) 81
9 Rate of change of frequency 81R
Vector surge 78V
Forward/reverse power 32
10 Forward/reverse VARs 32V
Sync check 25
11 Reclosing 79
Ground overvoltage 59N
Thermal overload 2 49
12 Underload 37
Locked rotor 49S/51

13 Jam/stall 51R
Incomplete sequence 48
Number of starts limit
14 Starts per hour 66
Time between starts
Long acceleration time
15 Emergency override
Broken rotor bar detection
16 Loss of potential 60LOP
Current transformer supervision
Cold load pickup
17 Switch on to fault
Breaker failure 50BF
18 2nd harmonic restraint
19 Differential 87
Ground differential 87GD

20 Trip lock out
1
86
Directional elements are controlled by reverse, forward, or both directions.
2 When communicating to an external URTD device.
21

Sheet 04 009
General Description

Device Name Motor Transformer Generator i
Device ii
Number
1
Protection Functions 2
Negative sequence current 51Q
External protection
Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) 24
3
Loss of field 40
Low voltage ride-through 27T 4
Reactive power and undervoltage 27Q
Inadvertent energization 50/27
Control Functions 5
Remote open/close Open only Open only

Programmable I/O
6
Digital inputs 2 2 4 8 8 or 16 8 8 8 or 16
Relay outputs 4 4 3 4 8 8 8 8
Supervisory/alarm output 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
Programmable logic control
Multiple settings groups 4 4 4 4 4 4
Adaptive parameters
8
Reduced voltage starting
Analog outputs 1 1 4 Option for 2 Option for 2 Option for 2 9
Analog inputs Option for 2 Option for 2 Option for 2
Metering Functions
Amperes
10
Ampere Demand
Voltage (L-N and L-L) 11
Phase angle
Pos., neg., and zero sequence
Watts
12
Watt Demand
Watthour 13
VARs
VAR demand
VAR-hour 14
VA
VA Demand
15
VA-hour
Frequency
Minimum/maximum recording Max. only Max. only 16
Current unbalance
Voltage unbalance
Power factor
17
Sync values
Differential currents 18
2nd, 4th, 5th harmonic currents
3rd harmonic voltage
THD current
19
THD voltage
Volt/Hertz 20
Thermal capacity
Generator hours of operation
21

Sheet 04 010
General Description

i Device Name Motor Transformer Generator
ii Device
Number
1
2 Monitoring Functions
Trip circuit monitor 74
Breaker wear
3 Fault recorder
Waveform recorder
Sequence of events recorder
4 Trend recorder (load profile)
Clock
5 Time synchronization
RTD temperature 1
Hottest RTD 1
6 Communications
Front access interface

7 Local human machine interface
RS-232
USB 2 2 2 2 2 2
8 Rear communication port interface

RS-485 Option Option Option Option Option Option
Ethernet copper (RJ45) Option Option Option Option Option Option
9 Fiber optic ST 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Fiber optic LC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10 Protocol
INCOM Option Option
Modbus RTU Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option
11 Modbus TCP Option Option Option Option Option Option
IEC 61850 Option Option Option Option Option Option
DNP 3.0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
12 Profibus 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
IRIG-B
13 SNTP Option Option Option Option Option Option
1 When communicating to an external URTD device.
2 Option available beginning in late 2015.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 011
General Description

Device Name Motor Transformer Generator i
Device ii
Number
1
Construction 2
Panel mount case Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or
projected projected projected projected projected projected
Drawout case Option Option Removable Removable Removable Removable Removable Removable 3
terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals
Self-shorting CT
terminals 4
Operating 20 C to 20 C to 40 C to 40 C to 40 C to 40 C to 40 C to 40 C to
Temperature +60 C +60 C +60 C +60 C +60 C +60 C +60 C +60 C
Range
Power supply 90264 Vac 90264 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac 40250 Vac
5
range (Vac)
Power supply
range (Vdc)
19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 19300 Vdc 6
AC current inputs
AC voltage inputs 7
Wye VT
configuration
Open delta VT 8
configuration
Sensitive ground 50/51G Option Option Option Option Option Option
Local display / HMI Backlit LCD w/ Backlit LCD w/ Backlit LCD w/ Backlit LCD w/ Backlit LCD w/ Backlit LCD w/ 9
8 pushbuttons 8 pushbuttons 8 pushbuttons 8 pushbuttons 8 pushbuttons 8 pushbuttons
LEDs Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable
(local targets) 10
Standards
ANSI
IEC 11
UL

CE
12
CSA
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2015
Sheet 04 012

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2015 Feeder Protection
Sheet 04 013
General DescriptionDigitrip 3000
Digitrip 3000 The Digitrip 3000 features a user- Continuous internal circuitry
friendly operator panel to monitor, self-testing i
Feeder Protection Relay program and test the relay. Operating Programmable lockout/self reset
parameters and troubleshooting after trip
information are displayed in the two Relay failure alarm contact
ii
highly visible display windows. In
Trip alarm contact
addition, all data and information can
be communicated to a host computer Optional Dual-Source Power 1
equipped with the appropriate Supply (DSPS), see Page 4.1-6
software. A Communication Trip Optional quick-release drawout
and Communication Close control case, see Page 4.1-8 2
command can also be initiated by a
host computer with an authorized Table 4.1-1. Catalog Numbers
access code. Description Catalog 3
Number
Features Digitrip 3000 DT3000
4
General Digitrip 3000 drawout relay DT3001
Digitrip 3000 drawout DT3001-IC
ANSI or IEC applications
User-friendly front panel
inner chassis 5
Digitrip 3000 drawout outer case DT3001-OC
Non-volatile memory Digitrip 3000 with 120 Vac DT3010
View settings any time dual-source power supply 6
Set CT ratios Digitrip 3000 with 240 Vac DT3020
dual-source power supply
Metered currents in
primary amperes Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc DT3030 7
power supply and CE mark
Individual phase targeting of fault
Digitrip 3000 with 24/48 Vdc DT3031
Digitrip 3000 Front View Integral test mode (phase power supply and CE mark in 8
and ground) drawout case
General Description Program and test mode
Eatons Digitrip 3000 protection relay security access cover with 9
is a multi-function, microprocessor- meter seal provision
based overcurrent relay designed for
both ANSI and IEC applications. It is 10
a panel-mounted, self-contained unit
that operates from either AC or DC
control power. The Digitrip 3000 is 11
DIP Switches
available in an optional quick-release
drawout case for panel-flush mounting.
For AC control power applications, Communication 12
an optional Dual-Source Power Connection
Supply (DSPS) is recommended. See Terminal Block 2-1
Page 4.1-6 for details. The Digitrip 3000
Terminal Block 2-2 13
design provides true rms sensing of Terminal
Block 1
each phase and ground current. Only
one unit is required for each three-
Terminal
Block 2
14
phase circuit. Current monitoring
and operator selectable protective
functions are integral to each relay. 15
Current
The Digitrip 3000 relay operates Transformer
from the 5 A secondary output of Connections 16
standard current transformers.
Digitrip 3000 Rear View
Current transformer ratio information
is quickly programmed into the 17
unit via settings. This enables the
relay to display metered current in
primary amperes. 18
19
20
21

Feeder Protection October 2015
Sheet 04 014
System Protection The Digitrip 3000 may be applied Time Overcurrent Reset
i True rms sensing of each phase and as the transformer primary protection The Digitrip 3000 includes time delay
ground current or as backup to the differential reset characteristic for the time over-
protection, as in Figure 4.1-2. current functions. This improves the
Selectable curve shapes: ANSI, IEC
ii or thermal curves overcurrent protection response to
Phase overcurrent protection per arcing fault conditions. The current
during an arcing fault may vary above
1 time-current curve
and below the pickup level. The time
Independent ground fault protection 50 51 above pickup will accumulate until
per time-current curve trip occurs.
2 Time overcurrent reset time delay
Ground element capable of CB 50N 51N Overcurrent Protection
residual, zero sequence or The Digitrip 3000 provides complete
3 external source connections Digitrip three-phase and ground protection
3000
Instantaneous phase and ground OC with separate elements and settings.
The relay can be used with CT ratios
4 Short delay phase and ground OC
Figure 4.1-2. Transformer Protection from 5/5 to 5000/5. The CT ratio can
Selectable true making current be set independently for phase and
release (discriminator) The Digitrip 3000 may be connected ground, allowing the ground element
5 Configurable trip outputs to the secondary side of a delta-wye to be connected in either the residual or
grounded transformer with the ground the separate ground CT configuration
Zone selective interlocking (phase
element connected to a separate CT as in Figure 4.1-4 and Figure 4.1-5.
6 and ground) for bus protection and
in the neutral connection of the trans-
reduced arc flash energy
former. With this connection, a lower
Information and Data Delivery CT ratio and a pickup setting can be a A1 A2
7 Displays individual phase currents used to provide more sensitive b B1 B2
ground fault protection especially c C1 C2
Displays ground current for resistance grounded systems 50/51
8 Displays magnitude and phase of (see Figure 4.1-3). GND G1 G2
current causing trip 50N/51N
Digitrip
Displays peak demand current
9 for each phase and ground since
CB-52 3000
Resistor
last reset
Displays current transformer ratio
10 Indicates cause of trip (time or
50G 51G Figure 4.1-4. Residual Ground Connections
instantaneous)
50 51
11 Data/information transmission a A1 A2
Provides breaker Open or Close Digitrip b B1 B2
3000 C2
status to a remote location via c C1
CB
12 Eatons PowerNet 50/51
Application Description Figure 4.1-3. Transformer Secondary

13 Protection with Ground CT Connection CB-52
General
The Digitrip 3000 microprocessor- The Digitrip 3000 relay has special 50G/51G
14 based relay provides reliable provisions for connection in a Zone GND G1 G2
three-phase and ground overcurrent Interlocking Scheme that can be used

protection for all voltage levels. It can for bus protection or to improve
15 be used for any application where protection coordination in a tight or
Digitrip
3000
instantaneous and/or time overcurrent close system. Zone interlocking is
protection is required. It is most described in more detail on Page 4.1-4.
16 commonly used as primary feeder
Figure 4.1-5. Separate Zero Sequence
Ground CT Connections
circuit protection, as in Figure 4.1-1.
17
18 50 51
19 CB 50N 51N
52
Digitrip
20 3000
Load
21 Figure 4.1-1. Primary Feeder Protection

Sheet 04 015
The phase and ground overcurrent Phase Curve Shape Instantaneous Protection
characteristics are defined by six The Digitrip 3000 includes the thermal, Instantaneous (short-circuit) i
parameters. ANSI and IEC family of curves, which protection reacts to high level
make it easy to coordinate with any fault currents. If NONE is selected
a Curve shape
conventional protection scheme. The for the instantaneous setting, the ii
b Overcurrent pickup user can select Moderately Inverse, instantaneous trip function is disabled
Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse or and a true making current release
c Time multiplier or dial Definite Time characteristics. The (discriminator) function is provided. 1
d Short delay pickup thermal curves It, I2t, I4t and flat If selected, the discriminator is
slopes can also be selected. functional for 10 cycles and will trip the
e Short delay time breaker instantaneously, if the 2
Phase Time Overcurrent Protection fault current is above 11 times (In).
f Instantaneous pickup Time overcurrent (overload and fault)
protection is defined by the current Ground Fault Protection 3
pickup setting and time multiplier. The ground fault protection function
is a composite of the ground:
Phase Short Time Protection 4
Short time (fault) protection responds Ground curve shape
to short-circuit conditions. It is similar Time overcurrent and pickup
to the Phase Long Time Protection in time settings 5
that current and time settings are Short delay current and time
offered. It differs, however, in two settings
TIME
ways: (1) NONE is a Short Delay Instantaneous setting

6
Pickup setting that, if selected,
will disable the Phase Short Time A NONE setting selection disables
Protection, and (2) a slope selection that characteristic of the ground 7
is not available for the time line. fault protection.
8
CURRENT
Figure 4.1-6. Phase or Ground 9

Overcurrent Characteristics
10
I4t
(Curve Shape)
11
I2t
(Curve Shape) (Curve Shape)

It
MOD IEC-A IEC-B 12
FLAT
TIME
TIME
TIME
13
VERY
(Short Delay) (Short Delay) (Short Delay)
EXTREME
IEC-D IEC-C
14
(Instantaneous) (Instantaneous) (Instantaneous)
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 15

Thermal Curves ANSI Curves IEC Curves
Figure 4.1-7. Digitrip 3000 Selective Curve Types 16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 016
ii
Main
Breaker Digitrip
A
1 3000 A
Zone 1
2
Feeder
Breaker Interlocking
3 B Digitrip
Wire
3000 B
4 Zone 2
Downstream
5 Breaker
C Digitrip
3000 C
6
Zone 3 LOAD
7
Figure 4.1-8. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
8 Zone Selective Interlocking Upstream Digitrip 3000 protected If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2,
(Phase and Ground) breakers are restrained from tripping the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B
Zone selective interlocking is a protec- immediately by an interlocking signal senses the fault and sends a restraining
9 tion function to minimize equipment from the downstream Digitrip 3000 signal to the upstream Digitrip 3000 of
damage resulting from a phase fault or relay. This interlocking signal requires Main Breaker A.
a ground fault in an area where long only a pair of wires from the down-
stream breaker to the upstream breaker. The Digitrip 3000 of the Downstream
10 time and/or short time delay is in use.
It provides standard coordinated trip- Breaker C does not see this fault
When the Ground Zone Interlocking ping when the fault is located outside because it is situated on the down-
feature is used, an immediate trip the zone of protection. stream side of the fault. As a result, the
11 is initiated when the fault is in the Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C
breakers zone of protection, and no In the sample zone interlocking system does not send a restraining signal to
restraining signal received regardless shown above, circuit breakers A, B and the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker B.
12 of its preset time delay. When the C are equipped with Digitrip 3000
overcurrent relays. Because it did not receive a restraining
Phase Zone Interlocking feature is signal from the Digitrip 3000 of
13 used, the time overcurrent and short Fault Location Zone 3 Downstream Breaker C, the Digitrip
delay phase elements work as follows. 3000 of Feeder Breaker B identifies that
Note: For the phase time overcurrent
The short delay phase element will element, the current sensed by the Digitrip the fault is in Zone 2 and immediately
14 initiate an immediate trip when the 3000 must exceed 300% (3 x In) for the trips Feeder Breaker B, regardless of
fault is in the breakers zone of protec- zone selective interlocking to initiate an its time setting.
tion, and no restraining signal received immediate trip signal.
15 regardless of its preset time delay. The Fault Location Zone 1
time overcurrent phase element will If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3, the Note: For the phase time overcurrent
initiate an immediate trip when the Digitrip 3000 of Downstream Breaker C element, the current sensed by the Digitrip
16 fault is in the breakers zone of protec- senses the fault and sends a restrain- 3000 must exceed 300% (3 x In) for the
zone selective interlocking to initiate an
tion, and no restraining signal received ing signal to the upstream Digitrip
regardless of its preset time delay only 3000 of Feeder Breaker B. Having immediate trip signal.
17 when the current being sensed by the received this signal, the Digitrip 3000
If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no
Digitrip 3000 exceeds 300% (3 x In) of of Feeder Breaker B withholds its
the current transformer rating. trip command. As a result, only restraining signal is received by
the Digitrip of Main Breaker A. As a
18 Downstream Breaker C is tripped.
result, Main Breaker A is immediately
Fault Location Zone 2 tripped by its Digitrip overcurrent
relay, regardless of its time setting.
19 Note: For the phase time overcurrent
element, the current sensed by the Digitrip
3000 must exceed 300% (3 x In) for the
zone selective interlocking to initiate an
20 immediate trip signal.
21

Sheet 04 017
Technical DataDigitrip 3000

i
6.72 2.67 3.74
(170.7) (67.8) (95.0) ii
3.36 0.51 1.87
(85.3) (13.1) (47.5)
1
Operational Reset
Digitrip 3000
Time Overcurrent
High Load
Communications
Trip
2
Curve
5.13 Pickup (xln) rms Amperes

4.66
(130.3) Ti me Multiplier (118.4) 0.38
(9.7) Typical 3
Short Delay Amp Demand
Pickup (xln)
IA
Time
1.48
IB
IC
Select
Terminal
Block (37.6) 4
Phase IG
Instantaneous
Ground Pickup (xln)
9.31
5
In=5A (Secondary) or CT (Primary)
Settings/Test Time/Trip Cause (236.5)

V iew
Program
Test
Settings 5.25
10.25 (133.4)
(260.3)
Program
Program
Select
Settings
Save
Settings
6
Raise
Lower
Test
Select
Tests
Test
7
Test
0.50 0.29
8
(12.7) 1.05 (7.4)
(26.7)
0.62
(15.7)
3.02
(76.7)
9
Figure 4.1-9. Digitrip 3000 Fixed MountDimensions in Inches (mm) 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.1-10. Digitrip 3000 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram 21

Sheet 04 018
General DescriptionDual-Source Power Supply
i Digitrip 3000 Relay with Dual-Source Power Supply Functional Description

The Dual-Source Power Supply
contains one AC voltage transformer
and three AC current transformers.
ii The AC voltage transformer is used to
supply nominal AC control power to
the unit. The current transformers are
1 used to power the unit from the line
current. Normally, the unit will operate
from the AC auxiliary power. Because
2 this voltage is usually obtained from
the system containing the circuit that
the relay is protecting, a fault on the
3 protected line could cause the AC
voltage to drop below an acceptable
operating level. Below approximately
4 70 V for Digitrip 3010 or 140 V for
Digitrip 3020, the DSPS switches over
to current powering. All three current
5 transformer secondaries are connected
Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source Power Supply in series to supply this power. The
DSPS will supply enough power to
6 General Description The CT powering capability is critical operate the Digitrip 3000 overcurrent
for tripping if the AC auxiliary supply relay in the tripped state with currents
Eatons Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source or its fuses fail prior to the fault; or if greater than 1.8 per unit rated secondary
7 Power Supply (DSPS) is a micro- the fault itself collapses, the supply current, or 9A, in a single-phase. The
processor-based feeder overcurrent voltage at the critical moment when DSPS will operate with three-phase
protection relay designed for AC tripping is needed. currents in a tripped state with currents
8 auxiliary power applications. The
greater than 1.2 per unit or 6 A rated
DSPS versions, Digitrip 3010 and The Digitrip 3000 with Dual-Source secondary current.
Digitrip 3020, include an integral Power Supply design offers significant
9 power supply module that: performance and reliability benefits Note: There will be no effect to the Digitrip
over the electromechanical or self- 3000 relay trip time accuracy when the
Powers the relay from nominal Dual-Source Power Supply switches from
powered relays. It provides a full-time
10 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz (Digitrip 3010 metering display, remote communica- normal AC voltage to fault-current power.
model) or 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz tions and self-monitoring functions.
(Digitrip 3020 model) auxiliary In addition, there is no calibration
11 power, which is normally connected required. The burden is lower than
and available most electromechanical and solid-state
Operates solely from the main self-powered relays.
12 current transformers (CTs) during
a fault if the normally connected The Digitrip 3000 with DSPS provides
auxiliary AC voltage is not available, long-term, robust, maintenance-free
13 like an electromechanical relay or an performance, which cant be achieved
electronic self-powered relay with an energy-storing uninterruptible
The transition from external power supply (UPS). The DSPS will
14 auxiliary AC power to current power operate anytime there is a fault even
is smooth with no time delay after an extended power outage.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 019
Technical DataDual-Source Power Supply

i
6.03
(153.2) ii
6.72 5.45 3.74
(170.7) 0.51 (138.4) (95.0)
(13.0) 1
S/N000217
P971210
Digitrip 3000
4D13125G01
Terminal
2
Block
3
AC Input
100-120 Vac, 50/60Hz
4
10.25 9.31 Digitrip 8010 Protective Relay
with Dual-Source Power Supply
(260.3) (236.5)
5
0.50 8
(12.7)
1.05
(26.7)
0.62 5.74 9
(15.7) (145.8)
Figure 4.1-11. Digitrip 3010/3020 Dual-Source Power SupplyDimensions in Inches (mm) 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.1-12. Digitrip 3010/3020 Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram 21

Sheet 04 020
General DescriptionDrawout Case
i Digitrip 3000 General Description The terminal blocks feature a two-

stage disconnect operation. Removal
Drawout Case Option The quick-release Drawout Case of the Eatons Digitrip 3000 Inner
option permits easy removal and Chassis will disconnect the trip circuits
ii replacement of the protective unit
without disruption of the wiring.
and short the CT secondaries before
the unit control power is disconnected.
The CT circuits are self-shorting Upon insertion of the Inner Chassis,
1 with make-before-break operation the control power connections are
on removal. All voltage inputs, made before the trip circuits are
discrete inputs and contact outputs activated. This feature provides
2 are disconnected while maintaining added security against false tripping.
security against false tripping.
5 Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay

6
7 5.23
(132.8)
Hole for Viewing INCOM
Communications Activity LED
10
11
9.51
(241.6)
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.1-13. Rear View of Digitrip 3000 Drawout Outer CaseTerminal Layout
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 021
Technical DataDrawout Case
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.1-14. Digitrip 3000 Drawout Relay Typical Schematic and Wiring Diagram
19
20
21

Sheet 04 022
Technical DataDigitrip 3000
Standards, Certifications and Ratings

i Table 4.1-2. Digitrip 3000 Specifications
ii Current Inputs Environment Ground Overcurrent Pickup Ranges

CTs: 5 A secondary Operating temperature: 30 C to +55 C Inverse time
CT burden: <0.004 ohm 1 Operating humidity: 0% to 95% Overcurrent setting: 0.1 to 2.0) x In,
1 In:
<0.1 VA at rated current (5 A)
5 A (secondary) or CT (primary)
Relative humidity
(noncondensing) Short delay setting:
None (26 settings)
(1 to 11) x In,
Momentary: 100 x In for 1 second Storage temperature: 40 C to +70 C None (25 settings)
Instantaneous setting: (1 to 25) x In,
2 CT (Primary) Settings Available Auxiliary Alarm Contacts None (30 settings)
Phase and ground: 5/10/25/50/75/100/ 5 A continuous Time Delay Settings

3 150/200/250/200/ 5 A break at 120/240 Vac
250/300/400/500/ Inverse time
600/630/800/1000/ overcurrent
Tests time multiplier: It, I2t, I4t
4 1200/1250/1500/
1600/2000/2400/ Curve: 0.2 to 40 (47 settings)
2500/3000/3200/ Dielectric strength: Current inputs: FLAT: 0.2 to 2 (21 settings)
4000/5000 3000 Vac for 1 minute ANSI (all): 0.1 to 5.0
5 Seismic test:
phase to phase
Meets requirements
(50 settings)
IEC (all): 0.025 to 1.00
Input Voltage for UBC and California (40 settings)
DT-30XX Building Code Zone 4 Short delay time: 0.05 to 1.5 sec (22 settings)
6 ZPA = 3.5
Nominal: 22 to 250 Vdc Standards: ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1,
120 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz C37.90.2 Current Monitoring
7 Operating range: 28 to 280 Vdc
IEC 255
UL 1053
True rms sensing: Three-phase and ground
90 to 254 Vac 50/60 Hz Display accuracy: 1% of full scale [ln]
from 0.04 x ln to 1 x In
8 Power consumption:
Phase and Ground Time-Current Curves 2% of full scale [ln]
from 1 x ln to 2 x In
24 48 125 250 120 240 Thermal: It (moderately inverse) Ampere demand: Average demand over
Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vac I2t (very inverse) 5 minute sampling window
9 10W 10W 10W 10W 10 VA 18 VA
I4t (extremely inverse)
FLAT (definite time)
High load: 85% of inverse time
overcurrent setting
ANSI: (per ANSI

10 DT 3010 3020 3030 C37.112, 1996) Moderately inverse Timing Accuracy 2
Very inverse
Nominal: 120 Vac 240 Vac 24/48 Vdc Inverse time
Extremely inverse
operating overcurrent time: 10% at >1.5 x pickup
11 range: 70 140 IEC: (per IEC
Short delay time: 50 ms
132 Vac 264 Vac Standards: ANSI C37.90
255-3, 1989) IEC-A (moderately
Power IEC 255
inverse)
12 consumption: 15 VA 15 VA IEC-B (very inverse)
UL 1053
IEC-C (extremely inverse)
Trip and Communications Close IEC-D (definite time) Communications
13 Output Contacts PowerNet
Phase Overcurrent Pickup Ranges compatible: Built-in INCOM
Make 30 A for 0.25 seconds Baud rate: 1200 or 9600 baud

14
0.25 A break at 250 Vdc
5 A break at 120/240 Vac
Inverse time
overcurrent setting: (0.2 to 2.2) x
Meets ANSI C37.90, paragraph 6.7 In (28 settings)
Short delay setting: (1 to 11) x In,
15 None (25 settings)
Instantaneous setting: (1 to 25) x In,
None (30 settings)
16 1 Refer to Burden Curves for Digitrip 3010/3020.
2 For Ground Pickup < 0.2pu; Time Tolerance 15%.
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 023
General DescriptionFP-5000
FP-5000 The FP-5000 feeder protection relay Sync check (25)

includes programmable logic Power factor (55) i
Feeder Protection Relay functions. Six gates and timers may be Zone interlocking for bus
defined and arranged for customized protection (87B)
applications. Flash memory is used for ii
the programming and all settings are Metering
stored in nonvolatile memory. The Amperes: positive, negative and
relay allows for four preprogrammed zero sequence 1
setting groups that can be activated Ampere demand
through software or contact input.
Volts: positive, negative and 2
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay zero sequence
has a mass memory for data storage Phase angles
and a real-time clock with 1 ms time Volt-amperes and VA demand 3
resolution. The relay will log 100
Watts and kW demand
sequence of event records, detailed
kWh (forward, reverse, net)
trip logs, minimum/maximum 4
values, load profiles, breaker wear VARs and kVAR demand
information and oscillography data. kVARh (lead, leg and net)
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay Power factor 5
has eight programmable binary inputs, Frequency
five normally opened heavy-duty % THD V and I
outputs and one Form C signal relay.
6
Magnitude THD V and I
It can be powered from 48 Vdc to 125 Minimum/maximum recording
FP-5000 Relay Vdc or 120 Vac to auxiliary power.
Trending (load profile over time) 7
General Description Features Monitoring
Eatons FP-5000 feeder protection relay Trip coil monitor 8
is a multi-functional, microprocessor- Protection
Phase overcurrent (forward, reverse Close coil monitor
based relay for feeder circuits of
all voltage levels. It may be used as or both): Breaker wear (accumulated
primary protection for main, feeder Two-stage instantaneous with interrupted current) 9
and tie circuit breaker applications, timers (50P-1 and 50P-2) Oscillography (up to 16 events)
transformers and as backup
protection for high voltage lines
Two Inverse time overcurrent Fault data logs (up to 16 events) 10
(51P-1 and 51P-2) Sequence of events report
and differential protection. (up to 100 events)
Directional current (67)
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay 10 standard curves Clock (1 ms time stamping) 11
provides complete current and voltage
Instantaneous or time delay reset Communication
protection and metering in a single,
compact drawout case. The relay has Voltage restrained time over- Local HMI 12
four current inputs rated for 5 A or 1 A current (51VR) Password protected
and four voltage inputs. Three of the Two independent ground directional Addressable
voltage inputs are to be connected to overcurrent elements (one mea- Local communication port
13
the three-phase power voltage for sured-IX and one calculated IR):
Remote communication port:
voltage protection and for metering. Two-stage instantaneous
They can be connected in wye-ground, with timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
FSK 14
delta or open delta configuration. The (50R-1, 50R-2) RS-232
fourth voltage is for independent RS-485
single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage
Inverse time overcurrent (51X, 51R) 15
Ground directional polarizing (67N) Protocols:
protection.
3 Vo, Ipol, negative sequence INCOM
The multiple settings groups can be Modbus
16
used for arc flash mitigation when an 10 standard curves
alternate settings group, set to have Instantaneous or time delay reset Configuration software
instantaneous elements only, is Breaker failure (50BF) Control Functions
17
activated using a selector switch and
Phase unbalance negative sequence Remote open/close
the programmable I/O in the FP-5000.
overcurrent (46) Programmable I/O 18
An integral keypad and display is Phase voltage unbalance and Programmable logic gates and timers
provided for direct user programming sequence protection (47)
Multiple setting groups
and retrieval of data. LEDs provide Under/overvoltage (27/59)
Bus transfer logic
19
quick indication of relay status. Under/overfrequency (81U/81O)
A front port is provided for direct Cold load pickup
Reverse/forward power (32-1, 32-2)
computer connection. An INCOM Loss of potential (PT blown fuses) 20
communication port on the back of
the relay is standard for local area
networking. Optional communication 21
ports and protocols are available.

Sheet 04 024
Table 4.1-3. Catalog Numbering Selection Inverse-Time Characteristics

i There are 10 user-selectable inverse-
FP5 2 00 - 0 1 time overcurrent curve characteristics.
The user can select from the ANSI,
ii IEC or thermal curve families and
can select instantaneous or time delay
Current Range Packaging Control Voltage Communications
reset characteristics.
1 2=5A 0 = Drawout 0 = 48125 Vac/dc 0 = INCOM
3=1A 1 = Fixed case 1 = 100240 Vac/dc 1 = Modbus Breaker Failure
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay
2 includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
Protection Functions Voltage Restrained Overcurrent function that can be initiated from
Eatons FP-5000 feeder protection Voltage restraint reduces the over- either an internal or external trip signal.
3 relay has been designed for maximum current pickup level (51P-2). This This is an independent element that can
user flexibility and simplicity. The modification of the pickup overcurrent be used to operate a lockout relay or
base relay includes all the standard level is compared to the corresponding trip an upstream breaker. The timer
4 current and voltage protection, and phase input voltage. The FP-5000 uses must be longer than the breaker
metering functions. the simple linear model below to operating time and the protective
determine the effective pickup value. function reset times.
5 Directional Overcurrent Protection
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay Voltage Protection
Pickup % The FP-5000 feeder protection relay
provides complete three-phase and
6 ground directional overcurrent has four voltage-input circuits. There
100 %
protection. There are two independent is a three-phase set designated as
ground overcurrent elements. The Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase
7 first ground element X uses the voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary
independently measured ground Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage
(or neutral) current from a separate 25 % (27) and overvoltage (59) protection.
8 current-sensing input. The second The three-phase voltage protection can
ground element R uses a calculated be set to operate on a single-phase, two
3Io current obtained from the sum out of three phases, or all three-phase
9 of the three-phase currents. This logic. The Main VTs also provide phase
Figure 4.1-15. Voltage Restraint Coil voltage unbalance/reversal (47 negative
calculated current could be used for Pickup Characteristics
either the neutral or ground current sequence) protection. Each element
10 in a three-phase, four-wire system. Sync Check has an independent threshold set
point and adjustable time delay.
The sync check function is provided
Each of the phase and ground over-
11 current elements provides three
for double-ended power source Flexible Phase Rotation
applications. The sync check monitors The FP-5000 feeder protection relay
protection functions. Each element
voltage magnitude, phase angle and can be applied on either an A-B-C or
contains an inverse-time overcurrent
12 (51) function and two instantaneous
slip frequency between the bus and A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
line. It also incorporates breaker close permits correct operation and indica-
overcurrent (50) functions with
time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live tion of the actual system configuration.
adjustable timers.
13 line and live bus live line features.
Phase direction is a function used to Frequency Protection
Reverse Power
supervise all phase current elements The FP-5000 relay provides under/over
14 (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is Reverse power provides control for frequency (81U/81O) protection on the
compared to a corresponding phase power flowing through a feeder. There Main VT inputs. Each element has an
current to establish the direction of are two elements to be configured: independent threshold set point and
15 the fault. This function is selectable operate in forward or reverse; or, adjustable time delay.
to operate in the forward, reverse or under or over power conditions.
both directions. Reverse power is typically applied to
16 Ground direction is used to supervise
generator or motor applications while
under power is generally applied to
ground current elements and is load or generation loss.
17 accomplished by using ground,
negative sequence or residual
currents supervised by zero or positive
18 sequence voltages or ground current.
This function is selectable to operate in
forward, reverse or both directions.
19
20
21

Sheet 04 025
Metering Trip Log or unique applications. Each gate can

The FP-5000 feeder protection relay The FP-5000 feeder protection relay will be assigned a logic function of either i
provides complete and accurate store a maximum of 16 trip records in AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate
metering of the voltages, currents, an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will can have a maximum of four input
frequency, power, power factor and be date and time stamped to a 1 ms signals and each input signal can be ii
energy. Information is available on the resolution and reference an event required to be a NOT. Input signals
individual phase magnitude, angles number associated with oscillographic can be external inputs received via
and the symmetrical component and sequence of event data. The trip log the binary inputs or internal values 1
values of positive, negative and zero record will include information on the associated with the protection, alarm
or metering set points. Each gate
sequence current and voltage. type of fault, protection elements that
operated, fault location, and currents
has a unique output assignment 2
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay and designation that can be used
and voltages at the time of the fault.
includes a programmable demand as the input to another gate. There
feature and stores the maximum Waveform Capture are six independent timers that 3
demand of current, kW, kVAR and have adjustable pickup and dropout
kVA since last reset. The demand is delay settings.
provides oscillography-recording
user-configurable for fixed or sliding capabilities. The relay will record all Integral User Interface
4
window, the time interval is adjustable voltage and current signals along with
and the demand interval can be The front panel user interface has a
the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic
synchronized to a demand pulse. and contact closures. The FP-5000
4 x 20-inch (101.6 x 508.0 mm) alphanu- 5
meric vacuum fluorescent display for
Energy usage direction and net values relay can record 16 records of 16 wide angle viewing in all light
cycles of data. Fewer records of longer
are given for kWh, kVARh and kVAh.
duration can be selected and recorded.
conditions. LEDs provide quick and 6
The relay monitors, logs and time easy visual display of power on,
stamps minimum and maximum The waveform capture is initiated by mode of operation, alarm and trip
a trip, pickup, external contact, front
values for current, voltage, watts,
panel interface or through the remote
indication. Pushbuttons are provided 7
VARs, VA, power factor and frequency. for operation mode selection, scrolling
communications port. through data and settings. A security
has metered set points that can be Programmable Logic door restricts access to the program 8
and test modes. In addition, the relay
used to activate an output for an The FP-5000 feeder protection relay
settings and test functions can be
alarm, control or trip function. For provides six logic gates and timers
example, you might want to close a that the user can customize for special password protected. 9
contact to insert a capacitor bank if the
power factor is less than 0.9 lagging
or provide an alarm if the demand is
10
greater than a preset value.
Loading Profile 11
The FP-5000 feeder protection
relay has memory available to store
metered data on a predetermined 12
interval. The log holds data from
1024 time sample intervals. This
information can be retrieved and
13
plotted with a PC to show the loading
profile of a given circuit over a period
of time. For example, if the time
14
interval is set for 15 minutes, then the
relay will store a metered data profile
over an approximate 10-day period.
15
Sequence of Events Records
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay 16
records a maximum of 100 events
associated with the relay. An event
is classified as a change of state as
17
detected by the relay. These include
relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact
closure, alarms, setting changes and
18
self-diagnostic failures. Each event
is date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored in FP-5000 Set Point Overview
19
an FIFO in chronological order.
20
21

Sheet 04 026
ii
1 Metering
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
2 Energy
Demand
Min./Max.
% THD
3 Phasors
Data Logger
Waveform
4 SER
Fault Records
8 FP-5000
9 Load
Figure 4.1-16. FP-5000 Relay Typical One-Line Diagram

10
Programmable I/O Communication Software Transview
The FP-5000 feeder protection relay Eaton provides two types of Transview is a COMTRADE file viewer
11 provides five heavy-duty, trip-rated, communication software. The first that is required in addition to the
normally open contacts and two is PowerPort. It runs on a PC or laptop PowerNet waveform client to view
Form C auxiliary contacts. Two trip for easy access to a single relay to FP-5000 waveforms. Users can view
12 rated contacts are fitted with a circuit change set points or configuration and individual voltage and current wave-
continuity feature for monitoring the to view metered values and stored forms, as well as phasers and digital
trip or close circuits. One Form C data. PowerPort is free and can be input/output and internal protection
13 contact is dedicated to the relay failure downloaded from the Eaton Web site functions such as undervoltage and
alarm function and is operated in a at www.eaton.com. current unbalance.
normally energized (failsafe) mode.
14 There are eight user-configurable The second package is PowerNet.
discrete inputs that accept a dry PowerNet is a power management
contact. Each input and output is software package that is designed for
15 user-programmable for maximum continuous, remote monitoring of
application flexibility. many devices. It provides all the
functionality of PowerPort plus
16 additional functions such as billing,
trending and graphics. Contact your
local Eaton representative for more
17 information on PowerNet software.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 027
Technical DataFP-5000

Table 4.1-4. FP-5000 Specifications
i
Compliance Metering Accuracy (Continued) Discrete Inputs
UL Recognized, File # E154862 Input signal Number of contact inputs: 8
ii
UL 1053 (1994) Recognized frequency necessary Rating: 48 Vdc wetting voltage
ANSI C37.90 (1989) for accurate operation: 60 Hz nominal, provided with internal
EN 55011 (1991) 5763 Hz (5%)
50 Hz nominal,
ground only 1
EN 61000-6-2 (1999)
4753 Hz (5%)
Clock accuracy: Free running 1
Output Contacts
Emission Tests Minute/month at 25C Number of
output contacts: Five Form A and Two Form C
2
EN 55011 (1991): Group 1 Class A Clock automatically updated by PowerNet host when
(CISPR-11, Class A) present.
FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1: Part 15 Subpart b Class A Rating of Output Contacts
Protective Functions Momentary: Make 30 A AC/DC for 0.25 seconds
3
Immunity Tests Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc (resistive)
Phase and Ground Overcurrent Protection (50/51)
ANSI C37.90.1 (1989): Surge withstand capability Break 5 A at 120 Vac
ANSI C37.90.2 (1995): EMI immunity to 35 V/m
Inverse time over-
current characteristics
Continuous: 5 A at 120 Vac 4
EN 61000-4-2 (1995): ESD rating of 8 kV 5 A at 30 Vdc
51, 51N, 51G: Moderate, very, extremely,
EN 61000-4-3 (1997): Radiated EM field at 10 V/m IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t, I4t, Flat
EN 61000-4-4 (1995): Fast transient burst at 2 kV Inverse time over- Logic and Control Functions 5
EN 61000-4-5 (1995): Surge immunity test current pickup ranges Six programmable logic gates for AND, OR,
EN 61000-4-6 (1996): Conducted RF at 10 V/m 51, 51N, 51G: 0.1 to 4.0 per unit in 0.01 steps NAND, NOR operation
EN 61000-4-11 (1994): Voltage dips and variations Inverse time over- Two latching (flip/flop) gates
current multipliers Six timer gates provide on/off delays 6
51, 51N, 51G: 0.05 to 10.0 in 0.01 steps
Control Power Inverse time delay INCOM Communications
Control voltage: 48250 Vdc
range 51, 51N, 51G: 0 to 9999 cycles in
1 cycle steps Baud rate: 9600 fixed 7
100240 Vac Instantaneous over- Maximum distance: 10,000 feet (3048 m)
Operating voltage: 55264 Vac current pickup ranges Protocol: INCOM
Interruption
38300 Vdc 50, 50N, 50G: 0.1 to 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps
RS-485 Communication, Rear Panel
8
Pickup accuracy 50/51: 1% (at 0.12 per unit)
ride-through time: 20 cycle interruption of Time accuracy Baud rate: 9.2k, 9.6k
nominal AC supply 51, 51N, 51G: 3% or 30 ms
Power consumption: 20 VA maximum Directional 67, 67N, 67G: Reverse overcurrentsame
Protocol: Modbus RTU
9
data as above for reverse
Current Inputs RS-232 Communication, Front Panel
Nominal (In): 1 A or 5 A Voltage Unbalance (47)
Threshold (Minimum Voltage) 1 to 100 V
Baud rate: 38.4k, 19.2k, 9.6k 10
CT rating: 2 x In continuous Connector standard nine-pin subminiature,
50 x In for 1 second in 1 V steps. three-wire protocol: INCOM
CT burdens: < 0.25 VA at 5 A (nominal) % V2/V1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps
< 0.05 VA at 1 A (nominal) Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps Environmental Ratings 11
Voltage Inputs Current Unbalance (46) Operating temperature: 40 C to +60 C
Threshold (minimum current) 0.1 to 20.0 per unit (40 F to +140 F)
Nominal: 120 Vac in 0.01 steps. product tested to +85 C 12
Operating range: 69150 Vac % I2/I1: 4 to 40% in 1% steps Storage temperature: 40 C to +85 C
Burden: <0.015 at 120 Vac Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps (40F to +185 F)
1 megaohm
Under/Overvoltage Protection (27/59)
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Relative humidity
13
Metering Accuracy Pickup range: 10 to 150 V in 1 volt steps (noncondensing)
Phase current: 0.5% or 0.025 A from Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps Altitude: 0 to 6350 feet
0.02 to 20.0 per unit fully (0 to 2500 m) above 14
offset current waveform Under/Overfrequency Protection (81U/810) mean sea level
Ground current: 0.5% of full scale (In) Pickup range: 45 to 65 Hz in 0.01 Hz steps
Dimensions
from 0.02 to 2.0 per unit
fully offset current
Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps
15
waveform Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) Behind Panel
Pickup range: 0.1 to 5.0 per unit in 0.01 steps Height: 6.70 inches (170.2 mm)
Phase voltage: 0.5% or 0.2 V from
0160 Vac Time delay: 0 to 9999 cycles in 1 cycle steps Width:
Depth:
5.30 inches (134.6 mm)
6.90 inches (175.3 mm)
16
Frequency
measurement Power Protection (32)
Forward/reverse over/under In Front of Panel
Accuracy:
Phase angle:
0.02 Hz
1 Pickup accuracy: 1.0% Height: 11.34 Inches (288.0 mm) 17
Trip time accuracy: 0 to 12 cycles or Width: 7.72 Inches (196.1 mm)
Power metering
0.1% whichever is greater Depth: 0.80 Inches (20.3 mm)
accuracy: 1.5%
Metering accuracy
Sync Check (25) Weight 18
temperature range: 0 C to 50C
Temperature range: 5% for operation below Phase angle: 1 to 60 12.5 lbs (5.7 kg)
0 C and above 50 C Slip frequency: 0.1 to 2 Hz
Voltage differential: 1 to 100 V 19
Breaker close time: 0 to 9999 cycles
Power Factor (55)

Trigger/reset 20
threshold: 0.5 lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps
Time delay: 0 to 1000 seconds in 1 second steps
21

Sheet 04 028
General DescriptionEDR-3000
i EDR-3000 Application Description The EDR-3000 may be connected to

the secondary side of a delta-wye
Distribution Relay General grounded transformer with the ground
The EDR-3000 microprocessor-based element connected to a separate CT in
ii relay provides reliable three-phase and the neutral connection of the trans-
ground overcurrent protection former. With this connection, a lower
for all voltage levels. It can be used for CT ratio and a pickup setting can be
1 any application where instantaneous used to provide more sensitive
and/or time overcurrent protection is ground fault protection especially for
required. It is most commonly used resistance grounded systems (see
2 as primary feeder circuit protection, Figure 4.1-19).
as in Figure 4.1-17.
3
Resistor
4 50 51 50G 51G
50 51
5 50G 51G EDR-3000
CB CB
6 EDR-3000 Relay
52 EDR-3000
General Description Figure 4.1-19. Transformer Secondary

7 The EDR-3000 protection relay is a
Load
Protection with Neutral CT Connection
multifunction, microprocessor-based
Figure 4.1-17. Primary Feeder The EDR-3000 relay has special
8 overcurrent relay designed for both
ANSI and IEC applications. It is a
Circuit Protection provisions for connection in a zone
interlocking scheme that can be used
panel-mounted, self-contained unit The EDR-3000 may be applied as the
for bus protection or to improve
9 that operates from either AC or DC transformer primary protection or as
protection coordination in a tight or
control power. The EDR-3000 design backup to the differential protection,
close system. Zone interlocking is
provides true rms and fundamental as in Figure 4.1-18.
described in the following sections. In
10 sensing of each phase and ground
addition, the EDR-3000 has multiple
current. Only one unit is required for
setting groups that can be used to
each three-phase circuit.
reduce arc flash hazard with
11 Current monitoring and operator
50 51
instantaneous elements.
selectable protective functions are
integral to each relay. The EDR-3000
12 relay operates from the 5 A or 1 A 50G 51G
CB
secondary output of standard
current transformers. Current EDR-3000
13 transformer ratio information is
quickly programmed into the unit
via settings. This enables the relay to
14 display metered current in primary Figure 4.1-18. Transformer
amperes, secondary amperes or per Overcurrent Protection
unit values. The EDR-3000 features
15 a user-friendly operations panel to
monitor and to program the relay.
Operating parameters and trouble-
16 shooting information are displayed in
the 128 x 64 LCD display. In addition,
all data and information can be
17 communicated to a host computer
equipped with PowerPort-E.
18 A Communication Trip and
Communication Close control
command can also be initiated by
19 a host computer.
20
21

Sheet 04 029
Overcurrent Protection Zone Selective Interlocking

The EDR-3000 provides complete a 2 3 (Phase and Ground) i
three-phase and ground protection b 5 6 Zone selective interlocking is a protec-
with separate elements and settings. c 8 9 tion function to minimize equipment
The relay can be used with CT ratios 50/51 damage resulting from a phase or a ii
from 1 to 50,000 for 1 A models and 50N/51N ground fault in an area where long
1 to 10,000 for 5 A models. The CT GND 12 11 time and/or short time delay is in use.
ratio can be set independently for 1
phase and ground, allowing the EDR-3000 When the Ground Zone Interlocking
CB-52 feature is used, an immediate trip
ground element to be connected in
either the residual or the separate is initiated when the fault is in the 2
ground CT configuration, as in breakers zone of protection, regardless
Figure 4.1-20 and 4.1-21. Figure 4.1-20. Residual Ground Connection of its preset time delay. When the
Phase Zone Interlocking feature is 3
used, the time overcurrent elements
a 2 3 work as follows. The instantaneous
b 5 6 phase element will initiate an immediate 4
trip when the fault is in the breakers
c 8 9
zone of protection, regardless of its
50/51 preset time delay. For the time over- 5
current phase element, the current
sensed by the EDR-3000 must exceed
CB-52 1.5 times the pickup setting for the 6
50G/51G zone selective interlocking to initiate an
GND 11 12 immediate trip signal when the fault is
in the breaker's zone of protection. 7
EDR-3000 Upstream EDR-3000 protected
breakers are restrained from tripping 8
immediately by an interlocking signal
Figure 4.1-21. Separate Zero Sequence from the downstream EDR-3000 relay.
Ground CT Connection This interlocking signal requires only 9
a pair of wires from the downstream
breaker to the upstream breaker.
It provides standard coordinated 10
tripping when the fault is located
outside the zone of protection. In
the sample zone interlocking system 11
shown in Figure 4.1-23, circuit
breakers A, B and C are equipped
with EDR-3000 overcurrent relays. 12
Table 4.1-5. Catalog Numbering Selection for EDR-3000 Distribution Relay Removable Terminals
13
EDR-3000 A 0 B A 1
14
Hardware Option 1 Mounting Options
A = Four digital inputs, four Hardware Option 2
Communication
Conformal Coating
Options
0 = Standard mount 15
outputs, removable terminals 0 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, 1 = Projection
B = Eight digital inputs, six ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount
outputs, removable terminals,
trip coil monitor
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
B = Modbus-RTU
(RS-485)
B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
16
C = Four digital inputs, four 40250 Vac I = Modbus-TCP
outputs, removable terminals, (RJ-45)
zone interlocking and 17
IRIG-B
1 Beginning in 2016, consult factory for the availability of the following new communication options.
- Protocols: DNP3.0, PROFIBUS
18
- Interface ports: Fiber optic ST, RS-485 D-SUB, fiber optic LC
19
20
21

Sheet 04 030
Fault Location Zone 3 signal to the EDR-3000 of feeder

i If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 3, the breaker B. Because it did not receive a 5.38 B Holes for
(136.7) Projection
EDR-3000 of downstream breaker C restraining signal from the EDR-3000 of Panel Mount
4.94
senses the fault and sends a restraining downstream breaker C, the EDR-3000 (125.5)
ii signal to the upstream EDR-3000 of of feeder breaker B identifies that the 3.94
(100.0) A Holes for
feeder breaker B. Having received this fault is in Zone 2 and immediately Standard
CL
signal, the EDR-3000 of feeder breaker trips feeder breaker B, regardless of Panel Mount
1 B withholds its trip command. As a its time setting. B B
result, only downstream breaker C Fault Location Zone 1 A A

is tripped. 3.62
2 If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no restraining (91.8)
Cutout
4.88
(124.0)
Fault Location Zone 2 signal is received by the Digitrip of
If a fault occurs at a point in Zone 2, the main breaker A. As a result, main CL
3 EDR-3000 of feeder breaker B senses breaker A is immediately tripped by its
6.30
the fault and sends a restraining signal EDR-3000 overcurrent relay, regardless 3.05 (160.0)
of its time setting. (77.6)
to the upstream EDR-3000 of main
4 breaker A. The EDR-3000 of the down- Note: For the time overcurrent phase
A A
B B
stream breaker C does not see this element, the current sensed by the
fault because it is situated on the EDR-3000 must exceed 1.5 times the pickup
5 downstream side of the fault. As a setting for the zone selective interlocking
4x 0.19
(4.8)
result, the EDR-3000 of downstream to initiate an immediate trip signal when the
breaker C does not send a restraining fault is in the breakers zone of protection.
6 Figure 4.1-22. Drilling Pattern
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 Figure 4.1-23. Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 031
Technical Data and SpecificationsEDR-3000

Table 4.1-6. EDR-3000 Specifications
i
Voltage Supply Digital Inputs Front Interface RS-232
Aux. voltage: 19300 Vdc/40250 Vac Max. input voltage: 300 Vdc/270 Vac Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
ii
Buffer time in case Input current: <4 mA Handshake: RTS and CTS
of supply failure: 50 ms at minimal aux. Reaction time: <20 ms Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
voltage communication is Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the 1
permitted to be interrupted digital inputs) RS-485
Max. permissible making current: 4 Switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
Master/slave: Slave
18 A peak value for <0.25 ms 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
12 A peak value for <1 ms 230 Vac/dc
Connection: Six screw-clamping terminals
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
2
The voltage supply must be protected b a fuse of: Un = 24 Vdc
(terminating resistors internal)
2.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm Switching threshold 1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
(approx. 0.20 in. x 0.08 in) according to IEC 60127
3.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm
Switching threshold 1 OFF:
Un = 48 V/60 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Climatic Environmental Conditions 3
(approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14 Switching threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc Storage temperature: 25 C up to +70 C
Switching threshold 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc (13 F to +158 F)
Un = 110/120 Vac/dc Operating temperature: 20 C up to +60 C 4
Power Consumption Switching threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac (4 F to +140 F)
Power supply range: 19300 Vdc: 6W idle mode/ Switching threshold 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Permissible humidity
Un = 230/240 Vac/dc
8W max. power
40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/ Switching threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac
at Ann. average: <75% rel.
(on 56d up to 95% rel.)
5
8W max. power Switching threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Permissible
(for frequencies of 4070 Hz) Terminals: Screw-type terminal installation altitude: <2000m (6561.67 ft)
Power consumption: Phase current inputs above sea level 6
at In = 1 A burden = 0.15 mVA If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
at In = 5 A burden = 0.15 mVA altitude applies, a changed
Binary Output Relays classification of the
Ground current input: at In = 1 A burden = 0.35 mVA
at In = 5 A burden = 0.35 mVA Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC operating and test voltages 7
Switch-on current: 25 A AC/DC for 4s may be necessary.
Max. breaking current: 5 A AC up to 125 V AC
5 A DC up to 50 V (resistive)
0.2 A DC at 300 V
8
Max. switching voltage: 250 Vac/300 Vdc
Switching capacity: 2000 VA
Contact type: 1 changeover contact 9
Terminals: Screw-type terminals
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 032
EDR-5000 A front port is provided for direct Ground overcurrent elements:

i computer connection. An RS-485 Two instantaneous measured
Distribution Protection Relay communication port on the back is elements with timers (50X[1]
standard for local area networking and 50X[2])
ii using Modbus-RTU. An optional
Two instantaneous calculated
Ethernet port and protocols
elements with timers (50R[1]
are available.
1 and 50R[2])
The EDR-5000 distribution protection Two inverse time overcurrent
relay includes programmable logic measured elements (51X[1]
2 functions. Logic gates and timers may and 51X[2])
be defined and arranged for custom-
Two inverse time overcurrent
ized applications. Programmable logic
calculated elements (51R[1]
3 control functions make the EDR-5000
and 51R[2])
relay ideally suited for main-tie-main
and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. Eleven standard curves
4 Flash memory is used for the
Instantaneous or time delay reset
programming, and all settings are Directional control (all elements)

EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay
stored in nonvolatile memory. The Breaker failure (50BF)
5 relay allows for four preprogrammed
General Description Phase unbalance negative sequence
setting groups that can be activated overcurrent (46[1], 46[2])
Eatons EDR-5000 distribution through software, the display or a
6 protection relay is a multi-functional, contact input. Phase voltage unbalance and
microprocessor-based relay for feeder sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])
circuits of all voltage levels. It may The EDR-5000 distribution protection Main three-phase under/overvoltage
7 be used as a primary protection on relay has mass memory for data (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
feeders, mains and tie circuit breaker storage and a real-time clock with Auxiliary single-phase under/
applications; or as backup protection 1 ms time resolution. The relay will overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2],
8 for transformers, high voltage lines log 300 sequence of event records, 59A[1], 59A[2])
and differential protection. The relay 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/
Ground fault overvoltage relay
is most commonly used on medium maximum values, load profiles,
9 voltage switchgear applications. breaker wear information and
(59N[1], 59N[2])
oscillography data. Six frequency elements that can be
The EDR-5000 distribution protection assigned to: overfrequency, under-
10 relay provides complete current, The EDR-5000 has eight programmable frequency, rate of change or vector
voltage and frequency protection, and binary inputs, two normally opened and surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
metering in a single, compact case. eight Form C heavy-duty outputs and 81[5], 81[6])
11 The relay has four current inputs rated one Form C signal alarm relay. It can Apparent and displacement
for either 5 A or 1 A and four voltage be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or power factor (55A[1], 55A[2],
inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power. 55D[1], 55D[2])
12 to be connected to the three-phase Forward and reverse watts
power voltage for voltage protection Features
(32[1], 32[2])
and for metering. They can be
13 Protection Forward and reverse VARs
connected in wye-ground or open
delta configuration. The fourth voltage Phase overcurrent elements: (32V[1], 32V[2])
is for independent single-phase Three instantaneous elements Sync check (25)
14 undervoltage/overvoltage protection, with timers (50P[1], 50P[2] Autoreclosing (79)
or ground protection for an and 50P[3]) Zone interlocking for bus
ungrounded system. Three inverse time overcurrent protection (87B)
15 elements (51P[1], 51P[2] Switch onto fault protection
The Maintenance Mode password
protected soft key, can be used for and 51P[3]) Cold load pickup
16 arc flash mitigation to change to an Eleven standard curves Low voltage ride through (LVRT, 27T)
alternate settings group, set to have Instantaneous or time delay reset Reactive power/undervoltage (27Q)
instantaneous elements only. The
Voltage restraint (51P[2]
17 multiple setting groups can also be
and 51P[3])
changed, via communications or a
digital input. Directional control (all elements)
18 An integral keypad and display is
provided for direct user programming
19 and retrieval of data without the
need of a computer. Fourteen (14)
programmable LEDs provide quick
20 indication of relay status.
21

Sheet 04 033
Metering Monitoring Protocols:

Amperes: positive, negative and Trip coil monitor Modbus RTU i
zero sequence Breaker wear primary and secondary Modbus TCP (optional)
Ampere demand (accumulated interrupted current) IEC 61850 (optional) ii
Volts: positive, negative and Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
Configuration software
zero sequence Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
Phase angles Sequence of events report Control Functions 1
Volt-amperes and VA demand (up to 300 events) Breaker open/close
Watts and kW demand Clock (1 ms time stamping) Remote open/close
kWh (forward, reverse, net) Programmable I/O
2
Communication
VARs and kVAR demand Programmable logic
Local HMI
kVARh (lead, leg and net)
Password protected
Programmable LEDs 3
Power factor Multiple setting groups
Addressable
Frequency Cold load pickup
IRIG-B 4
% THD V and I CT supervision
Local communication port
Minimum/maximum recording 5
RS-232
Sync values
RS-485
Trending (load profile over time) 6
Table 4.1-7. Catalog Numbering Selection for EDR-5000 Distribution Relay Removable Terminals 7
EDR-5000 A 0 B A 1 8
Hardware Option 1 Mounting Options 9

A = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, Hardware Option 2 Conformal Coating
0 = Standard mount
removable terminals, zone Communication Options
0 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, 1 = Projection
interlocking ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount 10
B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs, power supply range: B = Modbus-RTU B = Conformal coated
removable terminals, zone 19300 Vdc (RS-485) circuit boards
interlocking 40250 Vac
1 = Phase current 5A/1A,
H = IEC-61850
(Goose)
11
sensitive ground 1 = Modbus-RTU +
current 0.5 A/0.1 A, Modbus-TCP
power supply range: 12
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
1
13
Beginning in 2016, consult factory for the availability of the following new communication options.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 034
Protection and Control Functions Sync Check Ground Voltage Protection

i The Eatons EDR-5000 distribution The sync check function is provided In high impedance grounded systems,
protection relay has been designed for double-ended power source ground fault protection is provided by
applications. The sync check monitors the detection of zero sequence voltage
ii for maximum user flexibility and
simplicity. The base relay includes voltage magnitude, phase angle and (3Vo) in the neutral of the transformer
all the standard current and voltage slip frequency between the bus and by an overvoltage element (59N)
the line. It also incorporates breaker connected to the secondary of the
1 protection and metering functions.
close time, dead bus dead line, distribution grounding transformer,
Directional Overcurrent Protection dead bus live line, and live bus live or in the secondary of a wye-broken
The EDR-5000 distribution protection line features. delta transformer used when the
2 relay provides complete three-phase neutral is not accessible or in delta
Reverse Power system. In the EDR-5000, we can
and ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are eight indepen- Reverse power provides control for measure this zero sequence voltage
3 dent ground overcurrent elements. power flowing through a feeder. There through the 4th voltage input; the 59N
The ground elements X use the are three elements to be configured: element has to be desensitized for 3rd
independently measured ground operate in forward or reverse; or, harmonic voltages that can be present
4 (or neutral) current from a separate under or over power conditions. in the system under normal operation.
current-sensing input. The ground Reverse power is typically applied to
generator or motor applications while Flexible Phase Rotation
5 elements R uses a calculated 3Io
under power is generally applied to The EDR-5000 distribution protection
residual current obtained from the
sum of the three-phase currents. This load or generation loss. relay can be applied on either an A-B-C
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
6 calculated current could be used for Reverse VARs permits correct operation and indica-
either the neutral or ground current in
a three-phase, four-wire system. Each Reverse VARs can be used to detect tion of the actual system configuration.
loss of excitation in synchronous
7 of the phase and ground overcurrent
machines. There are three elements Frequency Protection
elements can be selected to operate
based on fundamental or rms current. to be configured: operate in forward The EDR-5000 relay provides six
or reverse; or, under or over frequency elements than can be
8 Phase direction is a function used to VARs conditions. used to detect under/over frequency,
supervise all phase current elements rate of change, and a vector surge
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is com- Inverse-Time Characteristics (decoupling of two systems) protec-
9 pared to a corresponding phase current There are 11 user-selectable inverse- tion on the Main VT inputs. Each
to establish the direction of the fault. time overcurrent curve characteristics. element has an independent thresh-
This function is selectable to operate in The user can select from the ANSI, old set point and adjustable time
10 the forward, reverse or both directions. IEC or thermal curve families, and can delay.
select instantaneous or time delay
Ground direction is used to supervise reset characteristics. Autoreclosing Logic
11 ground current elements and is The EDR-5000 provides a six shot-
accomplished by using ground, Breaker Failure recloser scheme. Autoreclosing is
negative sequence or residual currents The EDR-5000 distribution protection normally used by the utilities in their
12 supervised by zero, negative or positive relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, distribution and transmission lines,
sequence voltages or ground current. 62BF) function that can be initiated but it can be used in commercial
This function is selectable to operate from either an internal or external trip and industrial applications with long
13 in forward, reverse or both directions. signal. This is an independent element overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the
that can be used to operate a lockout faults that occur on overhead lines
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent relay or to trip an upstream breaker. are transient in nature. Tripping of a
14 Voltage restraint reduces the over- The timer must be longer than the circuit breaker normally clears a
current pickup level (51P[2], 51P[3]). breaker operating time and the transient fault and reclosing of the
This modification of the pickup protective function reset times. circuit breaker restores power back
15 overcurrent level is compared to the to the circuit.
corresponding phase input voltage. Voltage Protection
The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear The EDR-5000 distribution protection Maintenance Mode
16 model below to determine the relay has four voltage-input circuits. The Maintenance Mode can improve
effective pickup value. There is a three-phase set designated safety by providing a simple and
as Main Voltage (M) and a single- reliable method to reduce fault
17 phase voltage circuit designated as clearing time and lower incident
Pickup %
Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include energy levels at energized panels.
undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) The Maintenance Mode allows the
18 100 %
protection. The three-phase voltage user to switch to more sensitive
protection can be set to operate on a settings via a password protected
single-phase, two out of three phases, soft key, communication or via a
19 or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs digital input while maintenance work
25 % also provide phase voltage unbalance/ is being performed at an energized
reversal (47 negative sequence) panel or device. The more sensitive
20 protection. Each element has an settings provide greater security for
independent threshold set point maintenance personnel and help to
and adjustable time delay. reduce the possibility of injury.
21 Figure 4.1-24. Voltage Restraint Coil
Pickup Characteristics

Sheet 04 035
Monitoring and Metering The number of records is proportional One Form C contact is dedicated to
to the size of each record; the maximum the relay failure alarm function and is i
Sequence of Events Records size per record is 600 cycles. The operated in a normally energized
The EDR-5000 protection relay records waveform capture is initiated by up (failsafe) mode. There are eight
a maximum of 300 events associated to eight different triggers; it can also user-configurable discrete inputs ii
with the relay. An event is classified as be generated manually through the that accept a wet contact and can
a change of state as detected by the display or via communications. operate through a wide range of
relay. These include relay pickups, power. Each input and output is 1
Integral User Interface user-programmable for maximum
dropouts, trips, contact closure,
alarms, setting changes and self- The front panel user interface has application flexibility.
diagnostic failures. Each event is date a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with 2
background illumination for wide Programmable Logic
and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution.
The events are stored in an FIFO log angle viewing in all light conditions. The EDR-5000 distribution protection
in chronological order. 17 programmable LEDs provide quick relay provides logic gates and timers 3
and easy visual display of power on, that the user can customize for special
Trip Log mode of operation, alarm and trip or unique applications. Each gate can
The EDR-5000 protection relay will indication. Soft keys are provided for be assigned a logic function of either 4
store a maximum of 20 trip records operation mode selection, scrolling AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate
in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record through data and settings. In addition, can have a maximum of four input
will be date and time stamped to a the relay settings and test functions signals and each input signal can be 5
1 ms resolution. The trip log record are password protected. required to be a NOT. Input signals
will include information on the type can be external inputs received via
of fault, protection elements that
Load Profiling/Trending the binary inputs or internal values 6
operated, fault location and currents The EDR-5000 relay automatically associated with the protection, alarm
and voltages at the time of the fault. records selected quantities into non- or metering set points. Each gate
volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or has a unique output assignment 7
Waveform Capture 60 minutes, depending on the trending and designation that can be used
The EDR-5000 distribution protection report setting. as the input to another gate. There
relay provides oscillography-recording are 24 independent timers that have 8
Programmable I/O adjustable pickup and dropout
capabilities. The relay will record all
measured signals along with the binary The EDR-5000 distribution protection delay settings.
signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, 9
closures. The EDR-5000 relay can two normally open and eight Form C
record up to 6000 cycles of data. contacts. Two isolated inputs can be
used for monitoring the trip circuit. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.1-25. Visual Logic Editor
19
20
21

Sheet 04 036
ii
6 Figure 4.1-26. Typical One-Line Diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.1-27. Typical Control Diagram
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 037
Communication Software data. PowerPort-E is free and can be remote monitoring of many devices.
Eaton provides two types of
downloaded from the Eaton Web site It provides additional functions such i
at www.eaton.com/pr. as billing, trending and graphics.
communication software. The first Contact your local Eaton representative
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or The second package is Power Xpert for more information on Power Xpert ii
laptop for easy access to a single relay Software. Power Xpert Software is a Software.
to change set points or configuration power management software package
and to view metered values and stored that is designed for continuous, 1
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 4.1-28. PowerPort-E EDR-5000 Device Planning

15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 038
Technical Data and SpecificationsEDR-5000

i Table 4.1-8. EDR-5000 Specifications
Voltage Supply Digital Inputs Zone Interlocking
ii Aux. voltage: 24270 Vdc/48230 Vac Max. input voltage: 300 Vdc/259 Vac NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING
(20%/+10%) Input current: <4 mA OUTPUTS (ZONE INTERLOCK, SEMI-CONDUCTOR
Buffer time in case Reaction time: <20 ms OUTPUT): 5 Vdc, <2 mA FOR CONNECTION TO
1 of supply failure: 50 ms at minimal aux. Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY.
voltage interrupted digital inputs) Zone out:
communication Switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
is permitted 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc, Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
2 Max. permissible making current: 230 Vac/dc Zone in:
18 A peak value for 0.25 ms Un = 24 Vdc Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc
12 A peak value for 1 ms Switching threshold 1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. input voltage: +5.5 Vdc
3 The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:
Un = 48 V/60 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc
Switching threshold OFF: Max. 1.5 Vdc
(approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 Switching threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV AC
3.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm Switching threshold 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc (to ground and other IO)
4 (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14 Un = 110/120 Vac/dc Connection: Screw-type terminals
Switching threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac (twisted pair)
Switching threshold 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac
5 Power Consumption Un = 230/240 Vac/dc Front Interface RS-232
Switching threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac
Power Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
Switching threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
supply range: 24270 Vdc: 7W idle mode/ Handshake: RTS and CTS
Terminals: Screw-type terminal
approx. 13W max. power Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
6 48230 Vac: 7 VA idle mode/
approx. 13 VA max. power Relay Outputs RS-485
(for frequencies of 4070 Hz)
Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC Master/slave: Slave
7 Power
consumption: Phase current inputs
Max. make current: 25 A AC/25 A DC up to 30 V for 4s Connection: Six screw-clamping terminals
30 A/230 Vac according to RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
at In = 1 A, S = 0.15 mVA
ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005 (terminating resistors internal)
at In = 5 A, S = 0.15 mVA
8 Ground
30 A/250 Vac according to
ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005 Climatic Environmental Conditions
current input: at In = 1 A, S = 0.35 mVA
Max. breaking current: 5 A AC up to 125 Vdc
at In = 5 A, S = 0.35 mVA Storage temperature: 30 C to +70 C
9 0.3 A DC at 300 V
(22 F to +158 F)
Operating temperature: 20 C up to +60 C
(4 F to +140 F)
Permissible humidity
Contact type: Form C or normally open contact
10 Terminals: Screw-type terminals
Permissible
installation altitude: <2000 m (6561.67 ft)
11 above sea level
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
altitude applies, a changed
12 classification of the
operating and test voltages
may be necessary.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2015 Motor Protection
Sheet 04 039
General DescriptionOverload Relays
Freedom Overload Relays C440/XT Electronic Features and Benefits

i
Overload Relay Features
Reliable, accurate, electronic
motor protection ii
Easy to select, install and maintain
Compact size 1
Flexible, intelligent design
Global product offering
available with NEMA, IEC and 2
DP power control
Size/Range 3
Broad FLA range (0.331500 A)
Selectable trip class (10 A, 10, 20, 30)
Direct mounting to NEMA, IEC and
4
C440/XT Electronic Overload Relay DP contactors
32 A OverloadC306DN3B General Description Most compact electronic overload in 5
its class
General Description Eatons electronic overload relay (EOL)
is the most compact, high-featured, Motor Control 6
C306 Overload Relays are designed for economical product in its class. Two B600 alarm (NO) and fault
use with CE or CN non-reversing and Designed on a global platform, the (NC) contacts
reversing contactors. Four sizes are
available for overload protection up
new EOL covers the entire power Test/Trip button 7
control spectrum including NEMA,
to 144 A. IEC and DP contactors. The NEMA and Motor Protection
Features
DP versions are offered with the C440 Thermal overload 8
designation while the IEC offering has Phase loss
Selectable manual or automatic the XT designation. The electronic
Selectable (ON/OFF)
reset operation design provides reliable, accurate
phase imbalance 9
Interchangeable heater packs and value driven protection and
communications capabilities in a Selectable (ON/OFF) ground fault
adjustable 24%to match motor FLA
and calibrated for use with 1.0 and single compact device. It is the flexible
User Interface 10
1.15 service factor motors. Heater choice for any application requiring
easy-to-use, reliable protection. Large FLA selection dial
packs for 32 A overload relay will
mount in 75 A overload relay Eaton has a long history of innovations
Trip status indicator 11
useful in derating applications Operating mode LED
and product development in motor
such as jogging control and protection, including both DIP switch selectable trip class,
Class 10 or 20 heater packs traditional NEMA, as well as IEC phase imbalance and ground fault 12
Load lugs built into relay base control. It was from this experience Selectable Auto/Manual reset
that the C440 was developed,
Bimetallic, ambient compensated
delivering new solutions to meet Feature Options 13
operated. Trip free mechanism Remote reset
todays demands.
Electrically isolated NO-NC 120 Vac
contacts (pull RESET button to test). C440 is a self-powered electronic over- 14
(Electrical ratings see tables in load relay available up to 100 A as a 24 Vac
Volume 5Motor Control and self contained unit. With external CTs, 24 Vdc
Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 33, C440 can protect motor up to 1500 FLA. 15
Tamper-proof cover
Section 33.1) Available add-on accessories include
remote reset capability and communi- Communications modules
Overload trip indication
Shrouded or fingerproof cation modules with I/O for DeviceNet, Modbus RTU RS-485 16
terminals to reduce possibility PROFIBUS, and Modbus. DeviceNet with I/O
of electrical shock PROFIBUS with I/O 17
Modbus RTU with I/O (Q4 2010)
Standards and Certifications
EtherNet/IP (planned)
Meets UL 508 single-phasing 18
requirements
UL listed, CSA certified, NEMA
compliance and CE mark 19
Reference
20
Refer to Volume 5Motor Control
and Protection, CA08100006E,
Tab 33, Section 33.1 for additional 21
product information.

Motor Protection October 2015
Sheet 04 040
General DescriptionOverload Relays
Benefits Flexibility Safety

i Available with NEMA, IEC and IP 20 rated terminal blocks
Reliability and Improved Uptime
DP contactors Available in Eatons industry leading
C440 provides the users with
Improves return on investment by FlashGard MCCs
ii peace of mind knowing that their
reducing inventory carrying costs
assets are protected with the Tested to the highest industry
with wide FLA adjustment (5:1) and standards such as UL, CSA, CE
highest level of motor protection
1 selectable trip class and IEC
and communication capability in
its class Design incorporates built-in ground RoHS compliant
fault protection thus eliminating the
Extends the life of plant assets
2 with selectable motor protection
need for separate CTs and modules Standards and Certifications
features such as trip class, phase Flexible communication with UL
imbalance and ground fault optional I/O enables easy integra-
3 CSA
tion into plant management
Protects against unnecessary
systems for remote monitoring CE
downtime by discovering changes
and control NEMA
in your system (line/load) with
4 remote monitoring capabilities Available as an open component IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
and in enclosed control and motor ISO 13849-1 (EN954-1)
Status LED provides
control center assemblies
5 added assurance that valuable RoHS
assets are protected by indicating Monitoring Capabilities ATEX directive 94/9/EC
the overload operational status Individual phase currents rms Equipment Group 2, Category 2
6 Average three-phase current rms
Thermal memory
7 Fault indication (overload, phase
loss, phase imbalance, ground fault)
8 Table 4.2-1. Electronic Overload Education

Description Definition Cause Effect if not Protected C440/XT Protection
9 Motor Protection
Thermal overload Overload is a condition in An increase in the load or Increase in current draw Thermal trip behavior is defined
which current draw exceeds torque that is being driven leads to heat and insulation by UL, CSA and IEC standards.
115% of the full load by the motor. breakdown, which can cause Trip class is settable from 10 A,
10 amperage rating for A low voltage supply to the system failure. 10, 20, 30
an inductive motor. motor causes the current to Increase in current can increase
go high to maintain the power consumption and waste
11 power needed. valuable energy.
A poor power factor causing
above normal current draw.
12 Ground fault A line to ground fault. A current leakage path to ground. An undetected ground fault can
burn through multiple insulation
Fixed protective setting that
takes the starter offline if ground
windings, ultimately leading to fault current exceeds 50% of the
motor failure, not to mention risk FLA dial setting, i.e., if the FLA
13 to equipment or personnel dial is set to 12 A, the overload
relay will trip if the ground
current exceeds 6 A.
14 Imbalanced Uneven voltage or current When a three-phase load is Imbalanced voltage causes large Fixed protective setting that
phases (voltage between phases in a three- powered with a poor quality imbalanced currents and as a takes the starter offline if a
and current) phase system. line, the voltage per phase result this can lead to motor phase drops below 50% of
15 may be imbalanced. stator windings being over-
loaded, causing excessive
the other two phases.
heating, reduced motor effi-

ciency and reduced insulation
16 life.
Phase loss One of the three-phase Multiple causes, loose wire, Single-phasing can lead to Fixed protective setting that
current (single- voltages is not present. improper wiring, grounded unwanted motor vibrations in takes the starter offline if a
17 phasing) phase, open fuse, etc. addition to the results of imbal-
anced phases as listed above.
phase drops below 50% of
the other two phases.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 041
Product SelectionOverload Relays
Modbus Communication Module DeviceNet Communication Modules PROFIBUS Communication Modules

The Modbus module combined The DeviceNet Communication Module The PROFIBUS module combined i
with an expansion module and a provides monitoring and control for with an expansion module and a
communication adapter provide the C440 overload relay from a single communication adapter provide
Modbus communication capability DeviceNet node. These modules also Modbus communication capability ii
to the C440 electronic overload relay. offer convenient I/O in two voltage to the C440 electronic overload relay.
options, 24 Vdc and 120 Vac.
1
Modbus Communication Module PROFIBUS Communication Module

4
DeviceNet Communication Module
Features and Benefits Features and Benefits
The Modbus communication Features and Benefits The PROFIBUS communication
5
module is capable of baud rates Communication to DeviceNet uses module is capable of baud rates
up to 115K only one DeviceNet MAC ID up to 12 Mb
6
The Modbus address and baud rate Configuration PROFIBUS address is set via
configuration can be easily changed DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud convenient DIP switches; LEDs are
using the HMi user interface rate are set via convenient DIP provided to display PROFIBUS status 7
Modbus address and baud rate are switches with an option to set Intuitive configuration with common
set via convenient DIP switches; from the network PROFIBUS configuration tools
LEDs are provided to display Advanced configuration available Terminals 8
Modbus traffic using common DeviceNet tools Unique locking mechanism
Configuration with common provides for easy removal of
Modbus configuration tools Terminals
the terminal block with the field
9
Terminals Unique locking mechanism wiring installed
provides for easy removal of
Unique locking mechanism Each terminal is marked for ease 10
provides for easy removal of of wiring and troubleshooting
wiring installed
Each terminal is marked for ease Selectable I/O assemblies
wiring installed
of wiring and troubleshooting 4IN/2OUT
11
Each terminal is marked for ease
of wiring and troubleshooting Selectable I/O assemblies Signal types include
Selectable I/O assemblies 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc I/O and 12

120 Vac I/O
4IN/2OUT Signal types include
Each I/O module is optically
Signal types include
24 Vdc I/O and
isolated between the field I/O and 13
120 Vac I/O
24 Vdc I/O and the network adapter to protect the
120 Vac I/O Each I/O module is optically I/O and communication circuits
isolated between the field I/O and from possible damage due to 14
the network adapter to protect the transients and ground loops
isolated between the field I/O and
I/O and communication circuits
the network adapter to protect the Input Module features a user- 15
from possible damage due to
I/O and communication circuits definable input debounce, which
transients and ground loops
from possible damage due to limits the effects of transients and
transients and ground loops Input Module features a user-
definable input debounce, which
electrical noise 16
Input Module features a user- Output Module supports a user-
limits the effects of transients and
definable input debounce, which definable safe state for loss of
electrical noise
limits the effects of transients and communication; hold last state, 17
electrical noise Output Module supports a user- ON or OFF
definable safe state for loss of
Output Module supports a user-
communication; hold last state, 18
ON or OFF
communication; hold last state,
ON or OFF Combined status LED
19
20
21

Sheet 04 042

i Table 4.2-2. Electronic Overload Relays up to 1500 A
ii 45 mm 55 mm
Electrical Ratings
Operating voltage (three-phase) and frequency 690 Vac (60/50 Hz) 690 Vac (60/50 Hz)
1 FLA Range
0.331.65 A 20100 A
2 15A
420 A
945 A
3 Use with Contactors

XT IEC frames B, C, D F, G
Freedom NEMA sizes 00, 0, 1, 2 3
4 Trip Class
10 A, 10, 20, 30 10 A, 10, 20, 30
Selectable Selectable
5 Motor Protection
Thermal overload setting 1.05 x FLA: does not trip 1.05 x FLA: does not trip
1.15 x FLA: overload trip 1.15 x FLA: overload trip
6 Feature
Phase loss Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50%
7 Phase imbalance (selectable: enable/disable) Fixed threshold 50% Fixed threshold 50%
Ground fault (selectable: enable/disable) 50% of FLA dial setting 50% of FLA dial setting
>150% = 2 sec >150% = 2 sec
8 >250% = 1 sec >250% = 1 sec
Reset Manual/automatic Manual/automatic
Indicators
9 Trip status Orange flag Orange flag
Mode LED One flash: Overload operating properly One flash: Overload operating properly
Two flashes: Current is above FLA dial setting Two flashes: Current is above FLA dial setting
10 pending trip pending trip
Options
11 Remote reset Yes Yes
Reset bar Yes Yes
Communication expansion module Yes Yes
12 Communication adapter Yes Yes
Capacity
Load terminals
13 Terminal capacity 1210 AWG (46 mm2) 61 AWG (1650 mm2)
86 AWG (616 mm2)
14 Tightening torque 2025 lb-in (2.32.8 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
2530 lb-in (2.83.4 Nm)
Input, auxiliary contact and remote reset terminals

15 Terminal capacity 2 x (1812) AWG 2 x (1812) AWG
Tightening torque 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm) 5.3 lb-in (0.81.2 Nm)
Voltages
16 Insulation voltage U i (three-phase) 690 Vac 690 Vac
Insulation voltage U i (control) 500 Vac 500 Vac
17 Rated impulse withstand voltage 6000 Vac 6000 Vac
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 III/3
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 043
C441 Overload Relays One external remote reset terminal Provides superior protection
Trip status indicator of motors and pumps before i
catastrophic failure occurs
Motor Protection Increases profitability with greater
Thermal overload process uptime and throughput, ii
Jam protection reduced costs per repair, reduced
Current imbalance energy consumption and extended
equipment life 1
Current phase loss
Adjustments to overload configura-
Ground fault
tion can be made at any time
Phase reversal 2
Safety
C441 Motor Insight Overload Load Protection
IP20 rated terminal blocks
and Monitoring Relay
Undercurrent
Terminal blocks are set back
3
General Description Low power (kW) from the display to reduce
High power (kW) operator shock hazard 4
Eatons C441 Motor Insight, the
first product in the Intelligent Power Remote display (optional) does not
Line Protection
Control Solutions family, is a highly require that the operator open the
Overvoltage
configurable motor, load and line panel to configure the device 5
Undervoltage
protection device with power Flexibility
monitoring, diagnostics and flexible Voltage imbalance
communications allowing the Voltage phase loss
Communications modules 6
customer to save energy, optimize Offered in a variety of
their maintenance schedules and Monitoring Capabilities configurations
configure greater system protection, Currentaverage and phase rms External snap-on modules
7
thus reducing overall costs Voltageaverage and phase rms provide support for multiple
and downtime. Powermotor kW communications protocols
8
C441 Motor Insight is available in either Power factor Advanced power, voltage and
a line-powered or 120 Vac control Frequency current monitoring capabilities
powered design, capable of monitor- Thermal capacity Communications modules and 9
ing voltages up to 660 Vac. Each of remote display can be used
Run hours
these units is available in a 19 A or a simultaneously
590 A FLA model. With external CTs, Ground fault current 10
Highly configurable fault and reset
Motor Insight can protect motors up Current imbalance % characteristics for numerous
to 540 A FLA. Available add-on Voltage imbalance % applications
accessories include communication Motor starts Fully programmable isolated fault
11
modules for Modbus, DeviceNet
Motor run hours and auxiliary relays
and PROFIBUS, all with I/O options.
For ease-of-use and operator safety, Options Ease of Use 12
C441 Motor Insight offers a remote Bright LED display with easy-to-
Type 1, 12 remote display
display that mounts easily with two understand setting and references
30 mm knockouts. Type 3R remote display kit
Powered from line voltage or
13
Communication modules
Features and Benefits 120 Vac control power
Modbus
Modbus with I/O
Remote display powered from 14
Features base unit
DeviceNet with I/O Full word descriptions and units on
Size/Range 15
PROFIBUS with I/O user interface
Broad FLA range of 1540 A
Modbus TCP with I/O (contact
Selectable trip class (530)
product line) Standards and Certifications
Four operating voltage options cULus listed NKCR, NKCR7, 508
16
Ethernet IP (contact product line)
Line-powered from 240 Vac, UL 1053 applicable sections for
480 Vac, 600 Vac Benefits ground fault detection 17
Control-powered from 120 Vac Reliability and Improved Uptime CSA certified (Class 3211-02)
Motor Control Advanced diagnostics allows for CE
quick and accurate identification NEMA 18
Two output relays
of the root source of a motor, IEC EN 60947-4-1
One B300 Form C fault relay and
pump or power quality fault;
one B300 ground fault shunt relay reducing trouble-shooting time and
RoHS 19
Other relay configurations are the loss of productivity, reducing
available, including one Form A repeat faults due to misdiagnosis,
and one Form B SPST (fault and increasing process output
20
and auxiliary relays), allowing and profitability
programmable isolated relay
behavior and unique voltages 21

Sheet 04 044
Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education

i Description Definition Source Result C441 Motor Insight
Protection
Motor Protection
ii Thermal overload Overload is a condition in which An increase in the load or Increase in current draw. Thermal trip behavior is defined
current draw to a motor exceeds torque that is being driven by Current leads to heat and by UL, CSA and IEC standards.
115% of the full load amperage the motor. insulation breakdown, which Trip class is settable from
1 rating over a period of time for A low voltage supply to the can cause system failure. 530 by 1
an inductive motor. motor would cause the current Additionally, an increase in
Provides power factor monitor-
to go high to maintain the current can increase power
ing and low voltage protection
2 power needed. consumption and waste
valuable energy.
features.
A poor power factor would
cause above normal current
3 draw.
Jam Jam is similar to thermal Mechanical stall, interference, The motor attempts to drive the Provides a configurable Jam
overload in that it is a current jam or seizure of the motor or load, which has more resistive setting that is active during
draw on the motor above motor load. force due to the mechanical motor run state to avoid
4 normal operating conditions. interference. In order to drive nuisance trips.
the load, the motor draws an Trip Threshold 150400%
abnormal amount of current, of FLA.
5 which can lead to insulation
Trip Delay 120 seconds.
breakdown and system failure.
Ground fault A line to ground fault. A current leakage path An undetected ground fault Motor Insight has ground fault
6 to ground. can burn through multiple
insulation windings, ultimately
protection capability down to
0.15 amps estimated from the
leading to motor failure. existing three-phase CTs using
the residual current method.
7 That is, the three-phase current
signals should sum to zero
unless a ground fault (GF)
8 condition is present. In the case
of a GF, Motor Insight can alarm,
trip the starter, or trip an alterna-
tive relay that can be used to
9 shunt trip a breaker or light up a
warning light. GF current can
also be monitored in real-time
10 through the advanced monitor-
ing capabilities.
Note: GF settable thresholds
vary with motor FLA. 0.15 A
11 may not be available in all
cases.
Imbalanced phases Uneven voltage or currents When a three-phase load is Imbalanced voltage causes Provides two protection settings
12 (voltage and current) between phases in a three- powered with a poor quality large imbalanced currents and that address this problem. The
phase system. line, the voltage per phase may as a result this can lead to motor user can choose to set current
be imbalanced. stator windings being over- imbalance thresholds or voltage
13 loaded, causing excessive heat-
ing, reduced motor efficiency
imbalance thresholds, each
of which can trip the starter.
and reduced insulation life. Additionally, both of these may
be monitored through Motor
14 Insights advanced monitoring
capabilities, allowing the
customer to notice in real-time
15 when and where a condition
is present.
Phase losscurrent One of the three-phase current Multiple causes, loose wire, Single-phasing can lead to Fixed protective setting that
(single-phasing) is not present. improper wiring, grounded unwanted motor vibrations in takes the starter offline if a
16 phase, open fuse, etc. addition to the results of imbal- phase drops below 60% of
anced phases as listed above. the other two phases.
Phase rotation Improper wiring, leading to A miswired motor. Inadvertent Phase-reversal can cause Configurable phase protection,
17 (phase-reversal) phases being connected to the phase-reversal by the utility. unwanted directional rotation of allowing the user to define the
motor improperly. a motor. In the event that the phase sequencing intended for
load attached to the motor can that application. If no phase
18 only be driven in one direction,
the result could be significant
sequence is required, the user
has the ability to disable this
mechanical failure and/or injury feature.
to an operator.
19 Frequency variance When line frequency Malfunctioning alternator speed Variations in frequency can Advanced monitoring
is inconsistent. regulator, or poor line quality cause increases in losses, capabilities allow the user to
caused by an overload of a decreasing the efficiency of monitor frequency in real-time.
20 supply powered by individual the motor. In addition, this can
sources. result in interference with
synchronous devices.
21

Sheet 04 045
Table 4.2-3. Advanced Overload Education (Continued)

Description Definition Source Result C441 Motor Insight i
Protection
Load Protection
Undercurrent or Average rms current provided Undercurrent is usually If undercurrent goes Motor Insight has two protec-
ii
low power to the motor falls below normal associated with a portion of undetected, a mechanical tion settings to detect this:
operating conditions. the users load disappearing. failure can and has occurred. undercurrent and low power.
Examples of this would be a In the case of a pump, running Low power is a more consistent 1
broken belt, a dry-pump (low a pump dry or running a pump way of ensuring detection as
suction head) or a dead-headed in a dead-headed condition power is linear with motor load,
centrifugal pump. can cause excessive heating,
damaging expensive seals
where as current is not. An
unloaded motor may draw 50%
2
and breaking down desired of its rated current, but the
fluid properties. power draw will be less than
10% of rated power due to a low 3
power factor.
High power The motor load is drawing more This is typical of batch process- If a high-power fault goes Monitors the three-phase real
power than it should at normal ing applications where several undetected, the result may power. If the real power value 4
operating conditions. ingredients flow into a mixer. be a batch of material that is estimated above the set
When a substances consistency does not meet specification. threshold for the set length
changes and viscosity increases of time, a fault is detected and
from what is expected, the the overload will trip the starter. 5
motor may use more power to Additionally, power can be
blend the mixture. Out-of-toler- monitored in real-time.
ance conditions can be detected 6
using the High Power and Low
Power settings.
Line Protection 7
Overvoltage When the line voltage to the Poor line quality. An overvoltage condition leads Monitors the maximum rms
motor exceeds the specified to a lower than rated current value of the three-phase
rating. draw and a poor power factor.
A trip limit of 110% of rated
voltages. If the rms value rises
above the set threshold for
8
voltage is recommended. the set length of time, a fault
Overvoltage can also lead to is detected and the overload
exceeding insulation ratings. can trip the starter or send 9
and display an alarm of the
condition. All line-related faults
have an alarm-no-trip mode.
10
Undervoltage When the line voltage to the Poor line quality. An undervoltage condition Monitors the minimum rms
motor is below the specified leads to excessive current draw. value of the three-phase
rating. This increases the heating of voltages. If the rms value
the motor windings and can drops below the set threshold 11
shorten insulation life. A trip for the set length of time, a fault
limit set to 90% of rated voltage is detected and the overload
is recommended. can trip the starter or send 12
and display an alarm of the
condition. All line-related faults
have an alarm-no-trip mode.
Power-up delay Allows for starting motors and When there is a power failure, Multiple loads starting Configurable to delay closing
13
loads in a deliberate fashion. or power cycle, multiple loads simultaneously can cause the fault relay on power-up.
come online simultaneously. sags affecting the operation For each Motor Insight control-
of devices that may prevent ling a motor, a different setting 14
successful startup. can be programmed, helping to
If power is lost to a motor maintain the integrity of your
driving a pump, it may be line power. 15
necessary to delay a restart to
allow the pump to come to a
complete stop to prevent start-
ing a motor during backspin. 16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 046
Accessories Table 4.2-4. Modbus Communication Module

i Description I/O Catalog
Modbus Communication Module Number
The C441 Motor Insight Modbus
ii Communication Module is a side-
Modbus Communication Module None C441M
mounted device providing Modbus

communication capability to the
1 C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
The Modbus Communication Module
2 with I/O provides communication,
monitoring and control for the
C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
3 Modbus Module
Features and Benefits
Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N
The Modbus communication
4 module is capable of baud rates Modbus Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441P
up to 115K
The Modbus address and baud
5 rate configuration can be easily
changed using the Motor Insight
user interface (C441M only)
6 Modbus address and baud rate
are set via convenient DIP switches Modbus with I/O Module
(C441N and C441P); LEDs are
7 provided to display Modbus traffic DeviceNet Communication Modules Selectable I/O assemblies
Configuration with common The DeviceNet Communication 4IN/2OUT
8 Modbus configuration tools Module provides monitoring and
control for the Motor Insight overload
Terminals 24 Vdc I/O and
relay from a single DeviceNet node. 120 Vac I/O
Unique locking mechanism
9 provides for easy removal of
These modules also offer convenient
I/O in two voltage options, 24 Vdc and
the terminal block with the field isolated between the field I/O and
120 Vac.
wiring installed the network adapter to protect the
10 Each terminal is marked for ease Features and Benefits I/O and communication circuits
of wiring and troubleshooting Communication to DeviceNet uses from possible damage due to
only one DeviceNet MAC ID transients and ground loops
11 Selectable I/O assemblies
Input Module features a user-
4IN/2OUT Configuration
DeviceNet MAC ID and Baud
12 24 Vdc I/O and rate are set via convenient DIP limits the effects of transients and
electrical noise
120 Vac I/O switches with an option to set
from the network Output Module supports a user-
13 Each I/O module is optically
Advanced configuration available
isolated between the field I/O and communication; hold last state,
the network adapter to protect the using common DeviceNet tools
ON or OFF
14 I/O and communication circuits Terminals
Combined status LED
provides for easy removal of
15 Input Module features a user- the terminal block with the field
definable input debounce, which wiring installed
16 Each terminal is marked for ease
electrical noise
of wiring and troubleshooting
definable safe state for loss of Table 4.2-5. DeviceNet Modules
17 communication; hold last state, Description I/O Catalog
ON or OFF Number
18 DeviceNet Communication Module 120 Vac C441K

DeviceNet Communication Module 24 Vdc C441L
19
20
21 DeviceNet Module

Sheet 04 047
PROFIBUS Communication Module Table 4.2-6. PROFIBUS Communication Module

The C441 Motor Insight PROFIBUS Description I/O Catalog i
Communication Module is a side- Number
mounted device providing PROFIBUS
communication capability to the
PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S ii
PROFIBUS Communication Module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441Q
C441 Motor Insight overload relay.
The PROFIBUS Communication 1
Module with I/O provides communica-
tion, monitoring and control for the
C441 Motor Insight overload relay. 2
Features and Benefits
The PROFIBUS communication PROFIBUS with I/O
Module
3
module is capable of baud rates
up to 12 Mb
PROFIBUS address is set via 4
convenient DIP switches (C441Q
and C441S); LEDs are provided to
display PROFIBUS status 5
Intuitive configuration with common
PROFIBUS configuration tools
Terminals
6
provides for easy removal of 7
wiring installed
Each terminal is marked for ease 8
of wiring and troubleshooting
Selectable I/O assemblies 9
4IN/2OUT
24 Vdc I/O and 10
120 Vac I/O
isolated between the field I/O and
11
the network adapter to protect the
I/O and communication circuits
12
Input Module features a user- 13
electrical noise 14
communication; hold last state, 15
ON or OFF
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 048
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

i
0.30
ii 3.90 (7.6)
0.20
(99.1) (5.1)
1
0.40
(10.2)
2 4.00
(101.6)
0.20
3.60
(5.1) 3.10
(91.4)
2.30 2.70 (78.7)
(68.6)
3 (58.4)
0.20
(5.1)
4
3.30
5 (83.8)
6 Figure 4.2-1. C441 Motor Insight Conversion Plate
7 (4) Open Slots

0.22 x 0.34 (5.6 x 8.6)
8 1.67 1.09
(42.4) (27.7) 2.23
(56.6)
9
2.75
(69.9)
10
3.53
(89.7)
11 3.00
(76.2)
X1
12 Label 0.44
(11.2)
(2) Holes 3.65
H1 1.56 Dia. (92.7)
13 0.20 Dia.
1.88
(47.8)
14 0.31
2.25
(57.8)
(7.9)
Quantity
15 Three per Assembly
Figure 4.2-2. Applicable for C441CTKIT150, C441CTKIT300

16 and C441CTKIT600
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 049
General DescriptionMP-3000
MP-3000 from the residual connection of the Features

i
phase CTs. The zero sequence ground
Motor Protection Relay CT provides greater ground fault General
sensitivity than the residual connection. Microprocessor-based
The relay is programmable for 60 Hz
Self diagnostics
ii
or 50 Hz operation.
User-friendly interface
The MP-3000 motor protection relay Large LED display 1
has two discrete inputs, four Form C
Built-in help program
(1NO and 1NC) contacts and one
Built-in test mode
4 to 20 mA analog output. The relay
LED mode and target indication
2
provides maximum user flexibility to
configure the I/O. All inputs and out- Remote communications
puts (except for the trip output) are Programmable discrete inputs 3
user-programmable. In addition, the
Programmable outputs
relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of
protection on, program mode, monitor Protection 4
mode, view setting mode, history I2t overload protection (49/51)
mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary
Locked rotor (49S/51)
1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page 5
in the program mode provides display Ultimate trip current (51)
indication of the discrete input states Negative sequence phase
MP-3000 Motor Protection Relay
and testing of the output relays, target unbalance (46) 6
LEDs and analog circuit. Instantaneous overcurrent (50)
General Description A user-friendly operator interface and Ground fault protection (50G)
display provides quick access to the RTD trip and alarm with URTD
7
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection
settings, monitored values, motor module (49/38)
relay is a multi-functional micropro-
history and operational logs. Large Underload trip (37) 8
cessor-based protective relay for the
LED alphanumeric character display
protection of any size motor at all Starts per time (66)
provides easy viewing from any angle
voltage levels. It is most commonly Jam or stall (51R)
in any light. Simple keypad operation 9
applied on medium voltage starters Auto or manual reset (86)
provides quick and easy navigation
and on critical or larger motors. The
through all settings and stored data. Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes
MP-3000 relay is a current only device
The program mode and emergency 10
that provides complete and reliable Alarming
override buttons are access restricted
motor protection, monitoring and
via a latched cover which can be sealed Ground fault
starting control functions.
if required. An integrated help function I2t
overload 11
The MP-3000 motor protection relay provides an online description display of Jam/stall
is available in either a fixed mount, functions, abbreviations and operations.
Underload
semi-flush case or in a semi-flush quick-
Optimum Motor Protection Phase unbalance
12
release drawout case. Both housings
are compact and fit a standard IQ cutout. The MP-3000 motor protection relay
has been designed for maximum Control
The optional quick-release drawout motor operation and protection. It Transition for reduced voltage starts: 13
case features two-stage contact permits running the motor as close Transition on current level
disconnection and self-shorting CT to its design limits while protecting
circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting it against excessive heating and
Transition on time 14
terminal pair is available for use as damaging overload conditions. The Transition on current level or time
relay removal alarm or for continuous MP-3000 field proven protection Transition on current level
motor operation (non-failsafe mode) algorithms were developed based and time
15
on relay removal. The optional on motor designs and operating Incomplete sequence monitoring
communication module is externally parameters for optimum operation
mounted on the fixed mount case and protection while minimizing
Permits number of cold starts 16
and internally mounted in the nuisance tripping. Limits number of starts per time
drawout case. Time between starts
The MP-3000 motor protection relay 17
The MP-3000 motor protection relay Anti-backspin time delay
uses a protection algorithm and
has three phase and one ground current measurement technique based Mechanical load shedding
inputs. Both a 5 A and 1 A version are on proven positive and negative Zero speed switch for long 18
available. The ground protection and (unbalance) sequence current acceleration motors
metering functions can be used with sampling and true rms calculations. Motor stop input for synchronous
either a zero sequence ground CT or motor applications
19
Remote trip input
Differential trip input 20
Emergency override
21

Sheet 04 050
Monitoring Functions Total history (record which cannot The MP-3000 motor protection relay
i Motor currents: be reset): overload protection is easy to set and
Total trips apply. Simply input motor nameplate
Average current (I ave)
information and CT ratios and the
Run time
ii Individual phase and ground characteristic is automatically set.
current in primary amperes Operations count
When using the MP-3000 motor
% of full load
1 Logging protection relay, it is recommended
% phase unbalance Log book (chronological list of that the ratio of CT primary rating
RTD temperatures: last 100 events with date and to the motor full load amperes
2 Individual winding
time stamp) (CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to
Event log (detailed information of fall between 0.25 and 1.5. The
Motor bearing thermal model adapts its tripping
last 20 trips and alarms with date
3 Load and time stamp) characteristics if RTDs are connected.
Auxiliary temperatures Start log (data on most recent four Instantaneous Overcurrent
starts with date and time stamp)
4 Motor conditions: The MP-3000 motor protection relay
User Interface provides an instantaneous phase
% of I2t thermal bucket
overcurrent function to trip the motor
Time before start The MP-3000 motor protection relay
5 has a user-friendly interface that
for high fault current levels. This
Remaining starts allowed function can be disabled and has an
makes it easy to retrieve important
adjustable time delay on starting to
Oldest start time information or make setting changes.
6 LEDs provide visual indication of
avoid nuisance tripping on inrush.
History display and keypad mode. The push- Phase Unbalance Protection
Motor history: buttons are clearly labeled and quickly
7 Operational counter access the desired information.
Motor supply circuits are often fed
through fuses and can be run with a
Run time Protection Functions single-phase fuse blown. The motor
8 Highest starting and running The MP-3000 motor protection relay
may still see three-phase voltage but
currents will only have current on two phases,
provides protection against motor
referred to as single-phasing the
Highest % phase unbalance overloads, short circuits and abnormal
9 Maximum winding, bearing and
operating conditions.
motor. The MP-3000 motor protection
relay measures the current unbalance
load RTD temperatures I2t Overload and can be used to alarm or trip the
10 Number of emergency overrides Motor overloads are typically limited motor before damage occurs. Pickup,
by the rotor thermal capabilities but start and run timers and a separate
Trip history (number of trips): alarm setting are provided.
the measuring quantities are from the
11 Ground faults stator. This requires accurate measure- Ground Fault Protection
Overloads ments and good motor thermal
A separate circuit measures
Instantaneous overcurrent models to provide reliable protection.
12 ground fault current. A ground CT
JAM The MP-3000 motor protection relay is recommended for more sensitive
uses a field proven measurement and protection against winding fault
Underload
13 Phase unbalance
motor thermal protection model. The ground. The relay ground circuit
relay samples the current waveforms can be connected residually from
RTDs 36 times per cycle providing accurate the three-phase CTs. The ground fault
14 Phase reversal measurements of the positive and protection has pickup and time delay
negative sequence currents. The set points or can be disabled.
Incomplete sequence
negative sequence component of
15 Remote, differential current causes greater heating effect
Communication on the rotor and has a greater impact
on the thermal model in the relay.
Starts exceeded
16 This same algorithm has been used
Time between starts to protect thousands of motors
Transition since 1984.
17
Alarms history (number of alarms):
Ground faults
18 Overloads
JAM
19 Underload
Phase unbalance
20 RTDs
Starts exceeded
21

Sheet 04 051
JAM Protection Anti-Backspin Remote/Differential Trip

The user-selectable JAM function For certain applications, for example, One of the binary inputs can be i
protects motors that are running pumping fluid up a pipe, the motor programmed to accept a contact input
against a sudden mechanical jam may be driven backward for a period from a separate differential relay, such
or stall condition. The common of time after it stops. The MP-3000 as the MD-3000 or other device to trip ii
application is on motors used on relay provides an anti-backspin timer the motor. This provides local and
crushers, chippers or conveyors. It to prevent starting the motor while it remote target information and uses
detects an increase of motor current is spinning in the reverse direction. the trip contacts of the MP-3000 motor 1
to a level above full load. Pickup, start The timer begins counting from the protection relay. It will also record and
and run timers and a separate alarm moment a stop is declared by the relay. log the motor information at the time
setting are provided. of the trip. 2
Start Control Timers
Motors typically have limits to the
MP-3000
number of cold starts, hot starts, starts 3
per time period and time between
starts that are permitted without
4
2
49/51 Overload I T
49S/51 Locked Rotor damage. The MP-3000 motor protec-
51R Jam/Stall tion relay incorporates these timers
37 Loss of Load/ to prevent starting the motor beyond
Underload
46 Phase Loss/ its capabilities. 5
Unbalance
50 Phase Inst. OC Load Shedding
URT 50G Ground Inst. OC The MP-3000 motor protection relay 6
66 Starts per time
period provides a mechanical load shedding
11 RTDs feature that can be used to control an
Motor
upstream process. The load shedding Motor Starting Profile Time/Current Chart
7
function closes a contact on an over-
Fiber Optic Link load condition to control an upstream Motor Starting Profile
process from adding more load until The MP-3000 relay records the average 8
Figure 4.2-3. MP-3000 the overload condition is gone. current of the motor for the last two
Motor Protection Relay Functions starts. This information is available
Emergency Override over the communications port. The 9
Underload Protection The MP-3000 motor protection relay motor current can then be plotted
The user-selectable underload has a user-programmable feature that and compared to the motor overload
function is used to detect the loss will let the operator reset the start protection curve. Available in 10
of load on the motor. Coupling failure control timers and thermal overload PowerPort or the PowerNet Event
is a common cause for loss of load. bucket. This function is intended for Viewer Client.
Pickup, start and run timers and a use in emergency conditions only and 11
separate alarm setting are provided. may result in motor damage or failure.
Reduced Voltage Starting Long Acceleration Motors 12
Eatons MP-3000 motor protection relay Large motors with high inertia loads
provides a transition and incomplete may experience starting currents that
sequence function for reduced voltage exceed the locked rotor current and 13
starting. The user can select to transition time. The MP-3000 motor protection
based on the current level or on time. relay has logic and provisions for a
zero speed switch input to differentiate 14
between a stall and start condition.
If the motor is spinning then the relay
will not trip on the normal locked rotor 15
time allowing the motor to start.
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 052
Product DescriptionMP-3000
Product Selection
i Table 4.2-7. MP-3000
Description Catalog
ii Number
MP-3000 drawout, 5 A with RS-232 MP3011

MP-3000 drawout, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP3012
1 MP-3000 drawout, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP3013
MP-3000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP3014
2 MP-3000 drawout, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP3112
MP-3000 drawout, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232 MP3113
MP-3000 drawout, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP3114
3 MP-3000 fixed case, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010
MP-3000 fixed case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010-INCOM
MP-3000 fixed case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010MODBUS
4 MP-3000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010DEVICEN
MP-3000 fixed case, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110
MP-3000 fixed case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110-INCOM
5
MP-3000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110DEVICEN
MP-3000 fixed case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP3010VPI
MP-3000 fixed case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP3010VPM
6 MP-3000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP3010VPD
MP-3000 fixed case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP3110VPI
7 MP-3000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP3110VPD

8
CTs
9 Main
Fuse C M GFCT
L3 L3 T3
10 L2 L2 B M T2 To Motor
or Load Device
Under Control
M
11 L1 L1 A T1
X1 X2
Ground Gnd.
12 Primary
Fuses
13 Non-Current
CPT
Carrying Ground
Secondary 5
14 Fuses Ground
H H H G
1
A
H
1
B
H
1
C
H
1
MP-3000
4 7 2 2 2 G
Back View
15
A B C 2
ac Supply
To MP-3000 with Jumper
Trip Contacts Connection
START
STOP Additional 11 12
16 Control
M
M
Alarm
17 Alarm Contacts
18 19
18 Auxiliary Trip Contacts
Aux. Trip
15 16
19
Figure 4.2-4. MP-3000 Wiring
20
21

Sheet 04 053
Technical DataMP-3000
See Below for i

Main CTs Residual Ground Connection
L3 Fuse C M GFCT
L3 T3
ii
L2 L2 B M T2 To Motor
or
Load Device
Under Control
1
L1 L1 A M T1
Ground
Ground X1 X2 2
Primary
Fuses 3
CPT Non-current
Carrying Ground 4
Secondary 60 11 12 41 42
Fuses Ground
13 14 43 44 5
15 16 45 46
17 ac Supply 19
17 18 47 48
to MP-3000
Trip Contacts 19 20 49 50 6
START STOP 56 54
Additional M
Control
M
Shorting
Contacts 21 22 51 52 7
29 30 23 24 53 54
25 26 55 56
Alarm 27 28 57 58
8
Alarm Contacts
29 30 59 60
51 53
9
Aux. Trip
Auxiliary Trip Contacts
48 46 10
11
Residual Ground Connection

12
C
13
B
14
A
Ground 15
16
21 23 25 22 24 26 27 28
17
Back View of Drawout
18
Figure 4.2-5. MP-3000 Drawout Typical CT Circuits and Motor Control Wiring
19
20
21

Sheet 04 054

i Table 4.2-8. MP-3000 Specifications
ii Control Power Motor Overload Protection (I2t) Start Control Functions

Nominal rating: 120 Vac or 240 Vac Full load Starts per time: Off, 1 to 10 starts
(+10%, 25%) amperes: 10 to 3000 A Time for starts
1 Frequency:
Power use:
50 or 60 Hz
20 VA maximum
Locked rotor
current: 300% to 1200% FLA
per time:
Time between
Off, 1 to 240 minutes
URTD: 6 VA maximum Locked rotor starts: Off, 1 to 240 minutes

IPONI: 1 VA maximum time: 1 to 120 seconds Number of
2 Operating Ultimate trip 85% to cold starts: 1 to 5 starts
range: 120 Vac: 90132 Vac current: 150% FLA Motor transition
240 Vac: 180264 Vac Phase CT ratio: 10 to 4000: In current: 10% to 300% FLA
3 Ride through
time: 30 cycles at
Ground CT ratio:
Timing accuracy:
10 to 4000: In
2.5% or 30 ms
Time for transition:
Inc. sequence
0 to 1200 seconds
nominal Vac For I > 1.1x U.T.C. timer: Off, 1 to 240 seconds
Long acceleration
4 Current Inputs Trip Setting Range
timer: Off, 1 to 1200 seconds
Anti-backspin
timer: Off, 1 to 3600 minutes
Nominal (In): 1 A or 5 A Ground fault (GF): Off, 2% to 55% CT ratio
5 CT rating: 2 x In continuous GF Start and run
40 x In for 1 second time delay: 2 to 60 cycles Clock
Phase burden: VA at In Timer accuracy: 20 ms
Accuracy: 1 minute/month at 25 C
Ground burden: VA at In Instantaneous O.C.: Off, 300% to 1600% FLA
6 Saturation: x In IOC start time
delay: 0 to 60 cycles Communications
Metering Accuracy Timer accuracy: 20 ms
DPONI
7 JAM trip: Off, 100% to 1200% FLA
Type: 5-wire
Phase current: 1% of In (5%100%) Underload trip: Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Ground current: 1.5% of In (0%55%) Phase unbalance Baud rate: 500K, 250K, 125K, Auto
trip: Off, 4% to 40% Protocol: DeviceNet
8 Ineg/Ipos Functions: Read/write set points
Discrete Inputs Read metered values
0 to 1200 seconds
Read trip/alarms
Number of
9 inputs: 2 Programmable JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance Read events/history
View starting profile
Rating: 1.2 VA at 120 Vac Time Delay
Maximum OFF = 36 Vac IPONI
Start delay timers: 0 to 120 seconds
10 Minimum ON = 86 Vac Run delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds Type: 2-wire, FSK
Timer accuracy: 0.5% +100 ms Baud rate: 1200 or 9600 baud
Output Contacts Protocol: INCOM
Functions: Read/write set points
11 Number of Alarm Setting Range Read metered values
outputs: 4 Form C, Programmable Read trip/alarms
Ground fault: Off, 2% to 75%
Momentary: Make 30 A AC/DC Read events/history
CT ratio
12 (Resistive)
for 0.25 second
Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc
Overload I2t: Off, 60% to 99% I2t View starting profile
JAM: Off, 100% to 1200% MPONI
Break 5 A at 120/240 Vac
FLA Type: 5-wire, 485
Continuous: 5 A at 120/240 Vac
13 5 A at 30 Vdc
Underload:
Phase unbalance:
Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Off, 4% to 40%
Baud rate:
Protocol:
1200 or 9600 baud
Modbus RTU
Ineg/Ipos Functions: Read/write set points
Analog Output Run delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds Read metered values
14 Read trip/alarms
Rating: 4 to 20 mA Read events/history
Programmable Logging
View starting profile
Maximum load: 1K ohm
15 Accuracy: 1%
Log book: 100 events
Log event: 20 trips and alarms Environmental Ratings
Log start: Last 4 starts
Start profile: Last start Operating: Temperature: 20 C to +60 C
16 (communication only) Storage: Temperature: 45 C to +85 C
History records: Motor, trips, alarms and Humidity: 0% to 95% (noncondensing)
permanent records
17 Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Height: 10.25 (260.4)
Width: 6.72 (170.7)
18 Depth: 3.70 (94.0)
Weight: 7 lbs (3 kg)
19 UL Recognized
File Number E154862
UL 1053
20 ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2
CSA
21

Sheet 04 055
MP-4000 Motor Protection The MP-4000 motor protection relay Features

i
has two discrete inputs, four Form C
Relay with Voltage Inputs (1NO and 1NC) contacts and one 4 to General
20 mA analog output. The relay Microprocessor-based
provides maximum user flexibility
Self diagnostics
ii
to configure the I/O. All inputs and
outputs (except for the trip output) are User-friendly interface
user-programmable. In addition, the Large LED display 1
relay has 10 LEDs for the indication of Built-in help program
protection on, program mode, monitor Built-in test mode
mode, view setting mode, history
LED mode and target indication
2
mode, log mode, trip, alarm, auxiliary
1 and auxiliary 2 operation. A test page Remote communications
in the program mode provides display Programmable discrete inputs 3
indication of the discrete input states Programmable outputs
and testing of the output relays,
target LEDs and analog circuit. Protection 4
I2t overload protection (49/51)
A user-friendly operator interface and
Locked rotor (49S/51)
display provides quick access to the 5
settings, monitored values, motor Ultimate trip current (51)
history and operational logs. Large Undervoltage (27)
MP-4000 Motor Protection Relay
LED alphanumeric character display Overvoltage (59) 6
provides easy viewing from any angle
Under power (32)
in any light. Simple keypad operation
General Description provides quick and easy navigation Negative sequence phase 7
Eatons MP-4000 motor protection through all settings and stored data. unbalance (46)
relay is a multi-functional micro- The program mode and emergency Negative sequence voltage
processor-based protective relay for override buttons are access restricted unbalance (47) 8
the protection of any size motor at all via a latched cover that can be sealed if Instantaneous overcurrent (50)
voltage levels. It is most commonly required. An integrated help function Ground fault protection (50G)
applied on medium voltage starters provides an online description display of
RTD trip and alarm with URTD
9
and on critical or larger motors. The functions, abbreviations and operations.
module (49/38)
MP-4000 relay provides complete and
reliable motor protection, monitoring Optimum Motor Protection Underload trip (37) 10
and starting control functions. The MP-4000 motor protection relay Power factor (55)
has been designed for maximum Starts per time (66)
The MP-4000 motor protection relay
is available in either a fixed mount,
motor operation and protection. It
Jam or stall (51R) 11
permits running the motor as close
semi-flush case or in a semi-flush to its design limits while protecting Auto or manual reset (86)
quick-release drawout case. it against excessive heating and Failsafe or non-failsafe trip modes 12
The optional quick-release drawout damaging overload conditions. The
MP-4000 field proven protection Alarming
case features two-stage contact
disconnection and self-shorting CT algorithms were developed based Ground fault 13
on motor designs and operating I2t overload
circuit terminals. A spare self-shorting
terminal pair is available for use as parameters for optimum operation Jam/stall
relay removal alarm or for continuous and protection while minimizing Underload 14
motor operation (non-failsafe mode) nuisance tripping.
Phase unbalance
on relay removal. The optional The MP-4000 motor protection
communication module is externally relay uses a protection algorithm
Voltage unbalance 15
mounted on the fixed mount case and measurement technique based
and internally mounted in the on proven positive and negative
drawout case. (unbalance) sequence current
16
The MP-4000 motor protection relay sampling and true rms calculations.
has three phase and one ground 17
current inputs. The MP-4000 also has
three voltage inputs. Both a 5 A and
1 A version are available. The ground 18
protection and metering functions can
be used with either a zero sequence
ground CT or from the residual 19
connection of the phase CTs. The
zero sequence ground CT provides
greater ground fault sensitivity than 20
the residual connection. The relay
is programmable for 60 Hz or
50 Hz operation. 21

Sheet 04 056
Control History Alarms history (number of alarms):

i Transition for reduced voltage starts: Motor history: Ground faults
Transition on current level Operational counter Overloads
ii Transition on time Run time JAM
Transition on current level or time Highest starting and running Underload
Transition on current level currents Current unbalance
1 and time Highest % current unbalance
Voltage unbalance
Incomplete sequence monitoring Highest % voltage unbalance
Overvoltage
2 Permits number of cold starts Highest starting and running
Undervoltage
Limits number of starts per time voltages
Overfrequency
Time between starts Maximum winding, bearing and
3 load RTD temperatures Underfrequency
Anti-backspin time delay
Number of emergency overrides Under power
Mechanical load shedding
4 Zero speed switch for long Trip history (number of trips):
Power factor
acceleration motors RTDs
Ground faults
Motor stop input for synchronous Starts exceeded
5 motor applications Overloads
Instantaneous overcurrent Total history (record which cannot
Remote trip input
be reset):
6 Differential trip input JAM
Total trips
Emergency override Underload
Run time
Phase unbalance
7 Monitoring Functions
Voltage unbalance
Operations count
Metering
Overvoltage Logging
RTD temperatures:
8 Individual winding Undervoltage Log book (chronological list of
last 100 events with date and
Motor bearing Overfrequency time stamp)
9 Load Underfrequency Event log (detailed information of
Auxiliary temperatures Under power last 20 trips and alarms with date
Power factor
and time stamp)
10 Motor conditions: Start log (data on most recent four
% of I2t thermal bucket RTDs
starts with date and time stamp)
Time before start Phase reversal
11 Incomplete sequence
Remaining starts allowed
Oldest start time Remote, differential
12 Communication
Starts exceeded
13 Time between starts
Transition
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 057
Product SelectionMP-4000
User Interface Product Selection

The MP-4000 motor protection relay Table 4.2-9. MP-4000 Ordering Information
i
has a user-friendly interface that
Description Catalog
makes it easy to retrieve important
information or make setting changes.
Number ii
LEDs provide visual indication of MP-4000 drawout, 5 A with RS-232 MP4011
display and keypad mode. The push- MP-4000 drawout, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP4012
buttons are clearly labeled and quickly MP-4000 drawout, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP4013 1
access the desired information. MP-4000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP4014
Protection Functions MP-4000 drawout, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP4112 2
The MP-4000 motor protection relay MP-4000 drawout, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232 MP4113
provides protection against motor MP-4000 drawout, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP4114
overloads, short circuits and abnormal
MP-4000 fixed case, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010 3
operating conditions. MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010INCOM
I2t Overload MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010DEVICEN 4
MP-4000 fixed case, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110
Motor overloads are typically limited MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110INCOM
by the rotor thermal capabilities MP-4000 fixed case, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110MODBUS
but the measuring quantities are 5
MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110DEVICEN
from the stator. This requires MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP4010VPI
accurate measurements and good MP-4000 fixed case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP4010VPM
motor thermal models to provide MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP4010VPD
6
reliable protection. MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP4110VPI
The MP-4000 motor protection relay MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP4110VPD 7
uses a field-proven measurement and
motor thermal protection model. The
relay samples the current waveforms 8
36 times per cycle providing accurate
measurements of the positive and
negative sequence currents. The 9
negative sequence component of
current causes greater heating effect
on the rotor and has a greater impact 10
This same algorithm has been used
to protect thousands of motors 11
since 1984.
overload protection is easy to set and
apply. Simply input motor nameplate
information and CT ratios and the 13
characteristic is automatically set.
When using the MP-4000 motor
protection relay, it is recommended 14
that the ratio of CT primary rating
to the motor full load amperes
(CT Pri/Motor FLA) is selected to fall 15
between 0.25 and 1.5. The thermal
model adapts its tripping characteris-
tics if RTDs are connected.
16
Instantaneous Overcurrent
provides an instantaneous phase over-
current function to trip the motor for
high fault current levels. This function 18
can be disabled and has an adjustable
time delay on starting to avoid
nuisance tripping on inrush. 19
20
21

Sheet 04 058
Technical Data and Specifications JAM Protection Emergency Override

i The user-selectable JAM function The MP-4000 motor protection relay
Current Unbalance Protection protects motors that are running has a user-programmable feature that
Motor supply circuits are often fed against a sudden mechanical jam or will let the operator reset the start
ii through fuses and can be run with a stall condition. The common applica- control timers and thermal overload
single-phase fuse blown. The motor tion is on motors used on crushers, bucket. This function is intended for
may still see three-phase voltage but chippers or conveyors. It detects an use in emergency conditions only and
1 will only have current on two phases, increase of motor current to a level may result in motor damage or failure.
referred to as single-phasing the above full load. Pickup, start and run
motor. The MP-4000 motor protection timers and a separate alarm setting are Long Acceleration Motors
2 relay measures the current unbalance provided. Large motors with high inertia loads
and can be used to alarm or trip the may experience starting currents that
motor before damage occurs. Pickup, Underload Protection exceed the locked rotor current and
3 start and run timers and a separate The user-selectable underload time. The MP-4000 motor protection
alarm setting are provided. function is used to detect the loss relay has logic and provisions for a
of load on the motor. Coupling failure zero speed switch input to differentiate
4 Voltage Unbalance Protection is a common cause for loss of load. between a stall and start condition.
The MP-4000 will calculate negative Pickup, start and run timers and a If the motor is spinning then the relay
sequence voltage from three-phase separate alarm setting are provided. will not trip on the normal locked rotor
5 voltages. The presence of negative time allowing the motor to start.
sequence voltage identifies either Reduced Voltage Starting
a phase unbalance or reverse Eatons MP-4000 motor protection relay Remote/Differential Trip
6 phase rotation condition. The provides a transition and incomplete One of the binary inputs can be pro-
MP-4000 provides both alarm and sequence function for reduced voltage grammed to accept a contact input
trip functionality. starting. The user can select to transition from a separate differential relay, such
7 based on the current level or on time. as the MD-3000, or other device to trip
Ground Fault Protection the motor. This provides local and
A separate circuit measures ground Anti-Backspin remote target information and uses
8 fault current. A ground CT is recom- For certain applications, for example, the trip contacts of the MP-4000 motor
mended for more sensitive protection pumping fluid up a pipe, the motor protection relay. It will also record
against winding fault ground. The may be driven backward for a period and log the motor information at the
9 relay ground circuit can be connected of time after it stops. The MP-4000 time of the trip.
residually from the three-phase CTs. relay provides an anti-backspin timer
The ground fault protection has to prevent starting the motor while it
10 pickup and time delay set points or is spinning in the reverse direction.
can be disabled. The timer begins counting from the
moment a stop is declared by the relay.
11 Frequency Protection
The MP-4000 provides over/under Start Control Timers
protection on the Main VT inputs. Motors typically have limits to the
12 Each element has an independent number of cold starts, hot starts, starts
threshold and time delay. per time period and time between
starts that are permitted without
13 Voltage Protection damage. The MP-4000 motor protec-
The MP-4000 voltage protection can tion relay incorporates these timers
be used to generate a trip or alarm if to prevent starting the motor beyond
14 the voltage exceeds (overvoltage 59) its capabilities. Motor Starting Profile Time/Current Chart
a specified threshold for a specific time
delay or drops below (under- Load Shedding Motor Starting Profile
15 voltage 27) a specified threshold for a The MP-4000 motor protection relay The MP-4000 relay records the average
specified time delay. Voltage elements provides a mechanical load shedding current of the motor for the last two
can act on one, two or three phases. feature that can be used to control an starts. This information is available
16 upstream process. The load shedding over the communications port. The
Power Factor function closes a contact on an over- motor current can then be plotted
The power factor function in the load condition to control an upstream and compared to the motor overload
17 MP-4000 can be used for many process from adding more load until protection curve. Available in
applications. For a synchronous motor, the overload condition is gone. PowerPort or the PowerNet Event
it can be used to indicate field loss. Viewer Client.
18 The power factor protection can
generate a trip or alarm when
the power factor falls between
19 specified thresholds.
20
21

Sheet 04 059

Table 4.2-10. MP-4000 Specifications
i
Control Power Motor Overload Protection (I2t) Logging ii
Nominal rating: 120 Vac or 240 Vac Full load Log book: 100 events
(+10%, 25%) amperes: 10 to 3000 A Log event: 20 trips and alarms
Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Locked rotor Log start: Last 4 starts
Power use: 20 VA maximum current: 300% to 1200% FLA Start profile: Last start 1
URTD: 6 VA maximum Locked rotor (communication only)
IPONI: 1 VA maximum time: 1 to 120 seconds History records: Motor, trips, alarms and
Operating Ultimate trip 85% to permanent records 2
range: 120 Vac: 90132 Vac current: 150% FLA
240 Vac:180264 Vac Phase CT ratio: 10 to 4000: In Start Control Functions
Ride through Ground CT ratio: 10 to 4000: In
time: 30 cycles at Timing accuracy: 2.5% or 30 ms
Starts per time:
Time for starts
Off, 1 to 10 starts 3
nominal Vac For I > 1.1x U.T.C. per time: Off, 1 to 240 minutes
Time between starts: Off, 1 to 240 minutes
Current Inputs Trip Setting Range No. of cold starts: 1 to 5 starts 4
Motor transition
Nominal (In): 1 A or 5 A Ground fault (GF): Off, 2% to 55% CT Ratio
current: 10% to 300% FLA
CT rating: 2 x In continuous GF Start and run
40 x In for 1 second time delay: 2 to 60 cycles
Time for transition:
Inc. sequence timer:
0 to 1200 seconds
Off, 1 to 240 seconds
5
Phase burden: VA at In Timer accuracy: 20 ms
Long acceleration
Ground burden: VA at In Instantaneous O.C.: Off, 300% to 1600% FLA
timer: Off, 1 to 1200 seconds
Saturation: x In IOC Start time
delay: 0 to 60 cycles
Anti-Backspin Timer: Off, 1 to 3600 minutes 6
Voltage Inputs Timer accuracy: 20 ms
JAM trip: Off, 100% to 1200% FLA Clock
Nominal rating: 120 Vac Underload trip: Off, 1% to 90% FLA Accuracy: 1 minute/month at 25 C 7
Operating range: 69 to 150 Vac Current unbalance
Burden: 2 VA trip: Off, 4% to 40%
Communications
Ineg/Ipos
DPONI 8
Metering Accuracy 0 to1200 seconds Type: 5-wire
Voltage unbalance (47)
Phase current: 1% of In (5%100%) Threshold: OFF, 1 to 100 V Baud rate: 500K, 250K, 125K, Auto
Ground current: 1.5% of In (0%55%) % V2/V1: 4% to 40% Protocol:
Functions:
DeviceNet
Read/write set points
9
Time delay: 0 to 1200 seconds
Discrete Inputs Under/overvoltage (27/59) Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Number of
Pickup range:
Time delay:
OFF, 10 to 150 V
0 to 1200 seconds Read events/history 10
Inputs: 2 Programmable Under/overfrequency (81U/81O) View starting profile
Rating: 1.2 VA at 120 Vac Pickup range: Off, 15 to 60 Hz IPONI
Maximum OFF = 36 Vac
Minimum ON = 86 Vac
Time delay: 0 to 60 seconds Type:
Baud rate:
2-wire, FSK
1200 or 9600 baud
11
Power protection (32)
Threshold: OFF, 0.06 to 0.90 *FLA *VT Protocol: INCOM
Output Contacts Time delay: 0 to 1200 seconds Functions: Read/write set points
Power factor (55) Read metered values 12
Number of Threshold: OFF, 0.05 to 0.99 Read trip/alarms
outputs: 4 Form C, Time delay: 0 to 60 seconds Read events/history
Momentary:
Programmable
Make 30 A AC/DC MPONI
View starting profile 13
for 0.25 second
JAM, Underload and Phase Unbalance
Type: 5-wire, 485
(Resistive) Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc Time Delay Baud rate: 1200 or 9600 baud
Break 5 A at 120/240 Vac Start Delay timers: 0 to 120 seconds Protocol: Modbus RTU 14
Continuous: 5 A at 120/240 Vac Run Delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds Functions: Read/write set points
5 A at 30 Vdc Timer accuracy: 0.5% + 100 ms Read metered values
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
15
Analog Output Alarm Setting Range View starting profile
Rating: 4 to 20 mA Ground fault: Off, 2% to 75%
Maximum load:
Programmable
1K ohm
CT Ratio Environmental Ratings 16
Overload I2t: Off, 60% to 99% I2t
Accuracy: 1% Operating: Temperature: 20 C to +60 C
JAM: Off, 100% to 1200%
Storage: Temperature: 45 C to +85 C
Underload:
FLA
Off, 1% to 90% FLA
Humidity: 0% to 95% (noncondensing) 17
Phase unbalance: Off, 4% to 40%
Ineg/Ipos Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Run Delay timers: 0 to 240 seconds Height: 10.25 (260.4) 18
Width: 6.72 (170.7)
Depth: 3.70 (94.0)
Weight: 7 lbs (3 kg) 19
UL Recognized
File Number E154862
UL 1053
20
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2
CSA
21

Sheet 04 060
General DescriptionEMR-3000
EMR-3000 An integral keypad and display is Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E
i provided for direct user programming software provides local computer
Motor Protection Relay and retrieval of data without the need access and user-friendly windows
of a computer. Fourteen (14) program- based interface for relay settings,
ii mable LEDs provide quick indication of configuration and data retrieval
relay status. Breaker open/close from relay face-
plate or remotely via communications
1 A front port is provided for direct
Fast and easy troubleshooting,
computer connection. An RS-485
communication port on the back is improved maintenance procedures
and increased device security.
2 standard for local area networking
Provides detailed traceability for
using Modbus-RTU. An optional
Ethernet port and protocols are system configuration changes
3 available. Relays self-diagnostics and
reporting improves uptime and
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay troubleshooting
has mass memory for data storage
4 and a real-time clock with 1 ms time Breaker trip circuit monitoring
resolution. The relay will log 300 improves the reliability of the
sequence of event records, 20 detailed breaker operation
5 trip logs, minimum/maximum values,
load profiles, the five latest start Features
profiles, motor trending, breaker wear
6 information and oscillography data.
Protection
EMR-3000 Thermal protection (49/51)
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay Locked rotor protection (49S/51)
7 General Description has four discrete inputs and one fiber
optic input, one Form C and two NO Phase overcurrent elements:
Eatons EMR-3000 motor protection
programmable contacts, and one Form Two instantaneous elements with
8 relay is a multifunctional micro-
C healthy contact. It also has timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3])
processor-based protective relay for
an optional 420 mA analog output Three inverse time overcurrent
the protection of any size motor at all
or zone interlocking card. The relay elements (51P[1], 51P[2]
9 voltage levels. It is most commonly
provides maximum user flexibility and 51P[3])
applied on medium voltage or larger
to configure the I/O. All inputs and
motors. The MP-3000 relay is a current Eleven standard curves
outputs (except the healthy output)
10 only device that provides complete
are user-programmable. The unit also Instantaneous or time delay reset
and reliable motor protection, moni-
counts with a test mode to force out-
toring and starting control functions. Ground overcurrent elements:
puts and simulate currents, to facilitate
11 The EMR-3000 motor protection relay the commissioning of the unit. It can Two instantaneous measured
has removable terminal blocks, and it be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc elements with timers (50X[1]
has Modbus-RTU communications as or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power. and 50X[2])
12 standard; and an optional Ethernet Two instantaneous calculated
port for Modbus-TCP communications. Features, Benefits and Functions elements with timers (50R[1]
and 50R[2])
13 The EMR-3000 motor protection relay Microprocessor-based protection
has three-phase and one ground with monitoring and control for Two inverse time overcurrent
current inputs. It can be used with medium voltage motors measured elements (51X[1]
14 either 5 A or 1 A CTs. The ground Integral test function reduces and 51X[2])
protection can be used with either maintenance time and expense Two inverse time overcurrent
a zero sequence ground CT or from Zone selective interlocking improves calculated elements (51R[1]
15 the residual connection of the phase coordination and tripping time, and and 51R[2])
CTs. The zero sequence ground saves money compared to a tradi- Eleven standard curves
CT provides greater ground fault tional bus differential scheme
16 sensitivity than the residual connec- Reduce troubleshooting time and
tion. The unit is user programmable maintenance costsTrip and event Jam or Stall protection (50J[1]
for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. recording in non-volatile memory and 50J[2])
17 provides detailed information for
The Maintenance Mode password Phase unbalance negative sequence
protected soft key, can be used for analysis and system restoration. overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2])
6000 cycles of waveform capture
18 arc flash mitigation to change to an
aids in post fault analysis (viewable
Underload protection (37[1],
alternate settings group, set to have 37[2], 37[3])
instantaneous elements only. The using PowerPort-E software)
Temperature protection with
19 multiple setting groups can also be Minimum replacement time
optional URTD (49/38)
changed, via communications or a Removable terminal blocks ideal
in industrial environments Stars per hour (66)
digital input. Flash memory is used
20 for the programming and all settings Lockout protection (86)
are stored in nonvolatile memory. Breaker failure (50BF)
Zone interlocking for bus
21 protection (87B)

Sheet 04 061
Metering Breaker/Contactor open-close/ Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip

Amperes: positive, negative and stop-start characteristics that adjust the trip i
zero sequence Remote open-close (stop-start) times based on measured motor
temperature when RTDs are used.
Ampere demand Programmable I/O
ii
Phase angles Programmable LEDs Instantaneous Overcurrent
Frequency Multiple setting groups The EMR-3000 motor protection relay
% THD I provides an instantaneous phase 1
Magnitude THD I
Protection and Control Functions overcurrent function to trip the motor
Eatons EMR-3000 motor protection for high fault current levels and to
Minimum/maximum recording save the fuses. This function can be 2
relay has been designed for maximum
Phase angles disabled and has an adjustable time
Temperature with remote permits running the motor close to delay on starting to avoid nuisance
URTD module its design limits while protecting it tripping on inrush. 3
Monitoring against excessive heating and Phase Unbalance Protection
damaging overload conditions. The
Trip coil monitor EMR-3000 field-proven protection
Motor supply circuits are often fed 4
Breaker wear primary and secondary through fuses and can be run with
algorithms were developed based
(accumulated interrupted current) a single-phase fuse blown, referred
on motor designs and operating
Oscillography (6000 cycles total) parameters for optimum operation
to as single-phasing the motor. The 5
EMR-3000 motor protection relay
Fault data logs (up to 20 events) and protection while minimizing
measures the current unbalance and
nuisance tripping. The EMR-3000
Sequence of events report (up to
motor protection relay uses a
can be used to alarm or trip the motor 6
300 events) before damage occurs. Pickup, start
protection algorithm and measure-
Trending (load profile over time) and run timers, and a second element
ment technique based on proven
Motor history positive and negative (unbalance)
for alarm purposes are provided. 7
Records the last five motor start sequence current sampling and true Ground Fault Protection
profiles rms calculations. A separate measuring circuit is used 8
Motor start trending to measure ground current. A ground
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection
CT supervision CT is recommended for more sensitive
The EMR-3000 motor relay features
Clock (1 ms time stamping) the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip
protection against winding insulation 9
breakdown to ground. The relay
intelligent overload protection system.
Communication ground circuit can be connected
Intel-I-Trip develops custom overload
Local HMI curves simply from motor nameplate
residually from the three-phase CTs. 10
Password protected The ground fault protection has pickup
data. Intel-I-Trip protects motors from
potentially damaging overload and and time delay set points or can
Addressable
abnormal operating conditions. be disabled. 11
IRIG-B
The Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload Jam Protection
Local communication port protection feature uses field-proven
Remote communication port: measurement techniques and a
The user-selectable Jam function 12
protects motors that are running
RS-232 motor thermal protection model.
against a sudden mechanical jam
The EMR-3000 motor relays unique
RS-485
measurement technique samples the
or stall condition. The common 13
application is on motors used on
Protocols: current waveforms 36 times per cycle,
crushers, chippers or conveyors. It
Modbus RTU providing accurate measurements of
the positive and negative sequence detects an increase of motor current 14
Modbus TCP (optional) to a level above full load. Pickup, start
currents. The negative sequence
IEC 61850 (optional) current causes a greater heating effect and run timers and a second element
on the rotor and has a greater impact for alarm purposes are provided. 15
Configuration software on the thermal model in the relay. Underload Protection
Control Functions Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements
in its motor model to safely protect the
The user-selectable underload 16
Transition for reduced voltage starts function is used to detect the loss
motor against the heating effects of
Incomplete sequence delay of load on the motor. Coupling failure
these currents.
Permits numbers of cold starts is a common cause for loss of load. 17
The motor thermal model is analogous Pickup, start and run timers, and a
Limits numbers of starts per hour
to a bucket that is being filled and second element for alarm purposes
Anti-backspin time delay drained at the same time. The fill rate are provided. 18
Mechanical load shedding is dependent on the motor currents
and the drain is based on motor design Reduced Voltage Starting
Zero speed switch for long
acceleration motors principles. The size of the bucket is The EMR-3000 motor protection relay 19
equivalent to the thermal capacity provides a transition and incomplete
Motor stop inputs
associated with the mass of the motor. sequence function for reduced voltage
Remote trip input Intel-I-Trip integrates these rates and starting. The user can select to 20
Differential trip input will issue a trip when the thermal transition based on the current
Emergency override capacity is filled. level and/or on time.
21

Sheet 04 062
Antibackspin Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor Waveform Capture

i The stop function is programmable The EMR-3000 motor protection relay The EMR-3000 motor protection
from 220%. For certain applications, includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) relay provides oscillography-recording
such as pumping a fluid up a pipe, function that can be initiated from capabilities. The relay will record all
ii the motor may be driven backward for either an internal or external trip signal. measured signals along with the
a period of time after it stops. The This is an independent element that binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and
EMR-3000 relay provides an antiback- can be used to operate a lockout relay contact closures. The EMR-3000 relay
1 spin timer to prevent starting the or trip an upstream breaker. The timer can record up to 6000 cycles of data.
motor while it is spinning in the must be longer than the breaker The number of records is proportional
reverse direction. The timer begins operating time and the protective to the size of each record; the maxi-
2 counting from the moment a stop is function reset times. mum size per record is 600 cycles.
declared by the relay. The waveform capture is initiated by
Flexible Phase Rotation up to eight different triggers; it can
3 Start Control Timers The EMR-3000 motor protection also be generated manually through
Motors typically have limits to the relay can be applied on either an the display or via communications.
number of cold starts, starts per hour A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A
4 period, or time between starts that user setting permits correct operation Integral User Interface
are permitted without damage. The and indication of the actual system The front panel user interface has a
EMR-3000 motor protection relay configuration. 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with back-
5 incorporates these timers to ground illumination for wide angle
prevent starting the motor beyond Maintenance Mode viewing in all light conditions. Seven
its capabilities. The Maintenance Mode can improve programmable LEDs provide quick
6 safety by providing a simple and and easy visual display of power on,
Load Shedding reliable method to reduce fault mode of operation, alarm and trip
The EMR-3000 motor protection relay clearing time and lower incident indication. Soft keys are provided for
7 provides a mechanical load shedding energy levels at energized panels. operation mode selection, scrolling
feature that can be used to control an The Maintenance Mode allows the through data and settings. In addition,
upstream process. The load-shedding user to switch to more sensitive the relay settings and test functions
8 function closes a contact on an over- settings via a password protected soft are password protected.
load condition to control an upstream key, communication or via a digital
process from adding more load until Input while maintenance work is being Starting Profiles
9 the overload condition is gone. performed at an energized panel or The EMR-3000 records the average
device. The more sensitive settings current versus time for the last five
Emergency Override provide greater security for mainte- starting cycles. This information is
10 The EMR-3000 motor protection relay nance personnel and help to reduce available via the communications
has a user-programmable feature that the possibility of injury. port through PowerPort-E.
will let the operator reset the start
11 inhibitor timers and thermal overload Monitoring and Metering Motor Statistics
bucket. This function is intended for For each motor start, the EMR-300
use in emergency conditions only, Sequence of Events Records stores a motor start report and adds
12 and it may result in motor damage The EMR-3000 protection relay records this data to the motor statistics buffer.
or failure. a maximum of 300 events associated With the motor statistics you can track
with the relay. An event is classified motor start data for the past 18 30-day
13 Long Acceleration Motors
as a change of state as detected by periods. For each 30-day interval, the
Large motors with a high inertia may the relay. These include relay pickups, relay records the following information:
experience starting currents that dropouts, trips, contact closure,
14 exceed the locked rotor current and alarms, setting changes and self-
The date the interval began
time. The EMR-3000 motor protection The total number of starts in
diagnostic failures. Each event is date
relay has logic and provisions for a and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. the interval
15 zero speed switch input to differentiate The events are stored in a FIFO in The averages of the following
between a stall and start condition. If chronological order. quantities:
the motor is spinning, then the relay Motor start time
16 will not trip on the normal locked Trip Log
rotortime allowing the motor to start. Start % rotor thermal
The EMR-3000 protection relay will
capacity used
17 store a maximum of 20 trip records
Remote/Differential Trip Maximum start current
in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
The digital inputs can be programmed be date and time stamped to a 1 ms
to accept a contact input from a resolution. The trip log record will
18 separate differential relay or other include information on the type of
device to trip the motor. This provides fault, protection elements that operated,
local and remote target information fault location, and currents and voltages
19 and uses the trip contacts of the at the time of the fault.
EMR-3000 motor protection relay.
It will also record and log the motor
20 information at the time of the trip.
21

Sheet 04 063
Load Profiling/Trending Programmable I/O function and is operated in a normally

The EMR-3000 relay automatically The EMR-3000 motor protection relay energized (failsafe) mode. There are 4 i
records selected quantities into non- provides heavy-duty, trip rated, 2NO eight user-configurable discrete inputs
volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or and one Form C contacts. One isolated that accept a wet contact and can
60 minutes, depending on the trending inputs can be used for monitoring operate through a wide range of ii
report setting. the trip circuit. One Form C contact power. Each input and output is
is dedicated to the relay failure alarm user-programmable for maximum
application flexibility. 1
Figure 4.2-6. Typical One-Line Diagram

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.2-7. Typical Control Diagram 21

Sheet 04 064
i Eaton provides two types of
downloaded from the Eaton Web site It provides additional functions such as
at www.eaton.com/pr. billing, trending and graphics. Contact
communication software. The first is your local Eaton representative for more
ii PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop
for easy access to a single relay to
The second package is Power Xpert information on Power Xpert Software.
Software. Power Xpert Software is a
change set points or configuration power management software package
1 and to view metered values and stored that is designed for continuous,
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.2-8. PowerPort-E EMR-3000 Device Planning
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 065
Table 4.2-11. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-3000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
i
EMR-3000 A 0 B A 1
ii
A = Four digital inputs, four Hardware Option 2
Communication
Conformal Coating
Options
outputs, removable terminals, 0 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, 1 = Projection
one 420 mA analog output, ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount
URTD interface, IRIG-B
small display
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
B = Modbus RTU B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
2
(RS-485)
B = Four digital inputs, four 40250 Vac I = Modbus RTU
outputs, removable terminals, 1 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, (RS-485) +
zone interlocking, URTD sensitive ground Modbus TCP 3
interface, IRIG-B, small display current, 0.5 A/0.1 A, (RJ-45)
power supply range: H = IEC 61850
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
(GOOSE and
MMS)
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 066
Technical Data and SpecificationsEMR-3000

i Table 4.2-12. EMR-3000 Specifications
Voltage Supply Digital Inputs Front Interface RS-232
ii Aux. voltage: 19300 Vdc/40250 Vac Max. input voltage: 300 Vdc/270 Vac Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
Buffer time in case Input current: <4 mA Handshake: RTS and CTS
of supply failure: 50 ms at minimal aux. Reaction time: <20 ms Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
1 voltage communication is Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the
permitted to be interrupted digital inputs) RS-485
Max. permissible making current: 4 switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
Master/slave: Slave
18 A peak value for 0.25 ms 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/dc,
2 12 A peak value for 1 ms 230 Vac/dc
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of: Un = 24 Vdc
2.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5.0 x 20.0 mm Switching threshold 1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
3 (approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127
Un = 48V/60 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Fiber Optic
(approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14 Switching threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc Master/slave: Slave
Switching threshold 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc Connection: ST-plug
4 Un = 110/120 Vac/dc
Power Consumption Switching threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac URTD-Interface
Power Un = 230/240 Vac/dc Connection: Versatile link
5 supply range: 19300 Vdc: 6W idle mode/ Switching threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac
8W max. power Switching threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Climatic Environmental Conditions
40250 Vac: 6W idle mode/ Terminals: Screw-type terminal Storage temperature: 25 C up to +70 C
8W max. power
6 (for frequencies of 4070 Hz)
(13 F to 158 F)
Power
Binary Output Relays Operating temperature: 20 C up to +60 C
Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC (4 F to 140 F)
7 at In = 1 A burden = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5 A burden = 0.15 mVA
Max. make current:
Max. breaking current:
25 A AC/25 A DC for 4s
5 A AC up to 125 Vdc at Ann. average: <75% rel.
5 A DC up to 30 V (resistive) (on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Ground
0.2 A DC at 300V Permissible
current input: at In = 1 A burden = 0.35 mVA
8 at In = 5 A burden = 0.35 mVA Max. switching voltage: 250 Vac/300 Vdc installation altitude: <2000 m (6561.67 ft)
above sea level
Contact type: 1 changeover contact If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
classification of the
may be necessary.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 067
EMR-4000 The EMR-4000 motor protection relay The EMR-4000 motor protection
i
provides complete current, voltage relay includes programmable logic
Motor Protection Relay and frequency protection in a single functions. Logic gates and timers
compact case. The relay has four may be defined and arranged for
current inputs rated for either 5 A or customized applications. With the ii
1 A and four voltage inputs. Three of programmable logic control functions
the voltage inputs are to be connected you can simplify the complexity of
to the three-phase power voltage for your starting schemes by eliminating 1
voltage protection and for metering. timers and auxiliary relays. Flash
They can be connected in wye-ground memory is used for the programming
or open delta configuration. The fourth and all settings are stored in non- 2
voltage is for independent single- volatile memory. The relay allows for
phase undervoltage/overvoltage four preprogrammed setting groups
protection. The unit is user program- that can be activated through software 3
mable for 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. or contact input.
The Maintenance Mode password The EMR-4000 motor protection relay 4
protected soft key can be used for has mass memory for data storage
EMR-4000 arc flash mitigation to change to an and a real-time clock with 1 ms time
alternate settings group, set to have resolution. The relay will log 300 5
General Description instantaneous elements only. The sequence of event records, 20 detailed
Eatons EMR-4000 motor protection multiple setting groups can also be trip logs, minimum/maximum values,
relay is a multifunctional micro- changed, via communications or a load profiles, the five latest start 6
processor-based protective relay for digital input. Flash memory is used profiles, motor trending, breaker/
the protection of any size motor at all for the programming and all settings contactor wear information and
voltage levels. It is most commonly are stored in nonvolatile memory. oscillography data. 7
applied on medium voltage or larger An integral keypad and display is The EMR-4000 motor protection relay
motors. The EMR-4000 relay is a provided for direct user programming has eight discrete inputs, one fiber
current and voltage device that and retrieval of data without the optic input, two Form C and 2NO
8
provides complete and reliable need of a computer. Fourteen (14) output programmable contacts, and
motor protection, monitoring, programmable LEDs provide quick one Form C healthy contact. It also
diagnostics, metering and starting indication of relay status. has four 420 mA analog outputs and
9
control functions. one zone interlocking card. The relay
A front port is provided for direct provides maximum user flexibility
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay computer connection. An RS-485 to configure the I/O. All inputs and to
10
has removable terminal blocks, and it communication port on the back is
has Modbus RTU communications as outputs (except the healthy output)
standard for local area networking are user-programmable. The unit
standard; and an optional Ethernet using Modbus-RTU. An optional also counts with a test mode to force
11
port for Modbus TCP communications Ethernet port and protocols
or IEC 61850. outputs and simulate currents, to
are available. facilitate the commissioning of the 12
unit. It can be powered from 19 Vdc
to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac
auxiliary power. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 068
General DescriptionEMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay
Features Apparent and displacement power Diagnostic

i factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2]) Broken rotor bar (Beta version)
Protection Forward and reverse watts (32[1],
Thermal protection (49/51) 32[2], 32[3]) Communication
ii Locked rotor protection (49S/51) Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1], Local HMI
32V[2], 32V[3]) Password protected
Phase overcurrent elements:
1 Lockout protection (86) Addressable
Two instantaneous elements with
timers (50P[1], 50P[2] and 50P[3]) Breaker failure (50BF) IRIG-B
Three inverse time overcurrent Zone interlocking for bus Local communication port
2 elements (51P[1], 51P[2] protection (87B) Remote communication port:
and 51P[3]) Metering RS-232
3 11 standard curves Amperes: positive, negative and RS-485
Instantaneous or time delay reset zero sequence Protocols:
Ground overcurrent elements: Volts: positive, negative and
4 Two instantaneous measured zero sequence
Modbus-RTU (optional)
Modbus-TCP (optional)
elements with timers (50X[1] Phase angles
IEC-61850 (optional)
5 and 50X[2]) Volt-amperes and VA demand
Two instantaneous calculated Watts and kW demand Configuration software
elements with timers (50R[1] kWh (forward, reverse, net)
6 and 50R[2]) VARs and kVAR demand
Control Functions
Transition for reduced voltage starts
Two inverse time overcurrent kVARh (lead, leg and net)
measured elements (51X[1] Incomplete sequence delay
7 and 51X[2])
Power factor
Permits numbers of cold starts
Frequency
Two inverse time overcurrent Limits numbers of starts per hour
% THD V and I
8 calculated elements (51R[1]
Anti-backspin time delay
and 51R[2]) Mechanical load shedding
11 standard curves Minimum/maximum recording
Zero speed switch for long
9 Instantaneous or time delay reset Trending (load profile over time) acceleration motors
Minimum/maximum recording Motor stop inputs
Jam or Stall protection (50J[1]
Temperature with remote
10 and 50J[2])
URTD module
Remote trip input
Phase unbalance negative sequence Differential trip input
overcurrent (46[1] and 46[2]) Monitoring Emergency override
11 Underload protection (37[1], Trip coil monitor Breaker/contactor open-close/
37[2], 37[3]) Breaker wear primary and secondary stop-start
Temperature protection with (accumulated interrupted current) Remote open-close (stop-start)
12 optional URTD (49/38) Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Programmable I/O
Stars per hour (66) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Programmable LEDs
13 Switch onto fault protection Sequence of events report (up to Programmable logic
Phase voltage unbalance and 300 events) Multiple setting groups
sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Trending (load profile over time)
14 Main three-phase under/overvoltage Motor history
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
Records the last five motor
Auxiliary single-phase under/
15 overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2],
start profiles
Motor start trending
59A[1], 59A[2])
CT supervision
16 Six frequency elements that can be
VT supervision
assigned to: overfrequency, under-
frequency, rate of change or vector Clock (1 ms time stamping)
17 surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
81[5], 81[6])
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 069
Table 4.2-13. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-4000 Motor Relay Removable Terminals
i
EMR-4000 A 0 B A 1
ii
A = Eight digital inputs, five Hardware Option 2
Communication
Conformal Coating
Options
zone interlocking, URTD ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount
interface, IRIG-B, small display
B = Eight digital inputs, 11 outputs,
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
B = Modbus-RTU B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
2
(RS-485)
removable terminals, 40250 Vac H = IEC-61850
zone interlocking, URTD 1 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, I = Modbus-RTU
interface, IRIG-B, large sensitive ground (RS-485) + 3
display current, 0.5 A/0.1 A, Modbus-TCP
power supply range: (RJ-45)
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
4
- Protocols: DNP3.0, PROFIBUS 5
Protection and Control Functions The motor thermal model is analogous Ground Fault Protection 6
to a bucket that is being filled and A separate measuring circuit is used
Eatons EMR-4000 motor protection drained at the same time. The fill rate
relay has been designed for maximum to measure ground current. A ground
is dependent on the motor currents CT is recommended for more sensitive 7
and the drain is based on motor protection against winding insulation
permits running the motor close to its design principles. The size of the
design limits while protecting it against breakdown to ground. The relay
excessive heating and damaging
bucket is equivalent to the thermal ground circuit can be connected 8
capacity associated with the mass of residually from the three-phase CTs.
overload conditions. The EMR-4000 the motor. Intel-I-Trip integrates these
field-proven protection algorithms The ground fault protection has
were developed based on motor
rates and will issue a trip when the pickup and time delay set points 9
thermal capacity is filled. or can be disabled.
designs and operating parameters
for optimum operation and protection Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip Jam Protection 10
while minimizing nuisance tripping. characteristics that adjust the trip
The EMR-4000 motor protection The user-selectable jam function
times based on measured motor
relay uses a protection algorithm protects motors that are running
and measurement technique based
temperature when RTDs are used.
against a sudden mechanical jam 11
on proven positive and negative Instantaneous Overcurrent or stall condition. The common
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay application is on motors used on
(unbalance) sequence current sampling
and true rms calculations. provides an instantaneous phase crushers, chippers or conveyors. It 12
overcurrent function to trip the detects an increase of motor current
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection motor for high fault current levels to a level above full load. Pickup, start
The EMR-4000 motor relay features and to save the fuses. This function and run timers, and a second element 13
the exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip can be disabled and has an adjustable for alarm purposes are provided.
intelligent overload protection time delay on starting to avoid Underload/Underpower Protection 14
system. Intel-I-Trip develops custom nuisance tripping on inrush.
overload curves simply from motor The user-selectable underload/
nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip protects Phase Unbalance Protection underpower function is used to detect
motors from potentially damaging Motor supply circuits are often fed the loss of load on the motor. Coupling 15
overload and abnormal operating through fuses and can be run with a failure is a common cause for loss of
single-phase fuse blown, referred load. Whenever possible, it is better to
conditions. The Intel-I-Trip intelligent
overload protection feature uses field to as single-phasing the motor. The use underpower to detect loss of load. 16
proven measurement techniques and a EMR-4000 motor protection relay Three power elements and two under-
measures the current and voltage load elements are provided in the relay
motor thermal protection model.
unbalance and either can be used to for tripping and alarm purposes. 17
The EMR-4000 motor relays unique
measurement technique samples the alarm or trip the motor before damage Pickup, start and run timers are
provided for each element.
current waveforms 36 times per cycle, occurs. The EMR-4000 has two voltage
and two current unbalance elements.
18
providing accurate measurements Frequency Protection
of the positive and negative sequence Pickup, start and run timers are
The frequency elements provide the
currents. The negative sequence provided for each element.
ability to detect when the motor is 19
current causes a greater heating effect
operating at off-nominal frequencies
on the rotor and has a greater impact
that can do damage to the process
or, to signal to upstream protections 20
Intel-I-Trip uses these measurements
or controls to implement load
in its motor model to safely protect the
shedding actions.
motor against the heating effects of 21
these currents.

Sheet 04 070
Power Factor Protection Long Acceleration Motors Diagnostic Features

i This protection is used in synchronous Large motors with a high inertia may
motors applications to detect out-of- experience starting currents that Broken Rotor Bar (Beta Version)
synchronism conditions. exceed the locked rotor current and The EMR-4000 provides advanced
ii time. The EMR-4000 motor protection motor diagnostics including a broken
Undervoltage/Overvoltage Protection relay has logic and provisions for a rotor bar detection function. The
Use the voltage protective functions zero speed switch input to differentiate broken rotor bar detection is a
1 to detect abnormal system voltage between a stall and start condition. If condition maintenance function that
conditions that are potentially the motor is spinning, then the relay continuously monitors the motors
hazardous to the motor. will not trip on the normal locked rotor health while in operation. The
2 time allowing the motor to start. advanced Motor Current Signature
Reduced Voltage Starting Analysis (MCSA) continuously
The EMR-4000 motor protection relay Remote/Differential Trip analyzes the motor current signature
3 provides a transition and an incom- The digital inputs can be programmed and based on preset algorithms it will
plete sequence function for reduced to accept a contact input from a determine when a broken rotor bar is
voltage starting. The user can select separate differential relay or other present in the motor.
4 to transition based on the current device to trip the motor. This provides
level and/or on time. local and remote target information The broken rotor bar function will
and uses the trip contacts of the provide early detection of any rotor
5 Antibackspin EMR-4000 motor protection relay. It problems and advise maintenance per-
The stop function is programmable will also record and log the motor sonnel of the impending issue, allow-
from 220%. For certain applications, information at the time of the trip. ing for predictive maintenance
6 such as pumping a fluid up a pipe, of the motor and for prevention of
the motor may be driven backward Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor catastrophic motor failures.
for a period of time after it stops. The EMR-4000 motor protection relay
7 The EMR-4000 relay provides an includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
By providing early indication of
antibackspin timer to prevent starting potential rotor problems, serious
function that can be initiated from
the motor while it is spinning in the system issues such as: reduced
either an internal or external trip
8 reverse direction. The timer begins signal. This is an independent element
starting torque, overloads, torque
counting from the moment a stop is and speed oscillation and bearing
that can be used to operate a lockout
declared by the relay. wear can be avoided. With the
relay or trip an upstream breaker. The
9 timer must be longer than the breaker
advanced broken rotor bar detection
Start Control Timers system, advanced warning of
operating time and the protective
Motors typically have limits to the impending problems reduces
function reset times.
10 number of cold starts, starts per hour catastrophic failures, maximizing
period or time between starts that Flexible Phase Rotation motor life and system uptime.
are permitted without damage. The EMR-4000 motor protection
11 The EMR-4000 motor protection relay can be applied on either an Monitoring and Metering
relay incorporates these timers to A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation.
prevent starting the motor beyond Sequence of Events Records
A user setting permits correct
12 its capabilities. operation and indication of the The EMR-4000 protection relay
actual system configuration. records a maximum of 300 events
Load Shedding associated with the relay. An event is
13 The EMR-4000 motor protection relay Maintenance Mode classified
provides a mechanical load shedding The Maintenance Mode can improve as a change of state as detected by
feature that can be used to control an safety by providing a simple and the relay. These include relay pickups,
14 upstream process. The load-shedding reliable method to reduce fault dropouts, trips, contact closure,
function closes a contact on an over- clearing time and to lower incident alarms, setting changes and self-
load condition to control an upstream energy levels at energized panels. diagnostic failures. Each event is date
15 process from adding more load until The Maintenance Mode allows the and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution.
the overload condition is gone. user to switch to more sensitive The events are stored in a FIFO in
settings via a password protected chronological order.
16 Emergency Override soft key, communication or via a
The EMR-4000 motor protection Trip Log
digital Input while maintenance work
relay has a user-programmable is being performed at an energized The EMR-4000 protection relay will
17 feature that will let the operator panel or device. The more sensitive store a maximum of 20 trip records in
reset the start inhibitor timers and settings provide greater security for a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
thermal overload bucket. This function maintenance personnel and help to be date and time stamped to a 1 ms
18 is intended for use in emergency reduce the possibility of injury. resolution. The trip log record will
conditions only, and it may result in include information on the type of
motor damage or failure. fault, protection elements that
19 operated, fault location and currents
and voltages at the time of the fault.
20
21

Sheet 04 071
Waveform Capture Starting Profiles Programmable I/O

The EMR-4000 motor protection relay The EMR-4000 records the average The EMR-4000 motor protection i
provides oscillography-recording current versus time for the last five relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated,
capabilities. The relay will record starting cycles. This information is 2NO and one Form C contacts.
all measured signals along with the available via the communications One isolated input can be used for ii
binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and port through PowerPort-E. monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C
contact closures. The EMR-4000 relay contact is dedicated to the relay failure
can record up to 6000 cycles of data. Motor Statistics alarm function and is operated in a 1
The number of records is proportional For each motor start, the EMR-3000 normally energized (failsafe) mode.
to the size of each record; the maxi- stores a motor start report and adds There are 4 eight user-configurable
mum size per record is 600 cycles. The this data to the motor statistics buffer. discrete inputs that accept a wet 2
waveform capture is initiated by up With the motor statistics you can contact and can operate through a
to eight different triggers; it can also track motor start data for the past wide range of power. Each input
be generated manually through the 18 30-day periods. For each 30-day and output is user-programmable 3
display or via communications. interval, the relay records the for maximum application flexibility.
following information:
Integral User Interface Programmable Logic 4
The date the interval began
The front panel user interface has a The EMR-4000 motor protection relay
128 x 64 pixel LCD display with back- The total number of starts in provides logic gates and timers that
ground illumination for wide angle the interval the user can customize for special or 5
viewing in all light conditions. Seven The averages of the following unique applications. Each gate can
programmable LEDs provide quick quantities: be assigned a logic function of either
and easy visual display of power Motor start time AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate 6
on, mode of operation, alarm and trip can have a maximum of four input
Start % rotor thermal
indication. Soft keys are provided for signals and each input signal can be
operating mode selection, scrolling capacity used required to be a NOT. Input signals 7
through data and settings. In addition, Maximum start current can be external inputs received via
the relay settings and test functions the binary inputs or internal values
are password protected.
Load Profiling/Trending associated with the protection, alarm
8
The EMR-4000 relay automatically or metering set points. Each gate has
records selected quantities into a unique output assignment and
non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, designation that can be used as the
9
30 or 60 minutes, depending on the input to another gate. There are
trending report setting. 80 independent timers that have
adjustable pickup and dropout
10
delay settings.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.2-9. Visual Logic Editor 19
20
21

Sheet 04 072
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 073
downloaded from the Eaton Web site It provides additional functions such as i
at www.eaton.com/pr. billing, trending and graphics. Contact
communication software. The first your local Eaton representative for more
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or a The second package is Power Xpert information on Power Xpert Software. ii
laptop for easy access to a single relay Software. Power Xpert Software is a
to change set points or configuration power management software package
and to view metered values and stored that is designed for continuous, 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 074

1 of supply failure: 50 ms at minimal aux. Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY.
Un = 48 V/60 Vdc
7 Power
at In = 1 A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5 A, S = 0.15 mVA
8 Ground
ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005 Fiber Optic
at In = 5 A, S = 0.35 mVA Master/slave: Slave
9 0.3 A DC at 300 V
Connection: ST-plug
Switching capacity: 1250 VA URTD-Interface
Contact type: Form C or normally open contact Connection: Versatile link
Climatic Environmental Conditions
Storage temperature: 30 C to +70 C
11 (22 F to +158 F)
(4 F to +140 F)
12 Permissible humidity
Permissible
13 installation altitude: <2000 m (6561.67 ft)
above sea level
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
14 altitude applies, a changed
may be necessary.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 075
EMR-5000 The maintenance mode password The EMR-5000 motor protection relay
i
protected soft key can be used for has mass memory for data storage
Motor Protection Relay arc flash mitigation to change to an and a real-time clock with 1 ms time
alternate settings group, set to have resolution. The relay will log 300
instantaneous elements only. The sequence of event records, 20 detailed ii
multiple setting groups can also be trip logs, minimum/maximum values,
changed via communications or a load profiles, the 5 latest start profiles,
digital input. Flash memory is used for motor trending, breaker/contactor 1
the programming and all settings are wear information and waveform data.
stored in nonvolatile memory.
The EMR-5000 has either eight 2
An integral keypad and display is programmable binary inputs, two
provided for direct user programming analog inputs, two analog outputs, or
and retrieval of data without the 16 programmable binary inputs. It has 3
need of a computer. Fourteen (14) two normally opened and six Form C
programmable LEDs provide quick heavy-duty outputs and one Form C
indication of relay status. signal alarm relay. The relay provides 4
maximum user flexibility to configure
EMR-5000 A front port is provided for direct the I/O. All inputs and outputs
and an Ethernet port in the back are
(except the healthy output) are user- 5
General Description programmable. The unit also counts
optional for local area networking use. with a test mode to force outputs and
Eatons EMR-5000 motor protection Optional Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP or
relay is a multifunctional micro- IEC 61850 protocols are supported.
simulate currents to facilitate the 6
processor-based protective relay for commissioning of the unit. It can be
the protection of any size motor at all The EMR-5000 motor protection powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or
voltage levels. It is most commonly relay includes programmable logic 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power. 7
applied on medium voltage or larger functions. Logic gates and timers
motors. The EMR-5000 relay is a may be defined and arranged for
current and voltage device with customized applications. With the 8
built-in differential protection that programmable logic control functions
provides complete and reliable motor you can simplify the complexity of
protection, monitoring, diagnostics, your starting schemes by eliminating 9
metering and starting control functions. timers and auxiliary relays. Flash
memory is used for the programming
The EMR-5000 motor protection relay and all settings are stored in non- 10
provides complete current, voltage volatile memory. The relay allows for
and frequency protection in a single four preprogrammed setting groups,
compact case. The relay has eight which can be activated through 11
current inputs rated for either 5 A or software, manually or contact input.
1 A and four voltage inputs. Three
of the voltage inputs are to be 12
connected to the three-phase power
voltage for voltage protection and
for metering. They can be connected 13
in wye-ground or open delta
configuration. The fourth voltage is
for independent single-phase under- 14
voltage/overvoltage protection. The
unit is user programmable for 60 Hz
or 50 Hz operation. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 076
Features Forward and reverse watts (32[1], Communication

i 32[2], 32[3]) Local HMI
Protection Forward and reverse VArs (32V[1], Password protected
Motor differential protection (87M) 32V[2], 32V[3])
ii Thermal protection (49/51) Lockout protection (86)
Addressable
IRIG-B
Locked rotor protection (49S/51) Breaker failure (50BF)
1 Phase overcurrent elements: Zone interlocking for bus
Two instantaneous elements with protection (87B)
RS-232
timers (50P[1], 50P[2], and 50P[3]) Metering
2 Three inverse time overcurrent
RS-485
Amperes: positive, negative and
elements (51P[1], 51P[2], and zero sequence Protocols:
3 51P[3]) Volts: positive, negative and zero Modbus RTU (optional)
11 standard curves sequence Modbus TCP (optional)
Instantaneous or time delay reset Differential current IEC 61850 (optional)
4 Ground overcurrent elements: Volt-amperes and VA demand
Configuration software
Two instantaneous measured Watts and kW demand
5 elements with timers (50X[1], kWh (forward, reverse, net) Control Functions
and 50X[2]) VARs and kVAR demand Transition for reduced voltage starts
Two instantaneous calculated kVARh (lead, leg and net) Incomplete sequence delay
6 elements with timers (50R[1], Power factor Permits numbers of cold starts
and 50R[2])
Frequency Limits numbers of starts per hour
7 measured elements (51X[1],
% THD V and I Anti-backspin time delay
Magnitude THD V and I Mechanical load shedding
and 51X[2])
Minimum/maximum recording Zero speed switch for long
8 Two inverse time overcurrent
acceleration motors
calculated elements (51R[1], Trending (load profile over time)
Motor stop inputs
and 51R[2]) Minimum/maximum recording
9 11 standard curves Temperature with remote Remote trip input
URTD module Emergency override
Breaker/contactor open-close/
10 Jam or Stall protection (50J[1], Monitoring stop-start
50J[2]) Trip coil monitor Remote open-close (stop-start)
Phase unbalance negative sequence Breaker wear primary and
11 Programmable I/O
overcurrent (46[1], 46[2])) secondary (accumulated
Programmable LEDs
Underload protection (37[1], 37[2]) interrupted current)
Programmable logic
Temperature protection with Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
12 optional URTD (49/38) Multiple setting groups
Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
Stars per hour (66) Sequence of events report (up to
13 Switch onto fault protection 300 events)
Phase voltage unbalance and Trending (load profile over time)
sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Motor history
14 Main three-phase under/overvoltage Records the last 5 motor
(27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) start profiles
15 Auxiliary single-phase under/over- Motor start trending
voltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], CT supervision
59A[2])
VT supervision
16 Six frequency elements that can be
Clock (1 ms time stamping)
assigned to: over frequency, under
frequency, rate of change, or vector Diagnostic
17 surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
Broken rotor bar (Beta version)
81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement
18 power factor (55A[1], 55A[2],
55D[1], 55D[2])
19
20
21

Sheet 04 077
Table 4.2-15. Catalog Numbering Selection for EMR-5000 Motor Relay

i
EMR-5000 A 0 B A 1
ii
A = 16 digital inputs, 9 outputs, Hardware Option 2
Communication
Conformal Coating
Options
zone interlocking, URTD 0 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, 1 = Projection
interface, IRIG-B, large display ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount
B = 8 digital inputs, 9 outputs,
2 analog inputs and 2 analog
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
B = Modbus RTU B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
2
(RS-485)
outputs, zone interlocking, 40250 Vac H = IEC 61850
URTD interface, IRIG-B, 1 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, (Goose)
large display sensitive ground I = Modbus RTU 3
current, 0.5 A/0.1 A, (RS-485) +
power supply range: Modbus TCP
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
(RJ-45) 4
5
Protection and Control Functions motor against the heating effects of Phase Unbalance Protection 6
these currents. Motor supply circuits are often fed
Eatons EMR-5000 motor protection
relay has been designed for maximum The motor thermal model is analogous through fuses and can be run with a 7
motor operation and protection. It to a bucket that is being filled and single-phase fuse blown, referred to
permits running the motor close to drained at the same time. The fill rate as single phasing the motor. The
its design limits while protecting is dependent on the motor currents EMR-5000 motor protection relay 8
it against excessive heating and and the drain is based on motor measures the current and voltage
damaging overload conditions. The design principles. The size of the unbalance and either can be used to
EMR-5000 field proven protection bucket is equivalent to the thermal alarm or trip the motor before damage 9
algorithms were developed based capacity associated with the mass of occurs.The EMR-5000 has two voltage
on motor designs and operating the motor. Intel-I-Trip integrates these and two current unbalance elements.
parameters for optimum operation rates and will issue a trip when the Pickup, start and run timers are 10
and protection while minimizing thermal capacity is filled. provided for each element.
nuisance tripping. The EMR-5000 Ground Fault Protection
motor protection relay utilizes a Intel-I-Trip features adaptive trip
A separate measuring circuit is used to
11
patented protection algorithm and characteristics that adjust the trip
measurement technique based times based on measured motor measure ground current. A ground CT
on proven positive and negative temperature when RTDs are used. is recommended for more sensitive 12
(unbalance) sequence current protection against winding insulation
Instantaneous Overcurrent breakdown to ground. The relay
sampling and true RMS calculations.
The EMR-5000 motor protection relay ground circuit can be connected 13
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Protection provides an instantaneous phase residually from the three-phase CTs.
The EMR-5000 motor relay features the overcurrent function to trip the motor The ground fault protection has
exclusive Eaton Intel-I-Trip intelligent for high fault current levels and save pickup and time delay set points or 14
overload protection system. Intel-I-Trip the fuses. This function can be can be disabled.
develops custom overload curves disabled and has an adjustable time
Jam Protection
simply from motor nameplate data. delay on starting to avoid nuisance
tripping on inrush. The user-selectable Jam function
15
Intel-I-Trip protects motors from poten-
tially damaging overload and abnormal protects motors that are running
Differential Protection against a sudden mechanical jam
operating conditions.The Intel-I-Trip
This protection function is mostly used or stall condition. The common
16
intelligent overload protection feature
utilizes field proven measurement to protect induction and synchronous application is on motors used on
techniques and a patented motor motors against phase-to-phase faults. crushers, chippers or conveyors. It 17
thermal protection model. The Differential protection may be detects an increase of motor current
EMR-5000 motor relays unique considered the first line of protection to a level above full load. Pickup, start
measurement technique samples the for internal phase to phase or phase and run timers and a second element 18
current waveforms 36 times per cycle, to ground faults. In the event of such for alarm purposes are provided.
providing accurate measurements of faults, the quick response of the
the positive and negative sequence differential element may limit the
damage that may have otherwise
19
currents. The negative sequence
current causes a greater heating effect occurred to the motor. While this
on the rotor and has a greater impact protection is recommended in all 20
on the thermal model in the relay. motors above 1500 hp, it can be
Intel-I-Trip utilizes these measurements used in smaller motors depending
in its motor model to safely protect the primarily in the importance and the 21
cost of the motor.

Sheet 04 078
Underload/Underpower Protection Load Shedding Maintenance Mode

i The user-selectable underload/ The EMR-5000 motor protection relay The Maintenance Mode can improve
underpower function is used to detect provides a mechanical load shedding safety by providing a simple and reli-
the loss of load on the motor. Coupling feature that can be used to control an able method to reduce fault clearing
ii failure is a common cause for loss of upstream process. The load-shedding time and lower incident energy levels
load. Whenever is possible, it is better function closes a contact on an over- at energized panels. The Maintenance
to use underpower to detect loss of load condition to control an upstream Mode allows the user to switch to
1 load. Three power elements and two process from adding more load until more sensitive settings via a password
underload elements are provided in the overload condition is gone. protected soft key, communication or
the relay for tripping and alarm via a digital input while maintenance
2 purposes. Pickup, start and run timers Emergency Override work is being performed at an
are provided for each element. The EMR-5000 motor protection relay energized panel or device. The more
has a user-programmable feature that sensitive settings provide greater
3 Frequency Protection will let the operator reset the start security for maintenance personnel
The frequency elements provide the inhibitor timers and thermal overload and helps reduce the possibility
ability to detect when the motor is bucket. This function is intended for of injury.
4 operating at off-nominal frequencies use in emergency conditions only,
that can do damage to the process and it may result in motor damage Diagnostic Features
or to signal to upstream protections or failure.
5 or controls to implement load Broken Rotor Bar (Beta Version)
shedding actions. Long Acceleration Motors
The EMR-5000 provides advanced
Large motors with a high inertia may motor diagnostics including a broken
6 Power Factor Protection experience starting currents that rotor bar detection function. The
This protection is used in synchronous exceed the locked rotor current and broken rotor bar detection is a
motor applications to detect out-of- time. The EMR-5000 motor protection condition maintenance function that
7 synchronism conditions. relay has logic and provisions for a continuously monitors the motors
zero speed switch input to differentiate health while in operation. The
Undervoltage/Overvoltage Protection between a stall and start condition. If
8 advanced Motor Current Signature
Use the voltage protective functions the motor is spinning, then the relay Analysis (MCSA) continuously
to detect abnormal system voltage will not trip on the normal locked rotor analyzes the motor current signature
conditions potentially hazardous to time allowing the motor to start.
9 the motor.
and based on preset algorithms will
determine when a broken rotor bar is
Remote/Differential Trip
Reduced Voltage Starting present in the motor.
The digital inputs can be programmed
10 The EMR-5000 motor protection relay to accept a contact input from a The broken rotor bar function will
provides a transition and incomplete separate differential relay or other provide early detection of any rotor
sequence function for reduced device to trip the motor. This provides problems and advise maintenance
11 voltage starting. The user can select local and remote target information personnel of the impending issue,
to transition based on the current and utilizes the trip contacts of the allowing for predictive maintenance
level and/or on time. EMR-5000 motor protection relay. It of the motor and prevention of
12 will also record and log the motor catastrophic motor failures.
Antibackspin information at the time of the trip.
The stop function is programmable By providing early indication of
13 from 2 to 20%. For certain applications, Breaker Failure or Stuck Contactor potential rotor problems, serious
such as pumping a fluid up a pipe, the The EMR-5000 motor protection relay system issues such as reduced
motor may be driven backward for includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) starting torque, overloads, torque
14 a period of time after it stops. The function that can be initiated from and speed oscillation, and bearing
EMR-5000 relay provides an antiback- either an internal or external trip wear can be avoided. With the
spin timer to prevent starting the motor signal. This is an independent element advanced broken rotor bar detection
15 while it is spinning in the reverse that can be used to operate a lockout system, advanced warning of
direction. The timer begins counting relay or trip an upstream breaker. The impending problems reduces
from the moment a stop is declared by timer must be longer than the breaker catastrophic failures, maximizing
16 the relay. operating time and the protective motor life and system uptime.
Start Control Timers
17 Motors typically have limits to the Flexible Phase Rotation
number of cold starts, starts per hour The EMR-5000 motor protection relay
period, or time between starts that can be applied on either an A-B-C or
18 are permitted without damage. A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
The EMR-5000 motor protection permits correct operation and
relay incorporates these timers to indication of the actual system
19 prevent starting the motor beyond configuration.
its capabilities.
20
21

Sheet 04 079
Monitoring and Metering Integral User Interface Programmable I/O

The front panel user interface has The EMR-5000 motor protection relay i
Sequence of Events Records a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, 2
The EMR-5000 protection relay background illumination for wide normally open and 1 Form C contacts.
records a maximum of 300 events angle viewing in all light conditions. One isolated input can be used for ii
associated with the relay. An event is Seven programmable LEDs provide monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C
classified as a change of state as quick and easy visual display of power contact is dedicated to the relay failure
detected by the relay. These include on, mode of operation, alarm and trip alarm function and is operated in a 1
relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact indication. Soft keys are provided for normally energized (failsafe) mode.
closure, alarms, setting changes and operation mode selection, scrolling There are 4 eight user-configurable
self-diagnostic failures. Each event is through data and settings. In addition, discrete inputs that accept a wet 2
date and time stamped to a 1 ms the relay settings and test functions contact and can operate through
resolution. The events are stored in a are password protected. a wide range of power. Each input
FIFO in chronological order. and output is user-programmable for 3
Starting Profiles maximum application flexibility.
Trip Log The EMR-5000 records the average
The EMR-5000 protection relay will current versus time for the last five Programmable Logic 4
store a maximum of 20 trip records in starting cycles. This information is The EMR-5000 motor protection relay
a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will available via the communications provides logic gates and timers that
be date and time stamped to a 1 ms port through PowerPort-E. the user can customize for special or 5
resolution. The trip log record will unique applications. Each gate can be
include information on the type of Motor Statistics assigned a logic function of either
fault, protection elements that For each motor start, the EMR-5000 AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate 6
operated, fault location and currents stores a motor start report and add can have a maximum of four input
and voltages at the time of the fault. this data to the motor statistics buffer. signals and each input signal can be
With the motor statistics you can track required to be a NOT. Input signals 7
Waveform Capture motor start data for the past eighteen can be external inputs received via
The EMR-5000 motor protection relay 30-day periods. For each 30-day the binary inputs or internal values
provides oscillography-recording interval, the relay records the associated with the protection, alarm
8
capabilities. The relay will record all following information: or metering set points. Each gate has
measured signals along with the a unique output assignment and
binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and The date the interval began
designation that can be used as the
9
contact closures. The EMR-5000 relay The total number of starts in the input to another gate.
can record up to 6000 cycles of data. interval
The number of records is proportional The averages of the following
10
to the size of each record; the maxi- quantities:
mum size per record is 600 cycles. The Motor start time
waveform capture is initiated by up 11
Start % rotor
to 8 different triggers; it can also be
generated manually through the thermal capacity used
display or via communications. Maximum start current 12
Load Profiling/Trending
The EMR-5000 relay automatically 13
records selected quantities into non-
volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or
60 minutes, depending on the trending 14
report setting.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 080
ii
7 Figure 4.2-13. Programmable Logic
8 8.16
(207.2)
7.76
9 (197.2)
7.17 B Holes for
(182.0) Projection
10 6.00 Panelmount
(152.4)
A Holes for
CL
11 B
Standard
Panelmount
B A
12 A A
Cutout 4.88
13 (124.0)
7.12 B 6.30
CL
(180.8) B (160.0)
14
6.64
(168.6)
15 A
A
B A
16 B
6x 0.19
6x 0.19 (4.8)
17 (4.8)
Figure 4.2-14. Drilling Plan

18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 081
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 4.2-15. Typical AC Connections. Wye VTs, 5A CTs, and Ground Current Measured by Residual Connection
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 082
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 Figure 4.2-17. Typical Control Diagram

Sheet 04 083
Communication Software downloaded from the Eaton Web site Power Xpert provides additional
at www.eaton.com/pr. functions such as billing, trending i
and graphics. Contact your local Eaton
communication software. The first is The second package is Power Xpert representative for more information
PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or laptop Software, which is a power manage- on Power Xpert Software. ii
for easy access to a single relay to ment software package that is
change set points or configuration and designed for continuous, remote
to view metered values and stored monitoring of many devices. 1
data. PowerPort-E is free and can be
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 084

1 of supply failure: M 50 ms at minimal aux. Drop-out time: ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY.
voltage; interrupted Shorted inputs: <30 ms Zone out:
communication Open inputs: <90 ms Output voltage (high): 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
is permitted Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
2 Max. permissible making current: Zone in:
18 A peak value for <0.25 ms Nominal input voltage: +5 Vdc
12 A peak value for <1 ms Max. input voltage: +5.5 Vdc
Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc
(approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV AC
3.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm (to ground and other IO)
4 (approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14 Connection: Screw-type terminals
(twisted pair)
5 Power Consumption Relay Outputs Front Interface RS-232

Power Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
supply range: 24270 Vdc: 7 W idle mode/ Max. make current: 25 A AC/25 A DC for 4 s Handshake: RTS and CTS
approx. 13 W max. power 30 A/230 Vac according to Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
6 48230 Vac: 7 VA idle mode/ ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005
approx. 13 VA max. power 30 A/250 Vac according to RS-485
(for frequencies of 5060 Hz) ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005
Master/slave: Slave
7 Power
RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
at In = 1 A, S = 0.15 mVA Continuous current: 5 A AC/DC
at In = 5 A, S = 0.15 mVA Contact type: Form C or normally open contact
8 Ground Terminals: Screw-type terminals
Fiber Optic
9 Connection: ST-plug
URTD-Interface
Connection: Versatile link
10
11 (22 F to +158 F)
(4 F to +140 F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 085
General DescriptionUniversal RTD
Universal RTD Module temperature converter, communicating Table 4.2-17. Catalog Numbers
i
the measured RTD values as Modbus Description Catalog
RTU data over RS-485, or the URTD Number
can be used to communicate the
measured temperature values directly Universal RTD Module
48250 AC/DC
UTRDII-01 ii
via a fiber optic cable with a maximum
distance of 400 ft (122 m) to one of Universal RTD Module URTDII-02
Eatons protection relays where alarm
2448 Vdc
1
and trip thresholds can be set. The
URTD module can be used with any Technical Data and Specifications
one of Eatons FP-6000, MP-3000,
2
MP-4000, IQ-1000, EMR-3000,
EMR-4000, EMR-5000, ETR-4000, Height: 7.77 (197.4)
ETR-5000, EGR-4000 or EGR-5000 Width: 4.35 (110.4) 3
protection relays. Depth: 2.00 (50.8)
The URTD module can be used to Communications 4

monitor up to 12 RTD inputs (either Eatons URTD module stores all
two- or three-wire RTD lead type) measured temperature values in
four groups consisting of six motor standard Modbus register format 5
windings, two motor bearings, two available over Modbus RTU
load bearings and two auxiliary. The communication via the RS-485 port.
Universal RTD Module
URTD module can be programmed to Additionally, the URTD can directly 6
accept any of the following types of
General Description RTD inputs as long as each RTD group
communicate via fiber optic cable to
Eatons protection relays.
Eatons Universal Resistance uses a consistent RTD input type (for 7
Temperature Detector module example, the motor winding RTDs
(URTD) is an electronic temperature must all be of type 10 ohm copper and
monitoring device used to measure the motor bearing RTDs must both be 8
transformer, motor or generator of type 100 ohm platinum): 10 ohm
embedded RTDs. The URTD can copper, 100 ohm platinum, and 100
be used as a stand-alone RTD and 120 ohm nickel. 9
10
Control Power
Transformer
Universal 11
RTD Module
URTD II +

+

+

*

$ % &
12
J10A
1 PWR IN 1 + + +
2 PWR IN 2 120 Vac *
$ % &
Fuse
MP-XXXX
23 13
22
21
25
20
19 14
18
24
17
1
Fiber 16
Optic 2
3
15 15
14
4
Non-Current 5
13
Carrying Gnd. 12
6
7
11 16
8
9
Optical Fiber for URTD

10
17
Customer Remote
Communications to Input Contacts
Protective Relay or Pushbuttons
(Preferred Method, 18
120 m Distance Maximum)
19
Figure 4.2-19. MP-3000 and URTD Wiring
20
21

Sheet 04 086
Technical DataUniversal RTD
i
MTG
Serial No.:XXXX-MMYY
H.W.: X.XX F.W.: X.XX
Style No.: 66D2235GXX
Cat No.: URTDII-XX
ii
1 Universal RTD Module II
2
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
3 1
2
4 1
2
3
5 4
0N
12
5
6
7.40 7.77
S1
Universal RTD Module
6 7 (188.0) URTD-II (197.4)
J10A
1 PWR IN 1
8 2 PWR IN 2
1
9 1 RTD12-/AUX2- RTD6C/MW6C 21
7 10 2
3
RTD12+/AUX2+
RTD12C/AUX2C
RTD6+/MW6+
RTD6-/MW6-
20
19
11 4 Shield Shield 18
5 RTD11-/AUX1- RTD5C/MW5C 17
12 6 RTD11+/AUX1+ RTD5+/MW5+ 16
8 13 7
8
RTD11C/AUX1C
RTD10-/LB2-
RTD5-/MW5-
RTD4C/MW4/C
15
14
14 9 RTD10+/LB2+ RTD4+/MW4+ 13
10 RTD10C/LB2C RTD4-/MW4- 12
J10B
15
J2
11 Shield Shield 11
9 16 12
13
RTD9-/LB1-
RTD9+/LB1+
RTD3C/MW3C
RTD3+/MW3+
10
9
17 14 RTD9C/LB1C RTD3-/MW3- 8
15 RTD8-/MB2- RTD2C/MW2C 7
18
10 19
16
17
RTD8+/MB2+
RTD8C/MB2C
RTD2+/MW2+
RTD2-/MW2-
6
5
18 Shield RS-485 Shield 4
20 19 RTD7-/MB1- MODBUS RTD1C/MW1C 3
21 0.20 20 RTD7+/MB1+ J11 RTD1+/MW1+ 2
11 (5.08) 21 RTD7C/MB1C S2 RTD1-/MW1- 1
Shield
COM
0N
Fiber
B
A
1 2 3 4 Optic MTG
1 8
12 0.20
(5.1)
3.20
13 2.00
(50.8) (81.3)
3.60
(91.4)
14 4.35
(110.4)
15
Figure 4.2-20. MP-3000 URTD MountingDimensions in Inches (mm
16 RTD Sensor Input Types: URTD Module Communications
10 ohm copper Fiber optic cable:
100 ohm nickel
17 120 ohm nickel Length Catalog Number
100 ohm platinum 1 MPFO-1
5 MPFO-5
18 10 MPFO-10
25 MPFO-25
50 MPFO-50
19 75 MPFO-75
100 MPFO-120
20
21

October 2015 Transformer Protection
Sheet 04 087
General DescriptionETR-4000
ETR-4000 Transformer The ETR-4000 transformer protection Two inverse time overcurrent
relay has a mass memory for data calculated elements (51R[1] i
Protection Relay storage and a real-time clock with and 51R[2])
1 ms time resolution. The relay will Eleven standard curves
log 300 sequence of events records, ii
20 detailed trip logs, minimum/
maximum values, load profiles, Two breaker failure elements
breaker wear information and (50BF[1] and 50BF[2]) 1
oscillography data.
Phase transformer overload
The ETR-4000 has eight programmable protection (49) 2
binary inputs, four normally opened Switch onto fault protection
and four Form C heavy-duty outputs Zone interlocking for bus
and one Form C signal alarm relay. It protection (87B) 3
can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc
or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power. Metering
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay Amperes: positive, negative and 4
Features zero sequence
General Description Ampere demand
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer
Protection
Current phase angles 5
protection relay is a multi-functional, Dual-slope percentage restrained
current differential with magnetizing % THD I
microprocessor-based relay for two
winding transformers of all voltage inrush and overexcitation Magnitude THD I 6
levels. The ETR-4000 provides phase blocking (87R) Minimum/maximum recording
and ground percentage restrained Unrestrained current Trending (load profile over time)
differential protection using a variable differential (87H) RTD temperatures
7
dual slope characteristic with phase, Restricted ground fault/Ground
negative, residual and neutral Differential (87GD) Monitoring
overcurrent elements for backup Phase overcurrent (elements Trip coil monitor for both primary 8
protection. It can also be used to can be assigned to either side and secondary breakers
provide restrained differential protec-
tion to large motors and generators.
of the transformer): Breaker wear primary and
secondary (accumulated
9
Four instantaneous elements
The ETR-4000 has eight current inputs interrupted current)
with timers (50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3]
rated for either 5 A or 1 A to monitor and 50P[4]) Oscillography (3600 cycles total) 10
both sides of the transformers. The Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
CTs can be connected in wye in both Four inverse time overcurrent
Sequence of events report
sides of the transformer; the relay elements (51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3]
(up to 300 events) 11
automatically compensates for the and 51P[4])
Clock (1 ms time stamping)
connection of the transformer and Eleven standard curves
for CT mismatch errors. Inrush blocking Communication 12
The Maintenance Mode password Instantaneous or time delay reset Local HMI
protected soft key can be used for
arc flash mitigation to change to an Negative sequence phase overcur-
Password protected 13
Addressable
alternate settings group, set to have rent (elements can be assigned to
either side of the transformer): IRIG-B
instantaneous elements only.
Two inverse time overcurrent Local communication port 14
An integral keypad and display is elements (51Q[1] and 51Q[2]) Remote communication port:
provided for direct user programming
and retrieval of data without the
Eleven standard curves RS-232 15
need of a computer. Fourteen (14) Instantaneous or time delay reset RS-485
programmable LEDs provide quick
indication of relay status.
Ground overcurrent (elements Protocols: 16
can be assigned to either side Modbus-RTU
A front port is provided for direct of the transformer):
Modbus-TCP (optional)
computer connection. An RS-485 Two instantaneous measured
IEC 61850
17
communication port on the back is elements with timers (50X[1]
standard for local area networking and 50X[2]) Configuration software
using Modbus-RTU. An optional Two instantaneous calculated
18
Ethernet port and protocols elements with timers (50R[1] Control Functions
are available. and 50R[2]) Breaker open/close both breakers
Remote open/close
19
Flash memory is used for the Two inverse time overcurrent
programming and all settings are measured elements (51X[1] Programmable I/O
stored in nonvolatile memory. The and 51X[2]) Programmable LEDs 20
relay allows for four preprogrammed Multiple setting groups
setting groups that can be activated
Cold load pickup
through software, the display or a
CT supervision
21
contact input.

Transformer Protection October 2015
Sheet 04 088
Table 4.3-1. Catalog Numbering Selection for ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay Removable Terminals
i
ETR-4000 A 0 B A 1
ii
1 A = Eight digital inputs, nine Hardware Option 2
Communication
Conformal Coating
Options
0 = Standard mount
two zone interlocking, URTD ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount
2 interface, IRIG-B, small display power supply range:
19300 Vdc
B = Modbus-RTU B = Conformal coated
circuit boards
(RS-485)
40250 Vac 1 = Modbus-RTU
1 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, (RS-485) +
3 sensitive ground Modbus-TCP
current 0.5 A/0.1 A, (RJ-45)
power supply range: H = IEC 61850
4 19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
5 1 Beginning in 2016, consult factory for the availability of the following new communication options.
6 Protection Functions The operating characteristic of the Another condition that can create a
percent differential element is a dual- false differential current is a sudden
Eatons ETR-4000 transformer slope characteristic to accommodate change of voltage or frequency that
7 protection relay has been designed for CT saturation and CT errors. can put the transformer in a over-
for maximum user flexibility and excitation state. In this case there
simplicity. The ETR-4000 is suitable is high content of 5th harmonic
8 for application on small, medium currents. The percentage differential
and large two-winding power trans- element is also desensitized when
formers. Multiple current inputs are the 5th harmonic content exceeds
9 used to provide primary protection, a predefined value.
control and backup protection of
transformers, including current
10 differential, restricted ground
differential and overcurrent protection.
11 Dual-Slope Percent Differential Protection

The primary protective element for Dual-Slope Operating Characteristics
transformer protection is the percent Harmonic Restraints
12 differential element, which compares
There are certain conditions like
the current entering the primary
energizing one side of the transformer
and leaving the secondary of the
with the other side de-energized
13 transformer. The ETR-4000 has built
(inrush currents) or the paralleling
in compensation for the turns-ratio
of two transformers (sympathetic
and the phase shift of the transformer, Harmonic Restraints
currents) that can create false
14 so its not necessary to compensate
differential currents. These differential
for the transformer connection by the Unrestrained Differential
currents if not recognized can cause
connection of the CTs. An unrestrained differential element
a false trip; in the case of inrush
15 The current differential element looks conditions or sympathetic currents,
is provided for fast tripping on heavy
internal faults to limit catastrophic
at the vector difference between the the differential current is characterized
damage to the transformer and to
current entering and leaving the zone by a heavy content of 2nd and 4th
16 of protection. If the difference exceeds harmonic currents. The percentage
minimize risks to the remainder of
the power system.
a pre-determined amount, the element differential element is desensitized
will operate. either permanently (stationary
17 conditions) or temporarily (transient
conditions), whenever the 2nd or
4th harmonic exceed the value
18 programmed into the relay.
19
20
21

Sheet 04 089
Restricted Ground Fault Negative Sequence Overcurrent Sequence of Events Records

Ground differential protection is Because this element does not respond The ETR-4000 protection relay records i
applied to transformers having to balanced load or three-phase faults, a maximum of 300 events associated
impedance grounded wye windings. the negative-sequence overcurrent with the relay. An event is classified
It is intended to provide sensitive element may provide the desired over- as a change of state as detected by ii
ground fault detection for low magni- current protection. This is particularly the relay. These include relay pickups,
tude fault currents, which would not be applicable to delta-wye grounded dropouts, trips, contact closure,
detected by the main percent transformers where only 58% of the alarms, setting changes and self- 1
differential element. secondary p.u. phase-to-ground fault diagnostic failures. Each event is date
current appears in any one primary and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution.
phase conductor. Backup protection The events are stored in an FIFO in 2
can be particularly difficult when chronological order.
the wye is impedance grounded.
Trip Log 3
A negative-sequence element can be The ETR-4000 protection relay will
used in the primary supply to the store a maximum of 20 trip records
transformer and can be set as in an FIFO trip log. Each trip record will 4
sensitively as required to protect for be date and time stamped to a 1 ms
secondary phase-to-ground or phase- resolution. The trip log record will
to-phase faults. This element should include information on the type of 5
be set to coordinate with the low-side fault, protection elements that
phase and ground relays for phase- operated, fault location, and currents
to-ground and phase-to-phase faults. and voltages at the time of the fault. 6
The negative sequence element
Restricted Ground Fault must also be set higher than the Waveform Capture
negative-sequence current due to The ETR-4000 transformer protection 7
Overcurrent Elements unbalanced loads. relay provides oscillography-record-
The ETR-4000 can be used to provide ing capabilities. The relay will record
backup for transformer and adjacent
Breaker Failure
all measured signals along with the 8
power system equipment. Instanta- The ETR-4000 transformer protection binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and
neous overcurrent elements can be relay includes two breaker failure contact closures. The ETR-4000 relay
used for fast clearing of severe internal (50BF, 62BF) elements that can be can record up to 6000 cycles of data. 9
or external (through) faults. initiated from either an internal or The number of records is proportional
external trip signal. These are to the size of each record; the maxi-
Time overcurrent protection elements independent elements that can be mum size per record is 600 cycles. The 10
per winding allow coordinating with used to operate a lockout relay or waveform capture is initiated by up
the adjacent protection zones and trip an upstream breaker. The timer to eight different triggers; it can also
acting as a backup protection. There must be longer than the breaker be generated manually through the 11
are 11 user-selectable inverse-time operating time and the protective display or via communications.
overcurrent curve characteristics. The function reset times.
user can select from the ANSI, IEC or Integral User Interface 12
thermal curve families, and can select Maintenance Mode
The front panel user interface has a
instantaneous or time delay reset The Maintenance Mode can improve 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with back-
characteristics. safety by providing a simple and ground illumination for wide angle 13
reliable method to reduce fault viewing in all light conditions. 17
clearing time and to lower incident programmable LEDs provide quick
energy levels at energized panels. and easy visual display of power 14
The Maintenance Mode allows the on, mode of operation, alarm and trip
user to switch to more sensitive indication. Soft keys are provided for
settings via a password-protected operation mode selection, scrolling 15
soft key, communication or via a through data and settings. In addition,
digital Input while maintenance work the relay settings and test functions
is being performed at an energized are password protected. 16
panel or device. The more sensitive
settings provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and help to 17
reduce the possibility of injury.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 090
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15 Figure 4.3-1. ETR-4000 Device Planning
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 091
Programmable I/O
The ETR-4000 transformer protection i
relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated,
four normally open and four Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be ii
used for monitoring the trip circuits.
One Form C contact is dedicated to
the relay failure alarm function and 1
is operated in a normally energized
(failsafe) mode. There are eight
user-configurable discrete inputs that 2
accept a wet contact and can operate
through a wide range of power.
Each input and output is user- 3
programmable for maximum
application flexibility.
4
Communication Software
communication software. The first 5
is PowerPort-E. It runs on a PC or
laptop for easy access to a single relay
to change set points or configuration 6
and to view metered values and stored
data. PowerPort-E is free and can be
downloaded from the Eaton Web site 7
at www.eaton.com/pr.
The second package is Power Xpert 8
Software. Power Xpert Software is a
power management software package
that is designed for continuous, remote 9
monitoring of many devices. It provides
additional functions such as billing,
trending and graphics. Contact your 10
local Eaton representative for more
information on Power Xpert Software.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 4.3-2. ETR-4000 Typical One-Line Diagram
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 092
Technical Data and SpecificationsETR-4000

i Table 4.3-2. ETR-4000 Specifications
1 of supply failure: > = 50 ms at minimal aux. Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY.
Un = 48 V/60 Vdc
7 Power
at In = 1 A, S = 0.15 mVA
at In = 5 A, S = 0.15 mVA
8 Ground
ANSI IEEE Std. C37.90-2005 Fiber Optic
9 0.3 A DC at 300 V
Connection: ST-plug
Switching capacity: 1250 VA URTD-Interface
Contact type: Form C or normally open contact Connection: Versatile link
11 (22 F to +158 F)
(4 F to +140 F)
Permissible
above sea level
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
may be necessary.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 093
ETR-5000 Transformer An integral keypad and display is Voltage restraint (all elements)
provided for direct user programming Directional control (all elements) i
Protection Relay and retrieval of data without the
need of a computer. Fourteen (14) Negative sequence phase over-
programmable LEDs provide quick current (elements can be assigned ii
indication of relay status. to either side of the transformer):
A front port is provided for direct
elements (51Q[1], and 51Q[2]) 1
and an Ethernet port in the back are Eleven standard curves
optional for local area networking use. Instantaneous or time delay reset 2
Optional Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP or
IEC 61850 protocols are supported. Ground overcurrent (elements can
be assigned to either side of the 3
The ETR-5000 transformer protection transformer):
relay includes programmable logic Two instantaneous measured
functions. Logic gates and timers may
be defined and arranged for custom-
elements with timers (50X[1], 4
and 50X[2])
ETR-5000 Transformer Protection Relay ized applications. Programmable logic
control functions make the ETR-5000 Two instantaneous calculated
very flexible. Flash memory is used for elements with timers (50R[1], 5
General Description and 50R[2])
the programming and all settings are
Eatons ETR-5000 transformer stored in nonvolatile memory. Two inverse time overcurrent
protection relay is a multi-functional, measured elements (51X[1],
6
microprocessor-based relay for two The ETR-5000 generator protection and 51X[2])
winding transformers of all voltage relay has mass memory for data
levels. The ETR-5000 provides phase storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms Two inverse time overcurrent 7
and ground percentage restrained time resolution. The relay will log 300 calculated elements (51R[1],
differential protection using a variable sequence of event records, 20 detailed and 51R[2])
dual slope characteristic with phase, trip logs, minimum/maximum values, Eleven standard curves 8
residual and neutral directional overload profiles, breaker wear information Instantaneous or time delay reset
current elements for backup protection. and waveform data.
Negative sequence overcurrent Directional control (all elements) 9
elements, three-phase over/under The ETR-5000 has eight programmable
Two breaker failure elements
voltage, voltage unbalance, current binary inputs, two analog inputs, two
(50BF[1], and 50BF[2])
unbalance, over/under and rate-of- analog outputs, one zone interlocking 10
card or eight programmable binary Phase transformer overload
change frequency, vector surge, protection (49)
directional VARs, directional power, and inputs, and two zone interlocking cards.
overexcitation are standard functions. It has two normally opened and six Phase unbalance negative sequence 11
Form C heavy-duty outputs and one overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]))
The ETR-5000 transformer relay Form C signal alarm relay. The ETR-5000 Phase voltage unbalance and
provides all required protection, can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) 12
control, monitoring and metering for or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Main three-phase under/overvoltage
any size two-winding transformer in a (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
single, compact case. The relay has Features
Auxiliary single-phase under/
13
eight current inputs rated for either
5 A or 1 A and four voltage inputs. The Protection overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1],
CTs can be connected in wye in both Dual-slope percentage restrained 59A[2]) 14
sides of the transformer; the relay current differential with magnetizing Six frequency elements that can be
automatically compensates for the inrush and overexcitation assigned to: over frequency, under
connection of the transformer and blocking (87R) frequency, rate of change, or vector 15
CT mismatch errors. Unrestrained current
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4],
differential (87H) 81[5], 81[6])
Three of the voltage inputs are to be
Restricted ground fault/ground
Forward and reverse watts (32[1], 16
connected to the three-phase power 32[2], 32[3])
voltage for voltage protection and differential (87GD)
Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1],
for metering. They can be connected Phase overcurrent (elements can
32V[2], 32V[3]) 17
in wye-ground or open delta be assigned to either side of the
configuration. The fourth voltage is transformer): Overexcitation, Volts-per-Hertz
for independent single-phase under- Four instantaneous elements
(24[1], 24[2]) 18
voltage/overvoltage protection. with timers (50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3], Lockout (86)
and 50P[4]) Loss of potential-LOP
The maintenance mode password
protected soft key can be used for Four inverse time overcurrent Zone interlocking for bus 19
arc flash mitigation to change to an elements (51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3] protection (87B)
alternate settings group, set to have and 51P[4]) Switch onto fault protection
instantaneous elements only. 20
Eleven standard curves Cold load pickup
Inrush blocking Low voltage ride through (LVRT, 27T)
Instantaneous or time delay reset Reactive power/undervoltage (27Q) 21

Sheet 04 094
Metering Monitoring Communication

i Phase differential current Trip coil monitor for both primary Local HMI
Ground differential current and secondary breakers Password protected
Breaker wear primary and
ii Amperes: positive, negative and
secondary (accumulated
Addressable
zero sequence IRIG-B
Ampere demand interrupted current)
1 Volts: positive, negative and zero Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
sequence Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
RS-232
Phase angles Sequence of events report (up to
2 Volt-amperes and VA demand 300 events) RS-485
Clock (1 ms time stamping) Protocols:

Watts and kW demand
3 kWh (forward, reverse, net) Control Functions Modbus RTU
VARs and kvar demand. Breaker open/close both breaker Modbus TCP (optional)
kVARh (lead, leg and net) Remote open/close IEC 61850 (optional)
4
Power factor Programmable I/O Configuration software.
Volts/hertz Programmable Logic
5 % THD V and I Programmable LEDs
Magnitude THD V and I Multiple setting groups
6 Minimum/maximum recording Cold load pickup
Trending (load profile over time) CT supervision
Temperature with remote
7 URTD module
8 Table 4.3-3. Catalog Numbering Selection for ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay Removable Terminals
9 ETR-5000 A 0 B A 1
10 Hardware Option 1
Hardware Option 2 Conformal Coating
Mounting Options
A = Eight digital inputs, nine 0 = Standard mount
outputs, removable terminals, Communication Options
0 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, 1 = Projection
Options 1
11 two zone interlocking, URTD
interface
W1/W2 ground current
5 A/1 A, power supply
A = None
panel mount
B = Modbus RTU
B = Eight digital inputs, nine range: (RS-485) circuit boards
outputs, two analog inputs, 19300 Vdc 1 = Modbus RTU
12 removable terminals, one zone 40250 Vac (RS-485) +
interlocking, URTD interface 1 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, Modbus TCP
W1 sensitive ground (RJ-45)
13 current 0.5 A/0.1 A,
W2 ground current
H = IEC 61850
(GOOSE)
5 A/1 A, power supply
range: 19300 Vdc
14 40250 Vac
2 = Phase current 5 A/1 A,
W1 ground current
15 0.5 A/0.1 A, W2
sensitive ground
current 5 A/1 A,
power supply range:
16 19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
3 = Phase current 5 A/1 A,
W1/W2 sensitive
17 ground current
0.5 A/0.1 A, power
supply range:
18 19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
19 1 Beginning in 2016, consult factory for the availability of the following new communication options.
20
21

Sheet 04 095
Protection Functions The percentage differential element Directional Overcurrent Elements

Eatons ETR-5000 transformer
is desensitize either permanently The ETR-5000 can be used to provide i
(stationary conditions) or temporarily backup for transformer and adjacent
protection relay has been designed (transient conditions), whenever the
for maximum user flexibility and power system equipment. Instanta-
simplicity. The ETR-5000 is suitable
2nd or 4th harmonic exceed the value neous overcurrent elements can be ii
programmed into the relay. used for fast clearing of severe internal
for application on small, medium, and
or external (through) faults.
large two winding power transformers. Another condition that can create a 1
Multiple current inputs are used to false differential current is a sudden Time overcurrent protection elements
provide primary protection, control change of voltage or frequency, per winding allow coordinating with
and back-up protection of transformers, that can put the transformer in an the adjacent protection zones and 2
including current differential, restricted overexcitation state. In this case acting as a backup protection. There
ground differential, and overcurrent there is high content of 5th harmonic are 11 user-selectable inverse-time
protection. currents. The percentage differential overcurrent curve characteristics. The 3
element is also desensitized when user can select from the ANSI, IEC or
Dual-Slope Percent Differential Protection the 5th harmonic content exceeds a thermal curve families and can select
The primary protective element for predefined value. instantaneous or time delay reset 4
transformer protection is the percent characteristics.
differential element, which compares
the current entering the primary Phase direction is a function used to 5
and leaving the secondary of the supervise all phase current elements
transformer. The ETR-5000 has built-in (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is
compensation for the turns-ratio and compared to a corresponding phase 6
the phase shift of the transformer, so current to establish the direction of
its not necessary to compensate for the fault. This function is selectable
the transformer connection by the to operate in the forward, reverse or 7
connection of the CTs. both directions.
The current differential element looks Ground direction is used to supervise
at the vector difference between the ground current elements and is
8
current entering and leaving the zone accomplished by using ground,
of protection. If the difference exceeds Dynamic Rise of the negative sequence or residual currents
a pre-determined amount, the element Operating Characteristic
supervised by zero, negative or
9
will operate. Unrestrained Differential positive sequence voltages or ground
current. This function is selectable to
The operating characteristic of the An unrestrained differential element
operate in forward, reverse or both
10
percent differential element is a dual- is provided for fast tripping on heavy
internal faults to limit catastrophic directions.
slope characteristic to accommodate
for CT saturation and CT errors. damage to the transformer and to Directional elements are dependant on 11
minimize risks to the remainder of the location of the VTs (primary or sec-
the power system. ondary winding) when voltage is used
Restricted Ground Fault as the polarizing quantity. 12
Ground differential protection is Negative Sequence Overcurrent
applied to transformers having Because this element does not respond 13
impedance grounded wye windings. to balanced load or three-phase faults,
It is intended to provide sensitive the negative-sequence overcurrent
ground fault detection for low element may provide the desired over- 14
magnitude fault currents, which current protection. This is particularly
would not be detected by the main applicable to delta-wye grounded
percent differential element. transformers where only 58% of the 15
Dual-Slope Operating Characteristics secondary p.u. phase-to-ground fault
Harmonic Restraints current appears in any one primary
phase conductor. Backup protection can 16
There are certain conditions like be particularly difficult when the wye
energizing one side of the transformer is impedance grounded. A negative-
with the other side de-energized sequence element can be used in the 17
(inrush currents) or the paralleling primary supply to the transformer and
of two transformers (sympathetic set as sensitively as required to protect
currents) that can create false for secondary phase-to-ground or 18
differential currents. These differential phase-to-phase faults. This element
currents if not recognized can cause should be set to coordinate with the
a false trip; in the case of inrush low-side phase and ground relays for 19
conditions or sympathetic currents phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase
the differential current is characterized faults. The negative sequence element
by a heavy content of 2nd and 4th must also be set higher than the 20
harmonic currents. Restricted Ground Fault negative-sequence current due to
unbalanced loads.
21

Sheet 04 096
Overexcitation Protection Reverse VARs Trip Log

i Transformer overexcitation occurs Reverse VARs can be used to detect The ETR-5000 protection relay will
when the ratio of voltage versus loss of excitation in synchronous store a maximum of 20 trip records
frequency is too high, and the machines. There are three elements in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
ii transformer iron saturates due to to be configured: operate in forward be date and time stamped to a 1 ms
high flux density. High flux density or reverse; or, under or over VARs resolution. The trip log record will
results in stray flux in components not conditions. include information on the type
1 designed to carry it, which in turn of fault, protection elements that
causes overheating and can potentially Breaker Failure operated, fault location and currents
damage the transformer. This protec- The ETR-5000 transformer protection and voltages at the time of the fault.
2 tion is provided through a volts/hertz relay includes two breaker failure
function with a programmable inverse (50BF, 62BF) elements that can be Waveform Capture
time characteristic. initiated from either an internal The ETR-5000 distribution protection
3 or external trip signal. These are relay provides waveform-recording
Voltage Protection independent elements that can be capabilities. The relay will record all
The ETR-5000 transformer protection used to operate a lockout relay or trip measured signals along with the
4 relay has four voltage-input circuits. an upstream breaker. The timer must binary signals of pickup, trip, logic and
There is a three-phase set designated be longer than the breaker operating contact closures. The ETR-5000 relay
as Main Voltage (M) and a single- time and the protective function can record up to 6000 cycles of data.
5 phase voltage circuit designated as reset times. The number of records is proportional
Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include to the size of each record; the maxi-
undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) Maintenance Mode mum size per record is 600 cycles. The
6 protection. The three-phase voltage The Maintenance Mode can improve waveform capture is initiated by up to
protection can be set to operate on a safety by providing a simple and reli- Eight different triggers; it can also be
single-phase, 2 out of 3 phases, or all able method to reduce fault clearing generated manually through the
7 three-phase logic. The Main VTs also time and lower incident energy levels display or via communications.
provide phase voltage unbalance/ at energized panels. The Maintenance
reversal (47 negative sequence) Mode allows the user to switch to Integral User Interface
8 protection. Each element has an more sensitive settings via a password The front panel user interface has
independent threshold set point and protected soft key, communications or a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with
adjustable time delay. via a digital input while maintenance background illumination for wide
9 work is being performed at an angle viewing in all light conditions.
Flexible Phase Rotation energized panel or device. The more Fourteen (14) programmable LEDs
The ETR-5000 distribution protection sensitive settings provide greater provide quick and easy visual display
10 relay can be applied on either an A-B-C security for maintenance personnel of power on, mode of operation,
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting and helps reduce the possibility alarm and trip indication. Soft keys are
permits correct operation and indica- of injury. provided for operation mode selection,
11 tion of the actual system configuration. scrolling through data and settings. In
Monitoring and Metering addition, the relay settings and test
Frequency Protection functions are password protected.
12 The ETR-5000 relay provides six Sequence of Events Records
frequency elements than can be used to The ETR-5000 transformer protection Load Profiling/Trending
detect under/over frequency, rate of relay records a maximum of 300 The ETR-5000 relay automatically
13 change, and a vector surge (decoupling events associated with the relay. An records selected quantities into non-
of two systems) protection on the event is classified as a change of state volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30 or
Main VT inputs. Each element has an as detected by the relay. These include 60 minutes, depending on the trending
14 independent threshold set point and relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact report setting.
adjustable time delay. closure, alarms, setting changes and
15 self-diagnostic failures. Each event
Reverse Power
is date and time stamped to a 1 ms
Reverse power provides control for resolution. The events are stored in a
power flowing through a feeder. There FIFO log in chronological order.
16 are three elements to be configured:
operate in forward or reverse; or,
under or over power conditions.
17 Reverse power is typically applied to
generator or motor applications while
under power is generally applied to
18 load or generation loss.
19
20
21

Sheet 04 097
Programmable I/O
The ETR-5000 transformer protection i
relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated,
two normally open and six Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be ii
used for monitoring the trip circuit.
One Form C contact is dedicated to the
relay failure alarm function and is 1
operated in a normally energized
(failsafe) mode. There are up to eight
user-configurable discrete inputs that 2
accept a wet contact and can operate
through a wide range of power. Each
input and output is user-programmable 3
for maximum application flexibility.
The ETR-5000 also offers two optional 4
analog inputs and two optional analog
outputs. The analog inputs are avail- Figure 4.3-3. Visual Logic Editor
able for providing protection. The 5
analog inputs are field programmable
8.16
to measure transducer signals that (207.2)
operate over a range of 0 to 20 mA,
7.76
6
4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10 V. The two (197.2)
optional analog outputs can be used
for signaling the value of measured
7.17
(182.0)
B Holes for 7
Projection
analog quantities to external process Panelmount
6.00
control devices such as PLCs. They can (152.4)
be programmed to operate over a 0 to CL
A Holes for 8
20 mA, 4-20 mA, or 1 to 10 V range. Standard
B Panelmount
The analog outputs can be configured B A
to signal a representation of most 9
analog quantities measured by the
A A
ETR-5000 including, current, voltages,
and RTD temperature. Cutout
10
4.88
Programmable Logic (124.0)
7.12 B
The ETR-5000 transformer protection (180.8) B
CL 6.30
(160.0)
11
relay provides logic gates and timers
that the user can customize for special 6.64
or unique applications. Each gate can (168.6) 12
be assigned a logic function of either A
AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate A
can have a maximum of four input
B A
13
signals and each input signal can be B
required to be a NOT. Input signals 6x 0.19
can be external inputs received via 6x 0.19 (4.8) 14
the binary inputs or internal values (4.8)
associated with the protection, alarm
or metering set points. Each gate has Figure 4.3-4. Drilling Plan 15
a unique output assignment and
designation that can be used as the
input to another gate. 16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 098
i 7.07
(179.6)
ii
3
8.16
5.56 (207.3)
6.00
4 9.72 4.80
(141.2)
1.08 (152.4)
(246.9) (121.9) (27.4)
6
8.70 6.14 7.12
(221.0) (156.0) (180.9)
7
3.56
(90.4)
9 2.50
(63.5)
Figure 4.3-5. Projection Mount Front and SIde ViewsDimensions in Inches (mm)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 099
ii
10
11
12
13
Figure 4.3-6. Typical AC Connections. Delta-Wye Transformer with Wye CTs and Neutral CT 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 100
ii
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 101
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 102
Communication Software data. PowerPort-E is free and can for continuous, remote monitoring of
be downloaded from the Eaton many devices. It provides additional
Web site at the following URL: functions such as billing, trending and
communication software. The first is http://www.eaton.com/pr graphics. Contact your local Eaton
representative for more information
The second package is Power Xpert on Power Xpert Software.
change set points or configuration and Software, which is a power manage-
1 to view metered values and stored ment software package that is designed
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 4.3-9. PowerPort-E ETR-5000 Device Planning
19
20
21

Sheet 04 103
Technical Data and SpecificationsETR-5000

Table 4.3-4. ETR-5000 Specifications
i
Aux. voltage: 24270 Vdc/48230 Vac Max. input voltage: 300 Vdc/270 Vac Nominal input level: 5V
ii
(20%/+10%) Input current: <4 mA Nominal output level: 5V
Buffer time in case Reaction time: <20 ms Connection: Screw-type terminals
of supply failure: M50 ms at minimal aux. Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the (twisted pair) 1
voltage; interrupted digital inputs)
communication Four switching thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
is permitted 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/Vdc,
Max. permissible making current: 230 Vac/Vdc 2
18 A peak value for <0.25 ms Un = 24 Vdc
12 A peak value for <1 ms Switching threshold 1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:
Switching threshold 1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc 3
Un = 48 V/60 Vdc
(approx. 0.20 in. x 0.80 in) according to IEC 60127 Switching threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc
3.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32.0 mm Switching threshold 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc
(approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Un = 110/120 Vac/Vdc
4
Switching threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac
Power Consumption Switching threshold 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc/44.0 Vac Front Interface RS-232
Power Un = 230/240 Vac/Vdc Baud rates: 115,200 Baud 5
supply range: 19300 Vdc Switching threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Handshake: RTS and CTS
40250 Vac (for frequencies Switching threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
of 4070 Hz)
Power
6
consumption Relay Outputs RS-485
in idle mode: 7 W
Max. power
consumption: 13 W
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
5 A AC/DC
25 A AC/25 A DC up to 30 V for 4s
Master/slave: Slave
7
30 A/250 Vac according to 8
0.3 A DC at 300 V
(22 F to +158 F)
9
(4 F to +140 F)
Contact type: Changeover contact or
normally open contact
at Ann. average: <75% rel. 10
Terminals: Screw-type terminals
Permissible
above sea level
11
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
classification of the 12
may be necessary.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Generator Protection October 2015
Sheet 04 104
General DescriptionEGR-5000
i EGR-5000 Generator The maintenance mode password Features

protected soft key can be used for
Protection Relay arc flash mitigation to change to an Protection
alternate settings group, set to have Dual-slope percentage restrained
ii instantaneous elements only. The phase current differential (87)
multiple setting groups can also be
Unrestrained phase current
changed via communications or
1 differential (87H)
a digital input.
Restricted ground fault/ground
An integral keypad and display is differential (87GD)
2 provided for direct user programming Unrestrained restricted ground fault/
and retrieval of data without the ground differential (87GDH)
need of a computer. Fourteen (14)
Thermal protection (49/51)
3 programmable LEDs provide quick
Phase overcurrent elements:
indication of relay status.
Three instantaneous elements
A front port is provided for direct
4 computer connection. An RS-485
with timers (50P[1], 50P[2],
and 50P[3])
and an Ethernet port in the back are
EGR-5000 Generator Protection Relay Three inverse time overcurrent
optional for local area networking use.
5 Optional Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP or elements (51P[1], 51P[2],
General Description IEC 61850 protocols are supported. and 51P[3])
Eleven standard curves
6 Eatons EGR-5000 generator protection The EGR-5000 generator protection
relay is a multi-functional, micro- Instantaneous or time delay reset
relay includes programmable logic
processor-based relay for any size functions. Logic gates and timers may Voltage Restraint (51P[2],
7 generators. It may be used as a be defined and arranged for custom- and 51P[3])
primary or backup protection in ized applications. Programmable logic Directional control (all elements)
standby generators and cogeneration control functions make the EGR-5000
8 applications. very flexible. Flash memory is used for Ground overcurrent elements:
The EGR-5000 generator protection the programming, and all settings are Two instantaneous measured
relay provides voltage controlled, stored in nonvolatile memory. elements with timers (50X[1],
9 voltage restrained, and standard and 50X[2])
The EGR-5000 generator protection
directional three-phase overcurrent relay has mass memory for data Two instantaneous calculated
protection, as well as directional elements with timers (50R[1],
10 phase-residual and independent
storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms
and 50R[2])
time resolution. The relay will log 300
ground overcurrent protection, sequence of event records, 20 detailed Two inverse time overcurrent
and breaker failure. Three-phase
11 overvoltage/undervoltage, voltage
trip logs, minimum/maximum values, measured elements (51X[1],
load profiles, breaker wear informa- and 51X[2])
unbalance, current unbalance, over/ tion and waveform data.
under and rate-of-change frequency, Two inverse time overcurrent
12 vector surge, power factor, directional The EGR-5000 has either eight calculated elements (51R[1],
VARs, directional power, loss of programmable binary inputs, two and 51R[2])
excitation, overexcitation, phase analog inputs, two analog outputs, or Eleven standard curves
13 differential, ground differential, and 16 programmable binary inputs. It has Instantaneous or time delay reset
sync check functions are standard two normally opened and six Form C
functions. heavy-duty outputs and one Form C Directional control (all elements)
14 signal alarm relay. The EGR-5000 can Breaker failure (50BF)
The EGR-5000 generator relay pro- be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or Phase unbalance negative sequence
vides all required protection, control, 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
15 monitoring and metering for any size
overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]))
generators in a single, compact case. Phase voltage unbalance and
The relay has eight current inputs sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])
16 rated for either 5 A or 1 A and four Main three-phase under/overvoltage
voltage inputs. Three of the voltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
inputs are to be connected to the
17 three-phase power voltage for voltage
protection and for metering. They can
be connected in wye-ground or open
18 delta configuration. The fourth voltage
is for independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage protection,
19 or 100% ground protection for a high
resistance grounded generator.
20
21

October 2015 Generator Protection
Sheet 04 105
Auxiliary single-phase under/ Metering Monitoring

overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], Generator hours of operation. Trip coil monitor i
59A[1], 59A[2])
Phase differential current Breaker wear
Ground fault overvoltage relay
(59N[1], 59N[2]) Ground differential current Oscillography (6000 cycles total) ii
Amperes: positive, negative and Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
Six frequency elements that can be
assigned to: over frequency, under zero sequence Sequence of events report (up to
frequency, rate of change, or vector Ampere demand 300 events) 1
surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], Volts: positive, negative and Clock (one ms time stamping)
81[5], 81[6]) zero sequence
Communication 2
Apparent and displacement Phase angles
Local HMI
power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], Volt-amperes and VA demand
Password protected
55D[1], 55D[2])
Watts and kW demand 3
Forward and reverse watts (32[1], Addressable
kWh (forward, reverse, net)
32[2], 32[3]) IRIG-B
Forward and reverse VARs (32V[1],
VARs and kVAR demand
Local communication port 4
32V[2], 32V[3]) Power factor
Overexcitation, volts-per-hertz Frequency
RS-232 5
(24[1], 24[2]) Volts/hertz
RS-485
64S, 100% stator ground fault 3rd harmonic voltage
(27TN/ 59N) % THD V and I Protocols: 6
Generator unbalance (46G[1], Magnitude THD V and I Modbus RTU (optional)
46G[2]) Sync values Modbus TCP (optional)
Loss of excitation (40[1],40[2]) Trending (load profile over time) IEC 61850 (optional)
7
Sync check (25) Temperature with remote URTD Configuration software
Inadvertent energization (50/27) module 8
Lockout (86) Control Functions
Loss of potential-LOP Breaker open/close
Zone interlocking for bus Remote open/close 9
protection (87B) Programmable I/O
Switch onto fault protection Programmable Logic 10
Cold load pickup Programmable LEDs
Low voltage ride through (LVRT, 27T) Multiple setting groups
Reactive power/undervoltage (27Q) Cold load pickup 11
CT supervision
12
Table 4.3-5. Catalog Numbering Selection for EGR-5000 Generator Relay Removable Terminals
13
EGR-5000 A 0 B A 1
14
A = 16 digital inputs, Hardware Option 2
Communication
Conformal Coating
Options
9 outputs, removable 0 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, 1 = Projection
terminals, zone ground current 5 A/1 A, Options 1 A = None panel mount
interlocking,
URTD interface
power supply range:
19300 Vdc
B = Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
circuit boards
16
B = 8 digital inputs, 2 analog 40250 Vac H = IEC 61850 (Goose)
inputs, 2 analog outputs, 1 = Phase current 5 A/1 A, I = Modbus RTU +
removable terminals, sensitive ground Modbus TCP 17
zone interlocking, current 0.5 A/0.1 A,
URTD interface power supply range:
19300 Vdc
40250 Vac
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 106
Protection and Control Functions Ground direction is used to supervise Reverse VARs
i Eatons EGR-5000 generator
ground current elements and is Reverse VARs can be used to detect
accomplished by using ground, nega- loss of excitation in synchronous
protection relay has been designed tive sequence or residual currents machines. There are three elements
ii for maximum user flexibility and
simplicity. The EGR-5000 provides
supervised by zero, negative or to be configured: operate in forward
positive sequence voltages or ground or reverse; or, under or over VARs
comprehensive protection, metering, current. This function is selectable conditions.
1 and monitoring for any size synchro- to operate in forward, reverse or
nous or induction generators operating both directions. Inverse Time Characteristics
at 50 or 60 Hz. The base relay includes
There are 11 user-selectable inverse-
2 all the standard protection and meter- Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
time overcurrent curve characteristics.
ing functions. Protection features found Voltage restraint reduces the
in the EGR-5000 include: The user can select from the ANSI, IEC
overcurrent pickup level (51P[2], or thermal curve families and can
3 Phase Differential Protection 51P[3]), to protect the distribution select instantaneous or time delay
system components against excessive reset characteristics.
This protection provides a method for damage and to prevent the generator
4 rapidly detecting internal generator and its auxiliaries from exceeding their Breaker Failure
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground thermal limitations. This modification
faults. After the detection of this fault, The EGR-5000 generator protection
of the pickup overcurrent level is relay includes a breaker failure (50BF,
5 the generator is quickly removed compared to the corresponding 62BF) function that can be initiated
from service to limit the extent of the phase input voltage. The EGR-5000
damage. The EGR-5000 uses a dual from either an internal or external trip
uses the simple linear model below to signal. This is an independent element
6 slope percentage scheme; advanced determine the effective pickup value. that can be used to operate a lockout
CT saturation algorithms maintain
immunity against external disturbances relay or trip an upstream breaker. The
timer must be longer than the breaker
7 and ensures the fault is internal to the
Pickup % operating time and the protective
generator before triggering it to trip.
Ground Differential Protection 100 %
8 In low resistance grounded
Voltage Protection
generators, ground protection may The EGR-5000 generator protection
relay has four voltage-input circuits.
9 be provided by the 87GD differential,
depending on the fault level and the There is a three-phase set designated
25 % as Main Voltage (M) and a single-
differential relay sensitivity. Higher
phase voltage circuit designated as
10 sensitivity and fast operation for
Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include
ground faults may be obtained by an
additional zero-sequence differential. undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59)
Figure 4.3-10. Voltage Restraint Coil protection. The three-phase voltage
11 Directional Overcurrent Protection Pickup Characteristics protection can be set to operate on a
The EGR-5000 generation protection single-phase, two out of three phases,
Sync Check or all three-phase logic. The Main VTs
12 relay provides complete three-phase
The sync-check function is provided also provide phase voltage unbalance/
and ground directional overcurrent
for double-ended power source reversal (47 negative sequence)
protection. There are 14 independent
applications. The sync-check monitors protection. Each element has an
13 ground overcurrent elements The
voltage magnitude, phase angle and independent threshold set point and
ground elements X use the indepen-
slip frequency between the bus and adjustable time delay.
dently measured ground (or neutral)
line. It also incorporates breaker close
14 current from a separate current-
time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live
sensing input. The ground elements
line and live bus live line features.
R uses a calculated 3Io residual
15 current obtained from the sum of the Reverse Power
three-phase currents. This calculated Reverse power provides control for
current could be used for either the power flowing through a generator.
16 neutral or ground current in a three- There are three elements to be
phase, four-wire system. Each of the configured: operate in forward or
phase and ground overcurrent reverse; or, under or over power
17 elements can be selected to operate conditions. Reverse power is typically
based on fundamental or RMS current. applied to prevent generator motoring
Phase direction is a function used to that can cause damage to the prime
18 supervise all phase current elements mover; while under power is generally
(50, 51). A quadrature voltage is applied to load loss and to prevent an
compared to a corresponding phase overspeed condition that could
19 current to establish the direction of damage the prime mover.
the fault. This function is selectable
to operate in the forward, reverse or
20 both directions.
21

Sheet 04 107
100% Ground Stator Protection Inadvertent Energization Serious damage will occur to the
In high impedance grounded If a generator is inadvertently brought generator if the unbalance is allowed i
generators, ground fault protection is on line with the power system, without to persist. The EGR-5000 provides
provided by the detection of voltage in being up to speed and synchronized, a negative sequence definite time
the neutral of the generator by an or it is at a standstill when the breaker overcurrent element and a negative ii
overvoltage element (59N) connected is closed, severe damage could occur. sequence timed overcurrent tripping
to the secondary of the distribution The generator will act as an induction element to ensure the generator stays
grounding transformer, this over- motor and very high currents will within its short time and continuous 1
voltage element has to be desensitized be induced in the stator and rotor negative sequence current rated limits.
for 3rd harmonic voltages normally components, resulting in rapid over-
present in the generator. Under heating and damage.
Overexcitation Protection 2
normal conditions there is no voltage Generator overexcitation occurs when
across the secondary of the grounded Negative Sequence Protection the ratio of voltage versus frequency is
transformer, when one of the phases Negative sequence overcurrent too high, and the rotor iron saturates 3
goes to ground, voltage appears protection prevents the generators due to high flux density. High flux
across the resistor and the overvoltage from rotor overheating damage. density results in stray flux in
element operates, indicating a ground Unbalanced loads, fault conditions components not designed to carry it, 4
conductor. However, the overvoltage or open phasing will produce a which in turn causes overheating and
element technique described above negative sequence current to flow. can potentially damage the generator.
will protect around 90% to 95% of the The unbalanced currents induce double This protection is provided through a 5
winding. The last 510% is protected system frequency currents in the rotor, Volts/Hertz function with a program-
by detecting the decaying of the which quickly causes rotor overheating. mable inverse time characteristic.
3rd harmonic voltage using a under-
6
voltage element (27TN) tuned to the
3rd harmonic voltage. In the EGR-5000
we can provide 100% stator ground
7
protection by measuring the zero
sequence voltage through the 4th 8
voltage input, and combining the 59N
and 27A elements. The 27A element
has to be programmed to operate for 9
3rd harmonic zero sequence voltages.
Flexible Phase Rotation
The EGR-5000 generator protection
10
relay can be applied on either an A-B-C
or A-C-B phase rotation. A user setting
permits correct operation and indica-
11
tion of the actual system configuration.
Frequency Protection 12
Operation of generators at off-nominal
frequencies can have extremely
detrimental effects on both the
13
generator itself and the associated
prime mover, in particular with steam
turbine generators operating below
14
normal frequency. The EGR-5000 relay Figure 4.3-11. Overexcitation Protection
provides six frequency elements that
can be used to detect under/over
15
frequency, rate of change, and a vector
surge (decoupling of two systems)
protection on the Main VT inputs. Each
16
element has an independent threshold
set point and adjustable time delay. 17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 108
Loss of Excitation
i Loss of field protection or loss of
excitation is used to avoid unstable
operation, potential loss of synchro-
ii nism, and possible damage to
synchronous generators. When a
synchronous generator loses its field,
1 the generator can continue to generate
power as an induction generator,
provided that it can obtain its
2 excitation from the other machines on
the system. During this condition, the
rotor will quickly overheat due to the
3 slip frequency currents induced in it.
Loss of excitation in one machine
could jeopardize the operation of other
4 machines beyond their capability, and
also the stability of the entire system.
The EGR-5000 supports the two typical
5 distance relaying schemes used for
detecting the loss excitation. The two
schemes differ mainly in that scheme 1
6 uses a negative offset mho element
and scheme 2 uses a positive offset
mho element with directional unit
7 supervision.
Maintenance Mode
8 The Maintenance Mode can improve
safety by providing a simple and
reliable method to reduce fault Figure 4.3-12. Scheme 1
9 clearing time and lower incident
energy levels at energized panels.
The Maintenance Mode allows the
10 user to switch to more sensitive
settings via a password protected
soft key, communication or via a
11 digital input while maintenance work
is being performed at an energized
panel or device. The more sensitive
12 settings provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and helps
13 reduce the possibility of injury.
14
15
16
17
18 Figure 4.3-13. Scheme 2
19
20
21

Sheet 04 109
Monitoring and Metering Integral User Interface The EGR-5000 also offers two optional
The front panel user interface has analog inputs and two optional analog i
Sequence of Events Records a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with outputs. The analog inputs are
The EGR-5000 generator protection background illumination for wide available for providing protection
relay records a maximum of 300 angle viewing in all light conditions. and monitoring of generator bearing ii
events associated with the relay. An Seventeen (17) programmable LEDs vibration. The analog inputs are field
event is classified as a change of state provide quick and easy visual display programmable to measure transducer
as detected by the relay. These include of power on, mode of operation, alarm signals that operate over a range of 0 to 1
relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact and trip indication. Soft keys are 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to 10 V. The two
closure, alarms, setting changes and provided for operation mode selection, optional analog outputs can be used for
self-diagnostic failures. Each event is scrolling through data and settings. In signaling the value of measured analog 2
date and time stamped to a 1 ms addition, the relay settings and test quantities to external process control
resolution. The events are stored in a functions are password protected. devices such as PLCs. They can be
FIFO log in chronological order. programmed to operate over a 0 to 3
Load Profiling/Trending 20 mA, 420 mA, or 110 V range. The
Trip Log The EGR-5000 relay automatically analog outputs can be configured to
The EGR-5000 protection relay will records selected quantities into signal a representation of most analog 4
store a maximum of 20 trip records in non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, quantities measured by the EGR-5000
a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will 30 or 60 minutes, depending on the including, current, voltages and RTD
be date and time stamped to a 1 ms trending report setting. temperature. 5
resolution. The trip log record will
Programmable I/O Programmable Logic
include information on the type of
fault, protection elements that The EGR-5000 generator protection The EGR-5000 generator protection 6
operated, fault location and currents relay provides heavy-duty, trip-rated, relay provides logic gates and timers
and voltages at the time of the fault. two normally open and six Form C that the user can customize for special
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be or unique applications. Each gate can 7
Waveform Capture used for monitoring the trip circuit. be assigned a logic function of either
The EGR-5000 distribution protection One Form C contact is dedicated to AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can
relay provides waveform-recording the relay failure alarm function and have a maximum of four input signals 8
capabilities. The relay will record all is operated in a normally energized and each input signal can be required
measured signals along with the binary (failsafe) mode. There are up to to be a NOT. Input signals can be
signals of pickup, trip, logic and contact 16 user-configurable discrete inputs external inputs received via the binary 9
closures. The EGR-5000 relay can that accept a wet contact and can inputs or internal values associated
record up to 6000 cycles of data. The operate through a wide range of with the protection, alarm or metering
number of records is proportional to power. Each input and output is set points. Each gate has a unique 10
the size of each record; the maximum user-programmable for maximum output assignment and designation
size per record is 600 cycles. The application flexibility. that can be used as the input to another
waveform capture is initiated by up to gate. There are 24 independent timers 11
eight different triggers; it can also be that have adjustable pickup and
generated manually through the dropout delay settings.
display or via communications.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 110
ii
6
Figure 4.3-14. Visual Logic Editor
7
8 8.16
(207.2)
7.76
9 (197.2)
7.17 B Holes for
(182.0) Projection
10 6.00 Panelmount
(152.4)
A Holes for
CL
Standard
11 B Panelmount
B A
12 A A
Cutout 4.88
13 (124.0)
7.12 B 6.30
CL
(180.8) B (160.0)
14 6.64
(168.6)
15 A
A
B A
16 B
6x 0.19
6x 0.19 (4.8)
17 (4.8)
Figure 4.3-15. Drilling

18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 111
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 4.3-16. Typical AC Connections
21

Sheet 04 112
ii
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 113
ii
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 114
Communication Software PowerPort-E is free and can be down- monitoring of many devices. It
loaded from the Eaton website at the provides additional functions such as
following URL: www.eaton.com/pr. billing, trending and graphics. Contact
communication software. The first is your local Eaton representative for
The second package is Power more information on Power Xpert
Xpert Software, which is a power Software.
change set points or configuration management software package that
1 and to view metered values and is designed for continuous, remote
stored data.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 Figure 4.3-19. PowerPort-E EGR-5000 Device Planning
20
21

Sheet 04 115
Technical Data and SpecificationsEGR-5000

Table 4.3-6. EGR-5000 Specifications
i
Aux. voltage: 24270 Vdc/48230 Vac Max. input voltage: 300 Vdc/259 Vac NOTICE: ONLY FOR ZONE INTERLOCK TRIPPING
ii
of supply failure: M50 ms at minimal aux. Fallback time: <30 ms (safe state of the ELECTRONIC INPUTS ONLY. 1
voltage; interrupted digital inputs) Zone out:
is permitted 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/Vdc, Output voltage (low): 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Max. permissible making current: 230 Vac/Vdc Zone in: 2
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:
Switching threshold 1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc Switching threshold ON: Min. 4.0 Vdc
3
Un = 48 V/60 Vdc
(approx. 0.25 in. x 1.25 in) according to UL 248-14
Connection: Screw-type terminals 4
(twisted pair)
Switching threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/88.0 Vac
Power Consumption Front Interface RS-232 5
Power Switching threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/184 Vac Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
supply range: 24270 Vdc: 7 W idle mode/ Switching threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac Handshake: RTS and CTS
approx. 13 W max. power Connection: Nine-pole D-Sub plug
48230 Vac: 7 VA idle mode/
6
Continuous current:
Max. make current:
5 A AC/DC
25 A AC/25 A DC up to 30 V for 4s
Master/slave: Slave
7
30 A/250 Vdc according to 8
Max. breaking current: 5 A AC up to 250 Vac
0.3 A DC at 300 V
(22 F to +158 F)
9
(4 F to +140 F)
Contact type:
Terminals:
Form C or normally open contact
Screw-type terminals
at Ann. average: <75% rel. 10
Permissible
above sea level
11
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft)
classification of the 12
may be necessary.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2015
Sheet 04 116

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2015 Transformer Temperature Controller
Sheet 04 117
General DescriptionTC-100
TC-100 Transformer Form C contacts are provided for Features and Benefits
i
notification of alarm conditions. A
Temperature Controller for red LED illuminates to indicate that the Control
Dry-Type Transformers alarm is actuated. An internal audible Thermocouple inputs (E or K type
ii
alarm also sounds when the unit goes thermocouples)
into alarm condition. This audible
Automatic correlation throughout
buzzer can be silenced without cancel-
entire temperature range to 1
ing the alarm. The alarm and trip relays
compensate for thermocouple
can be configured as a fail-safe relay
non-linearity
(normally energized when the unit is
powered up). For example, if the alarm Programmable on and off set points 2
relay was configured as a fail-safe; if Alarm relay for remote monitoring
supply control power to the TC-100 is Trip relay for remote monitoring
interrupted, the alarm relay changes Two fan power relays
3
state for notification of this condition.
Fan failure detection to start a
The alarm circuit is also used for
notification of an open or a missing
backup fan or alarm 4
thermocouple. If a thermocouple were Fan exerciser (cycle time and
to open, the alarm relay operates and duration) to reduce fan wear
the corresponding channel will read - Fans can be operated automatically 5
on the LED display. It is important to or manually
note that a failed thermocouple
TC-100
will not cause the device to trip the Metering 6
transformer offline. Average temperature
(all three windings)
General Description Form C contacts are provided to trip 7
Maximum instantaneous
The TC-100 Transformer Temperature the transformer offline if any of the temperature (all three windings)
Controller monitors up to three venti- winding temperatures exceed the trip
Maximum temperature memory
lated dry-type transformer windings setting. A red LED indicates that the
per winding
8
and one ambient temperature. The trip relay has actuated.
TC-100 operates relays by comparing Fans hours of operation
A test function is provided to: test the Winding 1, Winding 2, Winding 3 9
the highest winding temperature to
digital display and all of the LEDs; and ambient temperature
stored set point temperatures and
simulate over-temperature conditions;
displays four thermocouple inputs,
and check the internal temperature of Monitoring 10
as well as the stored maximum
the monitor. Trending
temperature and its associated wind-
ing. The unit provides fans, alarm and A 420 mA analog signal is provided Fan failure
trip output relays. Up to two fans can for remote indication or for use with Fan wear 11
be controlled via the TC-100. Each fan SCADA systems. Alarm log
operating contact is fuse protected.
A yellow LED indicates that fans are The TC-100 has built-in monitoring Trip log 12
on. A fan exerciser turns the fans on functions and logging functions to Test mode
automatically at periodic intervals to help you shed some light on the Detect failed sensors
prevent fan motor seizing (on-time unknowns of the operation of your
Self-diagnostics
13
and interval is programmable). transformer. Temperature trending lets
you understand the hour of the day Communications
that the transformer runs hotter, and USB port in the front 14
modify its loading to extend the life of
Modbus-RTU communications
your transformer; logging information
lets you restore the operation of your Programming and monitoring 15
system faster, by letting you correlate software (the unit can be completely
tripping and alarming events to the programmed through the front of
overall conditions of your system; the unit) 16
and fan wear information can be 420 mA output for integration with
used to perform preventive mainte- SCADA systems
nance to increase the uptime in 17
your transformers. Hardware
One trip relay (Form C)
One alarm relay (Form C) 18
Two power fan relays (1 NO each)
Two digital inputs 19
420 mA output for integration with
SCADA systems
Local Alarm 95 db 20
Available in semi-flush or hinge
panel-mounting versions
21

Transformer Temperature Controller October 2015
Sheet 04 118
Technical DataTC-100
ii
10 Figure 4.4-1. TC-100 External Wiring Diagram
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 Figure 4.4-2. Programming and Monitoring Software
21

October 2015 Transformer Temperature Controller
Sheet 04 119
Technical DataTC-100

Table 4.4-1. TC-100 Technical Specifications
i
Control Power ii
Nominal rating 120 Vac or 240 Vac (+10%, 25%)
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Power use 15 VA maximum
1
Operating range 120 Vac: 90132 Vac
240 Vac:180264 Vac 2
Ride-through time 20 cycles at nominal Vac
Environmental
Operating temperature 30 to +72C 3
Storage temperature 50 to +72C
Relative humidity 0 to 90% (noncondensing)
4
Measurement Accuracy
Temperature 1C one count under normal conditions
2C one count under extreme conditions
Extreme conditions are:
5
Ambient temperature colder than 10C
Winding to unit temperature greater than 210C
Discrete Inputs
6
Number of inputs Two programmable
Rating 1.2 VA at 120 Vac 7
Max. OFF = 36 Vac
Min. ON = 86 Vac
(built in power source available)
Outputs
8
Output fans Two individually configurable SPST contacts rated 30 A at 120/240 Vac, 1 hp at 120 Vac, 2 hp at
240 Vac for each contact 9
Output alarm One SPDT contact rated 10 A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) configurable for normal or
fail-safe operations
Output alarm One SPDT contact rated 10 A at 120/240 Vac (resistive) configurable for normal of 10
fail-safe operation
Remote analog output 420 mA into a load of up to 1000 ohms max. proportional to hottest winding temperature 1%
EMC 11
Immunity ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-2002 - Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) tests for protective relays
and relay systems
12
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2-2004, standard withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic
interference from transceivers
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
ESD 13
RF Radiated immunity
EN 61000-4-4 EFT/Burst immunity
EN 61000-4-5 Surge immunity
EN 61000-4-6 RF conducted immunity 14
EN 61000-4-8 Power frequency magnetic field immunity
EN 61000-4-11 Voltage variation immunity
Emissions EN 50011 CISPR-11, Class A 15
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Clock
Accuracy +/1 1 minute/month at 25C 16
Logging
Trend data 100 entries, logging interval programmable from 1 minute to 30 days 17
Alarm events Last 25 alarm events
Trip events Last 25 trip events
18
Ordering Information
Table 4.4-2. Catalog Ordering Information for TC-100 Transformer
Temperature Controller for Dry-Type Transformers
19
Description Catalog
Number 20
Barrier cabinet TC-100-Barrier
Controller only (semi flush mounting) TC-100 TC-100
Controller with barrier cabinet (hinge front panel) TC-101 21

October 2015
Sheet 04 120

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

October 2015 InsulGard Predictive Maintenance
Sheet 04 121
General DescriptionInsulGard
InsulGard The term partial discharge is a Eatons InsulGard is a stand-alone

i
common name for small electrical microprocessor-controlled continuous
discharges (arcs) that typically occur partial discharge monitoring device
within or between insulation materi- for a wide range of medium voltage
alsusually across a void in the power equipment. It is designed ii
insulation. Partial discharge is also to provide an alarm based on PD
referred to as corona or surface track- characteristics at an early stage of
ing. The visible evidence of corona insulation degradation. It measures 1
presents itself as white, powdery partial discharges from up to 15
residue, typically found on the end different partial discharge sensors
windings of motors or generators. and stores the information in internal 2
Surface-tracking damage appears as memory, alarming users if any set
tree-like, jagged lines, typically found points are exceeded. InsulGard can
on switchgear and bus ducts. Surface work with constant 50/60 Hz frequency 3
tracking stems from a contaminated powered equipment, as well as with
insulation surface, often started by variable frequency applications.
corona. The small arcing activity on 4
the surface of the insulation contrib- Various PD sensor types can be used,
utes to further burning, resulting in depending on the application.
additional stress points that promote InsulGard has three auxiliary inputs
5
further deterioration. Both corona for PD data correlation to additional
and surface tracking are the primary parameters. One of the inputs is
causes of insulation breakdown, designated for temperature, where
6
which can lead to full discharges and the other two are commonly used for
electrical failures. It is important to load, voltage or humidity depending
note that traditional methods of upon the application. InsulGard has
7
InsulGard
detecting corona and surface-tracking several interfaces that allow for easy
damage require taking equipment
General Description offline. It also requires disassembling
implementation into any alarm or 8
SCADA system:
The InsulGard is a continuous the equipmenta costly procedure.
partial discharge monitor that can be Moreover, corona and surface tracking Three C-form dry relay contacts
applied to a variety of medium voltage damage have to be severe to be provide Yellow or Red alarm indica- 9
electrical equipment rated 4 kV to visible. The InsulGard system allows tion, and the Device Status relay
38 kV. It is commonly applied to you to detect partial discharge while indicates any device malfunction
motors, generators, switchgear, bus the electrical system is energized. It 420 mA optically isolated output
10
duct, unit substations and cable does so by detecting and analyzing the can be configured to represent
systems. The InsulGard will monitor radio signal frequencies emitted by the Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI)
the quality of insulation while the partial discharges. More specifically, or maximum discharge magnitude
11
equipment is in service under normal the InsulGard focuses on the 1 MHz to to any SCADA system
operating conditions. Through moni- 20 MHz bandwidth range where the RS-485 optically isolated interface
toring, it can ascertain the relative majority of partial-discharge activity 12
based on Modbus RTU protocol
condition of insulation, the deteriora- can be detected. InsulGard allows allows for remote device configura-
tion of which is the leading cause of predictive analysis and maintenance
electrical failures. as opposed to preventive analysis and
tion and data download. InsulGard 13
can be networked with an existing
time-based maintenance. Modbus, allowing for up to 231
The InsulGard system consists of
sensors and a monitor. The monitor The detection of partial discharge on addressable devices 14
can be used as a stand-alone unit, or equipment can indicate if a problem Ethernet port, Web page, FTP or
it can be wired so that it can remotely exists. Even more useful is information Modbus TCP
upload data to your system or to Eaton that can correlate the signal intensity
Communication protocol includes
15
diagnostics personnel for analysis. (measured in milliwatts) associated
While the sensors vary according to Modbus, proprietary binary and ASCII
with partial discharges to various
application, they are all designed text options allowing a software 16
states of insulation degradation on
to detect partial dischargesthe programmer to build InsulGard into
similar equipment. Eatons Predictive
foundation of the InsulGard technol- a high-level software program using
Diagnostics Group has studied
ogy and one of the best predictors numerous cases of partial discharge
simple text type commands. InsulGard
is supplied with database software that
17
of insulation breakdown. on rotating equipment and switchgear.
allows for automated communication
The knowledge base accumulated has
allowed Eaton to develop guidelines
to a device or several devices 18
for data acquisition and analysis.
and parameters to help one determine
The software allows for either direct
the seriousness (failure-time windows)
of the partial-discharge activity that the
network or dialup connection to a 19
device by a regular telephone landline
equipment may be exhibiting. Because
or a cellular connection.
it is a continuous, online monitoring
system, it is easy to 20
monitor conditions over time.
21

InsulGard Predictive Maintenance October 2015
Sheet 04 122
InsulGard has 15 signal inputs After each measurement, data from Fullduring this mode PRPDD
i (Ch1Ch15) for partial discharge all active signal channels will be is stored in the memory with the
measurement and a noise input compared to alarm thresholds. If any mentioned above parameters for
dedicated for noise suppression of the Yellow threshold limits are each active channel and every
ii (Ch16). All 16 inputs have identical exceeded, the Warning LED will be measurement.
conditioning circuits (CC) providing turned on and the Warning relay dry
signal isolation, transient suppression contacts will close. In the case of a Briefin order to save a memory,
1 and high-pass filtering of the input Red level achieved, InsulGard will PRPDD can be stored in the memory
signals. The frequency band of the trigger additional measurement and, several times a month. An operator
InsulGard is from 1 MHz to 20 MHz. if confirmed, an Alarm LED will be should set a number of days and a
2 turned on and the Alarm relay dry measurement number at the current
InsulGard acquires PD data in the form contacts will close. If Red alarm is day for storing PRPDD. During the
of three dimensional phase-resolved detected, full measurement data will remaining measurements, InsulGard
3 pulse height distribution (PRPHD) be stored in the memory. will store the brief version of PD data.
PD pulse count as a function of pulse
magnitude and 60(50) Hz phase. It has PD measurements can be performed InsulGard has two Megabytes of
internal flash memory for data storage
4 24 (15) phase windows and a magni- on a time schedule (up to 50 per day)
allowing for its standalone operation.
tude dynamic range of about 70 dB, or in specified time intervals (from
divided in 21 magnitude windows. 1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes). When the memory is filled, the device
starts replacing the oldest data with
5 The data can be stored in the internal
Four measurements per day are
the latest data. The rate of the memory
recommended.
device memory in the form of three- consumption depends upon a number
dimensional PRPHD matrixes and/or Between scheduled measurements, of active channels, frequency of
6 in the brief form of integral quantities the High Alarm feature is enabled. measurements, and frequency of
derived from these matrixes. Each All signal sensors are connected to PRPDD storage. As an example, if all
record is accompanied by three a summation unit and further to a 15 channels are active for measure-
7 additional correlation parameters. separate High Alarm channel. ments four times a day and PRPDD
InsulGard continuously searches for an are stored twice a month, the device
Before each measurement, InsulGard appearance of high magnitude pulses holds 17 months of the latest PD data
8 performs self-calibration and self-test. and pulse series. Magnitude threshold in its internal memory. All stored data
If any problem is detected, the status and repetition in series are configu- and settings can be accessed from
relay dry contacts will open and an rable. If five events of pulse series the keypad, or remotely from a PC.
9 appropriate message will appear on were detected between the scheduled
the InsulGard display. Loss of power measurements, InsulGard will trigger a
will be indicated in the same way by full PD measurement, and display an
10 opening status relay contacts. alarm, if any.
InsulGard measures signals from Full PD measurement by InsulGard
11 signal inputs sequentially multiplexing involves a measurement of statistical
them to a single metering channel. Phase Resolved Partial Discharge
Each pulse from each sensor is Distribution (PRPDD) for every active
12 validated by the allowed pulse width. channel. After each measurement
In the case of non-compliance, for every active channel, InsulGard
InsulGard will not count the pulse. calculates PDI, Maximum PD magni-
13 tude, PD pulse repetition rate, and
trend parameters (rate of PD parameter
change). The calculated parameters
14 are compared to alarm set points
and alarm status is determined. All
calculated and alarm status parameters
15 are stored in the internal memory for
each measurement. Additionally, three
auxiliary parameters (temperature,
16 % of full load current and operating
voltage or humidity) are assigned to the
measurement data. PRPDD can, option-
17 ally, be stored in the internal memory.
There are two modes of PD data stor-
age Brief and Full.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 123
Alarms Yellow and Red alarms operate differ- Continuous Watch Feature
InsulGard has two configurable alarms,
ently. In the case of a Yellow alarm, it
Between the scheduled measurements
i
will appear on the corresponding relay
Red and Yellow, that connect to two as received. In the case of a Red alarm, the Continuous Watch feature (High
C-form relays. There are two groups of InsulGard will initiate an additional Alarm) is initiated. At this time all ii
parameters that can generate an alarm. measurement at the time of alarm, signal sensors are summarized and
One is if an alarm set point is exceeded and only if confirmed, will indicate the connected to the separate High Alarm
(Partial Discharge Intensity (PDI) and its alarm by relay. If the Red alarm is not channel. InsulGard is continuously 1
trend or PD pulse magnitude and its confirmed, the status of the alarm will watching for the events of high
trend). One of two, PDI or Magnitude, be set per the last measurement. If at magnitude pulses (configurable)
can be configured for alarm at one any measurement the alarm status will and their series. If five series of such 2
time. The same parameter is config- be reduced, InsulGard will indicate the events are detected, InsulGard starts
ured for 420 mA interface output reduced alarm status with both an full PD measurement and, in the case
automatically. 420 mA output provides alarm LED reading and relay. of Red alarm confirmation, InsulGard 3
a signal with the slope of 10% of Red indicates this alarm and stores full PD
Alarm Threshold per 1mAmp. That Alarm relays can operate in two data in the internal device memory.
means that Red alarm threshold modes (configurable). Relays lock 4
corresponds to 14 mA output. in an alarm status received at the Schedule
last measurements, until the next PD measurements can be performed
Alarm set points for PDI are repre-
sented in terms of mW. Magnitude is
measurement. Or a relay can operate at specified times during a day or 5
for a limited configurable time and time interval basis (configurable).
represented in terms of mV. then open the contacts. At the next The device is shipped with time
Trend is set in terms of times per year measurement, if an alarm status is basis schedule enabled and set to 6
for both PDI and Magnitude. Alarm on detected, relays will hold the alarm record measurements four times a
trend is enabled after a training period contacts closed for the same time. day. This is sufficient for all common
of 1/3 of the trend-sliding window. applications. 7
Trend
InsulGard calculates trend of a If necessary, InsulGard can be set to
parameter enabled for alarm. Trend measure up to 50 times per day at 8
is normalized to the value of the scheduled times or in specific time
parameter change in times per year. intervals varying from 1 minute to
Trend has two alarm thresholds, 23 hours 59 minutes. 9
Yellow and Red, connected to alarm
relays and also to the alarm status LED
at the front panel of the device. Trend 10
is calculated as a linear approximation
of data over specified time interval
(default is 18 weeks). This 18-week 11
time window is sliding over time while
device monitors partial discharges.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 124
Technical DataInsulGard

i Table 4.5-1. Power Source Specifications
ii Applications HV and MV equipment (motors including VFD), switchgears, generators, bus
ducts, cable terminations, transformers, est.)
Mounting options In NEMA 4X enclosure. On the panel. Door (Flash) mount
1 Installation category II
Pollution degree 2
2 Temperature range
Relative humidity
40 C to +70 C (+85 C without enclosure)
0%RH90%RH
Maximum altitude 6562 ft (2000 m)
3 Power source 115 V / 230 Vac 10%
60 / 50 Hz
Power consumption of device (VA max) 15 VA
4 Fuse inside InsulGard case: 20 mm, 250 Vac, time lag 5TS type by BEL Inc. For 115 Vac5ST200-R (200 mA)
For 230 Vac5ST125-R (125 mA)
Input fuse on the panel (panel mount option): 20 mm, 250 Vac, Fast fuse 5MF 5MF 3 R (3 A)
5 type by BEL Inc. (A maximum output current from outlet for 115 Vac3A)
Display Graphic dot display, two lines
Keypad Four arrows and four functional keys
6 LEDs (normal, warning (Alarm 1) or Alarm (Alarm 2) conditions, memory and Five LEDs
setting modes
Approximate Size (Length x Width x Height) and Weight
7 Main unit 9.20 x 7.00 x 2.50 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 6.4 cm), 4.2 lb (1.9 kg)
Door-mount option (main unit with sensor interface board) 9.20 x 7.00 x 4.00 inches (23.4 x 17.8 x 10.2 cm), 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
Panel-mount option 14.80 x 12.90 x 4.00 inches (37.6 x 32.8 x 10.2 cm), 10.3 lb (4.7 kg)
8 Enclosure (NEMA 4X) mount option 17.20 x 15.40 x 8.80 inches (43.7 x 39.0 x 22.3 cm), 21.6 lb (9.8 kg)
PD Measurement Parameters
9 PD channels 15
Noise channel 1
Continuous watch (high PD activity) channel 1
10 Basic type of data Phase-resolved PD distribution
PD channel dynamic range 68 dB
Number of magnitude windows (3.23 dB each) 21
11 Number of phase windows (15 each) 24
Power frequency at a monitored equipment 320 Hz, 20400 Hz
Synchronization type Internal and external
12 Maximum measured pulse repetition rate 367,300 pulses/second at 60 Hz
306,000 pulses/second at 50 Hz
Calculated parameters for each PD channel Partial discharge intensity (PDI) or maximum pulse magnitude (Qmax),
13 Pulse repetition rate (pps), Trend
Alarming parameters PDI, Qmax, Trend
Data record types Full/Brief
14 Internal data memory allows for up to 1000 days data storage at 2 MB
four measurements per day
Self-test and self-calibration At powering up and before every measurement
15 Setup Configurable from keypad and PC
Allowed RG-58 coaxial cable length to PD sensors Up to 150 ft (46 m)
16 Auxiliary Inputs
Input specified for temperature measurement calibrated for 100 ohm platinum 1
RTD sensor
17 Analog inputs specified for current, voltage or humidity measurement 2
USB Host For future use
Interfaces
18 C-form dry-type relays for device status, warning (Alarm 1) and alarm (Alarm 2) 3
PD levels (fully configurable) 120 Vac/ 5 A
28 Vdc/ 5 A
19 For other ratings refer to the relay specification
420 mA isolated interface represents highest PDI or max. magnitude Slope is 1 mA per 10%
as % of the alarm (Alarm 2) threshold
20 RS-485 interface optically isolated (231 addresses) Communication Protocol: Modbus RTU, binary, text commands
Ethernet Modbus-TCP, Web page, FTP
USB PC connection
21 USB host For future use

Sheet 04 125
Product SelectionInsulGard
General Notes Table 4.5-2. Standard Equipment

The three basic InsulGard packages Description Quantity i
are Switchgear Applications,
Motor Applications and Generator InsulGard 1 ii
Applications. At the beginning of Humidity sensor mounted as specified 1
each section to follow are the basic Temperature mounted as specified 1
components typically found in each
RS-485 communication port 1 1
type of application.
InsulGard software CD 1
Switchgear Applications Set of instruction manuals 1
2
Switchgear Applications have three Table 4.5-3. InsulGard Switchgear PackagesOrder PD Sensors Separately
typical components: InsulGard
Switchgear Package, Coupling Description Catalog
Number
3
Capacitor Sensors and RFCT Sensors.
Door-mount InsulGard for mounting onto indoor cabinet door cut-out, includes: PD-IG-S-E0
lnsulGard Systems for Switchgear RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol 4
Applications are sold as packages. Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports
Packages provide greater value. Embedded temperature and humidity sensors
Standard Equipment with the InsulGard software CD and one set of instruction manuals 5
lnsulGard Switchgear Package is Back-panel-mount (no enclosure) for installing InsulGard into an existing enclosure, PD-IG-S-E1
shown in Table 4.5-3. includes:
RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol 6
Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports
Embedded temperature and humidity sensors
InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals 7
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: PD-IG-S-E2
RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol
External temperature and humidity sensors (PD-SR-TS, PD-SR-HS)
8
InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals
Table 4.5-4. Communication Options

9
Description Catalog
Number 10
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length, PD-USB
remote connection to PC USB port
Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV PD-MODEM 11
(installed on back panel except for door-mounted IG it must be mounted separately)
Table 4.5-5. Auxiliary (Dynamic) Sensors 12

Description Catalog
Number
Auxiliary Sensors for InsulGard, BushingGard
13
External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS) PD-SR-TS
Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet
14
External humidity sensor for InsulGard (HS) PD-SR-HS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes Current Transformer (CT), rated 5 A,
with ID = 0.50 inches
PD-SR-CT 15
Connect to secondary winding of the motor (or generator) current transformer
Note: Differential current transformer cant be used
Supplied with default cable L = 65 feet 16
Split (Flex)Core CT rated 500 A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT. PD-SR-CTF
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement
if the motor/generator current transformer cant be used 17
(Order separately if required)
Note: In switchgear applications, humidity and temperature sensors are installed in the same
switchgear cubicle (embedded) with the InsulGard. 18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 126
Table 4.5-6. Coupling Capacitors Sensors Motor Applications

i Description Catalog Generally, the Motor Application
Number
components list consists of just the
InsulGard Partial Discharge Sensors InsulGard Package itself. In some
ii IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor PD-SR-IPDS-5 applications, the customer may
Set of three 5 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit want to monitor the cable feeding
Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet the motor. In those cases, one will
1 IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor PD-SR-IPDS-7 need to add the line item for the
Set of three 7 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit appropriate RFCT.
Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet
2 IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor PD-SR-IPDS-15 InsulGard Systems for Motor
Set of three 15 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Applications are sold as packages.
Supplied with default RG58 cable L = 65 feet Packages provide greater value.
3 IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor PD-SR-IPDS-27 Standard Equipment with the
Set of three 27 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit lnsulGard Motor Package is shown
in Table 4.5-8.
4 IPDS-Integrated partial discharge sensor PD-SR-IPDS-38
Set of three 38 kV, 80 pF coupling capacitors with mounting kit Table 4.5-8. Standard Equipment
Description Quantity
5 Note: The number of cubicles will determine the number of coupling capacitors required for
InsulGard 1
the project. One set of three coupling capacitors is required for every three vertical structures.
The catalog numbered set includes mounting kits, boots, cables and the like. NEMA 4X enclosure 1
6 Set of three coupling capacitors 1
Table 4.5-7. RFCT Sensor The length of cable or sensitivity Coupling capacitor mounting kit 1
Description Catalog zone of protection depends upon the (cabling, hardware,
7 Number type of cable, the number of splices, boots, connectors)
and the number of taps. PLIC Type RTD module (six inputs) 1
0.75-inch diameter RFCT, PD-SR-RFCT-075 Cable is protected up to maximum External mount humidity sensor 1
8 default cable length 65 feet
of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition) (65 ft cable pigtail included)
distances are shorter with protection Temperature sensor 1
The number of RFCTs required
up to a maximum of 300 ft. (65 ft cable pigtail included)
9 is determined by what cables the
customer wants to protect (to protect In figures shown below, the lnsulGard RS-485 communication port 1
secondary cables leaving the switch- is protecting the six vertical section lnsulGard software CD 1
10 gear, incoming feeder cables to the switchgear layout with the two sets of Set of instruction manuals 1
main breaker/switch, etc.). There will coupling capacitors and is protecting
be one RFCT per cubicle to protect the feeder cables via the RFCTs installed
11 the cabling (even if there are multiple
cables per phase).
on the power cable shield. An exploded
view of the RFCT is also shown.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 Typical Installation of RFCT Sensor
20
21

Sheet 04 127
Table 4.5-9. InsulGard Motor Packages

Description Catalog i
Number
InsulGard Motor Kits
Stator RTD number 8
ii
Motor voltage 15 kV
For motors with Stator RTD number 9 order additional PD-SR-RTD-6
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: PD-IG-M-E2-A1
1
One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-X), X = kV, choose 5, 7 or 17
2
One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6
Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT) 3
One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6) 5
External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS)
Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT)
Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input 6
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: PD-IG-M-E2-A2-CTF
One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6 8
External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS)
Split core CT (PD-SR-CTF)
Cable for spare stator RTD for temp sensor input
9
Table 4.5-10. Communication Options 10
Description Catalog
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS-485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port PD-USB 11
Advanced RS-232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV PD-MODEM
12
Table 4.5-11. Auxiliary (Dynamic) Sensors
Description Catalog
Number
13
External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS) PD-SR-TS 14
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5 A, with ID = 0.50-inches PD-SR-CT
Note: Differential current transformer can't be used 16
Split (flex)core CT rated 500 A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT. PD-SR-CTF
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for load measurement if the motor/generator current transformer can't be used
17
Note: In most motor applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard Enclosure (typically field mounted in
cable termination compartment) and shipped with a 65 foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not typical for 18
motor applications. Also please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
Table 4.5-12. RFCT Sensor 19

Description Catalog
Number
0.75-Inch diameter RFCT, default cable length 65 feet PD-SR-RFCT-075

20
21

Sheet 04 128
The length of cable or sensitivity Generator Applications Table 4.5-13. Standard Equipment
i zone of protection depends upon the
Typically, the Generator Package Description Quantity
type of cable, the number of splices,
and the number of taps. PLIC Type components list consists of the
ii Cable is protected up to maximum InsulGard Package and occasionally
additional sets of coupling capacitors.
InsulGard 1
of 1500 ft. EPR (rubber composition) NEMA 4X enclosure 1
distances are shorter with protection For part numbers of additional sets Set of three coupling capacitors 1
1 up to a maximum of 300 ft. of coupling capacitors, please see
Coupling capacitor mounting kit 1
Switchgear Applications Section on (cabling, hardware,
Page 4.5-5. boots, connectors)
2 lnsulGard Systems for Generator RTD module (six inputs) 2
Applications are sold as packages. External mount humidity sensor ( 1
Packages provide greater value. 65 cable pigtail included)
3 Standard Equipment with the Temperature sensor 1
lnsulGard Generator Package is (65 cable pigtail included)
shown in Table 4.5-13. RS-485 communication port 1
4 lnsulGard software CD 1
Set of instruction manuals 1
5
Table 4.5-14. Generator Packages
Description Catalog
6 Number
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV
7 RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol
8 One RTD-6 sensor board PD-SR-RTD-6
9 InsulGard software CD and set of instruction manuals
10 Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports
One RTD-6 sensor board (PD-SR-RTD-6)
11 External humidity sensor (PD-SR-HS)
12
InsulGard Generator Kits (Air-Cooled)Voltage 27 kV
InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: PD-IG-GV-E2-A1
13 RS-485 communication port with Modbus RTU protocol
One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27)
Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6)
14 Auxiliary sensors set (PD-SR-A1)
15 InsulGard in NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes:

PD-IG-GV-E2-A2

One set of coupling capacitors (PD-SR-IPDS-27)
16 Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6)
Auxiliary sensors set A2 (PD-SR-A2)
17 InsulGard Generator Kit (Hydrogen-Cooled)Voltage 16 kV
InsulGard inside NEMA-4X non-metallic enclosure with transparent window, includes: PD-IG-HC-E2-A3
18 Universal communications with USB and Ethernet ports
Two RTD-6 sensor boards (PD-SR-RTD-6)
19 Load sensor CT (PD-SR-CT)
20
21

Sheet 04 129
Table 4.5-15. Communication Options

Description Catalog i
Number
RS-485-to-USB converteronly required if using RS485 port for extended length, remote connection to PC USB port PD-USB ii
Advanced RS232/485 industrial Modem TD-36485HV PD-MODEM
1
Table 4.5-16. Auxiliary (Dynamic) Sensors
Description Catalog
Number 2
External temperature sensor for InsulGard (TS) PD-SR-TS
Load sensor for InsulGard: includes current transformer (CT), rated 5 A, with ID = 0.50-inches PD-SR-CT
4
Note: Differential current transformer cant be used
Split (Flex) - Core CT rated 500 A. Supplied with preinstalled PD-SR-CT. PD-SR-CTF
Should be installed on a motor power supply cable for Load measurement if the
motor/generator current transformer cant be used 6
Note: In most generator applications, the humidity and temperature sensors will be external to the InsulGard enclosure {typically field mounted
in cable termination compartment} and shipped with a 65-foot coaxial pigtail. Mounting in the same cubicle as the lnsulGard is not typical for 7
generator applications. Also, please indicate if CT input is customer furnished or must be supplied and what type it is/should be.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 04 130
Connection DiagramInsulGard
Connection Wiring Diagram

i
ii 1
2
Modem TD-34
3
4
InsulGard Panel Wiring Diagram Phone
RJ-11
1 IWD115-M N
L
Cable
Local
2 Port
RS485
3
2
1
Cables
3
BLACK
from:
RED
1 RTD-WHITE 1 RTD
Temperature
2 RTD-BLACK 2 Sensor
4 3 RTD-RED
LOAD-SIG-RED
3
4 CT-Load
4
sensor
5 LOAD-GND-BLACK 5
5 6
7
H%(GND)-WHITE 6
H%(+5V)-RED 7
Humidity
sensor
8 H%(SIG)-BLACK 8
9 4-20mA- (+) 9
6 X1
DIN-Rail Terminal Strip

Ch1 10 4-20mA- (-) 10
+
K
4-20
Connector to Interface Board
mA
T
Sensor Interface Board
X2 11 RS485-A(+) 11
-
Connector to InsulGard
Ch2
12 RS485-B(-) 12
+5
7
C
RS-485
A
Ch3 13 RS485-ISOGND 13
B
Coax cables from PD Sensors ##1-16
14 ALARM - NC 14
A
G
Ch4
15 ALARM - COM 15
Alarm
Alarm 2
8
L
Ch5 16 ALARM - NO 16
Ch6
17 WARNING-NC 17
B
18 WARNING-COM 18
Ch7
9 19 WARNING-N0 19
Warning
InsulGard
Alarm 1
20 STATUS-NC 20
ALL Ch8
BLUE 21 STATUS-COM 21
Ch9
22
10 STATUS-NO 22
L
Ch10 23 NOT/USED 23
RED
L
1 24 NOT/USED 24
Status
Ch11
2
R3
RTD
11
A
3
4
Ch12 L
WHITE
5 S
Ch13 GR
6 CT
N
7 S1
12 Ch14
GREEN
RED
WHITE
8 S2 Ref PC cable RED 25

L
Power
9
Ch15
N
10 to temporary 26
G
GREEN
11 +5 H% broughtScrew
Ground
115 VAC
Ch16
laptop 27 LINE
on back cover
13 12 S
H%
Sw
Ref
(Noise)
28
29
WHITE NEUTRAL
GREEN 30
14 GREEN 31
GROUND
GREEN
ENCLOSURE,
DIN RAIL
15 PANEL
GROUND
GROUND
FUSES:
Inside InsulGard for 115 Vac Application: Time-Lag 80 mA, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 195 Series by Wickmann (DigiKey.com, Part No: WK5026-ND)
16 On the Panel: Fast Acting 3.0A, 250 Vac, 5 x 20 mm, 191 Series by Wickman (DigiKey Part No: WK4714-ND).
17 Figure 4.5-1. Typical Connection Diagram

Notes
18 1. Modem with Power Module are installed if ordered. 4. Fuses: Miniature Fuses 5 x 20, 250 Vac, 195 Series by
Wickmann (DistributorDigiKey.com).
2. On motors, an unused RTD can be used as the temperature
sensor (wire colors in brackets relate only to TS sensor). 5. Fuse inside InsulGard for 120 V application200 mA
19 (DigiKey Part NO: WK5034-ND), for 230 Vac application
3. In switchgears current sensor (CT) is not used, and if 80mA (DigiKey Part NO: WK5026-ND). Fuse on a panel:
panel is installed without an enclosure, the temperature 1.0 A (DigiKey Part NO: WK5048-ND).
20 (TS) and humidity (HS) sensors can be installed directly
on the panel. Use a left fitting (hub) on the enclosure 6. Outlet is not installed for 230 Vac application.
for power supply cable and for the cables to the relays
21 (Alarm1&2, R3) and use a right hub for all signal cables.

Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide 5.0-A
September 2011
Sheet 05 001
Medium Voltage Switchgear i

Table 5.0-A. Medium Voltage Switchgear Selector Guide
CAG Tab Voltage Switching Drawout Front/Rear Compartmentalized Insulated ANSI
Tab Title Range Device or Fixed Accessible Breaker Bus Cable VTs & Bus Standards ii
Area CPTs
5 Metal-Clad Switchgear 4.7638 kV Vacuum Drawout Front & rear C37.20.2 1

VacClad-W Medium Voltage breaker required
Drawout Vacuum Breakers
6 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear 4.7615 kV Front only C37.20.2 & 2
MEF Front-Access Medium required C37.20.3
Voltage Drawout Vacuum Breakers
7.1 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MEB Medium Voltage Drawout
Front & rear
required
C37.20.3 3
Vacuum Breakers
7.2 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
MSB Medium Voltage Switch- and
Switch &
vacuum
Fixed

4
Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breakers breaker
8 Metal-Enclosed Switchgear 4.7638 kV Fusible
MVS Medium Voltage switches 5
Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
Optional front access only designs available.
Available as an option.
6
10
11
12
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Switchgear MEB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MSB Metal-Enclosed Switchgear 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear MEF Switchgear (515 kV) 21

Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage
5.0-1
October 2015
Sheet 05001
Metal-Clad Switchgear
VacClad-WMedium Voltage
Contents i
Metal-Clad Vacuum Breaker SwitchgearVacClad-WMedium Voltage
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1 ii
5 and 15 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-4
5 kV Switchgear26.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-8 1
27 kV Switchgear36.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-9
38 kV Switchgear42.00-Inch Wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-10
Arc-Resistant Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
2
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
Integral Motorized Remote Racking Option (VC-W MR2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-5 3
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1 4
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-13
Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-15
5
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-16
Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-17
Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-23
6
Control Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-25
RelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-27 7
Main-Tie-Main Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-29
Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1 8
5 and 15 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-1
27 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-13
9
38 kV (Standard Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-17
5 and 15 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-20
27 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-31 10
38 kV (Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-35
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) Room Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-39 11
Transfer SwitchesMedium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Tab 12
Specifications 12
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
13
Section 16346 Sections 26 13 26
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VacClad-W Metal-Clad Arc-Resistant Switchgear
21

5.0-2
October 2015
Sheet 05 002

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.1-1
October 2015 Drawout Vacuum Breakers
Sheet 05 003
General Description
Application Description i
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad
switchgear with Type VCP-W vacuum
breakers provides centralized control ii
and protection of medium voltage
power equipment and circuits in
industrial, commercial and utility 1
installations involving generators,
motors, feeder circuits, and transmis-
sion and distribution lines. 2
VacClad-W switchgear is available in
maximum voltage ratings from 4.76 kV 3
through 38 kV, and interrupting ratings
as shown below. VacClad-W offers a
total design concept of cell, breaker 4
and auxiliary equipment, which can be
assembled in various combinations to
satisfy user application requirements. 5
Two-high breaker arrangements
are standard up to 15 kV. One-high
arrangements can be furnished 6
when required.
Ratings 7
Maximum Voltages:
4.76 kV, 8.25 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV, 38 kV 8
Typical Indoor Assembly with a Breaker Withdrawn on Rails (Arc Resistant Switchgear)
Interrupting Ratings:
4.76 kV: Up to 63 kA 9
8.25 kV: Up to 63 kA Fixed
15.0 kV: Up to 63 kA Stem
27.0 kV: Up to 40 kA 10
38.0 kV: Up to 40 kA
Continuous CurrentCircuit Breakers:
Contacts 11
1200 A, 2000 A, 3000 A (5 and 15 kV)
4000 A Forced cooled (5 and 15 kV) Bellows
1200 A, 2000 A, (27 kV) Shield 12
600 A, 1200 A, 1600 A, 2000 A,
2500 A (38 kV)
3000 A Forced cooled (38 kV) Movable
Stem
13
Continuous CurrentMain Bus:
1200 A, 2000 A, 3000 A (5 and 15 kV)
Support Gasket Only
14
4000 A (5 and 15 kV) (Seal Formed by Bellows)
1200 A, 2000 A, 2500 A, 2700 A (27 kV)
1200 A, 2000 A, 2500 A, 3000 A (38 kV) VCP-W Circuit Breaker Cut-Away View of Vacuum Interrupter
(Enlarged to Show Detail)
15
Note: Continuous currents above 4000 A,
contact Eaton.
Advantages 16
Certifications Eaton has been manufacturing metal- given to material quality and maximum
clad switchgear for over 60 years, possible use was made of components
UL and CSA listings are available for
many configurations; consult Eaton and vacuum circuit breakers for more proven over the years in Eaton 17
than 40 years. Tens of thousands of switchgear.
Eaton vacuum circuit breakers, used in a Maintenance requirements are
wide variety of applications, have been minimized by the use of enclosed
18
setting industry performance standards long-life vacuum interrupters. When
for years. maintenance or inspection is required,
the component arrangements and
19
With reliability as a fundamental goal,
Eaton engineers have simplified the drawers allow easy access. The light
VacClad-W switchgear design to mini- weight of the VacClad-W simplifies 20
mize problems and gain trouble-free handling and relocation of the breakers.
performance. Special attention was
21

5.1-2
Drawout Vacuum Breakers October 2015
Sheet 05 004
General Description
Standards All VCP-W circuit breakers are hori-

i Eatons VacClad-W switchgear meets or Three-Phase zontal drawout design, which pro-
Test Source vides connect, test and disconnect
exceeds ANSI/ IEEE C37.20.2 and (Low Voltage) position. A latch secures the breaker
ii NEMA SG-5 as they apply to metal- Main Bus
in the connected and disconnected/
clad switchgear. The assemblies also
test position. 5/15/27 kV breakers
conform to Canadian standard CSA-
can be fully withdrawn on extension
1 C22.2 No. 31-04, and EEMAC G8-3.2.
rails for inspection and maintenance
Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers
without the need for a separate lift-
meet or exceed all ANSI and IEEE BKR
ing device. 38 kV circuit breaker is
2 standards applicable to AC high
designed to roll directly on the floor
voltage circuit breakers rated on
symmetrical current basis. All breaker functions, indicators
and controls are grouped on an
3 Seismic Qualification Shorting Bar easily accessible panel on front of
(Bolted Fault) the breaker
Trip-free interlocks prevent moving
4 a closed circuit breaker into or out
Figure 5.1-1. Metal-Clad Switchgear Short-
Circuit and Momentary Withstand Tests of the connected position
5 The short-time current withstand
Breaker cannot be electrically or
mechanically closed when in the
Refer to Tab 1 for information on tests demonstrate electrical adequacy intermediate position
of busses and connections against
6 seismic qualification for this and
physical damage while carrying the Closing springs automatically
other Eaton products. discharge before moving the circuit
short-circuit current for a given duration.
The momentary current withstand tests breaker into or out of the enclosure
7 Metal-Clad Switchgear demonstrate the mechanical ade- Breaker frame remains grounded
Compartmentalization quacy of the structure, busses and during levering and in the
connections to withstand electro-mag- connected position
8 Medium voltage metal-clad switchgear
netic forces with no breakage of insu- Coding plates are provided to ensure
equipment conforming to C37.20.2 is
a compartmentalized design, wherein lation. It should be noted that design only correct breaker rating can be
testing of standard metal-clad switch- installed in cell
9 primary conductors are fully insulated
gear does not involve any internal arc-
for the rated maximum voltage of the Quality Assurance Certificate is
assembly, and all major primary circuit ing faults. included with each circuit breaker
10 components are isolated from each
FeaturesVacuum Circuit Breaker Easy-to-see contact erosion indicator
other by grounded metal barriers. is provided as standard on the
This type of construction minimizes High power laboratory tests prove vacuum interrupter moving stem.
11 the likelihood of arcing faults within VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to Only periodic visual inspection is
the equipment and propagation of 200 full fault current interruptions required to verify that the contacts
fault between the compartments V-Flex (stiff-flexible) current transfer have not worn out
12 containing major primary circuits. from the vacuum interrupter A simple visual means, T-cutout, is
The C37.20.2 metal-clad switchgear moving stem to the breaker primary provided to verify by simple visual
equipment is designed to withstand disconnecting contact is a non- inspection that the loading springs
13 the effects of short-circuit current in sliding/non-rolling design, which are applying proper pressure to the
a bolted fault occurring immediately eliminates maintenance required contacts when the breaker is closed
downstream from the load terminals with the sliding/rolling type transfer Vacuum interrupters with copper-
14 of the switchgear. The bolted fault arrangements. The V-Flex system chrome contacts provide superior
capability is verified by short-time and provides excellent electrical and dielectric strength and very low
momentary short-circuit withstand thermal transfer, and long vacuum chop current
15 current testing on complete switchgear, interrupter life.
High-strength, high-impact, track-
as well as by fault making (close and Easy inspection and accessibility is resistant glass polyester on 5/15 kV
latch) testing on the switching devices afforded by a front-mounted stored
16 as shown in Figure 5.1-1. energy operating mechanism. The
and cycloaliphatic epoxy on 27/38 kV
is used for primary insulation and
same basic mechanism is used on support as standard
all ratings, which requires a minimum
17 investment in spare parts
18
19
20
21

5.1-3
Sheet 05 005
General Description
Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers i

Fixed
Glass Polyester
Stem
ii
Insulator
Front-Accessible Stored
1
Vacuum Interrupter Contacts
Energy Mechanism
Pole Unit
Breaker Operations
Bellows
Shield
2
Counter Manual Spring
Charging Port
Breaker Main Contacts
Open/Closed Status Movable 3
Spring Charged/ Stem
Discharged Status
Manual Push-to-Close 4
& Open Pushbuttons Support Gasket Only
(Seal Formed by Bellows)
Type VCP-W 5/15 kV Circuit Breaker Cut-away View of Vacuum Interrupter 5
(Enlarged to Show Detail)
6
Primary Pole Unit
Disconnect
Vacuum
Epoxy Primary Interrupter 7
Insulator Disconnect Front-Accessible Located
Stored Energy Inside this
Mechanism Molded 8
Behind this Epoxy
Panel Housing
9
Insulation
Shrouds
Control Panel 10
(Breaker
Functions and
Indicators)
Alignment 11
Rollers
Code Plates 12
Secondary Disconnect Breaker Wheel
Type VCP-W 27 kV Circuit
BreakerSide View
BreakerFront View
BreakerRear View
13
Type VCP-W Circuit BreakerFeatures 14
15
16
17
18
19
V-Flex System Contact Erosion Indicator T-Cutout
20
21

5.1-4
Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide) October 2015
Sheet 05 006
General DescriptionSwitchgear
FeaturesSwitchgear Circuit Breaker Compartment A silver-plated copper ground

i bus provided on the levering pan
Assembly The mechanism for levering the assembly is engaged by a spring
breaker is a unique cell mounted loaded ground contact on the circuit
ii VacClad is a Metal-Clad Design design. It incorporates all the safety
interlocks to render the breaker
breaker to ensure that the circuit
Eatons VacClad switchgear is an inte- breaker remains grounded through-
mechanically and electrically trip- out its travel
grated assembly of drawout vacuum
1 circuit breakers, bus and control
free during the levering procedure
devices coordinated electrically and

mechanically for medium voltage Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV Shown)
2 circuit protection and control. The
metal-clad integrity provides maximum
circuit separation and safety.
3
All circuit breakers are equipped
with self-aligning and self-coupling
4 primary and secondary disconnect-
ing devices, and arranged with
a mechanism for moving it
5 physically between connected
and disconnected positions
All major primary components, such
6 as circuit breaker, voltage trans-
former, control power transformer,
and buses are completely enclosed
7 and grounded by metal barriers.
A metal barrier in front of the
circuit breaker and auxiliary drawer
8 ensures that, when in the connected
position, no live parts are exposed
by opening the compartment door
9
Automatic shutters cover primary
circuit elements when the remov-
10 able element is in the disconnected,
test or removed position
All primary bus conductors and Front ViewStandard (non arc-resistant) Metal-Clad Switchgear
11 connections are insulated with track-
resistant fluidized bed epoxy coating Automatic Steel Shutters
for rated maximum voltage of the
12 assembly
Mechanical interlocks are provided
to maintain a proper and safe
13 operating sequence
Instruments, meters, relays, second-
ary control devices and their wiring
14 are isolated, where necessary, by MOC & TOC
Secondary
grounded metal barriers from all Disconnect Switch (Optional)
primary circuit elements Under this Cover
15
Ground Bus
VacClad is Corona Free Levering Screw Assembly Code Plates
16 Corona emissions within the standard Circuit Breaker Compartment (Arc Resistant Switchgear)
VacClad switchgear assemblies have
been eliminated or reduced to very
17 low levels by special fabrication and
assembly techniques, such as round-
ing and buffing of all sharp copper
18 edges at the joints, employing star Cell Studs
washers for bolting metal barriers,
and using specially crafted standoff
19 insulators for primary bus supports. Front-Accessible CTs
By making switchgear assemblies
corona-free, Eaton has made its Primary
20 standard switchgear more reliable. Insulating Tubes
21
Circuit Breaker Compartment Shown with Shutters Opened for Illustration

5.1-5
October 2015 Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)
Sheet 05 007
Circuit Breaker Compartment Control power transformer drawer is Grounding straps are provided
(Continued) mechanically interlocked with in each drawer to automatically i
the transformer secondary main ground and discharge primary fuses
Each circuit breaker compartment breaker that requires the main when the drawer is withdrawn
is provided with steel shutters breaker to be opened, so that ii
(breaker driven) that automatically the primary circuit is disconnected
rotate into position to cover the only under no-load when the drawer
insulating tubes and stationary cell is withdrawn 1
studs to prevent accidental contact
with live primary voltage, when
the breaker is withdrawn from the Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV Shown) 2
connected position
Current transformers installed
over the primary insulating tubes, 3
located behind the steel shutters, VT Drawer
are front accessible. Up to four
standard accuracy current trans- 4
Extension Rail
formers can be installed per phase. VT Secondary Fuses
Front accessibility permits adding
or changing the transformers when 5
the unit is de-energized without CTP Drawer
breaking high voltage connections
and primary insulation CPT Secondary Breaker/
6
Code plates ensure that only correct Drawer Interlock
breaker rating can be installed in cell 7
CPT Secondary
Main Breaker
Auxiliary Compartments
5/15 kV VacClad design permits up to Drawout Auxiliaries 8
four auxiliary drawers in one vertical
unit (only two shown in the photo). VT Primary Extension Secondary CPT, Single-Phase Primary
These drawers can be used for installing Fuses Rail Terminals up to 15 kVA Taps 9
voltage or control power transformers,
or primary fuses. Each drawer can also
be configured for use as a battery tray. 10
Each auxiliary drawer is a horizontal
drawout design that can be fully 11
withdrawn on extension rails similar
to the breaker, thus allowing front
access to auxiliary equipment 12
to permit easy testing and fuse
replacement
A safety shutter (operated by 13
the drawer) is included in each
auxiliary drawer compartment.
It automatically operates when 2 or 3 VTs
CPT Primary
Fuse
Extension
Rail
14
the auxiliary drawer is withdrawn
to protect workmen from accidental VT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails CPT Drawer Shown Fully Withdrawn on Rails
contact with the stationary primary 15
contacts Primary Fuse
Grounding Straps
Each auxiliary drawer can accom-
modate two voltage transformers,
(Attached to
Cell Frame)
16
connected line-to-line (open delta);
three voltage transformers, con-
nected line-to-ground; or single- Secondary 17
Disconnect Glass Polyester
phase control power transformer up Shutter Barrier
Block
to 15 kVA, 15 kV with their associated
primary fuses. Three-phase control 18
power transformer, or single-phase
transformers larger than 15 kVA
can be fixed mounted within the 19
structure, with their primary fuses
installed in the auxiliary drawer
Drawer to Cell Frame Space Heater
20
Ground Contact (Optional for Indoor)
VT/CPT Compartment with VT/CPT Drawer RemovedInside View 21

5.1-6
Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide) October 2015
Sheet 05 008
i
Rear Compartments Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV Shown)
Rear of each structure is segregated
into main bus and cable compartments Customers
Cable Lugs (stress Power Cables
ii by grounded metal barriers, as
required for a given application.
cones not shown)
Access to main bus and power cable Metal Barrier Between

1 connections is provided from the rear Upper and Lower
through removable bolted covers or Compartment
optional rear hinged doors. Cable
2 trough (chimney) is provided to segre-
gate upper and lower compartment
power cables as required.
3 All primary buses (main bus and line
and load runbacks) are 100% con-
ductivity copper, and insulated for
4 rated maximum voltage of the
assembly by flame retardant, track-
resistant fluidized epoxy coating.
5 The bolted bus joints are silver- or Breaker Shown in the Connected Position
optionally tin-plated for positive
contact and low resistance, with
6 each joint insulated with easily
installed boots. Bus supports
between the adjacent units are
7 made of high-impact, high-strength,
Surge Arresters
(Optional)
track-resistant glass polyester at 5
and 15 kV, and cycloaliphatic epoxy Cable Barrier
8 at 27 and 38 kV
(Chimney)
Adequate space is available for Pre-formed Insulating Boots

9 cable termination, bus duct connec- Around Bus Joints
tion, installation of zero sequence
Copper Bus, Insulated with
current transformers, and surge Fluidized Epoxy Coating
10 arresters. In two-high arrangement,
Rear View
power cables for each circuit are
separated by metal barriers
11 A bare copper ground bus is pro-
vided in the rear of each structure,
which extend the entire length of the
Breaker Shown in the Test/
12 switchgear
Disconnected Position
All control wiring is isolated from
primary circuit elements by
13 grounded metal-conduit or braided
Main Bus Support
Between Each
metal jacket, with the exception of Adjacent Unit
short lengths of wire such as at
14 instrument transformer terminals Copper Bus,
Silver or
(Optional)
15 Tin Plated
16 Fluidized
Epoxy
Coating
17
18 Breaker Shown in the Fully

Withdrawn Position
19
Main Bus Details
20
21

5.1-7
October 2015 Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 & 15 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)
Sheet 05 009
Roll-on-the-Floor Breaker Option i
ii
4
VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with
Fixed Wheels
5
Roll-on-the-Floor Switchgear Compartment 10

An optional direct roll-in breaker When using a 1200 or 2000 A circuit
designed for use in upper and lower breaker in the lower compartment, the 11
compartment of 5/15 kV indoor and compartment above the breaker can
outdoor walk-in aisle switchgear is be left blank or used of auxiliaries,
available for all 5/15 kV VCP-W, VCP- such as VTs or single-phase CPT, or 12
WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. primary fuses for three-phase or larger VCP-W Direct Roll-in Breaker with
Breaker is fitted with special wheel kit, than 15 kVA single-phase CPTs. When Swivel Wheels on Front
and compartment interface is modified using 3000A circuit breaker in the 13
to allow circuit breaker to be rolled lower compartment, the compartment
directly from the floor into the switch- above the breaker is left blank
gear compartment, or from switchgear for ventilation. The design is rated for 14
compartment onto the floor without application in Seismic Zone 4 environ-
a need for external lifting device ment. It can also be supplied with
or dolly. The circuit breaker can be UL or CSA label for certain ratings. 15
supplied with all four fixed wheels or Contact Eaton for ratings available
can be supplied with two swivel-type with UL/CSA label. The overall
wheels on the front and two fixed dimensions of the 5/15 kV indoor and 16
wheels on the rear. In 2-high outdoor walk-in aisle structures with
construction, the roll-on-the-floor the roll-on-the-floor breaker option are
breaker option is available for breakers the same as the standard structures 17
in upper or lower compartments, how- that use standard non roll-on-the-floor
ever, removal of upper breaker circuit breakers.
requires external lifter and lift pan, 18
which are optional accessories.
19
20
21

5.1-8
Drawout Vacuum Breakers5 kV (26.00-Inch Wide) October 2015
Sheet 05 010
General Description
i 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Application Description 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Low
Profile Model
5 kV 250 MVA Switchgear This narrow width VacClad-W MV
In addition to the floor space saving
Metal-Clad switchgear was designed
for use in instances where floor space offered by the standard 26.00-inch
ii requirements would not allow the (660.4 mm) wide model, a further
industry standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) saving in the height and depth of the
wide switchgear. Typical applications switchgear is also available. Where
1 include not only new construction height and depths are an issue, such
but also replacement switchgear for as an outdoor powerhouse or in a
mobile power container, the standard
2 installations previously equipped with
26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide air-break 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high unit can
devices. This line of switchgear has also be reduced to an 80.00-inch high
(2032.0 mm), 72.00-inch (1828.9 mm)
3 been used where 5 kV, 1200 A, 250 MVA
deep low profile model. Main bus
applications are commonplace, such as
generator and control applications. rating available in the 80.00-inch
(2032.0 mm) high x 72.00-inch
4 (1828.9 mm) deep low profile model is
Ratings
limited to 1200 A maximum. It is not
The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide switch- compatible in size or location with
5 gear line is designed for use with standard 26.00-inch (660.4 mm)
Eatons Type VCPW-ND Narrow wide or 36.00-inch (914.4 mm)
Design vacuum circuit breakers rated wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high
6 Fully Withdrawn Breaker
4.76 kV, 60 kV BIL, 250 MVA, 1200 A VCP-W units.
maximum, with rated main bus of
1200 or 2000 A. For installations The low profile model is designed to
7 requiring 2000 A main breakers with house breaker over auxiliary or auxil-
1200 A feeders, lineups can be built iary over breaker, or auxiliary over
with standard 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) auxiliary. In order to provide maximum
8 wide main breaker cubicles and 26.00- vertical space for power cable termina-
inch (660.4 mm) wide feeders. tions, auxiliary over breaker configura-
tion should be used for customers top
9 Configurations entrance cables, and breaker over aux-
iliary configuration should be used for
26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Standard Model customers bottom entrance cables.
10 The 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design Auxiliary compartments are designed
is flexible. Available configurations to accommodate one or two auxiliary
include breaker over breaker, one or drawers. That is, up to four auxiliary
11 two auxiliary drawers over breaker, drawers can be installed in an auxiliary
breaker over one or two auxiliary over auxiliary configuration. A set of
drawers, or up to four auxiliary drawers two line-to-line or three line-to-ground
12 in one vertical section. The standard connected voltage transformers, or a
Automatic Shutters height and depth are 95.00-inch single-phase control power transformer
(2413.0 mm) and 96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) up to 15 kVA can be installed in each
13 respectively. A breaker over auxiliary, auxiliary drawer. Because of the
or auxiliary over breaker combination reduced depth, control devices cannot
can be supplied in reduced depth of be located on breaker compartment
14 86.25-inch (2190.8 mm). The depth door. All control devices should be
of breaker over breaker combination located on the auxiliary compartment
can also be reduced to 86.25-inch doors. Refer to Pages 5.5-11 for
15 (2190.8 mm) if power cables for top available configurations, dimensions
breaker enter from the top and the and weights.
16 cables for bottom breaker enter from
For all 26.00-inch (660.4 mm)
the bottom.
wide configurations, multifunction
The main bus location and connections microprocessor-based relays and
17 in the standard 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) meters, such as Eatons E-Series relays
high 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide design and Power Xpert meters are recom-
are 100% compatible with standard mended for reduced panel space.
18 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high 36.00-inch
(914.4 mm) wide vertical sections. As a
Fused PT Drawer result, additions to existing Eaton 5 kV,
19 250 MVA 36.00-inch (914.4 mm) wide
VCP-W installations can be simply
and rapidly performed without costly
20 system modifications and transition
sections. Refer to Pages 5.5-8 and 5.5-9
for available configurations, dimen-
21 sions and weights.

5.1-9
October 2015 Drawout Vacuum Breakers27 kV (36.00-Inch Wide)
Sheet 05 011
General Description
27 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear Each auxiliary drawer can accom- Epoxy Primary

modate two voltage transformers Insulator Disconnect i
connected line-to-line, or three
Application Description voltage transformers connected
Eatons 27 kV nominal metal-clad line-to-ground, which can be with- ii
switchgear is used for applications at drawn for easy maintenance and
system voltages higher than 15 kV, up replacement of primary fuses
to and including 27 kV. It is designed When required by an application, 1
for use with Type VCP-W, horizontal a single-phase control power trans-
drawout vacuum circuit breakers. former up to 37.5 kVA, or a three-phase
control power transformer up to 2
Ratings 45 kVA can be fixed mounted in the
Maximum rated voltage: 27 kV rms front bottom compartment, with the
Note: Eaton tested to 28.5 kV. primary fuses in an auxiliary drawer 3
BIL withstand: 125 kV peak located in the upper compartment.
When the control power transformer is
Maximum symmetrical interrupting: located remotely from the switchgear, 4
16 kA, 22 kA, 25 kA, 40 kA rms but fed through primary fuses located
Continuous current: in the switchgear, the fuses are
Circuit breakers1200 A, 2000 A installed in an auxiliary drawer. The 27 kV VCP-W Circuit BreakerSide View 5
Switchgear main bus primary fuse drawer is key interlocked
One-high design: 1200 A, 2000 A with the control power transformer Drawout
Two-high design: 1200 A, 2000 A, secondary main breaker to ensure Auxiliary Drawer 6
2500 A, 2700 A that it is opened first, and transformer
load is disconnected, before the fuse
Features and Configurations drawer can be withdrawn
7
27 kV metal-clad switchgear design 27 kV metal-clad switchgear is available
is an extension of Eatons 5 and 15 kV in general purpose, ventilated, indoor 8
VacClad design. It has same footprint or outdoor aisleless type enclosure
and overall space envelop, and it Two-high 27 kV arrangements with
incorporates all features and breaker-over-breaker are available in 9
advantages of the 5 and 15 kV VacClad indoor type enclosure
design, with the exception of some Roll-on-the-floor configurations are
modifications required for 27 kV available 10
application.
Uses horizontal drawout type
VCP-W 125 kV BIL rated vacuum 27 kV SwitchgearFront View 11
circuit breakers
Surge Arresters
A cycloaliphatic epoxy insulation 12
material is used throughout the
switchgear housings and the circuit
breakers for phase-to-ground Main Bus
Barrier
13
and phase-to-phase primary bus
supports. For decades, cycloaliphatic
epoxy insulation has demonstrated Split Rear
Covers
14
its outstanding electrical and
mechanical characteristics in harsh
Epoxy Bus
outdoor applications. The use of this Supports 15
insulation system with the 27 kV
design ensures a comfortable margin
of safety at higher voltages 16
All primary bus conductors are insu-
lated for full 28.5 kV by fluidized epoxy
coating. All buses are fabricated from 17
100% conductivity copper. Bus joints
are silver- or tin-plated as required, and
covered with pre-formed insulating 18
boots to maintain metal-clad integrity Fluidized Epoxy Coated Cu Bus
Available configurations include:
auxiliary over breaker, and auxiliary
27 kV SwitchgearRear View 19
over auxiliary. Each auxiliary or breaker
requires one-half vertical space
20
21

5.1-10
Sheet 05 012
General Description
38 kV Metal-Clad Switchgear Easy inspection and accessibility is All 38 kV circuit breakers are horizontal
i afforded by front mounted stored drawout design, which provide
energy operating mechanism. The connect, test and disconnect position.
Application Description same basic mechanism is used on A latch secures the breaker in the
ii Eatons VacClad switchgear family is all ratings, which requires a mini- connected and disconnected/test
designed for use in applications with mum investment in spare parts position. The circuit breaker is
distribution voltages up to 38 kV maxi- designed to roll directly on the floor
1 mum. Typical applications include not
only new construction but also replace-
ment for older air-break, minimum oil
2 or SF6 switchgear. The circuit breaker Control
and switchgear will meet industry Compartment
requirements for greater safety, quality,
3 superior reliability and minimal main- Type VCP-W Roll-on
tenance while providing higher insulation the Floor Drawout
levels in less space than other breaker Circuit Breaker
4 types, thus reducing overall switchgear
size for significant space savings.
Breaker
5 Ratings Compartment
Door
Maximum rated voltage: 38 kV rms
6 BIL withstand: 150 kV peak
Maximum symmetrical interrupting
with K = 1: 16 kA, 25 kA, 31.5 kA, Control Panel
7 40 kA rms, and 35 kA rms (21 kA (Breaker Functions
rating with K = 1.65) and Indicators)
Continuous current:
8 Circuit breakersup to 2500 A Contact Erosion
Indicator
Switchgear main busup to 3000 A
9 Features38 kV Secondary
Contact Block
Vacuum Circuit Breaker
10 Corona-free design increases circuit
breaker reliability and in-service life Guide Rails Ensure
by maintaining insulation integrity Breaker/Cell Alignment
11 Superior cycloaliphatic epoxy Lift/Pull Handle Code Plates
insulationa void-free insulating 38 kV BreakerFully Withdrawn
material with outstanding electrical
12 and mechanical characteristics, such
as track resistance, dielectric Pole Unit
strength, and fungus resistance, Primary
13 even in harsh industrial environ- Disconnect
mentis used throughout the circuit
breaker as primary phase-to-phase
14 and phase-to-ground insulation Vacuum Interrupter
Axial-magnetic, copper-chrome Located Inside
this Molded
15 contacts are used in 38 kV vacuum Epoxy Housing
interrupters to provide superior
dielectric strength, better perfor-
16 mance characteristics, and lower Insulation Shrouds
chop current
High power laboratory tests prove
17 VCP-W breakers are capable of 50 to
200 full fault current interruptions
V-Flex (stiff-flexible) current transfer
18 from the vacuum interrupter
moving stem to the breaker primary
disconnecting contact is a non-
19 sliding/non-rolling design, which
Alignment Rollers
eliminates maintenance required

with the sliding/rolling type transfer Breaker
20 arrangements. The V-Flex system Wheel
provides excellent electrical and
thermal transfer, and long vacuum
21 interrupter life 38 kV BreakerRear View

5.1-11
Sheet 05 013
General Description38 kV Switchgear
Features38 kV Vacuum Features38 kV Circuit breaker compartment is

Circuit Breaker (Continued) Switchgear Assembly designed to interface with Type i
VCP-W 38 kV circuit breaker. It
All breaker controls and indicators Like the circuit breaker described includes floor-mounted breaker pan
are functionally grouped on the above, the 38 kV switchgear assembly assembly (levering assembly) with ii
front control panel and include: is a corona-free metal-clad design. all safety interlocks required by the
main contact status, closing spring It incorporates many features and metal-clad design. Cell mounted
status, port for manual spring charg- advantages of 5, 15 and 27 kV VacClad guide rails accurately guide the 1
ing, close and trip button, and design, with additional modifications breaker into the cell during levering,
mechanical operations counter required for 38 kV application. and ensure correct alignment
Clearly visible contact erosion of the circuit breaker primary 2
Industry-leading cycloaliphatic
indicator on the front of the breaker disconnects with the cell primary
epoxy supports are used for primary contacts when breaker reaches
Trip-free interlocks prevent moving
a closed circuit breaker into or out
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground connected position 3
insulation throughout, providing
of the connected position Coding plates are provided to
150 kV BIL and 80 kV (1 minute)
ensure only correct breaker rating
Breaker cannot be electrically or power frequency withstand capability
can be installed in the cell 4
mechanically closed when in the All primary bus conductors are
intermediate position Automatic steel shutters cover
insulated for full 38 kV by fluidized
Closing springs automatically epoxy coating. All buses are cell primary contacts when circuit 5
discharge before moving the circuit fabricated from 100% conductivity breaker is withdrawn from its con-
breaker into or out of the enclosure copper. Bus joints are silver- or nected position, to prevent persons
tin-plated as required, and covered from accidentally touching the 6
Breaker frame remains grounded
with Eatons pre-formed insulating stationary primary cell contacts.
during levering and in the Each shutter can be padlocked in
connected position boots to maintain metal-clad integrity
Coding plates are provided to
the closed or open position. It can
also be manually latched open as
7
ensure only correct breaker rating Control Control
required for maintenance
can be installed in cell Compartment Devices
8
Quality Assurance Certificate is
included with each circuit breaker
9
Provision for
Padlocking Shutter Steel
in Closed Position Shutters 10
11
12
Breaker Compartment
38 kV SwitchgearControl Compartment 13
Ground Secondary MOC Switch
Bus Disconnect Beneath this Cover Stationary Steel Shutter 14
Primary
Contacts
Breaker Compartment (Shutter Shown 15
Open for Illustration)
16
17
Breaker Levering TOC Code
Pan Assembly Switch Plates 18
MOC Guide
Switch Rail
38 kV SwitchgearCircuit Breaker 19
Compartment Provision for
Guide Padlocking
Rail Racking Screw 20
and Moving Block
Breaker Pan
Assembly
Assembly
21
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly

5.1-12
Sheet 05 014
Features38 kV Switchgear
i Assembly (Continued)
A separate control compartment is
ii provided for installation of protec-
tion, metering and control devices. Enclosed Main
No devices are located on circuit Bus Compartment
1 breaker compartment door
Rear of the switchgear is divided in
Bus SupportEpoxy
main bus and cable compartments,
2 isolated from each other by Customers Cable
grounded metal barriers. Sufficient Connections
space is available for customers top
3 or bottom entry power cables. Bus
duct terminations can also be Ground Bus
supplied. A bare copper ground bus
4 is provided along the entire lineup,
with an extension in each cable 38 kV Switchgear AssemblyRear View
compartment for termination of
5 power cable shields
Each 38 kV 150 kV BIL indoor structure
6 is 42.00 inches (1066.8 mm) wide x
95.00 inches (2413 mm) high x 124.36
inches (3158.8 mm) deep. Also avail- Bus SupportEpoxy
7 able are outdoor aisleless and out-
door sheltered aisle structures
Voltage transformers are equipped
8 with integral top-mounted primary
Cu Bus, Silver- or
fuses and installed in an auxiliary
Tin-Plated at Joints
compartment. Two auxiliary com-
9 partments can be provided in one
vertical section. Each auxiliary com-
partment can be supplied with 1, 2 Fluidized Epoxy
Coated Bus
10 or 3 VTs, and can be connected to
bus or line, as required for a given
application. The VTs assembly is
11 located behind a fixed bolted panel,
and provided with mechanism for
moving it between connected and
12 disconnected position. The VT
assembly is interlocked with the Main Bus
fixed bolted panel such that the
13 panel cannot be removed unless the
VTs are withdrawn to disconnected Cycloaliphatic
position. A shutter assembly covers Epoxy Support
14 the primary stabs when VTs are
withdrawn to disconnected position.
A mechanism is also provided to
15 automatically discharge VT primary Power Cable Lug
fuses as the VTs are withdrawn from
connected to disconnected position Removable Insulating
16 Ring type current transformers Boots at Bus Joints
are installed over bus or line side
primary insulating bushings, located
17 behind the steel shutters, in the
breaker compartment. In this design,
the CTs are easily accessible from
18 the front, after removal of the circuit
breaker. The front accessibility
permits adding or changing the CTs Ring Type Current
19 when the equipment is de-energized,
Transformers
but without removal of high voltage Rear Compartment (Partial)

joints or primary insulation. The
20 design allows installations of two
sets of standard or one set of high
accuracy CTs on each side of the
21 circuit breaker

5.1-13
Sheet 05 015
38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignAvailable Enclosures (42-Inch, 48-Inch and 60-Inch Wide Structures are Available)
i
ii
7
Indoor UnitDirect Roll-on-the-Floor Breaker Breaker Removal Platform for Outdoor Aisleless
10
11
12
13
14
15
Non-Walk-In (OD Aisleless) Walk-In (OD Sheltered Aisle) 16
17
18
19
20
21

5.1-14
October 2015
Sheet 05 016

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.2-1
October 2015 Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Sheet 05 017
General Description
Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Eatons 5/15 kV switchgear is designed Circuit Breakers

i
and tested for IEEE Type 2B accessibility,
Switchgear Medium Voltage and 27 and 38 kV switchgear is designed The Type VCP-W and VCP-WC vacuum
and tested to IEEE Type 2. circuit breakers, used in VacClad-W
arc-resistant switchgear, meet or ii
Arc-resistant features are intended to exceed all ANSI and IEEE standards
provide an additional degree of protec- applicable to AC high voltage circuit
tion to the personnel performing normal breakers rated on symmetrical current 1
operating duties in close proximity to basis, including but not limited to:
the equipment while the equipment C37.04, C37.06, and C37.09. Also avail-
is operating under normal conditions. able are type VCP-WG vacuum circuit 2
The normal operating conditions for breakers conforming to IEEE standard
proper application of arc-resistant C37.013 for AC high voltage generator
switchgear designs are as follows: circuit breakers. 3
All doors and covers providing Third-Party Certification
access to high voltage components
are properly closed and latched 5 and 15 kV arc-resistant metal-clad 4
switchgear assemblies can be provided
Pressure relief devices are free
with CSA (Canada or USA) or UL
to operate
(USA only) listing. Contact Eaton 5
The fault energy available to the for available ratings.
Arc-Resistant Switchgear equipment does not exceed the
with Plenum Installed rating of the equipment (short- Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad 6
circuit current and duration)
Application Description There are no obstructions around
Switchgear
Eaton has been manufacturing arc- the equipment that could direct the Arc-resistant metal-clad switchgear 7
resistant metal-clad switchgear since arc fault products into an area also conforms to C37.20.2 and is tested
1990. Eaton was the first major North intended to be protected as such for short time and momentary
American manufacturer to design, test The equipment is properly grounded short-circuit withstand for through 8
and manufacture arc-resistant switch- bolted fault as noted on Page 5.1-2. In
gear in accordance with EEMAC G14.1. The user should also refer to docu- addition, the enclosure is also tested in
We now offer Type 2 and 2B arc-resis- ments such as NFPA 70E, for safety accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7 9
tant switchgear assemblies, designed training and safe work practices and for withstand against the effects of
and tested in accordance with the IEEE methods of evaluating safe work internal arcing faults as shown in
C37.20.7, with Type VCP-W drawout distances from energized equipment Figure 5.2-1. 10
vacuum circuit breakers. based on the potential flash hazard,
and use proper PPE when working on
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad arc- or near energized equipment with the Three-Phase 11
resistant switchgear with Type VCP-W door/cover opened or not properly Test Source
vacuum circuit breakers can be Main (High Voltage)
secured.
configured in various combinations Bus
12
of breakers and auxiliaries to satisfy Standards
users application requirements.
One-high and two-high arrangements Switchgear Assembly 13
can be provided when required. Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad BKR
arc-resistant switchgear meets or
Arc-Resistant Switchgear exceeds the following standards 14
Ground
Accessibility Types and test guides: Bus
Arc-resistant switchgear performance North American Documents 0.5 mm Dia. (24 AWG) Wire 15
is defined by its accessibility type
IEEE C37.20.2Standards for Used to Initiate Arcing Fault
in accordance with IEEE test guide
Metal-Clad Switchgear
C37.20.7 as follows:
IEEE C37.20.7Guide for Testing Figure 5.2-1. Arc-Resistant Switchgear 16
Type 1Switchgear with arc-resistant Metal-Enclosed Switchgear for Enclosure Internal Arcing Short-Circuit
designs or features at the freely Internal Arcing Faults Withstand Test
accessible front of the equipment only. 17
Canadian Documents Internal arcing faults are those faults
Type 2Switchgear with arc-resistant CSA C22.2 No. 31-04Switchgear occurring in air, phase-to-phase or
designs or features at the freely acces- Assemblies phase-to-ground, within the confines 18
sible exterior (front, back and sides) of of the switchgear enclosure. Arcing
EEMAC G8-3.2Metal-Clad and
the equipment only. (Type 2 incorporates faults can occur within a switchgear
Station Type Cubicle Switchgear 19
Type 1.) compartment as a result of insulation
EEMAC G14-1Procedure for
Type 2BSwitchgear with Type 2 failure or human error. The arcing fault
testing the resistance of metal-clad
produces a tremendous release of heat
accessibility plus arc-resistant in front switchgear under conditions of
energy at the point of the fault, which 20
of the instrument/control compartment arcing due to an internal fault.
with the instrument/control compart- heats and expands the air volume
The G14-1 was the first North
ment door opened. (Type 2B incorpo- American testing guide introduced 21
rates Type 2.) in 1987

5.2-2
Arc-Resistant Switchgear October 2015
Sheet 05 018
General Description
within the enclosure, and may decom- The structure roof, including the A viewing window is provided on
i pose or vaporize materials exposed to pressure release flap vents, is drip the door and on front panel of the
an arc or involved in its path. The proof. The design is made strong such drawer to allow viewing of the drawer
effects of this type of fault vary that the roof can be walked-on position and the primary fuses
ii depending on enclosure volume, arc when the gear is completely de- In 5/15 kV designs, each auxiliary
duration, arc voltage, and available energized (for example, during drawer can also accommodate a
short-circuit current. If the switchgear installation) single-phase CPT rated up to 15 kVA,
1 is not designed and tested to with- Since arc pressure is vented out with primary fuses, or the drawer
stand effects of internal arcing faults, through the top of each individual can also be configured as a fuse
its parts could blow away along with vertical section, the equipment drawer with two or three primary
2 discharge of hot decomposed matter, damage is confined to individual fuses, and connected to a fixed
gaseous or particulate, causing injury structures, minimizing damage to mounted CPT (single-phase or
to personnel that may be present in its adjacent structures three-phase 45 kVA maximum) in
3 vicinity. Arc-resistant switchgear is the rear of the structure
designed to channel and control effects Circuit Breaker Compartment In 27 kV designs, an auxiliary drawer
of the arcing fault and its enclosure is can be configured as a fuse drawer
4 tested for withstand against such fault The levering mechanism is
with two primary fuses and
in accordance with IEEE guide C37.20.7. mechanically interlocked with the
compartment door such that the connected to a fixed-mounted CPT
5 door cannot be opened until the (single-phase 25 kVA maximum)
Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit in the rear of the structure
circuit breaker is opened and
Breaker Features and Ratings levered out to the test/disconnect In 38 kV designs, fuse drawer can be
6 VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant position. This interlocking ensures provided with two primary fuses
switchgear is designed for use with that the levering of the circuit and connected to a fixed-mounted
Eatons state-of-the-art medium volt- breaker into or out from the CPT (single-phase 25 kVA maximum)
7 age vacuum type VCP-W (standard connected position is done with in the rear of the structure. Please
ANSI), VCP-WC (extra capability), and compartment door closed and note that in 38 kV designs, a fuse
VCP-WG (generator) circuit breakers. latched, with no exposure to drawer requires a full vertical
8 Refer to Tables 5.4-1B, 5.4-2 and 5.4-3 potential arc flash section, because it occupies the
for complete list of available ratings. Easy access and viewing ports same compartment space as
are provided on the door to allow required for a circuit breaker
9 Arc-Resistant Enclosure and operator to carry out normal
Arc Exhaust functions with the door closed Control Compartments
and latched, with no exposure to The control compartment doors can
10 VacClad-W arc-resistant switchgear potential arc flash. Those functions be opened to access control wiring
is designed to withstand effects of include: Breaker levering and without having to de-energize the
internal arcing faults up to its rated arc manual opening of the circuit primary circuit. The control compart-
11 short-circuit current and duration. The breaker, viewing of open/close ments have been tested to provide
arc-withstand capability of the switch- status of the breaker main contacts, arc-resistant protection with its door
gear enclosure is achieved by use of viewing of charged/discharged opened under normal operating
12 reinforced heavier gauge steel where status of the closing springs, condition. Please note the control
needed, smart latching of doors and viewing of mechanical operations compartment door should be opened
covers, and top-mounted built-in counter, and breaker position only for access to control wiring when
13 pressure relief system. Following
needed, and should remain closed at
are standard design features built Auxiliary Compartments all other times.
into each arc-resistant switchgear
14 assembly. VacClad arc-resistant 5/15 and 38 kV
Relay Box on Breaker Compartment
designs permit maximum of two
The formed steel compartment auxiliary drawers in one vertical Door in 5/15 kV Switchgear
15 design provides sealed joints under
fault conditions. This prevents smoke
section. The 27 kV design permits
When needed for additional relays/
maximum of only one auxiliary
and gas from escaping to other drawer per vertical section. instruments/controls, a relay box
mounted on the breaker compartment
16 compartments, a condition that can
Each auxiliary drawer is equipped door provides ample space for individ-
occur with switchgear compartments
designed with conventional flat with cell-mounted levering mecha- ual breaker relaying and controls.
nism. The mechanism is mechanically Access to control wiring or device
17 bolted panels
interlocked with its compartment terminals that are enclosed within the
Integral, pressure release flap vents
door such that the door cannot be relay box does not require opening of
mounted on top of each individual the circuit breaker compartment door.
opened and access to auxiliary
18 vertical section provide for controlled
drawer cannot be gained until the
upward release of arc created over- Arc Exhaust Wall and Arc Exhaust
drawer is first levered out to the
pressure, fire, smoke, gases and
disconnected position. This interlock- Chamber (Plenum)
19 molten material out of the assembly
ing ensures that the levering of the
without affecting structural integrity, Refer to Page 5.5-39.
auxiliary drawer into or out from
and protect personnel who might
the connected position is done with
20 be present in the vicinity of the
compartment door closed and latched,
switchgear
with no exposure to potential arc flash
21

5.2-3
Sheet 05 019
General Description
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear i
ii
5
Front ViewType VCP-W 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant 5/15 kV Auxiliary 5/15 kV Breaker
Switchgear (Plenum Above the Switchgear Not Shown) Over Auxiliary Over Breaker 6
10
Breaker Compartment Breaker Shown Fully VTs DrawerShown Fuse DrawerShown
Withdrawn on Fully Withdrawn Fully Withdrawn
Extension Rails 11
12
13
Ground Bus 14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear View 5/15 kV VCP-W Rear ViewBreaker Over Rear ViewBottom
Arc-Resistant Switchgear Breaker Cable Termination Cable Compartment
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-20 to 5.5-30 and Pages 5.5-39 to 5.5-41.
20
21

5.2-4
Sheet 05 020
General Description
i 27 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
ii
8 Front View27 kV VCP-W Arc-Resistant Switchgear

(Plenum Above the Switchgear is Not Shown)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 Typical 27 kV CellControls in Top,

Breaker in the Bottom
Rear ViewTypical 27 kV
Breaker Cable Termination
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-31 to 5.5-34 and Pages 5.5-39 to 5.5-41.
18
19
20
21

5.2-5
Sheet 05 021
General Description
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear i
ii
6
38 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Shown Without Circuit Breaker Compartment Circuit Breaker Compartment
Arc Plenum Above the Switchgear) Shown with Breaker Removed 7
9
Control
Compartment Main Bus Main Bus
Cover (Shown 10
with Cover
Removed)
11
VT Drawer
Primary Cable
12
Termination
13
14
15
16
Front ViewVT Over VT VT Tray Rear Assembly
Note: Application layouts and dimensionsrefer to Pages 5.5-35 to 5.5-41. 17
18
19
20
21

5.2-6
October 2015
Sheet 05 022

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.3-1
October 2015 Partial Discharge
Sheet 05 023
General Description
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear i
ii
InsulGard Relay (PD Monitoring) 3

Partial discharges within the switch-
gear compartment are detected by 4
installation of a small donut type radio
frequency current transformer (RFCT)
sensor over floating stress shields of 5
the specially designed bus or line side
RFCT Sensor
primary bushings. Partial discharges in
InsulGard Relay
customers power cables (external dis- 6
Partial Discharge Equipment charges) are detected by installation of
the RFCT around ground shields of the
Partial Discharge in Switchgear Sensing and Monitoring incoming or outgoing power cables 7
Partial discharge is a common name for Eatons Type VCP-W metal-clad switch- termination.
various forms of electrical discharges gear (2.438 kV) is corona-free by
such as corona, surface tracking, and design. Corona emissions within the In 38 kV switchgear (refer to Figure 5.3-3),
one RFCT sensor is installed around
8
discharges internal to the insulation. standard VacClad switchgear assemblies
It partially bridges the insulation have been eliminated or reduced to very primary bushing stress shield in every
between the conductors. These low levels by special fabrication and breaker compartment and supplied 9
discharges are essentially small arcs assembly techniques, such as rounding as standard for measurement of dis-
occurring in or on the surface of the and buffing of all sharp copper edges charges internal to the switchgear com-
insulation system when voltage stress at the joints, employing star washers partment. Its output is wired to terminal 10
exceeds a critical value. With time, for bolting metal barriers, and using blocks in control compartment for easy
airborne particles, contaminants and specially crafted standoff insulators for access for periodic field measurements.
humidity lead to conditions that result primary bus supports. By making It can also be connected directly to 11
in partial discharges. Partial discharges switchgear assemblies corona-free, optional InsulGard relay for continuous
start at a low level and increase as Eaton has made its standard switchgear monitoring of partial discharges.
more insulation becomes deteriorated. more reliable. However, as indicated Because one RFCT sensor is included 12
Examples of partial discharge in switch- above, with time, airborne particles, in 38 kV breaker compartment, Eatons
gear are surface tracking across bus contaminants and humidity lead to 38 kV switchgear is PD Sensing Ready
insulation, or discharges in the air gap conditions that cause partial discharges when received by the customer. 13
between the bus and a support, such to develop in switchgear operating at An additional RFCT sensor for each
as where a bus passes through an voltages 4000 V and above. Type VCP-W incoming and outgoing power cable
insulating window between the sections switchgear can be equipped with fac- circuits can be provided as an option for 14
of the switchgear. If partial discharge tory-installed partial discharge sensors measurement of external discharges.
process is not detected and corrected, and partial discharge sensing relay for In 5/15/27 kV switchgear (refer to
it can develop into a full-scale insulation continuous monitoring of the partial Figure 5.3-2), primary epoxy bushings
15
failure followed by an electrical fault. discharges under normal operation. with stress shield and RFCT sensors
Most switchgear flashover and bus Timely detection of insulation degrada- for measurement of internal as well
failures are a result of insulation tion through increasing partial discharges as external partial discharges are
16
degradation caused by various forms can identify potential problems so that all optional. InsulGard relay is also
of partial discharges. corrective actions can be planned and optional. When specified, one set of
implemented long before permanent primary epoxy bushings (located on
17
deterioration develops. Partial discharge bus side) with stress shield and associ-
detection can be the foundation of an ated RFCT sensor is provided at every
effective predictive maintenance two vertical sections. An additional
18
program. Trending of partial discharge RFCT sensor for each incoming and
data over time allows prediction of outgoing power cable circuits can be
failures, which can be corrected before provided as required. The RFCT output
19
catastrophic failure occurs. signals can be connected directly to
The PD sensing and monitoring system InsulGard relay for continuous moni- 20
consists of Eatons InsulGard Relay toring of partial discharges or can be
and PD sensors specifically developed used for periodic field measurements.
for application in the switchgear to 21
work with the relay.

5.3-2
Partial Discharge October 2015
Sheet 05 024
General DescriptionPartial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring
i
Input
Temp Sensor Terminal InsulGard
ii Humidity Sensor
Block Relay Optional
Modem
2
120 Vac
Auxiliary
3 Signals (up to 15 Total) from Power Output
PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors, Alarm
RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.) Status
4 Figure 5.3-1. InsulGard Relay System
7
RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear
8 compartment.
RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up
to 100 ft from switchgear.
9
Figure 5.3-3. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections
(38 kV Switchgear)
10
11
12
13
14 compartment.
RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up
to 100 ft from switchgear.
15
Figure 5.3-2. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections
16 (527 kV Switchgear)
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus
side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical
sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations.
17
18
19
20
21

5.3-3
October 2015 Partial Discharge
Sheet 05 025
Partial Discharge Sensors and Monitoring for Switchgear

i
Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT) Epoxy Bottles with Stress Shield
ii
3
PD Sensors
6
PD Sensors
PD Sensors are Installed 7
in Switchgear Cubicle
8
Figure 5.3-4. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection
9
Pulse Repetition Rate (PPC)
5 10
4
11
3
2 12
1
0 13
Cub12
Cub13
Cub14
Cub15
Cub16
Cub11
Cub1
Cub2
Cub3
Cub4
Cub5
Cub6
Cub7
Cub8
Cub9
14
Relatively high Partial Discharge levels indicate problems
in older non-fluidized epoxy insulated MV bus. Problems 15
in cable terminations and in connected equipment can also
be revealed.
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.3-5. How the Process WorksData Analysis and Report (Sample)
21

5.3-4
Communications and Supplemental Devices October 2015
Sheet 05 026
General DescriptionCommunications, Protection and Supplemental Devices
i Integrated Monitoring Ground and Test Device

Protection and Control The ground and test device is a drawout
element that may be inserted into a
ii Communications System metal-clad switchgear housing in place
of a circuit breaker to provide access to
Eatons power management products the primary circuits to permit the tem-
provide hardware and software solu-
1 tions that allow customers to interface
porary connection of grounds or test-
ing equipment to the high-voltage
with their switchgear at varying levels circuits. High potential testing of cable
of sophistication. Power Xpert and IQ
2 Meters monitor common electrical
or phase checking of circuits are typical
tests which may be performed. The
parameters and communicate the data devices are insulated to suit the voltage
via standard industry protocols and
3 optional Web interfaces. Power Xpert
rating of the switchgear and will carry
required level of short-circuit current.
Gateways consolidate devices into
a single Web browser interface and Before using ground and test devices,
4 provide Ethernet connectivity. Eatons it is recommended that each user develop 5/15 kV Manual Type G&T Device
Power Xpert Insight and Foreseer detailed operating procedures consis-
Web-based software systems display, tent with safe operating practices. Only
5 analyze and store data from multiple qualified personnel should be authorized
devices across the facility to enable to use ground and test devices.
6 management of the customers
Manual and electrical ground and test
power system.
devices are available, These devices
Refer to Tab 2 for more information on include six studs for connection to
7 communication systems. primary circuits. On the manual device,
selection and grounding is accomplished
by cable or bus bars connection. On
8 Protective Relays electrical-type devices, grounding is
accomplished by an electrically
A full scope of protective relays
operated grounding switch.
9 designed to meet all application
requirements is available to Standard Accessories
provide the utmost in system One test jumper
10 and component protection. Refer
One levering crank
to Tab 4 for further information.
One maintenance tool
5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown
11 Supplemental Devices One lifting yoke (527 kV)
with Upper Terminals Grounded
One sets of rails (527 kV)
Dummy Element (Dummy Breaker) One turning handle (5th wheel, 38 kV)
12
Dummy element is a drawout element Optional Accessories
with primary disconnects similar to a Transport dolly (527 kV),
13 drawout circuit breaker, but consists (515 kV arc-resistant)
of solid copper conductors in place of Portable lifter (527 kV)
vacuum interrupters, and is designed
Test cabinet
14 for manual racking. it is typically used
as drawout disconnect link in the Electrical levering device (538 kV)
primary system for circuit isolation or Ramp for lower breaker (527 kV),
15 bypass. The device is insulated to suit (515 kV arc-resistant)
the voltage rating of the switchgear Manual or electrical ground and
and will carry required levels of short- test device
16 circuit current, but it is not rated for Hi-pot tester
any current interruption. It must be
key interlocked with all source devices
17 such that it can only be inserted into or
removed from its connected position
only after the primary circuit in which it
18 is to be applied is completely 5/15 kV Manual G&T Device shown
de-energized. with Lower Terminals Grounded
19 Before using a dummy element, it is

recommended that each user develop
detailed operating procedure consis-
20 tent with safe operating practices.
Only qualified personnel should be
authorized to use the dummy element.
21

5.3-5
Sheet 05 027
Integral Motorized Remote Racking Option (VC-W MR2)
Integral Motorized Remote A microprocessor-based controller

i
card, located below the drive motor,
Racking Option (VC-W MR2) interfaces with an external hand-held
pendant (standard), discrete external
VC-W MR2 Integral I/O (optional) or external Modbus ii
Racking Device communication (optional) and controls
the breaker/auxiliary drawer move-
ment via the drive motor. The system 1
is also designed such that it allows
manual racking of the breaker/auxiliary
using the levering crank accessory if 2
needed. The VC-W MR2 controller
interface is shown in Figure 5.3-6.
The crank safety switch disables the 3
motor whenever a breaker/auxiliary is
Hand-Held Pendant without Test Position being manually racked in or out. The
connect, test and disconnect limit 4
switches provide breaker/auxiliary
position inputs to the controller card.
In addition to the standard permissive 5
switch, two terminals are provided for
connection of the customers external
interlocking/permissive contact(s). 6
Note that a single-phase 120 Vac
control supply is required for proper
operation of the VC-W MR2 controller 7
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly and the drive motor.
without Test Position VC-W MR2
Integral Racking Device When VC-W MR2 integral racking is 8
supplied, its controller card is wired
to the CAT 6 jack installed in the
associated breaker/auxiliary compart- 9
Hand-Held Pendant with Test Position ment door, and each switchgear
lineup is shipped with one hand-held
VC-W MR2 is an optional motorized pendant with 30 feet of CAT 6 cable. 10
racking device accessory installed The pendant interfaces with the MR2
inside a circuit breaker or auxiliary controller card via the CAT 6 cable
compartment. It is available for through a CAT 6 jack located on the 11
application in circuit breaker compart- breaker/auxiliary compartment door. It
ments of 5/15/27/38 kV Type VC-W arc allows the operator to move away from
and non-arc, and 5 kV VC-W ND metal- the switchgear up to 30 feet and rack 12
clad switchgear. It is also available for the breaker/auxiliary from disconnect to
application in auxiliary compartments connect, or connect to disconnect
of 5/15 kV Type VC-W arc-resistant position by pressing the appropriate 13
switchgear. This optional accessory function pushbutton on the pendant.
allows user to safely move a circuit Breaker/auxiliary positions are
breaker or drawout auxiliary element indicated by three LED lights on the 14
Breaker Levering Pan Assembly with between the connect and disconnect pendant. In those designs where a
Test PositionVC-W MR2 Integral position within their respective circuit breaker is provided with a
Racking Device
compartments from a safe distance distinct test position, pendent includes 15
away from the switchgear. The circuit a test pushbutton to allow movement
breaker compartments in 5/15 kV arc of the circuit breaker between the
and non-arc metal-clad designs are also connect, test and disconnect positions. 16
available with distinct test position. The breaker positions (connect, inter-
In those designs, the VC-W MR2 mediate, test, disconnect) are indicated
accessory allows movement of the by four LED lights. A blinking light 17
circuit breaker between the connect, indicates that the breaker/auxiliary is in
test and disconnect positions. For motion through the selected position.
switchgear designs/ratings not included 18
above, contact Eaton for availability
of MR2 accessory.
19
20
21

5.3-6
Sheet 05 028
A solid (non-blinking) light indicates Technical Data

i that the breaker/auxiliary has reached
and stopped in the selected position. Control Supply Ratings
In case normal operation fails, the Nominal control voltage120 Vac,
ii appropriate error code is displayed in 50 or 60 Hz, single-phase
a separate two-character LED display
Control voltage range100 to
window on the pendant. A list of
1 140 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz
various error codes and their descrip-
tions along with suggested corrective Time to travel from connect to
actions are printed on the back side disconnect, or disconnect to
2 of the pendant. Examples of error connect27 seconds maximum
states: motor overcurrent, motor Current draw during the travel
overtemperature, motor timed out, 15 A maximum for about 3 seconds
3 breaker position unknown, open and 3.6 A for about 24 seconds
permissive, communication error
and no breaker/auxiliary. Requirements for External Contacts
4 and LEDs when Interfacing with MR2
In addition to the pendant, a discrete External contacts should be rated
I/O interface terminal block module for minimum open circuit voltage of
5 can be supplied as an option to allow 5 Vdc, and be able to close and carry
the customer to interface with the MR2 20 mA at 5 Vdc
controller via external hardwired dry When remote LEDs are used, use
6 contacts, for example, pushbuttons 5 Vdc rated LEDs, current up to 20 mA
located at a remote control panel. The
I/O interface module provides output It is the customers responsibility to
7 terminals for connections of remote provide single-phase 120 V, 50 or 60 Hz
6 V LEDs for indication of breaker/ nominal supply for the MR2 controller.
auxiliary position status at the remote It can be derived from within the
8 panel. The remote LED lights are not switchgear if an appropriate control
included with the MR2. With this power transformer is available within
optional I/O interface, the breaker/ the switchgear.
9 auxiliary can be moved between
Type VC-W MR2 motorized racking
connect and disconnect positions from
a remote control panel. If the customer accessory has been endurance tested
10 needs to operate the MR2 with the and guaranteed for 500 operations as
hand-held pendant, the pendant required by IEEE C37.20.2.
becomes the master and will override
11 the customers remote control signals.
The VC-W MR2 controller is also
12 equipped with a CAT 6 jack to allow
the customer to interface with the
controller via their SCADA system using
13 a Modbus interface. Please note that
only one of the two options, discrete
I/O interface or Modbus interface, can
14 be used, but not both. Figure 5.3-7
shows an illustration of a typical Modbus
control example. Additional compo-
15 nents shown outside the MR2 controller
in Figure 5.3-7 are not included with
the MR2. System-level controls can
16 be optionally supplied by Eatons
Engineering Services & Systems.
If the customer needs to operate the
17 MR2 with the hand-held pendant,
the pendant becomes the master and
will override the Modbus interface.
18 Error codes are displayed on Modbus
devices when controlling the MR2 with
Modbus and on the pendant when
19 controlling with the pendant.
20
21

5.3-7
Sheet 05 029
i
CAT 6 Jack Controller
J1 (Software Programming) P/N: 1C19620H01
ii
TB5 TB4 1
J5 CAT 6 Jack 51 52 53 54 CAT 6 Jack CAT 6 Jack 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6
J3 J4 J2 2
CAT 6 CAT 6 CAT 6 3

Cable Cable Cable
(30 ft) 2P 15A
Connect Disconnect Crank
Limit Switch Limit Switch Safety
Circuit
Breaker
4
Switch MOC
Switch L N G
Modbus 120 Vac
J3 Auxiliary MOC 5
Optional Power Input Switch
Discrete I/O
Interface Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
To Customer Hand-Held To Drive 6
Block Module Application Pendant Motor
P/N: 5543630 (Overrides
Test
and Controls
Discrete I/O
Phoenix UKM-RJ
and Modbus)
7
Common
Multiple permissive 8
Disconnect
R = Connect R G Y A contacts may be wired in

Connect
A = Intermediate series with MOC contact

if required by the customer.
G = Disconnect 9
Y = Test
LED Lights
10
Figure 5.3-6. VC-W MR2 Controller Interface for a VCB with Distinct Test Position
11
Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit
Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or Breaker or
Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary Auxiliary
#1 #2 #3 #4 #13 #14 #15 #16 12
RS-485 to USB 13
MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 Converter
CAT 6
14
USB
15
Discrete I/O Interface Twisted Pair
Terminal Block, Shielded Wire, 16
P/N: 5543630 Daisy Chained
Phoenix UKM-RJ Example shown is typical for control of up
to 16 circuit breakers or auxiliary drawers
controlled via each USB COM port. 17
18
USB COM1
Eaton HMI
XP Series
USB COM2 19
USB COM3
20
Figure 5.3-7. VC-W MR2 Typical Modbus Control Example
21

5.3-8
October 2015
Sheet 05 030

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-1
Sheet 05 031
Technical DataStandard VCP-W Circuit Breakers
Discussion of changes in the The change in the K value, however, K = 1 ratings. As a leader in vacuum
Rated Voltage Range Factor, K, in no way affects the ratings and interruption technology, Eaton contin- i
capabilities of circuit breakers originally ues to provide a wide choice of mod-
or K-factor in Circuit Breaker tested and rated on the basis of K > 1 ern vacuum circuit breakers so that the
Rating Structure in the earlier editions of C37.06. Existing user can select the most economical ii
circuit breakers, with ratings based on circuit breaker that can satisfy their
In 1997 and 2000 editions of ANSI K > 1.0, are still perfectly valid, meet circuit switching application.
C37.06, under Table 1, preferred values the latest editions of the standards, 1
for the rated voltage range factor, K, and should be continued to be applied Table 5.4-1A includes 5/15 kV circuit
were set to 1.0 for all indoor circuit as they have been in the past. The breakers rated on the basis of
breaker ratings. This was done because original K > 1.0 ratings are neither K = 1.0 in accordance with revised 2
interrupting capabilities of todays obsolete nor inferior to the new ANSI standards
vacuum circuit breakers are better K = 1.0 ratings; they are just different. Table 5.4-1B includes capabilities of
represented by K = 1.0. Unlike old
air-magnetic and oil circuit breakers,
The new 1997 and 2000 editions of traditional 5/15 kV circuit breakers 3
ANSI standard C37.06 still include the rated on the basis of K > 1.0. Contact
todays vacuum breakers generally do earlier K > 1 ratings as Table A1 and Eaton for availability of these
not require a reduction in interrupting A1A. The change from K > 1.0 to 4
current, as the operating voltage is circuit breakers
K = 1.0 should be implemented by
raised to rated maximum voltage, Table 5.4-1C includes 27/38 kV
manufacturers as they develop and
for example from 11.5 kV up to 15 kV. circuit breakers rated on the basis
The interrupting capability of vacuum
test new circuit breakers designs. The
of K = 1.0 5
change does not require, recommend
circuit breakers is essentially constant or suggest that manufactures re-rate Table 5.4-2 includes circuit breaker
over the entire range of operating and re-test existing breakers to new designs, rated on the basis of K = 1.0 6
voltages, up to and including its rated standard. And accordingly, Eaton with extra capabilities for those
maximum voltage. The change was also continues to offer both circuit breakers applications whose requirements
made as a step toward harmonizing
preferred ANSI ratings with the
rated on the traditional basis of K > 1.0 go beyond what is usually 7
just as thousands of those breakers experienced in normal distribution
preferred ratings of IEC standards. It have been applied for variety of circuit circuit applications
was further recognized that it is much
simpler to select and apply circuit
switching applications worldwide, and
also as Eaton develops new breakers,
Table 5.4-3 includes circuit breakers 8
for special generator applications
breakers rated on the basis of K = 1.0. they are rated and tested to the new
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Metal-Clad SwitchgearVacClad-W Medium Voltage
5.4-2
Sheet 05 032
Table 5.4-1A. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
i (Continued on next page)
Identification Rated Values
Drawout Circuit Insulation Level Short-Circuit Ratings (Reference C37.04-1999 and C37.06-2009 Except as Noted 1)
ii Breaker Type Transient Recovery Voltage
Lightning Impulse Withstand

Power Frequency Withstand
Parameters are Based on TD-4
Asymmetrical Interrupting
Symmetrical Interrupting
DC Component (% DC) 4
1
Short-Time Withstand
Maximum Voltage (V)
Continuous Current 2
Closing and Latching

Voltage (1.2 x 50 s)
Power Frequency 1
TRV Rise Time (t3)
Interrupting Time
Voltage (1 min.)
(T2 = t3 x 1.137)
2
RRRV = uc/t3 7
Current (2.6 x I)
Current (It) 5
Time to Peak
Peak Voltage
Current (I) 3
(E2) = (uc)
Current 6
3
4 Units kV
rms
Hz kV
rms
kV
Peak
A
rms
kA
rms
% kA rms kA
asym Peak
rms kV
Peak
sec sec kV/
sec
ms Cycles
(60 Hz)
sym Total
5 50 VCP-W 25 4.76 60 19 60 1200 25 50 31 65 25 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3

2000
3000
6 50 VCP-W 40 4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
40 50 49 104 40 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
3000
7 50 VCP-W 50 4.76 60 19 60 1200

2000
50 44 59 130 50 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
3000
50 VCP-W 63 4.76 60 19 60 1200 63 55 80 164 63 8.2 50 44 0.19 50 3
8 2000
3000
150 VCP-W 25 15 60 36 95 1200 8 25 50 31 65 25 28 8 75 66 0.42 50 3
9 2000 25.7 0.39
3000
150 VCP-W 40 15 60 36 95 1200 40 50 49 104 40 25.7 75 66 0.39 50 3
10 2000
3000
150 VCP-W 50 15 60 36 95 1200 50 44 59 130 50 25.7 75 66 0.39 50 3
11 2000
3000
150 VCP-W 63 15 60 36 95 1200 8 63 55 80 164 63 28 8 75 66 0.42 50 3
12 2000 8
3000 8
1 All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz; however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no derating.
13 2 4000 A fan-cooled rating is available for 3000 A circuit breakers.
3 Because the voltage range factor K = 1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated
symmetrical interrupting current.
14 4 Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and the minimum contact parting time as determined from
the minimum opening time plus the assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz).
5 The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (It) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA rms asymmetrical total.
15 6 Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both 2 seconds for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required
in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and C37.06-2009.
7 RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E2/T2.
8 These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specified in C37.06-2000.
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-3
Sheet 05 033
Table 5.4-1A. Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K = 1.0)
(Continued) i
Identification Rated Values
Drawout Capacitance Current Switching Capability Out-of-Phase
Circuit Breaker (Reference C37.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-2005) Switching ii
Type Back-to-Back Capacitor Switching
Isolated Shunt Capacitor

1
Cable-Charging Current
Capacitor Bank Current

Mechanical Endurance
Continuous Current
Voltage = 1.44 x V
Inrush Frequency
Current = 0.25 x I
Operating Duty
Inrush Current
Bank Current
3
Units A Duty No-Load Class A Class A Class A kA kHz kV kA
rms Cycle Operations rms rms rms Peak rms rms 4
9j
50 VCP-W 25 1200
2000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 310 C2 75630
751000
C2 75630
751000
6 0.8
0.5
7 6.3 5
3000 751600 751600 0.3
50 VCP-W 40 1200
2000
O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 310 C2 75630
751000
C2 75630
751000
6 0.8
0.5
7 10
6
3000 751600 751600 0.3
50 VCP-W 50 1200 O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 310 C2 75630 C2 75630 6 0.8 7 12.5
2000 751000 751000 0.5 7
3000 751600 751600 0.3
50 VCP-W 63 1200 O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630 C2 75630 6 0.8 7 15.8
2000 751000 751000 0.5 8
3000 751600 751600 0.3
150 VCP-W 25 1200 O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630 C2 75630 6 0.8 22 6.3
2000 C2 751000 C2 751000 0.5 9
3000 C1 751600 C1 751600 0.3
150 VCP-W 40 1200 O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630 C2 75630 6 0.8 22 10
2000 C2 751000 C2 751000 0.5 10
3000 C1 751600 C1 751600 0.3
150 VCP-W 50 1200 O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630 C2 75630 6 0.8 22 12.5
2000
3000
C2
C1
751000
751600
C2
C1
751000
751600
0.5
0.3
11
150 VCP-W 63 1200 O0.3sCO3mCO 10,000 C2 7.525 C2 75630 C2 75630 6 0.8 22 15.8
2000
3000
751000
751600
751000
751600
0.5
0.3
12
9 Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening.
j All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-4
Sheet 05 034
Table 5.4-1B. Available 5/15 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K > 1) 1234
i Identification Rated Values Related Required Capabilities
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers

Circuit Voltage Insulation Current Rated Transient Current Values
Breaker Type Level Recovery Voltage
ii
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay
Maximum Voltage Divided by K

Maximum 3-Second Closing and

Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class

Sym. Short- Latching
Rated Voltage Range Factor

Inter- Time Capability
Rated Maximum Voltage
(at Rated Maximum kV)
Rated Interrupting Time

rupting Current (Momentary) k
Nominal Voltage Class
Rated Reclosing Time

Capability Carrying
Rated Time to Crest

Rated Crest Voltage
Recovery Voltage 7
Rated Continuous
Capability
Current at 60 Hz
2 Voltage (1 min.)
Rate of Rise of
K Times Rated 2.7 K 1.6 K
Short-Circuit Times Times
Current 5 Rated Rated
Short- Short-
Rated
3 Circuit Circuit
Current Current
V I 5 E2 V/K KI KI 2.7 KI 1.6 KI l m
4 kV MVA kV
Class Class rms
K 5 kV kV 6 kA kV T2
rms Crest Amp rms Crest S
Y9 j
kV/S Cycles Sec. ms
8 kV
rms kA rms kA rms
kA
Crest
kA rms S
asym.
50 VCP-WND 4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 8.9 50 0.2 5 2 300 3.85 36 36 97 58 1.2
5 250
50 VCP-W 4.16 250 4.76 1.24 19 60 1200 29 8.9 50 0.2 5 2 300 3.85 36 36 97 58 1.2
250 2000
6 3000
50 VCP-W 4.16 350 4.76 1.19 19 60 1200 41 8.9 50 0.2 5 2 300 4.0 49 49 132 78 1.2
350 2000
7 3000
75 VCP-W 7.2 500 8.25 1.25 36 95 1200 33 15.5 60 0.29 5 2 300 6.6 41 41 111 66 1.2
500 2000
3000
8 150 VCP-W 13.8 500 15 1.30 36 95 1200 18 28 75 0.42 5 2 300 11.5 23 23 62 37 1.2
500 2000
3000
9 150 VCP-W 13.8 750 15 1.30 36 95 1200 28 28 75 0.42 5 2 300 11.5 36 36 97 58 1.2
750 2000
3000
10 150 VCP-W 13.8 1000 15 1.30 36 95 1200 37 28 75 0.42 5 2 300 11.5 48 48 130 77 1.2
1000 2000
3000
11 1 For capacitor switching, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2. 8 3-cycle rating available, refer to Tables 5.4-1A and 5.4-2.
2 5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed. 9 Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay
3 Circuit breakers shown in this table were tested in accordance with at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
12 IEEE standard C37.09-1979. (K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current) 2
4
5
Contact Eaton for availability of these circuit breakers.
For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting
T (seconds) = Y ( Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker )
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute
13 capability at an operating voltage
period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
V j For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons
Isc = (Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Vo VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can
14 But not to exceed KI. perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and
some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage
with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
V k For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Isc = 1.15 (Rated Short-Circuit Current)
15 Vo l Included for reference only.
But not to exceed KI. m Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase interrupting capability, both at specified operating voltage.
16 circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal
to the operating voltage.
6 4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous
rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
17
7 E2
RRRV = 1.137 ------
T2
18
19
20
21

5.4-5
Sheet 05 035
Table 5.4-1C. Available 27/38 kV VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards 123
Identification Rated Values Related Required Capabilities i
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers

Circuit Voltage Insulation Current Rated Transient Current Values
Level Recovery Voltage
Rated Permissible Tripping Delay

Breaker
ii
Maximum Voltage Divided by K

Type Maximum 3-Second Closing and

Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class

Rated Voltage Range Factor

Sym. Short- Latching
Rated Maximum Voltage
Inter- Time Capability
(at Rated Maximum kV)
Rated Interrupting Time

1
Nominal Voltage Class
rupting Current (Momentary) j
Rated Reclosing Time

Rated Time to Crest
Rated Crest Voltage
Capability Carrying
Recovery Voltage f
Rated Continuous
Capability
Current at 60 Hz
Voltage (1 min.)
Rate of Rise of
K Times Rated
Short-Circuit
2.7 K
Times
1.6 K
Times
2
Current 4 Rated Rated
Short- Short-
Rated
Circuit
Current
Circuit
Current
3
V I 4
E2 V/K KI KI 2.7 KI 1.6 KIk l
MVA kV K 4 kV kV 5 7 Y8 9
kV
Class Class rms rms Crest Amp
kA kV T2
rms Crest S kV/S Cycles Sec. ms
kV
rms kA rms kA rms
kA
Crest
kA rms
asym.
S
4
270 VCP-W 27 750 27 1.0 60 125 1200 16 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 16 16 43 26 1.2
16 2000 5
270 VCP-W 27 1000 27 1.0 60 125 1200 22 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 22 22 60 35 1.2
22 2000
270 VCP-W 27 1250 27 1.0 60 125 1200 25 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 25 25 68 40 1.2 6
25 2000
270 VCP-W 1600 27 1.0 60 125 1200 31.5 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 31.5 31.5 85 51 1.2
32 2000 7
270 VCP-W 27 2000 27 1.0 60 125 1200 40 51 105 0.55 5 2 300 27 40 40 108 64 1.2
40 2000
380 VCP-W 34.5 38 1.0 80 170
m
1200 16 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 38 16 16 43 26 1.2 8
16 2000
380 VCP-W 34.5 38 1.65 80 170 1200 21 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 23 35 35 95 56 1.2
21 m 2000 9
380 VCP-W 34.5 38 1.0 80 170 1200 25 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 38 25 25 68 40 1.2
25 m 2000
380 VCP-W 34.5 38 1.0 80 170
m
1200 31.5 71 125 0.64 5 2 300 38 31.5 31.5 85 51 1.2 10
32 2000
2500
380 VCP-W 34.5
40
38 1.0 80 170
m
1200
2000
40 71 125 0.64 5 2 n 38 40 40 108 64 1.2 11
2500
1 7
2
For capacitor switching, refer to Table 5.4-2.
27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed. 8
3-cycle rating available, refer to Table 5.4-2.
Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay
12
3 Circuit breakers shown in this table were tested in accordance with at lower values of current in accordance with the following formula:
IEEE standard C37.09-1979.
4 For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting T (seconds) = Y
( (K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current) 2
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker ) 13
capability at an operating voltage
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute
V
Isc =
Vo
(Rated Short-Circuit Current)
9
period must not exceed the time obtained from the above formula.
For reclosing service, there is No derating necessary for Eatons
14
But not to exceed KI. VCP-W family of circuit breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and
some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; all 15
V with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
Isc = 1.15 (Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Vo j For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Table 5.4-2.
But not to exceed KI.
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase
k
l
Included for reference only. 16
Asymmetrical interrupting capability = S times symmetrical
circuits with normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal interrupting capability, both at specified operating voltage.
to the operating voltage.
5 4000 A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000 A continuous
m ANSI standard requires 150 kV BIL. All 38 kV ratings are tested to
170 kV BIL.
17
rating is available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details. n Type 380 VCP-W 40 circuit breaker is not rated for rapid reclosing.
E2
f RRRV = 1.137 ------
T2
18
19
20
21

5.4-6
Sheet 05 036
Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
Industry Leader VCP-WC Higher voltage ratings with K=1 Front, functionally grouped controls
i Introducing the VCP-WC extra capabil- 3-cycle interrupting time and indicators
Higher switching life Glass-polyester (5/15 kV), or epoxy
ity medium voltage drawout circuit
Designed and tested to ANSI
insulation (27/38 kV)
ii breaker. Designed to provide all the
industry-leading features expected of standards and higher Front, vertically mounted stored
the VCP-W, plus extra capabilities for WR fixed retrofit configuration
energy mechanism
available Drawout on extension rails
1 those application requirements that go
Integrally mounted wheels
beyond what is usually experienced.
The performance enhancement fea- Vacuum Circuit Breaker Design Quality Assurance Certificate
2 tures of the VCP-WC make it an ideal Leadership
choice for capacitor switching duty,
high altitude applications, transformer Eaton is a world leader in vacuum
interrupter and vacuum circuit breaker
3 secondary fault protection, locations
technology, offering VCP-WC with extra
with concentrations of rotating
machinery or high operating endur- capabilities without sacrificing the
proven features already standard
4 ance requirements, just to mention a
with other VCP-W circuit breakers.
few. Consider these capability
enhancements: Features such as:
5 Definite purpose capacitor switching Vacuum interrupters with
copper-chrome contacts
Higher close and latch
V-Flex non-sliding current
6 Faster rate of rise of recovery voltage transfer system
Higher short-circuit current Visible contact erosion indicators
Higher mechanical endurance Visible contact wipe indicators
7 Higher insulation level
The Type VCP-WC Breakers are not
Interchangeable with Standard VCP-W
Breakers. They are Equipped with Different
Code Plates and Taller Front Panels.
8 Table 5.4-2. Extra Capability Type VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1
Identification Rated Values Mechanical
Circuit Voltage Insulation Current Maximum Rate of Capacitor Switching Ratings Endurance
9 Breaker Level Short-Circuit Current Permissible Rise of General Definite Purpose
Type Tripping Recovery Purpose
Back-to-Back
Delay Voltage
(RRRV) Isolated Capacitor Switching
10 3 Shunt
% DC Component (Idc)
Asym. Interrupting (It)

Maximum Voltage (V)
Voltage Range Factor
Capacitor
Interrupting Time 2
Continuous Current
Short-Time Current
Bank
Sym. Interrupting
Inrush Frequency
for 3 Seconds 1
Current
Voltage (1 min.)
Capacitor Bank
at Voltage (Isc)
11
Inrush Current
Capability
at 60 Hz
Current
12
kV K kV kV A kA rms % kA kA kA ms Seconds kV/s A rms A rms kA kHz No-Load
rms rms Peak rms Total rms Peak rms Peak Operations
13 50 VCP-W 25C 5.95 1 24 75 1200 25 50 31 97 25 50 2.0 0.9 400 & 630 400 & 630 20 & 20 6.5 & 5.5 10,000
2000 75 36 0.9 1000 1000 18 2.7 10,000
3000 4 75 36 0.8 250 5,000
14 50 VCP-W 40C 5.95 1 24 75 1200
2000
40 75 58 139 40 50 2.0 0.9
0.9
630
1000
630
1000
15
18
3.5
2.7
10,000
10,000
3000 4 0.8 250 5,000
50 VCP-W 50C 5.95 1 24 75 1200 50 57 64 139 50 50 2.0 0.9 630 630 15 3.5 10,000
15 2000 57 64 0.9 1000 1000 18 2.7 10,000
3000 4 52 62 0.8 250 5,000
50 VCP-W 63C 5.95 1 24 75 1200 63 62 83 175 63 50 2.0 1.1 250 400 & 1600 5 8.8 & 7.7 1.6 & 0.465 10,000
2000 400 & 1600 5 8.8 & 7.7 1.6 & 0.465 10,000
16 3000 4 400 & 1600 5 8.8 & 7.7 1.6 & 0.465 10,000
75 VCP-W 50C 10.3 1 42 95 1200 50 57 64 139 50 50 2.0 0.9 630 630 15 3.5 10,000
2000 57 64 0.9 1000 1000 18 2.7 10,000
17 3000 4 52 62 0.8 250 5,000
150 VCP-W 25C 17.5 1 42 95 1200 25 50 31 97 6 25 50 2.0 0.9 400 & 600 400 & 600 7 20 & 20 6.5 & 5.5 10,000
2000 75 36 0.9 7 1000 7 18 2.7 10,000
3000 4 75 36 0.8 1000 7 5,000
18 250 7
150 VCP-W 40C 17.5 1 42 95 1200 40 75 58 139 40 50 2.0 0.9 630 7 630 7 15 3.5 10,000
2000 0.9 1000 7 1000 7 18 2.7 10,000
3000 4 0.8 250 7 5,000
19 150 VCP-W 50C 17.5 1 42 95 1200 50 57 64 139 50 50 2.0 0.9 630 7 630 7 15 3.5 10,000
2000 57 64 0.9 1000 7 1000 7 18 2.7 10,000
3000 4 52 62 0.8 250 7 5,000
20 150 VCP-W 63C 15 1 42 95 1200
2000
63 62 83 175 63 50 2.0 1.1 250 400 & 1600 5
400 & 1600 5
8.8 & 7.7
8.8 & 7.7
1.6 & 0.465
1.6 & 0.465
10,000
10,000
3000 4 400 & 1600 5 8.8 & 7.7 1.6 & 0.465 10,000
21 Note: Refer to Page 5.4-7 for footnotes.

5.4-7
Sheet 05 037
Technical DataExtra Capability VCP-WC Circuit Breakers
Table 5.4-2. VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), Rated K = 1 (Continued)

Identification Rated Values Mechanical i
Circuit Voltage Insulation Current Maximum Rate of Capacitor Switching Ratings Endurance
Breaker Level Permissible Rise of
Type
Short-Circuit Current
Tripping Recovery
General Purpose Definite Purpose
ii

Delay Voltage Cable Isolated Back-to-Back
Power Frequency Withstand (RRRV) Charging Shunt Capacitor Switching
3 Current Capacitor
% DC Component (Idc)
1
Asym. Interrupting (It)

Maximum Voltage (V)
Voltage Range Factor

Bank
Interrupting Time 2
Continuous Current
Short-Time Current
Current
Sym. Interrupting
Inrush Frequency
for 3 Seconds 1
Voltage (1 min.)
Capacitor Bank
at Voltage (Isc)
Inrush Current
2
Capability
at 60 Hz
Current
kV K kV kV A kA % kA kA kA ms Seconds kV/s A rms A rms A rms kA kHz No-Load
3
rms rms Peak rms rms rms Peak rms Peak Operations
Total
270 VCP-W 25C 27 1 60 125 1200 25 75 36 85 25 h 50 2.0 1.1 400 400 20 4.2 5,000
4
1600
31.5 i 50
270 VCP-W 32C 27 1 60 125 1200
1600
31.5 55 40 100 2.0 1.1 400 400 20 4.2 5,000
5
270 VCP-W 40C 27 1 60 125 1200 40 50 49 112 40 j 50 2.0 1.1 400 400 20 4.2 5,000
1600
380 VCP-W 16C 38 1 80 170 1200 16 75 23.3 50 16 50 2.0 0.7 50 250 250 20 4.4 10,000 6
2000 1.3 50 250 & 1000 250 & 1000 20 & 20 5 & 5
380 VCP-W 25C 38 1 80 170 1200 25 65 34.0 75 25 50 2.0 0.7 50 250 250 20 4.4 10,000
2000 1.3 50 250 & 1000 250 & 1000 20 & 20 5 & 5 7
380 VCP-W 32C 38 1 80 170 1200 33.1 57 42.5 91 31.5 50 2.0 0.7 50 250 250 20 4.4 10,000
2000 1.3 50 250 & 1000 250 & 1000 20 & 20 5&5
2500 0.7 50
3000FC k 1.3 50 250 & 1000 250 & 1000 20 & 20 5&5 8
380 VCP-W 40C 38 1 80 170 1200 40 63 53.5 107 40 50 2.0 0.7 50 m m m m 10,000
2000 50
2500
3000FC l
50
50
9
1 Except as noted.
2
3
3 cycles.
Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for more information.
10
4 4000 A FC rating available.
5
6
C37.04.a-2003 Class C2 at 15 kV.
Close and Latch Current for 1200A Type 150 VCP-W 25C is proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated.
11
7 Capacitor Switching Ratings are proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not derated.
h 2.5 seconds.
i 1.6 second.
12
j 1 second.
k 2000 A FC to 3000 A.
l 2500 A FC to 3000 A. 13
m Tested at 27 kV, 350 A isolated or back-to-back capacitor bank, inrush current 4.6 kA, inrush frequency 1.2 kHz.
Note: 38 kV, 2500 A and 3000 A WC breakers are not rated for rapid reclosing.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-8
Sheet 05 038
Technical DataType VCP-WG and VCP-WRG Generator Circuit Breakers
Type VCP-WG Generator The VCP-WG (drawout) and VCP-WRG High Continuous Current Levels
i Circuit Breakers (fixed) circuit breakers meet, and even Generator circuit breakers must be
exceed, the rigorous service duty able to handle high continuous current
requirements for generator circuit levels without overheating. VCP-WG
ii applications as defined by IEEE. drawout circuit breakers are designed
Eatons VCP-WG and VCP-WRG to reliably operate up to 4000 A with
natural air convection cooling, and up
1 generator breakers are available in
to 5000 A with suitable enclosure fan
two frame sizes. The 29.00-inch frame
(29.00 inches wide with front cover on) cooling during overload conditions.
VCP-WRG fixed circuit breakers are
2 has ratings up to 15 kV, 63 kA and
designed to reliably operate up to
3000 A (4000 A with forced-air cool-
ing). The 31.00-inch frame (31.00 6000 A with natural air convection
cooling and up to 7000 A with suitable
3 inches wide with front cover on) has
enclosure fan cooling during overload
ratings up to 15 kV, 75 kA and 4000 A
(5000 A with forced-air cooling). The conditions.
4 31.00-inch frame is also available in a Unique Fault Current Conditions
fixed version with ratings up to 15 kV,
System-source (aka, transformer-fed)
75 kA and 6000 A (7000 A with forced-
faults (see Figure 5.4-1, fault location
5 VCP-WG Breaker (Front View) air cooling).
a) can be extremely high. The full
Count on Eatons innovative technology energy of the power system feeds the
to handle high continuous AC current fault, and the low impedance of the
6 and voltage, then safely switch fault current path does very little to
through extreme out-of-phase voltages limit the fault current. Eatons type
and high-stress asymmetrical currents VCP-WG Generator Circuit Breakers
7 using clean and green vacuum inter- are ideal for interrupting such high
ruption without fail for over 10,000 fault currents because they have
normal operations. demonstrated high interruption
8 ratings up to 75 kA, with high DC fault
Eatons VCP-WG generator circuit content up to 75%, as proven by high
breakers meet the strict service duty power laboratory tests.
9 requirements set forth by IEEE for gen-
erator circuit applications, including: Generator-source (aka, generator-fed)
faults, see Figure 5.4-1, fault location
10 Generator circuit configuration b) can cause a severe condition
High continuous current levels called Delayed Current Zero, see
Unique fault current conditions Figure 5.4-2). The high ratio of induc-
11 VCP-WG Breaker (Rear View) Transformer-fed faults tive reactance to resistance (X/R ratio)
of the system can cause the DC com-
Why generator circuit breakers? Generator-fed faults ponent of the fault current to exceed
12 Specially rated generator breakers Unique voltage conditions 100%. The asymmetrical fault current
typically should be used on Very fast RRRV peak becomes high enough and its
generator applications 10,000 kW decay becomes slow enough that
13 and above
Out-of-phase switching
the natural current zero is delayed
Generator Circuit Configuration for several cycles. The circuit breaker
A generator circuit breaker, properly
The transformer and generator can experiences longer arcing time and
14 rated and tested to the appropriate
be in close proximity to the circuit more electrical, thermal and mechani-
industry standard, can protect the
breaker. See Figure 5.4-1. Applications cal stress during the interruption. The
generator from damage, or even
IEEE standard requires verification that
15 complete failure, that could occur with high continuous current levels
require connections with large conduc- the circuit breaker can interrupt under
when feeding a faulted transformer,
tors of very low impedance. This con- these severe conditions. Eatons
and also can protect the trans-
VCP-WG generator circuit breakers
16 former, in the event that a fault struction causes unique fault current
have demonstrated their ability to
should occur in the generator and voltage conditions as shown in
Figure 5.4-2. interrupt three-phase fault current
Generator circuits have unique levels up to 135% DC content under
17 characteristics that require specially delayed current zero conditions.
designed and tested circuit breakers. Generator High Voltage
The IEEE developed the special Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
18 industry standard C37.013 and amend- a b
ment C37.013a-2007 to address these
characteristics. Eaton has dedicated
~
19 years of research, design, enhance- Generator Step-up
ment and testing to create Eatons Transformer
family of generator breakers.
20 Figure 5.4-1. Generator Circuit Application
21

5.4-9
Sheet 05 039
Unique Voltage Conditions

Generator circuits typically produce very i
Contact Parting
fast rates of rise of recovery voltage 8
(RRRV) due to the high natural frequency
and low impedance and very low stray
Current
pu ii
capacitance. VCP-WG generator cir- 6
cuit breakers are designed to interrupt
fault current levels with very fast RRRV 1
4
in accordance with IEEE standard Idc
C37.013 and C37.013a. VCP-WG genera-
tor circuit breakers have a distinct ability 2 2
to perform under out-of-phase condi-
tions when the generator and power
system voltages are not in sync. The
0 3
voltages across the open contacts can
be as high as twice the rated line-to- -2
ground voltage of the system. The IEEE 4
standard requires demonstration by
-4
test that the generator circuit breaker
can switch under specified out-of-phase
5
conditions. -6
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Versatility in Application
Figure 5.4-2. Generator-Fed Faults Can Experience Delayed Current Zero, Where the High Inductance
6
Eatons generator vacuum circuit to Resistance Ratio of the System Can Cause the DC Component of the Fault Current to Exceed 100%
breakers are available in drawout
(VCP-WG) or fixed (VCP-WRG) configu- 7
rations to provide for superior perfor-
mance and versatility. Many industrial 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
and commercial power systems now
(254.0) (254.0) (254.0) (254.0) 8
include small generators as a local 29.00 30.00 29.00 26.60
(736.6) (762.0) (736.6) (675.6)
source of power. New applications are
arising as a result of the de-regulation
9
of the utility industry, and the con-
struction of smaller packaged power
plants. Eatons generator breakers
31.40
(797.6)
31.20
(792.5)
10
interrupt large short-circuit currents
in a small three-pole package.
11
Typical applications include:
24.60 24.60
Electric utilities: fossil, hydro and (624.8) (624.8)
12
wind power
29-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG 29-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
Packaged power plants
Industrial companies using 13
combined cycle/combustion
10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
turbine plants
Government and military
(254.0)
30.60
(254.0)
30.00
(254.0)
30.60
(254.0)
26.80*
14
(777.2) (762.0) (777.2) (680.7)
Commercial institutions
Petrochemical and process 15
industries
Forestry, pulp and paper
Mining, exploration and marine
39.60
(1005.8)
39.30
(998.2)
16
The VCP-WG is the worlds generator
circuit breaker for reliable and robust 17
power generation protection.
24.60 *6000 A has a depth of 28.50 (723.9)
(624.8) 18
31-Inch Frame Drawout VCP-WG 31-Inch Frame Fixed VCP-WRG
19
Figure 5.4-3. Type VCP-WG (Drawout) and Type VCP-WRG (Fixed) Circuit Breakers
20
21

5.4-10
Sheet 05 040
5 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings

i Table 5.4-3. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX)
Description Units Short-Circuit Current (Isc)
ii 50 kA 63 kA 75 kA
Maximum Voltage (V): 5 kV
Frame in Inches (mm) 29.00 29.00 31.00 31.00 29.00 29.00 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
1 (see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9) (736.6) (736.6) (787.4) (787.4) (736.6) (736.6) (787.4) (787.4) (787.4) (787.4)
Ratings Assigned DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX
2 Continuous Current A rms 1200

2000
1200
2000

1200
2000
1200
2000

1200
2000
1200
2000
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
4000 1 4000 1 4000 4000 4000 1 4000 1 4000 4000 4000 4000
3 5000 1 5000 5000 1 5000 5000 1 5000
6000 6000 6000
6300 1 6300 1 6300 1
4 7000 1 7000 1 7000 1
Dielectric Strength
Power frequency withstand voltage kV rms 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
5 Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Interrupting Time ms 50 50 83 83 50 50 83 83 83 83
Closing Time ms 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
6 Short-Circuit Current kA rms 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 75 75
Asymmetrical current interrupting capability % DC 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 63 63
Ref: Minimum opening time ms 30 30 54 54 30 30 54 54 54 54
7 Short-time current carrying capability kA rms 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 75 75
Duration of short-time current sec 3 3 2.3 2.3 3 3 1.4 1.4 1 1
Closing and Latching Capability kA peak 137 137 137 137 173 173 173 173 206 206
8 First Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 40 40
First Generator-Source Asymmetrical
9 Current Interrupting Capability % DC 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
Second Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 31.5 31.5 40 40 40 40 50 50
10 Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery
11 Voltage (RRRV) kV / s 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2 3.0 2
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V) kV peak 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2 2 9.2 2
Transient recovery voltageTime to Peak
12 (T2 = 0.62 x V) s 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 2 3.1 2
Load Current Switching Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
13 Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability kA 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 37.5 37.5
90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery
14 voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V) kV rms 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1
90 out-of-phase inherent TRV
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) kV / s 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
15 Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 2.6 x V) kV peak 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
(T2 = 0.89 x V) s 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
16 1 Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure.
2 TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.
Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
17 Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO.
Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007.
Note: Test certificates available.
18
19
20
21

5.4-11
Sheet 05 041
15 kV Class Generator Circuit Breaker Ratings

Table 5.4-4. Generator Circuit Breaker Types: VCP-WG (DrawoutDO) / VCP-WRG (FixedFIX) (Continued)
i
Description Units Short-Circuit Current (Isc)
50 kA 63 kA 75 kA ii
Maximum Voltage (V): 15 kV
Frame in Inches (mm) 29.00 29.00 31.00 31.00 29.00 29.00 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
(see Figure 5.4-3 on Page 5.4-9) (736.6) (736.6) (787.4) (787.4) (736.6) (736.6) (787.4) (787.4) (787.4) (787.4) 1
Ratings Assigned DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX DO FIX
Continuous Current A rms 1200
2000
1200
2000

1200
2000
1200
2000

1200
2000
1200
2000
2
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
4000 1 4000 1 4000 4000 4000 1 4000 1 4000 4000 4000 4000
5000 1 5000 5000 1 5000 5000 1 5000 3
6000 6000 6000
6300 1 6300 1 6300 1
7000 1 7000 1 7000 1 4
Dielectric Strength
Power frequency withstand voltage kV rms 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
Lightning impulse withstand voltage kV peak 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 5
Interrupting Time ms 50 50 83 83 50 50 83 83 83 83
Closing Time ms 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
Short-Circuit Current kA rms 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 75 75
6
Asymmetrical current interrupting capability % DC 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 63 63
Ref: Minimum opening time ms 30 30 54 54 30 30 54 54 54 54
Short-time current carrying capability kA rms 50 50 50 50 63 63 63 63 75 75 7
Duration of short-time current s 3 3 2.3 2.3 3 3 1.4 1.4 1 1
Closing and Latching Capability kA peak 137 137 137 137 173 173 173 173 206 206
First Generator-Source Symmetrical 8
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 40 40
First Generator-Source Asymmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 9
Second Generator-Source Symmetrical
Current Interrupting Capability kA rms 31.5 31.5 40 40 40 40 50 50
Second Generator-Source Asymmetrical
10
Current Interrupting Capability % DC 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Prospective TRVRate of Rise of Recovery
Voltage (RRRV) kV / s 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 2 3.4 2 11
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 1.84 x V) kV peak 27.6 27.6 27.6 27.6 27.6 27.6 27.6 27.6 30.9 2 30.9 2
(T2 = 0.62 x V) s 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 9.3 2 9.3 2 12
Load Current Switching Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
No-Load Mechanical Endurance Capability Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Out-of-Phase Current Switching Capability kA 25 25 25 25 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 37.5 37.5
13
90 out-of-phase power frequency recovery
voltage ( = 1.5 x sqrt(2/3) x V) kV rms 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 18.4 14
90 out-of-phase inherent TRV
Rate of Rise of Recovery Voltage (RRRV) kV / s 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
Transient recovery voltagePeak (E2 = 2.6 x V) kV peak 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 15
(T2 = 0.89 x V) s 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4 13.4
1 Ratings achieved using forced-air cooling by blowers in the enclosure. 16
2 TRV capacitors are required if RRRV is >0.5 kV/s; or T2 is <65 s.
Note: Rated frequency: 60 Hz.
Note: Standard operating duty: CO - 30 m - CO. 17
Note: Relevant Standard: IEEE standards C37.013-1997 and C37.013a-2007.
Note: Test certificates available.
18
19
20
21

5.4-12
Sheet 05 042
Technical DataCircuit Breakers
Type VCP-W Circuit Breaker Operating Times

i The closing time (initiation of close Figure 5.4-4 below shows the sequence
signal to contact make) and opening of events in the course of circuit inter-
time (initiation of the trip signal to con- ruption, along with applicable VCP-W
ii tact break) are shown in Table 5.4-5. circuit breaker timings.
Table 5.4-5. Closing Time and Opening Time
1 Rated Breaker Closing Time Opening Time Milliseconds
Control Voltage Rating Milliseconds Standard 5-Cycle Breaker Optional 3-Cycle Breaker
2 48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc All 4560 3045 3038

120 V, 240 Vac All 4560
120 V or 240 Vac capacitor trip All 2641 2638
3 Optionalundervoltage trip release 48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc All 3045 3045
4
Clearing Time
5 Interrupting Time
Standard: 83 ms (5 Cycle)
Optional Available: 50 ms (3 Cycle)
6 12
Contact Parting Time
Maximum Contact Parting Time = 38 ms (2-1/4 Cycle) Based on Minimum Tripping
7 Delay Equal to 8 ms (1/2 Cycle)
Tripping Delay Time Opening Time Arcing Time

8 8 ms (1/2 Cycle) Minimum Delay 3045 ms for 5 Cycle VCP-W 517 ms
2 sec = (120 Cycle) Maximum Delay 3038 ms for 3 Cycle VCP-W
9 Protective Relay Auxiliary Relay Shunt Trip Mechanism

Operating Time Operating Time Operating Time Operating Time
10
Short- Rated Control Main Last
Circuit Voltage Energizes Contacts Pole
11 Begins Trip Coil Parts Clears
Figure 5.4-4. Sequence of Events and Circuit Breaker Operating Times

12 1 Times shown are based on 60 Hz.
2 % DC component capability (and asymmetry factor S) depend on the minimum contact parting time.
The % DC component capability is M 50% (S factor M 1.2) for all VCP-W circuit breakers.
13
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Time (ms)
14
38 ms 12 ms 47 ms
52-1 Load 52-2 52-1 Opening Time Arcing Dead Time (With Arcing)
15 Time
7
ms 52 ms
16 52-2 Closing Time
Source #1 Source #2
52-1 b
17 +
Contact
Makes
59 ms
Transfer 52-1
Dead Bus Time (No Arcing)
18 Initiate b
Control Standard Approx. 100 ms
Supply b Contact
Total Transfer Time
19
Trip 52-1 Close 52-2 Transfer
Initiate
Signal
20
Figure 5.4-5. Typical Transfer Times 3Fast Sequential Transfer

21 3 Times shown are based on 60 Hz.

5.4-13
Sheet 05 043
Technical DataCircuit Breakers and Switchgear
Usual Service Conditions Applications at Frequencies Less Than 60 Hz Power Frequency and Impulse Withstand
Usual service conditions for operation Voltage Ratings i
of metal-clad switchgear are as follows: No derating is required for lower
Based on series of actual tests performed frequency.
Altitude does not exceed 3300 feet on Type VCP-W circuit breakers and ii
(1000m) analysis of these test data and physics CTs, VTs, Relays and Instruments
Ambient temperature within of vacuum interrupters, it has been Application at frequency other than
the limits of 30 C and +40 C found that the current interruption rated frequency must be verified for 1
(22 F and +104 F) limit for Type VCP-W circuit breakers each device on an individual basis.
The effect of solar radiation is not is proportional to the square root of
significant the frequency. Table 5.4-6 provides Table 5.4-8. Altitude Derating Factors 2
derating factors, which must be applied Altitude Above Altitude Correction Factor to
Applications Above 3300 Feet (1006m) to breaker interrupting current at Sea Level in be Applied to:
The rated one-minute power frequency various frequencies. Feet (m) Voltage Rated 3
withstand voltage, the impulse withstand Continuous
Table 5.4-6. Derating Factors Current
voltage, the continuous current rating
and the maximum voltage rating must Interrupting Current
3300 (1006)
4
Derating Factors
be multiplied by the appropriate cor- (and Below) 1.0 1.0
50 Hz 25 Hz 16 Hz 12 Hz
rection factor in Table 5.4-8 to obtain
modified ratings that must equal or None 0.65 0.52 0.45
4000 (1219)
5000 (1524)
0.98
0.95
0.995
0.991
5
exceed the application requirements. 6000 (1829) 0.92 0.987
Rated Short-Time and 6600 (2012) 0.91 0.985
Note: Intermediate values may be obtained 7000 (2137) 0.89 0.98 6
by interpolation. Close and Latch Currents 8000 (2438) 0.86 0.97
No derating is required for short time 9000 (2743) 0.83 0.965
Applications Above or Below 40C Ambient and close and latch current at lower 10,000 (3048) 0.80 0.96 7
Refer to ANSI C37.20.2, Section 8.4 frequency. 12,000 (3658) 0.75 0.95
for load current-carrying capabilities 13,200 (4023) 0.72 0.94
Rated Continuous Current 8
under various conditions of ambient 14,000 (4267) 0.70 0.935
temperature and load. Because the effective resistance of 16,000 (4877) 0.65 0.925
circuit conductors is less at lower 16,400 (5000) 0.64 0.92
frequency, continuous current through 18,000 (5486) 0.61 0.91 9
the circuit can be increased somewhat. 20,000 (6096) 0.56 0.90
Table 5.4-7 provides nominal current
rating for VCP-W breakers when 10
operated at frequencies below 60 Hz.
Table 5.4-7. Current Ratings 11

Rated Continuous Nominal Current at
Current at 60 Hz Frequency Below 60 Hz
50 Hz 25 Hz 16 Hz 12 Hz 12
1200 A 1243 1410 1519 1589
2000 A
3000 A
2075
3119
2374
3597
2573
3923
2703
4139
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-14
Sheet 05 044
Technical DataSwitchgear
Unusual Service Conditions Maintenance shall consist of adjusting, to rated continuous current at rated
i Applications of metal-clad switchgear cleaning, lubricating, tightening, etc., maximum voltage with power factor
at other than usual altitude or temper- as recommended by the circuit breaker between 80% leading and
ature, or where solar radiation is sig- instruction book. 80% lagging.
ii nificant, require special consideration. Continuous current switching assumes In accordance with ANSI C37.06, if a
Other unusual service conditions that opening and closing rated continuous short-circuit operation occurs before
may affect design and application
1 include:
current at rated maximum voltage with the completion of the listed switching
power factor between 80% leading and operations, maintenance is recom-
Exposure to salt air, hot or humid 80% lagging. mended and possible functional part
2 climate, excessive dust, dripping Inrush current switching ensures a
replacement may be necessary,
water, falling dirt, or other similar depending on previous accumulated
closing current equal to 600% of rated duty, fault magnitude and expected
conditions continuous current at rated maximum
3 Unusual transportation or storage voltage with power factor of 30% lagging
future operations.
conditions or less, and an opening current equal
Switchgear assemblies when used
4 as the service disconnecting means Table 5.4-9. Breaker Operations Information
Installations accessible to the Circuit Breaker Ratings Maximum Number of Operations 1
5 general public Rated Rated Rated Between No-Load Rated Inrush
Exposure to seismic shock Maximum Continuous Short-Circuit Servicing Mechanical Continuous Current
Exposure to nuclear radiation Voltage Current Current Current Switching
6 kV rms Amperes kA rms, sym. Switching
Load Current Switching 4.76, 8.25, 15 1200, 2000 33 kA and below 2000 10,000 10,000 750
Table 5.4-9 showing number of 4.76, 8.25, 15 3000 All 1000 5000 5000 400
7 operations is a guide to normal main- 4.76, 15 All 37 kA and above 1000 5000 5000 400
tenance for circuit breakers operated 27 All All 500 2500 2500 100
under usual service conditions for most 38 All All 250 1500 1500 100
8 repetitive duty applications including 1 Each operation is comprised of one closing plus one opening.
isolated capacitor bank switching and
shunt reactor switching, but not for Table 5.4-10. Heat Loss in Watts at Full Rating, at 60 Hz
9 arc furnace switching. The numbers
Type of Switchgear Assembly Breaker 1200 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A 4000 A Fan
in the table are equal to or in excess Rating Cooled
of those required by ANSI C37.06.
10 VCP-W 5, 15, and 27 kV 600 W 1400 W 2100 W 3700 W
Switchgear Heat Loss VCP-W 38 kV 850 W 1700 W 2300 W 3800 W
The heat-loss data for circuit breakers Other Components
11 given in Table 5.4-10 includes portion Each CT, standard accuracy 50 W
of main bus conductors and load run- Each CT, high accuracy 100 W
backs. Please note that the estimated Each VT 60 W
12 wattage given for each component is CPT single-phase, 25 kVA 450 W
at its full rating. For example, the chart CPT single-phase, 45 kVA 892 W
shows 600 W for 1200 A, 5 kV VCP-W Space heatereach 250 W
13 breaker. It simply means that we
estimated 600 W loss in breaker in a
1200 A, 5 kV compartment when the
14 circuit breaker is carrying full 1200 A.
The actual loss, of course, will depend
on the actual current being carried by
15 the breaker. If the full load current of
the load connected to that 1200 A
breaker, for example, is only 200 A,
16 the heat-loss in that compartment
will be much less. By simple I x I x R
calculations, one can easily calculate
17 actual loss at 200 A as = 600 x (200/
1200) x (200/1200) = 16.67 W. Also,
in case of lineup consisting of many
18 feeders, all feeders might not be carry-
ing or supplying loads at all times. If
that is the case, then one can further
19 reduce total watt loss for the lineup by
applying a utilization factor.
20
21

5.4-15
Sheet 05 045
Technical DataAssembly Ratings
Standard Metal-Clad i
Switchgear Assembly Ratings
VacClad-W metal-clad switchgear is ii
available for application at voltages up
to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz. Refer to the table
below for complete list of available 1
ratings.
Table 5.4-11. Standard VCP-W (Non-Arc-Resistant) Metal-Clad Switchgear Ratings Per IEEE C37.20.2-1999 12 2
Rated (Ref.) (Ref.) Insulation Level Rated Main Bus Rated Short-Time Rated Momentary
Maximum Rated Rated Power Lightning Continuous Current 34 Short-Circuit Short-Circuit
Voltage Voltage Short- Frequency Impulse Current Current Withstand 3
Range Circuit Withstand Withstand Withstand (10-Cycle) (167 ms)
Factor Current Voltage, Voltage (2-Second)
K I 60 Hz,
1 Minute
[LIWV]
(BIL)
K*I 5 2.7 *K*I 6 1.6 *K* I 7
(Ref. only)
4
kV rms kA rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Sym. kA Crest kA rms Asym.
4.76 1 25 19 60 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40

5
1.24 29 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64 6
1.19 41 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 49 132 78
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101 7
8.25 1.25 33 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 41 111 66
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80
8
15 1.3 18 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 23 62 37
1 25 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40
1.3 28 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58 9
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64
1.3 37 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 48 130 77
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80
10
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101
27 1 16 60 125 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 16 43 26 11
1 22 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 22 60 35
1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 25 68 40
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 31.5 85 51
12
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 2700 40 108 64
38 1 16 80 150 8 1200, 2000, 2500 16 43 26 13
1 25 1200, 2000, 2500 25 68 40
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500 31.5 85 51
1.65 23 1200, 2000, 2500 35 95 56 14
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500 40 108 64
1 The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
circuit breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. In such cases, switchgear assembly ratings as given in this table
15
will apply.
2 Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability.
3 Circuit breaker requires forced air cooling to carry 4000 A at 4.76, 8.25 and 15 kV, and 3000 A at 38 kV. 16
4 27 kV 2500 A and 2700 A main bus ratings are available in two-high design configurations only.
5 Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices may limit the duration to a value less than
2 seconds. 17
6 These values exceed 2.6*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999.
8 This is a standard IEEE C37.20.2 rating for 38 kV Class of switchgear. 18
19
20
21

5.4-16
Sheet 05 046
Technical DataAssembly Ratings
i Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Assembly Ratings
ii VacClad-W metal-clad arc-resistant
switchgear is available for application
at voltages up to 38 kV, 50 or 60 Hz.
1 Refer to the table below for complete
list of available ratings.
2 Table 5.4-12. VacClad-W Arc-Resistant Metal-Clad Switchgear 12

Rated (Ref.) (Ref.) Ratings per IEEE C37.20.2-1999 Enclosure Internal Arc Withstand
Maximum Rated Rated Insulation Level Rated Main Bus Rated Rated Momentary Accessibility Rated Arc Short- Rated Arc
3 Voltage 3 Voltage Short- Continuous Current 4 Short-Time Short-Circuit Type Circuit Withstand Duration
Range Circuit Short- Current Withstand Current
Factor Current Power Lightning
Frequency Impulse Circuit (10-Cycle) (167 ms)
K I
4 Withstand Withstand Current
Withstand
Voltage, Voltage
(2-Second)
EEMAC G14-1
60 Hz, [LIWV]
IEEE C37.20.7
5 1 Minute (BIL) K*I 5 2.7 *K*I 6 1.6 *K* I 7
(Ref. only)
Isc 2.6*Isc
kV rms kA rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms kA Crest kA rms kA rms kA Peak Sec.
Sym. Asym. Sym.
6
4.76 1 25 19 60 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40 2B 25 65 0.5
1.24 29 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58 2B 36 93.6 0.5
7 1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64 2B 40 104 0.5
1.19 41 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 49 132 78 2B 49 127.4 0.5
8 1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80 2B 50 130 0.5
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101 2B 63 170 0.5
8.25 1.25 33 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 41 111 66 2B 41 106.6 0.5
9 1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80 2B 50 130 0.5
15 1.3 18 36 95 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 23 62 37 2B 23 59.8 0.5
10 1 25 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 25 68 40 2B 25 65 0.5

1.3 28 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 36 97 58 2B 36 93.6 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 40 108 64 2B 40 104 0.5
11 1.3 37 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 48 130 77 2B 48 124.8 0.5
1 50 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 50 135 80 2B 50 130 0.5
1 63 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000 63 170 101 2B 63 170 0.5
12 27 38 1 16 60 125 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16 43 26 2 B 16 41.6 0.5
1 22 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 22 60 35 2 B 22 57.2 0.5
13 1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25 68 40 2 B 25 65 0.5
1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5 85 51 2 B 31.5 81.9 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40 108 64 2 B 40 104 0.5
14 38 3 1 16 80 150 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 16 43 26 2 B 16 41.6 0.5
1 25 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 25 68 40 2 B 25 65 0.5
15 1 31.5 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 31.5 85 51 2 B 31.5 81.9 0.5
1.65 23 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 35 95 56 2 B 35 91 0.5
1 40 1200, 2000, 2500, 3000 40 108 64 2 B 40 104 0.5
16 1 The switchgear assembly is designed for use with type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
will apply.
17 2 Switchgear assemblies can be supplied with UL/CSA label. Contact Eaton for availability.
3 515 kV switchgear is supplied with a plenum. 2738 kV switchgear is supplied with arc wall. For plenum requirements at 27 and 38 kV, contact Eaton.
4 Maximum continuous current rating for circuit breaker that can be supplied at 38 kV is 2500 A.
18 5 Please note that use of certain current transformers (for example, bar type CTs) and protective devices
may limit the duration to a value less than 2 seconds.
19 7
8
These values exceed 1.55*K*I required by IEEE C37.20.2-1999.
27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can be supplied in one-high configuration only.
20
21

5.4-17
Sheet 05 047
Technical DataSurge Protection
Surge Protection The following are Eatons recommen- or longer. For transformers
i
dations for surge protection of medium with lower BIL than the switch-
Eatons VacClad-W metal-clad switch- voltage equipment. Please note these gear, provide surge arrester
gear is applied over a broad range of recommendations are valid when in parallel with RC snubber or
circuits, and is one of the many types using Eatons vacuum breakers only. Protec Z. ii
of equipment in the total system. The In all cases described below, Eaton RC snubber and/or Protec Z damp
distribution system can be subject to highly recommends performing a internal transformer resonance:
voltage transients caused by lighting switching transient study to deter- 1
or switching surges. mine the transient response, and The natural frequency of transformer
properly select and rate the transient windings can under some circum-
Recognizing that distribution system mitigation equipment. stances be excited to resonate by the 2
can be subject to voltage transients switching frequency. Transformer
caused by lighting or switching, the Surge Protection Recommendations windings in resonance can produce
industry has developed standards to
Note: The complete surge protection elevated internal voltages that produce 3
provide guidelines for surge protection insulation damage or failure. An RC
for power system equipment consists of
of electrical equipment. Those guide- a surge arrester in parallel with an RC snubber or a Protec Z applied at the
lines should be used in design and snubber. Eaton can custom design and transformer terminals as indicated 4
protection of electrical distribution supply an RC snubber to the specific above can damp internal winding
systems independent of the circuit characteristics of the system of interest, resonance and prevent the production
breaker interrupting medium. The and highly recommends this approach. The of damaging elevated internal 5
industry standards are: abbreviation RC snubber used in the text voltages. This is typically required
below refers to Eatons custom device.
ANSI C62 where rectifiers, UPS or similar
Guides and Standards for Surge
Alternatively, standard, one-size-fits-all
devices are available from other manufac- electronic equipment is on the 6
Protection turers. The abbreviation Protec Z used in transformer secondary.
the text below refers to Surge Protection
IEEE 242Buff Book Device manufactured by NTSA. An equiva- 3. Arc-Furnace Transformers 7
IEEE Recommended Practice for lent device offered by other manufacturers, Provide surge arrester in parallel
Protection and Coordination of such as Type EHZ by ABB, can also be used. with custom RC snubber at the
Industrial and Commercial Power transformer terminals. Switching 8
Systems 1. For circuits exposed to lightning, of Arc-Furnace Transformers pro-
surge arresters should be applied duce transients with significant
IEEE 141Red Book in line with Industry standard magnitude and energy requiring 9
Recommended Practice for practices. RC snubbers with custom ratings.
Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants 2. Transformers 4. MotorsProvide surge arrester in 10
parallel with RC snubber, or Protec
IEEE C37.20.2 a. Close-coupled to medium Z at the motor terminals. For those
Standards for Metal-Clad Switchgear voltage primary breaker: motors using VFDs, surge protec-
Provide transients surge pro- tion should be applied and precede
11
IEEE C57.142 tection, such as surge arrester the VFD devices as well. For high
Guide to Describe the Occurrence in parallel with RC snubber, or reliability motor applications,
and Mitigation of Switching Protec Z. The surge protection install station class surge arresters
12
Transients Induced by Transformers, device selected should be in parallel with RC snubbers.
Switching Device, and System located and connected at the
Interaction transformer primary terminals 5. GeneratorsProvide station class 13
or it can be located inside the surge arrester in parallel with
Eatons medium voltage metal-clad switchgear and connected on RC snubber, or Protec Z at the
and metal-enclosed switchgear that the transformer side of the generator terminals. 14
uses vacuum circuit breakers is applied primary breaker.
over a broad range of circuits. It is one 6. Capacitor SwitchingProvide
of the many types of equipment in the b. Cable-connected to medium surge arresters at the line-side 15
total distribution system. Whenever a voltage primary breaker: of the capacitor bank. Make sure
switching device is opened or closed, Provide transient surge protec- that the capacitors BIL withstand
certain interactions of the power tion, such as surge arrester in rating is equal to that of the switch- 16
system elements with the switching parallel with RC snubber, or gear. In the case of harmonic filter
device can cause high frequency voltage Protec Z for transformers banks, install additional surge
transients in the system. Due to the connected by cables with arresters on the line reactors. 17
wide range of applications and variety lengths up to 200 feet, depend- Further, for multi-step capacitor
of ratings used for different elements ing on the size of cable and banks or capacitor banks in close
in the power systems, a given circuit number of conductors per proximity, back-to-back switching 18
may or may not require surge protec- phase. The surge protection transient effects can be minimized
tion. Therefore, Eaton does not include device should be located and with the application of inrush
surge protection as standard with its connected at the transformer limiting reactors. 19
metal-clad or metal-enclosed medium terminals. In general, no surge
voltage switchgear. The user exercises protection is needed for trans- 7c. Shunt Reactor Switching
the options as to the type and extent formers with basic impulse Provide surge arrester in parallel 20
of the surge protection necessary level (BIL) withstand ratings with RC snubber, or Protec Z at the
depending on the individual circuit equal to that of the switchgear reactor terminals.
characteristics and cost considerations. and connected to the switch- 21
gear by cables at least 200 feet

5.4-18
Sheet 05 048
7b. Series Current Limiting Reactor Switching Transients Study

i SwitchingProvide surge arrester
Eatons Power System Engineering
in parallel with RC snubber, or
Protec Z at both reactor terminals. group can perform the switching
ii Alternatively, the RC snubber can transient study using the Electromag-
netic Transients Program (EMTP) to
be installed in parallel with the
series current limiting reactor. determine the transient response, and
1 properly select and rate the transient
8. Motor Starting Reactors or mitigation equipment.
Reduced Voltage Auto-
The switching transient study can
2 Transformers (RVAT)Provide
simulate in EMTP the various transient
surge arrester in parallel with RC
snubber, or Protec Z at the reactor concerns described above including
primary switching of transformers,
3 tap in use and/or RVAT terminals
arc-furnace transformer switching,
and/or motor terminals.
motor and generator switching, gener-
9. Switching Underground Cables ator breaker transient recovery voltage
4 Surge protection not needed. (TRV) evaluation, capacitor isolated
switching and back-to-back switching,
10. Voltage Transformers (VTs) and switching of shunt reactors and series
5 Control Power Transformers current limiting reactors as well as
(CPTs)In certain power system transients associated with RVAT
configurations, VTs and CPTs contactor switching. VTs and CPTs
6 installed inside the switchgear are require a special focus of transient
susceptible to: a) voltage transients studies involving EMTP simulation
induced by opening and closing of of switching, ferro-resonance and
7 upstream switching device, b) low internal resonance.
frequency (less than power
frequency of 50/60 Hz) ferro- Through the EMTP study, the surge
8 resonance when de-energizing capacitor and resistor components of
a long run of power cables the RC snubber are precisely selected
connected to those transformers, for each application, to match the
9 c) classical ferro-resonance due to electrical system surge impedance and
single-phase switching or energiza- to provide superior transient suppres-
tion of certain VT configurations, sion. The EMTP study also provides
10 and d) internal resonance where the recommendation for the best
the natural frequency of the location of the snubber assembly to
primary windings can under protect the transformer, generator
11 some circumstances be excited or motor. When appropriate for all
to resonate by the switching systems under study, but especially in
frequency. Eaton does not provide the case of VTs and CPTs, the EMTP
12 surge protection for VTs and CPTs study will recommend additional
as standard. Eaton recommends forms of surge protection, mitigation
performing a power system switch- techniques and/or alternative equip-
13 ing transient study to determine ment ratings and configurations.
need for surge protection (surge
arrester, RC snubber, damping Contact Eaton if switching transients
14 resistor, other solution) for given study is desired.
power system components.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-19
Sheet 05 049
Types of Surge Protection Devices system at normal power frequencies,

and minimizing heat dissipation during i
normal operation. Under high frequency
transient conditions, the capacitor
offers very low impedance, thus ii
effectively inserting the resistor R in
the power system as cable terminating
resistor, thus minimizing reflection of 1
the steep wave-fronts of the voltage
transients and prevents voltage
doubling of the traveling wave. The RC 2
snubber provides protection against
high frequency transients by absorb-
ing and damping and the transients. 3
Please note RC snubber is most
effective in mitigating fast-rising
Figure 5.4-6. Surge Protection Devices 4
transient voltages, and in attenuating
Generally surge protective devices B. Low Resistant Grounded Systems reflections and resonances before they
should be located as closely as possible (systems grounded through have a chance to build up, but does
to the circuit component(s) that require resistor rated for 10 seconds): not limit the peak magnitude of the 5
protection from the transients, and Arrester 10-second MCOV capability transient. Therefore, the RC snubber
connected directly to the terminals of at 60 C, which is obtained from alone may not provide adequate
the component with conductors that manufacturers data, should be protection. To limit peak magnitude 6
are as short and flat as possible to equal to 1.05 x VLL, where VLL is of the transient, application of surge
minimize the inductance. It is also nominal line-to-line service voltage, arrester should also be considered.
important that surge protection devices and 1.05 factor allows for +5%
7
should be properly grounded for voltage variation above the Protec Z
effectively shunting high frequency nominal voltage. A Protec Z device consists of parallel 8
transients to ground. combination of resistor (R) and zinc
C. Ungrounded or Systems oxide voltage suppressor (ZnO), con-
Surge Arresters Grounded through impedance
other than 10-second resistor:
nected in series with a surge capacitor. 9
The modern metal-oxide surge The resistor R is sized to match surge
Arrester MCOV rating should be impedance of the load cables, typically
arresters are recommended because equal to 1.05 x VLL/T, where VLL
this latest advance in arrester design and T are as defined above.
20 to 30 ohms. The ZnO is a gapless 10
ensures better performance and high metal-oxide non-linear arrester, set
reliability of surge protection schemes. Refer to Table 5.4-13 for recommended to trigger at 1 to 2 PU voltage, where
Manufacturers technical data must ratings for metal-oxide surge arresters 1 PU = 1.412*(VL-L/1.732). The surge 11
be consulted for correct application that are sized in accordance with the capacitor is typically sized to be 0.15 to
of a given type of surge arrester. above guidelines, when located in 0.25 microfarad. As with RC snubber,
Notice that published arrester MCOV Eatons switchgear. under normal operating conditions, 12
(maximum continuous operating impedance of the capacitor is very high,
voltage) ratings are based on 40 or Surge Capacitors effectively isolating the resistor R and
45 C ambient temperature. In general, Metal-oxide surge arresters limit the
ZnO from the system at normal power 13
the following guidelines are recom- frequencies, and minimizing heat
magnitude of prospective surge over- dissipation during normal operation.
mended for arrester selections, when voltage, but are ineffective in control-
installed inside Eatons medium ling its rate of rise. Specially designed
Under high frequency transient condi- 14
voltage switchgear: tions, the capacitor offers very low
surge capacitors with low internal impedance, thus effectively inserting
inductance are used to limit the rate of
A. Solidly Grounded Systems:
rise of this surge overvoltage to protect
the resistor R and ZnO in the power 15
Arrester MCOV rating should be system as cable terminating network,
equal to 1.05 x VLL/(1.732 x T), turn-to-turn insulation. Recommended thus minimizing reflection of the steep
values for surge capacitors are: 0.5 f
where VLL is nominal line-to-line
on 5 and 7.5 kV, 0.25 f on 15 kV, and
wave-fronts of the voltage transients 16
service voltage, 1.05 factor allows and prevents voltage doubling of the
for +5% voltage variation above 0.13 f on systems operating at 24 kV traveling wave. The ZnO element limits
the nominal voltage according and higher. the peak voltage magnitudes. The 17
to ANSI C84.1, and T is derating combined effects of R, ZnO, and
factor to allow for operation at RC Snubber capacitor of the Protec Z device
55 C switchgear ambient, which An RC snubber device consists of a provides optimum protection against 18
should be obtained from the non-inductive resistor R sized to match high frequency transients by absorbing,
arrester manufacturer for the type surge impedance of the load cables, damping, and by limiting the peak
of arrester under consideration. typically 20 to 30 ohms, and connected amplitude of the voltage wave-fronts. 19
Typical values of T are: 0.946 to 1.0. in series with a surge capacitor C. The Please note that the Protec Z is not a
surge capacitor is typically sized to be lightning protection device. If lightning
0.15 to 0.25 microfarad. Under normal can occur or be induced in the electrical 20
operating conditions, impedance of system, a properly rated and applied
the capacitor is very high, effectively surge arrester must precede the
isolating the resistor R from the Protec Z. 21

5.4-20
Sheet 05 050
Surge Protection Summary Good protection: Surge arrester in Better protection: RC snubber or
i Minimum protection: Surge arrester
parallel with surge capacitor for Protec Z in parallel with surge arrester
protection from high overvoltage for protection from high frequency
for protection from high overvoltage peaks and fast rising transient. This transients and voltage peaks.
ii peaks, or surge capacitor for protec-
tion from fast-rising transient. Please
option may not provide adequate
surge protection from escalating Best protection: For optimum or
note that the surge arresters or surge voltages caused by circuit resonance. best protection, a switching transient
1 capacitor alone may not provide When applying surge capacitors on analysis is recommended, and surge
adequate surge protection from both sides of a circuit breaker, surge protection needs as determined based
escalating voltages caused by circuit capacitor on one side of the breaker on such study should be implemented.
2 resonance. Note that when applying must be RC snubber or Protec Z,
surge capacitors on both sides of a to mitigate possible virtual current
circuit breaker, surge capacitor on chopping.
3 one side of the breaker must be RC
snubber or Protec Z, to mitigate
possible virtual current chopping.
4
Table 5.4-13. Surge Arrester SelectionsRecommended Ratings
5 Voltage Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or
kV
Arrester Ratings kV Arrester Ratings kV
6 Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV
2.30 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55

7 2.40
3.30
3
3
2.55
2.55
3 2.55 6 5.10 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10
3 2.55 6 5.10 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10
4.00 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10
8 4.16
4.76
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
9
5.10
7.65
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
9
5.10
7.65
4.80 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.60 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
9 6.90 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 9 7.65 9 7.65
7.20 6 5.10 6 5.10 10 8.40 6 5.10 9 7.65 10 8.40
8.32 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20
10 8.40 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20
11.00 9 7.65 9 7.65 15 12.70 9 7.65 10 8.40 15 12.70
11.50 9 7.65 10 8.40 18 15.30 9 7.65 12 10.20 18 15.30
12.00 10 8.40 10 8.40 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30
11 12.47 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.20 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.80 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 15 12.70 18 15.30
12 14.40 12 10.20 12 10.20 21 17.00 12 10.20 15 12.70 21 17.00
18.00 15 12.70 15 12.70 27 22.00 15 12.70 18 15.30 27 22.00
20.78 18 15.30 18 15.30 30 24.40 18 15.30 21 17.00 30 24.40
13 22.00 18 15.30 18 15.30 30 24.40 18 15.30 21 17.00 30 24.40
22.86 18 15.30 21 17.00 18 15.30 24 19.50 36 29.00
23.00 18 15.30 21 17.00 18 15.30 24 19.50 36 29.00
14 24.94
25.80
21
21
17.00
17.00
24
24
19.50
19.50

21
21
17.00
17.00
24
24
19.50
19.50
36
36
29.00
29.00
26.40 21 17.00 24 19.50 21 17.00 27 22.00 39 31.50
33.00 27 22.00 30 24.40 27 22.00 36 29.00 45 36.50
15 34.50 30 24.40 30 24.40 30 24.40 36 29.00 48 39.00
38.00 30 24.40 30 24.40 36 29.00
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-21
Sheet 05 051
Technical DataSurge Protection and Instrument Transformers
Instrument Transformers If metering or relaying application The zero-sequence current transformer

Instrument transformers are used
requires phase-to-ground voltages, is used for sensitive ground fault relay- i
use three VTs, each connected L-G. ing or self-balancing primary current
to protect personnel and secondary If not, use of two VTs connected L-L type machine differential protection.
devices from high voltage, and permit is sufficient. The zero-sequence current transformer ii
use of reasonable insulation levels for is available with a nominal ratio of
relays, meters and instruments. The For ground detection, three VTs 50/5 or 100/5 and available opening
secondaries of standard instrument connected in Line-to-ground/broken- size for power cables of 7.25 inches 1
transformers are rated at 5 A and/or delta are used. (184.2 mm). Special zero-sequence
120 V, 60 Hz. transformers with larger windows are
A single VT, when used, can be
connected line-to-line (it will provide also available. 2
Voltage Transformers
line-to-line output, for example Vab The minimum number of current
Selection of the ratio for voltage or Vbc or Vca), or line-to-ground (it
transformers is seldom a question will provide line-to-ground output, for
transformers for circuit relaying and 3
since the primary rating should be instruments is three current transform-
example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally, ers, one for each phase or two-phase
equal to or higher than the system a single VT is used to derive voltage
line-to-line voltage. The number of signal for synchronizing or Over
connected current transformers and one 4
potential transformers per set and zero-sequence current transformer.
Voltage/Under Voltage function. Separate sets of current transformers
their connection is determined by the
type of system and the relaying and Current Transformers
are required for differential relays. 5
metering required. The minimum pickup of a ground
The current transformer ratio is gener-
relay in the residual of three-phase
When two VTs are used, they are ally selected so that the maximum load
connected current transformers is
6
typically connected L-L, and provide current will read about 70% full scale
phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc, on a standard 5 A coil ammeter. There- primarily determined by the current
transformer ratio. The relay pickup
Vca) for metering and relaying. fore, the current transformer primary
can be reduced by adding one
7
rating should be 140150% of the
When three VTs are used, they are maximum load current. residual connected auxiliary current
connected line-to-ground, and provide transformer. This connection is very
phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca), Maximum system fault current can desirable on main incoming and
8
as well as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc) sometimes influence the current tie circuits of low resistance grounded
voltages for metering and relaying. transformer ratio selection because circuits. 9
the connected secondary devices
have published one-second ratings. Standard accuracy current transform-
ers are normally more than adequate
for most standard applications of 10
microprocessor-based protective
relays and meters. See Table 5.4-16
for CT accuracy information. 11
Table 5.4-14. Standard Voltage Transformer Ratio Information
Rating-Volts 2400 4200 4800 7200 8400 10800 12000 14400 15600 18000 21000 24000 27000 36000
12
Ratio 20-1 35-1 40-1 60-1 70-1 90-1 100-1 120-1 130-1 150-1 175-1 200-1 225-1 300-1
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-22
Sheet 05 052
Technical DataInstrument Transformers
Table 5.4-15. Standard Voltage Transformer, 60 Hz Accuracy Information

i Switchgear Voltage TransformerANSI Accuracy
kV kV Maximum Number Standard Burdens at 120 Volts Burdens at 69.3 Volts Thermal Rating Volt-Ampere
Class BIL Per Set and Connection Ratios 55C Connection
ii W, X, Y Z M ZZ W, X Y M Z
5 60 2LL 20, 1 0.3 1.2 0.3 LL 700

or 3LG 35, LG 400
1 40 LG 2 700
7.5 95 2LL 35, 40, 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 LL 1000
and or 3LG 60, 70, LG 550
2 15 100, 120 LG 2 1000
27 125 2LL 90, 100, 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 1.2 LL 1000
or 3LG 120, 130, LG 550
3 150, 175,
200, 225
LG 2 1000
38 170 2LL 175, 300 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 LL 1000
4 or 3LG LG
LG 2
550
1000
1 For solidly grounded 4160 V system only or any type 2400 V system.
2
5 For solidly grounded system only.
Note: LL = Line-to-line connection. LG = Line-to-ground connection.
Table 5.4-16. Current Transformers, 55 C Ambient

6 CT Ratio Metering Accuracy Classification Relaying Accuracy Classification
(MR = Multi-Ratio) At 60 Hz At 60 Hz At 60 Hz Minimum Accuracy Standard Accuracy Optional High Accuracy
7 Standard Burden
B 0.1
Standard Burden
B 0.5
Standard Burden
B 1.8
Required per IEEE
C37.20.2
Supplied in VCP-W
Switchgear
Available in VCP-W
Switchgear
50:5 1.2 C10 C10

8 75:5 1.2 2.4 C10 C10 C20
100:5 1.2 2.4 C10 C10 C20
150:5 0.6 2.4 C20 C20 C50
9 200:5
250:5
0.6
0.6
2.4
2.4

C20
3
C20
C20
C50
C50
300:5 0.6 2.4 2.4 C20 C20 C100
10 400:5
500:5
0.3
0.3
1.2
0.3
2.4
2.4
C50
3
C50
C50
C100
C100
600:5 0.3 0.3 2.4 C50 C100 C200
11 800:5
1000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1.2
0.3
C50
3
C100
C100
C200
C200
1200:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 C200 C400
1500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 C200 C400
12 2000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 C200 C400
2500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 3 C200 C400
3000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 C200 C400
13 4000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 C200 C400
600:5 MR 0.3 0.3 2.4 3 C100 C200
1200:5 MR 0.3 0.3 0.3 3 C200 C400
14 2000:5 MR 0.3 0.3 0.3 3
3
C200 C400
3000:5 MR 0.3 0.3 0.3 C200 C400
50:5 zero sequence C10
15 100:5 zero sequence C20
3 Not listed in C37.20.2.
Note: Maximum number of CTsTwo sets of standard accuracy or one set of high accuracy CTs can be installed in the breaker compartment
16 on each side of the circuit breaker.
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-23
Sheet 05 053
Technical DataControl Equipment
Control Equipment Auxiliary contacts available for controls 38 kV Breakers: Each 38 kV breaker
or external use from auxiliary switch can be provided with an additional i
Circuit Breaker Control located on the circuit breaker are typi- breaker mounted auxiliary switch,
Eatons VCP-W circuit breaker has a cally limited in number by the breaker with 5 NO and 5 NC contacts
motor charged spring type stored control requirements as follows: ii
Another optional switch available is
energy closing mechanism. Closing Breakers with AC control voltage: called TOCTruck Operated Switch.
the breaker charges accelerating
springs. Protective relays or the con-
1NO and 3NC This switch is mounted in the cell and 1
Breakers with DC control voltage: operates when the circuit breaker is
trol switch will energize a shunt trip levered into or out of the operating
coil to release the accelerating springs 2NO and 3NC
and open the breaker. This requires a When additional auxiliary contacts
position. This switch changes its state 2
when breaker is moved from test to
reliable source of control power for the are needed, following options are connected position and vice versa. The
breaker to function as a protective available:
device. Typical AC and DC control
TOC provides 4NO and 5NC contacts. 3
schematics for type VCP-W circuit 5/15/27 kV Breakers: Each breaker Auxiliary switch contacts are primarily
breakers are shown on Pages 5.4-25 compartment can be provided with used to provide interlocking in control
and 5.4-26. up to three Mechanism Operated circuits, switch indicating lights, 4
Cell (MOC) switches, each with auxiliary relays or other small loads.
For AC control, a capacitor trip device 5NO and 4NC contacts. The MOC Suitability for switching remote
is used with each circuit breaker shunt switches are rotary switches, auxiliary devices, such as motor
5
trip to ensure that energy will be mounted in the cell, and operated by heaters or solenoids, may be checked
available for tripping during fault a plunger on the breaker. Two types with the interrupting capacity listed in
conditions. A control power transformer of MOC switches can be provided Table 5.4-17. Where higher interrupting
6
is required on the source side of each MOC that operates with breaker in capacities are required, an interposing
incoming line breaker. Closing bus tie connected position only, or MOC contactor should be specified.
or bus sectionalizing breakers will that operates with breaker in 7
require automatic transfer of control connected, as well as test position
power. This control power transformer
may also supply other AC auxiliary 8
power requirements for the switchgear.
Signal: Initiation of Initiation of
For DC control, it would require a DC Close Signal Trip Signal 9
control battery, battery charger and T
VCP-W
an AC auxiliary power source for the Circuit Breaker C Closed
battery charger. The battery provides a Main Contacts Open 10
very reliable DC control source, since it Closing Time Opening Time
is isolated from the AC power system = 45 60 ms = 30 45 ms If Interrupting Time = 83 ms
by the battery charger. However, the
Breaker Auxiliary
= 30 38 ms If Interrupting Time = 50 ms 11
battery will require periodic routine Closed
Switch 3 ms 3 ms
maintenance and battery capacity is a Contact Open
reduced by low ambient temperature. Breaker 12
Auxiliary b Breaks 6 ms b Makes 7 ms
Any economic comparison of AC Switch Before a Makes After a Breaks
and DC control for switchgear should b Contact Closed 13
consider that the AC capacitor trip is
a static device with negligible mainte- -9 ms to -3 ms +4 ms to +10 ms Open
nance and long life, while the DC 14
battery will require maintenance and
replacement at some time in the future. Figure 5.4-7. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times
Relays Table 5.4-17. Auxiliary Switch Contacts Interrupting Capacities 15

Microprocessor-based or solid-state Type Continuous Control Circuit Voltage
relays would generally require DC Auxiliary Current
power or reliable uninterruptible AC Switch Amperes
120 Vac 240 Vac 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 16
supply for their logic circuits. Non-inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
Auxiliary Switches
Breaker Auxiliary Switch 20
TOC Switch 20
15
15
10
10
16
16
10
10
5
5
17
Optional circuit breaker and cell auxiliary MOC Switch 20 15 10 16 10 5
switches are available where needed
for interlocking or control of auxiliary
Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes 18
Breaker Auxiliary Switch 20 15 10 16 10 5
devices. Typical applications and TOC Switch 20 15 10 16 10 5
operation are described in Figure 5.4-7 MOC Switch 20 15 10 16 10 5
and Table 5.4-17.
19
Breaker auxiliary switches and MOC
switches are used for breaker open/ 20
close status and interlocking.
21

5.4-24
Sheet 05 054
Technical DataControl Equipment
Table 5.4-18. VCP-W Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power Requirements
i Rated Spring Charging Motor Close or Trip UV Trip Voltage Range Indicating
Control Inrush Run Average Run Amperes mA Close Trip Light
Voltage Amperes Amperes Time, Sec. Maximum Amperes
ii
48 Vdc 36.0 9 6 16 200 3856 2856 0.02
125 Vdc 16.0 4 6 7 80 100140 70140 0.02
1 250 Vdc 9.2 2 6 4 40 200280 140280 0.02
120 Vac 16.0 4 6 6 104127 104127 0.02
240 Vac 9.2 2 6 3 208254 208254 0.02
2 Table 5.4-19. Control Power TransformersSingle-Phase, 60 Hz 1
Rated Primary Rated Secondary kVA kV
3 Voltage, Volt Voltage, Volt Class
2400 240120 5, 10, 15 5

4160 240120 5, 10, 15 5
4 4800 240120 5, 10, 15 5
7200 240120 5, 10, 15 15
8400 240120 5, 10, 15 15
5 12470 240120 5, 10, 15 15
13200 240120 5, 10, 15 15
13800 240120 5, 10, 15 15
6 23000
34500
240120
240120
5, 10, 15
15, 25
27
38 2
1 Line-to-line connection only available. Refer to Eaton for other voltages and kVA ratings.
7 2 150 kV BIL.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-25
Sheet 05 055
Technical DataControl Schematics
i
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker DC Control Schematic
P
(+)
ii
CS CS PR
C T
Spring 11
1
9UV
WL GL RL
Charged
Indicating
Light 2
UV
10UV
DC Source
14
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
4
12
9A
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3
7
3A
3
9
13
61
51
53
55
57
Y
LS1
bb a
a 5
Y SR
62
52
56
58
54
ST
ST 18 17 16 15 22 2
M b b 1
PS2
LC a
a
6
10A
PS Y LS2 LS2
bb 1 bb aa
14
10
Not Available when Second 13
4
24 21 20 19
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
Trip Coil Option is Chosen

N
(-)
LOCATION
CCBSN CGL
LOCATION LOCATION
TCSSLT
TRCS_
TRCO_51N
Options 7
8
ANSI Standard VCP-W Breaker AC Control Schematic
9
1 S-TRU
FUSE
CAC120
LOCATION
S-MRU
S-CPU
CS
C
CS
T
PR 10
11
Spring
9UV
WL GL RL
Charged
Indicating 11
Light
UV
12
9UV
10UV
AC Source
14
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
13
AC (+) 12 UV
1 2
14
9A
4 7 5 9 6 7 8 10 3 10UV
Cap Trip Dev
3A
9
3
13
55
61
51
57
Y
53
a a
LS1 AC ()
bb
Y SR
62
52
58
54
ST
M
b b a
ST
1
18 17 15 22 2
For AC UV 15
LC
a Trip Only
PS2 a
10A
PS Y LS2 LS2
bb 1 bb aa
Not Available when Second
16
14
56
10
13
4
24 20 16 19
TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCO_51N
TRCS_
LOCATION
CCBSN
21
CRL
LOCATION LOCATION
TRCS_
TRSS
TRCO_51N
Trip Coil Option is Chosen
2
Options
Figure 5.4-8. Typical 5/15/27 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics 17

Legend: CS Operation: LS1
C
= Breaker Control SwitchClose
bb = Closed until springs are fully charged. 18
CS = Breaker Control SwitchTrip LS2
= Open until springs are fully charged.
T aa
Y = Anti Pump Relay LS2 = Closed until springs are fully charged. 19
SR = Spring Release Coil (Coil) bb
M = Spring Charge Motor LC = Open until mechanism is reset.
ST = Shunt Trip
PR = Protective Relay
PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions.
PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
20
= Secondary Disconnect
>>
21

5.4-26
Sheet 05 056
Technical DataControl Schematics
i
Breaker DC Control Schematic
ii P
(+)
S-TRU
LOCATION
FUSE
CDC0
S-MRU
S-CPU
CS CS PR
C T
1 Spring WL GL RL
11 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 U9 U10
9UV
Charged
Indicating
Light
2 UV U24 U24 U23 U22 U21 U20
Auxiliary Switch #2 Optional

U19 U18 U17 U16 U15
10UV
DC Source
3 TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRCO_51N
14
12 OPTIONS
4 1 2 4 7 5 6 7 8 9 10 3
9A
13
57
3
61
3A
51
53
55
Y
LS1 a
bb a
54
62
52
56
58
Y SR
ST
ST 18 17 16 15 22 2
5
LOCATION
M b b 1
10A
LC a
PS2 PS Y LS2 LS2 13
bb 1 bb aa TCSSLT
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRCO_51N
14
10
a
4
24 21 20 19
6 N
(-)
LOCATION
TRCS_
TCSSLT
TRCO_51N
Customer Must Furnish

This a Contact from
Auxiliary Switch When
Second Trip Coil Option
7 is Chosen and Make the
Appropriate Connections
8
Breaker AC Control Schematic
9 1 S-MRU
FUSE
CAC120
S-TRU
S-CPU
LOCATION
CS
C U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 U9 U10
CS PR
T
10 Spring WL GL RL
11
9UV
Charged U24 U24 U23 U22 U21 U20 U19 U18 U17 U16 U15
Indicating
Light
Auxiliary Switch #2 Optional
11 UV
10UV
AC Source
9UV
OPTIONS
12 TRCO_51N
TRCS_
TCSSLT
LOCATION
14
AC (+) 12 UV
2 4 5 9 6
10UV
1 7 8 10 3
13 7
9A
13
CAP TRIP DEV

9
3A
3
61
55
51
53
57
Y a a
LS1 AC (-)
bb
62
52
58
54
Y SR
ST
ST 2
M 1
LOCATION 18 17 15 22 For AC UV
b a
14 b
10A
LC Trip Only
PS2 PS Y LS2 LS2 a 13
bb 1 bb aa TRCO_51N
TRCS_
TCSSLT
LOCATION
14
10
56
4
a
6
24 21 20 16 19
Customer Must Furnish
15
LOCATION
TRCS_
TRSS
TRCO_51N
2 CONTACT
S-CPL
S-TRU
S-CPU
SAACCN
MOTOR
CL_STD
CL_GR
CRL
TRIP
S-MRL
S-TRL
FUSE
CAC120
LOCATION
SACCN
S-MRU
This a Contact from

Auxiliary Switch When
Second Trip Coil Option
16 is Chosen and Make the
Appropriate Connections
17 Figure 5.4-9. Typical 38 kV VCP-W DC and AC Control Schematics
Legend: CS Operation: LS1

18 C
= Breaker Control SwitchClose
bb = Closed until springs are fully charged.
CS = Breaker Control SwitchTrip LS2
= Open until springs are fully charged.
T aa
19 Y = Anti Pump Relay LS2 = Closed until springs are fully charged.
SR = Spring Release Coil (Coil) bb
M = Spring Charge Motor LC = Open until mechanism is reset.
20 ST = Shunt Trip
PR = Protective Relay
PS1 = Open in all except between Test and Connected positions.
PS2 = Closed in all except between Test and Connected positions.
= Secondary Disconnect
>>
21

5.4-27
Sheet 05 057
Technical DataRelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function
Bus Bus i
3Y
ETR-4000
ii
52 86 50/51
50N/51N
52
1
87T
50/51G
1
EDR-3000
1
50/5
87GD 50N/51N
2
1
63 50/51G 50/51
50/51
3 50/51N N 3
1
50/51G 4
50/5 52
5
3Y
Phase CT Rating = 200% Feeder Full Load Phase CT Rating = 200% Full Load
6
EDR-3000 = Eaton Distribution Relay ETR-4000 = Eaton Transformer Relay
1 Alternate to 50/51G 87TTransformer Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA)
86GD = Ground Differential Relay (Above 5 MVA and 7
Low Resistance Grounded)
86Lockout Relay
63Sudden Pressure Relay (Liquid Above 5 MVA)
1
8
Alternate to 50/51G
9
Figure 5.4-10. Protective RelaysFeeder Circuit Figure 5.4-12. Protective RelaysTransformer Feeder
10
Bus
Bus
11
EMR-5000
EMR-4000 27, 59, 47, 81,
27, 59, 47,
2 or 3 VTS
55, 78V 12
52 81, 55 52 27, 59
2 or 3 VTS
27, 59 1
1 Aux. Vol.
49, 50, 51, 66, 46, 32,
13
Aux. Vol.
49, 50, 51, 66, 3 37, 50BF, 50/51R
3 46, 32, 37, 50BF,
50/51R 1
50/51G 14
50/5
50/51G
1 87M
50/5 49R, 38 NEUT 3 49, 38 15
RTD
M
RTD
U
R
16
T
M URTD D
17
Phase CT Rating = 150% Full Load Phase CT Rating = 150% Full Load
EMR-4000 = Eaton Motor Relay EMR-5000 = Eaton Motor Relay
URTDUniversal RTD Interface Module URTDUniversal RTD Interface Module 18
1 Alternate to 50/51G
19
20
Figure 5.4-11. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Below 1500 hp Figure 5.4-13. Protective RelaysInduction Motors Above 1500 hp and 21
Minimum Adequate Protection Synchronous Motors

5.4-28
Sheet 05 058
Technical DataRelaysDevice Numbers, Type and Function
EDR-5000 RelayTypical One-Line Diagrams

i
ii
10
11 Figure 5.4-14. EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution RelayTypical Main or Feeder Breaker Application Diagram
1 Can be set for Forward, Reverse or Both directions.
2 Can be Set for Underfreq, Overfreq, Rate of Change or Vector Change.
12
Refer to Tab 4 for details on Eatons relays. Refer to Tab 3 for details on Eatons available metering.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.4-29
Sheet 05 059
Typical Standard Metal-Clad Switchgear Application Layouts, 515 kV
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Standard Metal-Clad)

Note: Arrangements shown in Figures 5.4-155.4-17 can be provided in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 95.00-inch (2413.0 mm) high,
i
96.25-inch (2444.8 mm) deep structures with 50VCPWND, 1200 A circuit breakers.
Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter.
ii
1
Line VTs Line VTs
2
Line CPT Line CPT
Bus VTs 1-ph, 15 kVA max. Bus VTs 1-ph, 15 kVA max. 3
52-T
1200 or
2000 A
4
Bus 1 Bus 2
5
52-M1 52-M2
1200 A 1200 or 1200 A 1200 A 1200 or 6
2000 A 2000 A
R M R M R M R M R M
7
CTs CTs CTs CTs CTs
9
Feeder Source 1 Feeder Feeder Source 2
10
Figure 5.4-15. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs and Line CPTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 1200 or 2000 A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
11
12
Line VTs Line VTs
13
Bus VTs Bus VTs
52-T
1200 or
14
2000 A
Bus 1 Bus 2 15
16
52-M1 52-M2
1200 or 1200 A 1200 A 1200 or
2000 A 2000A 17
R M R M R M R M
CTs CTs CTs CTs 18
19
Source 1 Feeder Feeder Source 2

20
Figure 5.4-16. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsPreferred Arrangement 21

5.4-30
Sheet 05 060
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)

i Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
ii Feeder Feeder
1
Line VTs
2 CTs
CTs
R M R M
3 Bus VTs
Bus VTs 52-T
1200 A 1200 or 1200 A
2000 A
4
Bus 1 Bus 2
5
52-M1 52-M2
6 1200 A 1200 or 1200 or 1200 A
2000 A 2000 A
R M R M R M R M
7
CTs CTs CTs CTs
Line VTs
8
9
Feeder Source 1 Source 2 Feeder
10
Figure 5.4-17. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, but without Line CPTsAlternate Arrangement
11
12
13
Bus VTs Bus VTs
14
15 Bus 1 Bus 2
Line CPT Line CPT

16 1-ph, 15 kVA max. 1-ph, 15 kVA max.
52-M1 52-T 52-M2
3000 A 3000 A 3000 A
17
R M R M
18 CTs
Line VTs Line VTs
CTs
19
20 Source 1 Source 2
21 Figure 5.4-18. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs, and Line CPTs
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000 A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures

5.4-31
Sheet 05 061
Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangements (Continued)

Note: R = Multi-function relay, M = Multi-function meter
i
ii
R R
1
M M
2
52-M1 52-M2
3000 A 52-T 3000 A
3000 A 3
Bus 1 Bus 2 4
(Optional (Optional (Optional
Fans) 1 Fans) 1 Fans) 1 5
7
Line VTs Bus VTs Bus VTs Line VTs
Source 1 Source 2
9
Figure 5.4-19. Typical Main-Tie-Main Arrangement with Bus and Line VTs 10
5 or 15 kV VCP-W Switchgear, 3000 A Mains and Tie, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures
1 This arrangement can be supplied with cooling fans to allow 4000A continuous.
11
Medium Voltage High Resistance
Grounding System
12
Refer to Tab 36, Section 36.1, for
complete product description, single-
line diagram, layout and dimensions
13
of medium voltage high resistance
grounding system.
14
15
16
17
C-HRG Free-Standing
18
NEMA 1 Enclosure
19
20
21

5.4-32
October 2015
Sheet 05 062

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-1
Sheet 05 063
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Structures (Standard Metal-Clad)
Layout Dimensions5 and 15 kVDimensions in Inches (mm) i

Typical Units Tie Breaker Bus Transition Available Configurations
Requirements ii
1 1
1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere
Breaker Breaker Breaker
2
1200 Ampere 2000 Ampere Drawout

3
Breaker Breaker Auxiliary
4
1
5
Drawout 2000 Ampere Drawout
1
Auxiliary Breaker Auxiliary
6
Figure 5.5-1. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide
Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
7
1200 Ampere Drawout 2000 Ampere
Breaker Auxiliary Breaker
8
9
1
Blank Drawout 2000 Ampere

Figure 5.5-4. Tie Breaker Bus Transition (Ventilation) Auxiliary Breaker 10
Requirements
1 Breakers cannot be located in bus transition
compartment. 11
Breaker Auxiliary Breaker 12
Figure 5.5-2. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide 13

Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section
3000 Ampere 14
Breaker 23
15
Vent Area
Drawout
16
Auxiliary
17
Figure 5.5-5. Available Configurations
2 For 4000 A force cooled application, 18
refer to Eaton.
3 This configuration is available for indoor
and outdoor walk-in designs only. 19
Figure 5.5-3. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide 20

Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
21
Dimensions for estimating purposes only.

5.5-2
Sheet 05 064
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg)

i Table 5.5-1. Assemblies (Less Breakers. See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers.) 1
Type of Main Bus Indoor Aisleless Sheltered-Aisle Including Aisle
ii Vertical Section Rating Amperes Single Row Double Row
B/B 1200 2400 (1090) 3200 (1453) 4200 (1907) 7200 (3269)
2000 2500 (1135) 3300 (1500) 4300 (1952) 7400 (3360)
1 3000 2600 (1180) 3400 (1545) 4400 (1998) 7600 (3450)
4000 2700 (1226) 3500 (1590) 4500 (2045) 7700 (3500)
B/A 1200 2300 (1044) 2900 (1317) 4100 (1861) 7000 (3178)
2 or 2000 2400 (1090) 3000 (1362) 4200 (1907) 7200 (3269)
A/B 3000 2500 (1135) 3100 (1407) 4300 (1952) 7400 (3360)
4000 2600 (1180) 3200 (1453) 4400 (1998) 7500 (3409)
3 A/A 1200 2000 (908) 2600 (1180) 3800 (1725) 6400 (2906)
2000 2100 (953) 2700 (1226) 3900 (1771) 6600 (2996)
3000 2200 (999) 2800 (1271) 4000 (1816) 6800 (3087)
4 1
4000 2300 (1046) 2900 (1317) 4100 (1861) 6900 (3136)
See Table 5.5-2 for breakers.
Table 5.5-2. Breaker Weights in Lbs (kg)

5 Figure 5.5-8. Indoor
Type of Current Rating, Amperes
Breaker 1200 2000 3000
6 Approximate Weight, Lbs (kg), Static 2
50 VCP-W 250, 40C, 25, 40 350 (159) 410 (186) 525 (238)
50 VCP-W 350, 50C, 50 460 (209) 490 (222) 525 (238)
7 50 VCP-W 500, 63C, 63 575 (261) 575 (261) 575 (261)
75 VCP-W 500, 50C, 50 375 (170) 410 (186) 525 (238)
150 VCP-W 500, 25C, 25 350 (159) 410 (186) 525 (238)
8 150 VCP-W 750, 40C, 40 350 (159) 410 (186) 525 (238)
150 VCP-W 1000, 50C, 50 460 (209) 490 (222) 525 (238)
150 VCP-W 1500, 63C, 63 575 (261) 575 (261) 575 (261)
9 2 Impact weight = 1.5 times static weight.

10
11
Figure 5.5-9. Outdoor Aisleless
12
13
14
15 Figure 5.5-6. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Single Row
16
17
18
19
20
21 Figure 5.5-7. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Double Row Dimensions and weights for estimating
purposes only.

5.5-3
Sheet 05 065
Dimensions in Inches (mm) (Continued)

i
2.00 2.00
(50.8)
32.00 (812.8)
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
32.00
(812.8)
2.00
(50.8)
ii
3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
1
23.00 1
23.00
(584.2) (584.2)
34.25
2
0.88
(870.0) (22.0)
96.25 (2444.8)
3
9.00
44.50 (1130.3)
(228.6)
4
60.88 (1546.4)
0.56
(14.2) 5
(4) Knockouts
for Top Secondary 3.00
Conduit Entry (76.2)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
6
20.25
(514.4)
6.00
(152.4) 0.25 (6.4) Member
0.56 (14.2) 5.56
7
7.00
(177.8) (141.2)
Front
3.00 3.00
8
(76.2) (76.2)
Figure 5.5-11. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor
Front Breaker or Auxiliary Structure
2
9
Power cable entrance area. Refer to
Figure 5.5-12 for typical conduit locations.
Figure 5.5-10. Top View of Typical Indoor
Refer to shop drawings for order specific
Breaker and Auxiliary Structures locations. 10
1 Power cable entrance area. Refer to 3 Recommended minimum clearance to rear
Figure 5.5-12 for typical conduit locations. of VacClad-W: 36.00 inches (914.4 mm).
locations.
4 Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25 11
inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.
5 Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch
(12.7 mm) bolts.
12
6 Station ground connection provision.
7 Secondary conduit space: Allmaximum
of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection. 13
8 Minimum clearance to LH side of
VacClad-W: 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
Minimum clearance to RH side of the 14
switchgear: 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
9 Finished foundation surface shall be level
within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-back, and
15
diagonally, as measured by a laser level.
j Minimum clearance to front of VacClad-W:
70.00 inches (1778.0 mm). 16
k Floor steel if used, must not exceed this
dimension under VacClad-W.
17
18
19
20
Dimensions for estimating purposes only. 21

5.5-4
Sheet 05 066

i
Rear 6.00 (152.4)
ii 6.00 (152.4)
1 1 1 2
7.00 (177.8)
1
11.50 (292.1)
Upper
2 2 2 2 7 Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
Case
3 Two Conduits per Breaker 3 3 3 3 3 2-Small Relay
Case
4 3-Instrument
6 5 5 4-Test Switch
4
4 5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
3 3 3 3 3
Switch
4 7-Metering
5
6 5 5 Unit
6 One Conduit per Breaker

2 2 2 7 Lower
Hinged
Panel
Figure 5.5-12. Primary Conduit Locations for 1 1 1 1

7 Stacked Breakers
1 Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional
hinged rear doors are required.
8 2 When cables enter from top, they connect
to the breaker located in the bottom
compartment. When cables enter from
9 bottom, they connect to the breaker in the
upper compartment.
Figure 5.5-13. Maximum Hinged
3
Panel Equipment
When cables enter from top, they connect
to the breaker located in the upper Note: The figure above shows that the
10 compartment. When cables enter from arrangement of components differs
bottom, they connect to the breaker in between upper and lower panels. The figure
the bottom compartment. may also be used to select custom arrange-
11 ments of hinged panel components. Also,
the use of multi-function relays such as
Eatons E-series relays will significantly
reduce consumption of panel space.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-5
Sheet 05 067
6.00
(152.4)
i
Attach to the Switchgear 4.00
Channels Using Supplied Hardware (101.6)
1.00 (25.4)
ii
3.00 4.00 (101.6)
(76.2)
4.25 4.88 (124.0) 1

0.75 (19.1) (108.0)
0.63 (16.0)
1 Location for station

ground connection.
3 Power cable entrance
space. Refer to shop 6.00 (152.4)
2
4.50 (114.3)
order base plan drawing
2 Attach switchgear to for conduit locations.
foundation using one Conduit projection not
of the two holes.
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or
to exceed 8.00 inches (203.2 mm). Attach to the Floor at One of the Two Hole
Locations Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
3
better bolt. Torque 4 Secondary control wiring Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
to 150 ft.-lbs. conduit entrance space.
(Total of 4 mounting Conduit stub ups not to
bolts per vertical
section, one at each
project more than 7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
2
Mounting Clip Details
4
corner.) 5 Finished foundation surface shall be level 4.50
within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36 inches (114.3)
2.00 (50.8) 5
5/8" Bolt & HDWE
Supplied by Customer
6.00
2.00 (50.8)
(152.4)
6
Optional
Rear Door
View A
7
2
36.00 (914.4)
8
7 GA Steel
2.75 (69.8) Minimum Recommended Clearance
Mounting Clip
Supplied by Eaton X
4.50 (114.3) C
L
7.00 (177.8)
6.00 (152.4) 9
3.31 (84.1) 4.50 (114.3)
3 7.12 (180.8)
21.25 (539.8)
7.12
4.38 (111.3) 11.50 (292.1)
2.00 (50.8)
10
3
(180.8)
8.00 (203.2) 1 20.50
(520.7)
11
90.69 (2303.5)
90.27 (2292.8) 90.27 (2292.8)
101.25 (2571.8)
0.56 (14.2) 12
3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
4
3.00 (76.2)
Channel
13
Locations
0.25 3.38 (85.9) 2.00 (50.8)
3.88 (98.5)
36
(6.4)
36
7.67 (194.8)
10.56 (268.2) 4.50 (114.3)
14
0.12 0.12
(3.0) (3.0)
Outdoor
End Wall
2
Outdoor
X
View X-X 15
End Wall
2.75 (69.8) Grade Level
4.50 (114.3) 70.00 (1778)

16
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) Minimum Recommended Clearance
Front of Switchgear 17
18
Figure 5.5-14. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
19
20
21

5.5-6
Sheet 05 068
i 6.00
(152.4)
Attach to the Switchgear 4.00
Attach to the Floor at Channels Using Supplied Hardware (101.6)
1.00 (25.4)
One of the Two Hole Locations
ii Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt
or Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs. 3.00 4.00 (101.6)
6.50 (165.1) (76.2)
1.25
1 (31.8) 4.00
(101.6) 0.75 (19.1)
4.25
4.88 (124.0)
1 Location for station 3 Power cable entrance (108.0)

ground connection. 2.75 0.63 (16.0)
space. Refer to shop
order base plan drawing (69.8)
2 2 5 Attach switchgear to
foundation using one
for conduit locations.
Conduit projection
5.75 (146.1)
6.00 (152.4) 4.50 (114.3)

of the two holes. not to exceed
Use 5/8" Grade 5 or 8.00 inches (203.2 mm). 5.75 (146.1)
3.75
better bolt. Torque
3 to 150 ft.-lbs.
(Total of 4 mounting
4 Secondary control wiring
conduit entrance space.
(95.3)
5
Attach to the Floor at
One of the Two Hole Locations
bolts per vertical Conduit stub ups not to Mounting Angle Details Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
section, one at each project more than Better Torque to 150 Ft.-Lbs.
4 corner.) 7.00 inches (177.8 mm). 2

5 Finished foundation
surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) 4.50
5 in 36 inches (914.4 mm)

left-to-right, front-to-back,
5/8" Bolt & HDWE
(114.3)
2.00 (50.8)
and diagonally, as measured
Supplied by
by a laser level.
Customer
6 6.00
(152.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Optional
7 Rear Door
View A
8 2
7 GA Steel 36.00 (914.0)

2.75 (69.8) Minimum Recommended Clearance
Mounting Clip
9 Supplied by Eaton 4.50
(114.3)
X SEE ENLARGED
VIEW A
6.00 (152.4)
CL
4.50 (114.3)
10 3 7.12 (180.8)
7.00 (177.8)
2.00
(50.8)
21.25 (539.8) 4.38 (111.3) 11.50 (292.1)
3 7.12
Locations
(180.8)
11
Channel
20.50
8.00 (203.2) 1
(520.7)
12 90.69 (2303.5)
90.27
(2292.8)
0.56 (14.2)
13 3.00 (76.2)
0.56 (14.2)
4
3.00 (76.2) 3.38 (85.9)
14 3.38 (85.8) 167.23

3.88 (98.5) (4247.6)
0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4)
3.88 (98.5)
15 5
4.00 (101.6) 4.00
LOCATIONS
3.00 (76.2) (101.6)

Outdoor
CHANNEL
Typical 4.00 (101.6)

End Wall 1.25
0.75 (31.8)
16 Removable
(19.1)
11.50
Covers (292.1)
68.96
Aisle 11.40
(1751.6)
17 (289.6)
11.50
(292.1)
0.70
18 0.10
(17.8)
0.10
2.00
(50.8)
(2.5) (2.5)
19 0.12 (3.0)
Outdoor
End Wall X
4.50
(114.3)
2.75 (69.8)
View X-X
4.50 (114.3)
20 38.00 (965.2) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 38.00 (965.2)
Front of Switchgear
21 Figure 5.5-15. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Sheltered Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5.5-7
Sheet 05 069
Note: 1 Location for station 2 5 Attach switchgear to 3 Power cable entrance 4 Secondary control wiring conduit
i
First install both ground connection foundation using one space. Refer to shop entrance space. Conduit stub ups
rows of switchgear typical each end unit. of the two holes. order base plan drawing not to project more than
then install aisle Use 5/8" Grade 5 or for conduit locations. 7.00 inches (177.8 mm).
parts per drawing. (Later) better bolt. Torque
to 150 ft. lbs.
Conduit projection
not to exceed
ii
(Total of 4 mounting 8.00 inches (203.2 mm). Attach to the Floor at
6.00 One of the Two Hole Locations
bolts per vertical (152.4) Shown Using 5/8" Grade 5 Bolt or
6.50
(165.1)
section, one at each
corner.) Attach to the Switchgear Better Torque to 150 Ft. Lbs. 1
Channels Using
6 Finished foundation 6.00
5.75 Supplied Hardware
surface shall be level (152.4)
(146.1)
5.75 (146.1)
within 0.06-inch
(1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches 4.00 (101.6)
2
3.75 (914.4 mm) left-to-right,
(95.3) front-to-back, and 4.88 (124.0)
diagonally, as measured
5
by a laser level. 2
3
Mounting Angle Details
Optional
4
Rear Door X
5
2
7 GA Steel 3.00 Minimum
36.00
Mounting Clip (76.2) Recommended
(914.4) 6.00 (152.4)
Supplied by Eaton
4.00
(101.6)
CL
Clearance
6
4.50 (114.3)
7.00 (177.8)
3 7.12 (180.8) 2.00
21.25 (539.8) 4.38 (111.3) 11.50 (292.1) (50.8)
7
Locations
Channel
3
8.00 (203.2) 1 20.50

7.12 (180.8) (520.7)
90.69 (2303.5)
8
90.27
0.56 (14.2) (2292.8)
3.00 (76.2)
4
0.56 (14.2)
9
3.00 (76.2) 3.38 (85.8)
0.25 3.38 (85.8)

(6.4)
3.88 (98.5)
0.25 (6.4)
3.88 (98.5) 4.00 (101.6) 10
5
Locations
1.50 (38.1)
Channel
Typical 3.50 (88.9)
1.50
0.75
(19.1) 11.50
(38.1)
11
Removable 261.50
(292.1)
Covers 11.50 68.96 (6642.1)
(292.1) (1751.6)
Aisle 11.50
(292.1) 12
0.75 2.00
(19.1) (50.8)
4.00 (101.6)
13
0.12 0.12
(3.0) (3.0)
Outdoor
4 Outdoor
End Wall
38.00 36.00 36.00 36.00
End Wall
38.00
14
(965.2) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (965.2)
90.27
(2292.8)
15
Locations
Channel
16
2.00
0.12 (3.0)
3.00 (76.2) 36.00 Minimum
(50.8) 4.50 (114.3)
17
4.00 (101.6) (914.4) Recommended
Clearance View X-X
18
X
Figure 5.5-16. 5/15 kV Switchgear Outdoor Common Aisle Base Plan (Typical Details)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
19
20
21

5.5-8
Sheet 05 070
Layout Dimensions5 kV, 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide, Indoor Only (Standard Metal-Clad)
i Layout Dimensions5 kVDimensions in Inches (mm)

Typical UnitsIndoor Tie Breaker Bus Transition Available Configurations
ii Requirements
1 1
1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere Drawout
Breaker Breaker Auxiliary
2
3
Breaker Auxiliary Breaker
4
5 1
1 Drawout
6 Auxiliary
Figure 5.5-17. 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide
Typical Breaker/Breaker Vertical Section
7
Drawout
8 Auxiliary
9 1

10 Figure 5.5-20. Tie Breaker Bus Transition
Requirements Typical Weights
1 Breakers cannot be located in bus transition Table 5.5-3. Switchgear Assembly
11 compartment. (Less Breaker)
Type of Main Bus Weight
Vertical Rating, Lbs (kg)
12 Section Amperes
B/B 1200 2000 (908)

2000 2200 (999)
13 Figure 5.5-18. 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide B/A or A/B 1200 1700 (772)
Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section 2000 1900 (863)
14 A/A 1200
2000
1600 (726)
1800 (817)
Table 5.5-4. Circuit Breaker 2

15
Type of Current Weight
Circuit Rating, Lbs (kg)
Breaker Amperes (Static)
16
50 VCPW-ND-250 1200 345 (157)
2 Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
17
18
19
20 Figure 5.5-19. 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide

Typical Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
21

5.5-9
Sheet 05 071

i
2.00 2.00
(50.8)
22.00 (558.8)
(50.8)
2.00
(50.8)
22.00
(558.8)
2.00
(50.8)
ii
3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
1
23.00 1
23.00
(584.2) (584.2)
24.25 0.88
2
(619.9) (22.0)
96.25 (2444.8)
3
9.00
44.50 (1130.3)
(228.6)
4
60.88 (1546.4)
0.56
(14.2) 5
(4) Knockouts
for Top Secondary 3.00
3.38
Conduit Entry (76.2)
3.38 (85.9) (85.9)
6
20.25
(514.4)
6.00
(152.4) 0.25 (6.4) Member
0.56 (14.2) 5.56
7
7.00
(177.8)
(141.2)
Front
3.00 3.00
8
(76.2) (76.2)
Figure 5.5-23. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor
Front Breaker or Auxiliary Structure
2
9
Power cable entrance area. Refer to
Figure 5.5-24 for typical conduit locations.
Figure 5.5-22. Top View of Typical Indoor
Breaker and Auxiliary Structures locations. 10
1 Power cable entrance area. Refer to 3 Recommended minimum clearance to rear
Figure 5.5-24 for typical conduit locations. of VacClad-W: 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
locations.
4 Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 3.25 11
inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W.
5 Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
bolts or weld, outdoor0.50-inch (12.7 mm)
bolts.
12
6 Station ground connection provision.
of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection. 13
8 Minimum clearance to LH side of
VacClad-W: 26.00 inches (660.4 mm).
Minimum clearance to RH side of the 14
within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
15
70.00 inches (1778.0 mm). 16
k Floor steel if used, must not exceed this
dimension under VacClad-W.
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-10
Sheet 05 072

i
6.00 (152.4)
ii Rear
6.00 (152.4)
1 2
7.00 (177.8)
1
11.50 (292.1)
Upper
2 2 7 Hinged
Panel
1-Large Relay
3 Two Conduits per Breaker 3 3 4
Case
2-Small Relay
Case
3-Instrument
6 5 4-Test Switch
4 5-Switch
6-Lock-out
Relay or
3 3 4 Switch
5 6 5
7-Metering
Unit

6 One Conduit per Breaker

1
Lower
Hinged
7 Panel
7 Figure 5.5-24. Primary Conduit Locations for

Stacked Breakers
1 2 2
Changes to 8.25 (209.6 mm) if optional
8 2
hinged rear doors are required.
When cables enter from top, they connect
to the breaker located in the bottom
compartment. When cables enter from
9 bottom, they connect to the breaker in
Figure 5.5-25. Maximum Hinged
the upper compartment. Panel Equipment
3 When cables enter from top, they connect Note: The figure above shows that the
10 to the breaker located in the upper arrangement of components differs
compartment. When cables enter from between upper and lower panels. The figure
bottom, they connect to the breaker in may also be used to select custom arrange-
the bottom compartment. ments of hinged panel components. Also,
11 the use of multi-function relays such as
Eatons E-series relays will significantly
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-11
Sheet 05 073
Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5 kV, Low Profile 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
ii
80.00
1
(2032.0) LL
(1)
521 RTH
2
36.00
(914.4)
SCD
0H7
Pad
3
80.00 1
(2032.0)
4
Figure 5.5-26. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Profile 26.00-Inch Figure 5.5-29. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements 5
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Blank/Breaker
1 Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables
enter from top.
Auxiliary or 6
Blank 4
Blank 1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere
ND Breaker
4 Auxiliary or
ND Breaker
4
7
521
Blank 4
36.00
RTH
(914.4)
SCD Auxiliary or
8
0H7
Pad 1200 Ampere Blank 1200 Ampere Blank 4
ND Breaker ND Breaker
80.00
(2032.0) 4 4
Auxiliary or
9
Blank 4
10
Figure 5.5-30. Available Configurations (Front View)
4 Relays or control devices cannot be mounted on the circuit breaker
or auxiliary compartment door. 11
80.00 2 Typical Weights
(2032.0)
Table 5.5-5. Switchgear Assembly (Less Breaker)
12
Figure 5.5-27. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Profile 26.00-Inch Vertical Section Main Bus Rating, Weight
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Breaker/Blank
2
Type Amperes Lbs (kg) 13
Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm) if power cables
enter from below. B/A or A/B 1200 1500 (682)
2000 1700 (772)
A/A 1200 1400 (636) 14
2000 1600 (726)
Table 5.5-6. Circuit Breaker 5 15

Circuit Breaker Current Rating, Weight (Static)
Type Amperes Lbs (kg)
VTX
16
(2) 50 VCPW-ND-250 1200 345 (157)
80.00
(2032.0) 5 Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
LP
RTH
(2) 17
521
RTH
SCD
36.00
(914.4) 18
0H7
Pad
19
80.00 3
(2032.0)
20
Figure 5.5-28. 5 kV, 1200A, 250 MVA VCP-W ND Low Profile 26.00-Inch
(660.4 mm) Wide Indoor Unit, Auxiliary/Breaker
3 Depth can be reduced to 72.00 inch (1831.7 mm) if power cables enter 21
from top.

5.5-12
Sheet 05 074
Layout DimensionsSpecial Design5/15 kV, Low Profile 36.00-Inch (9.14.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad)
i Access for
VT Cables
VT Cables
Blank
ii Either/Or
VT or CPT
2 80.00 Breaker
(2032.0)
CT
CT
3
36.00
CT
CT
(914.4) Figure 5.5-32. Tie Breaker Bus Transition Requirements

4
HTR BYZ(1)
SC
5
86.25 1
Auxiliary Blank Auxiliary
(2190.8)
6
Figure 5.5-31. 36.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide VCP-W Low Profile Indoor Unit
1 Other depths possible depending on cable entry direction and VT/CPT Auxiliary
7 connections. Contact Eaton. VCP-W VCP-W
Breaker Breaker
1200 or 1200, 2000
2000 A or 3000 A
8 Auxiliary
9
Figure 5.5-33. Available Configurations (Front View)
10 Typical Weights
Table 5.5-7. Assemblies (Less Breakers, See Table 5.5-2 for Breakers)
11 Vertical Section Main Bus Rating, Indoor Structure
Type Amperes Lbs (kg)
B/B 1200 2200 (999)

12 2000 2300 (1044)
3000 2400 (1090)
B/A or A/B 1200 2100 (953)
13 2000 2200 (999)
3000 2300 (1044)
A/A 1200 1800 (818)
14 2000 1900 (864)
3000 2000 (908)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-13
Sheet 05 075
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design
Layout Dimensions27 kV One-High DesignDimensions in Inches (mm) i

Typical Units Available Configurations
ii
Drawout Drawout Drawout

1
VTs VTs VTs
1200 Ampere 2000 Ampere Drawout 3

Breaker Breaker VTs
5
Drawout
Figure 5.5-34. Indoor Figure 5.5-36. Indoor Auxiliaries Fuses
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide Typical 6
Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section Auxiliary/Auxiliary Vertical Section
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg) 7

Fixed
Table 5.5-8. Assemblies (Less Breakers) CPT
Type of Main Bus Indoor Outdoor
Vertical Rating Aisleless 8
Section Amperes
A/B 1200
2000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
3400 (1545)
3500 (1591)
Figure 5.5-37. Available Configurations 9
A/A 1200 2200 (999) 2800 (1271)
2000 2300 (1045) 2900 (1317)
10
Table 5.5-9. Breaker Weights in Lbs (kg) 1
Type of Current Rating, 11

Breaker Amperes
1200 2000
270 VCP-W 750 415 (188) 475 (216)

12
Figure 5.5-35. Outdoor Aisleless 270 VCP-W 1000 415 (188) 475 (216)
Typical Auxiliary/Breaker Vertical Section 270 VCP-W 1250, 25C 415 (188) 475 (216)
270 VCP-W 40, 40C 415 (188) 475 (216) 13
1 Breaker impact = 1.5 x breaker weight.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-14
Sheet 05 076
Layout Dimensions27 kV, 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide (Standard Metal-Clad), One-High Design

i
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 6.00 (152.4)
ii 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 6.00 (152.4)
32.00 (812.8)
32.00 (812.8)
7.00 (177.8)
1 3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
23.00 11.50 (292.1)

23.00
(584.2)
2 (584.2)
96.25 (2444.8)
34.25 0.88 Four Conduits
3 (870.0) (22.0)
9.00 (228.6)
4
34 (863.6)
59.31 (1506.5)
5
0.56
(2) Knockouts (14.2) Two Conduits
6 for Top Secondary

Conduit Entry 3.00
3.88 Figure 5.5-40. Primary Conduit Locations for
(76.2) Top or Bottom Entry
(98.6)
7 15.50
(393.7)
3.88 (98.6) l Changes to 8.25 inches (209.6 mm) if
optional hinged rear doors are required.
0.25 (6.35) Member
8.50
0.56 (14.2)
8 (215.9)
5.56
Front (141.2)
3.00 3.00
(76.2) (76.2) 1 1 1 2
Front
9
Figure 5.5-38. Top View of Typical Indoor Figure 5.5-39. Base Plan of a Typical Indoor
10 Breaker and Auxiliary Structures Breaker or Auxiliary Structure
2 Upper
1 Power cable entrance area. Refer to Power cable entrance area. Refer to 2 2 2 7 Hinged
Figure 5.5-40 for typical conduit locations. Figure 5.5-40 for typical conduit locations. Panel
11 Refer to shop drawings for order specific
locations.
locations.
1-Large Relay
Case
3 Recommended minimum clearance to rear 3 3 3 3 3 2-Small Relay
of VacClad-W: 36.00 inches (914.4 mm). Case
4
12 4 Floor steel, if used, must not exceed 6 5 5
4
3-Instrument
4-Test Switch
3.25 inches (82.6 mm) under VacClad-W. 5-Switch
5 6-Lock-out
Anchor locations: indoor0.50-inch Relay or
13 (12.7 mm) bolts or weld, outdoor
0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts.
Switch
7-Metering
Unit
6 Station ground connection provision. No devices on the
7
breaker compartment
of 1.00-inch (25.4 mm) projection.
door.
Lower
8 Minimum clearance to LH side of Hinged
VacClad-W: 32.00 inches (812.8 mm). Panel
15 Minimum clearance to RH side of the
16 within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
17 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm).
k Floor steel if used, must not exceed this Figure 5.5-41. Maximum Hinged
dimension under VacClad-W. Panel Equipment
18 Note: Outdoor Aisleless Base Plan Note: The figure above shows that the
27 kV switchgear outdoor Aisleless base arrangement of components differs
plan details are same as 5/15 kV outdoor between upper and lower panels. The figure
19 Aisleless switchgear. Refer to Figure 5.5-14. may also be used to select custom arrange-
ments of hinged panel components. Also,
the use of multi-function relays such as
20 Eatons E-series relays will significantly
21

5.5-15
Sheet 05 077
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design
Layout Dimensions27 kV Two-High Design Tie Breaker Bus Transition

i
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Requirements
Typical UnitsIndoor 1 ii
6
6 4
6
5
Figure 5.5-42. Indoor 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Figure 5.5-43. 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) Wide
Wide Typical Breaker-over-Breaker Typical Auxiliary-over-Breaker 6
Vertical Section Vertical Section
1 For 1-high arrangement (1 breaker per cell),
depth may be reduced to 108.64 inches
(2759.5 mm).
7
Available Configurations 2 8
6
9
Figure 5.5-45. Tie Breaker Bus Transition
Blank 1200 Ampere Drawout CPT Primary 1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere Requirements
Breaker VTs Fuse Drawer
3
Breaker Breaker 6 Breakers cannot be located in bus transition
compartment.
10
H
100.00 Typical Weights 11
(2540.0)
1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere 1200 Ampere Table 5.5-10. Assemblies (Less Breakers) 7
or or or or Blank Drawout
Type of Main Bus Weight
2000 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
2000 Ampere
Breaker
VTs
Vertical Rating, Lbs (kg) 12
Section Amperes
36.00
Aux/Bkr 1200
2000
2500 (1135)
2600 (1180)
13
(914.4) 2500 2600 (1180)
2700 2700 (1227)
Aux/Aux 1200 2200 (1000) 14
Drawout Blank CPT Primary CPT Primary CPT Primary Blank 2000 2300 (1046)
VTs Fuse Drawer Fuse Drawer Fuse Drawer 2500 2300 (1046)
3 4 5
2700 2400 (1091) 15
Bkr/Bkr 1200 2700 (1227)
H
2000 2800 (1273)
100.00
(2540.0)
2500
2700
2800 (1273)
2900 (1318)
16
Drawout Drawout Drawout CPT Blank Blank 7 Refer to Table 5.5-9 for breaker weights.
VTs VTs VTs 4
17
18
2 Available Main Bus Ratings for 27 kV two-high design are 1200 A, 2000 A, 2500 A or 2700 A.
3 Bus connected, maximum 4 A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear. 19
4 Fuses are bus or line connected. CPT is installed in front bottom, on drawout frame.
Maximum CPT size is single-phase 37.5 kVA or three-phase 45 kVA.
5 Bus or Line connected, maximum 4 A fuses. CPT is installed remote from the switchgear. 20

21

5.5-16
Sheet 05 078
Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
i Typical Floor Plan27 kV Two-High, Indoor
ii
1 5
36.00
(914.4)
2 Min. Rear 1 Anchor locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) bolts SAE
2.00 2.00 Grade 5 or better, (6) places in each vertical section.
32.00
(50.8) (812.8) (50.8) 2 Secondary control wiring conduit openings, conduit
3 projection must not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
3.00
3 Minimum front clearance when using
(76.2) Eatons portable lifter.
4 Line
7
25.00
Compt. 4 Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.
1 (635.0) Minimum clearance to RH side of the
5
5 Recommended minimum rear clearance.
9.00
1
6 Bus
Compt.
(228.6) 8 6 Finished foundation surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
118.64 left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally,
as measured by a laser level.
7 (3013.5) 6
7
48.00 Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must not exceed
(1219.2) 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See shop order base plan
0.88 for conduit locations.
8 Breaker (22.4) 65.97 8 Customers ground provisions, provided as shown
Compt. 1 0.88 (1675.6) by symbol on shop order sectional side views.
(22.4)
9
Control 2
7.00
10 Compt. 22.25 3.00 (177.8)
(565.2) (76.2)
10.96
1 (278.4)
11
3.00 3.00
1.25 (76.2) (76.2)
12 (31.8) 0.59 0.59
32.00 (15.0) (15.0)
(812.8) 36.00 Top Entry Secondary Control
4 Min.
13 (914.4) Knockouts for 1.38" (35.1)
or 1.75 (44.5) Conduits
Front
14 72.00
(1828.8) 7.80
Min. (198.1)
7.38
15 3
(187.5)
3.00 3.00
16 (76.2) (76.2)
36.00
(914.4)
17
18
Figure 5.5-46. Typical Indoor Floor Plan27 kV Two-High
19
20
21 Dimensions for estimating purposes only.

5.5-17
Sheet 05 079
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL Design i

Typical Units Typical Weights in Lbs (kg) 1 ii
Table 5.5-11. Assemblies (Less Breakers)
Type of Main Bus Indoor 1
Vertical Rating
Section Amperes
Breaker 1200 3100 (1409) 2

2000 3200 (1455)
2500 3355 (1525)
Auxiliary 1200 3000 (1364) 3
2000 3100 (1409)
2500 3355 (1525)
1 Refer to Table 5.5-12 for breaker weights. 4
Table 5.5-12. Breaker Weights in Lbs (kg)
Type of Current Rating, Amperes 5
Breaker 1200 2000
380 VCP-W-16, 16C 1080 (490) 1140 (518) 6

380 VCP-W-25, 25C 1080 (490) 1140 (518)
Figure 5.5-47. IndoorTypical Breaker, Main or Feeder
380 VCP-W-32, 32C 1080 (490) 1140 (518)
380 VCP-W-21 1080 (490) 1140 (518) 7
380 VCP-W-40, 40C 1080 (490) 1140 (518)
1080 (490) 1140 (518)
8
10
11
12
Figure 5.5-48. IndoorTypical Auxiliary-Over-Auxiliary
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 5.5-49. IndoorTypical Bus Tie Breaker

19
20

21

5.5-18
Sheet 05 080
i Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignOutdoor Enclosures

(48-Inch and 60-Inch Wide Structures are Available)
ii Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1 139.94
(3554.5)
4 115.67
(2938.0) 106.48
(2704.6)
5
6
42.00 (1066.8)
Wide
7 129.22 1.17
(3282.2) (29.7)
8
Figure 5.5-50. Outdoor Aisleless (42.00 Inches [1066.8 mm] Wide)
9
215.72
(5479.3)
10
11
12
121.79
13 (3093.5) 106.47
(2704.3)
14
15
210.63 1.17
16 (5350.0) (29.7)
17 Figure 5.5-51. Outdoor Sheltered Aisle (42.00 Inches [1066.8 mm] Wide)
18
19
20
21

5.5-19
Sheet 05 081
Layout Dimensions38 kV, 150 kV BIL DesignDimensions in Inches (mm) i
ii
1
Min.
5 Min. 1.50 1 Suggested locations for 0.500-13 bolts
42.00
(1066.8) Rear (38.1) or welding. 2
Max.
8 3.00 2 Secondary conduit location bottom
3.75 3.75
(95.2) (95.2)
(76.2)
7A
entrance. Conduit projection must
not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
3
3 Recommended minimum front clearance.
34.50
16.00 (876.3)
4
Line 4 Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.
1.16 (406.4) Minimum clearance to RH side of the
Compt.
(29.5) switchgear: 6.00 inches (152.4 mm). 5
5 Recommended minimum real clearance
Unfinished Foundation Under Switchgear

1 6 follow local regulations.
6
6 Finished foundation surface shall be
8.69
level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
(220.7)
in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-right,
front-to-back, and diagonally, as
7
68.48 measured by a laser level.
(1739.4)
Bus
Compt.
9 124.36
(3158.7)
7A Floor steel if used, must not exceed 8
this dimension under switchgear.
7B Finished foundation (within

0.08-inch (2.0 mm) clearance) must
9
extend under switchgear minimum
73.24 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) to maximum
39.60
(1005.8)
(1860.3) 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). 10
2 8 Primary (H.V.) conduit projection must
Breaker not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm). See
Compt.
1.75
(44.4)
7.50 1
shop order base plan for conduit locations. 11
(190.5)
30.88
(784.4) 3.00 15.38 1.23 9 Customers ground provisions
(76.2) (390.7) (31.3) 7A provided as shown by symbol on 12
shop order sectional side views.
Floor Plate
1.00 Min. 13
Door (25.4) 1.50 Alternate Secondary Conduit
Min. (38.1) Location Top Entrance
38.00 42.00 Max.
3.00
14
(965.2) (1066.8) 42.00
(76.2) (1066.8)
4
1.94 15
(49.3)
Front
7.50
3 (190.5) 16
Min. 7B
84.00
(2133.6) 3.54
(89.9)
3.00
(76.2)
17
18
19
Figure 5.5-52. Typical Indoor Base Plan38 kV
20
21

5.5-20
Sheet 05 082
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
Typical Application Layouts

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 5.5-53. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
19
Notes:
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two 2. Bottom entry is standard for all 3. All lineups shown can be provided
20 sets of standard or one set of high power cables. In breaker over in mirrored configuration.
accuracy CTs can be installed on breaker arrangement, maximum
each side of the circuit breaker. number of cables is limited to 4. Refer to Figure 5.5-56 to 5.5-61 for
21 two per phase for each breaker. dimensions.

5.5-21
Sheet 05 083

i
ii
10
11
Figure 5.5-54. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV
Notes: 12
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two
accuracy CTs can be installed on 13
each side of the circuit breaker.
2. Bottom entry is standard for all 14
power cables. In breaker over
breaker arrangement, maximum
number of cables is limited to
two per phase for each breaker.
15
3. All lineups shown can be provided
in mirrored configuration. 16
4. Refer to Figure 5.5-56 to 5.5-61 for
dimensions. 17
18
19
20
21

5.5-22
Sheet 05 084
Typical Application Layouts (Continued)

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 Figure 5.5-55. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts5 and 15 kV

Notes:
20 1. Maximum number of CTs: Two 2. Bottom entry is standard for all 3. All lineups shown can be provided
sets of standard or one set of high power cables. In breaker over in mirrored configuration.
accuracy CTs can be installed on breaker arrangement, maximum
21 each side of the circuit breaker. number of cables is limited to
dimensions.
two per phase for each breaker.

5.5-23
Sheet 05 085
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
Available Configurations
i
ii
32.00 Arc exhaust
(812.8) plenum 1
2
Control 1200 A 1200 A Auxiliary 1200 A
Compartment Breaker Breaker (VT, CPT Breaker
or Fuses)
(with relay
box)
(with relay
box)
(with relay
box)
3
(no relays)
4
Control Control Control Control Control
95.00 Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartment
(2413.0) 5
1200 A Control 1200 A 1200 A Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
Breaker
(with relay
Compartment Breaker
(with relay
Breaker
(with relay or Fuses) 6
box) box) box)
(no relays)
7
32.00 9
(812.8)
10
Auxiliary 2000 A 1200 A 2000 A 2000 A
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker 11
(with relay (with relay (with relay (with relay
box) box) box) box)
(no relays)
12
95.00 13
(2413.0) Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent
2000 A Auxiliary
(VT, CPT
2000 A 1200 A 20000A 14
Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker
(with relay or Fuses) (with relay (with relay (with relay
box) box) box) box)
(no relays) 15
(Note 1) (Notes 1, 2) (Notes 1, 3) (Notes 1, 2, 3) (Notes 1, 3, 4) 16

36.00
(914.14)
17
Notes:
1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration
is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door. 18
2 = Maximum current through a 2000 A breaker in this location must be limited to 1750 A.
3 = This configuration requires use of a 4000 A main bus.
4 = Maximum current through each 2000 A breaker in this configuration must be limited to 1750 A each.
19
20
Figure 5.5-56. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
21

5.5-24
Sheet 05 086
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV
i
ii
32.00 Arc exhaust
1 (812.8) plenum
2 Auxiliary Auxiliary Blank or

Control (VT, CPT Control (VT, CPT Transistion
Compartment or Fuses) Compartment or Fuses) to Ampgard
3
(no relays) (no relays)
4
Control Control Control Control
95.00 Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartment
5 (2413.0) Dynamic Vent
Auxiliary Auxiliary Control Blank or

2000/3000 A (VT, CPT
6 Breaker or Fuses)
(VT, CPT
or Fuses)
Compartment Auxiliary
(with relay
box)
7
9 32.00
(812.8)
10
11 2000/3000 A 3000 A 3000 A FC 3000 A FC 4000 A FC

Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker
(with relay (with relay (with relay (with relay (with relay
12 box) box) box) box) box)
Fan Fan
13 Control
95.00 Compartment
(2413.0) Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent Dynamic Vent
14 Auxiliary Auxiliary Fans located

(VT, CPT (VT, CPT inside this
Control or Fuses) Control or Fuses)
Compartment Compartment compartment
15
Dynamic Vent
16
(Notes 2, 5) (Notes 1, 5) (Note 6) (Notes 1, 6) (Note 7)
36.00
17 (914.14)
Notes:
1 = Please note that the only control space available for relays and LV devices for this configuration
18 is the relay box located on the breaker compartment door.
19 6 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000 A circuit breaker in this configuration is 3000 A
with fans running, and 2500 A when fans are not running.
7 = Maximum current allowed through a 3000 A circuit breaker in this configuration is 4000 A
with fans running, and 2500 A when fans are not running.
20
Figure 5.5-56. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)5 and 15 kV (Continued)
21

5.5-25
Sheet 05 087
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
Typical Sectional Side Views

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-57. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
21

5.5-26
Sheet 05 088
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-58. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV
21

5.5-27
Sheet 05 089
Typical Sectional Side Views (Continued)

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-59. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear (Side Views)5 and 15 kV 21

5.5-28
Sheet 05 090
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearWeights5 and 15 kV
5/15 kV Arc-Resistant SwitchgearTypical Weights

i Table 5.5-13. Assemblies (Less Breakers) 1234
Type of Main Bus Indoor Structure Indoor Structure Indoor Structure
ii Vertical Section Rating 36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
97.50-Inch (2476.5 mm) D
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
109.50-Inch (2781.3 mm) D
36.00-Inch (914.4 mm) W
121.50-Inch (3086.1 mm) D
Amperes Lbs (kg) Lbs (kg) Lbs (kg)
1 Breaker/breaker 1200 2800 (1271) 3025 (1374) 3175 (1441)
2000 2900 (1317) 3175 (1441) 3375 (1532)
3000 3000 (1362) 3275 (1487) 3475 (1578)
2 4000 3100 (1407) 3375 (1532) 3575 (1623)
Blank/breaker or 1200 2700 (1226) 2900 (1317) 3125 (1419)
breaker/blank 2000 2800 (1271) 3125 (1419) 3175 (1441)
3 3000
4000
2900 (1317)
3000 (1362)
3150 (1430)
3275 (1487)
3325 (1510)
3475 (1578)
Auxiliary/breaker or 1200 2650 (1203) 2850 (1294) 2975 (1351)
4 breaker/auxiliary 2000
3000
2750 (1248)
2850 (1294)
2975 (1351)
3100 (1407)
3225 (1464)
3275 (1487)
4000 2950 (1339) 3225 (1464) 3450 (1566)
Auxiliary/auxiliary 1200 2600 (1180) 2800 (1271) 2925 (1328)
5 2000 2700 (1226) 2925 (1328) 3175 (1441)
3000 2800 (1271) 3050 (1385) 3225 (1464)
4000 2900 (1317) 3175 (1441) 3375 (1532)
6 Blank/auxiliary or 1200 2500 (1135) 2700 (1226) 2825 (1283)
auxiliary/blank 2000 2600 (1180) 2825 (1283) 2975 (1351)
3000 2700 (1226) 2950 (1339) 3125 (1419)
7 4000 2800 (1271) 3075 (1396) 3275 (1487)
Blank/blank 1200 2500 (1135) 2700 (1226) 2825 (1283)
2000 2600 (1180) 2825 (1283) 2975 (1351)
8 3000
4000
2700 (1226)
2800 (1271)
2950 (1339)
3075 (1396)
3125 (1419)
3275 (1487)
1 Refer to Table 5.5-2 for breaker weights.
9 2 Add weights of end-wall to left and right end structures as follows:
350 Lbs (159.1 kg) for 97.50-inch (2476.5) D structures.
10 3 Add plenum weight as follows:
300 Lbs (136.4 kg) to left and right end structures.
200 Lbs (91.0 kg) to each intermediate structures.
11 4 Add arc duct assembly weight as follows:
200.00 Lbs (91.0 kg) for standard 51.00-inch (1295.4 mm) arc exhaust duct assembly.
30.00 Lbs (14.0 kg) per foot for additional arc duct.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-29
Sheet 05 091
Typical Top PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)

i
36.00 36.00 36.00
End Wall 1.50
(38.1) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4)
1.50 End Wall
(38.1)
ii
18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00
Cables for the

(457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2)
1
Upper Breaker 3.00 3.00
through These (76.2) (76.2)
3.00 3.00
Conduits
(76.2) 7.00 7.00 (76.2) 7.00 1.25 2
(177.8) (177.8) (177.8) (31.8)
4
9.00
(228.6)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
9.00
(228.6)
6.00
(152.4)
6.00
(152.4)
5
7
81.00 108.00 1
(2057.4)
Plenum
(2743.2) 8
10
11
15.25
12
(387.4)
13
VS #1 VS #2 VS #3
Front
Top View 14
Figure 5.5-60. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear, Top Entry CablesTypical Conduit Entrance Locations5 and 15 kV
Note: For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical,
15
minimum two vertical sections and one arc duct exit are required.
For switchgear with enclosure arc ratings of 50 kA rms symmetrical or higher,
minimum three vertical sections and two arc duct exits are required. 16
1 Depth shown is based on use of maximum one 500 kCM per phase, or two 250 kCM per phase power cables
for each breaker entering from the top; otherwise, use structures with 121.50-inch (3086.1-mm) depth.
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-30
Sheet 05 092
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV
Typical Floor PlanDimensions in Inches (mm)

i
ii 1 These are the locations of 0.75 inch (19.1 mm)

diameter mounting holes for securing an arc-
resistant VacClad-W switchgear assembly
(hereafter referred to as VC-W) vertical section to
1 a finished foundation. Use of 0.50 inch (12 mm)
Rear diameter SAE Grade 5 hardware tightened to
4 75 ft-lb (101.7 Nm) is recommended. Use of
36.00 other post-installed mechanical anchor systems,
2 (914.0)
7.52
(191.0)
20.96
(532.0)
7.52 bonded/adhesive type systems, pre-installed
(191.0) cast-in-place systems such as shear lugs, L-bolts
1.61 and J-bolts, or plug welding the VC-W switchgear
(41.0) 3.75 vertical section at the mounting hole locations to
3 (95.0) cast-in-place structural steel materials or to a steel
house foundation is sole responsibility of others.
Alternative mounting systems must have equal or
greater average ultimate tensile and shear load
4 1 1
22.75
capabilities as SAE Grade 5 hardware. In addition
to load capabilities of the mounting system, the
28.00 6 (578.0) bearing strength and bearing surface area at each
(711.0) VC-W switchgear vertical section mounting hole
5 location must be taken into account. Alternative
mounting systems must provide equal or greater
1 1 bearing properties as a Key Bellevilles, Inc.,
K1125-E-125 washer or other manufacturers equal
6 9.00
device used with SAE Grade 5 hardware at each
VC-W switchgear anchor location. Consult a
7
(229.0) licensed structural or civil engineer prior to
96.46 selecting a mounting system if a system other
7 (2450.0)
44.50
than that recommended is preferred.
(1130.0) 8 2 Minimum front clearance required when using

Eatons portable lifter to install drawout devices.
8 0.75 0.75 61.09 If other Eaton devices are used to install drawout
devices, these devices may require more space,
(19.0) (19.0) (1552.0)
1 1 3.37 which will be indicated on an arc-resistant VC-W
(86.0) switchgear assembly specific shop order floor
9 1.88 0.25
plan. In addition, the local authority having
jurisdiction may also require a larger distance.
16.00 (48.0) (6.0)
19.00
(406.0) (483.0) 5 3 Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.
10 Minimum clearance to RH side of the
3.88 4 This is the minimum rear clearance required.

4.46 1 1
11 (113.0)
1.46
(37.0)
(99.0) The local authority having jurisdiction may
require a larger distance.
0.88 0.88 5.80
(22.0) (22.0) (147.0) 5 Location of low voltage control conduit wiring
12 openings. Conduits are limited to a projection
of 1.00 inch (25.4 mm) above the finished floor
32.00 Min. 36.00 or inside the top cover when such conduit entry
is from the top. Maximum conduit size is
(813.0) (914.0)
13 3
70.00 Min.
(1778.0)
1.25 inches (31.8 mm).
6 These are the high voltage cable conduit entry

Front 2 locations when entering from the floor or the top.
14 See shop order base plan for recommended
conduit locations when bottom entry is being
used. Conduit projection must not exceed
2.00 inches (50.8 mm).
15 7 This is the location of the cable lug for attaching
the cable from the customers ground grid. In the
first and last vertical section in an arc-resistant
16 VC-W switchgear assembly, the grounding grid
cable should enter through the HV cable conduit
entry area in the floor and be routed to this
Floor Plan Detail terminal lug.
17 8 Finished foundation surface shall be level within
left-to-right, front-to-back, and diagonally, as
18 measured by a laser level.
Figure 5.5-61. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan5 and 15 kV

19
20
21

5.5-31
Sheet 05 093
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV

i
ii
10
11
12
13
Figure 5.5-62. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts27 kV 14

Notes:
1. Maximum number of CTs: Two 15
accuracy CTs can be installed on
each side of the circuit breaker. 16
2. Bottom entry is standard for all
power cables, maximum four
per phase. 17
dimensions. 18
4. 27 kV arc-resistant switchgear can
be supplied in one-high design
configuration only. 19
20
21

5.5-32
Sheet 05 094
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)27 kV
Available Configurations (Continued)

i
ii
1 40.00
(1016.0)
6
90.37
(225.0)
7
9 No Relays No Relays No Relays
10
11
42.00
(1067.0)
12
Figure 5.5-63. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)27 kV
13 1 Please note that an additional 48.00-inch (1219.2 mm) clearance is required above
the arc wall for arc exhaust.
14 Typical Weights in Lbs (kg) 2

Table 5.5-14. Assemblies (Less Breakers)
Type of Main Bus Indoor
15 Vertical Rating Structure
Section Amperes
Control/breaker 1200 2700 (1226)

16 2000 2800 (1271)
Control/auxiliary 1200 2400 (1090)
2000 2500 (1135)
17 2 Refer to Table 5.5-9 for breaker weights.
18
19
20
21

5.5-33
Sheet 05 095
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
Typical Sectional Side ViewsDimensions in Inches (mm)

i
ii
40.00 40.00
(1016.0)
(1016.0) 1
90.37 90.37 4
(2295.0) (2295.0)
5
108.63 108.63
7
(2759.0) (2759.0)
8
40.00 40.00 10
(1016.0) (1016.0)
11
12
13
90.37 90.37
(2295.0) (2295.0) 14
15
16
108.63 108.63
(2759.0) (2759.0) 17
18
Figure 5.5-64. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)27 kV
19
20
21

5.5-34
Sheet 05 096
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV

i
ii
Rear
1
42.00
(1066.8) Min.
42.00
2 5
(1067) 1.00 1B Bottom cable entrance. Refer to shop order
5.50 (25) base plan for conduit locations.
(140) 2 Secondary control
3 wiring conduit openings,
location bottom entrance
(optional; only by special order).
4.00
4 14.00
(356) 1B (102) 3 Minimum front clearance.
4 Minimum left clearance.
6.00 Minimum clearance to RH side of the
5 (152) switchgear: 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
30.00 5 Recommended minimum
108.62 (762) rear clearance.
6 (2759)
7
4.00
6 Finished foundation surface shall
(102)
be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
7 front-to-back, and diagonally, as
measured by a laser level.
3.00 7 102 mm base channel.
8 50.38
(76)
1.38 6.00
(1280)
2 (35) (152) Standard Secondary Conduit
9 Location Top Entrance
10 3.00
1.00 4.75 (76)
(25) (121) 1.12
11 (29) 3.25
(83)
38.00
(965.2)
Min.
12 4 Front 6.00
72.00 1.00 (152)
(1829) (25)
13 Min.
3
14
15
16 Figure 5.5-65. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan27 kV
17
18
19
20
21

5.5-35
Sheet 05 097
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV

i
ii
Notes: 7
1. Maximum # of CTS:
Bus Side
2 sets of standard or 8
1 set of high accuracy
Line/Cable side
3 sets of standard or
1 set of standard and
9
1 set of high accuracy
2. CT mounting bushings
on bus side are provided 10
only when bus side CTs
are included.
3. Bottom entry is standard f
or all power cables. Contact
11
Eaton if top entry is required.
4. Refer to Figure 5.5-67 to 5.5-69
for dimensions. 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 5.5-66. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts38 kV

21

5.5-36
Sheet 05 098
Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Configurations (Front Views)38 kV
i
ii
40.00
(1016.0)
1
5 100.00
(2540.0)
10 42.00
(1067.0)
11 Figure 5.5-67. Available Arc-Resistant Switchgear Application Layouts (Front Views)38 kV

1 Please note that an additional 48.00-inch
(1219.2 mm) clearance is required above
12 the arc wall for arc exhaust.
Typical Weights in Lbs (kg) 2

13 Table 5.5-15. Assemblies (Less Breakers)
Type of Main Bus Indoor
Vertical Rating Structure
14 Section Amperes
Breaker cell 1200 3500 (1589)

15 2000
2500
3700 (1680)
4000 (1816)
3000 4000 (1816)
Auxiliary cell 1200 3000 (1362)
16 2000 3200 (1453)
2500 3500 (1589)
3000 3500 (1589)
17 2 Refer to Table 5.5-12 for breaker weights.
18
19
20
21

5.5-37
Sheet 05 099
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
Typical SectionalDimensions in Inches (mm)

i
ii
40.00
(1016.0)
1
3
100.00
(2540.0) 4
129.75 7
(3296.0)
40.00 9
(1016.0)
10
11
12
100.00
(2540.0)
13
14
15
129.75
(3296.0) 16
17
Figure 5.5-68. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Sectional (Side Views)38 kV
18
19
20
21

5.5-38
Sheet 05 0100
Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV

i
ii
1
42.00 5
(1066.8)
2 Min.
Rear 7B 3.00
(76.2)
3 3.75
(95.3)
34.50
(876.3)
3.75
(95.3) 4.15 Max.
(105.4)
4 Line
16.00
Compt
(406.4)
5 8 0.88
1 Suggested locations for 0.50-Inch
(12.7 mm) bolts or welding.
(22.4)
2 Secondary control wiring conduit
openings, conduit projection must
6 2.00
not exceed 1.00 inch (25.4 mm).
(50.8) 40.24 3 Minimum front clearance.
1
Bus (1022.1)
7 Compt
4 Minimum left-hinged panel clearance.
Minimum clearance to RH side of the
10 switchgear: 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
Unfinished Foundation Under Switchgear

5 Recommended minimum
8 14.63
9
rear clearance.
129.75 (371.6) 6 Finished foundation surface shall be

(3295.7) level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm)
9 6
front-to-back, and diagonally, as
7A Floor steel if used, must not exceed

10 Supplied by Customer
1.16
dimension under switchgear.
Breaker 2.00 10 (29.5) 7B Finished foundation
Compt (50.8) (within 0.06-inch [1.5 mm] clearance)
must extend under switchgear
11 61.62 minimum 1.50 inches (38.1 mm)
(1565.1) to a maximum 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
39.58
(1005.3) 8 Primary (H.V.) conduit projection
1
12 7.50
31.88 (190.5)
must not exceed 2.00 inches (50.8 mm).
See shop order base plan
(809.8) for conduit locations.
16.38 9 Customers ground provisions,

13 (416.1)
2
provided as shown by symbol on
shop order sectional side views.
10 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) minimum

1.50 7A
14 (38.1) 3.00
(76.2)
channel supplied by customer.
1.70 Max.
(43.2)
3.00
15 (76.2)
38.00 42.00 Alternate Secondary Conduit
(965.2) (1066.8) Location Top Entrance
Min. 7B
16 4 Front
42.00
(1066.8)
84.00
17 (2133.6)
Min. 2.20
3 (55.9)
7.50
18 (190.5)
3.38
(85.9)
3.00
19 (76.2)
20
21 Figure 5.5-69. Typical Arc-Resistant Switchgear Floor Plan38 kV

5.5-39
Sheet 05 0101
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearArc Exhaust Wall and Plenum
Arc Exhaust Wallfor 27 and 38 kV Switchgear Arc Exhaust wall Figure 5.5-70 is sup-
plied as standard for all 27/38 kV arc- i
resistant switchgear. The arc exhaust
wall must be field installed above the
switchgear. Note minimum 48.00-inch ii
(1219.2 mm) ceiling clearance is
required above the arc exhaust wall
for proper venting of the arc exhaust. 1
All 5/15 kV arc-resistant switchgear is
provided with arc exhaust chamber
(plenum). It is also installed in the 2
field. When using arc exhaust chamber,
minimum ceiling clearance required
above the arc exhaust chamber (plenum) 3
is equal to that needed for field
installation of the chamber. Eaton
recommends minimum 18.00-inch 4
(457.2 mm). Refer to Figures 5.5-72 and
5.5-73 for typical arc exhaust chamber
(plenum) and arc duct exit arrange- 5
ments for arc-resistant switchgear
installed inside an electrical room and
inside an outdoor house. 6
Figure 5.5-70. Arc Exhaust Wall Above the Switchgear

8
Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit Note: APPLICABLE TO ALL ARC-RESISTANT 9
SWITCHGEAR:
for 5 and 15 kV Switchgear
For switchgear with enclosure arc
ratings of up to 41 kA rms symmetrical,
10
minimum two vertical sections and
one arc duct exit is required.
11
For switchgear with enclosure arc
rating of 50 kA rms symmetrical or
higher, minimum three vertical 12
sections and two arc duct exits are
required.
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 5.5-71. Arc Exhaust Chamber (Plenum) with Arc Duct Exit Above the Switchgear 18
19
20
21

5.5-40
Sheet 05 0102
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
Typical LayoutDimensions in Inches (mm)

i
72.00
ii (1828.8)
Minimum Arc Exhaust Caution!
1 31.50 When equipment is energized

and operating, all personnel
(800.1)
stay clear of fenced area
Minimum
below the arc exhaust
2 16.50 release point.
(419.1)
Wall De-energize the equipment
3 prior to entering the fenced
area or prior to opening any
switchgear rear doors.
4
= Up to 24.00 (610.0)
Arc Duct Collar Rear
5
9 Arc Exhaust
Chamber (Plenum)
10 Front
Top View
Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Lineup
11
Duct Cross Section
12 81.00
(2057.4) 24.00 (609.6) x 24.00 (609.6)
13 32.00
(812.8)
Arc Exhaust Chamber
(plenum above
14 the switchgear)
Arc Duct
15 Switchgear
Wall Flashing Around
Front
the Duct by Others
1090.50
16 95.00 (2781.3) End Piece
(2413.0) (arc exhaust)
17
Arc Plenum with Arc Duct Exit
18 (Partial View)
95.00
19 1.25 (2413.0) 1.25
(31.8) (31.8)
Side View
20 Typical 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear
Figure 5.5-72. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside Electrical Room and Outside Minimum Exhaust Area
21

5.5-41
Sheet 05 10103
Typical Arc-Resistant SwitchgearExhaust Layout
Typical Layout (Continued)

i
Arc Exhaust Caution!

ii
When equipment is
energized and operating, 1
all personnel stay clear
of fenced area below the
arc exhaust release point. 2
Min.
De-energize the equipment
Front 72.00
prior to entering the fenced
Min.
(1829.0)
area prior to opening any 3
31.50 switchgear rear doors.
16.50
(419.1) (800.1)
4
Fenced Area with Access Gate
5
Seismic Applications = 6.00 (152.4)
Simplified Top View Non-Seismic Applications can be Less than 6
(not to scale) 6.00 (152.4) or as Required by the House Design
7
Outdoor House
Minimum Recommended
Clearance Above the Plenum = 18.00 (457.2) 8
32.00 Arc Exhaust Plenum Arc Duct Exit Piece
Arc-Resistant
Switchgear
(812.8) with Hinged Flap Assembly 9
Switchgear 10
Height
House Wall with Doors for
Access to Rear of the Switchgear
11
Customers
Power Cables
From Below 12
For the layout shown, doors on the house

wall (not shown) provide access to rear of
13
the switchgear. For rear access to switchgear
Simplified Side View from within the house, minimum 36.00 (914.4)
(not to scale) clearance is required behind the switchgear. 14
Figure 5.5-73. Typical Layout of 5/15 kV Arc-Resistant Switchgear Inside an Outdoor House (Electrocenter) 15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEF Front-Access Medium Voltage
6.0-1
Sheet 06 001
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

MEF Front-Access Medium Voltage
Contents i
Drawout Vacuum Breakers ii
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-19
Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0-31
1
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Section 16347A Section 26 13 19.11 3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Note: Viewing windows shown
in the photo are illustration only. 20
MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
21

6.0-2
Sheet 06 002
General Description
i Medium Voltage
Drawout Breaker
ii Eatons newest Type MEF metal-
enclosed front-accessible switchgear
with Type VCP-T/VCP-TL drawout
1 vacuum circuit breakers provide
centralized control and protection of
medium voltage power equipment and
2 circuits in industrial and commercial
installations involving:
Transformer primary switching
3 Transformer secondary main
General purpose feeder circuit
4 Bus tie circuit
Generator Main MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker with
Across-the-line starting of medium Integral Protective Relay
5 voltage motors
Automatic transfer switching
6 using main-main or main-tie-main
configurations
Harmonic filter bank switching
7 Any combination of above
applications
8 Type MEF metal-enclosed switchgear

is designed for application at voltages
up to 15 kV. It is a modularized design
9 that can be assembled in various com-
binations to satisfy user application
requirements. The switchgear can be
10 supplied with one-high or two-high
breaker arrangements. Type MEF
switchgear is a front-accessible design, VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakerSide View
11 suitable for installation against the wall.
Seismic Qualification Ratings
For metal-clad, rear-access switchgear
design, refer to Tab 5, type VCP-W Rated maximum voltage:
12 switchgear. 4.76 kV, 15 kV
Rated main bus continuous current:
13 Standards 1200, 2000 A
MEF metal-enclosed switchgear Circuit breaker ratings: continuous
is designed to meet requirements Refer to Tab 1 for information on current 600, 1200, 2000 A
14 of C37.20.3, IEEE standard for metal- seismic qualification for this and Rated short-circuit current:
enclosed switchgear. Drawout circuit other Eaton products. 16, 20, 25, 32 and 40 kA
breakers and auxiliary drawers are Refer to Table 6.0-3 and
15 designed to meet requirements Table 6.0-4 for more details
of C37.20.2, IEEE standard for
metal-clad switchgear.
16
MEF also meets Canadian Standard,
CSA C22.2 No. 31-04.
17 Type VCP-T/VCP-TL vacuum circuit
breakers used in MEF switchgear meet
or exceed ANSI and IEEE standards
18 applicable to AC high voltage circuit
breakers rated on symmetrical current
basis; C37.04, C37.06, C37.09.
19
Third-Party Certifications
20 UL
CSA
21

6.0-3
Sheet 06 003
General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
Advantages Secondary control connector inter- Can also be used with external
Reduced footprint
lock prevents breaker being moved relays when equipped with i
into the connected position if the optional shunt trip and external
Front-access design breaker control wiring connector is control power
Maintenance-free bus joints not correctly engaged with its com- Easy-to-see contact erosion ii
Full benefits of switching and partment control wiring connector. indicator is provided on the moving
interrupting capabilities of Interlocking also prevents discon- stem of the breaker. Only visual
vacuum breakers nection of circuit breaker control inspection is required to verify that 1
Integral relaying and metering by wiring connector, manually or auto- the contacts have not worn out
use of breaker mounted protection matically, while the circuit breaker is Easy-to-see contact wipe indicator is
that allows full short-circuit and in the connected position and in any provided for verification by simple
2
overload coordination with position between the connected and visual inspection that the loading
upstream devices the test/disconnected springs are applying proper
Breaker frame remains grounded pressure to the contacts when
3
External control power is not
required when using integral throughout its travel and in the the circuit breaker is closed
connected position
protection
Choice of manually or electrically
One auxiliary switch (5a, 5b) 4
Optional external relays and meters included as standard on all
operated circuit breakers breakers for breaker contact status
MEF fills the application gap
between metal-enclosed fusible Integral spring charging handle Quality Assurance Certificate is 5
load interrupter and metal-clad Choice of breaker mounted protec- included with each circuit breaker
breaker switchgear designs tion for automatic short-circuit and
Breakers shipped installed in overload protection without a need 6
the switchgear; no mismatch or for external control power
misplaced circuit breakers at site
and reduced installation cost
7
FeaturesVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum 8
Circuit Breaker
Vacuum circuit breakers provide
high duty cycle, fast interruption, 9
reduced maintenance, and are
environmentally friendly
Very compact and lightweight circuit
10
breaker rated to 15 kV; weighs only
250440 lb (114200 kg) 11
Fully horizontal drawout feature
with connect, test and disconnect
positions provides ease of operation 12
and interchangeability. Levering-in
(racking) system is an integral part
of the breaker 13
All circuit breaker functions, indica-
tors and controls are grouped on an
easily accessible panel on front of 14
the circuit breaker
Levering interlock prevents the
breaker from being racked out when 15
in connected position and closed
Trip-free interlock prevents breaker
from closing, manually or electri-
16
cally, while it is being levered or
when in an intermediate position 17
VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Fully Withdrawn on Extension Pan 18
19
20
21

6.0-4
Sheet 06 004
General DescriptionVCP-T/VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breaker
i Choice of Breakers
VCP-T/VCP-TC Breakers VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breakers
ii
4
VCP-T/VCP-TC Breaker VCP-TL/VCP-TLC Breaker
5
ANSI rateddrawout ANSI rateddrawout
Equipped with stored energy spring operating Equipped with linear magnetic actuator operating
6 mechanism mechanism
5/15 kV, 600/1200/2000 A 5/15 kV, 600/1200 A
7 25 kA and 40 kA rms symmetrical 25 kA rms symmetrical
K=1 K=1
Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle Rated interrupting time = 3 cycle
8 Operating mechanism = 10,000 operations Operating mechanism = 100,000 operations
Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations Vacuum interrupters = 30,000 operations
9
u
10 v
y U
11 ad
x
w
x
V W
12 X
x
aa
ac
13 w
al
u
v
14 at
af bt
ao
aq ag
15 as
ar
VCP-T Breaker VCP-TL Breaker
16
u Secondary Wiring ak Opening Spring u Magnetic Actuator
v Through-the-Window al OFF Key Lock Location v Capacitor
17 Accessories
w Electric Charging Motor
am Motor Cutoff Switch
an Integral Protective Relay
w Controller
x Power Supply
x Manual Charging Handle (Optional)
y Contact Status (Open-Close) ao Cradle with Levering
18 U Spring Status (Charged- Mechanism Notes:
Discharged) ap Shock Bolt Handle 1. Type VCP-TC and VCP-TLC are optional designs with capacitor
V Manual OFF Pushbutton aq Shock Bolt switching capabilities. See Table 6.0-5 on Page 6.0-19.
19 W Manual ON Pushbutton ar Packing Screw Lock Plate
2. VCP-TL/VCP-TLC breakers are designed such that in event of
X Operations Counter as Levering Drive Nut control power loss, internal capacitors provide sufficient energy
at 5A/5B Auxiliary Switch bt Push/Pull Handle to perform an electrical open operation up to 48 hours after the
20 loss of control power.
21

6.0-5
Sheet 06 005
General DescriptionMEF Switchgear
FeaturesMEF Switchgear MEF Switchgear is Modular

Assembly Available configurations include:
i
Control
Type MEF is metal-enclosed front- Compartment
Breaker over auxiliary
accessible switchgear with many
Breaker over breaker
ii
metal-clad features.
Auxiliary over auxiliary
Drawout circuit breaker and Pull sections with various cable 1
auxiliary (VT, CPT) compartments entry combinations
with automatic shutters to prevent
accidental contact with high voltage MEF Switchgear is Front Accessible 2
circuits when breaker/auxiliary
is removed Allows primary cable connections
from the front of the switchgear
No high voltage connections or
All drawout elements (breaker,
3
circuits are exposed by opening
of circuit breaker, VT or CPT VT, CPT) are front accessible after
compartment door opening their compartment door 4
All drawout elements are provided All field connections required at
with mechanical interlocks for shipping splits are accessible and
proper operating sequence under made from the front 5
normal operating conditions as No rear access space is required.
described in IEEE C37.20.2 The switchgear can be installed
All low voltage control wiring, against the wall CPT Drawer 6
devices and control compartments All non-accessible primary
VT Drawer
are isolated from high voltage bus joints and connections are
circuits maintenance-freedo not require MEF SwitchgearIndoor Unit 7
inspection or re-torque
MEF Switchgear is Compact 8
Breaker and auxiliary cells are
26.00-inch wide, 61.50-inch deep,
92.00-inch tall (660.6 mm wide, Control
Compartment
9
1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall)
Cable pull sections are
19.00 inches wide, 61.50 inches deep, 10
92.00 inches tall (482.6 mm wide,
1562.1 mm deep, 2336.8 mm tall)
Reduced front aisle space for
11
breaker withdrawal saves overall
floor space
Shipping groups can be moved
12
in place by forklift, or overhead
lifting means 13
14
15
MEF SwitchgearBreaker Over Breaker MEF Switchgear
and Adjacent Pull Section Single Breaker with
Cables Out the Bottom
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-6
Sheet 06 006
i Circuit Breaker Compartment

Each circuit breaker compartment
is provided with steel shutters
ii (breaker driven) that automatically
rotate into position to cover station-
ary cell studs to prevent contact with
1 high voltage circuit when the
breaker is moved from connected to
disconnected position. Provisions
2 for padlocking the shutters open
or closed is included as standard
Rejection interlock pins prevent
3 insertion of the circuit breaker if the
circuit breaker and structure ratings
are not compatible
4
A silver-plated copper ground
bus keeps the breaker grounded
5 throughout its travel and in its
connected position
6
Circuit Breaker Compartment Circuit Breaker in Connected
Breaker in Connected Position Position Indicator
7
Panel Space
8 for LV
Control
Devices
9
Steel
10 Shutters
Cell
Stabs
11
12
Provision
for Padlock
13 Shutters
14
15
16
VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment VCP-T Circuit Breaker Compartment
(Shutters Shown Open for Illustration)
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-7
Sheet 06 007
Auxiliary Compartments i
MEF switchgear permits use of up to
four auxiliary drawers in one vertical
unit. Those drawers can be used for ii
installation of voltage or control power
transformers.
1
Each drawer can be fully withdrawn
on extension rails, thus allowing
easy access to VT, CPT and their VT Drawer 2
primary fuses
Safety shutter protects against acci-
dental contact with primary stabs 3
when the drawer is withdrawn
A VT drawer can accommodate
two VTs, each connected line-to-line 4
(open delta), or three VTs, each CPT Drawer
connected line-to-ground
A CPT drawer can accommodate
5
Interlock
a maximum of single-phase,
5 kVA CPT 6
CPT Secondary
Mechanical interlock is included Main Breaker
on CPT drawer that requires CPT
Extension
secondary breaker to be opened Rail 7
prior to withdrawing the drawer to
ensure that the primary circuit can
only be disconnected under no-load Drawout VT and CPT 8
Primary fuses are automatically
grounded as the drawer is
withdrawn from connected to 9
disconnected position
Primary Shutter 10
Secondary Disconnect
Primary 11
Fuses
12
13
14
15
Extension
Rail
16
Auxiliary Drawer Compartment CPT Withdrawn on Extension Rails
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-8
Sheet 06 008
i Cable Pull Sections

CT/Sensor
Secondary Wires
ii
Three-Phase CT
1 Single-Phase
Current Sensors
CT/Sensor
2 Primary Bushings
Pull Section Close-Up View CT/Sensor Mounting
3
4
Customers Cable
5 Terminal Pads
Surge Arresters
6
8 Zero Sequence
MEF Cable Pull Section Adjacent Sensor
to 2-High Breaker Cell
9
Cable pull sections are included
as required to allow top or bottom Zero Sequence
10 primary cable terminations from CT
the front of the switchgear. Current
sensors for use with breaker mounted
11 integral protective relay, or current Pull Section Close-Up View Cable Termination and Zero Sequence CT/Sensor
transformers for use with door
mounted external relays are mounted
12 in the primary circuits in the pull
sections. Pull sections are also used
as needed for bus transition and
13 bus connections to other equipment.
Pull section is metal-enclosed.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-9
Sheet 06 009
Bus Compartments Pull Section

i
Breaker Over Breaker Cell
Main Bus ii
Main Bus Main Bus
Joint with Support
PVC Boot 1
Risers to
Main Bus
4
Top ViewMain Bus Access
Type MEF switchgear is completely front accessible, Breaker Cell 5

designed to be installed against a wall. Access necessary Primary Insulators
for customers primary cable terminations, joining of bus
joints (main bus and ground bus) at shipping splits, and Run Backs to Pull Section 6
terminations of customers control wires are provided from
Copper Ground Bus
the front of the switchgear. Main bus is accessible from
the top front of the switchgear. All bus bars are insulated
(Accessible in Pull Section) 7
throughout by epoxy coating using Eatons fluidized bed Rear View (Shown with Rear Covers Removed for Illustration Purposes)
process, and covered with PVC boots at joints. All joints
are silver-plated. All bus joints that are not accessible are
8
bolted with special hardware to eliminate need for future
inspection or re-torque. Minimum 24.00-inch (609.6 mm)
clearance to ceiling is recommended for main bus access.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-10
Sheet 06 010
General Description
i Protection and Metering The power required to operate the Rating Plug
protective relays basic overcurrent
Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T/ protection functions is provided by A rating plug matched to phase current
VCP-TL circuit breakers can be sup- secondary output from the current sensor rating is installed on all integral
ii plied with integral breaker mounted sensors once the three-phase primary protective relays. The rating plug and
protective relays for overload and current through the circuit breaker phase current sensors define maxi-
short-circuit protection and metering. exceeds approximately 10 to 12% mum continuous current rating (In) of
1 The integral relays are self-powered of the current sensor rating or single- the circuit breaker. The rating plug and
from specially designed and tested phase primary current exceeds phase current sensors also determine
current sensors. MEF switchgear can approximately 30% of the current the maximum instantaneous setting.
2 be supplied with external relays and sensor rating.
meters connected to current trans- If the rating plug is removed from
The relay continuously analyzes the protective relay, the circuit breaker
formers and powered from an external
3 auxiliary power.
secondary current signals from the will trip if it is carrying current. See
current sensors and when preset cur- Page 6.0-25 for available phase
rent levels and time delay settings are current sensors and rating plugs.
Integral Protection and Metering
4 exceeded, sends and a trip signal to
Type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers the trip actuator of the circuit breaker.
can be equipped with Eatons Type The trip actuator causes tripping of
5 Digitrip 520MCV or Digitrip 1150V the circuit breaker by providing the
protection relays required mechanical force for tripping.
The Digitrip 520MCV is used for The trip actuator is automatically reset
6 basic overcurrent protection each time the circuit breaker opens.
The Digitrip 520MCV relay includes The current sensors, protective relay
an Arcflash Reduction Maintenance and circuit breaker are fully tested
7 System (ARMS) feature that may as a system for time-overcurrent
be activated at the breaker or from response over the entire current
remote. When activated, the ARMS range up to the interrupting rating
8 feature lowers the available arc flash of the circuit breaker.
energy at the connected down-
stream device by faster clearing of An optional Overcurrent Trip Switch
9 the downstream fault (OTS) with one latching type Form C
The Digitrip 1150V is used for contact can be provided to indicate
advanced current and voltage tripping of the circuit breaker by the
10 protections, and metering and action of an integral protective relay.
communication functions. ARMS
feature is included on 1150V relay
11 as standard
The 520MCV and 1150V relays are
12 designed and tested to work with
Eatons Type V current sensors only
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-11
Sheet 06 011
General Description
Digitrip 520MCV i
Integral Protective Relay
The Digitrip 520MCV integral ii
protective relay is used when basic
three-phase (50/51) and ground
(50/51N or 50/51G) overcurrent 1
protection is required. The relay is a
microprocessor-based device that
operates from secondary output of 2
current sensors and provides true rms
sensing of each phase and ground,
and is suitable for application at either 3
50 or 60 Hz systems. The sensing
current for ground protection can be
derived from residual connections of 4
the phase sensors or from an optional
Type-V zero sequence current sensor.
The relay does not require external 5
control power for its protection
functions and can be applied with
Manually or Electrically Operated 6
circuit breakers.
Figure 6.0-1. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 520MCV
The 520MCV relay provides a number
of time-overcurrent response curves Table 6.0-1. Digitrip 520MCV Protection and Coordination
7
and settings for phase, as well as IEEE Protection Available Settings (50 or 60 Hz)
ground protection and coordination
with upstream or downstream devices.
Device
Number
Function 8
It can also be zone interlocked with Phase Long Delay
other upstream or downstream relays
for faster selective tripping.
51 Pickup setting (Ir) 1 (0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1.0) times In 9
Time delay, I2t (2, 4, 7, 10, 12, 15, 20, 24 seconds) at 6 times Ir
Thermal memory Enable/disable
The 520MCV includes an Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS) Phase Short Delay 10
feature when enabled, it reduces arc 50T Pickup setting 2 (1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times Ir, M1
Time delay, FLAT 3 0.1,0.3,0.4, st1, st2 seconds
flash incident energy during equip-
Time delay, I2t 4 (0.1, 0.3, 0.5 seconds) at 8 times Ir 11
ment maintenance.
Phase Instantaneous
50 Pickup setting 2 (2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10) times In, M1, OFF
Ground Fault
12
51/50G Pickup setting 5 (0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.75) times In, OFF
Time delay, FLAT 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 second
Time delay, I2t 6 (0.1, 0.3, 0.5) at 0.625 times In 13
Zone Selective Interlocking
Phase short delay and ground fault Enable/disable 14
ARMS Mode Settings
Settings Pickup
R5 2.5 x rating plug amperes 15
R4 4.0 x rating plug amperes
16
1 In = Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes.
2 M1 = Maximum Setting based on In
= (12 x In) for In = 1600 and 2000 A;
17
= (14 x In) for all other values of In
3 st1 and st2 settings are based on In
In st1 st2 18
100 A 0.5 sec 0.5 sec
200400 A 0.5 sec 1.0 sec
4
6002000 A 1.0 sec 2.0 sec
I2t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x Ir).
19
For currents greater than (8 x Ir), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
5 When using phase residual connection scheme, In is current sensor/rating plug rating in ampere.
When using zero sequence connection scheme, In is zero sequence current sensor rating in ampere. 20
6 I2t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x In).
For currents greater than (0.625 x In), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
21

6.0-12
Sheet 06 012
General Description
i Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay
ii
9
Figure 6.0-2. VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breaker Digitrip Model 1150V
10 The Digitrip 1150V integral protective The 1150V relay provides following The 1150V relay is also suitable for
relay is used for advanced current and ANSI/IEEE protection functions: communication using the INCOM
voltage protection, and metering and communications system. All moni-
11 communication. 51/50, 51/50N or 51/50G, 37, 46, 27, tored values, trip/alarm events, and
59, 81U, 81O, 47 and 32. captured waveforms can be displayed
The Arcflash Reduction Maintenance on a remote computer. Breakers can also
12 System (ARMS) feature is included on The 1150V relay provides a number
be opened/closed remotely with pass-
1150V units as standard. When enabled, of time-overcurrent response curves
and settings for phase, as well as word protection. Peripheral translator/
it reduces arc flash incident energy gateway devices are available to convert
13 during equipment maintenance. ground protection and coordination
INCOM to other protocols, such as
with upstream or downstream devices.
The relay is a microprocessor-based It can also be zone interlocked with Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, etc.
14 device that operates from secondary other upstream or downstream relays The relay has a built-in 24-character
output of current sensors and external for faster and selective tripping. alphanumeric LED display to allow
voltage transformers, provides true programming and viewing of settings,
In addition to display of metering
15 rms sensing of each phase and
values as noted in Figure 6.0-2 menus, trip and alarm logs, and real time
ground, and is suitable for application metering data. Because the relay is
at either 50 or 60 Hz systems. The above, the relay provides data through
its front panel display to help plan installed on the circuit breaker, the
16 sensing current for ground protection
inspection and maintenance schedules breaker compartment door must be
can be derived from residual connec- opened for viewing or programming
tions of the phase sensors or from of the circuit breaker and the circuit
it is protecting. Those data include: of the relay functions. An optional
17 an optional Type-V zero sequence Breaker Interface Module can be used
current sensor. Total number of Close Operations by for monitoring, viewing and program-
The basic overcurrent protection func- circuit breaker since last reset ming of multiple relays from an alter-
18 tions of this relay are self-powered The last time the circuit breaker nate location, eliminating the need to
from the current flowing in the second- was operated (Opened or Closed open circuit breaker compartment door.
ary of the current sensors. It does or Tripped) with time and date Also available is wireless transceiver for
19 short-range infrared wireless communi-
require external auxiliary power for its Total number of instantaneous and
voltage and frequency related protec- short delay trip operations by the cation between a hand-held Palm
personal data assistant (PDA) and the
20 tion and alarm functions, and metering
displays. The relay can be applied
circuit breaker since last reset
Digitrip 1150V relays with compartment
Total number of overloads (long
with manually or electrically operated doors closed.
delay trips) and ground fault trips
21 circuit breakers. since last reset

6.0-13
Sheet 06 013
General Description
Table 6.0-2. Digitrip 1150V Protection and Coordination ARMS Mode Available Trip
IEEE Protection Available Settings Current Settings
i
Device Function (50 or 60 Hz)
Number The 1150V unit provides the following
Phase Long Delay pick-up settings: ii
51 Pickup setting (Ir) 1
(0.41.0, in steps of 0.05) times In 2.5 x rating plug amperes
Time delay, I2t (224 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times Ir
Time delay, I4t (15 seconds, in steps of 0.5) at 6 times Ir 4.0 x rating plug amperes 1
IEEE moderately inverse Time dials of 0.15.0, in steps of 0.1 6.0 x rating plug amperes
IEEE very inverse Time dials of 0.25.0, in steps of 0.1
8.0 x rating plug amperes
IEEE extremely inverse
Thermal memory
Time dials of 0.25.0, in steps of 0.1
Enable/disable 2 10.0 x rating plug amperes
2
Phase Short Delay
50T Pickup setting (1.512 or 1.514, in steps of 0.5) times Ir 3 Metering, Power Quality and 3
Time delay, FLAT 0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05 4 Other Features
Time delay, I2t (0.12 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 8 times Ir 456
Individual phase and ground
Phase Instantaneous
currents in rms amperes, real time 4
50 Pickup setting (212 or 214) times In, OFF 3
Individual phase and ground
Ground Fault currents in rms amperes,
51/50G Pickup setting (0.241.0, in steps of 0.01) times In, OFF 7 5-minute average
5
Time delay, FLAT 0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05.
Time delay, I2t (0.10.5 seconds, in steps of 0.05) at 0.625 times In 8 Individual phase and ground
Thermal memory Yes currents, maximum and minimum 6
Zone Selective Interlocking since last reset
Phase short delay and ground fault Enable/disable Line-to-line voltages
Phase Loss (Current Based) Forward/reverse kW, kW demand 7
and maximum kW demand
37 Pickup 75% current unbalance, OFF
kVA, kVA demand and maximum
Time delay 130 seconds
kVA demand
8
Current Unbalance
46 Pickup 525% current unbalance, OFF Watt and VA demand, maximum W
Time delay 0240 seconds and VA demand 9
Undervoltage Forward/reverse kWh
27 Pickup 45110% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF kVAh
Time delay 1250 seconds kVAh and kWh pulse initiate 10
Overvoltage Total harmonic distortion for
59 Pickup 80135% of phase-to-phase voltage, OFF
each phase current 11
Individual harmonic currents
Underfrequency up through 27th harmonic for
81U Pickup50 Hz system
Pickup60 Hz system
4852 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF
5862 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF
each phase 12
Time delay 0.25 seconds, in steps of 0.02 Power factor, minimum and
maximum
Overfrequency
Frequency 13
81O Pickup50 Hz system 4852 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF
Pickup60 Hz system 5862 Hz, in steps of 0.1, OFF Circuit breaker operations count
Time delay 0.25 seconds, in steps of 0.02 Programmable alarms 14
Voltage Unbalance Programmable output contacts
47 Pickup 550% voltage unbalance, OFF (breaker close, alarm, trip)
Time delay 1250 seconds 15
Reverse Power Metering Accuracy
32 Pickup 165000 kW 1% of full-scale (In) for currents in
the range of 5100% of (In)
16
1 In = Current Sensor/Rating Plug rating in amperes.
3% of full-scale for voltages
2 Thermal memory feature is available when using I2t or I4t curves only.
3 Maximum Setting is based on In:
(full scale is equal to phase-to-phase 17
= (12 x In) for In = 1600 and 2000 A; voltage)
= (14 x In) for all other values of In 4% of full-scale for power and
4 Upper limit of this setting is 0.5 for 100 A sensor/rating plug, 1.0 for 200 to 400 A sensor/rating
plug, and 2.0 for sensors/rating plugs rated above 600 A.
energy readings 18
5 I2t response is applicable to currents less than (8 x Ir).
For currents greater than (8 x Ir), the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
6 I2t response curve for phase short delay is only available when phase long delay response selected
19
is I2t.
7 When using phase residual connection scheme, In is current sensor/rating plug rating in amperes.
When using zero sequence connection scheme, In is zero sequence current sensor rating in amperes. 20
8 I2t response is applicable to currents less than (0.625 x In). For currents greater than (0.625 x In),
the I2t response reverts to FLAT response.
21

6.0-14
Sheet 06 014
General Description
i External Protection The EDR-5000 can be zone interlocked

for faster selective tripping. It can also
and Metering be used for automatic open or closed
transition transfer of three breaker
ii Type MEF switchgear with VCP-T circuit
breakers can be supplied with external
main-tie-main systems. Refer to Tab 4
for more details of the EDR-5000.
relays, such as Eatons EDR-3000,
1 EDR-5000 and EMR-3000, and meters Eatons EMR-3000 is a microprocessor-
such as Eatons Power Xpert Meter based motor protection relay designed
family. The external relays and meters to provide the following ANSI protec-
2 are typically installed on the circuit tion functions:
breaker or control compartment doors
and connected into the secondary 49, 50, 51, 46, 50G, 51G, 37, 38, 66,
2/19, 74, 86.
3 circuits of conventional CTs and VTs.
External control power may be required Refer to Tab 4 for more details of the
for correct operation of the external EDR-3000.
4 relays depending on the type of
relays used. Eatons Power Xpert and IQ
microprocessor-based metering
Eatons EDR-3000 is a microprocessor-
5 based multifunction overcurrent
and communication devices can
be provided in MEF for use with
protection relay designed to provide conventional CTs and VTs. Refer
the following ANSI protection functions:
6 to Tab 3 for further information on
51/50, 51N/50N or 51G/50G. these devices.
7 EDR-3000 relays can be zone inter-

locked for faster selective tripping.
Refer to Tab 4 for more details of
8 EDR-3000.
Eatons EDR-5000 is a microprocessor-
based multifunction protection and
9 metering unit designed to provide the
following ANSI protection functions:
10 51/50, 51N/50N, 51G/50G, 50BF,
25, 32, 46, 67, 27, 59, 47, 78V, 81-O,
81-U, 86.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-15
Sheet 06 015
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring

i
Eatons Type MEF metal-enclosed RFCT around ground shields of the
Sensing and Monitoring switchgear (2.415 kV) is corona-free incoming or outgoing power cables
for Switchgear by design. By making switchgear termination.
ii
assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made
its standard switchgear more reliable. Output signals from sensors (RFCTs)
However, as indicated above, with are wired out to terminal blocks for
time, airborne particles, contaminants future or field use, or connected to the 1
and humidity lead to conditions that InsulGard relay. One InsulGard relay
cause partial discharges to develop in can monitor up to 15 output signals,
switchgear operating at voltages including temperature and humidity. 2
4000 V and above. Type MEF switch- The temperature and humidity sensors
gear can be equipped with factory- are included with each InsulGard relay
RFCT Sensor
installed partial discharge sensors and system. 3
partial discharge sensing relay for The relay continuously monitors the
continuous monitoring of the partial
discharges under normal operation.
switchgear primary system for partial 4
discharges and provides an alarm sig-
Timely detection of insulation nal (contact closure) when high PD
degradation through increasing partial
discharges can identify potential
level is detected. Data analysis and 5
diagnostics by Eaton engineers can
problems so that corrective actions also be provided by remote communi-
can be planned and implemented
long before permanent deterioration
cation with the InsulGard relay. 6
develops. Partial discharge detection The sensors and InsulGard relay are
can be the foundation of an effective optional in MEF switchgear.
predictive maintenance program.
7
In 5/15 kV MEF switchgear (refer to
Trending of partial discharge data over
Figure 6.0-4), primary epoxy bush-
time allows prediction of failures, that
InsulGard Relay can be corrected before catastrophic
ings with stress shield and RFCT sen- 8
(PD Monitoring) sors for measurement of internal, as
failure occurs.
well as external partial discharges are
Partial Discharge in Switchgear The PD sensing and monitoring system all optional. InsulGard relay is also 9
consists of Eatons InsulGard relay optional. When specified, one set of
Partial discharge is a common name for CT/sensor primary bushings (located
and PD sensors specifically developed
various forms of electrical discharges
for application in the switchgear to on the line side) with stress shield and 10
such as corona, surface tracking and associated RFCT sensor is provided in
work with the relay.
discharges internal to the insulation. every incoming and outgoing primary
It partially bridges the insulation Partial discharges within the MEF circuit. An additional RFCT sensor for 11
between the conductors. These switchgear compartment are detected each incoming and outgoing power
discharges are essentially small arcs by the installation of a small donut cable circuits can be provided as
occurring in or on the surface of the type radio frequency current trans- required. The RFCT output signals 12
insulation system when voltage stress former (RFCT) sensor over floating can be connected directly to InsulGard
exceeds a critical value. With time, stress shields of the specially designed relay for continuous monitoring of
airborne particles, contaminants and CT/sensor primary bushings. Partial partial discharges or can be used for 13
humidity lead to conditions that result discharges in the customers power periodic field measurements. One
in partial discharges. Partial discharges cables (external discharges) are InsulGard relay can monitor up to
start at a low level and increase as detected by the installation of the 15 output signals. 14
more insulation becomes deteriorated.
Examples of partial discharge in
switchgear are surface tracking across 15
bus insulation, or discharges in the air Input
gap between the bus and a support, Temp Sensor Terminal InsulGard
Optional
such as where a bus passes through Humidity Sensor
Block Relay
Modem 16
an insulating window between the
sections of the switchgear. If partial
discharge process is not detected 17
and corrected, it can develop into a
full-scale insulation failure followed by
an electrical fault. Most switchgear 18
flashover and bus failures are a result 120 Vac
of insulation degradation caused by Auxiliary
various forms of partial discharges. Signals (up to 15 Total) from
PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors,
Power Output
Alarm
19
RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc..) Status
20
Figure 6.0-3. InsulGard Relay System
21

6.0-16
Sheet 06 016
ii
9 RFCT #1 detects partial discharges internal to switchgear compartment.

RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft from switchgear.
10
Figure 6.0-4. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MEF Switchgear (515 kV)
Note: Use one set of CT/sensor bushings for all incoming and outgoing primary circuits.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-17
Sheet 06 017
General Description
Communication Systems Optional Accessories Dummy Element

i
Dummy element is a drawout element
Eatons power management products Breaker Lifting Device with primary disconnects similar to
provide hardware and software Used for installing/removing a drawout circuit breaker, but consists
solutions that allow customers to the breaker onto/from the Breaker of solid copper conductors in place of ii
interface with their switchgear at vary- Extension Pan. vacuum interrupters, and is designed
ing levels of sophistication. Power for manual racking. It is typically used
Xpert and IQ Meters monitor common Manual Ground and Test Device as drawout disconnect link in the 1
electrical parameters and communicate The ground and test device is a primary system for circuit isolation
the data via standard industry protocols drawout element that may be inserted or bypass. The device is insulated
and optional Web interfaces. Power into a breaker compartment in place to suit the voltage rating of the switch- 2
Xpert Gateways consolidate devices of a circuit breaker to provide access gear and will carry required levels
into a single Web browser interface and to the primary circuits to permit the of short-circuit current, but it is not
provide Ethernet connectivity. Eatons temporary connections of grounds rated for any current interruption. 3
Power Xpert Insight and Foreseer or testing equipment to the high It must be key interlocked with all
Web-based software systems display, voltage circuits. source devices such that it can only
analyze and store data from multiple be inserted into or removed from 4
devices across the facility to enable The device includes six terminals for
its connected position only after the
management of the customers power connections to primary circuits. Selec-
primary circuit that it is to be applied
system. Refer to Tab 2 for more infor- tion of upper or lower terminals for
is completely de-energized.
5
mation on communication systems. grounding is accomplished manually
by cable connections before the device Before using a dummy element,
Standard Accessories is inserted into the desired breaker it is recommended that each user 6
compartment. The circuit selected for develop detailed operating procedure
Levering Crank grounding using this device must be consistent with safe operating
Used for moving the breaker checked by some other means, prior practices. Only qualified personnel 7
between the disconnected/test to insertion of the device into the com- should be authorized to use the
and connected position. partment, to be sure it is de-energized. dummy element.
8
High potential testing of cable or Functional Test Kit (for Testing of
Breaker Extension Pan
phase checking of circuits are typical Digitrip 520V and 1150V Relays)
Used for installing/removing the
breaker to/from its compartment.
tests that may be performed. The Functional Test Kit is a hand-held 9
device is insulated to suit voltage battery powered tester capable of
Breaker Lifting Yoke rating of the switchgear and will testing trip elements of 520V and
Used with the breaker for installation/
carry required levels of short-circuit 1150V protective relays. The test kit 10
current, but it is not rated for any allows testing of: Relay Power Up,
removal of the breaker onto/from the current interruption.
breaker extension pan using optional Instantaneous Trip, Short Delay Trip,
breaker lifter or other overhead Before using a ground and test device, Long Delay Pickup and Trip, and 11
lifting means. it is recommended that each user Ground Fault Trip, when applicable.
develop detailed operating procedure
Test Jumper consistent with safe operating prac-
12
Allows connection of breaker tices. Only qualified personnel should
secondary controls disconnect to cell be authorized to use the ground and
disconnect when the breaker is outside test device.
13
its compartment.
VT/CPT Drawer Extension Rails 14
Allows withdrawal of VT/CPT auxiliary
drawer for inspection and access to
primary fuses and VT/CPT. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-18
Sheet 06 018
Application
i MEF Switchgear with ATC Controller Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer

Eatons ATC-900 controller is equipped Control Using ATC Controller
Automatic Transfer Control to display history information either Eatons ATC controller continuously
ii (ATC) via the front panel or over the Power- monitors all three phases on both
Net power monitoring system. ATC- sources for correct voltages. Should
Application 900 controller stores 320 time stamped the voltage of the normal source be
events. Oscillographic data for last 10 lost while the voltage of the alternate
1 Eatons MEF switchgear with an events can be downloaded via USB source remains normal, the voltage
automatic transfer control system port or displayed in the controllers sensing function in the ATC controller
is an integrated assembly of drawout display window. Controller allows will change state starting the time
2 VCP-T/VCP-TL breakers, sensing communications via RS-232 or delay function. If the voltage of the
devices and control components Modbus through RS-458 port, normal source is not restored by the
available in 5 through 15 kV classes. Ethernet or via USB interface. end of the time delay interval, the
3 Automatic transfer control is typically normal breaker will open and the
applied where the continuity of service alternate source breaker will close,
for critical loads from two power restoring power to the load.
4 sources in either a two-breaker
Typical Three-Breaker
(one load) or three-breaker (two
(Two Mains and Normally Open Tie)
5 loads) configuration is desired.
Automatic Transfer Control
MEF switchgear with an automatic The automatic transfer switchgear
transfer control system can meet most assembly includes two main breakers
6 automatic throwover requirements as and one tie breaker, and an integrated
it has a wide variety of operational automatic transfer control system
sequences embodied in one standard containing sensing devices, low
7 automatic transfer control system. voltage logic control and auxiliary
equipment. The transfer control
8 system monitors both sources for
ATC Controller correct voltages. An automatic-manual
transfer selector switch is provided
9 Standard Features for selection of manual or automatic
operating mode. In manual mode,
Voltage sensing on both sources is
all three breakers can be manually
provided by the ATC controller
10 operated. Interlocking is provided in
Lights to indicate status of switches, manual mode of operation to prevent
sources, and so on closing all three breakers at the same
Interlocking to prevent paralleling of
11 sources via software
time. In the automatic mode, the basic
sequence of operation based upon two
Control power for the automatic normally energized sources is carried
12 transfer control system is derived out as follows. Normal operation is
from the sensing voltage transformers with the main breakers closed and
Manual override operation the tie breaker open. Upon detection
13 Selectable closed with sync check or
of an undervoltage(s) to the line side
of a main breaker, and after a field-
open transition on return to normal
adjustable time delay, that main
Programmable time delays on both
14 sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY
breaker opens and after an additional
field-adjustable time delay, the tie
Four programmable digital inputs breaker closes to restore power to the
15 and outputs affected portion of the facility. Upon
Single-source responsibility; all restoration of voltage to the line side
basic components are manufac- of the main breaker, and after a field-
16 tured by Eaton adjustable time delay, the tie breaker
opens and after a field-adjustable time
Optional Features delay, the opened main breaker closes.
17 Lockout on phase and/or ground
An interlocking is provided to prevent
closing all three breakers simultane-
overcurrents and/or internal bus faults ously in manual mode.
18 Load current, power and PF metering
with optional DCT module
24 Vdc control power input
19 Up to four additional I/O modules,
each with four programmable digital
inputs and digital outputs
20
21

6.0-19
Sheet 06 019
Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
Technical Data i
Table 6.0-3. MEF Switchgear Assembly Rated Per ANSI Standards
Rated Insulation Level Rated Rated Short-Time Rated Momentary
Maximum Power Frequency Impulse Main Bus Short-Circuit Short-Circuit ii
Voltage Withstand Voltage, Withstand Continuous Current Withstand Current Withstand
60 Hz, 1 Minute Voltage (BIL) Current (2-Second) (10 Cycle)
I 2.6 * I 1.55 * I 1
(for Reference Only)
kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Symmetrical kA Crest kA rms Asymmetrical
2
4.76 19 60 1200 25 65 39
4.76 19 60 2000 25 65 39
4.76 19 60 1200 40 104 62
4.76 19 60 2000 40 104 62 3
15 36 95 1200 25 65 39
15 36 95 2000 25 65 39
15 36 95 1200 40 104 62 4
15 36 95 2000 40 104 62
Table 6.0-4. Available Type VCP-T Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09) 12 5
Circuit Insulation Level Rated Rated Maximum Closing and Cable Three-Phase
Rated Maximum
Breaker Continuous Short-Circuit Symmetrical Latching Charging MVA

Power Impulse 6
No Load C-O Operations

Type 12
Rated Voltage
Current Current Interrupting Capability Breaking at Rated
Mechanical Endurance
Range Factor
Frequency Withstand
Withstand Voltage at Rated & 2-Second (Momentary) Current Maximum
Voltage (BIL) Maximum Short-Time Voltage (for
Voltage
60 Hz, 1.2 x 50 Voltage Current

Carrying
Reference
Only)
7
1 Minute microsec
Capability
V I K K*I 2.6 * K * I Amperes 1.732 * V * I 8
kV kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms kA rms kA Crest MVA
rms Symmetrical Symmetrical
50VCP-T16 4.76 19 60 600 16 1 16 42 25 130 20,000 9

50VCP-T16 4.76 19 60 1200, 2000 16 1 16 42 25 130 10,000
50VCP-T20 4.76 19 60 600, 1200, 2000 20 1 20 52 25 165 10,000
50VCP-T25 4.76 19 60 600, 1200, 2000 25 1 25 65 25 210 10,000 10
50VCP-T32 4.76 19 60 600, 1200, 2000 31.5 1 31.5 82 25 260 10,000
50VCP-T40 4.76 19 60 600, 1200, 2000 40 1 40 104 25 330 10,000
150VCP-T16 15 36 95 600, 1200, 2000 16 1 16 42 25 420 10,000 11
150VCP-T20 15 36 95 600, 1200, 2000 20 1 20 52 25 520 10,000
150VCP-T25 15 36 95 600, 1200, 2000 25 1 25 65 25 650 10,000
150VCP-T32 15 36 95 600, 1200, 2000 31.5 1 31.5 82 25 830 10,000 12
150VCP-T40 15 36 95 600, 1200, 2000 40 1 40 104 25 1040 10,000
1 Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms).
2 Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO. 13
Table 6.0-5. Type VCP-TC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching) 3
Type VCP-TC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-T circuit breakers, 14
plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Cable Grounded Capacitor Banks
Charging Single Bank Back-to-Back 15
25 A 250 and 1000 A 250 A with Inrush Current 4 kApk at 5.9 kHz and
1000 A with Inrush Current 15 kApk at 25 kHz 16
3 Type 50 VCP-T32C, 50 VCP-T40C, 150 VCP-T32C and 150 VCP-T40C circuit breakers only.
Note: Ratings of 250 and 1000 A cover capacitor bank applications from 751000 A. 17
Type VCP-TC breakers are considered definite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
18
19
20
21

6.0-20
Sheet 06 020
Technical DataSwitchgear Assembly and Circuit Breakers
i Technical Data
Table 6.0-6. Available Type VCP-TL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Per ANSI Standards (C37.04, C37.09) 12
Circuit Insulation Level Rated Rated Maximum Closing and Cable Three-Phase Mechanical
ii Breaker Continuous Short-Circuit Symmetrical Latching Charging MVA Endurance
Rated Maximum
Power Impulse
Type 12 Withstand Current Current Interrupting Capability Breaking at Rated No Load C-O
Rated Voltage
Frequency
Range Factor
Withstand Voltage at Rated & 2-Second (Momentary) Current Maximum Operations
1 Voltage (BIL) Maximum Short-Time Voltage (for
Voltage
60 Hz, 1.2 x 50 Voltage Current Reference

1 Minute microsec Carrying Only)
Capability
2 V I K K*I 2.6 * K * I Amperes 1.732 * V * I
kV kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms kA rms kA Crest MVA Vacuum Mechanism
3 rms Symmetrical Symmetrical Interrupter
50VCP-TL16 4.76 19 60 600, 1200 16 1 16 42 25 130 30,000 100,000

50VCP-TL20 4.76 19 60 600, 1200 20 1 20 52 25 165 30,000 100,000
4 50VCP-TL25 4.76 19 60 600, 1200 25 1 25 65 25 210 30,000 100,000
150VCP-TL16 15 36 95 600, 1200 16 1 16 42 25 420 30,000 100,000
150VCP-TL20 15 36 95 600, 1200 20 1 20 52 25 520 30,000 100,000
5 150VCP-TL25 15 36 95 600, 1200 25 1 25 65 25 650 30,000 100,000
1 Rated interrupting time for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is 3 Cycle (50 ms).
2 Operating duty for all VCP-TL circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
6
Table 6.0-7. Type VCP-TLC Circuit Breakers (Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TLC circuit breakers have same ratings as type VCP-TL circuit breakers,
7 plus capacitor switching capabilities as follows:
Cable Grounded Capacitor Banks
Charging Single Bank Back-to-Back
8
25 A 250 and 630 A 250 A with inrush current 15 kApk at 5 kHz and
630 A with inrush current 15 kApk at 1.5 kHz
9 Note: Ratings of 250 and 630 A cover capacitor bank applications from 75 to 630 A.
Note: Type VCP-TLC breakers are considered definite purpose breakers per ANSI C37.04.
10
Switchgear Heat Loss Table 6.0-8. MEF Equipment Losses
Equipment Watts Loss
11 The heat-loss data for circuit breakers
given in Table 6.0-8 includes portion Medium Voltage Switchgear (Indoor, 5 and 15 kV)
of main bus conductors and load run- 600 A breaker 400
12 backs. Please note that the estimated 1200 A breaker
2000 A breaker
600
1400
wattage given for each component is
at its full rating. For example, the chart
13 shows 600 W for 1200 A breaker. It
simply means an estimated 600 W
loss in breaker in a 1200 A, 5/15 kV
14 compartment when the circuit breaker
is carrying full 1200 A. The actual loss,
of course, will depend on the actual
15 current being carried by the breaker.
If the full load current of the load
connected to that 1200 A breaker, for
16 example, is only 200 A, the heat-loss in
that compartment will be much less.
By simple I x I x R calculations,
17 one can easily calculate actual loss
at 200 A as = 600 x (200/1200) x
(200/1200) = 16.67 W. Also, in case of
18 lineup consisting of many feeders,
all feeders might not be carrying or
supplying loads at all times. If that is
19 the case, then one can further reduce
total watt loss for the lineup by apply-
ing a utilization factor.
20
21

6.0-21
Sheet 06 021
Type VCP-T Circuit Breaker Operating Times

The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break) i
are shown in Table 6.0-9. Figure 6.0-5 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with
applicable VCP-T circuit breaker timings.
ii
Table 6.0-9. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-T Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage
Rated Breaker Closing Time Opening Time
Control Voltage Rating Milliseconds Milliseconds 1 1
48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc All 2840 1727
120 V, 240 Vac All 2840 2
120 V or 240 Vac capacitor trip All 1727
Optionalundervoltage trip release 48 V, 125 V, 250 Vdc All 4060
1 For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time.
3
Clearing Time 4
Interrupting Time
2 2.5 Cycles Based on 3 Cycles (50 ms)
5
1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay
Contact Parting Time 6

(S-Factor Based on This)
(S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers)
7
Release (Tripping) Delay Time Opening Time Arcing Time
1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum 25 33 msec (5 17 msec)
8
2 Seconds Maximum
Protecting Relay Auxiliary Relay Shunt Trip Mechanism

9
10
Short- Rated Control Main Last
Circuit
Begins
Voltage Energizes
Trip Coil
Contact
Parts
Pole
Clears
11
Figure 6.0-5. Sequence of Events for VCP-T Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
2
12
For manually operated breakers with integral protective relay, refer to applicable relay time-current curves for clearing time.
13
0 29 89 Time (msec)
14
Load 29 ms 12 ms
52-1 52-2 52-1
Opening Time Arcing Dead Time (With Arcing)
Time
52 ms
15
4 52-1 b Contact
ms Makes
52-2
60 ms
16
Source #1 Source #2 Closing Time
Transfer
Dead Time (No Arcing) 17
+ 64 ms
Initiate
Signal
Transfer 52-1
b
18
Initiate
Standard
Control
Supply
b Contact
19
Trip 52-1 Close 52-2 20

21
Figure 6.0-6. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-T Circuit Breakers

6.0-22
Sheet 06 022
Type VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Operating Times

i The closing time (initiation of close signal to contact make) and opening time (initiation of the trip signal to contact break)
are shown in Table 6.0-10. Figure 6.0-7 below shows the sequence of events in the course of circuit interruption, along with
applicable VCP-TL circuit breaker timings.
ii
Table 6.0-10. Closing and Opening Times for Electrically Operated VCP-TL Breakers, at Rated Control Voltage, Typical
Rated Breaker Closing Time Opening Time
1 Control Voltage Rating Milliseconds Milliseconds 1
3660 Vac, 3672 Vdc All 60 2533

2 100240 Vac, 100353 Vdc All 60 2533
3
Clearing Time
4 Interrupting Time
2 2.5 Cycles Based on 3 Cycles (50 ms)
1/2 Cycle Tripping Delay
5
Contact Parting Time
(S-Factor Based on This)
6 (S = 1.2 For All VCP-T Breakers)
7 Release (Tripping) Delay Time Opening Time Arcing Time

1/2 Cycle (8 ms) Minimum 25 33 msec (5 17 msec)
2 Seconds Maximum
8
Protecting Relay Auxiliary Relay Shunt Trip Mechanism
9
10 Short-
Circuit
Rated Control
Voltage Energizes
Main
Contact
Last
Pole
Begins Trip Coil Parts Clears
11 Figure 6.0-7. Sequence of Events for VCP-TL Circuit Breakers with Shunt Trip
12
13 0 29 89 Time (msec)
Load 29 ms 12 ms
52-1
14 52-1 52-2
Opening Time Arcing Dead Time (With Arcing)
Time
52 ms
4 52-1 b Contact
15 ms Makes
60 ms
52-2
Source #1 Source #2 Closing Time
16
Dead Time (No Arcing)
+ Transfer 64 ms
Initiate
17 52-1 Signal
Transfer
Initiate b
18 Control
Standard
b Contact
Supply
19
Trip 52-1 Close 52-2
20
Figure 6.0-8. Typical Transfer TimesFast Sequential TransferVCP-TL Circuit Breakers

21

6.0-23
Sheet 06 023
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control Power Requirements
Table 6.0-11. Shunt Trip Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 1 Table 6.0-13. Undervoltage Release Coil Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 3
Rated Operational Inrush Power Remark Rated Operational Dropout Inrush Continuous Power i
Control Voltage Consumption Control Voltage Voltage Range Power Consumption
Voltage Range at Rated Voltage Voltage Range (3560%) Consumption at Rated Voltage
Volts VA Volts Volts VA VA ii
24 Vdc 1428 250 24 Vdc 2026 814 250 18
48 Vdc
110 Vdc
2856
77121
250
450

48 Vdc
110 Vdc
4153
94121
1729
3966
275
450
18
10
1
125 Vdc 70140 450 125 Vdc 106138 4475 450 10
220 Vdc 154242 450 220 Vdc 187242 77132 450 10
250 Vdc 140280 450 250 Vdc 213275 88150 450 10 2
110 Vac 77121 450 Capacitor Trip 110 Vac 94121 3966 450 10
220 Vac 154242 450 Capacitor Trip 220 Vac 187242 77132 400 10 3
1 These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker, 3 These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker,
and require external control power. Please specify each of these and require external control power. Please specify each of these 4
accessories as required for the application. accessories as required for the application.
Table 6.0-12. Spring Release Coil (Closing Coil) Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 2 Table 6.0-14. Spring Charging Motor Ratings, VCP-T Breakers 4 5
Rated Operational Inrush Power Rated Operational Running Inrush Power Spring
Control Voltage Consumption Control Voltage Current Current Consumption Charging
Voltage Range at Rated Voltage Voltage Range at Rated Voltage Time 6
Volts VA Volts Ampere Ampere VA Seconds
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
2027
3856
250
250
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
2027
3856
8
4
32
16
250
250
5
5
7
110 Vdc 94121 450 110 Vdc 94121 3 12 250 5
125 Vdc 100140 450 125 Vdc 100140 3 12 250 5
220 Vdc 187242 450 220 Vdc 187242 2 8 250 5 8
250 Vdc 200280 450 250 Vdc 200280 2 8 250 5
110 Vac 94121 450 110 Vac 94121 3 12 250 5
120 Vac 104127 450 120 Vac 104127 3 12 250 5 9
220 Vac 187242 450 220 Vac 187242 2 8 250 5
240 Vac 208254 450 240 Vac 208254 2 8 250 5
2 These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker, 4 These electrical accessories are optional for VCP-T circuit breaker, 10
and require external control power. Please specify each of these and require external control power. Please specify each of these
accessories as required for the application. accessories as required for the application.
11
Table 6.0-15. VCP-TL Circuit Breaker Control Power Requirements
Rated Electro-Magnetic Controller Internal Capacitors Charging 5 Minimum Close, Carry and Interrupting
Control Maximum Inrush Inrush Duration Charging Current Maximum Charging Current Ratings Needed for External 12
Voltage Peak Peak Duration Contacts
A ms A Sec. Close Contact Trip Contact

13
48 Vdc 0.52 3.5 1 30 11 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc
125 Vdc 14 3.5 1 30 11 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc
250 Vdc 22 3.5 1 30 11 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc
120 Vac 17 3.5 1 30 11 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc
14
240 Vac 22 3.5 1 30 11 mA at 96 Vdc 4 mA at 96 Vdc
5 Data provided are for charging of internal capacitors from a fully discharged state. In normal operation, the capacitors recharge in about 15 seconds
after each closing operation.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-24
Sheet 06 024
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Auxiliary and Other Switches
i Breaker Auxiliary Switch Table 6.0-16. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Contact Ratings
Continuous Control Circuit Voltage
All VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breakers are Current in 120 Vac 240 Vac 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
supplied with an auxiliary switch with Amperes
ii 5NO and 5NC contacts. On Manually Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
Operated breakers, all 5NO and 5NC 20 15 10 16 16 10 5
contacts are available for customers
1 use. On Electrically Operated circuit
Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
20 15 10 16 16 10 5
breakers, 1NO and 1NC contacts are
used for breaker status indicating
2 lights (red and green lights) and
remaining 4NO and 4NC contacts are Signal: Initiation of Initiation of
generally available for other control Close Signal Shunt Trip Signal
3 functions or customers use. T
VCP-T C Closed
The auxiliary switch is a heavy-duty, Circuit Breaker
4 double-break type switch with wipe Main Contacts
Closing Time Opening Time
Open
type contacts. The switch contact t = 28 40 ms t = 17 27 ms
ratings and operating times are given
5 in Table 6.0-16 and Figure 6.0-9.
Closed
Breaker Auxiliary t 3 ms t 3 ms
Switch Open
6 MOC Switch "a" Contact
"b" Breaks 6 ms "a" Breaks 7 ms
The mechanism operated cell (MOC) Before "a" Makes Before "b" Makes
Breaker Auxiliary
switch is not available in MEF switch-
7 gear. When number of NO and NC
Switch
"b" Contact t 6 ms t +10 ms
Closed
to 3 ms to +4 ms Open
contacts available from the Breaker
Auxiliary Switch are not sufficient
8 for controls or customers use, an
auxiliary relay energized by one of the Figure 6.0-9. Breaker Auxiliary Switch Operating Times, at Rated Control Voltage
available NO or NC contacts must be
9 used as needed. The use of auxiliary Table 6.0-17. TOC Switch Contact Ratings
relay requires external control power. Continuous Control Circuit Voltage
10 Current in
Amperes
120 Vac 240 Vac 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 250 Vdc
TOC Switch Non-Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
11 The optional truck operated cell 20 15 15 6 0.5 0.5 0.2
(TOC) switch operates when the Inductive Circuit Interrupting Capacity in Amperes
circuit breaker is levered into or out 20 12.5 12.5 5 0.05 0.05 0.03
12 of the operating (connected) position.
In MEF TOC option includes two micro
switches, one for connected position,
13 and one for test/disconnected position,
each with 1 Form C contact. If addi-
tional contacts are required, auxiliary
14 relay must be used. The use of auxil-
iary relay requires external control
power. The TOC switch contact
15 ratings are given in Table 6.0-17.
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-25
Sheet 06 025
Technical DataCurrent Sensors and Instrument Transformers
Phase Current Sensors Zero Sequence Phase and Zero Sequence i

Eaton Type-V phase current sensors Current Sensors Current Transformers
are specifically designed and tested to
Eaton Type-V zero sequence current Conventional current transformers ii
function with Eatons 520V and 1150V
sensors are specifically designed and with 5A secondary are used when
integral protective relays and the Type
tested to function with Eatons 520V using external relays. CTs used for
VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker.
and 1150V integral protective relays phase protection and metering are 1
The phase current sensors are and type VCP-T/VCP-TL circuit breaker. installed over the specially designed
installed in the primary circuit, The zero sequence sensor, as its name insulated bushings in the primary
external to the circuit breaker, over implies, measures zero sequence circuit. Maximum of two sets of CTs, 2
a set of specially designed insulated current (vector summation of phase or one set of CT and one set of current
bushings. The bushings and current currents) and provides sensitive sensor can be installed over those
sensors are tested as an assembly method for ground fault sensing. insulated bushings. Ground fault 3
for the same impulse withstand (BIL) Refer to Table 6.0-18 for available sensing, when used, can be accom-
rating as that of the switchgear in zero sequence sensors. plished by residual sensing of phase
which they are installed.
Table 6.0-18. Zero Sequence Current Sensors
currents, or by using an optional 4
zero sequence current transformer.
The power required to operate the Available Ratings Refer to Table 6.0-19 for the available
relays basic overcurrent protection Description Ratio current transformers and their 5
functions is provided by secondary ratings and accuracies.
ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm) 50:1 1
output from the current sensors once
the three-phase primary current (tap selectable), 100/200:1
through the circuit breaker exceeds ID = 4.80 inch (121.9 mm) 6
1 For use with 1150V relay only and with
approximately 10 to 12% of the current
sensor rating or single-phase primary auxiliary power to the relay.
current exceeds approximately 30%
7
of the current sensor rating. Table 6.0-19. Phase and Zero Sequence Current TransformersAvailable Ratings
The current sensors are designed to

CT Ratio Metering Accuracy Classification at 60 Hz Relay
Class
8
Burden Burden Burden Burden Burden
supply sensing and operating power B 0.1 B 0.2 B 0.5 B 0.9 B 1.8
to Eatons 520V and 1150V integral pro-
tective relays. They are not suitable for 50:5 1.2 2.4 9
use with any other relays or meters. 100:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 2.4 4.8 C10
200:5 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.2 2.4 C20
Primary current rating of the current 250:5 0.3 0.6 0.6 1.2 1.2 C20 10
sensors defines maximum continuous 300:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 1.2 C20
current rating (In) of the primary circuit 400:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.6 C50
in which they are installed, regardless 500:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C50 11
of the circuit breaker frame rating. 600:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100
For example, an 800 A current sensor 750:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100
installed in a primary circuit controlled 800:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 12
by 1200 A rated circuit breaker, defines 1000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100
1200:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100
800 A as the maximum continuous
current that can be carried through 1500:5
1600:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
C100
C100
13
that circuit. The current sensors also 2000:5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 C100 2
determine the maximum instantaneous
setting that can be set on the relays.
50:5 Zero sequence
100:5 Zero sequence

C10
C20
14
2 This accuracy is less than IEEE C37.20.2.
Phase Current Sensors and
Rating PlugsAvailable Ratings 15
100, 200, 250, 300, 400, 600,
Voltage Transformers If metering or relaying application
requires phase-to-ground voltages,
630, 800, 1000, 1200, 1250, 1600 Voltage transformers supply voltage use three VTs, each connected L-G. 16
and 2000 signal proportional to primary circuit If not, use of two VTs connected L-L
voltage for relaying and metering. is sufficient.
Refer to Table 6.0-20 for available VT
For ground detection, three VTs
17
ratings and accuracies.
connected in line-to-ground/broken-
When two VTs are used, they are delta are used. 18
typically connected L-L, and provide
A single VT, when used, can be
phase-to-phase voltages, (Vab, Vbc,
connected line-to-line (it will provide
Vca) for metering and relaying.
line-to-line output, for example Vab 19
When three VTs are used, they are or Vbc, or Vca), or line-to-ground (it
connected line-to-ground, and provide will provide line-to-ground output, for
phase-to-phase (Vab, Vbc, Vca), as well example Va or Vb or Vc). Generally, 20
as phase-to-ground (Va, Vb, Vc) voltages a single VT is used to derive voltage
for metering and relaying. signal for synchronizing or Over
Voltage/Under Voltage function. 21

6.0-26
Sheet 06 026
Technical DataCircuit Breaker Control, CPT and Surge Protection
i
Table 6.0-20. Voltage Transformers
Available Ratings 1
For AC control, a capacitor trip device Control Power Transformers
is used with each circuit breaker shunt
Primary Ratio Secondary trip to ensure energy is available Control power transformer is used
Voltage Voltage for tripping during fault conditions. for auxiliary power for space heaters,
ii When AC control power is derived light, receptacle and control of electri-
2400 20:1 120
from within the switchgear, CPT cally operated breakers when external
4200 35:1 120
4800 40:1 120 should be connected on line side of auxiliary power source is not available.
1 7200 60:1 120
the main breaker. For main-tie-main Control power transformer when used
8400 70:1 120 lineups, CPT connected on source side for control of electrically operated
12000 100:1 120 of each main with automatic transfer breakers should be connected on
2 12480 104:1 120 control device on the secondary source side of the main breaker so
13200 110:1 120 should be used. that the control power is available
14400 120:1 120 to close the main breaker. Refer to
3 1 All voltage transformers are rated for meter- VCP-TL Circuit Breakers Table 6.0-21 for available control
ing accuracy of 0.3% at 10 VA burden, and
All VCP-TL circuit breakers are power transformer ratings in
rated for thermal VA of 200 at 55 degrees C. MEF switchgear.
4 equipped with linear actuator
mechanism, comprising of: the linear Table 6.0-21. Control Power Transformers
Circuit Breaker Control actuator, electro-magnetic controller Available Ratings, Single-Phase, 60 Hz 2
5 (EM controller), three closing
Voltage kVA BIL
VCP-T Circuit Breakers capacitors, and internal power supply
Primary Secondary Rating kV
modules for the EM controller. An
Type VCP-T circuit breakers are
6 available as either Manually Operated
AC or DC control supply (selected by
breaker style number) is required to
2400 V 240/120 V 5 60
4000 V 240/120 V 5 60
(MO) or Electrically Operated (EO). operate the linear actuator mechanism. 4160 V 240/120 V 5 60
All circuit breakers are equipped with
7 spring charging handle integral to the
Internal power supply modules convert
input control voltage and supplies 96
4800 V
6900 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
95
95
circuit breaker, and push-to-close and Vdc for operation of the EM controller 7200 V 240/120 V 5 95
push-to-open pushbuttons.
8 and charging of capacitors. The linear 8320 V
8400 V
240/120 V
240/120 V
5
5
95
95
Manually charging the closing springs actuator mechanism is designed for
11500 V 240/120 V 5 95
and then pressing the push-to-close OCO duty cycle with control power
12000 V 240/120 V 5 95
9 pushbutton accomplish closing of on. Initial charging of capacitors (from
12470 V 240/120 V 5 95
the MO breaker. Closing of the breaker fully discharged state) takes about
13200 V 240/120 V 5 95
charges the tripping springs. Manually 30 seconds. In normal operation with
13800 V 240/120 V 5 95
10 pressing the push-to-open pushbutton control power connected, the capaci-
14400 V 240/120 V 5 95
accomplishes tripping of the MO tors recharge in about 15 seconds
2 Line-to-Line connection only available.
breaker. If the MO breaker is equipped after each closing operation. All
11 with integral protective relay, the relay circuit breakers include a standard
provides tripping impulse via trip anti-pump feature. Surge Protection
actuator to open the breaker, without a Once the capacitors are charged,
12 need for external control power supply. circuit breaker can be closed and
Surge arresters and or surge capacitors
can be provided in MEF switchgear.
Electrically operated breakers are opened through: the use of manual Refer to Tab 5 for surge protection
ON and OFF pushbuttons mounted
13 equipped with electric motor for
on the breaker itself, control switch
guidelines and recommended ratings.
spring charging, spring release coil
(close coil) and shunt trip coil. All mounted on the breaker compartment
door, or any external dry contacts.
14 EO breakers can be manually operated
In the event that control power is lost,
as described above. In order to
electrically operate the EO breakers, the circuit breaker is capable of per-
forming a manual or electrical OPEN
15 external control power is required.
operation up to 48 hours after the loss
Also, when using microprocessor- of control power. If the control power
based or solid-state external relays, loss lasts longer than 48 hours, the
16 external control power is required for circuit breaker can be opened using
relay logic. the integral EMERGENCY OPEN
17 handle located on the front of the
circuit breaker, by grasping the handle
firmly and then pulling down.
18
19
20
21

6.0-27
Sheet 06 027
Technical Data
Typical Three-Line Diagrams, Integral Protection i
ii
9
Figure 6.0-10. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 520MCV Integral Protective Relay
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 6.0-11. Typical MEF Switchgear with Digitrip 1150V Integral Protective Relay

6.0-28
Sheet 06 028
Technical Data
i Typical Three-Line Diagrams, External Protection
ii MV Supply
Ph 1 2 3
1
VCP-T/VCP-TL
Drawout Breaker Note:
External Control Power
2 Required for Breaker
Control and EDR-3000.
CS
3
Auxiliary
Power (AC, DC)
4 EDR-3000
(1) Three-Phase Phase and
Current Ground
Overcurrent
5 Transformer
6 Ground Fault Sensing

via Phase Residual,
or Zero Sequence
7 (1) BYZ
Zero Seq. CT
(optional)
8
Load
9
Figure 6.0-12. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
10
MV Supply
11
Ph 1 2 3
12 VTs
(3-LG or 2-LL)
VCP-T/VCP-TL
13 Drawout Breaker Note:
3P-3A External Control Power
Required for Breaker
Control and EDR-5000.
14 CS CS = Control Switch
15 Auxiliary
Power (AC, DC)
EDR-5000
(1) Three-Phase Multi-Function
16 Current Protection and
Metering
Transformer
17
Ground Fault Sensing
via Phase Residual,
or Zero Sequence
18 (1) BYZ
Zero Seq. CT
(optional)
19 Load
20 Figure 6.0-13. Typical MEF Switchgear with EDR-5000 Multi-Function Protective Relay
21

6.0-29
Sheet 06 029
Technical Data
Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes i

1P15A
Ph BREAKER
ii
Control Protective
Control G
Switch
R
Switch Relay 1
Spring Close Trip
Charged
RES
RES
Indicating 2
Light
(Optional) Capacitor
Trip 3
Control Supply
(+)
ac T
W
120 Vac
+
4
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
COM COM
RES
B15 A16 B12 A23 A25 B10 A27 A29 B19 B21 B23 B25 B27 B29
5
52 b a b a b a b a
a
Motor
Close
Circuit
Trip
6
(Spring A28 A30 B20 B22 B24 B26 B28 B30
Circuit LOC
OCA
ATION
Release Coil) b a Coil
7
B14 B13 A24 A26 B11
8
LOC
TRSS
TRCS_
TRMVTU
OCA
ATION
LOC
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
OCA
ATION LOC
CGL
OCA
ATION LOC
CRL
OCA
ATION LOC
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
OCA
ATION
Figure 6.0-14. Typical AC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker

9
P
2P15A
BREAKER
10
(+)
Control G
Switch
R Control
Switch
Protective
Relay
11
Spring Close Trip
Charged
RES
RES
Indicating 12
Light
(Optional)
13
DC Control Supply
W
14
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
RES
B15 A16 B12 A23 A25 B10 A27 A29 B19 B21 B23 B25 B27 B29
15
52 b a b a b a b a
Motor
Close
Circuit
a
16
(Spring Trip A28 A30 B20 B22 B24 B26 B28 B30
Circuit LOCATION
Release Coil) b a Coil

17
B14 B13 A24 A26 B11
N BREAKER
LOCATION
TRSS
TRCS_
TRMVTU
TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
LOCATION CGL
LOCATION CRL
LOCATION TRMVTU
TRCS_
TRSS
LOCATION
18
(-)
Figure 6.0-15. Typical DC Control CircuitVCP-T Breaker 19
20
21

6.0-30
Sheet 06 030
Technical Data
i Electrically Operated BreakersControl Schemes
2P15A (DC Control)

ii (+) or Ph
1P15A (AC Control)
1
Res
Res
CS Remote CS Relay Remote

C Close T Trip Trip
2
AC or DC (selected by breaker part number)
G R
3
Control Voltage
4
System
5 Healthy
Alarm Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare
(+)
6 A27 A29 B15 B12 B13 B10 B11 A25 B19 B21 B23 B25 B27 B29
52 52 Power Local Bkr Local Bkr 52 52 52 52 52 52

b a Supply Open PB Close PB b a b a b a
7 VCP-TL Breaker
A28 A30 B14 A26 B20 B22 B24 B26 B28 B30
8
(-) or N
9 Figure 6.0-16. Type VCP-TL Circuit BreakerTypical Control Circuit
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-31
Sheet 06 031
Layouts and Dimensions
MEF Switchgear Available Configurations Table 6.0-22. Maximum Number of Cables per Phase
i
Configuration Cable Number of Power
with Metering Compartment Entry Cables/Phase 1
26.00-Inch Adjacent Direction When Without
Available MEF configurations are shown in Figure 6.0- ii
(660.4 mm) 19.00-Inch Using Zero
17. For other configurations, contact Eaton Wide Cell (482.6 mm) Zero Sequence
If utility metering compartment is required, use MVS Wide Pull Sequence CT or
or VCP-W (rear-access) switchgear Section CT 2 Sensor 1
Shipping group maximum length = 104.00 inches Breaker/blank None Bottom 4 4
(2642.0 mm) Breaker/auxiliary Yes Bottom 4 4
All units are 92.00 inches (2367.0 mm) tall, 61.50 inches Top 4 4
2
(1562.0 mm) deep
Breaker/breaker Yes Top/top 1 2
Main bus1200 or 2000 A Bottom/bottom 1 2 3
2000 A breakers1-high (one breaker/vertical section) only, Top/bottom 4 4
except as noted in Figure 6.0-17 1 Multiple cables per phase are based on the use of a maximum wire
600 and 1200 A breakers can be stacked 2-high size of 500 kcmil for each cable. One cable per phase is based on the 4
(breaker/breaker) use of maximum wire size of 1000 kcmil.
2 When using a zero sequence sensor (for use with an integral protective
Auxiliary shown can be either VTs (two or three) or
single-phase 5 kVA CPT relay), the number of cables is limited to one per phase with a 5
maximum wire size of 750 kcmil.
CTs or current sensors cannot be placed on main-bus side
of the breaker
6
CTs shown can be either one or two sets; or one set of
CT and one set of current sensors
Zero sequence CT shown can be replaced with 7
Zero sequence current sensor
Zero sequence CT and surge arresters shown are optional
Maximum number of cables per phase is limited as shown 8
in Table 6.0-22
9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Configurations 15

Note: = No shipping split here.
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-32
Sheet 06 032
i MEF Switchgear Available Configurations

Note: Refer to Page 6.0-31 for notes.
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Configurations (Continued)
18
19
20
21

6.0-33
Sheet 06 033
MEF Switchgear Available Configurations i

ii
10
11
12
Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Configurations (Continued)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-34
Sheet 06 034
i MEF Switchgear Available Configurations

ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 Figure 6.0-17. MEF SwitchgearAvailable Configurations (Continued)

20
21

6.0-35
Sheet 06 035
Front and Sectional Views i

Main Bus
Main Bus Access
ii
Control
Compartment 1
2
6001200A
Breaker
Breaker
Compartment
VCP-T 3
92.00
(2337.7)
4
5
Cable CT Bushing
Pull Box 3-PH CT
(3) Current 6
Sensors
7
3 SA
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor
26.00 61.50
8
(660.4) (1561.7)
Front View Side View 9
Figure 6.0-18. Typical 1-High Breaker Unit, Cables Out the Bottom
10
Main Bus Access Main Bus (3) Current Sensors 11

Control
Compartment
12
3-PH CT
13
6002000A
Breaker Pull
Breaker 14
Compartment VCP-T
Section
92.00 (3) SA
(2337.7) 15
CT
Drawout
VTs
Bushing 16
VTs or CPT
17
Drawout
VTs or CPT CPT 1-PH
18
Zero Seq CT or
Current Sensor 19
26.00 19.00 61.50 61.50
(660.4) (482.6) (1561.7) (1561.7)
20
Front View Side ViewBreaker Cell Side ViewPull Section
Figure 6.0-19. Typical Breaker/Auxiliary Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out Top or Bottom 21

6.0-36
Sheet 06 036
i Front and Side Views
Main Bus Access Main Bus (3) Current Sensors

ii
Control
1 Compartment
3-PH CT
2
6001200A
Breaker
3 Breaker
Compartment
Pull VCP-T
Section
92.00
CT
(2337.7)
4 (3) SA Bushing
5
6001200A
Breaker Breaker
6 Compartment VCP-T
7
Zero Seq CT or
8 Current Sensor
26.00 19.00 61.50 61.50
(660.4) (482.6) (1561.7) (1561.7)
9 Front View Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell Side ViewPull Section
10 Figure 6.0-20. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Bottom
11 Zero Seq CT or
Main Bus Access Main Bus Current Sensor (3) Current Sensors
12 Control
Compartment
13 3-PH CT
14 6001200A
Breaker Breaker
Pull VCP-T
Compartment Section
15 92.00
(3) SA
(2337.7)
16
6001200A
17 Breaker Breaker
Compartment VCP-T
18
19 CT Bushing
26.00 19.00 61.50 61.50

20 (660.4) (482.6) (1561.7) (1561.7)
Front View Side ViewBreaker/Breaker Cell Side ViewPull Section
21
Figure 6.0-21. Typical Breaker/Breaker Unit and Pull Section, Cables Out the Top

6.0-37
Sheet 06 037
Front and Side Views i

Main Bus Access Main Bus-2
Main Bus-1
ii
Control
Compartment 1
2
6002000A
Breaker Breaker 3
Pull
Compartment Section VCP-T
92.00
(2337.7) 4
Drawout
VTs or CPT VTs
5
Drawout
6
VTs or CPT CPT 1-PH
7
8
26.00 19.00 61.50 61.50
(660.4) (482.6) (1561.7) (1561.7) 9
Front View Side ViewTie Breaker Side ViewPull Section
Figure 6.0-22. Typical Bus Tie Breaker Unit and Pull Section 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

6.0-38
Sheet 06 038
Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
i MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit
3.00
ii (76.2)
2.00
(50.8) Rear
1 6.00 For
6
(152.4) Seismic 7 60.00

60.00 (1524.0)
2 8.50 (1524.0)
1 (215.9)
3.00
9.00
(76.2)
3 (228.6) 4.00
(101.6)
4 30.25
5
(768.4) 2.50 5.00 22.25
(63.5) (127.0) (565.2)
5 8
1.63
28.50
18.00 (723.9)
(41.4)
(457.2)
6 9.80 1 2
1.75
(44.5) 8.38 1.25
(249.2) (212.9) (31.8)
7 2.00 1.25 12.00 1.25

(50.8) (31.8) (304.8) (31.8) 3.00 3.00
2.50 (76.2) (76.2)
2.50
8 (63.5) 7.00 (63.5) 26.00
(177.8) (660.4)
26.00 Load Bearing Surfaces
A B
9 4
(660.4)
4
Front
10
3
11 9
60.00
(1524.0)
12
13
14 Figure 6.0-23. MEF 26.00-Inch (660.4 mm) Wide Unit Floor Plan
1 Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding.
15 2 Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
3 Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
4 Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6.
16 5 Primary cable entrance space, available only with 1-high breaker with cables from below.
Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). See shop order base plan for conduit location.
6 Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
17 7 Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally,
8 Location of station grounding lug.
9 Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
18
19
20
21

6.0-39
Sheet 06 039
Layouts and DimensionsFloor Plan Details
MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section i

3.00
(76.2)
ii
2.00
(50.8) Rear
5 1
6.00 For 6
(152.4) Seismic 60.00
60.00 (1524.0)
7.00 (1524.0) 2
(177.8)
1 3.00
6.00
(152.4)
(76.2)
3
8 22.25
2.50 (565.2) 4
(63.5) 11.00 4.00
30.25 (279.4) (101.6)
(768.4)
7
1.63 28.50 5
5.00 (41.4) (723.9)
(127.0)
9.81 1 1.75
(44.5)
8.38 1.25
6
(249.2) (212.9) (31.8)
2 7
1.25 1.25
(31.8) (31.8) 3.00 3.00
(76.2) (76.2)
2.50 2.50
19.00
(482.6)
8
(63.5) (63.5)
Load Bearing Surfaces
A 19.00 B 9
(482.6)
4 4
Front
10
3
9
60.00
11
(1524.0)
12
13
Figure 6.0-24. MEF 19.00-Inch (482.6 mm) Wide Pull Section Floor Plan
14
1 Suggested locations for 0.50 inch bolts or welding.
2
3
Secondary control wiring conduit openings (top or bottom) conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm). 15
Minimum front clearance when using portable lifter. Local jurisdictions may require a larger distance.
4 Minimum clearance for door opening: door hinged on left A = 15, B = 6.
5
6
Minimum rear clearance, local jurisdictions may require a larger distance. 16
Finished foundations surface shall be level within 0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left to right, front-to-back and diagonally,
7
8
Location of station grounding lug.
Primary cable entrance space (top or bottom entry). Primary conduit projection must not exceed 3.00 inches (76.2 mm).
17
See shop order base plan for conduit location.
9 Minimum clearance recommended on top of the switchgear for main bus access is 24.00 inches (609.6 mm).
18
19
20
21

6.0-40
Sheet 06 040
Table 6.0-23. MEF Switchgear Units Less Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights

i Type of Structure Structure Structure Weight in Lb (kg)
Width 25 kA Switchgear 40 kA Switchgear
Inches (mm)
ii Main Bus Rating Main Bus Rating
1200 A 2000 A 1200 A 2000 A
6001200 A Breaker over cable entry 26.00 (660.4) 1350 (614) 1500 (682) 1560 (709) 1710 (777)
1 6001200 A Breaker over 6001200 A breaker, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 2000 (909) 2250 (1023) 2670 (1214) 2920 (1327)
6001200 A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 1550 (706) 1700 (773) 1785 (811) 1935 (880)
6001200 A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 2000 (909) 2150 (977) 2235 (1016) 2385 (1084)
2 2000 A Breaker over blank, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 2210 (1005) 2210 (1005)
2000 A Breaker over auxiliary, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 2660 (1209) 2660 (1209)
1200 A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 2000 (909) 2150 (977) 2235 (1016) 2385 (1084)
3 2000 A Stand-alone breaker, cable-in/cable-out, with an adjacent pull section 45.00 (1143.0) 2210 (1005) 2210 (1005)
Auxiliary over blank or blank over auxiliary 26.00 (660.4) 1500 (682) 1600 (727) 1500 (682) 1600 (727)
Auxiliary over auxiliary 26.00 (660.4) 1900 (864) 2000 (909) 1900 (864) 2000 (909)
4 Blank structure (with main bus only) 26.00 (660.4) 1000 (455) 1100 (500) 1000 (455) 1100 (500)
Transition section (for close coupling to MCC, liquid or dry transformer) 19.00 (482.6) 800 (364) 900 (409) 800 (364) 900 (409)
Blank pull section (with main bus only) 19.00 (482.6) 550 (250) 650 (295) 600 (273) 700 (318)
5 Table 6.0-24. VCP-T/VCP-TL Circuit BreakersApproximate Weights
Circuit Breaker Continuous Static
6 Type Current Rating
Amperes
Weight
in Lb (kg)
50 VCP-T16, 50 VCP-T20, 50 VCP-T25 1200 250 (114)

7 50 VCP-T32, 50 VCP-T40 2000 440 (200)
150 VCP-T16, 150 VCP-T20, 150 VCP-T25 1200 250 (114)
150 VCP-T32, 150 VCP-T40 2000 440 (200)
8 50 VCP-TL16, 50 VCP-TL20, 50 VCP-TL25 600
1200
232 (105)
234 (106)
150 VCP-TL16, 150 VCP-TL20, VCP-TL25 600 232 (105)
2200 234 (106)
9
Note: Breaker impact weight = 1.5 x static weight.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMEB & MSB Medium Voltage
7.0-1
October 2015 Vacuum Breakers
Sheet 07 001
MEB & MSB Medium Voltage

Vacuum Breakers
Contents i
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear MEB & MSB Medium Voltage Vacuum Breakers
Drawout-Mounted Breaker (MEB) ii
General Description and Seismic Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-1
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2 1
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-2
Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-3
2
Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-3
Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1-4 3
Switch- and Fixed-Mounted Vacuum Breaker (MSB)
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-1 4
Seismic Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-2
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3 5
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-3
Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-4
Assembly Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-4
6
Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5
Breaker Control Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-5 7
Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2-6
Vacuum Breakers 8
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1
Low Resistance Ground Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1
9
Single-Ended Substation Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-1
Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-2
Surge Arresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-2
10
MEB and MSB Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-3
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring for Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3-4 11
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
MEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16347A Section 26 13 19.11
13
MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16347B Section 26 13 19.16
14
15
16
17
18
19
MEB 20
MVS
MVS
21

7.0-2
October 2015
Sheet 07 002

i
ii
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.1-1
October 2015 Drawout Vacuum Breakers (MEB)
Sheet 07 003
General Description
MEB Metal-Enclosed A Type MEB switchgear assembly is Type MEB switchgear is one product
i
classified as an overcurrent protective of choice for ground fault interruption
Drawout Breaker device that provides increased system when air interrupters alone would be
protection and increased coordination potentially hazardous if called on to
General Description with upstream and downstream operate above their assigned interrupt- ii
Eatons MEB (metal-enclosed breaker) devices where these benefits cannot ing ratings. Capacitor switching is easily
switchgear assembly consists of a be achieved with a switch and fuse handled by MEB, avoiding the restrike
single-high drawout vacuum circuit combination. Vacuum circuit breakers hazard presented by air switches. 1
breaker (Type VCP-W) in a metal- provide the following features:
Standardized designs cover most
enclosed cabinet. This equipment has
been designed primarily where metal-
High interrupting capacity suitable common applications, while custom 2
for use with ground fault equipment designs are also available for unusual
clad switchgear is not required and a
and differential relay schemes requirements.
switch or switch and fuse combination
are not suitable. As primary protection High duty cycle Type MEB vacuum switchgear meets 3
for single-ended substations, it can Adjustable overcurrent protection or exceeds the following industry
eliminate the need for a secondary Expanded protective relay functions, standards: ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3,
main circuit breaker. It can also be such as those provided in the ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4, ANSI C37.22, 4
applied as the primary main device and EDR-5000 (refer to Tab 4) ANSI C37.57, ANSI C37.58, NEMA
integrated with fused or unfused feeder SG5, NEMA SG6, CSA 22.2 No. 31-04,
switches in an Eaton Type MVS load
Three-phase tripping; no single
EEMAC G8-3.3. It is also CSA listable
5
phasing on tripping
interrupter switchgear assembly. for Canada and U.S. markets.
Maintainable
Two and three breaker automatic
transfer schemes are also available. Long equipment life MEB circuit breaker sections are 6
For drawout vacuum circuit breaker Special applications, such as easily mixed with MVS fused switch
metal-clad switchgear, Eaton Type capacitor switching, are possible sections in lineups. No bus transitions
VacClad-W, see Tab 5. with breakers are required between them except 7
where bus runs from top to bottom
For drawout vacuum circuit breaker Type MEB switchgear provides a mini- locations, such as between main and
metal-enclosed front access only, mal footprint using vacuum breaker feeder sections. 8
Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6. technology. All protective devices and
metering are conveniently mounted on Seismic Qualification
the switchgear structure door. 9
Type VCP-W vacuum circuit breakers
have been designed with a V-Flex 10
current transfer system that provides
a unique non-sliding current transfer
arrangement, no maintenance,
Refer to Tab 1 for information on
11
excellent electrical and thermal transfer,
and long vacuum interrupter life. seismic qualification for this and
other Eaton products.
Both indoor and outdoor non-walk-in 12
enclosures are available. Uses are
single or multiple circuits, transformer
primaries and mains for MVS 13
applications. Configurations with
an automatic transfer control system
can be easily accommodated. Drawout
14
vacuum breakers are ideal for high
duty cycle, as well as applications
requiring rapid return to service
15
after a load fault.
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.1-2
Drawout Vacuum Breakers (MEB) October 2015
Sheet 07 004
General DescriptionTechnical Data
Construction If AC control power is used, a capacitor

i Current and voltage transformers
trip device is provided as standard.
A Digitrip 3010 relay with dual
associated with protection devices source power supply may be used for
ii such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-5000
electronic overcurrent relays are
over-current protection, thus eliminat-
ing the need for an uninterruptible
applied using the same ratings as power source for continuous fault
1 drawout metal-clad switchgear. current protection.
Metering and protective relay devices
are mounted on the single front Once the circuit breaker is closed
2 hinged door. The front door may be and the closing spring is recharged,
opened at any time to provide access the breaker can open, close and
to low voltage components and to the open without spring recharge.
3 front of the circuit breaker without EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
being exposed to high voltage.
The IQ family of electronic meters
4 is normally used when metering
functions are required.
5 The circuit breaker is racked into or out
of position, but can easily be drawn
out and removed from the enclosure
6 with grounded steel shutters, prevent-
ing accidental contact with primary
voltage connections. Routine mainte-
7 nance can be performed on the circuit
breaker mechanism in the enclosure.
8
EDR-5000 Multifunction Protective Relay
9 Table 7.1-1. Protective Relays 1

The VCP-W vacuum circuit breaker is Relay Type Protective Relay Metering
easily accessible for routine inspection IEEE Functions
10 and maintenance. User-friendly, front panel
controls and indicators are functionally EDR-3000 50/51; 50/51G Amperes
grouped together for easy operation. and
11 ampere
demand
Overcurrent Protection EDR-5000 25, 27, 32, 46, 47, Amps; volts;
12 Eatons MEB breaker can be furnished 50N/G, 51N/G, pf, energy,
with an Eaton Type EDR-3000 or 50/51,50BF, 51V, power; THD;
EDR-5000 relay to provide overcurrent 59, 67N, 67 waveform
1 See Tab 4 for available relays, selection and
13 and fault protection. Optional zero
sequence 50/51G ground fault protection application details.
is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for
14 more details.
MEB with Complete Access to Control
Switches, Overcurrent Relays and Meters,
as well as Breakers
15 EDR-3000 or
Standard MEB insulators are NEMA EDR-5000 1
3-CTs
rated glass polyester or optional
16 epoxy. Control power is required. Vacuum
The AC control power can be supplied Breaker
50/51
integrally if specified. The DC control 52
50N/51N
17 power, if required, must be furnished
by others.
18
1-Zero Sequence CT
19
Figure 7.1-1. Typical MEB Single-Section
One-Line Diagram
20 1 Use of EDR-5000 requires VTs.
21

7.1-3
Sheet 07 005
Technical Data
Assembly Ratings
Table 7.1-2. MEB Assembly Main Bus Ratings 1
i
Rated Maximum Rated Rated Main Bus Rated Momentary Rated Short-TIme (2 Seconds)
Volts kV BIL kV Current Amperes Current kA rms Asymmetrical Current kA Symmetrical ii
4.76 60 600 40 25
4.76 60 600 61 38
4.76 60 600 80 50 1
4.76 60 1200 40 25
4.76 60 1200 61 38
4.76
4.76
60
60
1200
1200
80
101
50
63
2
4.76 60 2000 40 25
4.76 60 2000 61 38
15 95 600 40 25
3
15 95 600 61 38
15 95 600 80 50
15 95 1200 40 25 4
15 95 1200 61 38
15 95 1200 80 50
15 95 1200 101 63
1 The switchgear assembly is designed for use with Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG circuit breakers. However, please note that certain VCP-WC
5
will apply.
6
Table 7.1-3. Available Type VCP-W, VCP-WC and VCP-WG Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Circuit Rated Rated Voltage Rated Rated Short-Circuit Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Closing and Latching
Breaker Maximum Range Factor Continuous Current at Rated and 3-Second Short-Time Current Capability (Momentary) 7
Type 2345 Voltage Current Maximum Voltage Carrying Capability
V K I K*I 2.6 * K * I 1.6 * K * I
kV rms Amperes kA rms Symmetrical kA rms Symmetrical kA Crest kA rms Asym
8
50 VCP-W 250 4.76 1.24 1200 29 36 97 58
50 VCP-W 350 4.76 1.19 1200 41 49 132 78 9
50 VCP-W 500 4.76 1.0 1200 63 63 170 101
75 VCP-W 500 8.25 1.25 1200 33 41 111 66
150 VCP-W 500
150 VCP-W 750
15
15
1.3
1.3
1200
1200
18
28
23
36
62
97
37
58
10
150 VCP-W 1000 15 1.3 1200 37 48 130 77
150 VCP-W 1500 15 1.0 1200 63 63 170 101
50 VCP-W 25 4.76 1.0 1200 25 25 65 40 11
50 VCP-W 40 4.76 1.0 1200 40 40 104 64
50 VCP-W 50 4.76 1.0 1200 50 50 130 80
50 VCP-W 63 4.76 1.0 1200 63 63 164 100.8 12
75 VCP-W 50 8.25 1.0 1200 50 50 130 80
150 VCP-W 25 15 1.0 1200 25 25 65 40
150 VCP-W 40
150 VCP-W 50
15
15
1.0
1.0
1200
1200
40
50
40
50
104
130
64
80
13
150 VCP-W 63 15 1.0 1200 63 63 164 100.8
50 VCP-WG 50 4.76 1.0 1200 50 50 137 82
50 VCP-WG 63 4.76 1.0 1200 63 63 173 103 14
150 VCP-WG 50 15 1.0 1200 50 50 137 82
150 VCP-WG 63 15 1.0 1200 63 63 173 103
2 For detailed ratings of Type VCP-W circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-1A. 15
3 For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WC circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-2.
4 For detailed ratings of Type VCP-WG circuit breakers, refer to Tab 5, Table 5.4-3 and 5.4-4.
5 Please note certain Eaton breakers may have higher capabilities than required by ANSI standards. When these 16
breakers are applied in an MEB switchgear assembly, the assembly ratings as given in Table 7.1-2 will apply.
Breaker Control Ratings 17

Table 7.1-4. VCP-W Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power Requirements
Rated Control Spring Charge Motor Close or Voltage Range
Voltage Inrush Amperes Run Amperes Time Seconds Trip Amperes Close Trip
18
48 Vdc 36.0 9.0 6 16 3856 2856
125 Vdc 16.0 4.0 6 7 100140 70140 19
250 Vdc 9.2 2.0 6 4 200280 140180
120 Vac 16.0 4.0 6 6 104127 104127
240 Vac 9.2 2.0 6 3 208254 208254
20
21

7.1-4
Sheet 07 006
LayoutDimensions
i Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent one control transformer for AC breaker only. Top or bottom must be selected
the most common arrangements. control can be mounted in the struc- for incoming and for outgoing cables.
ii Layouts shown are for rear-accessible tures shown. For control power above Please note that rear access is required
equipment. Front-accessible designs 1 kVA, additional space is required. for installation.
are availablerefer to Eaton. See Tab 8 Depth of units will vary due to cable
1 for detailed layout information on load entrance and exit requirements, Cable sizing is based on two 500 kcmil
interrupter switchgear. Many other the addition of lightning arresters, XLP or EPR insulated cables per phase
configurations and combinations are instrument transformers, special cable using preformed slip-on cable termina-
2 available. Two voltage transformers terminators, and so on. Cables are tion devices. For unit substation align-
(fixed or drawout) for metering or shown out top and bottom for layout ment details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
3
80.00 70.00 70.00
(2032.0) (1778.0) (1778.0)
4
Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor
PR 95.50 PR
5 95.50
(2425.7)
95.50
(2425.7)
PR
(2425.7)
Indoor Indoor Indoor

52 52
6 90.38 90.38 52 90.38
(2295.6)
(2295.6) (2295.6)
Outdoor
7 41.00 (1041.4)
36.00 Indoor 36.00 20.00
(914.4) 36.00 (914.4) (914.4) (508.0)
8 Arrangement 1
Single Unit, Cable In and Out
Arrangement 2
Primary for Dry-Type Transformer
Arrangement 3
Primary for Liquid-Filled Transformer
9 70.00 70.00
(1778.0) (1778.0)
10 Outdoor Outdoor
95.50 PR 95.50 PR PR
(2425.7) (2425.7) ATC
11
Indoor Indoor
90.38 52 90.38 52 52
(2295.6) (2295.6)
12
13 36.00 48.00 36.00 15.00 36.00 36.00 36.00

(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
15.00
(381.0)
36.00
(914.4)
(914.4 1219.2) (914.4) (381.0) (914.4) (914.4)
Arrangement 4 Arrangement 5
14 Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional) Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load
70.00
15 (1778.0)
Outdoor
16 95.50 PR PR
(2425.7) 52
17 Indoor
90.38 52 52
(2295.6)
18
36.00 36.00 36.00 15.00 36.00 36.00
19 (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (381.0) (914.4)
Arrangement 6
(914.4)
Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main Feeders
20 Figure 7.1-2. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eaton EDR-3000 or EDR-5000.
21 Note: ATCAutomatic Transfer Controller.
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

7.1-5
Sheet 07 007
LayoutDimensions
Roof for Outdoor Unit Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit i
16.00 (406.4)
Customer's Cable
Optional
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
ii
Support (Locate at Rear Door 1.25 (31.8)
Installation) 1.50 (38.1)
95.46 8.00 (203.2) A&B 1
(2424.7)
Outdoor
Height
CT
70.00
(1778.0)
2
90.37
(2295.4)
VCPW
3
Indoor
Height Lug Roof Layout
36.00 (914.4)
4
Line or Bus
16.00 (406.4) 5
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
(Fixed) Optional
Rear Door 1.25 (31.8)
VT
6.60 (167.6) 6
8.00 (203.2) A&B
70.00
(1778.0)
70.00
(1778.0)
7
Figure 7.1-3. 5 and 15 kV MEB with Main Bus, Main Breaker and 8
Fixed Line or Bus VTs
Floor Layout
1 Depth shown is based on the use of (2)-500 kcmil cables per phase. 36.00 (914.4)
For stand-alone cable in and cable out in the same section, minimum 9
80.00-inch (2032.0 mm) depth is required.
Note: Drawout VTs are not available in MEB switchgear. Use Type Figure 7.1-4. 5 and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
VCP-W or MEF designs. 2 For cable in and cable out in same section, 80.00-inch (2032.0 mm)
depth is required.
10
Table 7.1-5. Approximate Weights in Lb (kg) Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.
5 or 15 kV Class Indoor Outdoor 11
MEB section 1600 (726) 1900 (863)
MVS section (non-fused) 1500 (681) 1800 (817)
Fuses (three) add 200 (91) 200 (91) 12
Transition section 300 (136)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.1-6
Sheet 07 008
LayoutDimensions
a Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5 mm) diameter holes.

i Four places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring
should be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5, (M12 x 1.75 min.
CL 10.9), and tightened to 75 ft-lb (101.7 Nm).
ii
6 7
b Door swing equals unit width at 90.
2
5.00
c The standard minimum clearances on side. 24.00 inches
1 (127.0)
Typ. Optional (609.6 mm) may need to be added for passage from front
Rear Door to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a
4.25 larger distance.
2 (108.0)
1.25
(31.8) d Clearance required for additional door swing to insert or
2.95 remove breaker, and for metering/relays on front of door.
(74.9)
3 3 Left hand side only. The authority having jurisdiction
6.00 may require a larger distance.
(152.4)
4 Min. e Minimum distance in front is 72.00 inches (1828.8 mm)
for breaker insertion and removal. The authority having
3 1
6.00
jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
5 (152.4)
Min. f The standard minimum recommended distance is
1.25 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear
(31.8)
access for installation and maintenance. The authority
6 4.25
(108.0) having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
FRONT DOOR
4 g If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is the
7 18.00
(457.2) 5
width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch
Min.
2
Min.
(25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require
a larger distance.
8
h Finished foundations surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-
9 right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a
laser level.
Figure 7.1-5. Typical Anchor Plan for MEB, Indoor or Outdoor
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.2-1
October 2015 Switch and Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB)
Sheet 07 009
General Description
MSB Metal-Enclosed Switch With the vacuum circuit breaker, Visible disconnect means is ensured
i
Type MSB switchgear is classified as by the load break air interrupter switch
and Vacuum Breaker an overcurrent protective device that and viewing window. Both indoor and
provides increased system protection outdoor non-walk-in enclosures are
General Description and increased coordination with available. Applications are single units, ii
Eatons assembly designated MSB upstream and downstream devices lineups and transformer primary appli-
(metal-enclosed switch and breaker) where these benefits cannot be cations. Configurations with an auto-
consists of a load interrupter switch achieved with a switch and fuse matic transfer control system 1
(Type MVS) in series with a vacuum combination. Vacuum circuit breakers can be easily accommodated. Fixed
circuit breaker (Type VCP-TR for provide the following features: vacuum breakers are ideal for high
515 kV) in a metal-enclosed cabinet. duty cycle, as well as applications 2
High interrupting capacity suitable
This combination has been designed requiring rapid return to service after
for use with ground fault equipment a load fault.
primarily where a vacuum circuit
breaker is required for its higher
and differential relay schemes 3
Load Break Switch providing Type MSB switchgear is the product
interrupting capacity and a switch is of choice for ground fault interruption
visible means of disconnect
required to provide a visible means
of disconnect. As primary protection
without opening the door when air interrupters alone would be 4
High duty cycle potentially hazardous if called on to
for single-ended substations, it can operate above their assigned ratings.
eliminate the need for a secondary Adjustable overcurrent protection
main circuit breaker. It can also be
Capacitor switching is easily handled 5
Expanded protective relay functions, by MSB avoiding the restrike hazard
applied as the primary main device such as those provided in the presented by air switches.
and integrated with fused or unfused EDR-5000 (refer to Tab 4) 6
feeder switches in a lineup of MVS Three-phase tripping; no single Standardized designs cover most
switchgear. Two and three breaker phasing on tripping common applications while custom
automatic transfer schemes are designs are also available for unusual
also available.
Maintainable requirements.
7
Long equipment life
For drawout vacuum circuit breaker Special applications, such as Type MSB vacuum switchgear
metal-enclosed switchgear, Type MEB, capacitor switching, are possible meets or exceeds the following 8
see Page 7.1-1. with breakers industry standards:
For drawout vacuum circuit Eaton Type MSB switchgear ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3 9
breaker metal-clad switchgear, provides a small footprint using ANSI/IEEE C37.20.4
Type VacClad-W, see Tab 5. vacuum breaker technology where the ANSI C37.22
For drawout vacuum circuit breaker breaker rating does not exceed 1200A ANSI C37.57
10
metal-enclosed front access only, continuous and the interrupting ratings ANSI C37.58
Type MEF switchgear, see Tab 6. shown. All protective devices and
metering are conveniently mounted NEMA SG5 11
on the switchgear structure door. NEMA SG6
CSA 22.2 No. 31
The VCP-TR vacuum breaker is a fully
EEMAC G8-3.3
12
rated two-step stored energy circuit
breaker with an open-close-open CSA listable for Canada and
duty cycle. It is rated for 25 or 40 kA U.S. markets 13
interrupting ratings at all voltages
Refer to MVS Tab 8. MVS switch
from 4.76 to 15 kV and has a front
sections are easily mixed with MSB
access mechanism. Type VCP-TR
sections in lineups. No bus transitions
14
circuit breakers can be supplied with
are required between them except
integral trip unit for phase and ground
where bus runs from top to bottom
overcurrent protection.
locations, such as between main and
15
The vacuum circuit breakers have feeder sections.
been designed with a flex current 16
transfer system that provides a unique
non-sliding current transfer arrange-
ment, no maintenance, excellent 17
electrical and thermal transfer, and
long vacuum interrupter life.
18
19
20
21

7.2-2
Switch and Fixed Mounted Vacuum Breakers (MSB) October 2015
Sheet 07 010
General Description
Seismic Qualification
i
ii
1 Refer to Tab 1 for information on

seismic qualification for this and
2
8
5/15 kV MSB Assembly
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.2-3
Sheet 07 011
General DescriptionTechnical Data
Construction Overcurrent Protection

Eatons Type MSB switchgear uses the
i
same proven enclosure and air switch
mechanism as MVS switchgear. It ii
differs in the addition of the fixed-
mounted Eaton VCP-TR (515 kV)
vacuum breaker in place of fuses. 1
Current and voltage transformers
associated with protection devices
such as the EDR-3000 or EDR-5000 2
electronic protective relays are applied
using the same ratings as drawout
metal-clad switchgear. Integral over- 3
current protective devices with the
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance EDR-3000 Overcurrent Protective Relay
System mode switch, such as 4
DT 520MCV and DT-1150V, are also
available. Devices are mounted on the
single front-hinged door. The front door 5
may be opened at any time to provide
access to low voltage components and
the front of the circuit breaker without 6
being exposed to high voltage.
Eatons IQ family of electronic meters
is normally used when metering
7
functions are required.
The circuit breaker is bolted into 8
position, but can be unbolted and
EDR-5000 Multifunction Protective Relay
removed from the enclosure. Routine MSB with Control Switches,
maintenance can be performed on Digitrip 3000 Overcurrent Relay 9
the circuit breaker mechanism in with Optional Metering Shown
the enclosure.
10
Standard switch insulators are NEMA
rated glass polyester or optional
epoxy. Control power will be required 11
as detailed below. The AC can be
supplied integrally if specified. The
DC control power, if required, must 12
be furnished by others.
If AC control power is used, a capacitor
trip device is provided.
13
Once the circuit breaker is closed and
the closing spring is recharged, the 14
breaker can open, close and open
without spring recharge.
Digitrip 1150V 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Digitrip 520MCV

7.2-4
Sheet 07 012
Technical Data
Overcurrent Protection Table 7.2-1. Integral Protective Relays 1

i Eatons MSB breaker can be furnished with an Eaton Type Relay Type Protective Relay Metering
IEEE Functions
EDR-3000 or EDR-5000 relay to provide overcurrent and fault
ii protection. Optional zero sequence 50/51G ground fault
protection is shown below. Refer to Tab 4 for more details.
DT 520MCV 50, 50T, 51, 50G, 51G Amperes
DT-1150V 50, 50T, 51, 51G, 50G, 37, 46, Amperes, voltage, VA,
27, 59, 32, 47, 74, 81U, 81-0 VAR, Watt, Wh, VAh, THD
1 1 See Tab 6, Pages 6.0-10, 6.0-11 and 6.0-12 for details.
MVS Load
Break EDR-3000 or Table 7.2-2. Protective Relays 2
2 Switch
3-CTs
EDR-5000 1 Relay Type Protective Relay Metering
50/51 IEEE Functions
50N/51N
3 Vacuum
Breaker 52
EDR-3000 50/51; 50/51G Amperes and
ampere demand
EDR-5000 25, 27, 32, 46, 47, 50N/G, Amps; volts; pf,
51N/G, 50/51, 50BF, 51VR, energy, power; THD;
4 59, 67N, 67 waveform
2 See Tab 4 available relays selection and application details.
5 1-Zero Sequence CT Assembly Ratings
Table 7.2-3. MSB Switchgear Assembly Ratings
6 Figure 7.2-1. Typical MSB Single-Section One-Line Diagram Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Short-TIme
1 Use of EDR-5000 requires VTs. Maximum BIL Main Bus Momentary (2 Seconds)
Volts kV kV Current Current kA rms Current kA
7 Amperes Asymmetrical Symmetrical
4.76 60 600, 1200, 2000 40 25

4.76 60 600, 1200, 2000 64 40
8 MVS 15 95 600, 1200 40 25
Switch 15 95 600, 1200 64 40
9 Phase Current
Sensors Integral Trip Unit
DT 520MCV Primary Source Required if Using
10 VCP-TR or -TRL
52
EDR-5000
Circuit Breaker TA
RP VTs 2 L-L or 3 L-G
MVS
11 EM
(if TRL
TA = Trip Actuator
EM = Electromagnetic
Switch R = Relay
DT-3010 or EDR-5000
bkr) Linear Actuator CTs R
Optional Ground RP = Rating Plug
12 Current Sensor
ST
Integral Trip Unit
DT 520MCV
VCP-TR or -TRL
TA
Circuit Breaker 52 RP
13 Figure 7.2-2. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT 520MCV TA = Trip Actuator
3 EM EM = Electromagnetic
(if TRL Linear Actuator
Substation bkr)
14 Transformer
RP = Rating Plug
ST = Shunt Trip Coil
VYs Max Length = 50 Feet
Current
15 MVS
2 L-L or 3 L-G Sensors
Switch
LV Switchgear Main Bus
16 Phase Current
Integral Trip Unit
Sensors Figure 7.2-4. Transformer Primary Breaker with Secondary Bus
DT 1150V
Overcurrent Protection
17 VCP-TR or -TRL
Circuit Breaker 52 TA 3 Surge protection device, such as RC snubber, EHZ or Protec Z is highly
RP recommended for transformer protection. Refer to Tab 5, Page 5.4-17 to
Page 5.4-20 for Eatons recommendations for surge protection.
EM TA = Trip Actuator
18 (if TRL EM = Electromagnetic
bkr) Linear Actuator
Optional Ground RP = Rating Plug
19 Current Sensor
20 Figure 7.2-3. Typical MSB One-Line Diagram with DT-1150V
21

7.2-5
Sheet 07 013
Technical Data
Circuit Breaker Ratings

Type MSB assemblies can be supplied with Type VCP-TR or identical to VCP-TR and VCP-TRL breakers except they
i
VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) or with Type VCP-TRL or are rated for additional capacitor switching capability as
VCP-TRLC (electromagnetic linear actuator operator) circuit indicated in Table 7.2-5. ii
breakers. Type VCP-TRC and VCP-TRLC circuit breakers are
Table 7.2-4. Available Type VCP-TR and VCP-TRL Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated per ANSI Standards
Circuit Rated Insulation Level Rated Rated Rated Maximum Closing Cable Three-Phase Mechanical Endurance
1
Breaker Maximum Power Impulse Continuous Short- Voltage Symmetrical and Charging MVA No Load C-O Operations
Type 12 Voltage Frequency Withstand Current Circuit Range Interrupting Latching Breaking at Rated
Withstand Voltage Current Factor & 2-Second Capability Current Maximum 2
Voltage (BIL) at Rated Short-Time (Momentary) Voltage
60 Hz, 1.2 x 50 Maximum Current (for
1 Minute microsec Voltage Carrying
Capability
Reference
Only)
3
V I K K*I 2.6 * K * I 1.732
*V*I
4
kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms kA rms sym kA Crest Amperes MVA Vacuum Mechanism
sym Interrupter
50VCP-TR25 4.76 19 60 600, 1200 25 1 25 65 25 210 30,000 10,000 5

50VCP-TRL25 4.76 19 60 600, 1200 25 1 25 65 25 210 30,000 100,000
50VCP-TR40 4.76 19 60 600, 1200 40 1 40 104 25 330 30,000 10,000
150VCP-TR25 15 36 95 600, 1200 25 1 25 65 25 650 30,000 10,000 6
150VCP-TRL25 15 36 95 600, 1200 25 1 25 65 25 650 30,000 100,000
150VCP-TR40 15 36 95 600, 1200 40 1 40 104 25 1040 30,000 10,000
1 Rated interrupting time for all VCP-T circuit breakers is 3 cycle (50 ms). 7
2 Operating duty for all VCP-T circuit breakers is O-0.3sec-CO-3min-CO.
Table 7.2-5. Available Type VCP-TRC Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated Breaker Control Ratings 8
per ANSI Standards (Definite Purpose, Tested for Capacitor Switching)
Type VCP-TRC (stored energy operator) circuit breakers have same Table 7.2-6. Breaker Stored Energy Mechanism Control Power
Requirements
ratings as Type VCP-TR breakers, plus additional capacitor switching
capabilities as follows. Rated Spring Charge Motor Close or Trip Voltage Range
9
Control 3 Amperes
Circuit Cable Grounded Capacitor Banks
Voltage
Breaker Type Charging Single Bank Back-to-Back
Run
Amperes
Time
Seconds
Close Trip 10
VCP-TRC 25 A 250 and 1000 A 250 A with inrush current
48 Vdc 4.0 5 5.2 3856 2856
(40 kA ratings) of 4 kA peak at 5.9 kHz and
1000A with inrush current
125 Vdc 3.0 5 3.6 100140 70140 11
250 Vdc 2.0 5 1.8 200280 140180
of 15 kA peak at 25 kHz
120 Vac 3.0 5 3.6 104127 104127
240 Vac 2.0 5 1.8 208254 208254 12
3 Inrush current is 4 times running amperes.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.2-6
Sheet 07 014
LayoutDimensions
i Typical Arrangements5 kV and 15 kV

The sketches in this section represent Depth of units will vary due to cable Cables are shown out top and bottom
the most common switch arrange- entrance and exit requirements, for layout only. Top or bottom must be
ii ments. Many other configurations and the addition of lightning arresters, selected for incoming and for outgoing
combinations are available. Layouts instrument transformers, special cables. Cable sizing is based on two
shown are for rear-accessible equip- cable terminators, and so on. 500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables
1 ment. Front-accessible designs are per phase using preformed slip-on
availablerefer to Eaton. cable termination devices. Rear access
is required for installation. For unit
2 substation alignment details, see
Tabs 13 and 14.
3
70.00 62.00
62.00 (1574.8)
(1778.0) (1574.8)
4
Outdoor Outdoor
Outdoor 95.50
95.50
5 (2425.7)
95.50
(2425.7)
(2425.7)
PR
Indoor PR PR Indoor
Indoor 90.38
90.38 90.38
(2295.7) (2295.7) 52
6 52 (2295.7) 52 Outdoor
41.00
(1041.4)
Indoor
7 36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
20.00
(508.0)
Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2 Arrangement 3
Single Unit, Primary for Dry-Type Primary for Liquid Filled
8 Cable In and Out Transformer Transformer
9 62.00
(1574.8)
62.00
(1574.8)
10 Outdoor Outdoor
95.50 95.50
(2425.7) (2425.7)
Indoor PR PR PR
11 Indoor
90.38
PR PR
90.38
(2295.7)
(2295.7) 52 52 52
52 52
12
36.00 - 48.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 - 48.00 36.00 36.00 36.00
(914.4 - 1219.2) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4 - 1219.2) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4)
13 15.00
(381.0)
Main Device with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional) 1 Main Lugs with Feeders; Metering Section (Optional) 1
14
62.00 62.00
(1574.8) (1574.8)
15
Outdoor Outdoor
16 95.50
(2425.7)
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor PR PR Indoor PR PR
90.38 ATC 90.38
17 (2295.7)
52 52
(2295.7)
52 52 52
ATC
18 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00

(914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) 15.00 (914.4) 15.00 (914.4) (914.4) 15.00 (914.4)
15.00
(381.0) (381.0) (381.0) (381.0)
19 Arrangement 7 Arrangement 8
Two Breaker Auto TransferSingle Load Three Breaker Auto TransferMain-Tie-Main with Feeders
20 Figure 7.2-5. Layouts and Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1 Width of metering compartment may vary depending on utility requirements.
Note: PROvercurrent protective relay, typical functions50/51, 50/51N or 50/51G. Eatons EDR-3000 or EDR-5000.
21
Dimensions in inches (mm). Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

7.2-7
Sheet 07 015
LayoutDimensions
Roof for
Rear Access Top or Bottom Entry and Exit i
16.00 (406.4)
Outdoor Unit
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
Optional
1.25 (31.8)
ii
Rear Door
1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2) A&B
1
D
Roof Layout 2
95.46 VT
(2424.7) Switch
Outdoor
Height CT 3
36.00 (914.4)
90.37
(2295.3) 4
Indoor 16.00 (406.4)
Height 10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
Vacuum
Breaker
Optional
Rear Door 1.25 (31.8) 5
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2) A&B
6
Floor Layout D
7
62.00
(1574.8)
36.00 (914.4) 8
Figure 7.2-6. 5, 15 kV MSB with Main Bus Figure 7.2-8. 5 kV and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
1 Minimum depth 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required. 3 Cable location B not available with main bus.
9
Note: A = Power cable to load, B = Power cable from source.
Note: For D dimension, refer to Page 7.1-4.
VT cannot be located 10
here when using
Roof for
40 kA breaker
Outdoor Unit
11
VT
12
13
95.46
(2424.7) Switch
Outdoor
Height
CT 14
90.37
(2295.3)
15
Vacuum
Indoor Breaker
Height
16
17
18
Figure 7.2-7. 5, 15 kV MSB without Main Bus
2 Minimum depth 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) if two sets of CTs are required. 19
20
Dimensions in inches (mm). 21

Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

7.2-8
Sheet 07 016
LayoutDimensions
a Locations for tie-down 0.65 inches

i (16.5 mm) diameter holes for
four places. Customer provided
bolts for anchoring should be
ii 0.5013 min. (M12 x 1.75 min.
5 7 CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lb
5.00
2 (101.7 Nm).
1 (127.0)
6
Typ. Optional b Door swing equals unit width
Rear Door at 90.
2 4.25
(108.0) c The standard minimum clearances
1.25
(31.8) on side. 24.00 inches (609.6 mm)
2.95 may need to be added for passage
3 (74.9)
from front to rear. The authority
3 3
6.00 6.00 having jurisdiction may require a
(152.4) (152.4) larger distance.
4 Min. Min.
d Minimum clearance in front is the

1 width of the widest vertical section
5 plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The
authority having jurisdiction may
1.25
(31.8) require a larger distance.
6 4.25
(108.0) e The standard minimum
FRONT DOOR recommended distance is
7 30.00 inches (762.0 mm) for
4 assemblies requiring rear access
2
Min. for installation and maintenance.
8 The authority having jurisdiction
may require a larger distance.
f For MVS only. If the application is
9 specifically provided by contract as
Figure 7.2-9. Typical Anchor Plan for MSB, Indoor or Outdoor not requiring rear access as stated
in 5, then the minimum
10 recommended distance is
Table 7.2-7. Approximate Weights in Lb (kg)
6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
5 or 15 kV Class Indoor Outdoor
11 MSB section 1700 (773) 2000 (909)
g If optional rear door is supplied,
MVS section (non-fused) 1500 (681) 1800 (817) the minimum is the width of the
Fuses (three) add 200 (91) 200 (91) widest vertical section plus
12 Transition section 300 (136) 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
13
h Finished foundations surface
shall be level within 0.06-inch
14 (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches
(914.4 mm) left-to-right, front-to-
back and diagonally, as measured
15 by a laser level.
16
17
18
19
20
21 Dimensions in inches (mm).


7.3-1
Sheet 07 017
Application Examples
Application Examples i
Low Resistance Ground Schemes
Medium voltage low resistance ii
ground schemes are typically used for 52-1
medium voltage 5 kV class systems
feeding 5 kV class motor loads. The 1
resistor affords both full selectivity in
tripping on ground faults, while limit-
ing ground fault magnitudes to low
Unprotected
2
values (typically 50400 A). Reducing Zone for
the current levels to a faulted motor Ground
greatly reduces the damage to the R Fault R 3
motor and subsequent rewind and Protection
repair costs. 251G 151G 251G

4
System tripping during a ground fault 52-2 52-2
on the line side of the secondary main
breaker must be cleared by sending a 5
trip signal to the transformer primary
side protective device. Fusible switches Complete Secondary Ground Incomplete Ground Fault Protection
Fault Protection Using WVB
on the primary side of the step-down for Primary Device
Using Fusible Switch Primary
DeviceNOT RECOMMENDED 6
transformer (typically rated 515 kV)
may not be used for this purpose. Any Figure 7.3-1. Low Resistance Ground Scheme (Phase and Primary Ground Fault Protection not Shown)
ground fault sensed may escalate as 7
the switch is being signaled to trip
thereby exceeding its typical 600 A DT 520MCV
50/51
maximum current breaking capacity. 50N/51N
DT 1150V
EDR-3000 8
or EDR-5000 1
Eatons MEB and MSB breaker, being a
fully rated interrupting device, may be
tripped regardless of fault level up to
9
its interrupting rating (for example,
28 kA). Only this type of overcurrent
device or a metal-clad switchgear
52
10
drawout breaker may be safely used.
Single-Ended Substation Designs 11

In this configuration, the MEB or MSB EDR-3000 50/51
serves as both primary and secondary or EDR-5000 1 50N/51N 12
protection for the transformer. Savings
in both floor space and cost result, due Figure 7.3-2. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MEB)
to elimination of the secondary main
1 Use of DT-1150V or EDR-5000 requires VTs.
13
device. This scheme is only recom-
mended where cost and space prevent
the use of secondary main device. 14
Note: Two sets of current transformers are
used to protect against secondary ground
faults, overloads and short circuits, as well
15
as primary winding faults.
16
17
50/51 50/51
52
50N/51N 50N/51N
EDR-3000 DT-520MCV
18
or EDR-5000 2
19
20
Figure 7.3-3. Single-Ended Unit Substations Using Primary Breaker Protection (MSB)
21
2 Use of DT-1150V or EDR-5000 requires VTs.

7.3-2
Vacuum Breakers October 2015
Sheet 07 018
Optional Accessories (MEB and MSB)
Surge Arresters
i IEEE Standard C62.11 for metal-oxide where solar radiation may produce
surge arresters lists the maximum a significant contribution to the
ii rated ambient temperature as 40 C.
The ambient temperature inside an
temperature. Table 7.3-1 lists the
recommended minimum duty cycle
MEB and MSB switchgear vertical voltage rating for various system
1 section may exceed this temperature, grounding methods based on switch-
especially in outdoor applications gear temperatures not exceeding 55 C.
2 Table 7.3-1. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Voltage Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or
3 Line-to-Line
kV
Grounded System Grounded System Ungrounded System Grounded System Grounded System Ungrounded System
Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV
4 2.30 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55
2.40 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10
3.30 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10 3 2.55 3 2.55 6 5.10
5 4.00 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10
4.16 6 5.10 6 5.10 6 5.10 6 5.10 6 5.10 6 5.10
4.76 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6 4.80 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.60 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.90 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 9 7.65 9 7.65
7 7.20 6 5.10 6 5.10 10 8.40 6 5.10 9 7.65 10 8.40
8.32 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20
8.40 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20
8 11.00 9 7.65 9 7.65 15 12.70 9 7.65 10 8.40 15 12.70
11.50 9 7.65 10 8.40 18 15.30 9 7.65 12 10.20 18 15.30
12.00 10 8.40 10 8.40 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30
9 12.47 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.20 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.80 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 15 12.70 18 15.30
10 14.40 12 10.20 12 10.20 21 17.00 12 10.20 15 12.70 21 17.00
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

7.3-3
Sheet 07 019
MEB and MSB Switchgear ATC Controller Typical Three-Breaker

i
Eatons ATC-900 controller is equipped (Two Mains and Normally Open Tie)
with Automatic Transfer Control to display history information either Automatic Transfer Control
via the front panel or over the The automatic transfer switchgear
Application PowerNet power monitoring system. assembly includes two main breakers
ii
Eatons MEB and MSB switchgear with ATC-900 controller stores 320 time and one tie breaker, and an integrated
an automatic transfer control system stamped events. Oscillographic data automatic transfer control system
is an integrated assembly of drawout for last 10 events can be downloaded containing sensing devices, low
1
VCP-W breakers, sensing devices via USB port or displayed in the voltage logic control and auxiliary
and control components. Available controllers display window. Control- equipment. The transfer control
in 515 kV classes. ler allows communications via RS-232 system monitors both sources for
2
or Modbus through RS-458 port, correct voltages. An automatic-manual
It is typically applied where the Ethernet or via USB interface. transfer selector switch is provided
continuity of service for critical loads for selection of manual or automatic
3
from two power sources in either operating mode. In manual mode,
a two-breaker (one load) or three- all three breakers can be manually
breaker (two loads) configuration operated. Interlocking is provided in
4
is desired. manual mode of operation to prevent
MEB and MSB switchgear with an closing all three breakers at the same 5
automatic transfer control system time. In the automatic mode, the basic
can meet most automatic throwover sequence of operation based upon two
requirements as it has a wide variety normally energized sources is carried 6
of operational sequences embodied out as follows. Normal operation is
in one standard automatic transfer with the main breakers closed and the
control system. tie breaker open. Upon detection of 7
an undervoltage(s) to the line side
Typical Two-Breaker Automatic Transfer of a main breaker, and after a field-
Using ATC Controller adjustable time delay, that main 8
Eatons ATC-900 controller continuously ATC Controller breaker opens and after an additional
monitors all three phases on both field-adjustable time delay, the tie
Standard Features
sources for correct voltages. Should the
breaker closes to restore power to the 9
voltage of the normal source be lost affected portion of the facility. Upon
while the voltage of the alternate source provided by the ATC controller restoration of voltage to the line side
remains normal, the voltage sensing Lights to indicate status of switches, of the main breaker, and after a field- 10
function in the ATC controller will sources, and so forth adjustable time delay, the tie breaker
change state starting the time delay Interlocking to prevent paralleling of opens and after a field-adjustable time
function. If the voltage of the normal sources via software delay, the opened main breaker closes. 11
source is not restored by the end of the Interlocking is provided to prevent
Control power for the automatic
time delay interval, the normal breaker closing all three breakers simultane-
transfer control system is derived
will open and the alternate source from the sensing voltage transformers
ously in manual mode. 12
breaker will close, restoring power to
Manual override operation
the load.
Selectable closed with sync check or 13
Programmable time delays on both
sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY 14
Four programmable digital inputs
and outputs
Single-source responsibility; all 15
basic components are manufac-
tured by Eaton
16
Optional Features
Lockout on phase and/or ground
overcurrents and/or internal bus faults 17
Load current, power and PF
metering with optional DCT module 18
24 Vdc control power input
Up to four additional I/O modules
each with four programmable digital 19
20
21

7.3-4
Vacuum Breakers October 2015
Sheet 07 020
i Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring (RFCT) sensor over floating stress
Eatons Type MEB and MSB metal- shields of the specially designed bus
Sensing and Monitoring enclosed switchgear (2.415 kV) is or line side primary bushings. Partial
ii for Switchgear corona-free by design. By making discharge in the customers power

switchgear assemblies corona-free, cables (external discharges) are
Eaton has made its standard switch- detected by the installation of the RFCT
gear more reliable. However, as around ground shields of the incoming
1 indicated above, with time, airborne or outgoing power cables termination.
particles, contaminants and humidity Partial discharges within the MSB
lead to conditions that cause partial
2 discharges to develop in switchgear
switchgear compartment are detected
by installation of coupling capacitor
operating at voltages 4000V and type sensor connected to the main
above. Type MEB and MSB switchgear
3 can be equipped with factory-installed
bus or on the load side of the feeder
breakers. Partial discharges in the
partial discharge sensors and partial customers power cables (external
Coupling Capacitor RFCT Sensor
discharge sensing relay for continuous
4 Type PD Sensor
monitoring of the partial discharges
discharges) are detected by the
installation of the RFCT around ground
under normal operation. Timely shields of the incoming or outgoing
detection of insulation degradation
5 through increasing partial discharges
power cables termination.
can identify potential problems so Output signals from sensors (coupling
that corrective actions can be capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to
6 planned and implemented long terminal blocks for future or field use,
before permanent deterioration or connected to the InsulGard relay.
develops. Partial discharge detection One InsulGard relay can monitor up
7 can be the foundation of an effective to 15 output signals, and temperature
predictive maintenance program. and humidity. The temperature and
8 Trending of partial discharge data humidity sensors are included with
InsulGard Relay over time allows prediction of failures, each InsulGard relay system. The
(PD Monitoring)
which can be corrected before relay continuously monitors the
9 catastrophic failure occurs. switchgear primary system for partial
Partial Discharge in Switchgear
discharges and provides an alarm
Partial discharge (PD) is a common The PD sensing and monitoring signal (contact closure) when high
name for various forms of electrical system consists of Eatons InsulGard PD level is detected. Data analysis
10 discharges such as corona, surface relay and PD sensors specifically and diagnostics performed by Eaton
tracking and discharges internal to developed for application in the engineers can also be provided by
the insulation. It partially bridges the switchgear to work with the relay. remote communication with the
11 insulation between the conductors. InsulGard relay.
These high-frequency discharges are Partial discharges within the MEB
essentially small arcs occurring in or switchgear compartment are detected The sensors and InsulGard relay are
12 on the surface of the insulation system by the installation of a small donut type optional in MEB and MSB switchgear.
when voltage stress exceeds a critical radio frequency current transformer
value. With time, airborne particles,
13 contaminants and humidity lead
to conditions that result in partial
discharges. Partial discharges start Input
14 at a low level and increase as more Temp Sensor Terminal InsulGard
Optional
Block Relay
insulation becomes deteriorated. Humidity Sensor Modem
15 switchgear are surface tracking across
bus insulation, or discharges in the
air gap between the bus and a support,
16 such as where a bus passes through
an insulating window between the
120 Vac
sections of the switchgear. If partial
17 discharge process is not detected and Signals (up to 15 Total) from
Auxiliary
Output
Power
corrected, it can develop into a full- PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors, Alarm
scale insulation failure followed by an RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.) Status
18 electrical fault. Most switchgear flash-
over and bus failures are a result of Figure 7.3-4. InsulGard Relay System
insulation degradation caused by
19 various forms of partial discharges.
20
21

7.3-5
Sheet 07 021

i
ii

compartment.
compartment.
8
RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up RFCT #2 detects partial discharges in customers cables up
to 100 ft from switchgear. to 100 ft from switchgear. 9
Figure 7.3-5. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in Figure 7.3-6. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in MSB
MEB Switchgear (515 kV) Switchgear (515 kV) 10
Note: Use one set of epoxy bottles with ground stress shield on bus Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical
side (either in the top or bottom compartment) at every two vertical sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/
sections. Use standard bottles at all other locations. outgoing cable circuit.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage 8.0-1
October 2015 Load Interrupter Fusible Switch
Sheet 08 001
MVS Medium Voltage Load

Interrupter Fusible Switch
Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Contents
i
MVS Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Fusible Switch ii
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-2
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-2
Duplex Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-5
1
Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-5
Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-6 2
Motor Operated MVS Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-7
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-7 3
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-9
MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-11 4
MVS Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-12
Method to Determine the Minimum Recommended Fuse Size
for Fuse Applied on Primary Side of a Power Transformer . . . . . . . . . 8.0-13 5
MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-18
Mini-MVS Layout Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-28 6
MVS-ND Medium Voltage Load Interrupter Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-29
Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter 7
Switchgear5 and 15 kV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0-39
Specifications
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Sections 16361A, Sections 26 13 16.11, 9
16361B 26 13 16.13
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MVS Load Interrupter Switchgear
21

8.0-2 Metal-Enclosed SwitchgearMVS Medium Voltage
Load Interrupter Fusible Switch October 2015
Sheet 08 002
General Description
i MVS Load Interrupter Standards and Certifications

Switchgear Eatons MVS load interrupter
switchgear meets or exceeds the
ii General Description requirements of the following
industry standards:
Eatons MVS Load Interrupter
Switchgear is an integrated assembly IEEE Standard C37.20.3
1 of switches, bus and fuses that are ANSI C37.57
coordinated electrically and mechanically NEMA SG5
for medium voltage circuit protection.
2 All major components are manufac-
Canadian Standard CAN/
CSA C22.2 No. 31
tured by Eaton, establishing one source
of responsibility for the equipments Type MVS switches meet or exceed
3 performance and ensuring high the requirements of the following
standards in quality, coordination, industry standards:
reliability and service.
4 IEEE Standard C37.20.4
A complete line of Eaton switches and ANSI C37.58
fuses is available, as follows:
5 ANSI C37.22
5, 15, 27 and 38 kV voltage classes NEMA SG6
600 A continuous and load interrupt- Outdoor Duplex with Customer Metering Canadian Standards CAN/CSA C22.2
6 ing ratings, all voltage classes, No. 193 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 58
1200 A continuous and load inter- Application Description
rupting for 5 and 15 kV classes 5 and 15 kV MVS switchgear assem-
Eatons Load Interrupter Type MVS
7 350 A continuous and load metal-enclosed switchgear provides
blies are available as listed products
with Underwriters Laboratories and
interrupting ratings for 5 kV and safe, reliable switching and fault Canadian Standards Association for
15 kV classes for capacitive circuits protection for medium voltage circuits
8 Non-fused or fused with current rated from 2.438 kV. The MVS switch
most options.
limiting or boric acid-type fuses is ideal for applications where high Load interrupter switches should not
duty cycle operation is not needed. be used to interrupt load currents
9 Manual or motor operated
above their interrupting rating of 600
Indoor or outdoor non-walk-in MVS switchgear has the advantage of or 1200 A, as they are not designed
enclosures low initial cost inherent in switch designs nor tested for interrupting fault currents
10 Single switches and transformer while offering the characteristics most on electrical systems. Optional fuses
primary switches vital to safety and coordination. can be provided for phase overcurrent
Duplex loadbreak switch arrange- protection. For ground fault current
11 ments for selection of alternate
The MVS switchs quick-make, quick-
tripping, see MSB and MEB switchgear
break mechanism provides full-load
feeds current interrupting capability while Tab 7. Refer to Page 8.0-13, Table 8.0-6
12 Two-position, manual no-load fuses provide accurate, permanently for applicable fuse ratings.
selector switches for selection of calibrated short circuit detecting and
alternate feeds (5 and 15 kV only) interrupting capabilities. Visibility of Seismic Qualification
13 Lineups with main bus actual blade position improves safety
Standard arrangements with auto- by giving positive assurance of circuit
matic transfer control systems, two de-energization.
14 sources feeding one load or two
sources feeding two loads on a split
bus with tie switch
15 Refer to Tab 1 for information on
Standard design configurations for: seismic qualification for this and
NEMA pads for cable lugs
16
Surge arresters
Instrument transformers
17 Control power transformers
IQ electronic metering
Eatons PowerNet accessing
18 devices such as addressable relays
and PONI cards
19 Other auxiliary equipment
20
21

Sheet 08 003
General Description
Construction
i
ii
g 1
b a 2
c
h 3
f Switch with Hinged Screen Barrier Open
i High Quality Insulation

4
g g Bus and switch insulators, switch
h drive rod barriers between phases, 5
h
and barriers between outer phases
and the housing, are of high
strength, non-hygroscopic, track- 6
resistant glass polyester as standard.
Optional switch, fuse and main bus
epoxy insulation system is available. 7
d
i j Red-Green Switch
b Position Indicators
k Provisions for Padlocking
8
Switch Open or Closed
l Provisions for Door and 9
Switch Key Interlocks
m The Operating Handle
e It is conveniently located behind 10
Typical Switch with Front Door Open a small access door giving the
structure a smooth homogeneous
a Switch Mechanism b Provisions for Padlocking Door appearance and discourages casual 11
Quick-make, quick-break stored Handle not visible in the photo. contact by unauthorized personnel.
energy operation.
c Inspection Window n Switchgear Assembly 12
The opening and closing of the A large 8.00-inch x 16.00-inch Rating Nameplate
switch blades is done by the (203.2 x 406.4 mm) gasketed,
operating spring. An operators rectangular, high impact viewing 13
actions only charge and release window permits full view of the posi-
the operating spring. tion of all three switch blades through m
The switch blades cannot be teased
the closed door. 14
to any intermediate positions. d Full Height Main Door
l
During the closing operation, full The door has a return flange and two
clearance between blades and rotary latch-type handles to provide 15
stationary contacts is maintained latching members held in shear. It n
until the switch mechanism goes closes over a projecting frame.
over toggle.
16
e Foot-Operated Door Stop j
The switch mechanism has only f Grounded Metal Safety Barrier
metal-to-metal linkageno chains Prevents inadvertent contact with any
17
or cables are used. live part, yet allows full-view inspec- k
tion of the switch blade position.
Arc interruption takes place between 18
copper-tungsten tipped auxiliary g Door Interlock
(flicker) blade and arcing contacts Prevents the door of the enclosure
with a DE-ION arc chute; no arcing from being opened when the switch 19
takes place between the main blades is closed.
and the stationary contacts to l
prolong the life of the main blades. h Switch Interlock 20
Prevents inadvertent closure of the
Blow-out forces cannot be transmit- switch if the door of the enclosure
ted to the operating handle. Switch Operating Compartment Door Open
is open. 21

Sheet 08 004
General Description
Switch Mechanism As the main blades open, current is Bus Insulation System
i The quick-make, quick-break mecha-
transferred momentarily to the flicker All bus runs are supported using a high
blades, which are held in the arc chutes strength and high creep, finned support
nism uses a heavy-duty coil spring by high pressure contact fingers. There
that provides powerful opening and providing in excess of 12.00 inches
ii closing action. To close the switch,
is no arcing at the main blades. (304.8 mm) for 5/15 kV and 24.00 inches
the handle is inserted into the spring When the main blades reach a pre- (609.6 mm) for 27/38 kV, of creep
charging cam, then rotated upward distance between phases and ground.
1 through an angle of 120 degrees. This
determined angle of opening, a stop
The molded high track-resistant fins are
post on the main blades prevents further
action charges the operating spring, angular movement between the main constructed as standard of Aramid
nylon or optional Cycloaliphatic epoxy.
2 and as the mechanism is forced past
toggle, the stored energy of the spring
and flicker blades. This starts the flicker
blades out of the high pressure contacts Significantly superior bus bracing
is released and transferred to the main in the arc chutes and as contacts are than standoff type A20 insulators
3 shaft that snaps the switch closed. broken, the flicker blades are snapped
Significantly increased creep
into position by their torsion springs.
As a result of the over-toggle action, the distance phase-to-phase and
blades are moved independently of the The heat of the arc, meanwhile, phase-to-ground
4 operator. It is impossible to tease the releases a blast of de-ionizing gas Improved endurance from fault
switch into any intermediate position. from the gas-generating material of incidents
the arc chute. This combination of
5 To open the switch, the handle is quick-break and DE-ION action quickly
Minimizes bus system failures due
inserted into the spring charging to tracking
extinguishes the arc and the circuit is
cam and rotated downward through Eliminates additional ground
safely de-energized.
6 120 degrees resulting in charging of planes in the switchgear for bus
the operating spring, then releasing its A non-fused switch has the ability supporting systems
stored energy in similar sequence. to close and latch four times when
7 rated 40 kA fault close, and one time
Quick-Break DE-ION Arc Interruption when rated 61 kA fault close, and
With the switch closed, both main and continue to carry rated current thus
8 auxiliary (flicker) blades are closed, adding a large margin of integrity to
and all of the current flows through the the electrical system.
main blades. The flicker blades are in
9 the closed position in the arc chutes, The 5/15 kV switch designs have also
but are past the arcing contacts and demonstrated the ability to surpass
thus carry no current. the number of ANSI C37.22 required Bus Support
10 loadbreak current operations by no
less than 200%.
11
12
13
14
15
Main, Flicker Blades Main Blades Disengaged, Both Blades Disengaged
Engaged Flicker Blade Engaged
16
Figure 8.0-1. Switch Operation
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 005
General Description
Duplex Switch Configuration Two-Position, No-Load Selector Switch Loadbreak Switch with Grounding Jaw
Two MVS load interrupter switch Eatons MVS load interrupter switch The loadbreak switch can be supplied i
sections can be used to provide cost- can be used to provide the most cost- with optional grounding jaws for auto-
effective source selectivity with a effective source selectivity in a single matic grounding of the load circuit.
common load side bus feeding one compact structure with a two-position When the switch is opened, the switch ii
load, fused or nonfused. Key interlocks Type MVS non-loadbreak selector main blades engage grounding jaws to
are a standard feature provided to per- switch in series with the load break ground the load circuit. This feature
mit only one switch to be closed at one MVS switch. This selector switch is cannot be used in a duplex switch 1
time and prevent opening any switch mechanically interlocked such that configuration. The ground jaw option
door unless both switches are open. operation can be performed only when is available at 538 kV. It is meant for
the load interrupter switch is in the applying a static ground, and is not 2
open position. Also, neither the MVS rated for carrying fault currents.
switch nor the main door can be
closed without the selector switch 3
being positively locked in one of the
two feeder positions.
4
5
K1 K1
7
K1 K1 95.40
(2423.2)
Door Door 8
Figure 8.0-5. Typical Feeder Switch with 9

Optional Grounding Jaw (538 kV)
10
Grounding
Jaw Arrestor
36.00 36.00
(914.4) (914.4) 62.00
Bottom
11
(1574.8) entry/
exit
Figure 8.0-2. Typical Duplex Switch
Configuration with One K1 Key Figure 8.0-3. Typical Two-Position Selector Line
12
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Switch for Bottom Cable Entrance
Switch Top 13
entry/exit
90.37
Bottom
Non (2295.4)
Load
entry/exit
14
Break Fuse
Selector
Switch
Load
15
Mechanical Top
Interlock entry/
exit
16
Load
Break 2.19 62.00
Switch (55.6) (1574.8) 17
Figure 8.0-6. Typical Section View of Feeder
Switch with Optional Grounding Jaws 18
19
36.00
(914.4)
20
Figure 8.0-4. Typical Selector Switch
ConfigurationDimensions in Inches (mm)
21

Sheet 08 006
General Description
i Mini-MVS (26-Inch Wide) Eatons Mini-MVS switchgear Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly

assembly is rated 200 A, 4.76 kV. The
medium voltage Mini-MVS switchgear Standard Features
assembly is for use in power Seismically qualified
ii distribution, transformer primary
Manually operated switch
connections and isolation applications
requiring a stand-alone assembly, Door-to-switch safety interlocking
1 cable in/cable out terminations and Auxiliary switch, one Form C contact
manual operation. Viewing window for switch position
Provisions for padlocking the switch
2 The Mini-MVS switchgear assembly
in the OPEN position
is seismically qualified. The assembly
is listed by UL or CSA. The switch is Provision for padlocking the two
3 available fused or non-fused. There is door handles closed
an option for an outdoor enclosure. Spare fuse rack
Several built-in interlocks and safety Grounded metal screen barrier in
4 features are provided. front of the switch
Cycloalaphatic epoxy insulators
Line, load and ground cable lugs
5 for #6 solid-4/0 stranded cable
Aluminum or copper
6 Key interlock provisions
ListedUL/CSA
7 Optional Features
Enclosed typeindoor or outdoor
Outdoor enclosure includes
8 space heater
Note: If the application requires a heater for
condensation, an outdoor enclosure should
9 be selected
Fused or unfused switch

10 Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly If fused, Eatons Type CLE current
W = 26.00 inches (660.4 mm) limiting fuses from 10E amperes
H = 66.00 inches (1676.4 mm) to 200E amperes are supplied
11 D = 27.25 inches (692.2 mm)
Distribution type surge arresters,
3 or 6 kV
12 Spare fuses
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 007
General Description
Motor Operated Description Manual Operation

i
To operate manually, loosen the
MVS Switches A MVS Pow-R-Drive motor operated
holding screw that keeps the pin
switch is a standard, manually
operated switch in combination with a connecting the linear actuator to the
Application
heavy-duty electric motor-driven linear mechanism in place. Remove this pin. ii
Eatons MVS Pow-R-Drive motor actuator that charges the spring. The Remove the clevis pin on the support
operator makes possible the safety, of the bottom of the linear actuator.
convenience and coordination inherent
linear actuator is located in a separate
Unplug the cord from the disconnect- 1
isolated low voltage compartment.
in remote switch operation. During electrical operation, it smoothly ing terminal block as the actuator is
removed and set the actuator aside.
and quietly extends or retracts the
The switch can now be operated 2
proper distance to cause the switch
mechanism to operate. manually with the removable handle.
Standard motor operators are Key Interlock to Lock Switch Open 3

mounted in the switch enclosure. A keyed lock is standard to lock the
This eliminates the separate motor switch in the open position only.
compartment conserving floor space. 4
This lock not only locks the switch in
the open position, but also breaks the
electrical motor contacts integral to 5
the lock and permits the key to be
removed. With the key, the operator
can then open the lock on the switch 6
door. This scheme gives positive
assurance that the switch is open and
cannot be closed with the door open. 7
10
11
12
Motor Operated MVS Switch Manual Operation Override 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 008
General Description
Electronic Metering and Power Xpert and IQ Meters monitor Outdoor Enclosures
i Communications Apparatus common electrical parameters and
Weatherproofing complying with
communicate the data via standard
MVS switchgear assemblies can industry protocols and optional Web the requirements of IEEE standard
ii be equipped with Eatons family of interfaces. Power Xpert Gateways C37.20.3 is available for MVS switch-
Power Xpert and IQ digital meters to consolidate devices into a single Web gear assemblies. The weatherproofing
monitor a power circuits electrical browser interface and provide Ethernet consists of sloped roof panels that are
1 quantities within the capabilities of connectivity. Eatons Power Xpert joined together with caps. Doors
each device. Refer to Tab 3 for further Insight and Foreseer Web-based and rear covers are fully gasketed.
information on these devices. software systems display, analyze and Externally accessible louvered filtered
2 Eatons power management products
store data from multiple devices across covers, top and bottom, front and rear,
are provided for ventilation. At least
the facility to enable management
provide hardware and software solu- of the customers power system. one 250 watt heater is provided in each
3 tions that allow customers to interface Refer to Tab 2 for more information vertical section. Power for the heaters
with their switchgear at varying levels on communication systems. may be supplied from an external
of sophistication. source, or an optional integral control
4 power transformer may be specified to
provide power for the heaters.
10
11
12
13 Outdoor Enclosure
14
15
16
17
18
Power Xpert Meter IQ 130/140/150/250/260
PXM 4000/6000/8000 PXM 2250/2260/2270/2280/2290
19
Refer to Tab 3 for the complete offering and
description of available electronic meters.
20
Electronic Metering
21

Sheet 08 009
General Description
Partial Discharge Sensing and Monitoring The coupling capacitor sensor detects
i
Eatons Type MVS metal-enclosed partial discharges within the switchgear
Sensing and Monitoring switchgear (2.427 kV) is corona-free cubicle and/or adjacent cubicles, and
for Switchgear by design. By making switchgear is typically installed on the load side
ii
assemblies corona-free, Eaton has made of the feeder switches or on the main
its standard switchgear more reliable. bus. The second sensor is a small
However, as indicated above, with donut type radio frequency current
time, airborne particles, contaminants transformer (RFCT). It is designed for 1
and humidity lead to conditions that installation around ground shields
cause partial discharges to develop of customers incoming or outgoing
in switchgear operating at voltages power cables. It detects partial dis- 2
4000 V and above. Type MVS switchgear charges in customers power cables
can be equipped with factory-installed and external electrical noise.
partial discharge sensors and partial 3
Typically one set of coupling capacitor
discharge sensing relay for continuous sensors is used at every two cubicles.
Coupling Capacitor RFCT Sensor
monitoring of the partial discharges
Type PD Sensor
under normal operation. Timely
One RFCT sensor is used for each 4
incoming and outgoing power cable
detection of insulation degradation circuit.
through increasing partial discharges
can identify potential problems so that Output signals from sensors (coupling
5
corrective actions can be planned and capacitor and RFCT) are wired out to
implemented long before permanent terminal blocks for future or field use,
deterioration develops. Partial discharge or connected to the InsulGard relay.
6
detection can be the foundation of One InsulGard relay can monitor up
an effective predictive maintenance to 15 output signals, and temperature
program. Trending of partial discharge and humidity. The temperature and
7
data over time allows prediction of humidity sensors are included with
failures, which can be corrected before each InsulGard relay system. The relay
InsulGard Relay catastrophic failure occurs. continuously monitors the switchgear
8
(PD Monitoring)
primary system for partial discharges
The PD sensing and monitoring system and provides an alarm signal (contact
Partial Discharge in Switchgear consists of Eatons InsulGard relay closure) when high PD level is detected.
9
Partial discharge (PD) is a common and PD sensors specifically developed Data analysis and diagnostics by Eaton
name for various forms of electrical for application in the switchgear to engineers can also be provided by
discharges such as corona, surface work with the relay. There are two remote communication with the
10
tracking, and discharges internal to types of PD sensors used in the switch- InsulGard relay.
the insulation. It partially bridges the gear: the first sensor is a coupling
insulation between the conductors. capacitor type sensor developed for The sensors and InsulGard relay are 11
These high frequency discharges are use with 5, 15 and 27 kV switchgear. optional in MVS switchgear.
essentially small arcs occurring in or
on the surface of the insulation system 12
when voltage stress exceeds a critical
value. With time, airborne particles,
contaminants and humidity lead
Input 13
Temp Sensor Terminal InsulGard
to conditions that result in partial Block Relay Optional
discharges. Partial discharges start Humidity Sensor Modem
at a low level and increase as more 14
insulation becomes deteriorated.
switchgear are surface tracking across 15
bus insulation, or discharges in the
air gap between the bus and a support,
such as where a bus passes through
120 Vac 16
Auxiliary
an insulating window between the Signals (up to 15 Total) from Power Output
sections of the switchgear. If a partial PD Sensors (Coupling Capacitors, Alarm
discharge process is not detected RFCT Sensor, RTD Input, etc.) Status 17
and corrected, it can develop into a
full-scale insulation failure followed Figure 8.0-7. InsulGard Relay System
by an electrical fault. Most switchgear
18
flashover and bus failures are a result
of insulation degradation caused by
various forms of partial discharges.
19
20
21

Sheet 08 010

i
Radio Frequency Current Sensor (RFCT)
ii
Coupling Capacitor
7 PD Sensors
Figure 8.0-8. How the Process WorksSensing and Data Collection

8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Coupling Capacitor detects partial discharges internal to
switchgear compartment.
16 RFCT detects partial discharges in customers cables up to 100 ft
from switchgear.
17 Figure 8.0-9. Typical Partial Discharge Sensor Connections in

MVS Switchgear (527 kV)
Note: Use one set of PD sensing capacitors at every two vertical
18 sections, or portion thereof. Use one RFCT at each incoming/
outgoing cable circuit.
19
20
21

Sheet 08 011
Application
MVS Switchgear with Automatic Transfer Control i
ii
3
ATC Controller
Standard Features 4
provided by the ATC controller 5
Lights to indicate status of switches,
sources, etc.
Interlocking to prevent paralleling of 6
sources via software
Control power for the automatic
transfer control system is derived 7
from the sensing voltage transformers
Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
Manual override operation
8
Application Selectable closed with sync check or
Eatons MVS switchgear with an Typical Two-Switch Automatic Transfer
automatic transfer control system Using ATC Controller
Programmable time delays on both 9
is an integrated assembly of motor sources, OFF DELAY and ON DELAY
Eatons ATC-900 controller continu-
operated MVS switches, sensing Four programmable digital inputs
devices and control components.
ously monitors all three phases on
and outputs 10
both sources for correct voltages.
Available in 538 kV classes. Should the voltage of the normal Single-source responsibility; all
basic components are manufac-
It is typically applied where the source be lost while the voltage of the
tured by Eaton
11
continuity of service for critical loads alternate source remains normal, the
voltage sensing function in the ATC Key interlocking of operating
from two power sources in either a
two-switch (one load) or three-switch controller will change state starting the system and doors where required 12
(two loads) configuration is desired. time delay function. If the voltage of to provide operator safety
the normal source is not restored by
Optional Features
MVS switchgear with an automatic the end of the time delay interval,
Lockout on phase and/or ground
13
transfer control system can meet most the normal switch will open and the
automatic throwover requirements as alternate source switch will close, overcurrents and/or internal bus faults
it has a wide variety of operational restoring power to the load. Blown fuse overcurrent lockout 14
sequences embodied in one standard Load current, power and PF metering
automatic transfer control system. ATC Controller
with optional DCT module
Please note that the duty cycle of load
Eatons ATC controller is equipped to
24 Vdc control power input 15
display history information either via
interrupter switches is limited by ANSI the front panel or over the PowerNet Up to four additional I/O modules,
Standard C37.22. Refer to Table 8.0-4 each with four programmable digital
for maximum number of switching
power monitoring system. ATC-900
16
controller stores 320 time stamped
operations allowed. If the number of events. Oscillographic data for last
switching operations is expected to
exceed the maximum allowed, then
10 events can be downloaded via USB 17
port or displayed in the controllers
load interrupter switches should not display window. Controller allows
be used. Use circuit breakers (refer to
Type MSB, MEB, MEF or VCP-W
communications via RS-232 or 18
Modbus through RS-485 port,
switchgear designs). Ethernet or via USB interface.
19
20
21

Sheet 08 012
Technical Data
i Technical Data Table 8.0-1. Switch Ratings (Non-Fused)

Rated Maximum Impulse Continuous and Fault-Close & Momentary Rated Short-Time Short-
Voltage Withstand Load-Break Short-Circuit Current Circuit Current (2 sec.)
Test Data
kV kV Amperes kA Asym kA Peak kA rms Sym.
ii All Eatons MVS switch ratings have
been thoroughly tested in recognized 4.76 60 600 40 65 25
4.76 60 600 61 99 38
high power laboratories with certified 4.76 60 1200 40 65 25
1 inspectors from both UL and CSA 4.76 60 1200 61 99 38
organizations. Tests were performed to 15 95 600 40 65 25
substantiate all published ratings in 15 95 600 61 99 38
2 accordance with ANSI, IEEE, CSA and 15
15
95
95
1200
1200
40
61
65
99
25
38
NEMA standards.
27 125 600 40 65 25
27 125 600 64 104 40
3 The testing program included tests of:
38 150 600 40 65 25
Basic impulse levels 38 150 600 50.4 81.9 31.5
Momentary withstand
4 Table 8.0-2. Switchgear Assembly Main Cross Bus Ratings
Short-time withstand
Rated Maximum Rated Rated Main Rated Momentary Rated Short-Time Short-
Fault closing Voltage BIL Bus Current Short-Circuit Current Circuit Current (2 sec.)
5 Load interrupting at various loads, kV kV Amperes kA Asym kA Peak kA rms Sym.
various power factors
4.76 60 6001200 40 65 25
Mechanical life tests
6 Temperature rise test
4.76
4.76
60
60
6001200
6001200
61
80
99
130
38
50
4.76 60 1200 101 164 63
4.76 60 2000 61 99 38
These tests verified not only the per-
7 formance of the switch and integrated
4.76
4.76
60
60
2000
2000
80
101
130
164
50
63
switch-fuse assembly, but also the 15 95 6001200 40 65 25
suitability of the enclosure venting, 15 95 6001200 61 99 38
8 rigidity and bus spacing. 15 95 6001200 80 130 50
15 95 1200 101 164 63
The mechanical life test subjected the 27 125 6001200 40 65 25
9 MVS switch to a number of no load
27
38
125
150
6001200
6001200
64
40
104
65
40
25
cycles greater than the requirements 38 150 6001200 50.4 81.9 31.5
tabulated in ANSI C37.22 standards.
10 There were no moving or current Table 8.0-3. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Full Load Operations
carrying part failures as a result.
Rated Switch Load ANSI Required Eaton MVS Switch Number
Maximum Interrupting Number of Load of UL Tested Load Break Operations
11 The Fault Close and Load Interrupting
kV Ampere Rating Interrupting Operations
test demonstrated significant
improved performance above ANSI/ 4.76 600 50 60
4.76 1200 20 50
12 IEEE standards. See Tables 8.0-3 and
15 600 30 60
8.0-4 for results. 15 1200 10 50
27 600 10 10
38 600 5 5
13
Table 8.0-4. MVS Switch Duty Cycle for Fault Close OperationsNon-Fused
14 Rated
Maximum
Switch Fault Close Rating ANSI Required
Number of Fault
Eaton MVS Switch Number
of UL Tested Fault
kA Asym kA Peak
kV Close Operations Close Operations
15 5 and 15
5 and 15
40
61
65
99
1
1
4
1
27 40 65 1 1
27 61 99 1 1
16 38 40 65 1 1
38 50.4 81.9 1 1
17 Table 8.0-5. Mini-MVS Ratings, rms Values

Description Unfused Fused
18 Rated maximum voltage 4.76 kV 4.76 kV
Impulse withstand voltage (BIL) 60 kV 60 kV
Low frequency withstand voltage 19 kV 19 kV
Frequency 60 Hz 60 Hz
19 Continuous current, maximum 200 A 200 A
Load current interrupting rating 1 200 A 200 A
Magnetizing interrupting current 4A 4A
20 Short-time short-circuit current, 2 seconds, rms sym 12.5 kA 2
Momentary current, asymmetrical/peak 20 kA/32.5 kA 101 kA/164 kA 3
Fault close current, asymmetrical/peak 20 kA/32.5 kA 101 kA/164 kA 3
21 1
2
100% to 80% power factor lagging. 3 Rating with Eaton BHLE fuse.
Not applicable for fused units.

Sheet 08 013
Technical Data
Table 8.0-6. Primary Fuses, Standard Ratings and Fused Switch Fault Close Rating
Type Switchgear Rated Fuse Rated Continuous Rated Interrupting Fused Switch Momentary i
Fuse Maximum Voltage, kV Current Range, Amperes Capacity kA Symmetrical 1 and Fault-Close Rating 1
kA Asym kA Peak
ii
RBA-200 4.76 10200 19 30.4 49
RBA-400 4.76 10200 25 40 65
RBA-400
RBA-800
4.76
4.76
0.5400
0.5400
37.5
25
60
40
97.5
65
1
RBA-800 4.76 0.5720 37.5 60 97.5
BHLE 4.76 10450 63 101 2 164
CLE600/750 4.76 600750 40 64 104 2
RBA-200 15 10200 14.4 23 37
RBA-400 15 0.5400 25 40 65
RBA-400
RBA-800
15
15
0.5400
0.5720
29.4
25
47
40
76
65
3
RBA-800 15 0.5720 29.4 47 65
HRBA-400 14.4 0.5400 34.8 55.7 90
HRBA-800 14.4 0.5720 34.8 55.7 90 4
BHLE 15 10250 63 101 2 164
BHCL 15 300 63 101 2 164
RBA-200 25.8 10200 10.5 16.8 27 5
RBA-400 25.8 0.5300 21 33.6 54.6
RBA-800 25.8 0.5540 21 33.6 54.6
Cooper NX
RBA-200
27
38
0.5100
10200
35
6.9
56
11
91
18
6
RBA-400 38 0.5300 16.8 26.8 47
RBA-800 38 0.5540 16.8 26.8 47
GE EJO-1 38 2080 12.5 20 32.5 7
Cooper NX 38 20100 35 56 3 91
1 When RBA expulsion fuses are used, and two ratings appear, the lower rating applies when the lower-rated switch (15 kV, 40 kA fault close, 25 kA
short-time current) versus the higher rating that applies when the higher-rated switch (15 kV, 61 kA fault close, 38 kA short-time) is used.
8
2 UL and CSA listed integrated rating with an Eaton BHLE or BHCL fuse.
3 UL and CSA listed integrated rating with Cooper NX fuse.
Note: For additional fuse data, refer to fuse documents in Tab 9. 9
Table 8.0-7. Eaton Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Fuse Correction Factors
Eaton kV Fuse Rated Enclosure Correction
10
Fuse Type Class Continuous Current Factor (F1)
RBA 200/400/800
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
All
5.5
All
10150
1.0
1.00
11
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL 5.5 175 0.94
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
5.5
5.5
200
250
0.90
0.81
12
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL
5.5
5.5
350
400
0.84
0.80
13
CLE 5.5 600, 750, 1100 0.83
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL, BHCL 15.5 10150 1.00 14
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL, BHCL 15.5 175 0.89
CLE, HLE, BHLE, HCL, BHCL 15.5 250 0.82 15
16
Method to Determine the Minimum the fuse with the higher continuous Calculations (A):
current rating as determined from A.1 Calculate the full load current
Recommended Fuse Size for calculation (A) or (B). It is possible that 17
based on base kVA rating of the
Fuse Applied on Primary Side the fuse selection process yields the transformer.
of a Power Transformer same fuse continuous current rating Three-phase transformer:
If the power transformer has one or
for the transformer base kVA rating as IFL = base kVA rating (E3 * Rated 18
well as the maximum supplementary Primary Voltage)
more supplementary cooled ratings cooled kVA rating.
(FA, FOA, FOW, low temperature rise Single-phase transformer:
designs permitted to be operated at a If the power transformer has no IFL = base kVA rating (Rated 19
higher permissible temperature rises, supplementary cooled ratings, Primary Voltage).
etc.), perform two calculations, (A) and perform only calculations (A) to 20
(B), as outlined below and select determine the minimum recom-
mended fuse size.
21

Sheet 08 014
Technical Data
A.2 Multiply the result of Step A.1 A.7 Multiply the continuous current B.4 If the fuse is applied in an enclosing
i by appropriate factor for a given rating of the fuse selected in package such as metal-enclosed
Eaton fuse type being considered Step A.3 by the correction factors switchgear, contact the enclosing
for the application: from Steps A.4, A.5 and A.6. This package manufacturer for appro-
ii 8.3/15.5/25.8/38 kV RBA: 1.4 provides a modified continuous priate correction factor for the fuse
5.5 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.4 current value for the selected fuse. selected in Step B.3. When installed
8.3 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.4 within Eatons switchgear, refer
1 15.5 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.5 A.8 If the modified continuous current to the Table 8.0-7 for applicable
value as determined in Step A.7 is enclosure correction factor (F1).
A.3 Select the closest available pub- equal to or greater than the value
2 lished fuse with the continuous determined in Step A.2, then the B.5 If the actual ambient air tempera-
current rating that is equal to or selected fuse is the minimum ture (Tamb) surrounding the fuse
greater than the calculated value recommended size for the applica- (or surrounding the enclosure if the
3 in Step A.2. This is the suggested tion. If the modified continuous fuse is installed in an enclosure) is
minimum recommended fuse size current value is less than the value greater than 40 C; determine the
when the fuse is applied in an open determined in Step A.2, select the appropriate temperature correc-
4 air with ambient temperature next higher available continuous tion factor, 0.3% per C. This factor
within 40 C and 30 C, installed fuse rating and repeat Steps A.4 is given by:
at an altitude of 3300 ft (1000 m) through A.8. F2 = 1 ([Tamb 40] * 0.3 100),
5 or less, and operated at 60 Hz.
Calculations (B):
where Tamb = actual ambient
temperature in C.
A.4 If the fuse is applied in an B.1 Calculate the full load current To provide conservative result, for
enclosing package such as metal-
6 enclosed switchgear, contact the
based on maximum supplementary actual ambient less than or equal
kVA rating of the transformer. to 40 C, consider F2 = 1.0.
enclosing package manufacturer Three-phase transformer:
for appropriate correction factor B.6 If the fuse is applied at an altitude
7 for the fuse selected in Step A.3.
IFL = Maximum kVA rating
(H) greater than 3300 ft (1000 m)
(E3 * Rated Primary Voltage)
When installed within Eatons Single-phase transformer: above sea level, determine the
switchgear, refer to the appropriate altitude correction
8 Table 8.0-7 for applicable
IFL = Maximum kVA rating
factor, 0.5% per 1000 ft. This factor
(Rated Primary Voltage).
enclosure correction factor (F1). is given by:
B.2 Multiply the result of Step B.1 F3 = 1 ([H 3300] * 0.5 100000),
9 A.5 If the actual ambient air tempera- by appropriate factor for a given where H = actual altitude in feet.
ture (Tamb) surrounding the fuse Eaton fuse type being considered For H less than or equal to
(or surrounding the enclosure if the for the application: 3300 feet, consider F3 = 1.0.
10 fuse is installed in an enclosure) is 8.3/15.5/25.8/38 kV RBA: 1.2
greater than 40 C; determine the 5.5 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.2 B.7 Multiply the continuous current
appropriate temperature correction 8.3 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.2 rating of the fuse selected in
11 factor, 0.3% per C. This factor is 15.5 kV CLE/HLE/HCL/BHLE: 1.3 Step B.3 by the correction factors
given by: from Steps B.4, B.5 and B.6. This
F2 = 1 ([Tamb 40] * 0.3 100), B.3 Select the closest available pub- provides a modified continuous
12 where Tamb = actual ambient lished fuse with the continuous current value for the selected fuse.
temperature in C. To provide current rating that is equal to or
conservative result, for actual greater than the calculated value B.8 If the modified continuous current
13 ambient less than or equal to in Step B.2. This is the suggested value as determined in Step B.7 is
40 C, consider F2 = 1.0. minimum recommended fuse size equal to or greater than the value
when the fuse is applied in an open determined in Step B.2, then the
14 A.6 If the fuse is applied at an altitude air with ambient temperature selected fuse is the minimum
(H) greater than 3300 ft (1000 m) within 40 C and 30 C, installed recommended size for the applica-
above sea level, determine the at an altitude of 3300 ft (1000 m) tion. If the modified continuous
15 appropriate altitude correction or less, and operated at 60 Hz. current value is less than the value
factor, 0.5% per 1000 ft. This factor determined in Step B.2, select the
is given by: next higher available continuous
16 F3 = 1 ([H 3300] * 0.5 100000), fuse rating and repeat Steps B.4
where H = actual altitude in feet. through B.8.
For H less than or equal to
17 3300 feet, consider F3 = 1.0.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 015
Technical Data
Example #1: Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure
1500 kVA, three-phase, 4.16 kV/480 V derating factor (F1) for derating factor (F1) for i
transformer, no supplemental rating, 5.5 kV CLE 400 A fuse is 0.8. 15.5 kV CLE 200 A fuse is 0.86.
Eaton Type CLE Primary Fuses are
applied in Eatons metal-enclosed
Step A.5: F2 = 0.985 Step A.5: F2 = 1.0 ii
switchgear, ambient surrounding the Step A.6: F3 = 1.0 Step A.6: F3 = 0.994
switchgear is 45 C, switchgear is
installed at an altitude of 3000 feet Step A.7: Modified continuous current Step A.7: Modified continuous current 1
above sea level. value = 400 * 0.8 * 0.985 * value = 200 * 0.86 * 1.0 *
1.0 = 315.2 A. 0.994 = 171 A.
Because the transformer does not
Step A.8: Because the modified Step A.8: Because the modified
2
have any supplemental ratings, only
calculations (A) are required. continuous current value continuous current value
of 315.2 A is greater than of 171 A is greater than 3
Step A.1: IFL = 1500 (E3 * 4.16) = 291.45 A calculated in the 164.02 A calculated in the
208.18 A. initial Step A.2, 400 A is the initial Step A.2, 200 A is the
Step A.2: IFL*1.4 = 208.18 * 1.4 =
minimum recommended minimum recommended 4
fuse size for this transformer fuse size for this transformer
291.45 A. application. Select 5.5 kV application. Select 15.5 kV
Step A.3: Closest available CLE fuse CLE 400 A fuse. CLE 200 A fuse. 5
rating equal to or higher Example #2: Example #3:
than 291.45 is 300 A.
2500 kVA, three-phase, 13.2 kV/480 V 2500/3333 kVA AA/FA, three-phase, 6
Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, enclosure transformer, no supplemental rating, 13.2 kV/480 V transformer, Eaton
derating factor (F1) for Eaton Type CLE Primary Fuses are Type CLE Primary Fuses are applied
5.5 kV CLE 300 A fuse is 0.94. applied in Eatons metal-enclosed
switchgear, ambient surrounding the
in Eatons metal-enclosed switchgear,
ambient surrounding the switchgear
7
Step A.5: Ambient temperature switchgear is 30 C, switchgear is is 40 C, switchgear is installed at an
correction factor F2 = 1
([45 40] * 0.3 100) = 0.985.
installed at an altitude of 4500 feet altitude of less than 3300 feet above 8
above sea level. sea level.
Step A.6: Altitude correction factor Because the transformer does not Because the transformer has supple-
F3 = 1.0 have any supplemental ratings, only mental rating, both calculations (A) 9
Step A.7: Modified continuous current calculations (A) are required. and (B) are required.
value = 300 * 0.94 * 0.985 * Step A.1: IFL = 2500 (E3 * 13.2) = Calculations (A): 10
1.0 = 277.77 A. 109.34 A. Step A.1: IFL = 2500 (E3 * 13.2) =
Step A.8: Because the modified 109.34 A.
continuous current value of
Step A.2: IFL*1.5 = 109.34 * 1.5 = 11
164.02 A. Step A.2: IFL*1.5 = 109.34 * 1.5 =
277.77 is less than 291.45 A
calculated in Step A.2, select Step A.3: Closest available CLE fuse 164.02 A.
the next higher available CLE rating equal to or higher Step A.3: Closest available CLE fuse
12
fuse rating, which is 350 A, than 164.02 is 175 A. rating equal to or higher
and repeat calculations than 164.02 is 175 A.
Steps A.4 to A.8. Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure 13
derating factor (F1) for Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure
Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, enclosure 15.5 kV CLE 175 A fuse is 0.89. derating factor (F1) for
derating factor (F1) for
Step A.5: Because actual ambient is 15.5 kV CLE 175 A fuse is 0.89. 14
5.5 kV CLE 350 A fuse is 0.84.
less than 40 C, F2 = 1.0. Step A.5: Because actual ambient is
Step A.5: F2 = 0.985
Step A.6: Altitude correction factor less than or equal to 40 C, 15
Step A.6: F3 = 1.0 F3 = 1 ([4500 3300] * 0.5 F2 = 1.0.
100000) = 0.994. Step A.6: Altitude correction factor
Step A.7: Modified continuous current
F3 = 1.0.
16
value = 350 * 0.84 * 0.985 * Step A.7: Modified continuous current
1.0 = 289.59 A. value = 175 * 0.89 * 1.0 * Step A.7: Modified continuous current
Step A.8: Because the modified
0.994 = 154.82 A. value = 175 * 0.89 * 1.0 * 17
continuous current value Step A.8: Because the modified 1.0 = 155.75 A.
of 289.59 A is less than continuous current value of Step A.8: Because the modified 18
291.45 A calculated in the 154.82 is less than 164.02 A continuous current value of
initial Step A.2, select the calculated in Step A.2, select 155.75 is less than 164.02 A
next higher available CLE the next higher available CLE calculated in Step A.2, select 19
fuse rating, which is 400 A, fuse rating, which is 200 A, the next higher available CLE
and repeat calculations and repeat calculations fuse rating, which is 200 A,
Steps A.4 to A.8. Steps A.4 to A.8. and repeat calculations 20
Steps A.4 to A.8.
21

Sheet 08 016
Technical Data
Step A.4: From Table 8.0-7, enclosure Step B.5: Because actual ambient is From final Step A.8, minimum
i derating factor (F1) for 15.5 kV less than or equal to 40 C, recommended fuse rating = 200 A.
CLE 200 A fuse is 0.86. F2 = 1.0.
From final Step B.8, minimum
ii Step A.5: F2 = 1.0 Step B.6: F3 = 1.0. recommended fuse rating = 250 A.
Step A.6: F3 = 1.0 Step B.7: Modified continuous current Select the fuse with the higher contin-
value = 200 * 0.86 * 1.0 * uous current rating as determined
1 Step A.7: Modified continuous current 1.0 = 172 A. from calculation (A) or (B). Therefore,
value = 200 * 0.86 * 1.0 * select 15.5 kV, CLE 250 A fuse for this
1.0 = 172 A. Step B.8: Because the modified transformer application.
2 Step A.8: Because the modified
continuous current value
of 172 A is less than 189.51 A
continuous current value calculated in Step B.2, select
3 of 172 A is greater than the next higher available CLE
164.02 A calculated in the fuse rating, which is 250 A,
initial Step A.2, 200 A is the and repeat calculations
4 minimum recommended Steps B.4 to B.8.
fuse size for this transformer
application on the basis of Step B.4: From Table 8.0-7, Enclosure
5 base kVA of 2500. derating factor (F1) for
15.5 kV CLE 250 A fuse is 0.82.
Calculations (B):
Step B.1: IFL = 3333 (E3 * 13.2) = Step B.5: F2 = 1.0
6 145.78 A Step B.6: F3 = 1.0
Step B.2: IFL*1.3 = 145.78 * 1.3 =
7 189.51 A
Step B.7: Modified continuous current
value = 250 * 0.82 * 1.0 *
Step B.3: Closest available CLE fuse 1.0 = 205 A
8 rating equal to or higher Step B.8: Because the modified
than 189.51 is 200 A. continuous current value
Step B.4: From Table 8.0-7, enclosure of 205 A is greater than
9 derating factor (F1) for 15.5 kV 189.51 A calculated in the
CLE 200 A fuse is 0.86. initial Step B.2, 250 A is the
minimum recommended
10 fuse size for this transformer
application on the basis of
its maximum kVA of 3333.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 017
Technical Data
Surge Protection
IEEE standard C62.11 for Metal Oxide a significant contribution to the
i
Surge Arresters lists the maximum temperature. Table 8.0-8 lists the
rated ambient temperature as 40 C. recommended minimum duty cycle ii
The ambient temperature inside voltage rating for various system
an Eaton MVS switchgear vertical grounding methods. Surge arrester
section may exceed this temperature, rating is based upon the ambient air 1
especially in outdoor applications temperature in the switchgear vertical
where solar radiation may produce section not exceeding 55 C.
2
Table 8.0-8. Suggested Minimum Ratings (kV) for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters Located in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Voltage Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or Solidly Low Resistance High Resistance or 3
kV
Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV Nominal MCOV 4
2.30 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55 3 2.55
2.40
3.30
3
3
2.55
2.55
3
3
2.55
2.55
6
6
5.10
5.10
3
3
2.55
2.55
3
3
2.55
2.55
6
6
5.10
5.10
5
4.00 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10 3 2.55 6 5.10 6 5.10
4.16
4.76
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
9
5.10
7.65
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
6
5.10
5.10
6
9
5.10
7.65
6
4.80 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.60 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65
6.90 6 5.10 6 5.10 9 7.65 6 5.10 9 7.65 9 7.65 7
7.20 6 5.10 6 5.10 10 8.40 6 5.10 9 7.65 10 8.40
8.32 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20
8.40 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 9 7.65 9 7.65 12 10.20 8
11.00 9 7.65 9 7.65 15 12.70 9 7.65 10 8.40 15 12.70
11.50 9 7.65 10 8.40 18 15.30 9 7.65 12 10.20 18 15.30
12.00 10 8.40 10 8.40 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30 9
12.47 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30 10 8.40 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.20 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30
13.80 12 10.20 12 10.20 18 15.30 12 10.20 15 12.70 18 15.30 10
14.40 12 10.20 12 10.20 21 17.00 12 10.20 15 12.70 21 17.00
18.00 15 12.70 15 12.70 27 22.00 15 12.70 18 15.30 27 22.00
20.78 18 15.30 18 15.30 30 24.40 18 15.30 21 17.00 30 24.40 11
22.00 18 15.30 18 15.30 30 24.40 18 15.30 21 17.00 30 24.40
22.86 18 15.30 21 17.00 18 15.30 24 19.50 36 29.00
23.00 18 15.30 21 17.00 18 15.30 24 19.50 36 29.00
12
24.94 21 17.00 24 19.50 21 17.00 24 19.50 36 29.00
25.80 21 17.00 24 19.50 21 17.00 24 19.50 36 29.00
26.40 21 17.00 24 19.50 21 17.00 27 22.00 39 31.50
33.00 27 22.00 30 24.40 27 22.00 36 29.00 45 36.50
13
34.50 30 24.40 30 24.40 30 24.40 36 29.00 48 39.00
38.00 30 24.40 30 24.40 36 29.00
14
Note: MCOV = Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 018
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Arrangements5 and 15 kV

i The drawings in this section represent For control power transformer larger selected for incoming and for outgoing
the most common arrangements. than 1 kVA, additional space is cables. Structure depth is based on
ii Layouts shown are for rear-accessible
equipment. Front-accessible designs
required. Depth of units will vary due
to cable entrance and exit require-
two 500 kcm XLP or EPR insulated
cables per phase using preformed
are availablerefer to Eaton. Many ments, the addition of lightning arrest- slip-on cable termination devices.
1 other configurations and combinations ers, instrument transformers, special Refer to note below for minimum
are available. Two voltage transformers cable terminators, etc. Disconnect required depth when more than two
for customer metering and one control fuses may require wider sections. cables per phase are used. For unit
2 transformer for auxiliary power can Cables are shown out top and bottom substation alignment details, see
be mounted in the structures shown. for layout only. Top or bottom must be Tabs 13 and 14.
3 34.9449.25 55.25
Top
70.00
55.25 62.00
(1403.4) Entry (1778.0)
(887.51251.0) (1403.4) (1574.8)
Bottom
62.00
(1574.8)
4
Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor
95.50 95.50 95.50 95.50 95.50
(2425.7) (2425.7) (2425.7) (2425.7) (2425.7)
5 Indoor
90.38
Indoor
90.38
Indoor
90.38
Indoor
90.38
Indoor
90.38
(2295.7) (2295.7) (2295.7) (2295.7) (2295.7)
6
Outdoor
36.00 41.00 (1041.4) 36.00 36.00 20.00 36.00 36.00
(914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (508.0) (914.4) (914.4)
Indoor
7 Arrangement 1
36.00 (914.4)
Arrangement 3 Arrangement 4 Arrangement 5
Arrangement 2
Single Unit Primary for Dry-Type Selector Switch Primary for Liquid Duplex Arrangement
Cable In and Out 1 Transformer Filled Transformer Source Selective
8
55.25
(1403.4) 55.28
9 (1404.1)
Outdoor
10 95.50
(2425.7)
Outdoor
95.50
(2425.7)
Indoor
90.38 Indoor
(2295.7) 90.38
11 (2295.7)
36.00 48.00 36.00 36.00 36.00

12 (914.4 1219.2) (914.4) 15.00
(381.0)
(914.4) (914.4) 36.00 48.00
(914.4 1219.2)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
Main Incoming Metering Section (optional) Main Incoming Metering Section (optional)
13 with Main Switch and Feeders with Main Lugs Only Feeders
14 62.00
(1574.8)
55.28
(1404.1)
15 Outdoor
95.50 M M
Outdoor
95.50 M M M
(2425.7) (2425.7)
Indoor Indoor
90.38
16 90.38
(2295.7)
ATC
(2295.7)
ATC
17 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00

(914.4) (914.4) 15.00 (914.4) (914.4) 15.00 (914.4) 15.00 (914.4) (914.4) 15.00 (914.4)
(381.0) (381.0) (381.0) (381.0)
18 Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load Three Switch Auto TransferMainTieMain with Feeders
Figure 8.0-10. 5 and 15 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)

19 1 Mini-MVS switch unit in 26.00-inch (660.4 mm) wide, 27.25-inch (692.2 mm) deep and 66.00-inch (1676.4 mm) tall enclosure can be provided
for 5 kV, 200 A.
Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary.
20 Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator.
Note: Minimum depth of MVS unit: Up to two 500 kcm per phase: 55.00 inches (1397.0 mm) or 62.00 inches (1574.8 mm) deep; three or four 500 kcm
per phase: 70.00 inches (1778.0 mm) deep, five or six 500 kcm per phase: 80.00 inches (2032.0 mm) deep.
21 Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Sheet 08 019
LayoutsDimensions

The drawings in this section represent for auxiliary power can be mounted top and bottom for layout only. Top or
i
the most common arrangements. in the structures shown. For control bottom must be selected for incoming
Layouts shown are for rear-accessible power above 1 kVA, additional space is and for outgoing cables. Cable sizing is ii
equipment. Front-accessible designs required. Depth of units will vary due based on two 500 kcmil XLP or
are availablerefer to Eaton. Many to cable entrance and exit requirements, EPR insulated cables per phase using
other configurations and combinations the addition of lightning arresters, preformed slip-on cable termination 1
are available. Two voltage transformers instrument transformers, special cable devices. For unit substation alignment
for metering and one control transformer terminators, etc. Cables are shown out details, see Tabs 13 and 14.
2
70.00
80.00 (1778.0)
80.00 (2032) 100.00
(2032)
Outdoor
Outdoor
135.00
(2540.0)
3
Outdoor 135.00 RBA (3429.0) Outdoor
RBA (3429.0) or S&C
135.00 or S&C 135.00
RBA (3429.0) Fuses Indoor RBA
or S&C Fuses (3429.0)
Fuses Indoor
127.00
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
127.00
(3226.0)
or S&C
Fuses Indoor
127.00
4
(3226.0) Outdoor (3226.0)
Outdoor 110.00
Outdoor 110.00 Unfused (2794.0) Outdoor
110.00 Unfused (2794.0)
Unfused
or EJO
(2794.0) or EJO
Fuses Indoor
101.50
or EJO
Fuses Indoor
101.50
Unfused
or EJO
110.00
(2794.0) 5
Fuses Indoor (2578.0) Fuses Indoor
101.50 (2578.0) 101.50
(2578.0) (2578.0)
Outdoor Outdoor
48.00
(1219.0)
53.00 (1346.2)
Indoor
48.00
(1219.0) 35.00 (889.0)
Indoor 48.00 48.00
6
48.00 (1219.0) 30.00 (762.0) (1219.0) (1219.0)
Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2 Arrangement 3 Arrangement 4

Single Unit Primary for Dry-Type Primary for Liquid-Filled Duplex Arrangement 7
Cable In and Out Transformer Transformer Source Selective
8
70.00
(1778.0) 70.00
(1778.0)
Outdoor
9
135.00 Outdoor
(3429.0) 135.00
RBA (3429.0)
Fuses RBA
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
Fuses
Indoor
127.00
(3226.0)
10
Outdoor
110.00 Outdoor
Unfused (2794.0) 110.00
or EJO
Fuses Indoor
101.50
Unfused
or EJO
Fuses
(2794.0)
Indoor
11
(2578.0) 101.50
(2578.0)
48.00-60.00
(1219.0-1524.0)
48.00
(1219.0) 30.00
(762.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0) 48.00-60.00
(1219.0-1524.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
48.00
(1219.0)
12
Main Device with FeedersMetering Section (optional) Main Lugs with FeedersMetering Section (optional)
13
100.00
(2540.0)
80.00
(2032.0)
14
Outdoor Outdoor
135.00
RBA
Fuses
(3429.0)
Indoor
RBA
Fuses
135.00
(3429.0) 15
Indoor
127.00 M M 127.00 M M M
(3226.0) (3226.0)
Unfused
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0) Unfused
Outdoor
110.00
(2794.0)
ATC
16
or EJO ATC or EJO
Fuses Indoor Fuses Indoor
101.50 101.50
(2578.0) (2578.0)
17
48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00
(1219.0) (1219.0) 30.00 (1219.0) (1219.0) 30.00 (1219.0) 30.00 (1219.0) (1219.0) 30.00 (1219.0)
(762.0) (762.0) (762.0) (762.0)
Arrangement 7 Arrangement 8 18
Two Switch Auto TransferSingle Load Three Switch Auto TransferMain Tie Main with Feeders
19
Figure 8.0-11. 27 and 38 kV Typical ArrangementsDimensions in Inches (mm)
Note: Width for Utility Metering Structures may vary.
Note: ATC = Automatic Transfer Controller (see Page 8.0-11). M = Motor Operator. 20
21

Sheet 08 020
LayoutsDimensions
Typical ArrangementsMVS Connecting to Other Switchgear

i The drawings in this section represent the structures shown. For control power for layout only. Top or bottom must be
the most common arrangements. transformer larger than 1 kVA, additional selected for incoming and for outgoing
ii Layouts shown are for rear-accessible
equipment. Front-accessible designs
space is required. Depth of units will
vary due to cable entrance and exit
cables. Cable sizing is based on two
500 kcmil XLP or EPR insulated cables
are availablesee Page 8.0-25. Many requirements, the addition of lightning per phase using preformed slip-on
1 other configurations and combinations arresters, instrument transformers, cable termination devices. For unit
are available. Two voltage transformers special cable terminators, etc. Discon- substation alignment details, see
for metering and one control transformer nect fuses may require wider sections. Tabs 13 and 14.
2 for auxiliary power can be mounted in Cables are shown out top and bottom
20.00
3 Main
(508.0)
Feeder
Switch Switch 62.00
55.30 55.30 (1574.8)
4 (1404.6)
MVS
Switchgear
AMPGARD
Medium 30.00
(1404.6)
MVS AMPGARD
Switchgear Medium 30.00
MVS MEF
Switchgear Switchgear
Voltage (762.0) Voltage (762.0)
Starters Starters
5 36.00
36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 (914.4) 26.00 or 19.00
(914.4) (914.4) 1.25 (914.4) (914.4) 1.25 (660.4 or 482.6)
(31.8) (31.8) Plan View
6 Plan View Plan View
Main
Switch
Feeder
Switch
7 AMPGARD AMPGARD
Medium Medium MEF
92.00
Voltage 92.00 Voltage 92.00
Switch
Feeder
(2336.8) Switchgear
90.40 Starters (2336.8) (2336.8)
8 (2296.2)
Starters
9 36.00 20.00 36.00

(914.4) (508.0) (914.4) 36.00
(914.4) 26.00 or 19.00
Front View Front View (660.4 or 482.6)
10 Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2
Front View
Arrangement 3Indoor MVS
Indoor Top Cable to MV MCC Indoor Bottom Cable to MV MCC Close-coupled to MEF Switchgear
11 4.00
(101.6)
Feeder VCP-W Feeder VCP-W

12 Switch Medium Switch Medium
Voltage Voltage
94.37 80.00 Switchgear
MVS Switchgear 96.25 MVS
(2397.0) (2032.0)
13 Switchgear (2444.8) Switchgear
14
36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00
4.60 (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4)
15 (116.8) Plan View Plan View
(Vac-Clad Main Bus Location Only)
VCP-W VCP-W
16 Medium Medium
Voltage
Voltage Switchgear
Switchgear
Switch
Feeder
Switch
Feeder
Switch
Feeder
Switch
Feeder
17 90.40
(2296.2)
95.50
(2425.7)
18
36.00 36.00 36.00 4.00
(914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (101.6)
19 Front View
Front View
A) DepthSection adjacent MVA, 80.00 inches (2032).
A) Depth 84.00 (2133.6) or 94.00 (2387.6) inches to rear align with MVA. B) Depth addition MVS sections 55.30 inches (1404.6).
B) Cable exit rear only, top or bottom.
20 Arrangement 4Indoor to Metal-Clad Switchgear
C) 2000A bus maximum.
Arrangement 5Outdoor Only to Metal-Clad Switchgear
Figure 8.0-12. Connections to AMPGARD MCC (7.2 kV Maximum) and to VCPW Switchgear (15 kV Maximum)Dimensions in Inches (mm)
21

Sheet 08 021
LayoutsDimensions, 5 and 15 kV Switch
Main Bus Main Bus i
Taps
ii
95.46
1.36
(2425.0)
90.37 (35.0)
(2295.0)
Switch
Outdoor H1,2 1
Indoor
515 kVA
CPT
95.46
90.37
Switch X1-4 (Single- 2
(2425.0) (2295.0) Phase)
Outdoor Indoor
Fuse Fuse
3
Load Load
2.19 2.19
(56.0)
(56.0)
4
31.60 31.60
(803.0)
(803.0)
5
Depth Depth
See Table 8.0-11
See Table 8.0-9
6
Figure 8.0-13. Front Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused Figure 8.0-15. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT
7
Table 8.0-9. Front Access
Main Bus No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm)
(Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV 8
1 or 2 out bottom 34.94 (887.5) 34.94 (887.5)
1.36 1 or 2 out top 49.25 (1250.0) 49.25 (1250.0) 9
(35.0)
90.37 Table 8.0-10. Rear Access
(2295.0) No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) 10
Indoor (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV
Switch
95.46 Load 3 or 4 top or bottom 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0) 11
(2425.0) Fuse 5 or 6 top or bottom 70.00 (1778.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
Outdoor
Load
2.19 Table 8.0-11. Rear Access 12
(56.0) 34.15 No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm)
(867.0) (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV
13
1 or 2 out bottom 62.00 (1574.8) 62.00 (1574.8)
Depth 14
See Table 8.0-10
Figure 8.0-14. Rear Access Feeder CircuitFused or Unfused 15
16
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 022
i Main Bus Main Bus
ii
95.46
(2424.7) 40.22
1.36 95.46
(1021.6)
1 Outdoor
Switch
Taps (34.5) (2424.7)
Outdoor Switch
515 kVA CPT Line
X1-4 (Single-Phase)
2 90.37
H1,2
90.37
(2295.4) (2295.4)
Indoor Indoor
3 Fuse
2.19
Fuse
Load
(55.6)
2.19
4 (55.6) Load
34.15
(867.4)
5
Depth
Depth
6 See Table 8.0-12 See Table 8.0-14
Figure 8.0-16. Rear Access Feeder Circuit With Bus Connected CPT Figure 8.0-18. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
7
Table 8.0-12. Rear Access
Main Bus
No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm)
8 (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV
Bottom
entry/
exit 1 or 2 out top 70.00 (1778.0) 70.00 (1778.0)
9 95.46
(2424.7)
Outdoor Line Table 8.0-13. Rear Access
10 Switch
(Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV
Top
entry/exit
90.37 1 or 2 top or bottom 55.25 (1403.3) 62.00 (1574.8)
11 (2295.4)
Bottom
entry/exit
Indoor Table 8.0-14. Rear Access
Fuse
12 (Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV
2.19
(55.6) Load
3 or 4 top in/bottom out 62.00 (1574.8) 70.00 (1778.0)
13 Top 5 or 6 top in/bottom out 70.00 (1778.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
entry/
exit
14 Depth
See Table 8.0-13
15
Figure 8.0-17. Rear Access Cable In/Cable Out With Main Bus
16
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 023
20.00
ii
(508.0)
1
18.00
(457.0) 2
Line
Line
3
Switch 115.46
110.37
(2803.0) (2933.0)
Switch 4
Indoor Outdoor
5
Fuse
Fuse 6
Load
Load
7
31.60
(803.0) 31.60
(803.0)
8
Depth
9
Depth
See Table 8.0-15
See Table 8.0-15
10
Figure 8.0-19. Front Access Indoor, Cable In/Cable Out Figure 8.0-20. Front Access Outdoor, Cable In/Cable Out
Table 8.0-15. Front Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom 11
(Based on 500 kcmil) 5 kV 15 kV
12
1 or 2 top in bottom out 34.94 (887.5) 34.94 (887.5)
1 or 2 top in top out 49.25 (1250.0) 49.25 (1250.0)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 024
ii
135.00
135.00 (3429.0)
(3429.0)
1 Outdoor
Outdoor
Tall Height
Tall Height
Switch 110.00 Switch
110.00
2 (2794.0)
(2794.0)
Outdoor
Outdoor Low Height
Low Height Note (A)
3 Note (A)
127.00
4 127.00
(3225.8)
(3225.8)
Indoor
Indoor Tall Height Fuse
Tall Height Fuse
5 101.50
101.50 (2578.1)
(2578.1) Indoor
Indoor
6 Low Height
Low Height
Note (A)
Note (A)
9 Front Depth
Front
See Table 8.0-16 Depth
See Table 8.0-17
10
Figure 8.0-21. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom Figure 8.0-22. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom
Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually Note A: Low height dimensions are for non-fused, manually
11 operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all operated switch only. For all motor operated switches and all
fused switches, tall height dimensions apply. fused switches, tall height dimensions apply.
12 Table 8.0-16. Rear Access, Cable ExitTop or Bottom Table 8.0-17. Rear Access, Cable Entry and ExitTop or Bottom
No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm) No. of Cables per Phase Minimum Structure DepthInches (mm)
(Based on 500 kcmil) 27 kV 38 kV (Based on 500 kcmil) 27 kV 38 kV
13
1 or 2 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0) 1 or 2 80.00 (2032.0) 80.00 (2032.0)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 025
LayoutsDimensions
Front Only Access Bottom Entry,

Top or Bottom Exit i
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0)
Optional
Rear Door 1.25 (31.8)
10.00 (254.0) 10.00 (254.0) 33.00 (838.2) 13.00 (330.2) ii
1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2) A&B 8.00 (203.2) A 8.00 (203.2) A
1
Roof Layout D Roof Layout D Roof Layout D
10 16 10
2
8.00 (203.2) B
19.00 (482.6)
Front Front Front
3
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 20.00 (508.0)
56.00 (1422.4)
16.00 (406.4)
10.00 (254.0)
Optional
10.00 (254.0)
6.00 (152.4)
42.00 (1066.8)
8.00 (203.2)
4
Rear Door 1.25 (31.8)
6.60 (167.6)
8.00 (203.2) A&B 5
Floor Layout Floor Layout D Floor Layout D
D
10 16 10 10 16 10 10 16 10
6
16.00 (406.4) B
8.00 (203.2) A 8.00 (203.2) A A
Front
8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) 8.00 (203.2) Front
7
36.00 (914.4) 36.00 (914.4) 56.00 (1422.4)
Figure 8.0-23. 5 and 15 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts

1
8
Cable location not available with top main bus.
2 When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-10 and 8.0-13 through 8.0-20 as applicable for dimension D
on Pages 8.0-18 and 8.0-21 through 8.0-23.
9
Rear Access Top Rear Access Top or Bottom Front Only Access Bottom 10
or Bottom Exit Entry and Exit Entry, Top or Bottom Exit
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
46.00 (1168.4)
16.00 (406.4)
11
Optional 16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
Rear Door 1.25 (31.8)
1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1)
8.00 (203.2) A 8.00 (203.2) A&B 8.00 (203.2) A 12
Roof Layout D Roof Layout D Roof Layout D 13
14
Front Front Front
48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 30.00 (762.0)

16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
78.00 (1981.2) 15
16.00 (406.4) 16.00 (406.4)
11.00 (279.4) 59.00 (1498.6)
Optional 16.00 (406.4) 15.00 (381.0) 8.00 (203.2)
Rear Door
6.60 (167.6) 6.60 (167.6) 16
8.00 (203.2) A 6.00 (152.4) A&B
Floor Layout
D Floor Layout D
Floor Layout
D
17
16 16 16
16.00 (406.4) B
8.00 (203.2) 8 A 18
8.00 (203.2) Front 8.00 (203.2) Front
48.00 (1219.2) 48.00 (1219.2) 78.00 (1981.2)

19
Figure 8.0-24. 27 and 38 kV Roof Layouts and Floor Layouts
3 When high continuous current fusing or instrumentation is required, consult the Eaton factory for guidance.
Note: A = Power Cable to Load. B = Power Cable from Source. See Figures 8.0-11 and 8.0-21 through 8.0-22 as applicable for dimension D 20
on Pages 8.0-19 and 8.0-24.


Sheet 08 026
LayoutsDimensions
a Locations for tie-down 0.65 (16.5) diameter holes in four

i places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should
be 0.5013 min. SAE Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 CL 10.9) and
tightened to 75 ft-lb (101.7 Nm).
ii
5 7
2 c The standard minimum clearances on side24.00 inches
1 5.00
(127.0) 6 (609.6 mm)may need to be added for passage from
Typ.
Optional
front to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may
Rear Door require a larger distance.
2 4.25
(108.0) d Minimum clearances in front is the width of the widest
1.25 vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
3 2.95
(31.8) having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
(74.9)
e The standard minimum recommended distance is 30.00
3
4 6.00 6.00
inches (762.0 mm) for assemblies requiring rear access
(152.4) (152.4) for installation and maintenance. The authority having
Min. Min. jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
5 3
f For MVS only. If the application is specifically provided
1
by contract as not requiring rear access as stated in 5,
then the minimum recommended distance is 6.00 inches
6 (152.4 mm).
1.25
(31.8)
g If optional rear door is supplied, the minimum is
7 4.25
(108.0) the width of the widest vertical section plus 1.00 inch
FRONT DOOR (25.4 mm). The authority having jurisdiction may require
a larger distance.
8
4
h Finished foundations surface shall be level within
2 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm)
Min.
9 left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured
by a laser level.
10 Table 8.0-18. Approximate Weights in Lb (kg)

Switch Indoor Outdoor
. Description
Figure 8.0-25. Typical Anchor Plan515 kV Indoor or Outdoor
11 5 or 15 kV Class
Non-fused switch 1500 (681) 1800 (817)
Fuses (3), add 200 (91) 200 (91)
12 Indoor transition 300 (136)
Outdoor throat 500 (227)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 Dimensions in Inches (mm).


Sheet 08 027
LayoutsDimensions
i
4.50 1.25 (31.8)
(114.3)
Typ. 5
Optional
Rear
ii
Door 2 Min.
Optional 5
2.12
(53.8) Rear Door 1
Typ.
0.44
(11.2)
Typ. 3
5.81
(147.6)
2
1.28
6.00
Typ. (32.5)
6.00 (152.4) Typ.
(152.4)
Min.
Min. 6.00 3
3
(152.4)
3 Min. 3 6.00
(152.4)
Min.
4
1 1
7
0.44 1.25 5
(11.2) (31.8) 1.28
Typ. Typ. (32.5)
5.81 Typ.
(147.6)
Typ.
6
FRONT FRONT DOOR
7
4
4
2 Min. Min.
2
8
9
Figure 8.0-26. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Outdoor Figure 8.0-27. Typical Anchor Plan2738 kV Indoor 10
a Typical location for four (two front, two back) Eaton Table 8.0-19. Approximate Weights in Lb (kg)
supplied tie down clips for all 2738 kV. Customer
provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.5013 min.
Switch
Description
Indoor Outdoor 11
SAE Grade 5 M12 x 1.75 min. CL 10.9 or stronger, and 27 or 38 kV Class
tightened to 75 ft-lb.
Non-fused switch 2000 (908) 2400 (1090) 12
b Door swing equals vertical section width at 90. Fuses (3), add 300 (136) 300 (136)
Indoor transition 1100 (499)
c Minimum clearance on side24.00 inches (609.6 mm) Outdoor throat 1200 (545) 13
may need to be added for passage from front to rear. Motor operator adder 400 (182) 400 (182)
Local jurisdictions may require a larger clearance.
d Minimum clearance in front is the width of the widest
14
vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm), but not less
than that required by the NEC. Local jurisdictions may
require a larger distance.
15
e Minimum clearance in rear is 30.00 inches (762.0 mm).
If rear doors are supplied, the minimum clearance is the 16
width of the widest vertical section equipped with a rear
door plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). Local jurisdictions may
require a larger clearance. 17
f Finished foundations surface shall be level within
0.06-inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) 18
left-to-right, front-to-back and diagonally, as
g Locations for 0.50-inch (12.7 mm) anchor bolts.
19
20
Dimensions in Inches (mm).
21

Sheet 08 028
LayoutsDimensions
i Mini-MVS Switch Arrester

Option
(5 kV, 200 A Only)
ii Dimensions and Weights 12.69
(322.3)
1
6.00 17.38 Line
Maximum weight of switch assembly (152.4) (441.5) Lug
is 550 lb (250 kg).
1
2 Cable
Routing
53.56 Area
2.12
(1360.4)
3 Entrance/Exit (53.8) 1
27.25 Area Top Load
(692.2) Lug
4 15.00
16.38
(416.1)
(381.0)
5 Front 4.11 29.50

4.11
(104.4) 26.00 (104.4) (749.3)
6 (660.4)
1
Top View Ground
Lug
7 27.25
Front View w/o Door and (692.2)
2.12 Screen Barrier Non-Fused Switch
8 Entrance/Exit
(53.8)
Side Section View Non-Fused Switch
27.25
(692.2)
Area Bottom Figure 8.0-29. Front and Side View of Non-Fused Mini-MVS Switchgear Assembly
3.37 1 Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.
9 (85.6)
Arrester
Option
10 Front
4.11 4.11 12.69
(104.4) 26.00 (104.4) (322.3) 2
(660.4)
11 Floor Plan
6.00 17.38 Line
(152.4) (441.5) Lug
12 Lifting Plates
13 Cable
Routing
Area
14
Viewing
53.56
Window
15 (1360.4)
66.25
16 (1682.8)
Load 2
16.25 Lug
17 11.50 (412.8)
(292.1) Ground 2
Lug
18 27.25
Front View w/o Door and
Screen Barrier CLE Fused Switch (692.2)
Side Section View CLE Fused Switch
19
26.00 Figure 8.0-30. Front and Side View of Fused CLE Mini-MVS Switch Assembly
2 Cable Size #62/0, 1/Phase.
(660.4)
20 Front View Note: The Mini-MVS unit is designed for front access only or as front and rear access. Cable
terminations are accessible from the front. The unit can be placed against the wall, with a
minimum 6.00-inch (152.4 mm) clearance. For rear access applications, a minimum 30.00-inch
21 Figure 8.0-28. Front View and (762.0) clearance is recommended. Check for additional NEC code clearance requirements.
Conduit Entrance

Sheet 08 029
General Description
MVS-ND Medium VoltageLoad Interrupter Switchgear Mechanical indicators show whether

the switch mechanism i
5 and 15 kV (18.00-Inch Wide) is open or closed
Provisions for padlocking the switch
in open or closed position ii
Provision for padlocking the main
door in closed position
1
Space heaters are provided as
standard for outdoor switchgear
(120 V or 240 Vac control supply is 2
to be provided by the purchaser)
Instrumentation, CTs, VTs and CPT
Due to compact dimensions, MVS-ND
3
units are not designed for mounting of
CTs, VTs or a CPT. If the application 4
requires CTs, VTs or a CPT, a conven-
tional 36.00-inch-wide MVS unit is
required, which can be close-coupled 5
to the MVS-ND unit through an
18.00-inch transition section.
6
Standards and Certifications
Eatons MVS-ND load interrupter
Indoor Unit Indoor with Top Hat Outdoor with Top Hat switchgear meets or exceeds the 7
requirements of the following
General Description industry standards:
8
Type MVS-ND load interrupter switch- Supplied with manually or motor IEEE Standard C37.20.3
gear offers the same great functionality operated switches ANSI C37.57
of traditional MVS switchgear in a Supplied with non-fused or fused NEMA SG5 9
reduced footprint. It uses a Type MVS-ND switches with 5 kV BHLE 10450 A or
load interrupter switch with its poles Canadian Standard CAN/
15 kV BHLE 10250 A or BHCL 300 A
CSA C22.2 No. 31
arranged front-to-back and provides primary fuses 10
the narrowest footprint available with- Optional auxiliary switch with up to Type MVS-ND switches meet or
out the use of environmentally harmful 5a/5b contacts exceed the requirements of the
SF6 gas. Type MVS-ND switchgear, like
Optional space heaters for indoor following industry standards: 11
all other Eaton metal-enclosed and
metal-clad switchgear, depends on air switchgear IEEE Standard C37.20.4
for its primary phase-to-phase and Supplied with key interlocks to force 12
ANSI C37.58
phase-to-ground insulation. It is a desired sequence of operation
ANSI C37.22
designed for general power distribu- Surge arresters (optional) can be
NEMA SG6
tion or transformer primary switching, added to the line or load side 13
where infrequent switching means is Canadian Standards CAN/CSA C22.2
required. Standard Features No. 193 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 58
Type MVS-ND load interrupter switch-
Air insulated three-pole, gang-
Third-Party Certification 14
operated, quick-make, quick-break
gear is available as follows: load interrupter switch mechanism 5/15 kV MVS-ND load interrupter
Rated maximum voltage of provides speed of operation that is switchgear can be provided with UL
or CSA listing.
15
4.76 or 15 kV independent of the operator for safe
and reliable switching
Rated continuous and load-break Seismic Qualification
current rating of 600 or 1200 A Proven load interrupter switch 16
design that uses main and flicker
Indoor or outdoor non-walk-in
blade technology
enclosures 17
A through-the-door switch operation
Can be supplied as single unit
from the front of the switchgear
or lineup of multiple units with
A door interlock prevents inadvertent
main bus
opening of the enclosures front 5/15 kV MVS-ND load interrupter 18
Duplex arrangement for Source 1
door while the load interrupter switchgear has been qualified for
or Source 2 selection seismic applications by actual testing
switch is in the closed position
Main-tie-main lineup to meet requirements of IBC 2006 and
19
A switch interlock prevents
Close-coupled primary for dry or inadvertent closing of the switch when CBC 2007. Refer to Tab 1 for informa-
liquid-filled transformer tion for this and other Eaton products.
the enclosures front door is open 20
Close-coupled to Eatons Type MVS, Viewing window provides clear,
Type VCP-W or AMPGARD motor visible confirmation of opened and
control center via an 18.00-inch closed switch contacts 21
transition section

Sheet 08 030
Technical Data
Technical Data
i
Available Ratings
Refer to Table 8.0-20 for available Type MVS-ND switchgear assembly and Table 8.0-21 for MVS-ND switch ratings.
ii
Table 8.0-20. Type MVS-ND Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear Assembly Main Cross Bus Ratings
Rated Power Frequency Lightning Impulse Rated Main Bus Rated Short-Time Rated Momentary
1 Maximum Withstand Voltage, Withstand Voltage Continuous Short-Circuit Current Short-Circuit Current
Voltage 60 Hz, 1 Minute (LIWV) (BIL) Current Withstand (2 Second) Withstand (10 Cycle) (167 ms)
kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms sym kA rms Asym kA Peak
2
4.76 19 60 600, 1200 25 40 65
4.76 19 60 600, 1200 38 61 99
3 15.00
15.00
36
36
95
95
600, 1200
600, 1200
25
38
40
61
65
99
Table 8.0-21. Type MVS-ND Non-Fused Load Interrupter Switch Ratings 1

4
Rated Power Frequency Lightning Impulse Rated Rated Short-Time Rated Fault-Close Rated Rated Load
Maximum Withstand Voltage, Withstand Voltage Continuous Short-Circuit and Momentary Magnetizing Break
Voltage 60 Hz, 1 Minute (LIWV) (BIL) and Load Break Current Withstand Short-Circuit Current Current Current
5 Current (2 Second) (10 Cycle) (167 ms) Operations
kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms sym kA rms Asym kA Peak Amperes
6 4.76 19 60 600 25 40 65 12 50
4.76 19 60 600 38 61 99 12 50
4.76 19 60 1200 25 40 65 24 20
7 4.76 19 60 1200 38 61 99 24 20
15.00 36 95 600 25 40 65 12 30
15.00 36 95 600 38 61 99 12 30
8 15.00
15.00
36
36
95
95
1200
1200
25
38
40
61
65
99
24
24
10
10
1 Fault-close rating of MVS-ND when supplied with 5BHLE 10450 A and 15BHLE 10250 A or 15BHCL 300 A fuses is 160.6 kA peak.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 031
LayoutsDimensions

i
12.00 12.00
(304.8) (304.8) ii
60.00 60.00 60.00 60.00
(1524.0) (1524.0) (1524.0) (1524.0)
20.00 20.00 60.00 20.00 20.00 60.00 1

(508.0) (508.0) (1524.0) (508.0) (508.0) (1524.0)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
3
TX TX TX
4
18.00 18.00
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2) (457.2) 6.00
(457.2) 5
6.00 (152.4) 24.00
(152.4) (610.0)
Single Unit
Cable in Top
Single Unit
Cable in Bottom
Single Unit
Cable in Side
Primary for Dry-Type
Transformer Cable
Transformer Cable Connected
Transformer Cable Connected 6
Out Bottom Out Bottom Out Bottom Connected (Incoming (Incoming Cables from Bottom, (Incoming Cables from Bottom,
Cables from Top) Rear Access) Side Access)
12.00
7
(305.0)
60.00 60.00
60.00
(1524.0)
(1524.0)
(1524.0)
8
20.00 20.00
20.00 60.00
(508.0) (508.0)
(508.0) (1524.0)
92.00 TX 92.00 TX 92.00 TX 92.00

10
(2336.8) (2336.8) (2336.8) (2336.8)
11
18.00
(457.2) 18.00
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00 12
6.00 18.00 (457.2)
18.00 (457.2) 36.00 (152.4) 42.00 (457.2) 18.00
(457.2) (914.0) (1067.0) (457.2)
Primary for Liquid-Filled Primary for Liquid-Filled Primary for Liquid-Filled Duplex Arrangement 13
Transformer Bus Connected Transformer Bus Connected Transformer Bus Connected Source Selective
(Incoming Cables from Top) (Incoming Cables from Bottom, (Incoming Cables from Bottom,
Rear Access) Side Access)
14
60.00 60.00
(1524.0) (1524.0)
20.00 60.00
(1524.0)
20.00 15
(508.0) (508.0)
16
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
92.00
(2336.8)
17
18
18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00
(457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) 19
15.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 15.00
(381.0) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (381.0)
Main Switch and Feeders Main Switch and Feeders Main-Tie-Main

20
Figure 8.0-31. 5 and 15 kV

Sheet 08 032
LayoutsDimensions
i 7.50
(190.5)
7.50
(190.5)
ii Main Bus
Switch Transition
Feeder Bus
Switch Transition
Main Bus
Switch Transition
Feeder Bus
Switch Transition
Section Section Section Section
60.00 60.00 60.00 VCP-W 60.00 VCP-W

Medium Medium
1 (1524.0)
MVS-ND
AMPGARD
Medium 30.00
(1524.0)
MVS-ND
AMPGARD
Medium 30.00
(1524.0)
MVS-ND
Voltage
Switchgear
96.25
(1524.0)
MVS-ND
Voltage
Switchgear
96.25
Switchgear Voltage Switchgear Voltage Switchgear (2444.8) Switchgear (2444.8)
(762.0) (762.0)
Starters Starters
2 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00

(457.2) (457.2) (457.2) (457.2)
18.00 36.00 18.00 36.00 18.00 18.00
(457.2) (914.4) (457.2) (914.4) (457.2) (457.2)
3 Plan View Plan View 36.00 36.00
(914.4) (914.4)
Plan View Plan View
4
Main Main
Switch Switch
5
AMPGARD AMPGARD VCP-W VCP-W
6 92.00
(2336.8)
Medium
Voltage
92.00
(2336.8)
Medium
Voltage
92.00
(2336.8)
Medium
Voltage
95.00
(2413.0)
92.00
(2336.8)
Medium
Voltage
95.00
(2413.0)
Starters Starters Switchgear Switchgear
7
Feeder Feeder
Switch Switch
8 18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00
(457.2)
18.00 36.00 18.00 36.00 18.00 36.00 18.00 36.00
(457.2) (914.4) (457.2) (914.4) (457.2) (914.4) (457.2) (914.4)
9 Front View Front View Front View Front View
10 Figure 8.0-32. MVS Connecting to Other Switchgear (Indoor)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 033
LayoutsDimensions
7.50 7.50 i
(190.5) (190.5)
Main Bus Feeder Bus

ii
Switch Transition Switch Transition
Section Section
VCP-W VCP-W
60.00
(1524.0)
Medium
Voltage 96.25
60.00
(1524.0)
Medium
Voltage 96.25
1
MVS-ND Switchgear (2444.8) MVS-ND Switchgear (2444.8)
Switchgear Switchgear
2
18.00 18.00
(457.2) (457.2)
18.00
4.00
(101.6) 18.00
4.00
(101.6)
3
(457.2) (457.2)
36.00 36.00
(914.4) (914.4) 4
Plan View Plan View
4.00 4.00
5
(101.6) (101.6)
Main
Switch 6
7
92.00 95.00 92.00 95.00
VCP-W VCP-W
(2336.8) Medium (2413.0) (2336.8) Medium (2413.0)
Voltage
Switchgear
Voltage
Switchgear
8
Feeder
Switch
9
18.00 36.00 18.00 36.00
(457.2)
18.00
(914.4) (457.2)
18.00
(914.4)
10
(457.2) (457.2)
Front View Front View

11
Figure 8.0-33. MVS Connecting to Other Switchgear (Outdoor)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Dimensions in inches (mm).
21

Sheet 08 034
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Sectional Side Views

i
60.00
ii (1524.0)
10.00
(254.0) 1.13
(28.7)
1 1.27
17.00
(431.8) 9.36
(32.3) (237.7) Bolted Rear Cover
Front
Door
2
3 1.57
(39.9)
Switch
Access
4 Door
92.00
(2336.8)
5 80.00
(2032.0)
17.89 17.00 17.00
(454.4) (431.8) (431.8)
6
9.36
17.00 (237.7)
7 23.00
(584.2)
(431.8)
10.00 (254.0)
25.60
(650.2)
Lower Main Bus Location Lug
Height
8
Figure 8.0-34. 5 and 15 kV Standard Switch Unit Detail
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 035
LayoutsDimensions, 5 and 15 kV
5 and 15 kV Standard Switch Unit Detail Typical Sectional Side Views Layouts
i
Top Cable Entry in
6.00-Inch (152.4 mm)
LH/RH Pull Section ii
Main Bus
Main Bus
1
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
Switch
118.13
(3000.5)
Outdoor
2
Switch 92.00
(2336.8) Switch
Indoor
92.00
(2336.8)
Indoor
Fuse
112.00
(2844.8)
Indoor
3
Fuse Fuse
Load
Load
4
Load 25.54
(648.7)
25.54
25.54 (648.7)
(648.7)
5
60.00
(1524.0) 60.00
(1524.0) 12.00
60.00
(1524.0)
Figure 8.0-37. Front/Side Access Feeder Circuit
72.00
(1828.8)
(304.8)
6
Figure 8.0-35. Front/Side Access Feeder Fused or Unfused Bottom Cable Entry
CircuitFused or Unfused Top Cable Entry Figure 8.0-39. Front/Side Access Cable In/
Cable OutFused or Unfused
7
Top Cable Entry in
6.00-Inch (152.4 mm)
LH/RH Pull Section
8
Main Bus
9
98.13
(2492.5)
Outdoor
Switch
10
92.00
(2336.8)
Indoor
118.13 118.13
(3000.5) (3000.5)
Fuse
Outdoor
Switch
Outdoor
11
Switch
Load 112.00
112.00
25.54
(648.7)
(2844.8)
Indoor (2844.8)
Indoor 12
Fuse Fuse
60.00
(1524.0)
12.00 Load Load
13
(304.8)
72.00
(1828.8) 25.54
(648.7) 25.54
(648.7)
14
Figure 8.0-36. Front/Side Access Feeder
CircuitFused or Unfused Top Cable Entry 60.00
60.00
(1524.0)
(1524.0)
15
Figure 8.0-38. Front/Side Access Cable In/ Figure 8.0-40. Front/Side Access Cable In/
Cable OutFused or Unfused Cable OutFused or Unfused 16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 036
ii 22.89 13.50 13.50

(581.4) (342.9) (342.9)
1
Line
2 118.13
(3000.5)
Outdoor
Switch Switch
3 92.00 112.00
(2336.8) (2844.8)
Indoor
4 Fuse Fuse
5 Load
Connection to Dry or
Liquid Transformer
6
60.00
7 16.81
(427.0)
13.50
(342.9)
13.50
(342.9) (1524.0)
12.00
(304.8)
60.00 72.00
(1828.8)
8 (1524.0)
Figure 8.0-41. Typical Arrester Mounting Figure 8.0-42. Close-Coupled to Dry and Liquid Transformers with 12-Inch Rear Extension, Bottom
9 Incoming, Rear Access
10
11
12
98.13
(2492.5) Switch
13 Outdoor
92.00
14 (2336.8)
Indoor
Fuse
15 Bottom
Cable Entry
in 6-Inch
Left Hand/
16 Right Hand
Pull Section Connection to
Dry or Liquid
Transformer
17
18.00 6.00 Bottom Cable Entry in 6-Inch
Left Hand/Right Hand Pull Section
18 (457.2)
24.00
(152.0)
60.00
(609.6) (1524.0)
19 Front View Sectional Side View
Figure 8.0-43. Close-Coupled to Dry and Liquid Transformers with 6-Inch Side Pull Section,
20 Bottom Incoming, Side Access


Sheet 08 037
Typical Base Plan and Recommended HV Cable Entry/Exit Locations

i
Roof Layout 14.00
(355.6) ii
2.00 2.00
(51.2) (50.8)
8.00
1
(203.2)
3 2
38.37 38.37
60.00 (974.6) 60.00 (974.6) 48.00
(1524.0) 2 (1524.0) 2 (1219.2)
72.00
3
(1828.8)
62.00
(1574.8) 2
4
18.00
12.63 12.63 (457.2)
(320.8) (320.8)
5
6.00 12.63
4.00 4.00 4.00 1.00 (152.4) (320.8)
(101.6) (25.4)
(101.6)
10.00
(101.6)
10.00
6
(254.0) (254.0) 4.00 4.00 4.00
(101.6) (101.6) (101.6)
18.00 24.00
(457.2) (609.6) 10.00
(254.0)
7
18.00
(457.2)
8
Floor Layout 13.00
2.50
(330.2)
2.50
9
(63.5) (63.5)
8.00 10
(203.2)
3 11
60.00 60.00 48.00
(1524.0) (1524.0) (1219.2)
72.00
12
18.00 18.00 (1828.8)
(457.2) 1 (457.2) 1 62.00
(1574.8)
13
18.00
12.63 12.63 (457.2) 1
(320.8) (320.8)
14
6.00 12.63
4.00 4.00 4.00 1.00 (152.4) (320.8)
(101.6) (101.6) (101.6) (25.4)
10.00 10.00
(254.0)
15
(254.0) 4.00
(101.6) 4.00 4.00
18.00 24.00 (101.6) (101.6)
(457.2) (609.6)
10.00
(254.0)
16
Switch Unit LH/RH Side Pull Section
18.00
(457.2)
17
= Recommended Cable Entry Points Rear Pull Section
a Area is not available with bottom main bus. 18

b Area is not available with top main bus.
c Area will be limited by top or bottom main bus 19
Figure 8.0-44. Recommended HV Cable Entry/Exit Locations
20
21

Sheet 08 038
LayoutsDimensionsWeights
Typical Anchor Plan

i
a Locations for tie-down 0.75 (19.0) diameter holes in six
places. Customer provided bolts for anchoring should be
ii 0.5013 min. Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 CL 10.9) and tightened
to 75 ft-lb (101.7 Nm).
1 5
6
3.00 Rear c The standard minimum clearances on side24.00 inches
1.13
2 (76.2) Cover (28.7) (609 mm)may need to be added for passage from front
to rear. The authority having jurisdiction may require a
larger distance.
3 22.88 d Minimum clearances in front is the width of the widest
(581.2) 60.00
4.00 (1524.0)
vertical section plus 1.00 inch (25.4 mm). The authority
having jurisdiction may require a larger distance.
4 6.00
(102.0)
6.00
(152.4) (152.4) e The standard minimum recommended distance is
Min. Min. 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) for assemblies requiring
5 3 5 3 5 rear or side access for installation and maintenance.
26.44 3.00 The authority having jurisdiction may require a
(671.6) (76.2) larger distance.
6 1
f For MVS-ND only. The application is specifically
provided by contract as not requiring rear access as
7 Front 1.28
stated in Note 5, then the minimum recommended
5.94 distance is 6.00 inches (152.4 mm).
(150.9) Door (32.5)
4 g Finished foundations surface shall be level within
8 2
left-to-right. Front-to-back and diagonally as measured
9 by a laser level.
Figure 8.0-45. Typical Anchor Plan

10
Table 8.0-22. Type MVS-ND Fused Load Interrupter Switch StructuresApproximate Weights
11 Structure DimensionsInches (mm) Weightlb (kg)
Type Width Depth Height Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit
12 Switch without Top Hat 18.00 (457.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 92.00 (2336.8) 800 (363) 900 (408)
18.00 (457.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 950 (431) 1100 (499)
24.00 (609.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 92.00 (2336.8) 875 (397) 1000 (454)
13 24.00 (609.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 92.00 (2336.8) 1025 (465) 1200 (544)
Switch with Top Hat 18.00 (457.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 900 (408) 1000 (454)
18.00 (457.2) 72.00 (1828.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 1050 (476) 1200 (544)
14 24.00 (609.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 975 (442) 1100 (499)
24.00 (609.6) 72.00 (1828.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 1125 (510) 1300 (590)
15 Main Bus Transition 15.00 (381.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 92.00 (2336.8) 500 (227) 600 (272)
Transition Unit 18.00 (457.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 92.00 (2336.8) 800 (363) 900 (408)
Duplex Unit with Top Hat 36.00 (914.0) 60.00 (1524.0) 112.00 (2844.8) 1700 (771) 1900 (862)
16 36.00 (914.0) 72.00 (1828.8) 112.00 (2844.8) 1850 (839) 2050 (930)
Duplex Unit without Top Hat 48.00 (1219.2) 60.00 (1524.0) 92.00 (2336.8) 2200 (998) 2500 (1134)
17
18
19
20


Sheet 08 039
General Description
Arc-Resistant MVS Metal- Arcing faults can occur within the The user should also refer to docu-
i
switchgear as a result of insulation ments such as NFPA 70E, for safety
Enclosed Load Interrupter failure or human error. Arcing faults training and safe work practices and
Switchgear5 and 15 kV occurring in air between phases or for methods of evaluating safe work
ii
phase and ground within the confines distances from energized equipment
of the switchgear produce a variety based on the potential flash hazard,
of physical phenomena, including and use proper PPE when working
tremendous release of heat at the on or near energized equipment with 1
point of fault and sudden pressure the door/cover opened or not properly
increase. Heat from the arc may secured.
decompose or vaporize materials 2
involved in its path. The effects of Standards and Certifications
this type of fault vary depending on
enclosure volume, arc duration, arc Eatons arc-resistant MVS metal- 3
voltage and available short-circuit enclosed load interrupter switchgear
current. If an internal arcing fault meets or exceeds the requirements
occurs within the switchgear that is of IEEE Std C37.20.7-2007, Guide for 4
not designed and tested to withstand Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
effects of such a fault, its parts could for Internal Arcing Faults. It also meets
blow off along with discharge of hot or exceeds the following industry 5
decomposed matter, gaseous or partic- standards:
ulate, causing injury to personnel who IEEE Standard C37.20.3
may be present in the vicinity of the 6
ANSI C37.57
switchgear.
NEMA SG5
Arc-resistant MVS metal-enclosed Canadian Standard CAN/ 7
load interrupter switchgear is designed CSA C22.2 No. 31
and tested to withstand the effects of
an internal arcing fault by controlling Type MVS switches meet or exceed 8
and directing the effects of the arc the requirements of the following
away from personnel in a safe manner. industry standards:
Arc-resistant features are intended
IEEE Standard C37.20.4
9
to provide an additional degree of
protection to the personnel performing ANSI C37.58
normal operating duties in close ANSI C37.22 10
proximity to the equipment while it NEMA SG6
is operating under normal conditions. Canadian Standards CAN/CSA C22.2
Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed Load The normal operating conditions for No. 193 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 58 11
Interrupter Switchgear proper application of arc-resistant
switchgear designs are as follows: Third-Party Certification
General Description All doors and covers providing 5/15 kV arc-resistant MVS metal- 12
Eatons 5/15 kV MVS metal-enclosed access to high voltage components enclosed load interrupter switchgear
can be provided with CSA (Canada or
load interrupter switchgear is now are properly closed and latched
USA) or UL (USA only) listing. Contact 13
available with arc-resistant construction Pressure-relief devices are free
with accessibility Type 2B in accor- Eaton for available ratings.
to operate
dance with IEEE Std C37.20.7-2007. The fault current discharged into Seismic Qualification 14
Type MVS arc-resistant switchgear is the equipment does not exceed the
designed for indoor use. It can also be rated internal arc short-circuit current
used outdoor (37-, 53-, 68- and 82-inch and duration of the equipment 15
deep units only) with space heaters.
There are no obstructions around
It can be configured for a variety of
the equipment that could direct the
applications. Switches can be supplied
arc fault products into an area 16
with manual or electrical operating 5/15 kV arc-resistant MVS metal-
mechanism and with or without primary intended to be protected
enclosed load interrupter switchgear
The equipment is properly grounded
fuses. Type 2B accessibility provides has been qualified for seismic applica- 17
arc-resistant features and protection at tions by actual testing to meet require-
the freely accessible exterior (front, back ments of IBC 2006 and CBC 2007. Refer
and sides) of the equipment as well to Tab 1 for information for this and 18
as in front of the instrument/control other Eaton products.
compartment with the instrument/
control compartment door opened 19
while the equipment is energized
and operating normally.
20
21

Sheet 08 040
Technical Data
Technical Data
i
Available Ratings
Refer to Table 8.0-23 for available arc-resistant MVS metal-enclosed load interrupter switchgear assembly ratings.
ii Refer to Table 8.0-1 and Table 8.0-6 for non-fused and fused MVS switch ratings.
Refer to Table 8.0-2 and Table 8.0-3 for MVS switch duty cycle ratings.
1 Table 8.0-23. Arc-Resistant MVS Metal-Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear Assembly Ratings
Switchgear Assembly Main Cross Bus Ratings Switchgear Assembly Internal Arc Withstand Ratings
per IEEE C37.20.3-2001 per IEEE C37.20.7
2 Rated Power Lightning Rated Rated Momentary Rated Accessibility Rated Internal Rated
Maximum Frequency Impulse Main Bus Short-Circuit Short-Time Type Arc Short-Circuit Internal Arc
Voltage Withstand Withstand Continuous Current Withstand Short-Circuit Withstand Current Short-Circuit
3 Voltage,
60 Hz,
Voltage Current (10 Cycle) (167 ms) Current Duration
(LIWV) Withstand
1 Minute (BIL) (2 Second)
4 kV rms kV rms kV Peak Amperes kA rms Asym kA Peak kA rms Sym kA rms Sym kA Peak Seconds
4.76 19 60 600, 1200 40 65 25 2B 25 65 0.5

4.76 19 60 600, 1200 61 99 38 2B 40 104 0.5
5 4.76 19 60 2000 61 99 38 2B 40 104 0.5
4.76 19 60 600, 1200 80 130 50 2B 40 104 0.5
6 4.76 19 60 2000 80 130 50 2B 40 104 0.5
4.76 19 60 2000 101 164 63 2B 40 104 0.5
15 36 95 600, 1200 40 65 25 2B 25 65 0.5
7 15 36 95 600, 1200 61 99 38 2B 40 104 0.5
15 36 95 600, 1200 80 130 50 2B 40 104 0.5
8 15 36 95 600, 1200 101 164 63 2B 40 104 0.5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 041
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Arrangements
i
Main Incoming Switch Feeder Switch Bus-Tie Switch
ii
Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust
30.00 Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum
(762.0) 1
3
95.00
(2413.0)
4
5
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
6
Duplex Transformer Transformer 7

Arrangement Standalone Switch Primary Switch Primary Switch
Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust Arc Exhaust
Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum 8
10
11
Dry-Type Liquid-Filled
Transformer Transformer
12
13
36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 36.00 20.00
(914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (508.0)
1.49 1.49 1.49 1.49 1.49 1.49 1.49
14
(37.8) (37.8) (37.8) (37.8) (37.8) (37.8) (37.8)
Figure 8.0-46. Available ConfigurationsTypical One-Line Arrangements

15
a Each end of lineup contains a 1.49 inch (37.8) endskin.
16
b Depth of units will vary due to cable entrance and
exit requirements, the addition of lightning arresters,
instrument transformers, special cable terminators, etc. 17
c Minimum depth of MVS unit: up to two 500 kcm per
phase: 53.00 inches (1346.2 mm); three or four 500 kcm 18
per phase: 68.00 inches (1727.2 mm); five or six 500 kcm
per phase: 82.00 inches (2082.8 mm).
19
20
21

Sheet 08 042
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Arrangements (Continued)

i
ii 95.00 Inches (2413.0 mm) Deep 108.00 Inches (2743.2 mm) Deep 95.00 Inches (2413.0 mm) Deep 95.00 Inches (2413.0 mm) Deep
4
MVS MVA MVS MVA MVS Transition AMPGARD MVS Transition AMPGARD
5 Front Aligned, Rear Aligned,
Facing Front Facing Rear
LH/RH Available LH/RH Available
6
108.00 Inches (2743.2 mm) Deep 108.00 Inches (2743.2 mm) Deep
108.00 Inches (2743.2 mm) Deep
7
10
11
MVS Transition AMPGARD MVS Transition AMPGARD MVS Transition AMPGARD
12 Front Aligned,
Facing Front
Rear Aligned,
Facing Rear
Front/Rear Aligned,
Facing Out
LH/RH Available LH/RH Available LH/RH Available
13
95.00 Inches (2413.0 mm) Deep 95.00 Inches (2413.0 mm) Deep
14
15
16
MVA MVA
17 Cell Cell
18
Figure 8.0-47. Available ConfigurationsClose-Coupling to Arc-Resistant MVA and AMPGARD
19
20
21

Sheet 08 043
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Layout Dimensions: 5/15 kV

i
34.39
(873.5) ii
Arc Arc Arc Arc
Plenum 30.00
(762.0)
Plenum Plenum Plenum 1
3
95.00
(2413.0) 4
28.37 5
(720.6)
34.00 49.50 64.50 78.50 6

(863.6) (1257.3) (1638.3) (1993.9)
37.00 Inches 53.00 Inches 68.00 Inches 82.00 Inches
(939.8 mm) Deep (1346.2 mm) Deep (1727.2 mm) Deep (2082.8 mm) Deep 7
1 or 2 Out Bottom 1 or 2 In/Out 3 or 4 Top 5 or 6 Top
1 or 2 Out Top Top/Bottom In/Bottom Out In/Bottom Out
(Indoor Only) 8
9
Arc Arc Arc 32.00
Plenum Plenum Plenum
(812.8) 10
11
12
95.00 95.00
(2413.0) (2413.0)
13
28.37
(720.6)
17.79
(451.9)
14
49.50 49.50 26.32 15

(1257.3) (1257.3) (668.5)
95.00
53.00-Inch (1346.2 mm) Duplex 68.00-Inch (1727.2 mm) Duplex (2413.0)
(Available in 82.00-Inch [2082.8 mm] 16
for Other Cable Configurations) MVS-MVA 96.00 Inches (2438.4 mm) Deep
Figure 8.0-48. Typical Sectional Side Views5/15 kV Arc-Resistant MVS 17

Note: Number of cables are based on 500 kcm.
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 044
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Layout Dimensions: 5/15 kV (Continued)

i
ii AMPGARD
Medium 50.00
AMPGARD Voltage (1270.0)
1 96.00
(2438.4)
Medium
Voltage
50.00
(1270.0) Transition
Starters
Transition Transition Starters

96.00 Main
2 (2438.4)
Main Main 4.00
108.00
Switch
AMPGARD
Switch AMPGARD Switch (101.6)
Medium 50.00 36.00 (2743.2) Medium 50.00
MVS Arc Voltage (1270.0) MVS Arc (914.4) MVS Arc Voltage (1270.0)
3 Switchgear Starters Switchgear Switchgear Starters
4 1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
1.49
(37.8)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
36.00
(914.4)
4.00 4.00
(101.6) Plan View (101.6)
5 1.49 1.49
(37.8) (37.8)
Plan View Plan View

6
7 32.00
(812.8)
Plenum Plenum AMPGARD
Plenum
32.00
(812.8)
Plenum
32.00
(812.8)
Plenum
8 Main
Switch
Main
Switch
Main
Switch
9 95.00
AMPGARD
95.00
AMPGARD
95.00
AMPGARD
Medium Medium Medium
(2413.0) (2413.0) (2413.0)
Voltage Voltage Voltage
Starters Starters Starters
10
11
1.49 36.00 36.00 36.00 1.49 36.00 36.00 36.00 1.49 36.00 36.00 36.00
(37.8) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (37.8) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4) (37.8) (914.4) (914.4) (914.4)
12 4.00 4.00 4.00
(101.6) (101.6) (101.6)
1.49 1.49 1.49
(37.8)
13 (37.8) (37.8)
Front View Front View Front View
14 Figure 8.0-49. Typical Layout DimensionsIndoor Arc-Resistant MVS Close-Coupled to Indoor Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Sheet 08 045
LayoutsDimensions
Typical Anchor Plan

i
2 ii
Rear
0.88 Door
2
(22.4)
34.25 1
(870.0)
Rear 1
0.88 Door
(22.4) 34.25
2
1
(870.0)
1
3
3
1 41.75 49.50
3
3
26.25 (1060.5) (1257.3)
(666.8) 34.00
(863.6)
4
1 1 1 1
5
5.96 36.00 5.96 36.00 6

(151.4) (914.4) (151.4) (914.4)
Front Door Front Door
2 2
7
2
8
Rear
Door
2
0.88
(22.4) 34.25
9
Rear (870.0)
0.88
Door 1
(22.4)
34.25
10
8.00 (870.0) 1
(203.2) 22.00
1
6.75 (558.8) 11
(171.5)
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 12
3 1 3
3
6.75 78.50
64.50 (171.5) (1993.9) 13
41.75 (1638.3)
41.75
(1060.5) (1060.5)
14
1 1 1 1 15
16
5.96 36.00 5.96 36.00
(151.4) (914.4) (151.4) (914.4)
Front Door Front Door 17
2 2
18
Figure 8.0-50. Typical Anchor Plan5/15 kV Arc-Resistant MVS Units
a Locations for tie-down 0.87 (22.1) diameter holes. c Finished foundations surface shall be level within 19
Customer-provided bolts for anchoring should be 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) in 36.00 inches (914.4 mm) left-to-
0.5013 minimum SAE Grade 5 (M12 x 1.75 minimum right, front-to-back and diagonally, as measured by a
CL 10.9) and tightened to 75 ft-lb (101.7 Nm). laser level. 20
21

Sheet 08 046
LayoutsDimensions
Arc Duct Layout

i 16.00
Type MVS arc-resistant switchgear is supplied with an arc
(406.4)
exhaust plenum fitted on top of the switchgear. To maintain
ii 10.00
(254.0)
Type 2B accessibility, one arc duct is required to direct the
arc exhaust out of the common plenum to the outside. Arc
duct can be supplied by Eaton when included in its scope of
1 supply or it can be supplied by the customer. When supplied
by the customer, it must be made and installed in accordance
D D = Unit Depth
16.00 49.50 (1257.3),
with basic minimum design requirements provided by Eaton.
2 (406.4) 64.50 (1638.3) Arc duct can be fitted on the left end, right end, rear or front
18.00 and of the exhaust plenum as shown in Figure 8.0-53. Arc duct
(457.2) 78.50 (1993.9) can consist of straight pieces or 90 or 45 degree bends as
3 required to suit the installation layout.
18.00
(457.2)
4 36.00 Plenum Layout
(914.4) Suggested Direction
Available Direction
5 16.00
(406.4)
(Length of Exhaust to be
Determined by Customer)

6 34.00
(863.6)
16.00
7 (406.4)
18.00
(457.2) Arc Duct
8
18.00
(457.2)
Recommended
9 36.00
(914.4) Conduit Entry/Exit

10 Figure 8.0-51. Recommended HV Cable Exit/Entry Locations
(37.00-, 53.00-, 68.00- and 82.00-Inch [939.8-, 1346.2-, 1727.2- and
2082.8-mm] Deep MVS Units) Front of the
Switchgear
11
18.00 Figure 8.0-53. Typical Arc Duct Layout
(457.2)
12
14.00
(355.6)
13 16.00
(406.4)
14 16.00
(406.4)
15
D D = Unit Depth
16.00 95.00 (2413.0)
16 (406.4) or
107.00 (2717.8)
16.00
17 (406.4)
18.00 26.50
(673.1)
18 (457.2)
19 36.00
(914.4)
20 Figure 8.0-52. Recommended HV Cable Exit/Entry Locations

(95.00- and 107.00-Inch [2413.0- and 2717.8-mm] Deep MVS Units)
21

FusesMedium Voltage 9.0-1
September 2011
Sheet 09 001
Fuses
Medium Voltage
Contents i
FusesMedium Voltage
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-2 ii
Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-4
Expulsion Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-6 1
Technical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0-7
Specifications
2
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
Section 16362 Section 26 18 16 3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Current Limiting Fuses
21

9.0-2 FusesMedium Voltage
September 2011
Sheet 09 002
i General Description The following fuse terminology will

assist in understanding and selecting
Expulsion vs. Current Limiting
the correct fuse. The following is a Expulsion Fuse: An expulsion fuse is
Medium Voltage Fuses brief overview of those terms. a vented fuse in which the expulsion
ii Eatons entry in the power fuse effect of the gases produced by inter-
nal arcing, either alone or aided by
business began over 75 years ago Power vs. Distribution other mechanisms, results in current
under Westinghouse Electric. In 1935,
The differentiation is intended to
1 Westinghouse introduced the medium
indicate the test conditions and where
interruption.
voltage boric acid expulsion fuse An expulsion fuse is not current
fuses are normally applied in a power
followed by the medium voltage limiting and as a result limits the dura-
system, based on specific requirements
2 current limiting fuse. Even today,
for generating sources, substations tion of a fault on the electrical system,
medium voltage fuses continue to use not the magnitude.
and distribution lines. Each class has
the core Westinghouse technology.
3 its own unique set of voltage, current Current Limiting Fuse: A current limit-
Eaton continues to build on the
and construction requirements ing fuse is a fuse that, when its current
Westinghouse technology legacy by
(see ANSI C37.42, .46 and .47). responsive element is melted by a cur-
engineering higher performance,
4 cost-effective power fuse products.
Low vs. Medium vs. High Voltage
rent within the fuses specified current
limiting range, abruptly introduces
Eaton medium voltage fuses are While fuses are defined in the ANSI a high resistance to reduce current
5 manufactured and tested to the standards as either low or high voltage, magnitude and duration, resulting in
requirements of the ANSI C37.4X Eatons Electrical Sector has elected to subsequent current interruption.
series of standards. name their fuses to correspond with
6 Eaton is the only North American the equipment in which they are Table 9.0-1. General Fuse Comparison
manufacturer of both current limiting installed. Therefore, per ANSI C84, Expulsion Current
fuses are named as follows: Limiting
and expulsion medium voltage power
7 fuses. A full range of general purpose, Vented Sealed
Low Voltage 1000V and below
backup and boric acid fuses is
available for distribution and power Medium Voltage Greater than Electromechanical Static
8 applications. 100069,000V Interrupts at current zero, Limits fault current
High Voltage Greater than limits fault magnitude and
All Eaton medium voltage fuses are current duration duration
9 thoroughly tested and conform to 69,000V
ANSI specifications. Some motor Generally higher voltage Generally higher
starter fuses are UR recognized, and ratings interrupting ratings
10 both current limiting and expulsion
fuses have been approved in UL Different time/current Different time/
characteristics current
rated switchgear. characteristics
11
Current limiting and expulsion fuses
can be used to meet any overcurrent
12 protection need. At any point along
the medium voltage electrical
distribution system, Eaton has a
13 fuse to satisfy your overcurrent
protection needs.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 003
Table 9.0-2. Eaton Medium Voltage Fuse Family

Current Limiting Expulsion i
HLE: Helical configuration current limiting, E-rated RBA: Refillable, boric acid
CLE:
CLS:
Current limiting, E-rated
Current limiting starter (motor starter)
RDB: Refillable, dropout, boric acid
DBU: Dropout, boric acid, indoor/outdoor S&C equivalent
ii
HCL: Current limiting, clip-mount, E-rated
CX: Current limiting, C-rated
CLPT: Current limiting, E-rated 1
Table 9.0-3. Application Guide
Type Fuse Fuse Fuse Maximum Class Use Applied in:
2
Voltage Ampere Interrupting Indoor/Outdoor
Range (kV) Rating Rating (kA Sym.)
Current Limiting 3
CLE 2.415.5 10E1350A 65 General purpose Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers,
indoor/outdoor dip poles, substation capacitor banks.
CLPT 2.438 0.25E10E 80 General purpose Potential transformers. BAL-1 mountings and clips
4
indoor are no longer available.
CLS 2.48.3 2R44R 50 Backup distribution AMPGARD and non-AMPGARD motor starters. HCLS version is the
indoor same as the CLS except hermetically sealed for hazardous locations.
5
CX/CXI 4.315.5 3.5C300C 50 General purpose Pad mounted distribution transformers, Substation service transformers,
CXN distribution indoor and fused switches. Direct substitution for McGraws NX fuse.
HCL 2.415.5 10A900A 63 General purpose Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers,
6
distribution indoor dip poles, substation capacitor banks.
HLE 2.415.5 10E450E 65 General purpose
indoor/outdoor
Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers,
dip poles, substation capacitor banks.
7
Expulsion Fuses
RBA 2.438 0.5E720E 37.5 Boric acid power
indoor
Fused switches, feeder circuit sectionalizing, and power transformers. 8
RDB 2.438 0.5E720E 37.5 Boric acid power Feeder circuit sectionalizing, power transformers, substation
outdoor service transformers, dip poles, potential transformers,
and substation capacitor banks. Outdoor version of the RBA.
9
DBU 4.438 5E200E, 50 Boric acid power Feeder circuit sectionalizing, fused switches, power transformers,
3K200K indoor/outdoor substation service transformers, dip poles, and potential transformers.
Direct equivalent for S&Cs SMU-20 fuse units.
10
Table 9.0-4. Power Fuse Ampere Characteristic Ratings
Rating Definition
11
E Fuses rated 100E or below will melt in 300 seconds at some current value between 2.0 and 2.4 times the E number.
Fuses rated above 100E will melt in 600 seconds at some current value between 2.2 and 2.64 times the E number.
12
R The fuse will melt in 15 to 35 seconds when the current equals 100 times the R number.
C The fuse will melt in 1000 seconds at some current value between 1.7 and 2.4 times the C number. 13
A Class A fuses have parameters that do not fall within the C, E, or R definitions above.
X Meet C37.40 temperature requirements, but not the E rating.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 004
i Current Limiting Fuses Current limiting fuses are constructed

with pure silver fuse elements, high
Multi-Range Fuses
purity silica sand filler, and a glass CLE and HLE fuses are also available in
Current Limiting Fuse Types resin outer casing. user-selectable multi-range versions
ii There are three current limiting fuse 1040A, 50125A and 150200A.
types: backup, general purpose and A high fault current melts the silver
full range. It is important that the user element almost instantly and loses
1 have an understanding of these defini- energy to the surrounding sand. The
tions to ensure proper application of sand melts and forms fulgurite, a
the fuse (Figure 9.0-1). glass-like substance. The arc voltage
2 Backup Fuse: A fuse capable of inter-
rapidly increases to nearly three times
the fuse voltage rating and forces the
rupting all currents from the rated current to zero.
3 maximum interrupting current down
to the rated minimum interrupting Low fault current melts a solder drop
current. on the silver fuse element that, in turn,
melts the silver. The element burns
4 Backup fuses are normally used for back until there is a sufficient internal
Disconnect End Fittings and
Disconnect Live Parts
protection of motor starters and are gap to interrupt the current. This is
always used in series with another known as the M-effect. Accessories
5 interrupting device capable of inter-
rupting currents below the fuses rated Eaton offers current limiting fuses in A wide assortment of mountings, live
minimum interrupting current. two basic types: backup and general parts and end fittings are available to
6 purpose. Backup fuses are applied in facilitate power fuse installation.
General Purpose Fuse: A fuse capable series with another circuit protective
of interrupting all currents from the device, such as a contactor or an Mountings
7 rated maximum interrupting current expulsion fuse, to interrupt high fault Mountings include a base, porcelain
down to the current that causes currents beyond the other devices or glass polyester insulators, and
melting of the fusible element in no range. General purpose fuses are live parts. They help enable the fuse
8 less than one hour. designed to interrupt low fault to be safely attached to the gear.
currents that cause them to melt Mountings can be either disconnect
General purpose fuses are typically or non-disconnect.
in one hour or less.
9 used to protect feeders and
Live Parts
components such as transformers.
Full Range Fuse: A fuse capable of Live parts attach the fuse to the
10 interrupting all currents from the rated insulators and are considered part
maximum interrupting rating down to of the mounting. All parts above the
the minimum continuous current that insulators are live parts.
11 causes melting of the fusible element,
with the fuse applied at the maximum
ambient temperature specified by the
12 manufacturer.
13
i max. rated maximum
interrupting current
14 i min. rated minimum
interrupting current
i hr.
r current causing element
15 melting in 1 hour
i any current melting i min.
element with no time
16 limit Backup
Current Limiting Type
17 General Purpose
Full Range
18
i i hr. i max.
19 Interrupting Current
20 Figure 9.0-1. Current Limiting Types Protection Range
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 005
Current Limiting Fuses

Table 9.0-5. CLE, HLE, HCL and CLS Fuses
i
Description Family
CLE HLE HCL CLS ii
General 2
Class General purpose General purpose General purpose Backup
Use Power Power Power Power
Maximum kV 2.7515.5 5.515.5 5.515.5 2.415.5
3
Maximum kA 63 63 63 50
Rating 10E1350A 10E450A 10E900E 2R44R 4
Mounting Clip Clip, bolt-on, hookeye Clip lock, bolt-on Clip, bolt-on, hookeye
Indicator Standard Standard Standard Standard
Approvals IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI UL, IEEE, ANSI
5
Applications
Feeder circuits 6
Motor starters
PTs and CTs
LV breakers 7
Substation service
Transformers 8
Capacitor banks
Fused switches
9
Table 9.0-6. CLPT, CX, CLT and DSL Fuses
Description Family
CLPT CX CLT DSL
10
11
12
General
Class General General General Back-up 13
Use Power/distribution Distribution Distribution Power
Maximum kV 5.538 4.315.5 2.7515 600V
Maximum kA 80 50 25 200
14
Rating 0.25E 10E 3.5C300C 5150 1005000
Mounting Clip Clip Stud bolt-on Bolt-on 15
Indicator Optional None None None
Approvals IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI IEEE, ANSI UL
Applications 16
Feeder circuits
Motor starters 17
PTs and CTs
LV breakers
Substation service 18
Transformers
Capacitor banks
19
Fused switches
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 006
i Expulsion Fuses Eatons expulsion fuses use boric acid Accessories

as the interrupting medium. Under a
fault condition, arc heat decomposes The following accessories are available
the boric acid into water vapor. The for expulsion fuses:
ii water vapor blast deionizes the arc Mountings
path preventing arc re-ignition after
Mountings include a base, porcelain
a natural current zero.
1 or glass polyester insulators, and live
Type RBA indoor expulsion fuses parts. They help enable the fuse to be
must be fitted with a discharge filter safely attached to the gear. Mountings
2 or condenser that moderates the can be either disconnect, non-disconnect
discharge exhaust. The discharge or dropout. Non-disconnect mountings
RBA filter limits the exhaust to a small are available in either bolt-on or clamp-
3 E-Rated Refillable and relatively inert amount of gas type arrangements. Fuses may be
Boric Acid and lowers the noise level without vertical or underhung.
affecting the fuse interrupting rating.
Live Parts
4 Steam discharge, that can effect the
Live parts attach the fuse to the
interrupting, is fully restricted by
the condenser. insulators and are considered part
5 of the mounting. All parts above the
Type RDB outdoor dropout fuses insulators are live parts.
include an ejector spring that forces
the arcing rod through the top of the End Fittings
6 fuse. The arcing rod strikes a latch on End fittings are metal parts that
the mounting that forces the fuse to attach to each end of the fuse at
swing outward through a 180 arc into the ferrules. They are used only on
7 the dropout position. disconnect fuses or when converting
a non-disconnect to a disconnect fuse.
Refill units can be field installed into
8 RBA and RDB expulsion fuses. Once
the operated unit has been removed,
the separately purchased unit can be
9 easily installed into the fuse holder.
RDB Type DBU fuse units are designed
E-Rated Refillable Outdoor
10 Dropout Boric Acid
for new and aftermarket utility
applications. End fittings are available,
in both indoor and outdoor versions,
11 as well as live parts and mountings.
Mufflers confine the arc within the
fuse and substantially reduce the noise
12 and exhaust when the fuse interrupts.
13
14
DBU
Dropout Boric Acidfor Use Indoors,
15 Inside Switchgear or Outdoors
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 007
Technical Ratings
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application
i
System Fuse Maximum Transformer kVA Fuse Family/Characteristics
Voltage Type Self-Cooled Forced Type Current Maximum Interrupting ii
Air Range kV Rating Amperes
(Symmetrical)
2400 Current 742 866 CLE 10250 5.5 63,000

1
limiting 1336 1560 CLE 300450 63,000
2228 2600 CLE-750 600750 40,000
4010 4676 CLE-750 10001350 31,500 2
742 866 CXN 60250 8.3 50,000
890 1039 CXN 300 50,000
Expulsion 600
1190
695
1385
RBA-200
RBA-400
10200
5400
8.3 19,000
37,500
3
2140 2500 RBA-800 450720 37,500
DBU-17 3200 14,000
17.1 4
4160 Current 1287 1502 CLE/HLE 10250 5.5 63,000
limiting 2317 2703 CLE/HLE 300450 63,000
3862 4506 CLE-750 600750 40,000
6952 8111 CLE-750 10001350 31,500
5
1286 1501 CXN 60250 8.3 50,000
1545 1802 CXN 300 50,000
Expulsion 1030 1200 RBA-200 10200 8.3 19,000 6
2055 2400 RBA-400 5400 37,500
3700 4320 RBA-800 450720 37,500
DBU-17 3200 17.1 14,000 7
4800 Current 1483 1731 CLE/HLE 10250 5.5 63,000
limiting 2671 3116 CLE/HLE 300450 63,000
4451 5193 CLE-750 600750 40,000 8
8013 9348 CLE-750 10001350 31,500
1483 1731 CXN 60250 8.3 50,000
1780 2077 CXN 300 50,000
9
Expulsion 1190 1385 RBA-200 10200 8.3 19,000
2375 2775 RBA-400 5400 37,500
4280 5000 RBA-800 480720 37,500
DBU-17 3200 14,000 10
6900 Current 1536 1792 CLE/HLE 10175 8.3 50,000
limiting 2987 3485 CLE 200350 50,000
2134 2490 CXN 60250 50,000 11
2560 2987 CXN 300 50,000
Expulsion 1705 2000 RBA-200 10200 8.3 19,000
3415 3985 RBA-400 5400 37,500 12
6150 7170 RBA-800 450720 37,500
DBU-17 3200 14,000
7200 Current 222 259 CLE/HLE 1025 8.3 50,000 13
limiting 890 1039 CLE/HLE 30100 50,000
1603 1870 CLE/HLE 125180 50,000
3117 3637 CLE 200350 50,000
2226 2598 CXN 60250 50,000 14
2672 3117 CXN 300 50,000
Expulsion 1785 2080 RBA-200 10200 8. 19,000
3565 4160 RBA-400 5400 37,500 15
6420 7500 RBA-800 450720 37,500
DBU-17 3200 17.1 14,000
Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (IF/IT) as listed. 16
For a 55C rise liquid-filled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications,
see Tables 9.0-9, 9.0-10 and 9.0-11.
The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge filter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of 17
expulsion gases is assured.
These applications are subject to Caution: Primary fuses must not be 18

modification when specific factors relied upon for clearing secondary
such as transformer characteristics, ground faults.
other protective devices, coordination 19
requirements and load variations may
indicate a different IF/IT ratio.
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 008
Technical Ratings
Technical Ratings (Continued)

i Table 9.0-7. Transformer Primary Fuse Application (Continued)
System Fuse Maximum Transformer kVA Fuse Family/Characteristics
ii Voltage Type Self-Cooled Forced Type Current Maximum Interrupting
Air Range kV Rating Amperes
(Symmetrical)
1 12,000 Current 371 432 CLE 10150 15.5 63,000
limiting 1484 1731 HLE 10125 63,000
2226 2597 CLE 175300 63,000
2 4452 5195 HLE 150250 63,000
1484 1731 CXN 45100 50,000
2597 3030 CXN 120175 50,000
3 Expulsion 2970
5945
3465
6930
RBA-200
RBA-400
10200
5400
15.5 14,400
29,400
RBA-800 450720 29,400
DBU-17 10200 14,000
4 13,200 Current 408 476 CLE 10150 15.5 63,000
limiting 1632 1905 HLE 10125 63,000
2449 2857 CLE 175300 63,000
5 4898 5715 HLE 150250 63,000
1632 1905 CXN 45100 50,000
2857 3333 CXN 120175 50,000
6 Expulsion 3265 3810 RBA-200 10200 15.5 14,400
6530 7620 RBA-400 5400 29,400
RBA-800 450720 29,400
DBU-17 7150 14,000
7 13,800 Current 426 497 CLE 10150 15.5 63,000
limiting 1707 1991 HLE 10125 63,000
2560 2987 CLE 175300 63,000
8 5121 5975 HLE 150250 63,000
1707 1991 CXN 45100 50,000
5855 3485 CXN 120175 50,000
9 Expulsion 3415 3985 RBA-200 10200 15.5 14,400
6830 7970 RBA-400 5400 29,400
3415 3985 RBA-800 450720 29,400
10 DBU-17 7150 17.1 14,000
23,000 Expulsion 5690 6635 RBA-200 10200 25.5 10,500
8535 9950 RBA-400 5300 21,000
5690 6635 RBA-800 450540 21,000
11 DBU-27 3200 27.0 12,500
34,500 Expulsion 8535 9950 RBA-200 10200 38.0 6,900
12800 14925 RBA-400 5300 16,800
12 8535 9950 RBA-800 450540 16,800
DBU-38 3200 10,000
Maximum transformer kVA ratings are based on ratios of maximum fuse current rating to transformer full load current (IF/IT) as listed.
13 For a 55C rise liquid-filled transformer, use the kVA rating for 65C rise (55C rating x 1.12). For suggested minimum fuse applications,
see Tables 9.0-9, 9.0-10 and 9.0-11.
The type RBA interrupting ratings shown are those of the discharge filter type, in which the noise is minimized and deionization of
14 expulsion gases is ensured.
These applications are subject to Caution: Primary fuses must not be

15 modification when specific factors relied upon for clearing secondary
such as transformer characteristics, ground faults.
other protective devices, coordination
16 requirements and load variations may
indicate a different IF/IT ratio.
17 Table 9.0-8. Selection of Minimum Primary Fuse for Transformer Protection

Instructions: Multiply the transformer primary full load current For self-cooled For forced air
(FLA) times the multiplier shown in the table to determine transformers transformers
18 suggested minimum size fuse. Use fan-cooled primary FLA
with forced air transformer multiplier. See Tables 9.0-9 thru 9.0-11
for suggested minimum fuse size.
Type CLE current limiting fuses All ratings 1.4 x FLA 1.2 x FLA
19 Type RBA, DBU expulsion type fuses of XFMR of XFMR
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 009
Technical Ratings
Interrupting Ratings of Fuses Step 3Construct the sequence For single line-to-ground fault;
Modern fuses are rated in amperes
networks using reactances and
XI = XI(+) + XI(-) + XI(0)
i
connect properly for the type of fault
rms symmetrical. They also have a under consideration and reduce to a
listed asymmetrical rms rating, which E ii
single equivalent reactance. I f = ----- 3
is 1.6 x the symmetrical rating. XI
Step 4Same as above except using
Refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.48 for fuse
interrupting duty guidelines.
resistances (omit if a symmetrically Step 6Select a fuse with a published 1
rated fuse is to be selected). interrupting rating exceeding the
calculated fault current.
Calculation of the fuse required Step 5Calculate the E/XI value,
where E is the prefault value of the Table 9.0-10 should be used where 2
interrupting rating:
voltage at the point of fault normally older asymmetrically rated fuses
Step 1Convert the fault from assumed 1.0 in pu. For three-phase are involved.
the utility to percent or per unit on faults E/XI is the fault current to be 3
a convenient voltage and kVA base. used in determining the required The voltage rating of power fuses
interrupting capability of the fuse. used on three-phase systems should
Step 2Collect the X and R data of all equal or exceed the maximum line- 4
the other circuit elements and convert Note: It is not necessary to calculate to-line voltage rating of the system.
to percent or per unit on a convenient a single phase-to-phase fault current. This Current limiting fuses for three-phase
kVA and voltage base same as that current is very nearly 3/2 x three-phase systems should normally be applied 5
used in Step 1. Use the substransient fault. The line-to-ground fault may exceed so that the fuse voltage rating is equal
X and R for all generators and motors. the three-phase fault for fuses located in
to or less than 1.41 x nominal system
generating stations with solidly grounded
neutral generators, or in delta-wye trans- voltage. However, the insulation 6
formers with the wye solidly grounded, levels on 2.4 kV systems normally
where the sum of the positive and negative allow 4.3 or 5.5 kV rated fuses to
sequence impedances on the high voltage be used. 7
side (delta) is smaller than the impedance of
the transformer.
Table 9.0-9. Suggested Minimum Current Limiting Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
8
System 2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4
Nominal kV 9
Fuses Maxi- 2.75 5.5 5.5 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
mum kV
Transformer Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse 10
kVA Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating Load Rating
Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E
Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
11
112.5 27.1 50E 15.6 25E 13.5 20E 9.0 15E 5.4 10E 4.9 10E 4.7 10E 4.5 10E
150 36.1 65E 20.8 30E 18.0 25E 12.0 20E 7.2 15E 6.6 10E 6.3 10E 6.0 10E
225 54.1 80E 31.2 50E 27.1 50E 18.0 25E 10.8 15E 9.8 15E 9.4 15E 9.0 15E 12
300 72.2 125E 41.6 80E 36.1 65E 24.1 40E 14.4 20E 13.1 20E 12.6 20E 12.0 20E
500 120.3 200E 69.4 125E 60.1 100E 40.1 65E 24.1 50E 21.9 30E 20.9 30E 20.0 30E
750 180.4 300E 104.1 150E 90.2 150E 60.1 100E 36.1 65E 32.8 65E 31.4 65E 30.1 65E 13
1000 240.6 350E 138.8 200E 120.3 175E 80.2 125E 48.1 80E 43.7 80E 41.8 80E 40.1 80E
1500 360.8 600E 208.2 300E 180.4 250E 120.3 175E 72.2 100E 65.6 100E 62.8 100E 60.1 100E
2000 481.1 750E 277.6 400E 240.6 350E 160.4 250E 96.2 150E 87.5 125E 83.7 150E 80.2 125E
2500 601.4 1100E 347.0 600E 300.7 450E 200.5 300E 120.3 200E 109.3 175E 104.6 175E 100.2 175E
14
3000 721.7 1100E 416.4 600E 360.8 600E 240.6 350E 144.3 250E 131.2 200E 125.5 200E 120.3 200E
3750 902.1 1350E 520.4 750E 451.1 750E 300.7 180.4 250E 164.0 250E 156.9 250E 150.4 250E
5000 1202.8 693.9 1100E 601.4 1100E 400.9 240.6 218.7 300E 209.2 300E 200.5 300E
15
7500 1804.2 1040.9 902.1 1350E 601.4 360.8 328.0 313.8 300.7
10,000 2405.6 1387.9 1202.8 801.9 481.1 437.4 418.4 400.9
16
Note: Fuse ratings represent the fuse that will withstand transformer inrush (12 x FLC for 0.1 second and 25 x FLC for 0.01 second) and be able
to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 010
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-10. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Transformer ApplicationsE-Rated Fuses
i System 2.4 4.16 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4
Nominal kV
Fuses Maxi- 2.75 5.5 5.5 8.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
ii mum kV
Transformer Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse
1 Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E
2 112.5
150
27.1
36.1
40E
50E
15.6
20.8
25E
30E
13.5
18.0
20E
25E
9.0
12.0
15E
20E
5.4
7.2
10E
10E
4.9
6.6
10E
10E
4.7
6.3
10E
10E
4.5
6.0
10E
10E
225 54.1 80E 31.2 50E 27.1 40E 18.0 25E 10.8 15E 9.8 15E 9.4 15E 9.0 15E
300 72.2 100E 41.6 65E 36.1 50E 24.1 40E 14.4 20E 13.1 20E 12.6 20E 12.0 20E
3 500 120.3 175E 69.4 100E 60.1 80E 40.1 65E 24.1 40E 21.9 30E 20.9 30E 20.0 30E
750 180.4 250E 104.1 150E 90.2 125E 60.1 80E 36.1 50E 32.8 50E 31.4 50E 30.1 50E
1000 240.6 400E 138.8 200E 120.3 175E 80.2 125E 48.1 65E 43.7 65E 41.8 65E 40.1 65E
4 1500 360.8 450E 208.2 300E 180.4 250E 120.3 175E 72.2 100E 65.6 100E 62.8 100E 60.1 80E
2000 481.1 720E 277.6 400E 240.6 350E 160.4 250E 96.2 150E 87.5 125E 83.7 125E 80.2 125E
2500 601.4 347.0 540E 300.7 400E 200.5 300E 120.3 175E 109.3 150E 104.6 150E 100.2 150E
5 3000 721.7 416.4 720E 360.8 540E 240.6 350E 144.3 200E 131.2 175E 125.5 175E 120.3 175E
3750 902.1 520.4 720E 451.1 720E 300.7 400E 180.4 250E 164.0 250E 156.9 250E 150.4 200E
5000 1202.8 693.9 601.4 400.9 540E 240.6 400E 218.7 300E 209.2 300E 200.5 300E
6 7500 1804.2 1040.9 902.1 601.4 360.8 540E 328.0 450E 313.8 450E 300.7 450E
10,000 2405.6 1387.9 1202.8 801.9 481.1 720E 437.4 720E 418.4 720E 400.9 540E
Two 300E-ampere fuse refill units in parallel with 10% derating.
7

8 to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
Table 9.0-11. Suggested Minimum RBA Expulsion Fuse Ratings for Self-Cooled 25.838 kV Transformer Applications
9 System 22.9 23.9 24.9 34.5
Nominal kV
Fuses 25.8 25.8 24.8
10 Maximum kV
Transformer kVA Full Load Fuse Rating Full Load Fuse Rating Full Load Fuse Rating Full Load Fuse Rating
Rating Self-Cooled Current Amps Amps E Current Amps Amps E Current Amps Amps E Current Amps Amps E
11 750 18.9 30E 18.1 25E 17.4 25E 12.6 20E
1000 25.2 40E 24.2 40E 23.2 40E 16.7 25E
1500 37.8 65E 36.2 50E 34.8 50E 25.1 40E
12 2000 50.4 80E 48.3 65E 46.4 65E 33.5 50E
2500 63.0 100E 60.4 100E 58.0 80E 41.8 65E
3000 75.6 125E 72.5 100E 69.6 100E 50.2 80E
13 3750 94.5 150E 90.6 125E 87.0 125E 62.8 100E
5000 126.1 175E 120.8 175E 115.9 175E 83.7 125E
7500 189.1 300E 181.2 250E 173.9 250E 125.5 175E
14 10,000 252.1 450E 241.6 450E 231.9 450E 167.3 250E
15 to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
16
17
18
19
20
21

September 2011
Sheet 09 011
Technical Ratings
Table 9.0-12. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
System 2.4 4.2 4.8 7.2 12.0 13.2 13.8 14.4 i
Nominal kV
Fuses Maxi- 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1 17.1
mum kV ii
Transformer Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse Full Fuse
Self-Cooled Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E Current Amps E 1
Three-Phase Transformers
112.5 27 40E 16 25E 14 20E 9 15E 5 10E 5 7E 5 7E 5 7E 2
150 36 50E 21 30E 18 25E 12 20E 7 10E 7 10E 6 10E 6 10E
225 54 80E 31 50E 27 40E 18 25E 11 15E 10 15E 9 15E 9 15E
300 72 100E 42 65E 36 50E 24 40E 14 20E 13 20E 13 20E 12 20E 3
500 120 200E 69 100E 60 100E 40 65E 24 40E 22 30E 21 30E 20 30E
750 180 104 150E 90 125E 60 100E 36 50E 33 50E 31 50E 30 50E
1000 241 139 200E 120 200E 80 125E 48 80E 44 65E 42 65E 40 65E 4
1500 361 208 180 120 200E 72 100E 66 100E 63 100E 60 65E
2000 481 278 241 160 96 150E 87 125E 84 125E 80 125E
2500 601 347 301 200 120 200E 109 150E 105 150E 100 150E 5
to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV). 6
Table 9.0-13. Suggested Minimum DBU Expulsion Fuse Current Ratings for Self-Cooled 2.415.5 kV Power Transformer Applications
System 22.9 23.9 24.9 34.5 7
Nominal kV
Fuses Maxi- 27.0 27.0 27.0 38.0
mum kV 8
Transformer Full Load Fuse Rating Full Load Fuse Rating Full Load Fuse Rating Full Load Fuse Rating
kVA Rating Current Amps Amps E Current Amps Amps E Current Amps Amps E Current Amps Amps E
Self-Cooled 9
Three-Phase Transformers
750 19 30E 18 25E 17 25E 13 20E
1000 25 40E 24 40E 23 40E 17 25E 10
1500 38 65E 36 50E 34 50E 25 40E
2000 50 80E 48 80E 46 65E 33 50E
2500 63 100E 60 100E 58 80E 42 65E 11
3750 95 150E 91 150E 87 125E 63 100E
to handle temporary overloads (133% of FLC, 150% for 15.5 kV).
12
Table 9.0-14. Type DBU Expulsion Fuses, Boric Acid, Indoor/Outdoor
13
Maximum Current Rating Interrupting Rating
Design kV Amperes rms (kA Symmetrical)
17.1 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K, 14 14
5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E,
15SE, 20SE, 25SE, 30SE, 40SE, 50SE, 65SE, 80SE, 100SE, 125SE, 150SE, 175SE, 200SE
27 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K, 12.5 15
5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E,
38 3K, 6K, 8K, 10K, 12K, 15K, 20K, 25K, 30K, 40K, 50K, 65K, 80K, 100K, 140K, 200K, 10outdoor 16
5E, 7E, 10E, 13E, 15E, 20E, 25E, 30E, 40E, 50E, 65E, 80E, 100E, 125E, 150E, 175E, 200E, 8.5indoor with muffler
Note: Used on overhead distribution transformers, substation equipment, industrial transformer installations, and radial distribution circuits.
17
18
19
20
For additional information, see:
Volume 4, CA08100005E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab 26
21

Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage 10.0-1
November 2015
Sheet 10 001
Medium Voltage
Motor Control (AMPGARD) Contents
Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage
Motor Starters
i
ii
General Description
Application and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1
Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-1 1
Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Isolating Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-2
400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorBolt-in, Type SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-3
400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum ContactorStab-in, Type SL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-4
2
Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-4
Isolated Low Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-5 3
Bus and Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-6
Reduced Voltage StartersMechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-7
Reduced Voltage StartersSolid-State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-8 4
Synchronous Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-11
Incoming Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-12
Potential Transformers and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-12 5
Type LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-12
Main Breaker AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-13
Technical Data
6
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-15
LBS Loadbreak Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-18 7
Type SL, 400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-18
Type SL, 800 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-19
Type SL, 300 A, 15 kV Vacuum Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-20 8
Main Breaker Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-21
Contactor-Fuse Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-22
Protection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-23 9
Starter Fuse Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-24
Layout Dimensions 10
Full Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-25
Primary Reactor, Reduced Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-28
Autotransformer, Reduced Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-30 11
Synchronous Brush Type Mark VI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-31
Solid-State Reduced Voltage AMPGARD MV4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-33
Incoming Line Switch/PT Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-36 12
Tie Switch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-38
Arc-Resistant Starter Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-39
Main Breaker AMPGARD Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-40
13
AMPGARD XP3
General Description 14
Enhanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-43
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-44 15
Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1-45
Adjustable Frequency Drives
General Description 16
Personnel Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-4
Modular Roll-in/Roll-out Stab-in Three-Phase Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-5
17
Type SL Vacuum Contactor Stab-in with Wheels, Fuses,
and Line and Load Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-6 18
Current Limiting Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-6
Isolated Low Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-6
Pre-Charge Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-7 19
Synchronous Transfer Control with SC9000 EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-8
Frame Size, Rating and Layout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-9
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-30 20
Typical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2-33
21

10.0-2 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage
November 2015
Sheet 10 002
Specifications
i See Eatons Product Specification Guide, available on CD or on the Web.
CSI Format: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1995 2010
AMPGARD Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349 Section 26 18 39
ii AMPGARD Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349AR Section
AMPGARD XP3 Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349XP3 Section
1 SC 9000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 16349B Section 26 18 39.13
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

November 2015 Motor Starters
Sheet 10 003
General Description
AMPGARD Motor The low voltage compartment Refer to Table 10.1-5 on Page 10.1-18 for
i
is painted white as standard to specific ratings for each enclosure type.
Control Assembly maximize serviceability.
Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
Simplicity of design: Component-
When specified, AMPGARD is available
ii
to-component design eliminates half
of the electrical connections. in special arc-resistant construction.
AMPGARD AR is available with a 50 kA,
Time-proven contactor technology: 0.5 sec rating. The design has been
1
Three vacuum contactor ratings are tested and verified to meet the
used, 400 A and 800 A 7.2 kV and 300 A requirements of IEEE C37.20.7
15 kV. 400 A 7.2 kV contactors are for Type 2B construction. Type 2B
2
available as stab-in or bolt-in design. construction is defined as arc-resistant
800 A 7.2 kV and 300 A 15 kV contactors at front, back and sides of the enclosure
are available as stab-in design only. with the low voltage compartment door
3
open. Most types of 400 A and 800 A
High degree of isolation: Main bus is
starters, as well as 24-inch (610 mm) 4
located in separate compartment on
wide incoming cable sections are
AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly top of lineup. Vertical bus is barriered in
available in arc-resistant construction.
rear of starter. Load cables are isolated
A common plenum design to close 5
General Description from adjacent starter in two-high
couple to Eaton arc-resistant switch-
sections. A vertical low voltage wireway
Eatons AMPGARD medium voltage is provided for isolation of customer
gear is also available. Consult Eaton
metal-enclosed control family control wiring. The low voltage control
for ratings on this design. Main Breaker
AMPGARD, LBS load break switches
6
provides control and protection compartment is isolated from medium
of medium voltage motors and and 15 kV starters are not available in
voltage by grounded steel barriers.
equipment rated 230013,800 V arc-resistant construction. Due to the 7
nominal/15,000 V maximum. Starter catalog types are available for specific nature of arc-resistant testing,
the following applications: no modifications may be made to
Application Description the enclosure while maintaining the 8
Squirrel cage, full voltage arc-resistant rating. Consult Eaton for
AMPGARD control has a complete (reversing and non-reversing) more details.
metal-enclosed offering:
Squirrel cage, primary reactor 9
Full and reduced voltage starting of Squirrel cage, autotransformer Personnel Safety Features
medium voltage motors up to 8000 hp Reduced voltage solid-state One of the most important consider-
Main breaker metal-enclosed Synchronous full voltage ations in designing the AMPGARD 10
switchgear, a smaller footprint, starter was personnel safety. The
Synchronous primary reactor
single integrated assembly direct result is an extensive system of
coupled to the AMPGARD control Synchronous auto-transformer interlocks and other safety features. 11
(reversing and non-reversing)
Integral LBS loadbreak switches
available as main, tie or feeder. Two-speed, two winding Interlocks
The LBS can be supplied as fused Two-speed, one winding Interlocking on AMPGARD starters 12
or un-fused includes:
Adjustable frequency drives Enclosures
(SC 9000) up to 4160 V, 6000 hp AMPGARD products are available in
Isolating switch mechanism locks 13
the medium voltage door closed
NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures when the switch is in the ON position
Features, Benefits and Functions as standard. NEMA 12 (dust tight), Provision for optional key interlocks 14
Personnel safety: Positive mechanical NEMA 3R (outdoor) and arc-resistant
When door is open, interlock prevents
isolating switch with visible disconnect enclosures are available options for
operating handle from being moved
completely grounds and isolates the most products. Contact Eaton for
inadvertently to ON position 15
starter from the line connectors with exceptions. Enclosure type affects the
maximum continuous current rating When contactor is energized, isolating
a mechanically driven isolating shutter, switch cannot be opened or closed
leaving no exposed high voltage. of the starters in the enclosure. 16
Medium voltage door is mechanically
locked closed with interlocking mecha-
nism; low voltage section has separate 17
door and is segregated from the
medium voltage section.
18
Ease of installation: Current limiting
fuses, contactor assembly and
isolating switch assembly are easily 19
removed from the enclosure; line
and load terminals are completely
accessible from the front. 20
Ease of maintenance: All components
are front accessible, facilitating routine
inspection and/or parts replacement.
AMPGARD Main Breaker SC 9000 4160 V, 2500 hp AFD MV4S 2-High FVNR 21
RVSS

10.1-2 Motor Control (AMPGARD)Medium Voltage
Motor Starters November 2015
Sheet 10 004
General Description
i
Other Safety Features Mechanical Non-Loadbreak Features
AMPGARD starters include many
additional features designed to
Isolating Switch A positive mechanical interlock
between the isolating switch handle
protect operating personnel. These
ii features include:
Isolation Switch Auxiliary Contacts mechanism and contactor prevents the
isolating switch from being opened
Provision for a padlock on when the contactor is closed or from
1 the isolating switch handle in being closed if the contactor
OFF position is closed.
Shutter barrier between line An operating lever in the isolating
2 terminals and isolation switch switch handle mechanism is designed
stabs is mechanically driven to shear off if the operator uses
Distinctive marking on switch too much force in trying to open the
3 assembly appears when shutter non-loadbreak isolating switch when
barrier is in position and starter is the contactor is closed. This feature
completely isolated from the line ensures that the operator cannot open
4 the switch with the main contactor
Grounding clips provide a positive
grounding of the starter and main closed, even if excessive force is
Optional Blown Fuse Switch Operating
used on the operating handle.
5 fuses when the isolating switch Indicator Contacts Arm
is opened Control Plug To operate the isolating switch, the
High and low voltage circuits are JMT-400/800 A Isolation Switch operating handle is moved through
6 compartmentalized and isolated Front View a 180 vertical swing from the ON to
from each other the OFF position. In the ON position,
The drawout isolation switch is a plunger on the back of the handle
7 easily removed by loosening two
Line Side Connections
housing extends through a bracket on
bolts in the back of the switch. the rear of the starter high voltage
The shutter remains in place door, preventing the door from being
8 when the switch is withdrawn opened with the switch closed. When
the high voltage door is open, a door
A remote operator for the starter interlock prevents the handle from
9 isolation switch is an available option. being inadvertently returned to the
The AMPGARD Remote Operator (ARO) ON position.
enables users to open or close the
10 switch through the use of a pushbutton When the operating handle is moved
station operated up to 30 feet away from ON to OFF, copper stabs are
from the starter. Users can mount the withdrawn from incoming line fingers.
11 ARO on the front of the starter, plug it As the stabs withdraw, they are
into any available 120 Vac source, then Line Side Access Panel
visible above the top of the fuses
easily operate the isolation switch from (Removable From Front) when viewed from the front, and
12 outside the starter arc flash boundary. JMT-400/800 A Isolation Switch
simultaneously grounded. As the
Rear View fingers are withdrawn, a spring-driven
isolating shutter moves across the
13 Isolation Switch back barrier to prevent front access
to the line connections. As the
Eatons Type JMT-4/8 and JMT-15 are shutter slides into position, distinctive
14 each a drawout, lightweight, three-pole, markings appear on the back barrier,
manually operated isolating switch making it easier to check the position
mounted in the top of the starter enclo- of the shutter.
15 sure. They may be easily removed
by loosening two bolts in the rear of
the switch. The JMT-4 is rated 400 A
16 continuous while the JMT-8 is rated
720 A continuous. The JMT-15 is rated
300 A continuous at 15 kV. All isolation
17 switches have a mechanical life rating
of 10,000 operations.
The component-to-component circuitry
18 concept includes the mountings for
the current limiting fuses as part of
the isolating switch.
19
20 AMPGARD Remote Operator Switch Handle Switch Handle

Closed Open
21

November 2015 Motor Starters
Sheet 10 005
General Description
400 A, 7.2 kV Vacuum Design Maintenance

i
Eaton Vacuum Contactors are highly Reduced maintenance is one of the
Contactor, Type SL versatile, low-chop contactors that have outstanding features of Eatons
been designed to meet all applicable Vacuum Contactor line. The special
NEMA standards and are UL recog- contact material in the vacuum ii
nized components. The contactors interrupters provides long life even
accommodate mechanical interlocks under severe operating conditions.
that function with the starter isolation The main coils operate with a very 1
switch and with other contactors. low temperature rise to maximize
These interlocks provide unmatched insulation life. Steel bearings on
safety and service protection. the main shaft provide long, trouble- 2
free operation.
The contactors consist of a molded
frame with moving armature, magnet An included simple go/no-go gauge is 3
and vacuum interrupters. The contactor used for checking contact wear. Wear
is easily positioned into the starter, and can be checked without removing the
vacuum interrupters provide long life contactor from the starter. The vacuum 4
with a minimal maintenance program. contactor at 60 lb is much lighter than
400 A Bolt-in Contactor The SL operating coils are energized previous generation airbreak or vacuum
7200 Volt Maximum by a control board that provides a contactors, which allows for easier 5
pulse-width-modulated DC output. insertion and removal from the
General Description Control voltages and contactor dropout starter structure.
Eatons Type SL Vacuum Contactors
times are programmed using a DIP 6
switch located on the control board.
were designed and engineered
The control board is mounted in a
specifically for use in AMPGARD
starters. 7.2 kV SL 400 A Vacuum
protected cavity in the molded 7
contactor frame to prevent inadvertent
Contactors are self-supporting,
access to the voltage and dropout
compact, drawout, three-pole, DC
DIP switch. Four auxiliary contacts

Consulting Aplication Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Consulting Aplication Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

16th Edition

Electrical Sector December 2015

Consulting Application Guide

2011 Eaton Corporation

Technical Lighting Control Systems

11 BuswayMedium Voltage 33 Uninterruptible Power Supplies

Power Surge Protection (SPD) &

Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

ANSI Voltage Classifications

Terms and Conditions

Technical and Descriptive Publications

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Copyright 2015 Eaton, All Rights Reserved

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Welcome New Features of the Consulting i

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

i Updated Information Eaton

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

This page intentionally left blank.

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

i Goals of System Design 2. Minimum Initial Investment: 4. Maximum Flexibility and

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

4800 12000Y/6930 15.5 110 15.0 60 95 110

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Table 1.1-7. Three-Phase Transformer Winding Connections

Angular Displacement (Degrees): 0 21

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

10 1. Simple Radial System 600V Class

19 In those cases where the utility owns

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

Loop Feeder Loop Feeder 52 52 52 52 Primary Feeder Breaker

16 NO Typical Secondary Unit

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

This means limited cable space espe-

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

together by a switchgear or ring bus

control the status of the protector

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

The use of spot network systems 7. Medium Voltage Distribution

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

9 Utility #1 Utility #2 Utility #3

10 Figure 1.1-16. Two-Source Utility with

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Non-Essential Loads Non-Essential Loads 18

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Normal Bus Emergency Bus 11

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants

i Utility Fire-Rated Wall

7 Equipment Life Safety Critical Load Shed/

EP1 EP2 EPX Typical

For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants CA08104001E

Generators and a supply-side bonding jumper to Types of Generators

CA08104001E For more information, visit: www.eaton.com/consultants